WELLNESS CENTER RENOVATIONS - Aliano Brothers Inc
October 30, 2017 | Author: Anonymous | Category: N/A
Short Description
WELLNESS CENTER RENOVATIONS AT WINANS HALL ROWAN UNIVERSITY GLASSBORO, NEW JERSEY 033000 Cast-In-Place Concrete 15 0333&...
Description
WELLNESS CENTER RENOVATIONS WINANS HALL PROJECT MANUAL
PROJECT NO. 70348 Prepared By:
Lammey & Giorgio, P.A. Architecture • Planning • Project Management 215 Highland Avenue • Haddon Township, NJ 08108 Telephone 856.833.0010 • Facsimile 856.833.0470 William P. Lammey • NJ C6793 Anthony R. Giorgio • NJ O7626 L&G Project #: 12236
1 OCTOBER 2012 BID SUBMISSION ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
Table of Contents TC-1
WELLNESS CENTER RENOVATIONS AT WINANS HALL ROWAN UNIVERSITY GLASSBORO, NEW JERSEY ROWAN NO: 70348 L&G NO: 12236 DIV. NO. 0
DESCRIPTION SEC. NO.
NO. OF PAGES
BIDDING AND CONTRACT REQUIREMENTS 002000 Instructions to Bidders
1 & Insert
006000 Contract Forms and General Conditions
1
1
General Conditions
Insert
Contractor’s Contract
Insert
Consent of Surety ( AIA C707 )
Insert
Certification for Payment
Insert
Lien Release form
Insert
Allowance Authorization Form
Insert
Allowance Charge Request
Insert
Request for Information Form
Insert
Change Order Request & Change Order Forms
Insert
Daily Job Report
Insert
Tax Exempt Letter
Insert
Hourly Labor Rate Breakdown
Insert
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 011000 Summary of Work
4
011400 Work Restrictions
3
012100 Allowances
3
012300 Alternates
2
012500 Contract Modification Procedures
6
TABLE OF CONTENTS
TC - 1
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
DIV. NO.
DESCRIPTION SEC. NO.
NO. OF PAGES
012900 Payment Procedures
6
013100 Coordination
3
013200 Construction Progress Documentation
7
013300 Submittal Procedures
2
Table of Contents TC-1
18
014000 Quality Control Requirements
5
014100 Testing Laboratory Services
4
014200 Reference Standards and Definitions
18
015000 Construction Facilities and Temporary Controls
11
017000 Field Engineering
3
017700 Contract Closeout
10
017820 Operation and Maintenance Data
9
018200 Demonstration and Training
6
018201 HVAC and Electrical Commissioning
2
EXISTING CONDITIONS 024119 Selective Structure Demolition
3
4
5
CONCRETE – NOT USED 033000 Cast-In-Place Concrete
15
033300 Architectural Concrete
11
MASONRY 040120 Maintenance of Unit Masonry
12
042200 Concrete Unit Masonry 5
2
METALS 051200 Structural Steel Framing
11
053100 Steel Decking
4
054000 Cold-Formed Metal Framing
8
TABLE OF CONTENTS
TC - 2
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
DIV. NO.
DESCRIPTION SEC. NO. 055000 Metal Fabrications
6
7
8
Table of Contents TC-1
NO. OF PAGES 11
055100 Metal Stairs
6
055213 Pipe and Tube Railings
7
WOOD, PLASTICS, & COMPOSITES 061000 Rough Carpentry
2
064023 Interior Architectural Woodwork
4
THERMAL & MOISTURE PROTECTION 071113 Bituminous Dampproofing
3
072100 Thermal Insulation
5
074113 Metal Preformed Roofing and Wall Panels
18
076200 Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim
11
077200 Roof Accessories
6
078413 Penetration Firestopping
4
079200 Joint Sealants
9
OPENINGS 081113 Hollow Metal Doors & Frames
8
081416 Flush Wood Doors
5
083113 Access Doors and Frames
4
083313 Coiling Counter Doors
5
083613 Sectional Overhead Doors
8
084113 Aluminum Framed Entrances & Storefronts
3
084413 Glazed Aluminum Curtain Wall
10
085113 Aluminum Windows 087100 Door Hardware
5 33
088000 Glazing 9
4
FINISHES
TABLE OF CONTENTS
TC - 3
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
DIV. NO.
10
11
DESCRIPTION SEC. NO.
Table of Contents TC-1
NO. OF PAGES
092216 Non-Structural Metal Framing
2
092900 Gypsum Board
2
093000 Tiling
3
095123 Acoustical Tile Ceilings
3
095400 Specialty Ceilings
4
096229 Cork Flooring
4
096513 Resilient Base & Accessories
5
096516 Resilient Sheet Flooring
7
096519 Resilient Tile Flooring
4
096700 Special Trowel Applied Epoxy Floor Systems
5
097200 Wall Coverings
4
096813 Tile Carpeting
5
098413 Sound Absorbing Wall Units
4
099113 Exterior Painting
8
099123 Interior Painting
8
SPECIALTIES 101100 Visual Display Surfaces
6
101400 Signage
5
102113 Toilet Compartments
4
102219 Single Glazed Unitized Partitions
4
102226 Operable Partitions
4
102800 Toilet and Bath Accessories
6
104413 Fire Extinguishers
3
105300 Protective Covers
4
EQUIPMENT 113100 Residential Appliances
3
115213 Projectors, TV’s, & Projection Screens
2
TABLE OF CONTENTS
TC - 4
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
DIV. NO.
Table of Contents TC-1
DESCRIPTION SEC. NO.
12
NO. OF PAGES
FURNISHINGS 122113 Horizontal Louver Blinds
5
122413 Roller Window Shades
4
123530 Cabinets
4
124813 Floor Mats and Frames
4
129300 Site Furnishings
2
14
CONVEYING EQUIPMENT 144200 Vertical Wheelchair & Loading Lifts
22
PLUMBING 220500 Basic Plumbing Materials and Methods
23
7
11
220519 Meters and Gages
4
220520 Valves
7
220525 Hangers and Supports
6
220553 Plumbing Identification
4
220720 Plumbing Insulation
8
22111
9
Plumbing Piping
221123 Domestic Water Pumps
4
223300 Electric, Domestic Water Heaters
5
224000 Plumbing Fixtures
8
224100 Plumbing Specialties
9
224700 Drinking Fountains and Water Coolers
5
HEATING, VENTILATING, AND AIR-CONDITIONING (HVAC) 230500 Basic HVAC Materials and Methods
12
230513 Common Motor Requirements for HVAC Equipment
3
230519 Meters and Gages
6
230523 Valves
7
230525 Hangers and Supports
5
TABLE OF CONTENTS
TC - 5
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
DIV. NO.
DESCRIPTION SEC. NO.
Table of Contents TC-1
NO. OF PAGES
230553 HVAC Identification 230593 Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for HVAC
18
230720 HVAC Insulation
12
230900 Automatic Temperature Controls
26
232111 Hydronic Piping
10
232123 Hydronic Pumps
5
232213 Steam and Condensate Piping
10
232223 Steam Condensate Pumps
4
232500 HVAC Water Treatment
5
233113 Metal Ductwork
10
233300 Duct Accessories
6
233423 HVAC Power Ventilators
7
233600 Air Terminal Units
6
233713 Air Outlets and Inlets
4
235700 Heat Exchanges for HVAC
5
237313 Modular Indoor Central-Station Air-Handling Units
26
5
10
238219 Fan Coil Units
5
238236 Finned-Tube Radiation Heaters
4
238239 Cabinet Unit Heaters
5
ELECTRICAL 260500 Basic Electrical Requirements
5
260501 Common Work Results for Electrical
4
260519 Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables
7
260526 Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems
5
260529 Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems
5
260533 Raceway and Boxes for Electrical Systems
10
260543 Underground Ducts and Raceways for Electrical Systems
4
260553 Identification for Electrical Systems
9
TABLE OF CONTENTS
TC - 6
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
DIV. NO.
DESCRIPTION SEC. NO.
NO. OF PAGES
262413 Switchboards
11
262416 Panelboards
9
262726 Wiring Devices
8
262816 Enclosed Switches and Circuit Breakers
6
262913 Enclosed Controllers
9
262923 Variable Frequency Motor Controller
28
Table of Contents TC-1
14
265100 Interior Lighting
8
265600 Exterior Lighting
5
ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY 283100 Fire Detection and Alarm
31
4
EARTH WORK 310100 Project Survey and Layout
3
311000 Site Clearing
5
312000 Earth Moving
12
312319 Dewatering 32
3
EXTERIOR IMPROVEMENTS 321216 Asphalt Paving
6
321313 Concrete Paving
9
321400 Unit Paving
6
329200 Turf and Grasses
6
END OF TABLE OF CONTENTS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
TC - 7
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS SECTION 002000
SECTION 002000 - INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS A.
B.
The Instructions to Bidders and associated bid forms prepared by Rowan University are provided herein. The Bidder shall be responsible for reviewing the provisions contained therein and request clarification at the mandatory pre-bid conference. The University reserves the right to amend the Instructions to Bidders as required.
PART 2 - (Not Used) PART 3 - (Not Used)
END OF SECTION 002000
INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS
002000 - 1
ROWAN UNIVERSITY INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS I. INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS 1B1.
BID PROPOSALS 1B1.1
Sealed proposals for the work described herein must be received and time-stamped at the University. The closing date and time for bids will be stated in the Advertisement and Invitation to Bid. Bidders are cautioned that reliance of the U. S. Mail for timely delivery of proposals is at the bidder's risk. Failure by the contractor to have sealed proposals reach the University by the prescribed time will result in a return of the submission unopened and unread.
1B1.2
This contract will be bid as a single prime contract only. Bids for less than all of the project as described herein will be deemed nonconforming.
1B1.3
The Instructions to Bidders, Bid forms, Contract forms, plans and specifications, forms of Bid Bond, Agreement of Surety, Performance Bonds, Payment Bonds and other contract documents may be examined at the University. Contractors may obtain contract documents at the University’s Purchasing Website. The University reserves the right to deny award to any bidder who is not clearly responsible based upon experience, past performance and financial capability to perform the work required hereunder or other material factors.
1B1.4
Set(s) of contract documents will be available for inspection by interested parties free of change in Rowan University’s Purchasing Department.
1B1.5
Bid proposals based upon the plans, specifications, general, special and supplementary conditions, clarifications and/or addenda shall be deemed as having been made by the contractor will full knowledge of all project conditions. Bidders are required to visit the site prior to submitting proposals for the work herein described and to have thoroughly examined the conditions under which the contract is to be executed including those reasonably observable conditions of the premises which would hinder, delay or otherwise affect the performance of the contractor required under the terms of the contract. The University will not allow claims for additional costs as a result of the contractor's failure to become aware of the reasonably observable conditions affecting his/her required performance. The bidder is required to make appropriate allowances in the preparation of his/her bid for the accommodation of such conditions. Bidders must warrant in the bid documents that the bidder is familiar with conditions existing at the site at the time the bid is submitted. Page 1 of 9
ROWAN UNIVERSITY INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS 1B1.6
Bid proposals shall be submitted on the standard form provided by the University, enclosed in a sealed envelope issued by Rowan University. The name and address of the bidder must be indicated on the envelope as well as indication of the project, project location and other appropriate identification.
1B1.7
All amounts in the bid documents shall be stated in numerical figures only.
1B1.8
The bidder must include the following items in the bid envelope. (a) the proposal signed by bidder (b) the executed Affidavit of Non-Collusion (c) bid security as further described in paragraph 1B6 (d) the completed set of bid forms found after the table of contents (e) the names and license numbers of and evidence of performance security form of all sub-contractors to whom the bidder will sub-contract any of the work on the project for the following: (1) the plumbing and gas fitting work; (2) the heating equipment;
and
ventilating
systems
and
(3) the electrical work including any electrical power plants; (4) the structural and ornamental iron work; and (5) all other work and materials required for the completion of the project. 1B1.9
Proposals shall remain open for acceptance and may not be withdrawn for a period of sixty (60) days after the bid opening date.
1B1.10
Proposals not submitted and filed in accordance with instructions contained herein and in the Advertisement will be considered informal and rejected as non-responsive.
Page 2 of 9
ROWAN UNIVERSITY INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS IB2.
1B3.
BID MODIFICATION 1B2.1
A bidder may modify his/her bid proposal by telegram or letter at any time prior to the scheduled closing time for receipt of bids provided such communication is received by the University prior to such closing time. A written confirmation of any telegraphic modification signed by the bidder must have been mailed and time-stamped by the post office prior to specified closing time. Such confirmation shall be accompanied by a newly executed Affidavit of Non-Collusion.
1B2.2
Telegraphic communications shall not reveal the basic bid price but only shall provide the amount to be added, subtracted or modified so that the final price(s) or term(s) will not be revealed until the sealed proposal is opened. If written confirmation of the telegraphic modification is not received within two (2) working days after the scheduled closing time, no consideration will be given to the telegraphic modification.
1B2.3
Bids may be withdrawn upon written request received from the bidder prior to the time fixed for the bid opening. Right for withdrawal of a bid is lost after a bid has been opened. If any error has been made in the bid amount, request for relief from the bid may be made in writing to the University. The written request shall be signed by an authorized corporate officer. A determination of whether the bidder will be released shall be at the sole discretion of the University who shall issue his/her finding(s) within five (5) days of his/her receipt of all pertinent information relating to such request for relief.
CONSIDERATION OF BIDS 1B3.1
Award of Contract(s) or Rejection of Bid(s): (a) The contract will be awarded to the lowest responsible bidder whose bid, conforming to the Bidding Documents, will be most advantageous to the University. The award will be made or the bid(s) rejected within sixty (60) days from the date of the opening of the bids. (b) All bid deposits of unsuccessful bidders, except the lowest three (3) bidders, will be returned or refunded within five (5) days of the bid opening. (c) The bid security deposits of the successful bidder and the next two (2) lowest bidders will be retained by the University until the execution and delivery of a formal contract and performance and payment bonds by the low bidder. At such time, bid deposits of the other two (2) low bidders will Page 3 of 9
ROWAN UNIVERSITY INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS be returned. (d) The University reserves the right to award the contract on the basis of the single bid for the entire work on or the basis of a separate bid and alternate, or any combination of separate bids and alternates, which the University deems best serves the interest of the University. (e) The University reserves the right to waive, in his/her sole discretion, any bid requirements when such waiver is in the best interests of the University and where such waiver is permitted by law. (f)
1B3.2
1B4.
The University reserves the right to reject any and all bids when such rejection is in the best interests of the University. The University may also reject the bid of any bidder who, in its judgement, is not responsible or capable of performing the contract based on financial capability, past performance or experience. A bidder whose bid is so rejected may request a hearing before the University by filing a written notice within seven (7) days of the transmittal of the rejection.
The bidder to whom the contract is awarded shall execute and deliver the requisite contract documents including payment and performance bonds within the time specified. Upon his/her failure or refusal to comply in the manner and within the time specified, the University may either award the contract to the next low, responsible bidder or readvertise for new proposals. In either case, the University may hold the defaulting bidder and his/her surety liable for the difference between the applicable sums quoted by the defaulting bidder and that sum which the University may be obligated to pay to the contractor who undertakes to perform and complete the work of the defaulting bidder.
AWARDS 1B4.1
In executing a contract, the successful bidder agrees to perform his/her work in a good and workmanlike manner and to complete portions of the work by established milestone dates and all work within the number of calendar days specified in his/her contract.
1B4.2
The successful bidder will be notified of the time and place for the signing of the contract. Key requirements in the conduct of the contract including, but not limited to, project milestones, the number of days for performance of the contract, manner and schedule of payments, site logistics and other administrative details will be Page 4 of 9
ROWAN UNIVERSITY INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS reviewed at the award meeting. The time and place of the first job meeting will also be announced.
1B5.
1B4.3
The contract shall be awarded to the lowest responsible bidder whose bid, conforming to the Bidding Documents, will be the most advantageous to the University. Alternatives will be accepted or rejected as selected by the University. Add alternates and deduct alternates will be specified separately. The University may choose from the add and deduct alternates without priority between the two groups. The University may accept alternates out of sequence provided it states its reasons for so doing.
1B4.4
Should submission of unit prices be required for specific items of work in bid proposals, they will be considered in the evaluation of bids.
QUALIFICATION OF BIDDERS 1B5.1
If the successful bidder is a corporation not organized under the laws of the State of New Jersey, or is not authorized to do business in this state, the award of the contract shall be conditioned upon the prompt filing by the said corporation of a certificate to do business in this state and shall comply with the laws of this state in that regard. This filing must be made within the Department of State. No award of contract will be made until the Department of State confirms this authorization.
1B5.2
The University requires that each contractor shall perform a minimum of thirty-five percent (35%) of the contract work by his/her own forces. The University, however, may, in its sole discretion, reduce this percentage depending upon the nature and circumstances in any particular case if he/she determines that to do so would be in the best interests of the University provided that a written request is submitted to him/her with the original bid proposal.
1B5.3
The University reserves the right to reject a bidder at any time prior to the signing of a contract if information or data is obtain which, in the opinion of the University, adversely affects the responsibility and/or the capability of the bidder to undertake and to complete the work regardless of the bidder's previous qualification or classification. The University may conduct any investigation as it deems necessary to determine the bidder's responsibility and capacity and the bidder shall furnish all information and data for this purpose as the University may request.
1B5.4
The bidder shall include a list of the sub-contractors to whom the bidder will sub-contract work with his/her bid for: Page 5 of 9
ROWAN UNIVERSITY INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS (a) the plumbing and gas fitting work; (b) the heating and ventilating systems and equipment; (c) the electrical work including any electrical power plants; (d) the structural and ornamental iron work; and (e) special categories as may be required. 1B6.
1B7.
DEPOSIT AND BID BOND 1B6.1
Each proposal shall be accompanied by a bid bond or by a certified or cashier's check made payable to the University equal to ten percent (10%) of the amount of the proposal as evidence of good faith which guarantees that, if the proposal submitted by the bidder is accepted, the bidder will enter into the contract and furnish the required contract documents and surety bonds. If a bid bond is submitted, it shall also provide that the surety issuing the bid bond be bound to issue the required payment and performance bonds if the bidder is awarded the contract. If the bidder whose proposal is accepted is unable to provide the performance and payment bonds or fails to execute a contract, then such bidder and the bid bond surety shall be obligated to pay to the University the difference between the amount of the bid and the amount which the University contracts to pay another party to perform the work. The University reserves the right to retain any certified or cashier's check deposited hereunder as reimbursement for the difference as aforesaid and shall return any nonrequired balance to the bidder. Should there be a deficiency in the excess of the bid deposit, the bidder and the surety shall pay the entire amount of the University's difference in cost upon demand. Nothing contained herein shall be construed as reason of a default or breach by the contractor. Certified or cashier's checks or bonds submitted by the unsuccessful bidders will be returned after the contract has been executed. Contractors electing to furnish a bid bond must include consent of surety, both in form acceptable to the University.
1B6.2
Attorneys-in-fact who sign bid bonds or contract bonds must file a certified power of attorney with the University indicating the effective date of that power.
PERFORMANCE AND PAYMENT BONDS 1B7.1
Within five (5) calendar days, the successful bidder shall furnish a performance bond in statutory form in an amount equal to one Page 6 of 9
ROWAN UNIVERSITY INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS hundred percent (100%) of the total contract price as security for the faithful performance of this contract and also a payment bond in statutory form in an amount equal to one hundred percent (100%) of the contract price as security for the payment of all persons and firms performing labor and furnishing materials in connection with this contract. The performance and payment bond may be in one or in separate instruments in accordance with the law. No contract shall be executed unless and until each bond is submitted to and approved by the University and the surety must be presently authorized to do business in the State of New Jersey. The surety's obligation shall continue beyond final acceptance to the extent that the contractor would have such an obligation.
IB8.
1B7.2
The cost of bonds shall be paid for by the contractor.
1B7.3
At any time, if the University is dissatisfied with any surety or sureties, who have issued or proposed to issue, the performance or payment bonds for justifiable cause, the contractor shall substitute an acceptable bond or bonds in such form and sum and executed by such other surety or sureties as may be satisfactory to the University within ten (10) days after notice from the University to do so. The premiums of such bonds shall be paid by the contractor. No contract shall be executed and/or no payment made under a contract until the new surety or sureties shall have furnished such an acceptance bond to the University.
1B7.4
Bonds must be legally effective as of the date the contract is signed. Bonds must indicate contractors names exactly as they appear on the contract. Current attorney-in-fact instruments and financial statement of the surety must be included with the bond. Bonds must be executed by an authorized officer of the surety. Bonds furnished under this article shall conform in all respects to the requirements and language of N.J.S.A. 2A:44-143 to 147.
BULLETINS AND INTERPRETATIONS 1B8.1
No interpretation of the meaning of the plans, specifications or other pre-bid documents will be provided to any bidder unless such interpretation is made in writing to all prospective bidders prior to the bid opening. Any such interpretations must be identified in bid proposals submitted. Any interpretations which are not entered in accordance with this provision shall be unauthorized and not binding upon the University.
1B8.2
Every request for an interpretation relating to, clarification or correction of the plans, specifications or other bid documents shall be made in writing addressed to the Construction Manager and to the Page 7 of 9
ROWAN UNIVERSITY INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS University and must be received at least five (5) working days prior to the date fixed for the bid opening. Any and all interpretations, clarifications or corrections and any supplemental instructions must be issued by the University in writing in the form of bulletins and mailed by certified mail, return receipt requested or by telegraphic notice to all prospective bidders no later than three (3) working days prior to the date of the bid opening. All bulletins issued shall become part of the contract documents and shall be acknowledged in all the bid proposals. Failure of a contractor to acknowledge receipt of all such bulletins and interpretations by the time of the bid opening shall result in his/her proposal being considered non-responsive at the option of the University. 1B8.3
1B9.
ASSIGNMENTS 1B9.1
1B10.
Each bidder shall be responsible for thoroughly reviewing the contract documents prior to submission of bids. Bidders are advised that no claim for expenses incurred or damage sustained on account of any error, discrepancy, omission or conflict in the contract will be entertained. Documents shall be recognized by the University unless, and only to the extent that, a written request for interpretation, clarification or correction has been submitted in compliance with section 1B8.2 and the matter has not been addressed by the University through the issuance of a bulletin interpreting, clarifying and/or correcting such error, discrepancy, omission or conflict.
The contractor shall not assign the whole or any part of this contractor without prior written consent of the University. Money due or to become due to the contractor hereunder shall not be assigned for any purposes whatsoever.
FEDERAL EXCISE TAXES AND STATE SALES TAX 1B10.1
In general, bidders must take into consideration applicable Federal and state tax laws when preparing their bids.
1B10.2
Under Chapter 32 of the Internal Revenue Code, an exemption certificate must be on file with the University of the Division of purchase and Property. (example, Number 22-75-005)
1B10.3
Materials, supplies or services for exclusive use in erecting structures or buildings or otherwise improving, altering or requiring all Universityowned property are exempt from the State sales tax.
1B10.4
Bidders must make their own determinations as to the current status and applicability of any tax laws and the contractor may make no claim based upon any error or misunderstanding as to the Page 8 of 9
ROWAN UNIVERSITY INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS applicability of any tax laws. 1B10.5
1B11.
1B12.
Purchases or rentals of equipment are not exempt from any tax under the State Sales Tax Act.
RESTRICTIVE SPECIFICATIONS 1B11.1
Should any bidder determine before the bid due date that any portion of the specifications or drawings specify a particular product which can be provided by one (1) supplier or manufacturer with the result that competitive prices are not available, he/she shall immediately notify the University and Construction Manager of the fact in writing.
1B11.2
If such notice is not given in a timely manner, it shall be assumed that the bidder has included the estimate of such sole source in his/her bid. In the alternative, if the University or Construction Manager are notified in a timely manner of the requirement in the specification of a sole source of supply or manufacture, the University may order the project rebid or may take any other lawful action.
OFFER OF GRATUITIES 1B12.1
Chapter 48 of the laws of 1954 make it a misdemeanor to offer, pay or give any fee, commission, compensation, gift or gratuity to any person employed by the State. It is the policy of the University to treat the offer of any gift or gratuity by any company, its officers or employees to any person employed by Rowan University as grounds for debarment or suspension of such company from bidding on and providing work or materials on University contracts.
Page 9 of 9
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
CONTRACT FORMS AND GENERAL CONDITIONS SECTION 006000
SECTION 006000 - CONTRACT FORMS AND GENERAL CONDITIONS PART 1 – GENERAL 1.1 CONTRACT FORMS A.
The successful Bidder will receive a Notice of Award. The successful Bidder shall be required to complete and return the following documents for contract execution. 1. Rowan University’s Contractor Contract. 2. Consent of Surety. 3. Certification of Payment. 4. Lien Release Form
B.
The successful Bidder shall be responsible for reviewing the Contract document and the provisions contained therein.
C.
The Owner reserves the right to amend the Agreement as required.
1.2 GENERAL CONDITIONS A. General Conditions of the Contract for Construction form a part of the Contract and is included herein. PART 2 -- (Not Used) PART 3 -- (Not Used)
END OF SECTION 006000
CONTRACT FORMS AND GENERAL CONDITIONS
006000 - 1
ROWAN UNIVERSITY GENERAL CONDITIONS Revision 3/30/12 II. GENERAL CONDITIONS ARTICLE 1 - CONTRACT DOCUMENTS 1.1
DEFINITIONS
1.1.1 "Architect" or "Engineer" means the Architect, Engineer or other design professional engaged by the University to work under the direction of the University’s project manager or contracting officer. 1.1.2 Where "as shown", "as indicated", "as detailed" or words of similar import are used, it shall be understood that the reference is made to the drawings accompanying this contract unless otherwise stated. The word "provided", as used herein, shall be understood to mean "provided complete in place", that is, "furnished and installed". 1.1.3 Bulletin or Addendum: The bulletin or addendum is a document issued by the University prior to opening of bids which supplements, revises or modifies the solicitation documents furnished for bidding purposes. 1.1.4 Change Order Request Form: A request for equitable adjustment made by the Contractor in response to written direction by the contracting officer pursuant to Article 14 entitled "Changes to Contract". Unless otherwise specified by the University, the Contractor shall use Form AIG 701 1.1.5 Claims: Differences between the University and a contractor concerning extra work, alleged errors or omissions in the specifications or drawings, unreasonable delays, damages to work, informal suspensions or interferences by University personnel and like matters. 1.1.6
University: The word "University" or "owner" as used herein refers to Rowan University.
1.1.7 University’s project manager: An employee of the University (the University’s project manager) to provide general administration and project management services as required by the contract documents. 1.1.8 Contract Documents: This contract, together with any plans, drawings, specifications or other documents which are attached hereto or incorporated herein by reference, together with any such plans, drawings, specifications, schedules or other documents which may be produced pursuant to this contract or derived there from and which are intended to bind the contractor hereunder. 1.1.9 Contract Limit Lines: Those lines shown on the drawings which limit the boundaries of the project and beyond which no construction work or activities shall be performed by the contractor unless otherwise noted on the drawings or specifications. 1.1.10 Contract Line Item Number (CLIN): A specifically described unit of work for which a price is provided in the contract. 1.1.11 Contractor means the person or persons, partnership or corporation named as contractor in this contract operating as an independent contractor and not as an agent of the State in the performance of its functions. Whether referred to as "contractor", "prime contractor", "prime", "separate contractor" or "single contractor", it shall be understood to mean contractor. It does not include suppliers or material men. 1.1.12
Contracting Officer means the individual authorized, as an officer of the University, to
Page 1 of 55
ROWAN UNIVERSITY GENERAL CONDITIONS Revision 3/10/10
administer the design, engineering and construction of all University buildings and facilities. He/she is the procuring contracting officer representing the University personally or through University’s project managers in all relationships with contractors, consultants and architects/engineers. This includes a duly appointed successor or an authorized administrative contracting officer (ACO) acting within the limits of his/her authority. The contracting officer is the interpreter of the conditions of the contract and the judge of its performance. He/she shall not take arbitrary positions benefiting either the University or the contractor but shall use his/her powers under the contract to enforce its faithful performance by both. 1.1.13 Wherever in the specifications or upon the drawings the words "directed", "required", "ordered", "designated", "prescribed" "shall" or words of like import are used, it shall be understood that the "direction", "requirement", "order", "designation" or "prescription" of the contracting officer is intended and similarly the words "approved", "acceptable", "satisfactory" or words of like import shall mean "approved by", "acceptable to" or "satisfactory to" the contracting officer unless otherwise expressly stated. 1.1.14
"Final Acceptance" shall mean the acceptance of the Project upon Final Completion.
1.1.15 "Final Completion" shall mean the date the project, including all punch list items properly performed by the contractor, all warranties have been transferred to the University and the Contractor has demobilized from the site. 1.1.16 General Construction Contractor: The general construction contractor means either the contractor for general construction whenever separate prime contractors are involved in a project or the sole contractor if there are no other prime contractors involved. 1.1.17 Notice is a written directive or communication served on the contractor to act or perform work or carry out some other contractual obligation. It shall be deemed to have been duly served if delivered to an individual or member of the firm or entity or to an officer of the corporation for whom it was intended. This includes delivery by courier, registered or certified mail, telegram, facsimile, E-mail or other electronic means to the business address cited in the contract documents. 1.1.18 Plans means any drawings or reproductions thereof pertaining to the details of the work contemplated by this contract. 1.1.19
Project is the general term for identification of the total contract. It includes the work and all administrative aspects required to fully satisfy the contract requirements.
1.1.20 Public Contract: Any contract or agreement entered into by the State of New Jersey or any instrumentality of the State, including Rowan University, to purchase goods, services or both. 1.1.21 The term site, construction site or project site refers to the geographical area of the entire University campus at which the work under the contract is to be performed bounded by the Contract Limits and other areas designated by the University. 1.1.22 Specifications means all written agreements, instructions or other documents in or pursuant to this contract pertaining to the method of performing the work and the results to be obtained. Page 2 of 55
ROWAN UNIVERSITY GENERAL CONDITIONS Revision 3/10/10
1.1.23 The words State or Agency of the State, as are used herein, mean the State of New Jersey or any department or agency of the State. 1.1.24 Sub-contractor means the person or persons, partnerships or corporations who enter into a contract with the contractor for the performance of work under this contract or the sub-contractors of any tier of such individual or corporation. 1.1.25 Substantial Completion: The date the building or facility is operational or capable of serving its intended use even though all permanent installations are not in place. The determination as to the date of substantial completion shall be made pursuant to Article 8.3 of the General Conditions and other applicable Sections in the Project Manual. 1.1.26 Schedule of Values shall mean a detailed list of the work activities required for project construction; including costs allocated thereto to be utilized by the Architect/Engineer in progress payments. The schedule of values shall include all elements associated with fulfilling the requirements of the contract; bonds, insurance, etc.; major items of material or equipment. 1.1.27 The term work, as used herein, comprises all construction efforts required by the contract documents and all supervision, labor, material, management and equipment necessary to complete such construction. 1.2
INTENT OF THE CONTRACT
1.2.1 The drawings and specifications of the contract are intended to require the contractor to provide for everything necessary to accomplish the proper and complete finishing of the work. All work and materials included in the specifications and not shown on the drawings or shown on the drawings and not in the specifications shall be performed or furnished by the contractor as if described in both. Any incidental material and/or work not specified in the drawings and/or specifications which is, nevertheless, necessary for the true development thereof and reasonably inferable there from, the contractor shall understand the same to be implied and required and he/she shall perform all such work and furnish all such materials as if particularly delineated or described therein. Should there be an obvious error or omission in the drawings or specifications, it shall be the contractor's responsibility to complete the work as reasonably required consistent with the intent of such drawings and specifications. 1.2.2 The contractor shall abide by and comply with the true intent and meaning of the drawings, the specifications and other contract documents taken as a whole and shall not avail himself/herself of any unintentional error or omission should any exist. Should any error, omission or discrepancy appear or should any doubt exist or any dispute arise as to the true intent and meaning of the drawings, the specifications or other contract documents, or should any portion thereof be obscure or capable of more than one interpretation, the contractor shall immediately notify the contracting officer or the University’s project manager and seek correction or interpretation thereof prior to commencement of affected work. The contracting officer shall issue his/her interpretation with reasonable promptness. However, the contractor shall make no claim against the University for expenses incurred or damages sustained on account of any error, discrepancy, omission or conflict in the contract documents unless, and only to the extent that, the contractor has submitted a written request for interpretation, clarification or correction to the Architect/Engineer and the contracting officer through the University’s project manager and such written request has been received by the Architect/Engineer and the contracting officer at least five (5) Page 3 of 55
ROWAN UNIVERSITY GENERAL CONDITIONS Revision 3/10/10
working days prior to the date fixed for the opening of bids provided further that such claim shall only be recognized by the University if the matter raised by the written request has not been addressed by the University through the issuance of an addendum interpreting, clarifying and/or correcting such error, discrepancy, omission or conflict. In case of dispute, the matter shall be referred to the contracting officer for decision. 1.2.3 Each and every provision required by law to be inserted in the contract documents shall be deemed to have been inserted therein. If any such provision has been omitted or has not been correctly inserted, then, upon application of either party, the contract shall be physically amended to provide for such insertion or correction. 1.2.4 The organization of the specifications into divisions, sections and articles and the arrangement of drawings shall not be construed by the contractor as being intended to divide or allocate the work among sub-contractors in any manner or to establish the extent of the work to be performed by any trade. 1.2.5
N/A
1.2.6 The contractor shall do no work without proper drawings and instructions unless authorization to proceed from the contracting officer or someone designate by the contracting officer is received in writing by the contractor. In giving such additional instructions, the contracting officer may make minor changes in the work not involving extra cost. 1.2.7 All drawings referred to, together with such supplementary details as may be furnished and approved from time to time as the work progresses, are understood as being included as part of the contract to which they relate. 1.2.8 In the event of a conflict between provisions of the contract documents, the documents shall take precedence in the following order: (a) (b) (c) (d) (e) (f)
Executed Contract Addenda Supplemental General Conditions General Conditions Specifications Drawings in the following order of precedence: (1) notes on drawings (2) large scale details (3) figured dimensions (4) scaled dimensions
Where there may be a conflict not resolvable by application of the provisions of this paragraph, then the contractor shall accept the condition more favorable to the University. In the event the conflicting condition is one of physical materials, equipment and/or labor then the more expensive labor, materials or equipment shall be assumed to be required and shall be provided by the contractor. 1.2.9
On all work involving alterations, remodeling, repairs or installation within existing buildings, it Page 4 of 55
ROWAN UNIVERSITY GENERAL CONDITIONS Revision 3/10/10
shall be the responsibility of the contractor by personal inspection of the existing building, facility, plant or utility system to satisfy himself/herself as to the accuracy of any information given which may affect the quantity, size and/or quality of materials required for a satisfactorily completed contract whether or not such information is indicated on the drawings or is included in the specifications. All contracts shall include the cost of all material and labor required to complete the work. 1.2.10 Dimensions of the work shall not be determined by scale or rule and figured dimensions shall be followed at all times unless obvious discrepancies exist. The contractor shall verify all dimensions at the job site and shall take any and all measurements necessary to verify the drawings and to properly lay-out the work. Any discrepancies affecting the lay-out of the work shall be called to the Architect's/Engineer's attention. No work so affected shall proceed until such discrepancy is corrected and the Architect/Engineer provides written confirmation of the resolution to the University’s project manager. 1.2.11 Where on any drawing a portion of the work is fully drawn and the remainder is indicated in outline form, the portions fully drawn shall apply to all other like portions of the work unless specifically indicated or specified otherwise. 1.2.12 All indications or notations which apply to one of a number of similar situations, materials or processes shall be deemed to apply to all such situations, materials or processes whether they appear in the work except where a contrary result is clearly indicated by the contract documents. 1.2.13 Where codes, standards, requirements and publications of public and private bodies are referred to in the specifications, references shall be understood to be to the latest revision prior to the date of receiving bids except where otherwise indicated. 1.2.14 Where no explicit quality or standards for materials or workmanship are established for work, such work is to be of good quality for the intended use. 1.2.15 All manufactured articles, materials and equipment shall be applied, installed, connected, erected, used, cleaned and conditioned in accordance with the manufacturer's written or printed directions and instructions unless otherwise indicated in the contract documents. 1.2.16 The mechanical, electrical and fire protection drawings are diagrammatic only and are not intended to show the alignment, physical locations or configurations of such work. Such work shall be coordinated by the Contractor and shall be installed to clear all obstructions, permit proper clearances for the work of other trades, satisfy all code requirements and present an orderly appearance where exposed at no additional cost to the Owner. ARTICLE 2 - CONTRACTING OFFICER 2.1
CONTRACTING OFFICER'S RIGHT TO STOP THE WORK
2.1.1 If the contractor fails to correct defective work or fails to carry out the work in accordance with the contract documents, the contracting officer may order the contractor to stop the work, or any portion thereof, until the cause for such order has been eliminated. Stoppage of the work, however, shall not render the University liable for claims of any kind, including delays sustained by the contractor as the result of the stoppage of the work and there shall be no extension of time to the schedule allowed. Page 5 of 55
ROWAN UNIVERSITY GENERAL CONDITIONS Revision 3/10/10
2.2
CONTRACTING OFFICER'S RIGHT TO TERMINATE FOR CAUSE
2.2.1 If the contractor makes a general assignment for the benefit of his/her creditors, if a receiver is appointed on account of his/her insolvency or if he/she persistently or repeatedly refuses or fails, except in cases for which extension of time is provided, to supply enough properly skilled workers or proper materials so as to avoid or eliminate delays in the orderly progress of the work in accordance with the approved schedule, of if he/she fails to make prompt payment to sub-contractors or for materials or labor, or persistently disregards laws, ordinances, rules, regulations or orders of any public authority having jurisdiction, or if he/she or any of his/her sub-contractors is guilty of a substantial violation of a provision of the contract documents or otherwise defaults or neglects to carry out the work in accordance with the contract documents, then the contracting officer may, without prejudice to any right or remedy and, after giving the contractor and his/her surety three (3) working days written notice to forthwith commence and continue correction of such default or neglect with diligence and promptness, terminate the employment of the contractor by the issuance of a written notice to that effect to the contractor and his/her surety at any time subsequent to three (3) working days thereafter should they, or either of them, fail to comply with the demands of the original three (3) day notice as mentioned above. 2.2.2 Upon such termination, the contracting officer may take possession of the site and of all the materials, equipment and tools on the site and may finish the work by whatever method he/she may deem expedient. In such case, the contractor shall not be entitled to receive any further payment until the work is finished. The person or firm designated to carry out such work will be paid as authorized by the contracting officer without entailing any personal liability upon the officers of the University issuing certificates or making such payment(s). 2.2.3 If the unpaid balance of the contract sum exceeds the cost of finishing the work, including liquidated damages for delays and all consequential damages sustained by the University flowing from such breach of contract, such excess shall be paid to the contractor. If such costs exceed the unpaid balance, the contractor and/or his/her surety shall pay the difference to the University promptly upon demand and this obligation shall survive the termination of the contract. 2.2.4 If, within three (3) working days following receipt of notice of termination by the contractor's surety, the issuer of the performance and payment bonds, the said surety exercises its right to take over the work and expeditiously commences to prosecute the same to completion, the contracting officer shall permit him/her to do so under the following terms and conditions: (a)
evidence of the surety's intention to take over and complete the contract shall be in writing over the signature of a University project manager and served upon the contracting officer within three (3) days after receipt by the surety of notice of termination
(b)
the execution of a written agreement between the University, by the contracting officer, and the surety whereby the latter undertakes and assumes the obligation to complete the balance of the work of its defaulting contractor in accordance with the terms and conditions of the University contractor agreement, to be performed by a substituted contractor satisfactory to the contracting officer, at the surety's sole cost and expense, and providing for payments to the surety or to the substituted contractor of unpaid contract balances, if any, then in the hands of the Page 6 of 55
ROWAN UNIVERSITY GENERAL CONDITIONS Revision 3/10/10
University (c)
the said agreement shall also expressly provide that the surety shall not be relieved thereby from any of its obligations under the performance and payment bonds and that it furnishes the University with an additional performance and payment bond to secure the faithful performance of the substituted contractor
(d)
that all current obligations for labor and materials incurred and outstanding by the defaulting contractor on this project be paid without delay, subject to allowance of a reasonable time within which to verify such claims by the surety
(e)
that the parties expressly understand and agree that this agreement is without prejudice and is subject to such rights and remedies as either party, including the contractor, may elect to assert after final completion and acceptance of the work
2.2.5 Right to Terminate for Convenience: The contracting officer reserves the right to terminate for the convenience of the University in which case the contractor shall be entitled to a proportion of the fee for which the services actually and satisfactorily performed by the contractor shall bear to the total services contemplated under this agreement, less payments previously made, together with appropriate reimbursable costs and a reasonable termination fee to be negotiated between the contractor and the contracting officer. 2.3
REVIEW OF CONTRACTOR CLAIMS AND DISPUTES
2.3.1. In the event of a dispute other than a Change Order dispute between the Contractor and the University, the Contractor may request, in writing, a hearing of any claim, dispute or matter in question relating to this contract. The University shall then designate a Hearing Officer, who may be the University's designee under this contract. The Hearing Officer shall not side with the University or the Contractor but shall use his/her powers to enforce faithful performance by all. 2.3.1.1 The Hearing Officer shall permit both the Contractor and the University to provide such relevant information to the Hearing Officer and each other, as the Hearing Officer needs to render a decision. Upon rendering a decision, the Hearing Officer will memorialize that decision in writing. 2.3.1.2 In the event that both the Contractor and the University agree with the Hearing Officer's decision, each will acknowledge its acceptance in writing. 2.3.1.3 In the event that the dispute is not resolved as set forth in Paragraph 2.3.1.2 hereof, then the University shall review all information provided to the Hearing Officer pursuant to Paragraph 2.3.1.1 hereof and the finding of the Hearing Officer and shall issue a final decision which shall be reduced to writing and a copy provided to the University's designee and the Contractor. 2.3.1.4
Pending such final decision, the Contractor shall have no Page 7 of 55
ROWAN UNIVERSITY GENERAL CONDITIONS Revision 3/10/10
recourse to court actions, assuming that the aforesaid administrative procedures take place within a reasonable amount of time. Upon receipt of the final decision, either party may then commence appropriate legal proceedings. 2.3.1.5 Unless and until it is determined as a result of any legal proceedings that the University is in material breach of this contract the Contractor shall proceed diligently with the performance of its contract responsibilities. 2.4
UNIVERSITY REPRESENTATION
2.4.1 The University shall be represented on the site by a University’s project manager. The University’s project manager will conduct or contract out on-site inspections, maintenance of logs for construction progress and problems encountered, approval of contractor's requisition for payments subject to final approval by the Architect and contracting officer, attendance at job meetings, the act of liaison with the Architect/Engineer and contractor, preparation and submission of reports on special problems associated with the job, evaluation and processing change orders and generally remain fully cognizant and be kept informed by the contractor of every aspect of ongoing construction. The University's project manager will have only those duties, which are required of an owner. Responsibility for completion of this project, pursuant to the contract documents, remains with the contractor. No right of the University exercised hereunder shall be considered a waiver of the contractor's obligation or any obligations created by this agreement, which may be modified or excused only in accordance with the terms of the contract. ARTICLE 3 - ARCHITECT/ENGINEER AND CONSTUCTION MANAGER 3.1
ARCHITECT/ENGINEER
3.1.1 The Architect's/Engineer's has no power or authority to approve changes to the work under this contract and its role is that of consultant to the University. 3.2
ADMINISTRATION OF THE CONTRACT
3.2.1 The Architect/Engineer and the University’s project manager will provide a certain portion of the administration of the contract as hereinafter described. 3.2.2 The Architect/Engineer and the University’s project manager will monitor the execution and progress of the work and will immediately notify the University of any related problems. The Architect/Engineer and the University’s project manager will be provided access to the work at all times. The general contractor shall provide facilities for such access so as to enable the Architect/Engineer and the University’s project manager to perform their functions under the contract documents. 3.2.3 The Architect/Engineer and/or the University’s project manager will not be responsible for, nor will they have control or charge of, construction means, methods, techniques, sequences of procedures or safety precautions and programs in connection with the work. The Architect/Engineer and/or the University’s project manager will not be responsible for, nor have control or charge over, the acts or omissions of the contractor, sub-contractors or any of their agents or employees or any other person Page 8 of 55
ROWAN UNIVERSITY GENERAL CONDITIONS Revision 3/10/10
performing any of the work but shall have the obligation to immediately inform the contractor, and the contracting officer of any inadequate performance on the project. In the event that the University’s project manager notices any safety violations, the University’s project manager shall have the right, but not the obligation, to inform the Contractor and to immediately stop work for any imminent or life threatening danger. 3.2.4 The University’s project manager, after consultation with the Architect/Engineer, will recommend the rejection of work, which he/she believes does not conform to the contract documents. In his/her opinion, whenever he/she considers it necessary or advisable, he/she may request the contracting officer to provide special inspection or testing of the work whether or not such work has been fabricated, installed or completed. The Contractor shall pay for all such testing whether the work is deemed to conform to the contract document or not. 3.2.5 Both the Architect/Engineer and the University’s project manager will periodically review the contractor's as-built drawings to determine whether these are up-to-date. 3.3
INSPECTIONS - SUBSTANTIAL AND FINAL COMPLETION
3.3.1 The Architect/Engineer and the University’s project manager will conduct inspections, accompanied by the contractor to determine the dates of substantial and final completion. The Architect/Engineer and the University’s project manager will receive and forward written warranties and related documents required by the contract documents and assembled by the contractor to the contracting officer for his/her review. The Architect/Engineer and the University’s project manager will approve the issuance of a certificate of final completion. 3.4
OWNERSHIP AND USE OF DOCUMENTS
3.4.1 All drawings, specifications and copies thereof furnished to the Contractor by the Architect/Engineer are and shall remain the property of the University. They are reserved to this project only and are not be to be used on any other project. Submission or distribution of documents to meet official regulatory requirements or for any other purposes in connection with the project shall not be construed as derogation of the Architect's/Engineer's copyright or other reserved rights. 3.5
UNIVERSITY’S PROJECT MANAGER
3.5.1 In addition to the duties specified elsewhere in the contract documents, the University’s project manager and the contractor shall perform as follows in relation to one another: a) the contractor will permit the University’s project manager to inspect delivery of any off-site materials that are being requisitioned by the contractor; b) upon request by the University’s project manager, the contractor will schedule visits to fabrication plants to inspect the status of various fabricated materials with regard to quality and scheduled delivery; the contractor will allow the University’s project manager access to such facilities; c) the contractor will attend a Preconstruction conference and bi-weekly project Page 9 of 55
ROWAN UNIVERSITY GENERAL CONDITIONS Revision 3/10/10
meetings, or more often if necessary, at times and locations specified by the University’s project manager; d) the contractor shall submit to the contracting officer, through the University’s project manager, all information or requests concerning scheduling, contract or change order/claims; e) the University’s project manager will receive, log, transmit and evaluate any requests from the contractor for interpretations of the meaning and intent of the contract documents to the contracting officer and Architect/Engineer; f)
the University’s project manager will monitor all training by the contractor of owner's representatives for equipment and maintenance procedures.
ARTICLE 4 - THE CONTRACTOR 4.1
REVIEW OF CONTRACT
4.1.1 The contractor has the duty and warrants and represents that he/she has thoroughly examined and is familiar with all the contract documents including, but not limited, the complete set of drawings and specifications of the entire project; all other documents referred to in the advertisement for bids, the specifications, or otherwise; that he/she has noted cases where it is specified that certain work or materials, or both, are to be omitted from the contract and to be furnished or installed by another; that he/she has carefully examined the site and the contract; that from his/her own investigations, he/she has satisfied himself/herself as to the nature and location of the work, the current local equipment labor and material conditions and all matters which may, in any way, affect the work or its performance. The contractor is responsible to check and verify all conditions inside and outside the contract limit lines to determine whether any conflict exists with the work he/she is required to perform under the contract. The submission of a bid is conclusive evidence that the bidder has made such examination and is fully aware of the conditions to be encountered in performing the work including any subsurface condition which could be ascertained by due diligence and as to the requirements of the contract documents. This includes a verification of all elevations, utility locations and other site data. Within the site of the project, there may be public utility structures and, notwithstanding any other clause or clauses of this contract, the contractor shall not proceed with the work until he/she has made diligent inquiry at the utility companies and municipal authorities or other owners to determine their exact location. The contractor shall notify the utility companies and municipalities or other owners involved in writing of the nature and scope of the project and of his/her operation that may affect their facilities or property. The contractor is directed to the fact that the approximate locations of known utility structures and facilities that may be encountered within and adjacent to the limits of the work may be shown on the plans. The accuracy and completeness of this information is not guaranteed by the State and the contractor is advised to ascertain for himself/herself all the facts concerning the location of these utilities. The contractor shall carry out his/her work carefully and skillfully and shall support and secure utility structures so as to avoid damage to them. It is understood and agreed that the contractor has considered all of the permanent and temporary utility facilities in their present and/or relocated positions as shown on the plans and as revealed by his/her site investigation in his/her bid, is cognizant of the limited ability of the State to control the actions of the utilities and has made allowance for the fact that additional compensation will not be allowed for any delays, inconvenience or damage sustained by him/her due to any interference from the said utility Page 10 of 55
ROWAN UNIVERSITY GENERAL CONDITIONS Revision 3/10/10
facilities or the operation of moving them in his/her bid. As a result of such examination and investigation, the contractor warrants and represents that he/she fully understands the intent and purposes of the contract documents and his/her obligations there under and that he/she accepts responsibility for and is prepared to execute and fulfill completely by his/her construction work the intent of the contract without exception and without reservation at the price specified in the contract. 4.1.2 The contractor shall carefully study and compare the contract documents during the progress of the work and shall immediately report any error, inconsistency or omission to the University’s project manager upon discovery. The contractor shall immediately report any error, inconsistency or ambiguity detected during the course of the project to the University’s project manager and shall do no work thereafter which may be affected by such error until the contracting officer, through the University’s project manager, has had the opportunity to respond and clarify the work it wants performed in view of this information. Wherever any error, inconsistency or omission appears, it shall be disposed of pursuant to appropriate procedures set forth elsewhere herein. 4.1.3 Unless otherwise ordered in writing by the contracting officer through the University’s project manager, the contractor shall perform no portion of the work without approved change orders, approved shop drawings or samples for such portions of the work or other approvals as may be applicable and required by the contract documents. 4.1.4 Unless otherwise provided in the contract documents, the contractor shall provide and pay for all labor, equipment, materials, tools, construction equipment and machinery, water, heat, utilities, transportation and other facilities and services necessary for the proper execution and completion of the work whether or not incorporated or to be incorporated in the work. 4.1.5 At all times, the contractor shall enforce strict discipline and good order among his/her employees and shall not employ any individual who violates these provisions or is unfit or anyone not skilled in the task assigned to him/her on the work. 4.1.6 The contractor shall be obligated to pay the prevailing wage rates set forth in the specifications. He/she shall abide by the requirements of the State's Affirmative Action Program. He/she shall also be responsible to insure that all principles of safety are carried out as further described in Article 12 herein. The contractor shall prepare certified payrolls and shall submit such records to the University as required by New Jersey statute and corresponding regulations. 4.2
NEW JERSEY PREVAILING WAGE ACT
4.2.1 Each contractor or any sub-contractor shall comply with the New Jersey Prevailing Wage Act Laws of 1963, Chapter 150, and all amendments thereto as this Act is hereby made a part of every contract entered into on behalf of the University except those contracts which are not within the contemplation of the Act. Provisions of the Act include: a) All workmen employed in the performances of every contract in which the contract sum is in excess of $2,000 and work to which the University is a party shall be paid not less than the prevailing wage rate as designed by the Commissioner of Labor and Industry or his/her duly University’s project manager. 1. The contractor and all sub-contractor(s) performing public work for the Page 11 of 55
ROWAN UNIVERSITY GENERAL CONDITIONS Revision 3/10/10
2. The contractor's signature on the proposal is his/her guarantee that neither he/she nor any sub-contractor is currently listed or is on record by the Commissioner as one who has failed to pay the prevailing wages according to the Prevailing Wage Act. b) In the event it is found any workman/workwoman employed by the contractor or any sub-contractor covered by the contract in excess of $2,000 for any public work to which the University is a party has been paid a rate of wages less than the prevailing wage required to be paid by such contract, the contracting officer may terminate the contractor's or sub-contractor's right to proceed with the work or such part of the work as to which there has been a failure to pay required wages and may otherwise prosecute the work to completion. c) Nothing contained in the Prevailing Wage Act shall prohibit the payment of more than the prevailing wage rate to any workman/workwoman employed on a public work. 4.3
SUPERVISION AND CONSTRUCTION PROCEDURES
4.3.1 The contractor shall supervise and direct the work using his/her best skill and attention and coordinate his/her work with his/her sub-contractors. He/she shall be solely responsible for all construction means, methods, techniques, sequences and procedures and for coordinating all portions or the work under the contract. 4.3.2 The contractor shall employ a full-time, competent superintendent and necessary foreperson and assistants who shall be in attendance on the project site at all times during the progress of the work. The superintendent shall represent the contractor and all communications given to the superintendent shall be as binding as if given to the contractor. Important communications shall be confirmed in writing. The University reserves the right to require a change in a superintendent if his/her performance, as judged by the contracting officer, is deemed to be inadequate. Upon application in writing to the contracting officer, this requirement for a full-time superintendent may be waived by the contracting officer should he/she determine that such staffing is not required by the University. 4.3.3
The contractor shall hire qualified, able craftsperson’s in their respective lines of work.
4.3.4 The various sub-contractors shall have competent superintendents and/or forepersons in charge of their respective portions of the work at all times. They shall not employ a person unfit or unskilled in the work assigned to him/her. If it should become apparent to the University or its consultant that a sub-contractor does not have his/her portion of the work under control of a competent foreperson, the contractor shall take appropriate steps to immediately provide proper supervision. Page 12 of 55
ROWAN UNIVERSITY GENERAL CONDITIONS Revision 3/10/10
4.3.5 If due to a trade agreement or otherwise stand-by personnel are required to supervise equipment installation or for any other purpose during normal working hours of other trades, the contractor shall valuate and include the costs thereof in his/her bid price and shall provide said services without additional charge. 4.3.6 The contractor shall give the Architect/Engineer timely notice of any additional drawings, specifications or instructions required to define the work in greater detail or to permit the proper progress of the work. 4.3.7
The contractor shall correct all work incorrectly done at the contractor’s own expense.
4.4.
RESPONSIBILITY FOR THE WORK
4.4.1 The contractor shall be responsible to the University, the contracting officer, the University’s project manager, the Architect/Engineer and to separate contractors having a contract with the University on this project for the acts and omissions of his/her employees, sub-contractors and their agents and employees which injure, damage or delay such other contractors in the performance of their work. This responsibility is not limited by the applicable provisions stated elsewhere herein but is in conjunction with and related thereto. 4.4.2 The contractor shall be responsible for all damage or destruction caused directly or indirectly by his/her operations to all parts of the work, both temporary and permanent, to all affected property including adjoining property. 4.4.3 At his/her own expense, the contractor shall protect all finished work and any stored materials whether on site or off and keep the same protected until the project is completed and accepted. In the case of substantial completion accompanied by beneficial occupancy by the University, the contractor's obligation to protect his/her finished work shall cease simultaneously with the occupancy of the portion or portions of the structure. 4.4.4 The contractor shall defend, protect, indemnify and save harmless the State and the University from all claims, suits, actions, damages and costs of every name and description arising out of, or resulting from, the performance of or failure to perform work under this contract. This responsibility is not limited by the provisions of other indemnification provisions included elsewhere herein or compliance with any other insurance provision. 4.4.5 In order to protect the lives and health of his/her employees, the contractor shall comply with all applicable statutes, laws, rules, and regulations and shall maintain an accurate record of all cases of death, occupational disease and injury requiring medical attention or causing loss of time from work arising out of and in the course of employment on work under this contract. The contractor alone shall be responsible for the safety, efficiency and adequacy of his/her plant, appliances and methods and, for any damage or injury, which may result from his/her failure or his/her improper construction, maintenance or operation. 4.5
PERMITS - LAW - REGULATIONS
4.5.1 Unless otherwise provided in the contract documents, the contractor shall secure but the University shall pay for all permits and governmental fees and inspections necessary for the proper Page 13 of 55
ROWAN UNIVERSITY GENERAL CONDITIONS Revision 3/10/10
execution and completion of the work. 4.5.2 All construction work shall be done in accordance with the New Jersey Uniform Construction Code. No work requiring inspections and approvals of construction code officials is to be covered or enclosed prior to inspection and approval by appropriate code enforcement officials. 4.5.3 The work under this contract is exempt from local ordinances, codes and regulations as related to the building and the site on which it is located, except where construction could adversely affect adjacent property, public sidewalks and/or streets. The contractor shall coordinate his/her activities with municipal and/or highway authorities having appropriate jurisdiction. 4.5.4 Soil conservation measures are to be in accordance with the County Soil Conservation District requirements and all pertinent codes and regulations. 4.5.6 The contractor shall comply with all applicable Federal, State and local laws and regulations and all conditions of permits controlling pollution of the environment. Necessary precautions shall be taken to prevent pollution of streams, lakes, ponds, wetlands, ground water and reservoirs with fuels, oils, bitumens, chemicals or harmful materials and to prevent pollution of the atmosphere from particulate and gaseous matter. All sewage disposal work shall conform with the regulations of the State Department of Environmental Protection. 4.5.7 The University will pay for all code inspections; however, it is the contractor's responsibility to request and set up inspections with the appropriate agency for all work requiring inspection, in a timely manner. 4.5.8 Consistent with sub-paragraph 4.4.4, the contractor shall be responsible for and save harmless the University from all fines, penalties or loss incurred for, or by reason of, the violation of any Federal, State of municipal law, rule, regulation or ordinance while the said work is in the process of construction. 4.5.9 Without limiting the foregoing, the contractor shall comply with the Federal Occupational Safety and Health Act of 1970 and all of the rules and regulations promulgated there under and the New Jersey Worker and Community Right-to-Know Act, PL1983 c. 315 N.J.S.A. 34:5A-1, et.seq. 4.5.10 As a result of a finding, by an appropriate finder of fact, that the contractor caused a substantial violation of a Federal, State or local statute or regulation on said project, the University may declare the contractor to be in default. 4.5.11 Prior to the start of any crane equipment operations, the contractor shall make all necessary applications and obtain all required permits from the Federal Aviation Administration (FAA). The sequence of operations, timing and methods of conducting the work shall be approved by the FAA to the extent it relates to their jurisdiction. 4.6
STORAGE, CLEANING AND FINAL CLEAN-UP
4.6.1 The contractor shall confine his/her apparatus, the storage of his/her equipment, tools and materials and his/her operations and workmen/workwomen to areas permitted by law, ordinances, permits, contract limit lines as established in the contract documents, the rules and regulations of the Page 14 of 55
ROWAN UNIVERSITY GENERAL CONDITIONS Revision 3/10/10
University or as ordered by the contracting officer and/or University’s project manager and shall not unreasonably encumber the site or the premises with his/her materials, tools and equipment. 4.6.2 At all time during the progress of the work, the contractor shall keep the premises and the job site free from the accumulation of all refuse, rubbish, scrap materials and debris caused by his/her operations to the end that the premises and site shall present a neat, orderly and workmanlike appearance at all times. This is to be accomplished as frequently as is necessary by the removal of such material, debris, etc. from the site and the owner's premises. 4.6.3 Upon completion of the construction, the contractor will remove all his/her tools, construction equipment, machinery, temporary staging, false work, formwork, shoring, bracing, protective enclosures, scaffolding, stairs, chutes, ramps, runways, hoisting equipment, elevators, derricks, cranes, etc. from the project site. 4.6.4 Should the contractor not promptly and properly discharge his/her obligation relating to cleaning and final clean-up, the University shall have the right to employ others and to charge the cost thereof to the contractor after first having given the contractor a three (3) working day written notice of such intent. 4.6.5
In each instance, the clean-up work shall be performed by the contractor.
4.6.6 All construction equipment, materials or supplies of any kind, character or description of value belonging to the contractor which remains on the job site for more than thirty (30) days from the date of the certificate of final acceptance and completion issued by the University to the contractor shall become the absolute property of the University. It shall be disposed of in any manner the University deems reasonable and proper. Disposal costs will be the responsibility of the contractor. 4.7
CUT-OVERS, TIE-INS, INTERRUPTIONS TO EXISTING BUILDINGS
4.7.1 All cut-overs of inter and tie-ins to existing building shall be scheduled and coordinated in advance with the contracting officer's representative and shall be done at a time convenient to the University so as not to unreasonably interfere with its operations. 4.8
WORKDAYS
4.8.1 Regular working hours shall be 8:00 a.m. to 4:30 p.m. Monday through Friday or as agreed to by the Contractor and University after consultation with the University’s project manager. Changes thereto may be granted with written approval of the contracting officer. Any work required to be performed after regular working hours or on Saturdays, Sundays or legal holidays as may be reasonably required consistent with contractual obligations shall be performed without additional expense to the University. The contractor shall obtain approval of the contracting officer through the University’s project manager for performance of work after regular working hours or on non-regular workdays at least fortyeight (48) hours prior to the commencement of overtime, unless such overtime work is caused by an emergency. 4.9
DRAWINGS, SPECIFICATIONS, SHOP DRAWINGS, AS-BUILT DRAWINGS
4.9.1
The contracting officer, through the Architect/Engineer or University’s project manager, will Page 15 of 55
ROWAN UNIVERSITY GENERAL CONDITIONS Revision 3/10/10
furnish additional instructions for the proper execution of the work after he/she becomes aware of its need. All drawings and instructions issued by the contracting officer shall be consistent with the contract documents and reasonably inferable there from. The work shall be executed in conformity therewith. The contractor shall do no work without proper drawings and instructions. In giving such additional instructions, the contracting officer will have the authority to make minor changes in the work not involving extra cost. Drawings and instructions with such supplementary details as may be furnished or approved are understood to be included and a part of the contract. 4.9.2 Where certain of the work is shown in complete detail but not repeated in similar detail in other areas of the drawings or there is an indication of continuation, the remainder being only shown in outline, the work shown in detail shall be understood to be required in other like portions of the project. 4.9.3 At any time after the execution of his/her contract, the contractor shall not make any claims whatsoever based upon insufficient data or his/her incorrectly assumed conditions nor shall he/she claim any misunderstandings with regard to the nature, conditions or character of the work to be done under the contract and he/she shall assume all risks resulting from any changes in conditions not caused by the University, the contracting officer or the University’s project manager which may occur during the progress of the work. In the event that the Contractor alleges that there was insufficient data or that he/she incorrectly assumed any condition or that he/she claims any misunderstanding with regard to the nature, conditions or character of the work, the Contractor shall disclose to the University the method by which he/she intended to perform the work in question as set forth in his/her bid. This information must be provided with the initial notice from the Contractor to the University. The Contractor shall not be entitled to any additional compensation based upon clarifications issued pursuant to this section. 4.9.4 If the contractor desires to make any deviations or changes from the requirements of the contract documents, he/she shall obtain the consent of the contracting officer through the University’s project manager or Architect/Engineer to such changes in writing before submitting drawings showing such proposed changes. All drawings submitted by the contractor shall have been checked and approved by him/her before submission. The drawings and specification references shall be noted on all submissions. Failure to comply with these instructions will be sufficient reason to return such drawings to the contractor without any action being taken. 4.9.5
LEFT BLANK
4.9.6
LEFT BLANK
4.9.7
LEFT BLANK
4.9.8
LEFT BLANK
4.9.9 Wherever any material is specified in accordance with federal specifications, ASTM specifications, American National Standards Institute, Inc. specifications, manufacturer's association’s specification standards or other standards, the contractor shall present an affidavit to the Architect/Engineer upon request from the manufacturer certifying that the material complies with the particular standard specification. Where necessary and requested or specified, supporting test data shall be submitted to substantiate compliance. All tests required in support of the affidavit shall be at the cost of the contractor. Page 16 of 55
ROWAN UNIVERSITY GENERAL CONDITIONS Revision 3/10/10
4.10
SAMPLES
4.10.1 The contractor shall furnish all samples as directed to the University’s project manager who shall forward them to the Architect/Engineer and University for approval. The work shall be in accordance with approved samples. Such samples shall be representative of the actual and the University’s project manager shall submit conditions promptly to the contracting officer after approval by the Architect/Engineer at the beginning of the work as so as give the contracting officer time to examine them. Contractor shall provide all disclaimers, limitations and conditions to contracting officer in order to fully inform contracting officer of potential deviations from the sample, including but not limited to color, texture, type, finish, etc. Any list of samples prepared by the Architect/Engineer is for the contracting officer's convenience only and shall not be construed as limiting the number of samples, which the contractor shall furnish upon request of the Architect/Engineer or University’s project manager. 4.11
LEFT BLANK
4.12
OPENINGS, CHANNELS, CUTTING AND PATCHING
4.12.1 The contractor shall be responsible for furnishing and setting of sleeves, built-in items, anchors, inserts, etc. for his/her work and for all cutting, fitting, closing-in, patching, finishing or adjusting of his/her work in a new and/or existing construction as required for the completed installation. Where applicable, the contractor shall build these items into the construction. 4.12.2 The contractor shall built recesses, channels, chases, opening and flues and shall leave or create holes where on drawings or where directed for steam, water or other piping, electrical conduits, switch boxes, panel boards, hues and ducts or any other feature of the heating and ventilating work. 4.12.3 The contractor shall close, build-in and finish around or over all openings, chases, channels, pockets, etc. after installation has been completed. 4.13
TESTS
4.13.1 The contractor shall notify the contracting office in writing through the University’s project manager of all work required to be inspected, tested or approved. The notice shall be provided no later than five (5) working days prior to the scheduled inspection, test or request for approval. The contractor shall bear all costs of such inspections, tests or approvals except for code inspections as stated in 4.5.6. All tests must be recorded by the contractor and records made available to the University and/or University’s project manager upon request. 4.13.2
LEFT BLANK
4.13.3
LEFT BLANK
4.13.4
LEFT BLANK
4.13.5 The contractor shall acquire inspection or testing services using only those firms/entities preapproved by the University. Failure to use a firm/entity preapproved by the University shall be grounds for rejection of the inspection or test as non-conformance. Page 17 of 55
ROWAN UNIVERSITY GENERAL CONDITIONS Revision 3/10/10
4.13.6 In addition to the above, the contractor agrees to insert in all contracts/purchase orders for inspection and testing the requirement for the inspection or testing firm/entity to submit, in conjunction with the report to the contractor, a copy of the report directly to the University’s project manager or contracting officer. The copy shall be held pending receipt of the contractor's certification of the report. Further, the contractor agrees to require all reports be submitted within fourteen (14) calendar days of the test or inspection. Failure to provide reports within the required time shall be addressed pursuant to Article 10.3.9 of the general conditions. 4.13.7
LEFT BLANK
4.14
EQUIPMENT - MATERIAL
4.14.1 The contractor warrants to the University, the contracting officer, University’s project manager and Architect/Engineer that all materials and equipment furnished under the contract will be new, unless otherwise specified, and that all work will be of good quality, free from defects, faults and in conformance with the contract documents. All work not conforming to these requirements, including substitutions not properly approved and authorized, may be considered defective and rejected by the contracting officer, the University’s project manager or the Architect/Engineer. If required by the University’s project manager, Architect/Engineer or the contracting officer, the contractor shall furnish satisfactory evidence as to the kind and quality of materials and equipment. This warranty is not limited by the provisions of the other paragraphs contained herein. 4.14.2 The contractor shall furnish and deliver the necessary equipment and materials in ample quantities and as frequently as required to avoid delay in progress of the work and shall store same so as not to cause interference with the orderly progress of the project. 4.14.3 The contractor shall furnish and pay for all necessary transportation, storage, scaffolding, centering, forms, water, labor, tools, light and power mechanical appliances and all other means, materials and supplies for properly prosecuting the work under this contract unless expressly specified otherwise. The contractor shall make arrangements to have representatives of his/her firm at the site to accept delivered materials. The University will not be held responsible for damage, theft or disappearance of the contractor's property. In receiving and storing equipment and material, the contractor shall be responsible for OSHA requirements for the entire project including OSHA requirements for temporary access to all floors. 4.14.4 Whenever available, manufactured products of the United States shall be used in this work. Wherever practicable, preference shall be given at all times to material and equipment manufactured or produced in the State of New Jersey where such preference is reasonable and will best serve the interest of the University. 4.14.5 No materials, equipment or supplies for the work shall be purchased by the contractor or any sub-contractor subject to any lien or encumbrance or other agreement by which an interest is retained by the seller. By signing his/her requisition for payment, the contractor warrants that he/she has good and sufficient title to all such material, equipment and supplies used by him/her in the work, free from all liens, claims and encumbrances.
4.15
SUBSTITUTIONS Page 18 of 55
ROWAN UNIVERSITY GENERAL CONDITIONS Revision 3/10/10
4.15.1 The contract documents are intended to produce a building of consistent character and quality of design. All components of the building, including visible items of mechanical and electrical equipment, have been selected to have a coordinated design in relation to the overall appearance of the building. The Architect/Engineer shall judge the design and appearance of proposed substitutes on the basis of their suitability in relation to the overall design of the project as well as for their intrinsic merits. The Architect/Engineer will not approve as equal to materials specified proposed substitutes which, in the Architect's/Engineer's sole opinion, would be out of character, obtrusive or otherwise inconsistent with the character or quality of design of the project. In order to permit coordinated design of color and finishes, the contractor shall, if required by the Architect/Engineer, furnish the substituted material in any color, finish, texture or pattern which would have been available from the manufacturer originally specified at no additional cost to the owner. 4.15.2 In the event the contractor should propose a substitution for the specified equipment or materials, it shall be his/her responsibility to submit proof of equality and to provide and pay for any tests which may be required by the contracting officer, the University’s project manager or Architect/Engineer in order to evaluate such proposed substitution. 4.15.3 Where any particular brand or manufactured article is specified, it shall be regarded as a standard. Similar products of other manufacturers, capable of equal performance and quality in the opinion of the contracting officer, will be accepted, if approved. 4.15.4 There shall be no extension of time to the project schedule granted to accommodate the requirements of this Article 4.15. Substitutions and/or any testing, etc. required to be done by the contractor to have the substitution approved will be done within the approved project schedule timeframe. 4.15.5 The application for approval of a substitution by the contractor shall include the following information: a) identifying information shall be fully and completely furnished b) note whether the item is included in the specifications in which case, identify the specification paragraph and section c) attach data indicating, in detail, whether and how the substitution differs, if at all, from the article specified d) if a credit is to be offered for the substitution, a detailed itemization of the amount of credit must be shown e) if the proposed substitution involves a change in the scope of the work of this or any other contractor or trade under the contract documents, then and, in that event, the contractor undertakes and agrees to be responsible for any and all added costs and thereby involved by reason of the change in the work, including redesign if any f)
when requesting approval of an out-of-state sub-contractor or material manufacturer or supplier, a statement indicating that reasonable effort was first made to find and employ New Jersey firms and/or materials at comparable costs, term and Page 19 of 55
ROWAN UNIVERSITY GENERAL CONDITIONS Revision 3/10/10
performance capabilities g) an agreement by the contractor to submit proof of equality and to have such tests performed at his/her own expense as may be required by the contracting officer or the Architect/Engineer h) the contractor shall not base his/her bid on substitutions, which may have been approved on previous projects; bids shall be based solely on plans and specifications of the subject project Since substitutions are primarily for the financial benefit of the contractor, a credit change order shall accompany each request for substitution. 4.16
SUB-CONTRACTOR APPROVALS
4.16.1 Approval by the contracting officer, University’s project manager or Architect/Engineer of a sub-contractor or material supplier shall not relieve the contractor of the responsibility for complying with all provisions of the contract documents. The approval of a sub-contractor does not imply approval of any material, equipment or supplies. 4.16.2 The contractor shall coordinate and supervise the work performed by sub-contractors to the end that the work is carried out without conflict between trades and so that no delay to the general progress of the work occurs. The contractor and all sub-contractors shall afford each trade, any separate contractor or the owner every reasonable opportunity for the installation of work and the storage of materials at all times. 4.17
PAY LIMITS FOR ADDITIONS OR DEDUCTIONS FOR EXCAVATION
4.17.1
The method of measurement and establishment of pay limits for additions or deductions for excavation shall be as follows: a) Basement Excavations: Pay limit for excavation shall be determined by horizontal and sloped lines as defined on the foundation plan and "typical subsoils preparation details": In the case where the contract limit line is in close proximity to the building and sheeting/shoring are required, the vertical line of sheeting will be the pay limit line b) All Pipelines and Encased Utilities: pay limit for trench excavations shall be limited to width of thirty-six inches (36") or the largest diameter of pipe barrel plus twentyfour inches (24"), whichever is greatest, and depth at bottom of pipe barrel; when rock is encountered, the contractor shall excavate to six inches (6") below bottom of pipe barrel; a compacted granular fill for the pipe shall be provided by the contractor; no additional payment will be made for this additional six inches (6") of granular fill c) Encased Electrical Conduit, Steam Transmission Lines and Unformed Foundation Footing: width and depth of trench shall be limited to same width and elevations of the structure shown on the contract drawings Page 20 of 55
ROWAN UNIVERSITY GENERAL CONDITIONS Revision 3/10/10
d) Unsuitable Foundation Material: where unsuitable foundation material is encountered, the contractor shall excavate to elevations as directed by the contracting officer through the University’s project manager; unit prices for additional excavation and replacement with approved compacted granular fill, stated in the proposal form, shall be used as a basis for additional payment by the University; in the event that no unit price is included in the proposal form, the unit prices shall be negotiated with the contracting officer through the University’s project manager prior to performance of the work or, at the option of the contracting officer, shall be done on a time and material basis plus ten percent (10%) profit; the decision setting unit prices shall be made by the contracting officer 4.18
SOIL BORINGS (IF APPLICABLE)
4.18.1 The University may possess geotechnical reports. Any geotechnical report/reports is/are included in the project manual for informational purposes only. The University is in no way responsible for, nor does it warrant, the data contained in the report(s) or the methods utilized in their preparation. Bidders will be granted access to the site to conduct their own tests upon request. The contractor assumes full responsibility for interpretation of any borings and the University shall have no responsibility or liability should the data provided prove to be incorrect or unrepresentative. All the provisions of paragraph 4.1.1 shall also apply hereto. 4.19
COORDINATION OF WORK
4.19.1
The contractor shall be responsible for coordinating all work performed upon the project as follows: a) the contractor shall be responsible for all arrangements for the storage of materials b) the contractor shall keep informed of the progress and the details of work of his/her sub-contractors and shall notify the University’s project manager immediately of lack of progress or defective workmanship on the part of sub-contractors; the contractor shall provide scheduling updates at the bi-weekly project meetings c) failure of the contractor to keep informed of the work progressing at the site and failure to give notice of lack of progress or defective workmanship by others shall be construed as acceptance by him/her of the status of the work as being satisfactory for proper coordination and completion of the project d) the contractor shall be responsible to supervise, direct and manage the conduct of the construction and the efforts of all sub-contractors so as to deliver the project as required under the contract
4.19.2 The contractor shall refer to all of the drawings including those showing primarily the work of the mechanical, electrical or other specialized trades and to all of the sections of the specifications and shall perform all work reasonably inferable therefrom as being necessary to produce the indicated results. The contractor shall insure that all of his/her sub-contractors are fully familiar with their obligations to the contractor in his/her performance of the contract. 4.19.3
This project as described by these specifications and accompanying drawings is bid under a Page 21 of 55
ROWAN UNIVERSITY GENERAL CONDITIONS Revision 3/10/10
single prime contract as mandated by 1B1.2 of the instructions to bidders. However, this section will apply to work relating to this project and not described herein as part of this project. 4.20
PROTECTION OF CONTRACTOR'S PROPERTY
4.20.1 The contractor shall adequately secure and protect his/her own tools, equipment, materials and supplies. The University assumes no liability for any damage, theft or negligent injury to the contractor's property or to the property of his/her employees, agents or sub-contractors. 4.21
PATENTS
4.21.1 The contractor shall hold and save the University and its officers, agents, servants and employees harmless from liability of any nature or kind, including costs and expenses for or on account of any patented or unpatented invention, process, article or appliance manufactured or used in the performance of the contract, including its use by the University, unless otherwise specifically stipulated in the contract documents. 4.21.2 License and/or royalty fees for the use of a process, which is authorized by the University, must be reasonable and paid to the holder of the patent or his/her authorized licensee directly by the University and not by or through the contractor.If the contractor uses any design, device or materials covered by letters, patent or copyright, he/she shall provide for such use by suitable agreement with the University of such patented or copyrighted design, device or material. It is mutually agreed and understood that, without exception, the contract prices shall include all royalties or costs arising from the use of such design, device or materials in any way involved in the work. The contractor and/or his/her sureties shall indemnify and save harmless the University from any and all claims for infringement by reason of the use of such patented or copyrighted design, device or materials or any trademark or copyright in connection with work agreed to be performed under this contract and shall indemnify the University for any cost, expense or damage which it may be obliged to pay by reason of such infringement at any time during the prosecution of the work or after completion of the work. 4.22
RIGHT TO AUDIT
4.22.1 The University reserves the right to audit the records of the contractor in connection with all matters related to this contract. The contractor agrees to maintain his/her records in accordance with generally accepted accounting principles for a period of not less than three (3) years after receipt of final payment. Accounting records must identify all labor and material, costs and expenses whether they be direct or indirect. The identification must include at least the project number for direct expenses and/or account number for indirect expenses. All charges must be supported by appropriate documentation including, but not limited to, canceled checks. 4.22.2 The contractor shall develop, maintain and make available to the contracting officer upon request such schedule of quantities and costs, progress schedules, payrolls, reports, estimates, change orders, all original estimates, take-offs and other bidding documents, all sub-contractors and supplier contracts and changes, all records showing all costs and liabilities incurred or to be incurred in connection with the project including all sub-contractor and supplier costs, all payment records and all records incurred in labor and personnel of any kind, records and other data as the University may request concerning work to be performed under this contract. Page 22 of 55
ROWAN UNIVERSITY GENERAL CONDITIONS Revision 3/10/10
4.22.3 The contractor acknowledges and agrees that no claim for payment, which is premised, to any degree upon actual costs of the contractor shall be recognized by the University except and to the extent that such actual costs are substantiated by records required to be maintained under these provisions. 4.22.4 The contractor acknowledges and agrees that the contractor's obligation to establish, maintain and make available records and the University's right to audit as delineated herein shall extend to actual costs incurred by sub-contractors in performing work required under the contract or any supplemental agreement thereto.
4.23
CONTROL WIRING
4.23.1 The contractor shall include in his/her proposal the cost of all control wiring and its installation for all mechanical equipment including, but not limited to, heating, ventilating and air conditioning systems, ATC systems, boilers, remote monitoring systems, etc. which systems require electrical control wiring. The contractor shall employ a sub-contractor approved by the University for all such control wiring. The sub-contractor shall provide a final certificate of electrical inspection of the control wiring. Installed or control wiring must connect to a point of electrical power supply as shown on the contract documents. 4.24
STAND-BY PERSONNEL
4.24.1 The contractor, when obligated to employ stand-by personnel by trade agreement to which he/she is a party, shall determine and include all such costs thereof in his/her bid proposal. The contractor shall not, at any time, make a claim to the University for costs relating to stand-by maintenance or stand-by supervision for electric motor driven or other equipment. The University, under no condition, will entertain or consider a claim in this regard unless such claim is made as a result of the University's unreasonable refusal to accept beneficial occupancy of the completed project. ARTICLE 5 - CONTRACTOR FOR GENERAL CONSTRUCTION; SPECIAL RESPONSIBILITIES Whenever the term "general construction contractor" is used herein, it is intended to mean either the contractor for general construction whenever separate prime contracts are involved or the sole contractor if there are no other prime contracts engaged on the project. 5.1
UNIQUE ROLE OF RESPONSIBILITY-STAFFING
5.1.1 Wherever separate contracts are awarded to separate prime contractors for different branches of the work or where there is a single prime contractor, the contractor for general construction, hereinafter referred to as the general construction contractor, has the responsibility for being the supervisor, manager, overseer, coordinator and expediter of all the contractors and/or sub-contractors and/or of the total construction process and of its parts in accordance with the contract documents. 5.2
CONTRACTING OFFICER'S RELIANCE UPON CONTRACTOR FOR GENERAL CONSTRUCTION
5.2.1
The contracting officer relies upon the organization, management, skills, cooperation and Page 23 of 55
ROWAN UNIVERSITY GENERAL CONDITIONS Revision 3/10/10
efficiency of the general construction contractor to supervise, direct, control and manage the work so as to deliver the completed project in conformance with the contract documents and within the scheduled time. 5.2.2 The contractor for general construction shall include in his/her bid an amount sufficient to cover his/her cost of furnishing necessary administrative and supervisory forces to coordinate his/her own work and that of his/her sub-contractors and other primary contractors. 5.3
LAYOUT, DIMENSIONAL CONTROL AND VERIFICATION, SURVEYOR'S CERTIFICATION
5.3.1 The general construction contractor shall be responsible for locating and laying out the building of all of its parts of the site in strict accordance with the drawings and shall accurately establish and maintain dimensional control. He/she shall employ and pay for the services of a competent and licensed New Jersey engineer or land surveyor hereinafter Contractor's Engineer or Surveyor who shall be approved by the University to perform all layout work and to test the levels of excavations, footing base plates, columns, walls and floors and roof lines and furnish to the University’s project manager as the work progresses certificates that each of such levels as is required by the drawings is met. The plumb lines of walls, etc. shall be tested and certified by the surveyor as the work progresses. 5.3.2 The Contractor's engineer or surveyor, in his/her layout work both on the site and within the building shall establish all points, lines, elevations, grades and bench marks for proper control and execution of the work. He/she shall establish a single permanent benchmark as directed to which all three (3) coordinates of dimensional control shall be referred. He/she shall verify all University furnished topographical and utility survey data and all points, lines, elevations, grades and benchmarks. Should any discrepancies be found between information given on the drawings and the actual site or field conditions, the general contractor shall notify the University’s project manager of such discrepancy and shall not proceed with any work affected until receipt of written instructions from the University’s project manager. 5.3.3 Maintenance of Construction Access Routes: The general construction contractor shall be responsible for providing and maintaining unobstructed traffic lanes on the designed construction access routes either shown on the contract drawings or reasonably required so as to perform the work and shall provide and maintain all reasonably required safety devices. He/she shall provide the addition of materials, their grading and compaction, the removal of snow and debris so as to provide and maintain the general, serviceable condition of the access roadbed as well as pedestrian walk ways. 5.3.4 Project Sign: The general construction contractor shall erect and maintain one (1) sign at the project site as shown on the drawings and located as directed by the University’s project manager. Painting shall be done by a professional sign painter with two (2) coats of exterior paint, colors, letter face and layout as shown. No other signs will be permitted at the site. Upon completion of the project and when directed by the University’s project manager or the University, the general construction contractor shall remove the sign. Should there be a change in the listed officials, the contractor shall make appropriate changes to the sign at his/her expense. Sign is to be six feet by ten feet (6' x 10') to include, at a minimum, the information shown on the drawing title sheet. Additional information will be as directed by the owner. 5.3.5 The general construction contractor, at his/her expenses, shall provide and maintain necessary temporary dustproof partitions or other necessary protection around areas of work in any existing building or in new building areas as directed by the University’s project manager or the Page 24 of 55
ROWAN UNIVERSITY GENERAL CONDITIONS Revision 3/10/10
contracting officer. 5.3.6 The contractor shall supply dumpster for trash, trash chutes, all debris, clean-up and all temporary fire protection per OSHA requirements. 5.3.7 Repair of Cracks: The general contractor accepts sole responsibility for repair of uncontrolled dislodgement, cracking, delaminating and peeling of finished surfaces, such as, concrete, precast concrete, case and natural stone; until masonry, millwork, plaster, glass and applied finishes; such as, paint and special coatings; within the contract scope and the limits of specified guarantee periods regardless of the cause. 5.3.8 The general construction contractor shall be responsible for replacement of all broken glass installed by him/her or his/her sub-contractors after same has been installed no matter by whom or what caused same and shall replace all broken, scratched or otherwise damaged glass before the completion and acceptance of the work or as required pursuant to any applicable warranty. He/she shall wash all glass on both sides when directed by University’s project manager and at completion of the Project, removing all paint spots, stains, plaster, etc. 5.3.9 Nothing herein is intended to limit the right of the contractor to seek payment from the party who is responsible for the damages. 5.4
PHOTOGRAPHS
5.4.1 With each monthly application for payment the general contractor shall submit progress photographs of the building in duplicate to the University’s project manager, giving four (4) views of each area photographed as selected by the University’s project manager, taken from the same points each month. 5.4.2 The photographs shall be eight inches by ten inches (8" x 10"). Two (2) copies and color photos shall bear a caption stating the date of the exposure and the name of the project, the contractor, the Architect/Engineer and the University’s project manager. 5.5
GUARANTEE
5.5.1 Neither the final certification of payment nor any provision in the contract documents nor partial or entire occupancy of the premises by the University shall constitute an acceptance of work not done in accordance with the contract documents nor shall it relieve the contractor of liability with respect to any expressed or implied warranties or responsibility for faulty materials or workmanship. The University will give notice of observed defects with reasonable promptness. The surety's obligation shall continue beyond final acceptance to the extent that the contractor would have had such obligation. 5.5.2 In addition to guarantees otherwise specified in other sections of the specifications, the contractor and each individual sub-contractor shall guarantee and warrant, in writing, the work to be performed and all materials to be furnished under this contract against the defects in materials or workmanship and to pay for the value of repair of any damage to other work resulting there from for a period of one (1) year from the date of Final Acceptance. All guarantees, bonds, etc. required by the specifications shall be in writing in requisite legal form and delivered to the contracting officer at the time of submission of the requisition for final payment. All sub-contractor's guarantees, bonds, etc. shall be Page 25 of 55
ROWAN UNIVERSITY GENERAL CONDITIONS Revision 3/10/10
underwritten by the contractor who shall obtain and deliver same to the contracting officer before the work shall be deemed finished and accepted. 5.5.3 The contractor shall, at his/her own expense and without cost to the University within a reasonable time after receipt of written notice thereof, make good any defects in material or workmanship which may develop during stipulated guarantee periods as well as any damage to other work caused by such defects or by their repairs. Any other defects in material or workmanship not reasonably observable or discovered during the guarantee period shall be repaired and/or replaced at the contractor's expense and such shall be completed within a reasonable time after written notice is given to the contractor. 5.5.4 It is anticipated that certain permanent equipment will have to be activated during construction of the project to support construction operations. This would particularly be the case with respect to service elevators and those portions of the permanent heating system, which might be required to provide temporary heat for interior, finish operations. Regardless of when equipment is activated for use during construction, all equipment warranties must extend for the time periods required in these specifications starting as of the date of Final Acceptance, of the project by the University. The contractor shall include in his/her base bid all costs necessary to provide extended warranties as necessary for any equipment, which may be activated prior to final building acceptance by the University. 5.6
INSPECTION OF ROADWAY SUB-GRADES
5.6.1 Where applicable, the general construction contractor shall notify the University’s project manager forty-eight (48) hours prior to anticipated completion of all roadway sub-grade work. The University’s project manager may request an inspection by an appropriate agency to insure that the subgrade meets the compaction standards. All sub-grades shall be proof-rolled for such inspection. If compaction soil tests are required, these tests will be done by soils testing laboratories through the contractor unless contrary provisions are made elsewhere in the specifications. The contractor shall not proceed with base course until the results of the compaction tests are determined and upgrade approved by the University’s project manager. 5.7
WATCHMAN SERVICES
5.7.1 The general construction contractor shall provide watchman services to adequately protect the work, stored materials and temporary structures located on the premises and to prevent unauthorized persons from entering upon the construction site. The University or the University’s project manager may require the general construction contractor to increase the watchman services in terms of hours or number of watchman, at no cost to the University, in the event that the University and/or University’s project manager determine that the watchman services are not sufficient. ARTICLE 6 - TEMPORARY FACILITIES, UTILITIES AND SERVICES Whenever the term "general construction contractor" is used herein, it is intended to mean either the contractor for general construction whenever separate prime contracts are involved or the sole contractor if there are no other prime contracts engaged on the project. 6.1
FIELD OFFICES
6.1.1
The contractor will provide on-site and maintain during the project construction a suitable Page 26 of 55
ROWAN UNIVERSITY GENERAL CONDITIONS Revision 3/10/10
weather-tight insulated field office conveniently located for reception and continuous use and shall maintain therein a complete set of contract documents including plans, specifications, CPM schedules, change orders, logs and other details and correspondence. The field office shall contain approved and safe heating facilities and lighting, convenience outlets, fire extinguisher, a minimum of two (2) operating windows CIF 15 S.F. each, outside door, handle, hasp and padlock. 6.1.2
Deleted
6.1.3
Deleted
6.1.4 The contractor shall provide his/her own telephones. The general construction contractor shall provide a coin operated pay telephone for use by all workers on the construction site. 6.2
STORAGE SHEDS, TOOL SHEDS, SHOPS AND EMPLOYEE SHEDS
6.2.1
LEFT BLANK
6.3
STORAGE AREAS, EMPLOYEE VEHICULAR PARKING, EQUIPMENT MARSHALLING AREAS, EXCAVATION BORROW/SPOILS DESIGNATED AREAS, COMMERCIAL CANTEEN AREA, ETC.
6.3.1 The contractor shall be responsible for providing his/her own requirements. He/she shall locate these areas to suit project requirements as indicated in the contract documents with the University’s project manager's concurrence. 6.4
TEMPORARY TOILET FACILITIES
6.4.1 The contractor shall provide and pay for suitable temporary toilets at an approved location approved by the University’s project manager on the site prior to the start of any fieldwork. They shall comply with all Federal, State and local laws. The contractor will be responsible for maintenance, removal and relocation as described hereinafter. 6.4.2
LEFT BLANK
6.4.3
LEFT BLANK
6.4.4
LEFT BLANK
6.4.5
LEFT BLANK
6.4.6
LEFT BLANK
6.4.7
LEFT BLANK
6.4.8
LEFT BLANK
6.4.9
LEFT BLANK Page 27 of 55
ROWAN UNIVERSITY GENERAL CONDITIONS Revision 3/10/10
6.4.10 Workman are not to use the finish bathroom and toilet facilities in the project buildings. Reasonable steps must be taken by the general construction contractor to enforce this rule. 6.5
TEMPORARY DRIVES AND WALKS
6.5.1 The general construction contractor shall be responsible for keeping all roadways, drives and parking areas within or proximate to the site free and clear of debris, gravel, mud or any other site materials by insuring that all measures reasonably necessary are taken to prevent such materials from being deposited on such surfaces including, as may be appropriate, the cleaning of vehicle wheels, etc. prior to their leaving the construction site. Should such surface require cleaning, the general construction contractor will clean these surfaces without additional cost to the University. The general construction contractor will be held accountable for any citations, fines or penalties imposed on the University for failing to comply with local rules and regulations. 6.5.2
LEFT BLANK
6.5.3 The general construction contractor shall obtain permission, in writing, from the University’s project manager before using any existing driveways or parking areas not specifically designated for such use in the contract documents for construction purposes. He/she shall maintain such driveways and areas in good condition during the construction period and, at completion of the project, shall repair or replace said driveway or areas in a manner acceptable to the University. Conditions before use should be carefully photographed or documented by the contractor and a copy provided to the University prior to the commencement of work.
6.6
TEMPORARY WATER
6.6.1
LEFT BLANK
6.6.2 It is the obligation of the contractor requiring temporary facilities to investigate and make specific arrangements with the University through the University’s project manager for such facilities and to include in his/her proposal the cost of any facilities he/she may require for proper conduct of his/her work. 6.6.3 The contractor shall install his/her temporary and/or permanent water lines to the boiler room and heating equipment in sufficient time to be available for supplying water for testing and operation on the heating system when needed to supply heat on the project. 6.6.4 The contractor is responsible to protect all water lines from damage or freezing be they permanent or temporary. Should water connections be made to an existing line, the contractor shall provide a positive shut-off valve at his/her cost and expense. 6.6.5 If the contractor fails to carry out his/her responsibility in supplying the water as set forth herein, he/she shall be held responsible for such failure and the University’s project manager shall have the right to take such action as he/she deems proper for the protection and conduct of the work and may deduct the cost involved in so doing from any sums due to the contractor. 6.7
TEMPORARY LIGHT AND POWER Page 28 of 55
ROWAN UNIVERSITY GENERAL CONDITIONS Revision 3/10/10
6.7.1
LEFT BLANK
6.7.2
LEFT BLANK
6.7.3
LEFT BLANK
6.7.4 If applicable and necessary, the contractor shall provide all electrical service for operation of elevator equipment during construction as well as for permanent installation. 6.7.5 The contractor shall pay for the cost of all electric energy used on distribution lines installed until the project is accepted by the University. 6.7.6 The contractor shall provide and pay for all maintenance, servicing, operating and supervision of the service and distribution facilities. He/she shall also connect, maintain and service any electrical equipment which may be necessary for maintaining heat whenever heat is required in the building whether from the temporary or permanent system. 6.7.7 The contractor failing to carry out his/her responsibility in supplying uninterrupted light and power or other utility as set forth in the construction documents shall be held responsible for such failure and the University’s project manager shall have the right to take such action as he/she deems proper for the protection and conduct of the work and shall deduct the costs involved from the amount due the contractor at fault. 6.7.8 There shall be no additional cost to the University because of stand-by requirements due to conflict in the normal working hours of trades. Where overtime work by the contractor necessitates stand-by electricians or other trades, the contractor shall be responsible for making appropriate arrangements, financial and otherwise, for such service at no cost to the University. 6.7.9
LEFT BLANK
6.8
Deleted
6.8.1
Deleted
6.9
TEMPORARY HEAT
6.9.1 Maintenance and safe operation of the temporary heating system and equipment shall be the responsibility of the Contractor. Any liability arising out of damage or injury resulting from the use or operation of heating equipment by the Contractor, sub-contractors, equipment and material suppliers, consultants, agents of any of them and anyone employed either directly or indirectly by any of them or anyone for whose acts they may be liable shall be the sole responsibility of the Contractor. 6.9.2
LEFT BLANK
6.9.3
LEFT BLANK
6.9.4
LEFT BLANK Page 29 of 55
ROWAN UNIVERSITY GENERAL CONDITIONS Revision 3/10/10
6.9.5
LEFT BLANK
6.9.6
LEFT BLANK
6.9.7
LEFT BLANK
6.9.8
Deleted
6.9.9 On the (60th) calendar day after the building, buildings or major unit thereof is/are permanently enclosed & the contracting officer has determined that heat is required for the proper execution of the construction work, the contractor shall continue to provide heat. A building or major unit thereof shall be considered "permanently enclosed" when (a) the exterior & enclosure work including walls, windows, glazing, louvers and doors have been permanently installed; (b) a permanent building roof has been completed & satisfactorily tested; (c) the permanent building roof drain system has been completed and made operational; (d) all building openings have been closed such that the building is weather tight. Regardless of whether the boiler room is within the confines of the major unit or not, it must be enclosed & the floor installed at least sixty (60) calendar days prior to the time when the contractor becomes responsible to supply heat. 6.9.10 Deleted 6.9.11
Deleted
6.9.12 The University reserves the right to permit the substitution of limited, temporary enclosures in lieu of permanent construction for the attainment of a permanently tight building if such action is deemed to be in the best interest of the project by the University’s project manager. This action will not be such as to create a future jeopardy to the environmental integrity of the building as construction proceeds. 6.9.13 When the permanent heating system is the source of the heat, the contractor shall be responsible for paying all water, electricity and fuel required for the operation of the permanent heating system until beneficial occupancy acceptance of the project by the University except for the cost of fuel during the test period as previously provided. The contractor shall install adequate controls and shall arrange, at his/her own cost, for making such temporary connection as required for the operation of the heating system. Should the heating system be designed for the tie-in to existing steam lines for source of heat, the University will provide steam for temporary heat through the project permanent heating system at no cost to the contractor after tie-in is completed. 6.9.14
LEFT BLANK
6.9.15 Valves, traps and other parts of the heating system, except air filters, which are permanently installed by the contractor and used for supplying heat during the construction period, need not be replaced, provided that the system was in acceptable condition prior to its use and was properly maintained. The system shall be properly cleaned and adjusted to operate after the permanent system is in use. Seven (7) days prior to acceptance by the University of the heating system as substantially complete, the contractor shall replace disposable filters with clean filters of the type specified or turn over spare sets of filters to the University as directed by the Construction Manager. Page 30 of 55
ROWAN UNIVERSITY GENERAL CONDITIONS Revision 3/10/10
6.9.16 If plastering, parging or finishing of any surface is necessary to enable the contractor to install the heating system in a manner as to permit its use for supplying heat during the construction period, the plastering, parging and finishing of such surfaces shall be done by the contractor so as not to delay the installation of the permanent system. In the event this plastering, parging or other finishing work is not completed in ample time to make possible the installation of permanent piping and heating units, the contractor shall install temporary/primary heating units. The cost of such temporary installation and its removal shall be paid by the contractor. 6.9.17 LEFT BLANK 6.9.18 If additional heat is required beyond that specified in the contract documents, the contractor should arrange and pay the additional costs thereof at no expense to the University. 6.9.19 The Contractor shall provide a cost to supply heat in accordance with all requirements of this Section and Division 1; General Requirements, Section 01500 of the Specifications. 6.10
TEMPORARY ENCLOSURES
6.10.1 Whenever necessary in order to maintain proper temperatures for the prosecution of the work or for the protection thereof, the contractor shall furnish and maintain temporary enclosures for all openings in exterior walls which are not enclosed with finishing materials. Temporary wood doors shall be provided at door openings. 6.11
TEMPORARY CONSTRUCTION FENCE AND SIGNAGE
6.11.1 As required by the University’s project manager, the contractor shall provide and maintain an eight foot (8') high temporary chain link fence with necessary posts and top rails to enclose the area at the job site and to guard and close effectively the designated area. The contractor shall be responsible for posting appropriate signage restricting access and shall further be responsible for controlling access to the job site. The contractor shall provide gates at locations where required for access to the enclosed area. Gates shall be of chain link material, cross-braced, hung on heavy strap hinges and shall have suitable hasps and padlocks. 6.11.2 The contractor shall remove the fence upon completion of the work or at such time before final completion as directed by the University. 6.12 6.12.1
EDGE PROTECTION The contractor shall be responsible for proper protection for all floor, roof and stair penetrations.
ARTICLE 7 - SUB-CONTRACTORS 7.1
CONTRACTOR/SUB-CONTRACTOR RELATIONSHIP
7.1.1 As provided in other sections of the Contract Documents after award of the contract, the contractor shall notify the contracting officer through the University’s project manager in writing of the names of sub-contractors, other than those required to be listed in the bid, proposed to perform the principal parts of the work and of such others as the contracting officer may direct and shall not employ Page 31 of 55
ROWAN UNIVERSITY GENERAL CONDITIONS Revision 3/10/10
any sub-contractor without prior, written approval of the contracting officer or any that the contracting officer may, within a reasonable time, reject. Failure of the contracting officer to reply within fifteen (15) days upon receipt of such names shall constitute notice of approval. 7.1.2 If the contracting officer has a reasonable objection to any such proposed person or firm, the contractor shall substitute another sub-contractor to which the contracting officer has no reasonable objection. Under no circumstances shall the University be obligated for additional cost due to such substitution. 7.1.3 The contractor shall make no substitution for any sub-contractor, person or firm previously selected and approved without written notification to the contracting officer and receipt of his/her written approval for such substitution. 7.1.4 The contractor acknowledges his/her full responsibility to the University for all acts and omissions of his/her sub-contractors and of persons and firms either directly or indirectly employed by them equally to the extent that he/she is responsible for the acts and omissions of persons and firms directly or indirectly employed by him/her and the contractor acknowledges he/she remains fully responsible for the proper performance of his/her contract irrespective of whether work is performed by his/her own forces or sub-contractors engaged by him/her. 7.1.5 Nothing contained in the contract documents shall create any contractual relationship between any sub-contractor and the University. 7.1.6 By an appropriate written agreement the contractor shall require each sub-contractor, to the extent of the work performed by the sub-contractor, be bound to the contractor by the terms of the contract documents and to assume toward the contractor all the obligations and responsibilities which the contractor, by these documents, assumes toward the University, the contracting officer, the University’s project manager and the Architect/Engineer. The contractor shall require each sub-contractor to enter into similar agreement with his/her sub-sub-contractors. 7.1.7 The contractor and all sub-contractors agree that, in the employment of both skilled and unskilled labor, preference shall be given to residents of the State of New Jersey if such labor force is available. 7.1.8 Approval by the contracting officer, the University’s project manager or Architect/Engineer of a sub-contractor or material supplier shall not relieve the contractor, the sub-contractor or material supplier of the responsibility of complying with all provisions of the contract documents. The approval of a subcontractor does not imply approval of any material, equipment or supplies. 7.1.9 The contractor shall coordinate and supervise the work performed by sub-contractors to the end that the work is carried out without conflict between trades and so that no delay to the general progress of the work occurs. The contractor and all sub-contractors shall afford each trade, any separate contractor or the owner every reasonable opportunity for the installation of work and the storage of materials at all times. 7.1.10 The contractor shall require each sub-contractor to the extent of the work to be performed by the sub-contractor to be bound to the contractor to the terms of the University contract documents and to assume toward the contractor all the obligations and responsibilities which the contractor assumes by the documents to the University and its contractual parties. Page 32 of 55
ROWAN UNIVERSITY GENERAL CONDITIONS Revision 3/10/10
7.1.11 The contractor shall not grant to any sub-contractor terms more favorable than those extended to the contractor by the University. 7.1.12 The contractor shall not permit his/her sub-contractor to perform sub-contract work without the express written approval of the contracting officer through the University’s project manager. 7.1.13 The contractor shall required in all sub-contracts that the sub-contractor establish, maintain and make available to the University all records as defined and delineated herein related to all work performed under the sub-contractors including work performed by a sub-contractor. ARTICLE 8 - RELATIONSHIP BETWEEN UNIVERSITY/CONTRACTOR 8.1
UNIVERSITY'S RIGHT TO PERFORM WORK
8.1.1 The University may and reserves the right to enter upon the premises at any and all times during the progress of the work or cause others to do so for the purpose of installing any apparatus or carrying on any construction not included in these specifications or for any other reasonable purpose. 8.1.2 The contractor shall examine all work or materials installed by other contractors and/or subcontractors, the installation of which may affect the work in his/her contract, and should the same be imperfect, incorrect or insecure, he/she shall notify the contracting officer immediately in order that same be rectified. The contracting officer shall be responsible for instructing the contractor as to what corrective action is required of the contractor. 8.2
MUTUAL RESPONSIBILITY
8.2.1 The contractor shall afford the University, the University’s project manager and all subcontractors reasonable opportunity for the introduction and storage of their materials and equipment and the execution of their work. The contractor shall coordinate all work with adjacent work with all trades so that no portion of the work is delayed or not properly undertaken due to lack or failure of cooperation. 8.2.2 The contractor shall lay out and install his/her work at such time or times and in such manner as to be in compliance with the project schedule and so as to facilitate the general progress of the project. 8.2.3 Before completion of the work contemplated herein, should it be deemed necessary by the University to do any work whatsoever in or about the building or structure other than as provided for in the contract documents, the contractor shall fully cooperate with such other individual or firm as the University may employ to do such work so that such additional work may be performed without unreasonable interference. The contractor shall afford said other individual or firm all reasonable facilities for doing such work. The Contractor may not seek an extension of the Contract time as a result of such work. However, Contractor is not entitled to any additional compensation nor shall be entitled to maintain a claim for additional costs or damages as a result of such work. 8.2.4 The contracting officer or his/her University’s project manager, and Architect/Engineer shall have access to the work at all times whether it is in preparation or in progress and the contractor shall provide proper facilities for such access and for inspection. The contracting officer reserves the right at his/her option to employ the services of a professional consultant to evaluate any phase of the work Page 33 of 55
ROWAN UNIVERSITY GENERAL CONDITIONS Revision 3/10/10
he/she may deem to be in the best interest of the University but no evaluation performed shall in any way relieve the contractor of his/her responsibilities under the contract. The consultant's work product shall be confidential and shall not be disclosed to the contractor. The contractor shall cooperate with the consultant(s) and provide access to the work and facilities for inspection. Should any portion of the work or material be found deficient or defective, the contractor will pay the applicable fees of such consultant and be responsible for replacing the deficient or defective work as required by the provisions stated elsewhere herein. In the event that contractor is required to pay the applicable consultant fees, the contractor shall be entitled to a copy of the result of the consultant's investigation.
8.2.5 Any costs caused by defective or ill-timed work shall be borne by the party responsible therefore. 8.2.6 If the contractor should destroy, damage or disturb the work of any other contractor in or about the building or premises, the contractor shall immediately either replace the destroyed work and make good the damaged or disturbed work to the satisfaction of the University’s project manager and the contracting officer or shall reimburse the contractor whose work he/she has destroyed, damaged or disturbed for the expense of replacing such work. 8.2.7 Should a contractor sustain any damage through any act or omission of any other contractor having a contract with the University or through any act or omission of the Architect/Engineer, the contractor shall have no claims against the University for such damage but shall have a right of action to recover such damages from the causing party or parties in accordance with 8.4.2 which is included in the contract with all other such contractors and the Architect/Engineer. 8.3
SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION/FINAL COMPLETION
8.3.1 At the request of the University, the University’s project manager and/or the Architect/Engineer, the contractor and the University representative shall make a joint inspection of the work and, if all determine that the work is substantially completed, the University shall give notice of Substantial Completion for beneficial use. Such certification shall in no way relieve the contractor of any contractual obligation or in any way relieve the contractor from responsibility to promptly complete punch list work. 8.3.2 Use and Possession Prior to Completion: The University shall have the right to take possession of or use any complete or partially completed part of the work. Prior to such possession or use, the contracting officer shall furnish the contractor with an itemized list of work remaining to be performed or corrected on such portions of the project as are to be possessed or used by the University provided that failure to list any item of work shall not be deemed an acceptance of any work under the contract. While the University has such possession or use, the contractor, not withstanding the provisions of the article of this contract entitled "Permits - Laws Regulations" shall be relieved of the responsibility for the loss or damage to the work resulting from University possession or use. If such prior possession or use by the University delays the progress of the work or causes additional expense to the contractor, an equitable adjustment in the contract amount will be made and the contract shall be modified in writing accordingly. Such an equitable adjustment of cost shall be the sole relief available to the contractor. 8.4
CONTRACTOR'S CLAIMS FOR DAMAGES Page 34 of 55
ROWAN UNIVERSITY GENERAL CONDITIONS Revision 3/10/10
8.4.1 Any claims made by the contractor against the University for damages or extra costs are governed by and subject to the New Jersey Contractual Liability Act, N.J.S.A. 59:13-1 et.seq. as well as all the provisions in this contract. 8.4.2 Should any contractor, or Architect/Engineer having or who shall hereafter have a contract with the University, by his/her own acts, errors or omissions, damage or unnecessarily delay the work of the owner or other contractors by not properly cooperating with them or by not affording them reasonably sufficient opportunity or facility to perform work as may be specified by reason of which act, error or omission of said contractor, the University’s project manager, the Architect/Engineer or any other contractor shall sustain damages including delay damages during the progress of work hereunder, then and in that event, the culpable party agrees to pay all costs and expenses incurred by the damaged contractor(s), the Architect/Engineer due to any such delays and/or damages whether by settlement, compromise mediation or arbitration and the injured contractor, Architect/Engineer shall have a right to redress enforcement in court directly against the culpable party. In addition, the culpable party further agrees to defend, indemnify and save harmless the University from all such claims and damages. Nothing contained in this paragraph shall be construed to relieve the culpable contractor, Architect/Engineer from any liability or damage sustained on account of such acts, errors or omissions. 8.4.3 The University shall not be liable to any contractor for any damages or extra costs caused by any acts or omissions of any person or entity except the University (as specified in this paragraph) and the contractor's exclusive remedy shall be against the culpable party and not the University. 8.5
CONTRACTING OFFICER'S RIGHT TO ACCELERATE
8.5.1 The contracting officer may order and direct the contractor responsible for delay as described in 8.2.2 or, as may be apparent as a result of his/her observation of the work, to accelerate that contractor's work at any particular place or places by increasing his/her forces, working overtime and/or on Saturdays, Sundays and holidays as may be required to enable others to carry on with their work in accordance with the project progress schedule. The cost of such acceleration efforts shall be borne entirely by the contractor and shall not be billed to the University. 8.6
TIME OF COMPLETION - DELAY - LIQUIDATED DAMAGES
8.6.1 In the event of the failure of the contractor to complete the said work within the time stated in the Bid Documents the contractor shall be liable to the University in the sum amount specified in Advertisement for Bids per day for each and every calendar day that the said work shall be and remains uncompleted which sum shall be treated as liquidated damages, and not a penalty, for the loss to the University of the use of premises in a completed state of construction, alteration or repair, as the case may be, and for added administrative and inspection costs to the University on account of the delay provided, however, that the liquidated damages provided for herein shall be in addition to other consequential losses or damages that the University may incur by reason of such delay such as, but not limited to, added costs of the project and the cost of furnishing temporary services, if any. The University, from any monies due or to become due to the contractor, may deduct any such items for which the contractor is liable. 8.6.2 The contractor agrees that said work should be prosecuted regularly, diligently and uninterruptedly at such rate of progress as will insure full completion thereof within the time specified. It is Page 35 of 55
ROWAN UNIVERSITY GENERAL CONDITIONS Revision 3/10/10
expressly understood and agreed by and between the contractor and the University that the time for the completion of the work herein is a reasonable time for the completion of same, taking into consideration the average climatic range and usual industrial conditions prevailing in this locality. If the contractor shall neglect, fail or refuse to complete the work within the time herein specified then the contractor does hereby agree, as a part consideration for the awarding this contract, to pay the University the amount referred to in paragraph 8.6.1. Liquidated damages but not as a penalty. 8.6.3 The said amount is fixed and agreed upon by and between the contractor and the University because of the impracticality and the extreme difficulty of fixing and ascertaining of the actual damages the University would sustain in such event and said amount is agreed to be the amount of damages which the University would sustain. 8.6.4 It is further agreed that time is of the essence of each and every portion of this contract and of the specifications wherein a definite and certain length of time is fixed for the performance of any act whatsoever. 8.6.5 The contractor's reasons for the time extension are listed below. Also the contractor shall not be charged with liquidated damages when the delay in the completion of the work is due to the following: a) to any preference, priority or allocation order duly issued by the government b) to unforeseeable cause beyond the control and without the fault or negligence of the contractor restricted to, acts of God except inclement weather or of the public enemy, fires, floods, epidemics, quarantine restrictions, freight embargoes; and c) to any delays of sub-contractors or suppliers occasioned by any of the causes specified in sub-sections (a) and (b) of this paragraph. 8.6.6
Delete
8.6.7 Payment of liquidated damages will not release Contractor from liability for damages sustained by other contractors as set forth in Section 8.4 hereto. 8.6.8 The University shall have the right to defer the beginning or to suspend the whole or any part of the work herein contracted to be done whenever, in the opinion of the contracting officer, it may be necessary or expedient for the University to do so. 8.6.9 The contractor shall not be entitled to any damages or extra compensation from the University on account of any work performed by the University, any other contractor, the Architect/Engineer, any other party or by reason of any delays whatsoever whether caused by the University or any other party including, but not limited to, the delays mentioned in this contract. 8.7
Delete
8.8
INDEMNIFICATION
8.8.1 The contractor shall assume all risk of and responsibility for and agrees to indemnify, defend and save harmless the University, the University’s project manager and the Architect/Engineer, their Page 36 of 55
ROWAN UNIVERSITY GENERAL CONDITIONS Revision 3/10/10
employees, servants and agents, from and against any and all claims, demands, suits, actions, recoveries, judgments and costs and expenses in connection therewith on account of the loss of life, property, injury or damage to the person, body or property of any person or persons whatsoever resulting from the performance of the project or through the negligence of the contractor or any of his/her subcontractors or through any improper or defective machinery, implements or appliances used by the contractor or his/her sub-contractors in the project or through any act or omission on the part of the contractor of his/her sub-contracts or his/her agents, employees or servants which shall arise from or result directly or indirectly from the work and/or materials supplied under this contract. This indemnification obligation is not limited by but is in addition to the insurance obligations contained in this agreement. 8.8.2 In any and all claims against the University, the Architect/Engineer or any of their agents or employees by any employees of the contractor, any sub-contractor, anyone directly or indirectly employed by any of them or anyone for whose acts any of them may be liable, the indemnification obligation under this Article shall not be limited in any way as to the amount or type of damages, compensation or benefits payable by or for the contractor or any sub-contractor under worker's or workman's compensation acts, disability benefit acts or other employee benefit acts.
8.9
COMMENCEMENT OF WORK
8.9.1 The contract time shall commence on the date of receipt by the contractor of a written notice to proceed and/or University purchase order and/or fully executed University contract issued by the contracting officer. The above document(s) shall be promptly issued by the University. The contractor agrees that contract work shall commence no later than ten (10) calendar days after receipt of at least one of the documents listed above in this Section 8.9.1. 8.9.2 Provided the contract is not terminated pursuant to the paragraph contained within the Instructions to Bidders entitled "Contracts and Bonds", if, in the opinion of the contracting officer, the contractor's delay in furnishing financial responsibility and performance or payment bonds causes a delay in the issuance of any of the documents listed in Section 8.9.1 above, the time to complete the work as specified in the contract may be reduced to reflect such delay. 8.9.3 The contractor shall perform no work under this contract until the required evidence of financial responsibility, insurance and bonds has been furnished. Thereafter, work at other than the contract site may be undertaken. The contractor shall perform no work at the contract site except pursuant to a fully executed contract and/or purchase order. 8.9.4 The notice to proceed, contract and/or purchase order may be issued by the University at its convenience. The Contractor shall not be entitled to any additional compensation caused by any delay in issuing the issuance of the above mentioned documents. The Contractor's sole remedy shall be an extension of the scheduled final completion date in an amount equal to the length of the delay in issuing the contract, purchase order and/or Notice to Proceed. ARTICLE 9 - CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS 9.1
Deleted Page 37 of 55
ROWAN UNIVERSITY GENERAL CONDITIONS Revision 3/10/10
9.1.1
Deleted
9.2
CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS SCHEDULE
9.2.1 This Project shall be completed within the specified number of calendar days from the earlier of the date of the Notice to Proceed, the Purchase Order and/or the Contract. 9.2.2 The project shall be monitored by detailed scheduling system. This system shall be the basis for the evaluation of all contractors’ performance. a) The contractor, upon its completion of a project schedule as defined in this section, agrees that the project network schedule is the designated plan for completion of all work in the allotted time and the contractor will assume full responsibility for the prosecution of the work shown. The University shall indicate formal acceptance of the contractors schedule by signing the finalized schedule. b) The contractor shall furnish sufficient labor, materials and equipment to insure the prosecution of the work in accordance with the approved schedule. If, in the opinion of the contracting officer and/or the University project manaager, the contractor falls behind the approved schedule, the contractor shall take such steps as may be necessary to improve his/her progress and the contracting officer may require him/her to increase the number of shifts, days of work and/or the amount of materials and equipment, all without additional cost to the University and as provided in section 8.5.1. 9.2.3 Initial Submittal: The initial schedule, which is submitted to the University by the contractor, shall show a coordinated plan for work for the contractor thereby providing a common basis of acceptance, understanding and communication. 9.2.4
LEFT BLANK
9.2.5 The schedule shall accurately reflect the manner in which the contractor intends to proceed with the project and shall incorporate the impact of all delays and change orders as soon as these factors can be defined. All changes made to the schedule shall be subject to approval by the University. If the contractor desires to revise the logic of the approved schedule so as to reflect a sequence of construction, which differed from that, originally agreed to, he/she must first obtain the approval of the University. If this change extends the completion date of the project or delays the work of other trades, the contractor agrees that these impacts and all associated costs will be considered a claim to be assessed against the contractor and will not be the basis for a project time extension. 9.2.6
Payments to the Contractor: a) The submission of the computer produced calendar dated schedule shall be an integral part and basic element of the estimate upon which progress payments shall be made pursuant to the provisions of Article 10. The contractor shall be entitled to progress payments only upon receipt by the University of an updated computer produced calendar dated scheduled as outlined in the contract documents. Page 38 of 55
ROWAN UNIVERSITY GENERAL CONDITIONS Revision 3/10/10
b) Wherever required by the University’s project manager, the contractor shall provide sufficient documentation to confirm reported progress for any costed items appearing in the scheduling and requisition system; i.e., bills of lading for delivered materials and equipment, etc. c) Payment to the contractor shall be dependent upon the contractor furnishing all of the information and data which, in the judgment of the University, is necessary to ascertain actual progress and all the information and data necessary to prepare any necessary revision to the computer produced calendar dated schedule and the network arrow diagram. The University's determination that the contractor has failed or refused to furnish the required information and data shall constitute a basis for withholding payment until the required information and data is furnished and the schedule and/or diagram is prepared or revised on the basis of such information and data. 9.2.7
Deleted
9.2.8
LEFT BLANK
9.2.9 The contractor acknowledges and agrees that the evaluation of project delay will be based upon the project schedule and the following criteria: 1) float time shown on the schedule is not for the exclusive use of either the contractor or the University. It is agreed that float time is available for use by all parties to facilitate the effective use of available resources and to minimize the impact of problems or change orders which may arise during construction. The contractor specifically agrees that the University or its representatives or consultants in conjunction with their review activities or to resolve project problems may use float time. The contractor agrees that there will be no basis for a project time extension as a result of any project problem, change order or delay which only results in the loss of available positive float on the project schedule. The contractor further agrees that there will be no basis for a claim for cost escalation for any activity which is completed on or before its initially required late end date as shown on the initially approved schedule regardless of the justification or any delaying factors which might have results in elimination of float which was originally available for the activity. If the contractor refuses to perform work which is available to them, the University’s project manager or contracting officer may, regardless of the float shown to be available for the work, consider the contractor to be in violation of the contract documents. In such instances, the contracting officer may, without prejudice to any right or remedy and after giving the contractor and his/her surety three (3) working days written notice to forthwith commence and continue with the work with diligence and promptness, terminate the employment of the contractor by the issuance of a written notice to that effect to the contractor and his/her surety at any time subsequent to three (3) working days thereafter should they or either of them fail to comply with the directive of the original three (3) day Page 39 of 55
ROWAN UNIVERSITY GENERAL CONDITIONS Revision 3/10/10
notice mentioned above. 9.2.10 The final coordinated schedule shall be signed and dated by all Contractors and shall become part of the Contract Documents. 9.3 Each Contractor agrees that they will make no claim for, and have no right to, additional payment or extension of time for completion of the Work, or any other concession because of any misinterpretation or misunderstanding on its part of the Project Schedule, its failure to attend the prebid conference, or because of any failure on its part to fully acquaint itself with all conditions relating to the Project Schedule and the manner in which it will be used on the project or because of any other Contractor's failure to participate properly in the development of a schedule or to perform its contract in accordance with the schedule. ARTICLE 10 - PAYMENTS 10.1
THE UNIVERSITY SHALL PAY THE CONTRACTOR THE CONTRACT PRICE AS HEREINAFTER PROVIDED
10.1.1 The University will make progress payments monthly as the work proceeds or at more frequent intervals as determined by the contracting officer on estimates approved by the contracting officer. Unless otherwise directed, the contractor shall furnish to the University’s project manager within two (2) weeks after a notice to proceed is issued to the contractor, a schedule of values for contract payments regarding labor and material breakdown of the total contract price showing the amount included therein for each principal category of the work in such detail as requested by the University. This schedule of values shall provide the basis for determining progress payments. The schedule, as approved, shall be used only as a basis for the contractor's estimates for progress payments and approval by the contracting officer does not constitute acceptance of the allocability of costs to a specific element of work. The contractor is cautioned that no payment requests shall be approved until the contracting officer or his/her University’s project manager has approved the schedule of values in writing. The contractor shall use the attachment to the G702 application for payment form. 10.1.2
LEFT BLANK
10.1.3 All material and work covered by progress payments made shall thereupon become the sole property of the University but this provision shall not be construed as relieving the contractor from the sole responsibility for the care and protection of all materials and work upon which payments have been made or the restoration of any damaged work or as waiving the right of the University to require the fulfillment of all of the terms and conditions of the contract. 10.1.4 If performance or payment bonds are required under this contract, they must be included in the contractors bid amount. The University shall pay the total premiums paid by the contractor to obtain the bonds to the contractor. This payment shall be paid at one time to the contractor together with the first progress payment unless otherwise due after the contractor has (1) furnish the bonds, including coinsurance and reinsurance agreements when applicable, (2) furnished evidence satisfactory to the University (such evidence being in the form of a receipt from the bonding company) of full payment to the surety company and (3) submitted a request for such payment. The payment by the University of the bond premiums to the contractor shall not be made as increments of the individual progress payments. Page 40 of 55
ROWAN UNIVERSITY GENERAL CONDITIONS Revision 3/10/10
10.1.5 In addition to other warranties required by provisions of the contract and specifications, the contractor warrants that title to all work, materials and equipment covered by an application for payment will pass to the University, either upon incorporation into the construction or upon receipt of payment by the contractor, whichever occurs first, free and clear of all liens, claims, security interests and encumbrances. This provision shall not be construed as relieving the contractor from sole responsibility for the care and protection of materials and work upon which payments have been made or the restoration of any damaged work or as a waiver by the University of its rights to require fulfillment of all terms of the contract. 10.1.6 Recommendation for approval of a requisition for payment will constitute a representation by the University’s project manager and/or the Architect/Engineer to the contracting officer based on his/her inspections at the site and data contained in the requisition for payment that the work has progressed to the point indicated, that, to the best of his/her knowledge, information and belief, the quality of the work is in accordance with the contract documents and that the contractor is entitled to payment in the amount certified. By recommending approval of a requisition for payment, however, the University’s project manager and/or Architect/Engineer shall not thereby be deemed to represent that he/she has made exhaustive or continuous on-site inspections to check the quality or quantity of the work or that he/she has reviewed the construction means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures or that he/she has made any examination to ascertain how and for what purpose the contractor has used the monies previously paid on account of the contract sum. 10.1.7 If any corporation licensed to do business in New Jersey shall be or become delinquent in the payment of taxes due the State, unless under an active appeal process, the contracting officer may withhold monies due to the said corporation for the purpose of assuring the payment to the State of such taxes. 10.2
INVOICES
10.2.1
LEFT BLANK
10.2.2
LEFT BLANK
10.2.3
LEFT BLANK
10.2.4
For the purpose of determining if interest begins to accrues under the State's Prompt Payment Act: a) a proper invoice will be deemed to have been received when it is received in the proper form and with all required attachments by the office designated for receipt of invoices and acceptance of the supplies delivered or services rendered has occurred b) payment shall be considered made on the date on which a check for such payment is dated c) payment terms; i.e., "net 20"; offered by the contractor will not be deemed a "required payment date" Page 41 of 55
ROWAN UNIVERSITY GENERAL CONDITIONS Revision 3/10/10
d) the following period of time will not be included: 1) after receipt of an improper invoice and prior to notice of any defect or impropriety but not to exceed sixty (60) calendar days 2) between the date of a notice of any defect or impropriety and the date a proper invoice is received; when the notice is in writing, it shall be considered made on the date shown on the notice 10.3
INTEREST
10.3.1 Interest shall be paid on the amount due to the contractor pursuant to a properly executed State invoice in reference to general condition 10.2 if the required payment is not made on or before the required payment date. 10.3.2 The required payment date shall be sixty (60) calendar days from the receipt of a properly completed and executed invoice. 10.3.3 Interest on amounts due shall be paid to the contractor for the period beginning on the day after the required payment date and ending on the date on which the check for payment is drawn. The interest shall be paid at a rate, which is specified by State Treasurer pursuant to "New Jersey Prompt Payment Act". 10.3.4 No interest charge as required by this provision shall become a debt of the State until it exceeds five dollars ($5.00).
10.3.5 Interest may be paid by separate payment to the contractor but shall be paid within thirty (30) calendar days of payment of the original invoice. 10.3.6 The State Treasurer shall have the right to waive the interest payment for delinquencies due to circumstances beyond the control of the contracting officer or other State or University representatives involved in the processing of contractor invoices including, but not limited to, strikes and natural disasters. 10.3.7 Nothing in this provision nor the New Jersey Prompt Payment Act shall be construed as permitting the accrual of prejudgment interest in the case of a disputed contract for which a notice of claim has been filed pursuant to N.J.S.A. 59:13-3 et.seq. as provided in N.J.S.A. 59:13-8. 10.4
WITHHOLDING PAYMENT FOR NON-DELIVERY OF DATA: (a) If technical data, such as "as built" drawings, reports, spare parts lists, repair parts lists or the like or instruction books including operational and maintenance manuals or any part thereof are not delivered within the time specified by this contract or are deficient upon delivery, the contracting officer shall withhold from each invoice a percentage in addition to any other retainage required by the contract or the contract price in accordance with the following table When Total Contract Price Is:
Percentage to be Withheld Is: Page 42 of 55
ROWAN UNIVERSITY GENERAL CONDITIONS Revision 3/10/10
less than $250,000. $250,000. to $1,000,000. over $1,000,000. (b)
10.5
The withholding of any sums pursuant to this section shall not be construed as or constitute in any manner a waiver by the University of the contractor's obligation to furnish the data required under this contract. In the event the contractor fails to furnish these items, the University shall have those rights and remedies provided by law and pursuant to this contract in addition to and not in lieu of the sums withheld in accordance with this section.
FINAL PAYMENT
10.5.1
LEFT BLANK.
10.5.2
LEFT BLANK
10.5.3
10% 5% 2%
LEFT BLANK
ARTICLE 11 - UNCOVERING AND INSPECTION OF WORK 11.1
UNCOVERING AND INSPECTION OF WORK
11.1.1 If any portion of the work is covered prior to inspection conducted by the contracting officer or the University’s project manager or Architect/Engineer or any other person, it shall be uncovered for observation. Uncovering and replacement of covering shall be at the installation contractor's expense. The contractor is obligated to advise the contracting officer and the University’s project manager of all work scheduled to be covered which is reasonably subject to prior inspection before actual covering. 11.2
CORRECTION OF WORK
11.2.1 The contractor shall promptly correct all work rejected by the contracting officer the University’s project manager or the Architect/Engineer as defective or as failing to conform to the contract documents whether observed before or after final acceptance and whether or not fabricated, installed or completed. The contractor shall bear all costs of correcting such rejected work including the University’s project manager's or Architect's/Engineer's additional services, if any. 11.2.2 The contractor shall remove from the site all portions of the work, which are defective, or nonconforming and which have not been corrected unless the contracting officer waives removal. 11.2.3 If the contractor does not proceed with the correction of such defective or non-conforming work within a reasonably time, fixed by written notice from the contracting officer, University’s project manager or the Architect/Engineer. The contracting officer may make arrangements for such correction by others and charge the cost of doing so to the contractor and/or his/her sureties. The contracting officer may also remove the defective or non-conforming work and may store the materials or equipment at the expense of the contractor. If the contractor does not pay for the cost of such removal and storage within ten (10) additional days written notice, the contracting officer shall sell such material and Page 43 of 55
ROWAN UNIVERSITY GENERAL CONDITIONS Revision 3/10/10
equipment at auction or at private sale and shall account for the net proceeds thereof after deducting all of the costs which are the responsibility of the contractor including compensation for the University’s project manager or Architect's/Engineer's additional services, if any. If such proceeds of sale do not cover all costs, which the contractor should have borne, the difference shall be charged to the contractor and an appropriate credit change order shall be issued. If the payments then or thereafter due the contractor are not sufficient to cover such amount, the contractor and/or his/her surety shall pay the difference to the University. 11.2.4 The contractor shall also be responsible for the cost of making good all work destroyed or damaged by such correction or removal. 11.2.5 Nothing contained herein shall be construed to establish a period of limitation with respect to any other obligation, which the contractor might have under the contract documents. 11.3
ACCEPTANCE OF DEFECTIVE OR NON-CONFORMING WORK
11.3.1 If the contracting officer determines that the best interests of the University will be served by accepting defective or non-conforming work, he/she may do so instead of requiring its removal and correction. In such instance, a change order will be issued to reflect an appropriate and equitable reduction in the contract sum. Such adjustment shall be effected regardless of final payment having been previously made and the contractor and/or his/her surety shall be responsible for promptly providing any funds due the University as a result thereof. ARTICLE 12 - PROTECTION OF PERSONS AND PROPERTY 12.1
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS AND PROGRAMS
12.1.1 The contractor shall be responsible for initiating, maintaining and supervising all safety precautions and programs in connection with the work. He/she shall designate a responsible member of his/her organization at the site whose duty shall be the prevention of accidents. This person shall be the contractor's superintendent unless otherwise designated by the contractor in writing to the University and the University’s project manager. 12.2
SAFETY OF PERSONS AND PROPERTY
12.2.1 The contractor shall give all notices and comply with all applicable laws, ordinance, rules, regulations and lawful orders of any public authority bearing on the safety of persons or property or their protection from damage, injury or loss, including but not limited to OSHA. 12.2.2 The contractor shall take all necessary precautions for the safety of and shall provide all necessary protection to prevent damage, injury and loss to: (a)
every employee on the work and all other persons who may be affected thereby
(b)
all the work and all materials and equipment to be incorporated therein whether in storage on or off the site, under the care, custody or control of the contractor or any of his/her sub-contractors or sub-sub-contractors Page 44 of 55
ROWAN UNIVERSITY GENERAL CONDITIONS Revision 3/10/10
(c)
other property at the site or adjacent thereto, including trees, shrubs, lawns, walks, pavements, roadways, structures and utilities not designed for removal, relocation or replacement in the course of construction
12.2.3 As required by existing conditions and progress of work, the contractor shall erect and maintain all necessary safeguards for safety and protection, including but not limited to rails, night lights, the posting of danger signs and other warnings against hazards, promulgating safety regulations, notifying owners and users of adjacent utilities and other means of protection against accidental injury or damage to persons and property. 12.2.4 When the use or storage of explosives or other hazardous materials or equipment is necessary for the execution of the work, the contractor shall exercise the utmost care and shall only carry on such activities under the supervision of properly qualified personnel. 12.2.5 The contractor shall not load or permit any part of the work to be loaded so as to endanger the work or any person. 12.2.6 The contractor shall promptly remedy all damage or loss to any property caused in whole or in part by the contractor, any of his/her sub-contractors, sub-sub-contractors or anyone directly or indirectly employed by any of these or by anyone for whose acts any of them may be liable and for which the contractor is responsible except damage or loss attributable solely to the acts or omissions of the University, the Architect/Engineer or anyone directly or indirectly employed by either of them or by anyone of whose acts either of them may be liable and not attributable to the fault or negligence of the contractor. The foregoing obligations of the contractor are in addition to his/her obligations stated elsewhere herein. 12.2.7 The contractor shall provide and maintain in good operating condition suitable and adequate fire protection equipment and services and shall comply with all reasonable recommendations regarding fire protection made by the representatives of the property insurance company carrying insurance on the work or by the local fire chief or fire marshal and other entity with jurisdiction over the site. The area within the site limits and surrounding areas shall be kept orderly and clean and all combustible and other rubbish shall be promptly removed from the site. 12.2.8 At all times, the contractor shall protect excavations, trenches, buildings and materials from rain water, ground water, back-up or leakage of sewers, drains and other piping and from water of any other origin and shall promptly remove any accumulation of water. The contractor shall provide and operate all pumps, piping and other equipment necessary to this end. 12.2.9
The contractor shall remove snow and ice, which might result in damage or delay.
12.2.10 In the event that contractor fails to comply with the provisions of the Section 12.2, the University may withhold from each invoice a percentage in addition to any other retainage required by the contract or the contract price in accordance with the following table When Total Contract Price Is: less than $250,000. $250,000. to $1,000,000. over $1,000,000.
Percentage to be Withheld Is: 10% 5% 2% Page 45 of 55
ROWAN UNIVERSITY GENERAL CONDITIONS Revision 3/10/10
The withholding of any sums pursuant to this section shall not be construed as or constitute in any manner a waiver by the University of the contractor's obligation to comply with the provisions of this Section 12.2. In the event the contractor fails to comply with the provisions of this Section 12.2, the University shall have those rights and remedies provided by law and pursuant to this contract in addition to and not in lieu of the sums withheld in accordance with this section. 12.3
EMERGENCIES
12.3.1 In any emergency affecting the safety of persons or property, the contractor shall act with diligence at his/her discretion to prevent threatening injury, damage or loss. In such case, he/she shall immediately notify those individuals or entities designated at the pre-construction meeting. The Contractor shall immediately thereafter notify the contracting officer through the University’s project manager of the action taken and shall forthwith prepare and submit a detailed and documented report of the occurrence and all actions taken in response thereto. ARTICLE 13 - INSURANCE AND INDEMNITY 13.1
CONTRACTOR INSURANCE REQUIREMENTS
13.1.1 The Contractor shall secure and maintain in force for the term of the Contract, insurance coverage provided herein. All insurance coverage is subject to the approval of the University and shall be issued by an insurance company authorized to do business in the State of New Jersey and which maintains an A.M. Best rating of A- (VII) or better. 13.1.2 The Contractor shall provide the University with current Certificates of Insurance for all coverage and renewals thereof which must contain the provision that the insurance provided in the certificate shall not be canceled for any reason except after thirty (30) days written notice to the University. All insurance required herein shall contain a waiver of subrogation in favor of the University. All insurance required herein, except Workers' Compensation and Owners and Contractors Protective, shall name ROWAN University, the State of New Jersey, the architect/engineer and University’s Project Manager as additional insureds. 13.1.2 Commercial General Liability insurance written on an occurrence form including independent contractor liability, products/completed operations liability, contractual liability, covering but not limited to the liability assumed under the indemnification provisions of this contract. Coverage for bodily injury and property damage claims arising out of the professional acts of the general contractor and subcontractors shall also be included. The policy shall not include any endorsement that restricts or reduces coverage as provided by the ISO CG0001 form without the approval of the University. The minimum limits of liability shall not be less than a combined single limit of one million dollars ($1,000,000) per occurrence, two million dollars ($2,000,000) general aggregate, two million dollars ($2,000,000) product/completed operations aggregate. The Products and Completed Operations insurance shall be maintained for two (2) years after final payment. A “per project endorsement” shall be included, so that the general aggregate limit applies solely to the project that is the subject of this contract. 13.1.3 Comprehensive Automobile Liability covering owned, non-owned, and hired vehicles. The limits of liability shall not be less than a combined single limit of one million dollars ($1,000,000) per occurrence. 13.1.4 Worker's Compensation Insurance applicable to the laws of the State of New Jersey and other State or Page 46 of 55
ROWAN UNIVERSITY GENERAL CONDITIONS Revision 3/10/10
Federal jurisdiction required to protect the employees of the Contractor and any Subcontractor who will be engaged in the performance of this Contract. The certificate must so indicate that no proprietor, partner, executive officer or member is excluded. This insurance shall include Employers' Liability Protection with a limit of liability not less than one million dollars ($1,000,000) bodily injury, each occurrence, one million dollars ($1,000,000) disease, each employer, and two million dollars ($2,000,000) disease, aggregate limit. Including the employer’s liability insurance under the umbrella insurance can satisfy the limit requirements. 13.1.5 The Contractor shall obtain and maintain a separate Owners and Contractor's Protective Liability Insurance Policy for the same limits of liability as specified for the Commercial General Liability Insurance in the name of the University, the State of New Jersey. The Architect/Engineer, and the University’s Project Manager are to be the named as additional insured. The policy shall be maintained in force for the term of the Project or one year, whichever is longer. 13.1.6 Excess Liability, umbrella insurance form, applying excess of primary to the commercial general liability, commercial automobile liability and employer’s liability insurance shall be provided with minimum limits of five million dollars ($5,000,000) per occurrence, five million dollars ($5,000,000) general aggregate, and five million dollars ($5,000,000) products/completed operations. 13.1.6.1
The General Liability insurance General Aggregate and Umbrella Excess Liability limits shall apply and be written exclusively, in total, to this Project only. A per project endorsement for all coverage’s and limits must be included in each policy. 1.
Bodily injury and property damage insurance policies shall be so written as to provide coverage for special hazards where such hazards will be incidental to subcontractors’ work.
13.1.7 The contractor shall require all its subcontractors and sub-subcontractors and any other company employed by the contractor working on this project to maintain during the life of the contract agreement(s) between itself and its sub-contractors, along with agreements between its subcontractors and their subcontractors, until final acceptance of the work by the University the insurance limits and requirements as defined above. It is a contractor option to determine the amount of excess liability it will require its subcontractors to carry however all insurance shall be written on a “per project” basis. The contractor shall be responsible for obtaining certificates of insurance from all of it’s subcontractors, sub-subcontractors, etc. for all coverage and renewals thereof for each company either hired directly by the contractor or hired by the contractors subcontractors working on this project prior to each company beginning work on the project. The contractor shall provide copies of all subcontractor certificates of insurance to the University. 1. ALL SUBCONTRACTOR CERTIFICATES MUST BE SUBMITTED PRIOR TO THE START OF WORK ON THE SITE. 13.1.8 Prior to commencement of construction, the contractor shall provide four (4) certified copies of such insurance policy or certificate of such insurance to be delivered to the University’s project manager and the University. 13.1.9 Should the contractor fail to comply with all insurance requirements indicated in the contract documents and provide satisfactory evidence of such compliance to the University within seven (7) calendar days of the issuance of a Notice to Proceed, contract and/or receipt by the contractor of a University purchase order on this project from the University, the contracting officer will consider the contractor to be in violation of the contract documents. Upon such declaration of a breach of contract, the Page 47 of 55
ROWAN UNIVERSITY GENERAL CONDITIONS Revision 3/10/10
contracting officer through the University’s project manager without prejudice to any other right or remedy available to the University and after giving the contractor and/or its surety three (3) working days written notice can either terminate the employment of the contractor for this project or purchase the required insurance. If the University chooses to purchase the required insurance it will deduct the cost of said insurance from the contact amount agreed upon with the contractor. Under either option selected by the University the contractor will have no recourse against the University. 13.2
INSURANCE TO BE CARRIED BY THEUNIVERSITY
13.2.1 The University shall provide insurance protection in the form of a Builders Risk Insurance or similar Policy upon the structure for which the Work on this Contract is to be done. The structure will be insured for 100% of the insurable replacement value thereof including materials, owned by the University, in place or to be used as part of the permanent construction including surplus materials. Should the structure be damaged or destroyed as a result of the contractors’ negligence the University will subrogate against the contractor for the cost to repair or replace the damage to bring the structure back to the condition intended under this contract. 13.2.2 This insurance shall not protect against damage or loss to any of the Contractor's or Subcontractor's property including but not limited to tools, equipment, scaffolding, staging towers or forms, Contractor's materials and sheds or other temporary structures erected for used by the Contractor or Subcontractors. It is understood that the Contractor will at their own expense, carry all insurance which may be required to provide the necessary protection against such loss or damage herein described which insurance shall contain a waiver of any right of subrogation against the University. 13.2.3 The insurance procured by the University under this paragraph may provide for a deductible. The Contractor shall assume the responsibility for any deductible for any builder’s risk loss it may make claim for under this policy. 13.2.4 The Contractor shall immediately notify the University, in writing and take any other appropriate steps as may be required under the standard Builder's Risk Insurance Policy in effect in the event of any loss. Prior to the acceptance of the building by the University, the Contractor shall, at the University's option, replace and repair the damaged Work as originally provided in the drawings and specifications at no additional compensation to that provided in the original contract. 13.2.5 All losses will be adjusted with, and payable to, the University. 13.2.6 The Contractor shall not include any cost for Builders Risk insurance premiums as described herein. However, this provision shall not relieve the Contractor from their obligation to complete, according to plans and specifications, the project covered by the contract, and the Contractor and their Surety shall be obligated to full performance of the Contractor's undertaking.
ARTICLE 14 - CHANGES IN THE WORK 14.1
CHANGES IN THE WORK
14.1.1 Changes to this Contract may only be accomplished by a Change Order issued in accordance with the procedures set forth in this Article 14 and Division #1 of the Specifications. The Change Order may result in an increase, decrease or have no effect upon the Contract Price only. The contract time can not and will not be adjusted Page 48 of 55
ROWAN UNIVERSITY GENERAL CONDITIONS Revision 3/10/10
for any reason. 14.1.2
LEFT BLANK
14.1.3 Change Orders shall include all impacts that the change to the work may have upon the performance of the job and shall resolve all issues between the parties related, either directly or indirectly, to the change. By executing the Change Order, the Contractor waives the right to assert any future claims of any kind caused in whole or in part by the change. 14.2
OWNER DIRECTED CHANGES
14.2.1 At any time after execution of this contract by all parties the contracting officer may make any change in the work within the general scope of the contract including, but limited to, changes as follows: (a) in the specifications, including drawings and designs; (b) in the method or manner of performance of the work; (c) in the University furnished facilities, equipment, materials, services or site; (d) directing acceleration in the performance of the work. 14.2.2
LEFT BLANK
14.3
LEFT BLANK
14.3.1
LEFT BLANK
14.4
FAILURE TO PROVIDE NOTIFICATION
14.4.1 In the event that the Contractor fails to provide the immediate notification to the University’s project manager and/or to complete the "Change Order Request" pursuant to and as specified elsewhere in the contract documents with the supporting documentation as set forth in the Specifications, the Contractor shall have waived any and all claims for additional compensation related to said changes or conditions encountered. 14.5
LEFT BLANK
14.5.1
LEFT BLANK
14.5.2
LEFT BLANK
14.5.3 In the event that the parties cannot agree to a lump sum amount for a Change Order, the University’s project manager shall be permitted to order the Contractor to completed the work covered by the Change Order on a time and material basis, under procedures established by the University’s project manager to ensure the proper accounting of direct labor and direct material costs. The Contractor shall be allowed the same allowance for overhead and profit as set forth in the contract documents. 14.6
LEFT BLANK Page 49 of 55
ROWAN UNIVERSITY GENERAL CONDITIONS Revision 3/10/10
14.6.1
LEFT BLANK
14.6.2
LEFT BLANK
14.7
CONTINUATION OF THE WORK
14.7.1 In order to avoid delays in the progress of work or when, in the best interest of the University, the contracting officer may, at his/her discretion, direct the contractor in writing to proceed with a change without a prior agreement on costs. Such direction shall be in the form of an unpriced Change Order or letter of direction. If the contractor intends to assert a request for additional compensation under this article, he/she shall do so to the University’s project manager in sufficient detail and in accordance with all contract document requirements hereof after receipt of an unpriced change order or letter of direction. 14.7.2 Where the cost of property made obsolete or excess as a result of a change is included in the contractor's request for adjustment, the contracting officer shall have the right to prescribe the manner of deposition of such property. ARTICLE 15 - ASSIGNMENT OF ANTITRUST CLAIM(S) 15.1
ASSIGNMENT OF ANTITRUST CLAIM(S)
15.1.1 The contractor recognizes that in actual economic practice, overcharges resulting from antitrust violations are, in fact, usually borne by the ultimate purchaser. Therefore, and as a consideration for executing this contract, the contractor, acting herein by and through its duly authorized agent, hereby conveys, sells, assigns and transfers to the University all right, title and interest to all claims and causes of action it may now of hereafter acquire under the antitrust laws of the United States or the State of New Jersey relating to the particular goods or services purchased or acquired by the University pursuant to this contract.
In connection with this agreement, the following are the express obligations of the contractor: (a)
it will take no action, which will in any way diminish the value of the rights conveyed or assigned hereunder
(b)
it will advise the University:
(c)
(1)
in advance of its intention to commence any action on its own behalf regarding such claim or cause(s) of action
(2)
immediately upon becoming aware of the fact that action has been commenced on its behalf by some other person(s) of the pendency of such action
it will notify the defendants in any antitrust suit of the fact of the within assignment at the earliest practicable opportunity after the contractor has initiated an action on its behalf or becomes aware that such an action has been filed on his/her behalf Page 50 of 55
ROWAN UNIVERSITY GENERAL CONDITIONS Revision 3/10/10
by any other person; a copy of such notice will be sent to the University. Furthermore, it is understood and agreed that in the event any payment under any such claim or cause of action is made to the contractor, it shall promptly pay over to the University the aliquot share thereof, if any, assigned to the University herein. ARTICLE 16 - AFFIRMATIVE ACTION REQUIREMENTS 16.1
POLICY STATEMENT
It has long been the policy of the University to promote equal employment opportunity by prohibiting discrimination in employment and requiring affirmative action in the performance of contracts funded by the University. This policy has been reinforced and expended by an act of the legislature. The new statute, New Jersey Public Law 1975, Chapter IR, provides that no public works contractor can be awarded nor any monies paid until the prospective contractor has agreed to contract performance, which complies with the approved affirmative action plan. The law applies to each political subdivision and agency of the State and includes procurement and service contracts as well as construction contracts. This section was prepared to explain the affirmative action requirements and procedures for public agencies awarding contracts and for contractors bidding on contracts. To assure effective implementation of the affirmative action law while allowing the business operations of a government to proceed efficiently, these regulations are designed to minimize administrative paperwork and delays. 16.2
MANDATORY LANGUAGE During the performance of this contract, the contractor agrees as follows: (a)
Where applicable, the contractor or sub-contractor will not discriminate against any employee or applicant for employment because of age, race, creed, color, national origin, ancestry, marital status, sex, affectional or sexual orientation. The contractor will take affirmative action to insure that such applicants are recruited and employed and that employees are treated during employment without regard to their age, race, creed, color, national origin, ancestry, marital status, sex, affectional or sexual orientation. Such action shall include, but not be limited to, the following: employment, upgrading, demotion, transfer, recruitment or recruitment advertising, lay-off or termination, rates of pay or other forms of compensation and the selection for training, including apprenticeship. The contractor agrees to post in conspicuous places available to employees and applicants for employment notices to be provided by the public agency compliance officer setting forth provisions of this non-discrimination clause.
(b)
Where applicable, the contractor or sub-contractor will, in all solicitations or advertisements for employees placed by or on behalf of the contractor, state that all qualified applicants will receive consideration for employment without regard to age, race, creed, color, national origin, ancestry, marital status, sex, affectional or sexual orientation.
(c)
Where applicable, the contractor or sub-contractor will send to each labor union or representative of workers with which it has a collective bargaining agreement or Page 51 of 55
ROWAN UNIVERSITY GENERAL CONDITIONS Revision 3/10/10
other contract or understanding a notice to be provided by the agency contracting officer advising the labor union or worker's representative of the contractor's commitments under this act and shall post copies of the notice in conspicuous places available to employees and applicants for employment. (d)
Where applicable, the contractor or sub-contractor agrees to comply with any regulations promulgated by the Treasurer pursuant to P.L. 1975, c.127, as amended and supplemented from time to time.
(e)
When hiring workers in each construction trade, the contractor or sub-contractor agrees to attempt in good faith to employ minority and female workers in each construction trade consistent with the applicable employment goal prescribed by N.J.A.C. 17:27-7.3 provided, however, that the affirmative action officer may, in its discretion, exempt a contractor or sub-contractor from compliance with the good faith procedures prescribed by the following provisions (a), (b) and (c) as long as the affirmative action office is satisfied that the contractor is employing workers provided by a union which provides evidence in accordance with standards prescribed by the affirmative action office that its percentage of active, "card carrying" members who are minority and female workers is equal to or greater than the applicable employment goal prescribed by N.J.A.C. 17:27-7.3 promulgated by the Treasurer pursuant to P.L. 1975, c.127, as amended and supplemented from time to time. The contractor or sub-contractor agrees that a good faith effort shall include compliance with the following procedures: (1)
If the contractor or sub-contractor has a referral agreement or arrangement with a union for a construction trade, the contractor or sub-contractor shall, within three (3) days of the contract award, seek assurances from the union that it will cooperate with the contractor or sub-contractor as it fulfills its affirmative action obligations under this contract and in accordance with the rules promulgated by the Treasurer pursuant to P.L. 1975, c.127, as it is amended and supplemented from time to time. If the contractor or sub-contractor is unable to obtain said assurances from the construction trade union at least five (5) days prior to the commencement of construction work, the contractor or sub-contractor agrees to directly attempt to hire minority and female workers consistent with the applicable employment goal. If the contractor's or sub-contractor's prior experience with a construction trade union, regardless of whether the union has provided said assurances, indicates a significant possibility that the trade union will not refer sufficient minority and female workers consistent with the applicable employment goal, the contractor or sub-contractor agrees to be prepared to hire minority and female workers directly consistent with the applicable employment goal by complying with the hiring procedures prescribed under (2) below and the contractor or subcontractor further agrees to take immediate said action if it determines or is so notified by the affirmative action office that the union is not referring minority and female workers consistent with the applicable employment goal. Page 52 of 55
ROWAN UNIVERSITY GENERAL CONDITIONS Revision 3/10/10
(2)
If the hiring of a workforce consistent with the employment goal has not or cannot be achieved for each construction trade by adhering to the procedures of (1) above or if the contractor or sub-contractor dos not have a referral agreement or arrangement with a union for a construction trade, the contractor or sub-contractor agrees to take the following actions consistent with the applicable county employment goals. (a)
to notify the public agency compliance officer, affirmative action office and at least one (1) approved minority referral organization of its manpower needs and request the referral of minority and female workers;
(b)
to notify any minority and female workers who have been listed with it as awaiting available vacancies; prior to commencement of work to request the local construction trade union, if the contractor or sub-contractor has a referral agreement or arrangement with a union for the construction trade, to refer minority and female workers to fill job openings;
(c)
(d)
to leave standing requests for additional referral to minority and female workers with the local construction trade union if the contractor or sub-contractor has a referral agreement or arrangement with a union for the construction trade, the State training and employment service and the other approved referral sources in the area until such time as the workforce is consistent with the employment goal;
(e)
if it is necessary to lay-off some of the workers in a given trade on the construction site to assure, consistent with the applicable State and Federal statutes and court decisions, that sufficient minority and female employees remain on the site consistent with the employment goal and to employ any minority and female workers laid-off by the contractor or on any other construction site in the area on which its workforce composition is not consistent with an employment goal established pursuant to rules implementing P.L. 1975, c.127;
(f)
to adhere to the following procedure when minority and female workers apply or are referred to the contractor or sub-contractor: (i)
If said individuals have never previously received any document or certification signifying a level of qualification lower than that required, Page 53 of 55
ROWAN UNIVERSITY GENERAL CONDITIONS Revision 3/10/10
the contractor or sub-contractor shall determine the qualifications of such individuals and, if the contractor's or sub-contractor's workforce in each construction trade is not consistent with the applicable employment goal, it shall employ such persons which satisfy appropriate qualification standards provided, however, that a contractor or sub-contractor shall determine that the individual at least possess the skills and experience recognized by any workers' skill and experience classification determination which may have been made by a public agency compliance officer, union, apprentice program or referral agency provided the referral agency is acceptable to the affirmative action office and provided further that, if necessary, the contractor or sub-contractor shall hire minority and female workers who qualify as trainees pursuant to these regulations. All of the requirements of this paragraph, however, are limited by the provisions of paragraph (3) below.
(g)
(ii)
If the contractor's or sub-contractor's workforce is consistent with the applicable employment goal, the name of said minority or female group individual shall be maintained on a waiting list for the first consideration in the event the contractor's or sub-contractor's workforce is no longer consistent with the applicable employment goal.
(iii)
If, for any reason, said contractor or subcontractor determines that a minority individual or a female is not qualified or if the individual qualifies as an advanced trainee or apprentice, the contractor or sub-contractor shall inform the individual in writing with the reasons for the determination and maintain a copy in its files and send a copy to the public agency compliance officer and to the affirmative action office.
to keep a complete and accurate record of all requests made for the referral of workers in any trade covered by the contract on forms made available by the affirmative action office and shall be submitted promptly to that office upon request. Page 54 of 55
ROWAN UNIVERSITY GENERAL CONDITIONS Revision 3/10/10
(3)
The contractor or sub-contractor agrees that nothing contained in (2) preceding provision shall preclude the contractor or sub-contractor from complying with the hiring hall or apprenticeship provisions in any applicable bargaining agreement or hiring hall arrangement and, where required by custom or agreement, it shall send journeymen and trainees to the union for referral or to the apprenticeship program for admission pursuant to such agreement or arrangement provided, however, that where the practices of a union or apprenticeship program will result in the exclusion of minorities and females or the failure to refer minorities and females consistent with the county employment goal, the contractor or sub-contractor shall consider for employment persons referred pursuant to said provisions (2) without regarding to such agreement or arrangement; provided further, however, that the contractor or sub-contractor shall not be required to employ minority and female advanced trainees and trainees in numbers which result in the employment of advanced trainees and trainees as a percentage of the total workforce for the construction trade which percentage significantly exceeds the apprentice to journey worker ratio specified in the applicable collective bargaining agreement or, in the absence of a collective bargaining agreement, exceeds the ratio established by practice in the area for said construction trade. Also, the contractor or subcontractor agrees that in implementing the procedures of the preceding provisions (2) it shall, where applicable, employ minority and female workers residing within the geographical jurisdiction of the union.
(4)
The contractor agrees to complete an initial manning report on forms provided by the affirmative action office on in the form prescribed by the affirmative action office and submit a copy of said form no later than three (3) days after signing a construction contract provided, however, that the public agency may extend in a particular case the allowable time for submitting the form to no more than fourteen (14) days and to submit a copy of the monthly project manning report once a month by the seventh (7th) work day of each month thereafter for the duration of this contract to the affirmative action office and to the public agency compliance officer. The contractor agrees to cooperate with the public agency in the payment of budgeted funds as is necessary for on-the-job and off-the-job programs for outreach and training of minority and female trainees employed on the construction site.
(5) The contractor and its sub-contractors shall furnish such reports or other documents to the affirmative action office as may be requested by the office from time to time in order to carry out the purposes of these regulations and public agencies shall furnish such information as may be requested by the affirmative action office for conducting a compliance investigation pursuant to Sub-Chapter 10 of the Administrative Code, N.J.A.C. 17:27.
Page 55 of 55
THIS AGREEMENT, made this day of , 2011, by and between ROWAN UNIVERSITY, herein called “Owner”, acting herein through its Vice President for Administration and Finance, and CONTRACTOR NAME CONTRACTOR ADDRESS CONTRACTOR CITY, STATE & ZIP CODE A Corporation, State of New Jersey, hereinafter called CONTRACTOR. The Contractor hereby agrees with the Owner to commence and complete the construction described as follows: PROJECT NAME PROJECT NUMBER PURCHASE ORDER NUMBER The Contractor agrees to furnish all labor, material, equipment and services necessary to construct and complete the project as detailed in Rowan University’s Bid No. , dated , hereinafter called the Project, for the sum of , to include the base bid items and to include all work in connection therewith, under the terms as stated in the General Conditions of the Project Specifications, and at his (its or their) own proper cost and expense to furnish all the materials, supplies, machinery, equipment tools, superintendence, labor, insurance, and services necessary to complete the said project in accordance with the conditions and prices stated in the Contract Documents, as detailed on Exhibit “A” attached hereto and made a part hereof. Unless the Notice to Proceed specifies a different date, the contractor hereby agrees to commence work under this contract as soon as possible but no later than _______________________________, and to fully complete the project within _____ consecutive calendar days thereafter. Time is the essence for the completion of this contract. The Contractor further agrees to pay, as liquidates damages, the sum of ______________ for each consecutive calendar day thereafter as hereinafter provided in Article 8 of the General Conditions. The OWNER agrees to pay the CONTRACTOR for the performance of the contract, subject to additions and deductions, as provided in the General Conditions of the Contract Specifications, and to make payments on account thereof as provided in Article 10 of the General Conditions and Section 012500 – Contract Modification Procedures.
Page 1 of 7
“The Contractor shall comply with the provisions of Chapter 33, of Title 52 of the Revised Statues (R.S. 52:33-1 et seq) requiring that preference be given to the use of domestic materials or as same may be governed by Federal Law or Regulation. Mandatory Equal Employer Opportunity Language N.J.S.A. 10:5-31 et seq., N.J.A.C. 17:27 During the performance of this contract, the contractor agrees as follows: The contractor or subcontractor, where applicable, will not discriminate against any employee or applicant for employment because of age, race, creed, color, national origin, ancestry, marital status, affectional or sexual orientation, gender identity or expression, disability, nationality or sex. Except with respect to affectional or sexual orientation and gender identity or expression, the contractor will ensure that equal employment opportunity is afforded to such applicants in recruitment and employment, and that employees are treated during employment, without regard to their age, race, creed, color, national origin, ancestry, marital status, affectional or sexual orientation, gender identity or expression, disability, nationality or sex. Such equal employment opportunity shall include, but not be limited to the following: employment, upgrading, demotion, or transfer; recruitment or recruitment advertising; layoff or termination; rates of pay or other forms of compensation; and selection for training, including apprenticeship. The contractor agrees to post in conspicuous places, available to employees and applicants for employment, notices to be provided by the Public Agency Compliance Officer setting forth provisions of this nondiscrimination clause. The contractor or subcontractor, where applicable will, in all solicitations or advertisements for employees placed by or on behalf of the contractor, state that all qualified applicants will receive consideration for employment without regard to age, race, creed, color, national origin, ancestry, marital status, affectional or sexual orientation, gender identity or expression, disability, nationality or sex. The contractor or subcontractor, where applicable, will send to each labor union or representative of workers with which it has a collective bargaining agreement or other contract or understanding, a notice, to be provided by the agency contracting officer advising the labor union or workers' representative of the contractor's commitments under this act and shall post copies of the notice in conspicuous places available to employees and applicants for employment. The contractor or subcontractor where applicable, agrees to comply with any regulations promulgated by the Treasurer pursuant to N.J.S.A. 10:5-31 et seq., as amended and supplemented from time to time and the Americans with Disabilities Act. When hiring or scheduling workers in each construction trade, the contractor or subcontractor agrees to make good faith efforts to employ minority and women workers in each construction trade consistent with the targeted employment goal prescribed by N.J.A.C. 17:27-7.2; provided, however, that the Division may, in its discretion, exempt a contractor or subcontractor from compliance with the good faith procedures prescribed by the following provisions, A, B and C, as long as the Division is satisfied that the contractor or subcontractor is employing workers provided by a union which provides evidence, in accordance with standards prescribed by the Division , that its percentage of active "card carrying" members
Page 2 of 7
who are minority and women workers is equal to or greater than the targeted employment goal established in accordance with N.J.A.C. 17:27-7.2. The contractor or subcontractor agrees that a good faith effort shall include compliance with the following procedures: (A) If the contractor or subcontractor has a referral agreement or arrangement with a union for a construction trade, the contractor or subcontractor shall, within three business days of the contract award, seek assurances from the union that it will cooperate with the contractor or subcontractor as it fulfills its affirmative action obligations under this contract and in accordance with the rules promulgated by the Treasurer pursuant to N.J.S.A. 10:5-31 et. seq., as supplemented and amended from time to time and the Americans with Disabilities Act. If the contractor or subcontractor is unable to obtain said assurances from the construction trade union at least five business days prior to the commencement of construction work, the contractor or subcontractor agrees to afford equal employment opportunities to minority and women workers directly, consistent with this chapter. If the contractor's or subcontractor's prior experience with a construction trade union, regardless of whether the union has provided said assurances, indicates a significant possibility that the trade union will not refer sufficient minority and women workers consistent with affording equal employment opportunities as specified in this chapter, the contractor or subcontractor agrees to be prepared to provide such opportunities to minority and women workers directly, consistent with this chapter, by complying with the procedures prescribed under (B) below; and the contractor or subcontractor further agrees to take said action immediately if it determines or is so notified by the Division that the union is not referring minority and women workers consistent with the equal employment opportunity goals set forth in this chapter. (B)
If good faith efforts to meet targeted employment goals have not or cannot be met for each construction trade by adhering to the procedures of (A) above, or if the contractor does not have a referral agreement or arrangement with a union for a construction trade, the contractor or subcontractor agrees to take the following actions: (1) To notify the public agency compliance officer, the Division, and minority and women referral organizations listed by the Division pursuant to N.J.A.C. 17:275.3, of its workforce needs, and request referral of minority and women workers; (2)
To notify any minority and women workers who have been listed with it as awaiting available vacancies;
(3)
Prior to commencement of work, to request that the local construction trade union refer minority and women workers to fill job openings, provided the contractor or subcontractor has a referral agreement or arrangement with a union for the construction trade;
(4)
To leave standing requests for additional referral to minority and women workers with the local construction trade union, provided the contractor or subcontractor has a referral agreement or arrangement with a union for the construction trade, Page 3 of 7
the State Training and Employment Service and other approved referral sources in the area; (5)
If it is necessary to lay off some of the workers in a given trade on the construction site, layoffs shall be conducted in compliance with the equal employment opportunity and non-discrimination standards set forth in this regulation, as well as with applicable Federal and State court decisions;
(6)
To adhere to the following procedure when minority and women workers apply or are referred to the contractor or subcontractor:
(i)
If said individuals have never previously received any document or certification signifying a level of qualification lower than that required in order to perform the work of the construction trade, the contractor or subcontractor shall in good faith determine the qualifications of such individuals. The contractor or subcontractor shall hire or schedule those individuals who satisfy appropriate qualification standards in conformity with the equal employment opportunity and nondiscrimination principles set forth in this chapter. However, a contractor or subcontractor shall determine that the individual at least possesses the requisite skills, and experience recognized by a union, apprentice program or a referral agency, provided the referral agency is acceptable to the Division. If necessary, the contractor or subcontractor shall hire or schedule minority and women workers who qualify as trainees pursuant to these rules. All of the requirements, however, are limited by the provisions of (C) below.
(ii). The name of any interested women or minority individual shall be maintained on a waiting list, and shall be considered for employment as described in paragraph (i) above, whenever vacancies occur. At the request of the Division, the contractor or subcontractor shall provide evidence of its good faith efforts to employ women and minorities from the list to fill vacancies. (iii). If, for any reason, said contractor or subcontractor determines that a minority individual or a woman is not qualified or if the individual qualifies as an advanced trainee or apprentice, the contractor or subcontractor shall inform the individual in writing of the reasons for the determination, maintain a copy of the determination in its files, and send a copy to the public agency compliance officer and to the Division. (7). To keep a complete and accurate record of all requests made for the referral of workers in any trade covered by the contract, on forms made available by the Division and submitted promptly to the Division upon request.
( C ) The contractor or subcontractor agrees that nothing contained in (B) above shall preclude the contractor or subcontractor from complying with the union hiring hall or apprenticeship policies in any applicable collective bargaining agreement or union hiring hall arrangement, and, where required by custom or agreement, it shall send journeymen and trainees to the union for referral, or to the apprenticeship program for Page 4 of 7
admission, pursuant to such agreement or arrangement. However, where the practices of a union or apprenticeship program will result in the exclusion of minorities and women or the failure to refer minorities and women consistent with the targeted county employment goal, the contractor or subcontractor shall consider for employment persons referred pursuant to (B) above without regard to such agreement or arrangement; provided further, however, that the contractor or subcontractor shall not be required to employ women and minority advanced trainees and trainees in numbers which result in the employment of advanced trainees and trainees as a percentage of the total workforce for the construction trade, which percentage significantly exceeds the apprentice to journey worker ratio specified in the applicable collective bargaining agreement, or in the absence of a collective bargaining agreement, exceeds the ratio established by practice in the area for said construction trade. Also, the contractor or subcontractor agrees that, in implementing the procedures of (B) above it shall, where applicable, employ minority and women workers residing within the geographical jurisdiction of the union. After notification of award, but prior to signing a construction contract, the contractor shall submit to the public agency compliance officer and the Division an initial project workforce report (Form AA 201) provided to the public agency by the Division for distribution to and completion by the contractor, in accordance with N.J.A.C. 17:27-7. The contractor also agrees to submit a copy of the Monthly Project Workforce Report once a month thereafter for the duration of this contract to the Division and to the public agency compliance officer. The contractor agrees to cooperate with the public agency in the payment of budgeted funds, as is necessary, for on-the-job and/or off-the-job programs for outreach and training of minorities and women . (D)
The contractor and its subcontractors shall furnish such reports or other documents to the Division of Public Contracts Equal Employment Opportunity Compliance as may be requested by the Division from time to time in order to carry out the purposes of these regulations, and public agencies shall furnish such information as may be requested by the Division of Public Contracts Equal Employment Opportunity Compliance for conducting a compliance investigation pursuant to Subchapter 10 of the Administrative Code at N.J.A.C. 17:27.
Page 5 of 7
IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the parties to these presents have executed this contract in four (4) counterparts, each of which shall be deemed an original, in the year and day first above mentioned.
ATTEST:
for Rowan University
_______________________ Witness
________________________________ Joseph F. Scully Vice President of Finance Chief Financial Officer
(SEAL)
_________________________________ Contractor Date _________________________________ Title
WARRANTY: It is hereby certified and warranted by the undersigned contractor and by the undersigned principals or officers thereof, for said Contractor and for themselves, personally and individually, that no person has been employed to solicit or secure this Contract in violation of the provisions of Section 10, Chapter 48 of the Laws of 1954, N.J.S.A 52:34-15, or in violation of any other laws of the State of New Jersey; and it is further warranted that all applicable laws and regulations shall be complied with in the performance of this contract.
(SEAL)
___________________________________ Contractor Date By
___________________________________ ___________________________________ Title ___________________________________ Address ___________________________________ City State Zip Code Page 6 of 7
EXHIBIT “A”
Page 7 of 7
CONSENT OF SURETY COMPANY TO FINAL PAYMENT
O\Z~NCE AF,CHITCCT CONTRACTOR
sufim
D 0 D
011icfi
nrA DOCUMCNT C707
PROJECT: (name, address)
1 ARCIHITECT'S PROJECT NO: CONTRACT FOR:
L
C O N T R A 0 DATE:
CONTRACTOR:
In accordance with the provisions of tlic Contract between the Owner and the Contractor as indicated above, the (here anscrl name and address ol Surely Comprnyl
, SUREN COMPANY, on bond 01
there insrtr name m d addrrs ol C o n ! r ~ t o t l
CONTRACTOR, hereby approves of the final payment to the Contractor, and agrees that final payment to the Contractor shall not relieve the Surely Company o f any o f its obligations to lltrrc in%rrlname m d addresr oi Owncrl
, OWNER, as set fortfi i n the said Surety Company's bond
IN WITNESS WIiIRCOF, the Surety Company l i a s liereunto set its hand this
Surety Company
-. Signature 01 Autliorized Represenlalive
Attest: (Scall: Title
NOT[: l l n i s (o,m i r to bc u,rd CLAIMS, Curten[ Cdilion
2% 1
---.
--- . -.
-.-..-- -. -- - -
comnrnion datvmrnt l o AIA D O C U M I N T C7L%. CONTRACIOR'S A l 1 l l ~ A V l l0 1 PAYMCNT 0 1 f)[DTS A N 0
AIA OOCUM[NT C707. C O N S l N I 0 1 SURITY COMPANY TO r i N A l P A Y M l N I ' AI'RII 1970 CDITION ' AIAQ 1970. Ill[ AMCRICAN INSTITUT[ Or ARCIIITICTS. 1715 N t W YOHI: AVI.. NW. WASIIINCTON, O.C >OM(,
6 3
--. - .. . -....
O N [ PAC[
Attachment to G702 (or equivalent) Certification for Payment Project Name: Project Number:
Payment Number:-
, a prime contractor working for 1, Rowan University on the above-mentioned project, hereby certify as required by P.L. 191, c.507 of the State o f . New Jersey that: (you must check one under "A" and one under
","I A. . With respect to previous progress payments:
( )
all my sub-contractors and suppliers have been paid all amounts due from all previous progress payments I have received from Rowan University for my work on this project ( ) all my sub-contractors and suppliers have been paid all amounts due from all previous progress payments with the exception of those listed below for which payment is being withheld as there exists a valid basis for those sub-contractors and suppliers listed below under the terms of their contract(s) to withhold payment from each such sub-contractor and supplier:
For each such sub-contractor and supplier for which payment is being withheld, I further c e m that written notice detailing the specific reason(s) for withholding payment h a s been provided to each such sub-contractor and supplier with copies
thereof provided to my performance bond company and Rowan University. B.
With respect to this payment number
( ) all my sub-contractors and suppliers shall be paid all amounts due from this progress payment ( ) all my sub-contractors and suppliers shall be paid all amounts due from this progress payment with the exception of those listed below for which payment will be withheld a s there exists a valid basis for those sub-contractors and suppliers listed below under the terms of their contract(s) to withhold payment from each such sub-contractor and supplier:
For each sub-contractor and supplier for which payment is being withheld, I further ce& that written notice detailing the specific' reason@)for withholding payment has been provided to each sub-contractor and supplier with copies thereof provided to my performance bond company and Rowan University. I certify that the above statements are true. I am aware that if any of the above statements are willfully false, I am subject to punishment. Dated: Signature Please Print Name
PLANNING AND CONSTRUCTION Project:
ALLOWANCE AUTHORIZATION
Allowance Authorization Number: Date:
Vendor:
RU Project Number: PO Number:
You are authorized to perform the following item(s) of work and to adjust the Allowance Sum accordingly:
This authorization is due to: Owners Request Field Condition Requirement
Unforeseen Condition
Design Error/Omission
DCA Request
Explain:
THIS IS NOT A CHANGE ORDER AND DOES NOT INCREASE OR DECREASE THE CONTRACT AMOUNT Original Allowance ............................................................................................................. $ Allowance Expenditures prior to this Authorization............................................................ $ Allowance Balance prior to this Authorization .................................................................... $ Allowance will be [increased] [decreased] by this Authorization........................................ $ New Allowance Balance...................................................................................................... $
APPROVAL RECOMMENDED _____________________________________________________ Director of Business Services Date Rowan Project Manager
Date
AVP Facilities (amounts >$6,019.99)
CONTRACTOR ACKNOWLEDGEMENT
Date
_____________________________________________________ Contractor Contractor Signature
Date
Attachments
Copies:
Owner
Revision 1 – October 2010
Contractor
Consultants
File
PLANNING AND CONSTRUCTION Project:
ALLOWANCE CHARGE REQUEST (PROPOSAL)
Allowance Charge Request Number: From (Contractor):
To:
Date:_________________________________________________
RU Project Number: Re:
PO Number:
This Allowance Charge Request contains charges to be made against the contract allowance
Description of Proposed Charge:
Attached supporting information from:
Subcontractor
Supplier
Reason for Charge:
Attached pages:
Proposal Worksheet Summary: Proposal Worksheet Details:
Signed by: Date: _______________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Copies:
Owner
Revision 0 – September
Contractor
Consultants
File
Facilities Planning & Construction REQUEST FOR INFORMATION RFI No: Rowan Project No./Description:
Date Submitted: Requested Response Date: Actual Response Date:
Rowan Project Manager: Submitted to: Company: Contract Document Reference:
RFI DISCUSSION
Submitted by (Name & Company):
Individually number each separate topic or question
Title:
Date:
Title:
Date:
RFI RESPONSE
Answered by (Name & Company):
CHANGE ORDER REQUEST
PROJECT: (name, address)
OWNER ARCHITECT CONTRACTOR FIELD OTHER
CHANGE ORDER REQUEST NUMBER: DATE OF ISSUANCE: ARCHITECT’S PROJECT NO: CONTRACT FOR:
OWNER: (name,address)
CONTRACT DATE:
ARCHITECT: (name,address)
FROM CONTRACTOR: (name, address)
The contractor must submit this proposal with all appropriate documentation and/or notify the Architect or Owner, in writing, of the date on which proposal submission is anticitpated.
THIS IS NOT A CHANGE ORDER, A CONSTRUCTION DIRECTIVE OR A DIRECTION TO PROCEED WITH THE WORK DESCRIBED IN THE PROPOSED MODIFICTIONS. DESCRIPTION: (Insert a written description of the Work)
ATTACHMENTS: (List attached documents that support description)
REQUESTED BY THE CONTRACTOR:
_________________________________
(Signature)
_____________________________
(Printed Name and title)
CHANGE ORDER
OWNER
ARCHITECT
CONTRACTOR FIELD OTHER
PROJECT: (name, address)
CHANGE ORDER NUMBER: DATE:
TO CONTRACTOR: (name, address)
ARCHITECT’S PROJECT NO: CONTRACT DATE:
CONTRACT FOR: The Contract is changed as follows:
Not valid until signed by the Owner, Architect and Contractor. The original (Contract Sum) (Guaranteed Maximum Price) was New change by previously authorized Change Orders The (Contract Sum) (Guaranteed Maximum Price) prior to this Change Order was The (Contract Sum) (Guaranteed Maximum Price) will be (increased) (decreased) (unchanged) by this Change Order in the amount of The new (Contract Sum) (Guaranteed Maximum Price) including this Change Order will be The Contract Time will be (increased) (decreased) (unchanged) by The date of Substantial Completion as of the date of this Change Order therefore is NOTE:
(
) days.
This summary does not reflect changes in the Contract Sum, Contract Time or Guaranteed Maximum Price which have been authorized by Construction Change Directive.
_ ARCHITECT
_ CONTRACTOR
_ Address
Address
________
_ BY______________________________
Rowan University OWNER 201 Mullica Hill Road Address Glassboro, NJ 08028-1701
BY_____________________
DATE____________________________ DATE___________________
BY_____________________________________ DATE__________________________________
DAILY JOB REPORT Project # DATE: WEATHER CONDITIONS: VISITORS:
CONTRACTORS ON SITE:
SUPER WORKFORCE ON SITE: ON SITE (Foreman, Tradesmen, (Y/N): Laborers, etc.)
MATERIALS DELIVERED:
NO. OF WORKE RS WORK BEING DONE:
EQUIPMENT ONSITE:
PROBLEMS/STATUS/CAUSES FOR DELAY:
NOTEWORTHY PHONE CALLS:
9/17/2012 12:52 PM
ROWAN UNIVERSITY HOURLY LABOR RATE BREAKDOWN FORM All Contractors (Including sub-subcontractors) need to include a detailed breakdown of all wage rates, payroll burden costs and material costs for lump sum and time and material extras. Payroll burden items, FICA, FUI, SUI, and Workmen’s Compensation will be reimbursed on an average annualized basis. This information must be provided for all trade to be utilized on the project by any and all contractors at the time of contractors bid submission. The required format is as follows: Contractor: ____________________________________________ Address:_______________________________________________ _______________________________________________ _______________________________________________ Telephone:_____________________________________________ Prepared by:____________________________________________ Trade Classification:______________________________________ Local Union No:___________________ (If Applicable) Merit Shop________ Union________ (Check One) Effective Date From__________________ To_________________
Item
(%)
1). Base Rate * 2). Overhead (on base rate only) 3). Profit (on base rate only) 4). F.I.C.A. 5). Federal Unemployment Tax 6). State Unemployment Tax 7). Welfare Fund 8). Pension 9). Vacation Fund 10). Annuity Fund 11). Associate Dues 12). Paid Holiday 13). Workmen’s Compensation 14). Other (Define) 15). Other TOTAL CHARGE PER HOUR
--------
(S) Straight Time (a)
(1 ½ x) (S) Overtime (b) (d) (d)
(S) Premium Cost (b-a)
(2x) (S) Overtime (c)
XXXXXX XXXXXX
XXXXXX XXXXXX XXXXXX XXXXXX XXXXXX XXXXXX
*All rates must be at the current minimum prevailing wage rate for the State of NJ. Please refer to the state website for further information at http://lwd.dol.state.nj.us
(d) (d)
(S) Premium Cost (c-a) XXXXXX XXXXXX
XXXXXX XXXXXX XXXXXX XXXXXX XXXXXX XXXXXX
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
SUMMARY SECTION 011000 08/06
SECTION 011000 - SUMMARY PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. In the event of any conflicts between the requirements of these Sections, the more stringent requirement shall apply. SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes the following: 1. 2.
B.
1.3
Work covered by the Contract Documents Use of premises.
Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 1 Section “Construction Facilities and Temporary Controls” for limitations and procedures governing temporary use of Owner’s premises. WORK COVERED BY CONTRACT DOCUMENTS
A.
Project Identification: Project consists of renovations of the ground and first floor of Winans Hall at Rowan University. Work includes but is not limited to renovations at the ground floor creating a EMS office area, an addition for the housing of the University ambulances, and renovations to the first floor creating a new wellness center. 1. 2.
Project Location: Winans Hall, Rowan University, 201 Mullica Hill Road, Glassboro, New Jersey Owner: Rowan University
B.
Architect Identification: The Contract Documents, dated 1 October 2012, were prepared for Project by Lammey & Giorgio, PA 215 Highland Avenue – Suite B, Haddon Township, NJ 08108.
C.
Project Manager: Blase Iaconelli has been appointed by Owner to serve as Project Manager.
D.
The Work consists of the following: 1. Demolition of the existing walls, ceilings, flooring, windows, electrical wiring, lighting, plumbing fixtures, HVAC ductwork, piping and units, and associated appurtenances. 2. Replacement of designated walls, wall, ceiling & floor finishes, doors, frames, hardware, windows, plumbing, HVAC, electrical, and other indicated work.
SUMMARY
011000 - 1
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
3. 4. 5. 1.4
SUMMARY SECTION 011000 08/06
New Canopy over an expanded loading dock. New Addition for housing the University EMS Ambulances. New front entry plaza and revisions to the meditation garden.
CONTRACT A.
1.5
Project will be constructed under a single prime general construction contract. USE OF PREMISES
E.
General Construction Operations: Contractor shall have full use of premises for construction operations, including a limited use of the project site (outside the facilities exterior walls) during the period of construction activity. Contractor’s use of the premises is limited only by Rowans right to perform work or to retain other contractor’s on portions of the Project or to limit access for events or other functions as the University might require. The contractor will be given notice of any such events well in advance so that arrangements can be made to insure the prosecution of the work continues as scheduled.
F.
Arrange use of site and premises to allow: 1. Owner occupancy. 2. Work by others 3. Work by Owner
G.
Use of Site: Limit use of premises to work in areas indicated. Do not disturb portions of Project site beyond the building perimeter unless prior approval of the University is received prior to conduction such work or operations. 1. 2.
H.
1.6
Limit site disturbance, as approved by Rowan University. Driveways and Entrances: Keep driveways and entrances serving premises clear and available to Rowan University, Rowans employees, and emergency vehicles at all times. Do not use there areas for parking or storage of materials. a. Schedule deliveries to minimize use of the driveways and entrances. b. Schedule deliveries to minimize space and time requirements for storage of materials and equipment on-site.
Use of Existing Building: Maintain existing building in a weather tight condition throughout construction period. Repair damage caused by construction operations. Protect building and its occupants during construction period. Pre-construction photo’s showing all existing building damage conditions must be turned over to Rowan University prior to the start of any construction or construction related activities. SPECIFICATION FORMATS AND CONVENTIONS
I.
Specification Format: The Specifications are organized into Divisions and Sections using the 50-division format and CSI/CSC's "MasterFormat" numbering system.
SUMMARY
011000 - 2
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
1.
1.7
SUMMARY SECTION 011000 08/06
Section Identification: The Specifications use section numbers and titles to help crossreferencing in the Contract Documents. Sections in the Project Manual are in numeric sequence; however, the sequence is incomplete. Consult the table of contents at the beginning of the Project Manual to determine numbers and names of sections in the Contract Documents.
MISCELLANEOUS PROVISIONS 1.
WORK REQUIRED TO BE PERFORMED UNDER THIS CONTRACT SHALL BE COMPLETED IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE FOLLOWING MILESTONES AND COMPLETION DATES. CONTRACTOR SHALL INCLUDE ALL NECESSARY MANHOURS FOR ALL TRADES NECESSARY TO INSURE PROJECT IS COMPLETED ON OR BEFORE ALL PROJECT MILESTONES LISTED IN THE BID DOCUEMNTS. ANY DESCREPENCY IN MILESTONE DATES AND OR PROJECT DURATIONS SHALL REQUIRE THE CONTRACTOR TO ACHIEVE FINAL COMPLETION BY THE EARLIER DATE OR SHORTER TIME DURATION.
2.
PENALTIES OF $750.00 PER DAY SHALL BE IMPOSED FOR EACH DAY OF NON COMPLETION OF WORK BY CONTRACTOR BEYOND THE PROJECT MILESTONES LISTED IN THE BID DOCUMENTS. THIS PENALTY SHALL BE IMPOSED IN ADDITION TO ANY AND ALL CHARGES FOR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES BORN BY THE UNIVERSITY AS A RESULT OF CONTRACTORS FAILURE TO COMPLETE WORK BY MILESTONES INDICATED.
J. K.
Summary of Milestones: 1.
First Floor Milestones: a. Substantial Completion by: Work shall be completed within _218__consecutive calendar days from the Project start date listed in Section 017700 – Contract Closeout. The University intends to issue Notice to Proceed, and/or Construction Contract, and/or University purchase order as evidence of contract award on or before Project start date listed. b. Final Completion by: August 15, 2013. All construction including punch list work will be completed by this date.
2.
Ground Floor Milestones: a. Substantial Completion by: Work shall be completed within _257__consecutive calendar days from the Project start date listed in Section 017700 – Contract Closeout. The University intends to issue Notice to Proceed, and/or Construction Contract, and/or University purchase order as evidence of contract award on or before Project start date listed.
SUMMARY
011000 - 3
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
SUMMARY SECTION 011000 08/06
b. Final Completion by: October 14, 2013. All construction including punch list work will be completed by this date. L.
Weather Conditions: 1. Unfavorable weather conditions shall not be justification for delays in substantial completion or final completion dates as specified. No change orders will be issued or approved for extensions of time due to weather conditions.
D.
Intent of Contract: The drawings and specifications of the contract are intended to require the contractor to provide for everything reasonably necessary to accomplish the proper and complete finishing of the work. All work and materials included in the specifications and not shown on the drawings, or shown on the drawings and not in the specifications, shall be performed and/or furnished by the contractor as if described in both. Any incidental materials and/or work not specified in the drawings and/or the specifications which are, nevertheless, necessary for the true development thereof and reasonably inferable therefrom, the contractor shall understand the same to be implied and required, and shall perform all such work and furnish all such materials as if particularly delineated or described therein. Should there be an obvious error between the drawings and specifications, the most stringent constraints of the conflicting information shall be assumed by the contractor and it shall be the contractor’s responsibility to complete the work as reasonably required, consistent with the intent of such drawings and specifications as may be interpreted by the University.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 - EXECUTION END OF SECTION 011000
SUMMARY
011000 - 4
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
WORK RESTRICTIONS SECTION 011400 1/11
SECTION 011400 – WORK RESTRICTIONS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. In the event of any conflicts between the requirements of these Sections, the more stringent requirement shall apply. USE OF PREMISES
A.
Use of Site: Limit use of premises to work in areas indicated. Do not disturb portions of site beyond areas in which the Work is indicated. 1. 2. 3.
B.
1.3
Limits: Confine construction operations to weekdays (Monday through Friday) from 8:00AM to 5:00PM. Weekend and Holiday work may be permitted if approved by the Owner. Owner Occupancy: Allow for Owner occupancy of building, site and use by the public. Driveways and Entrances: Keep streets, driveways and entrances serving premises clear and available to owner, Owner’s employees, and emergency vehicles at all times. Do not use these areas for parking or storage of materials. a. Schedule deliveries to minimize use of driveways and entrances. b. Schedule deliveries to minimize space and time requirements for storage of materials and equipment on-site.
Use of Existing Building: Repair damage caused by construction operations. Protect building and its occupants during construction period. OCCUPANCY REQUIREMENTS
A.
1.4
Full Owner Occupancy: Owner will occupy site and adjacent buildings during entire construction period. Cooperate with owner during construction operations to minimize conflicts and facilitate Owner usage. Perform the Work so as not to interfere with Owner’s operations. WORK SEQUENCE
A.
All Work shall be completed within 271 calendar days of the Project start date. See section 017700Contract Closeout for additional information. University intends to issue Notice to Proceed, and/or Construction Contract, and/or University Purchase Order as evidence of contract award on or before Project start date listed. 1.
CONTRACTOR SHALL INCLUDE ALL NECESSARY MANHOURS FOR ALL TRADES NECESSARY TO INSURE PROJECT IS COMPLETED ON OR BEFORE ALL PROJECT MILESTONES LISTED IN THE BID DOCUEMNTS. ANY DESCREPENCY
WORK RESTRICTIONS
011400 - 1
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
WORK RESTRICTIONS SECTION 011400 1/11
IN MILESTONE DATES AND OR PROJECT DURATIONS SHALL REQUIRE THE CONTRACTOR TO ACHIEVE FINAL COMPLETION BY THE EARLIER DATE OR SHORTER TIME DURATION. 2.
1.5
PENALTIES OF $750.00 PER DAY SHALL BE IMPOSED FOR EACH DAY OF NON COMPLETION OF WORK BY CONTRACTOR BEYOND THE PROJECT MILESTONES LISTED IN THE BID DOCUMENTS. THIS PENALTY SHALL BE IMPOSED IN ADDITION TO ANY AND ALL CHARGES FOR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES BORN BY THE UNIVERSITY AS A RESULT OF CONTRACTORS FAILURE TO COMPLETE WORK BY MILESTONES INDICATED.
CONTRACTOR WORK AREAS, WORKING CONDITIONS AND EQUIPMENT STORAGE REGULATIONS A.
The Contractor shall not unreasonably encumber the facilities with its equipment or work to be performed. Work conducted by the Contractor, Subcontractor, or any other person and/or fir affiliated with the Contractor shall be contained within pre-designated working areas established by the documents.
B.
The Contractor shall, at all times during the progress of the work, keep the site free from the accumulation of all rubbish and debris caused by its performance. The Contractor shall remove all debris and rubbish related to its work at the end of each workday to the satisfaction of the Project Manager. Tool storage boxes shall not be permitted inside the building on the first floor or outside the building.
C.
The Contractor shall adequately secure and protect its equipment, materials and vehicles. The University assumes no liability for any damage to, or theft of, the Contractor’s property. The Contractor shall have the use of a designated area for storage and staging of construction materials and equipment. The Contractor shall be responsible for adhering to security procedures outlined by the Project Manager.
D.
The Contractor is responsible for all safety precautions for all of its employees and property while performing its services.
E.
The Contractor shall strictly limit its employees’ use of the facilities for lunch, smoking or rest time usage to only those areas designated by the Project Manager. Use of facility telephones will not be allowed. Use of building toilet facilities shall not be permitted. Smoking is not allowed inside the building.
1.6
WORK STOPPAGES, EXISTING UTILITY RESTRICTIONS, AND MATERIAL APPROVALS A.
INTERRUPTIONS,
NOISE
AND
ODOR
Work Stoppages DOES NOT APPLY – NOT ALLOWED
B.
Existing Utility Interruptions: Do not interrupt utilities serving facilities occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide temporary utility services according to requirements indicated:
WORK RESTRICTIONS
011400 - 2
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
1. 2.
WORK RESTRICTIONS SECTION 011400 1/11
Notify Owner not less than two days in advance of proposed utility interruptions. Do not proceed with utility interruptions without Project Manager’s written permission.
C.
Consideration shall be given by the Contractor regarding odors emanating from adhesives and sealants, etc and excessive noise. If the odors or noise are such that they may disturb the employees and guests then such work shall be performed while the building is not occupied. This determination shall be at the sole discretion of the Project Manager. The playing of radios and other unnecessary noise will not be permitted at any time.
D.
All material safety data sheets shall be submitted and approved by the Project Manager prior to use of the material.
1.7
PROTECTION OF INTERIOR FINISHES A.
The Contractor shall take extra care to avoid damage or soiling to any part of the facility. The Contractor is responsible for all damages or destruction caused directly or indirectly by its performance to any part of the building or adjoining property. Any damage or destruction caused by the Contractor or its employees will be repaired or replaced as the Project Manager directs and to their satisfaction with all costs charged to the Contractor. The costs may be deducted from any and all amounts due to the Contractor.
B.
Any of the Contractor’s employees found defacing, damaging or marring the building or its finishes or contents shall be immediately removed by the Contractor. The Contractor shall be charged for all remedial work to restore the damaged area or contents to their original condition to the satisfaction of the State.
C.
The Contractor shall take all necessary steps to ensure adequate protection of all building furniture, equipment and building finishes, including but not limited to: floors, walls, ceilings, windows, draperies, blinds, carpeting, doors, doorways and contents. In this endeavor, all workers are to take precautions to protect rugs and floors. The Contractor shall be charged for all remedial work to clean, repair and/or replace items damaged by the Contractor to the satisfaction of the State.
D.
The Contractor is responsible for the cost of cleanup of dust, dirt and stains caused by the work to the satisfaction of the Project Manager. The Contractor shall take all necessary precautions to keep dust, dirt and debris to a minimum both within the construction area and throughout the buildings.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used) END OF SECTION 011400
WORK RESTRICTIONS
011400 - 3
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
ALLOWANCES SECTION 012100 08/06
SECTION 012100 - ALLOWANCES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. In the event of any conflicts between the requirements of these Sections, the more stringent requirement shall apply. SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements governing allowances. 1.
B.
Types of allowances include the following: 1.
C.
Lump-sum allowances.
Related Sections include the following: 1. 2.
1.3
Certain items are specified in the Contract Documents by allowances. Allowances have been established in lieu of additional requirements and to defer selection of actual materials and equipment to a later date when additional information is available for evaluation. If necessary, additional requirements will be issued by Change Order Directive THE ALLOWANCE SHALL BE INCLUDED IN THE CONTRACTORS BASE BID PROPOSAL.
Division 1 Section "Quality Control Services" for procedures governing the use of allowances for testing and inspecting. Divisions 2 through 50 Sections for items of Work covered by allowances.
SELECTION AND PURCHASE A.
If applicable, at the earliest practical date after award of the Contract, advise Architect of the date when final selection and purchase of each product or system described by an allowance must be completed to avoid delaying the Work.
B.
At Architects request and Owners approval, obtain proposals for each allowance for use in making final selections. Include recommendations that are relevant to performing the Work.
C.
Purchase products and systems selected by Architect from the designated supplier.
ALLOWANCES
012100- 1
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
1.4
ALLOWANCES SECTION 012100 08/06
SUBMITTALS A.
Submit proposals for purchase of products or systems included in allowances, in the form specified for Change Orders.
B.
Submit invoices or delivery slips to show actual quantities of materials delivered to the site for use in fulfillment of each allowance.
C.
Coordinate and process submittals for allowance items in same manner as for other portions of the Work.
D.
All Allowances will be recorded as separate line items on the initial Schedule of Values to be approved by the Owner and/or Architect. Once the initial Schedule of Values is approved all subsequent Schedule’s will continue to include these Allowances as separate line items. Allowances will be tracked as separate line items.
1.5
COORDINATION A.
1.6
Coordinate allowance items with other portions of the Work. Furnish templates as required to coordinate installation. LUMP-SUM ALLOWANCES
A.
Allowance shall include cost to Contractor of specific products and materials and shall include taxes, freight, and delivery to Project site.
B.
Contractor's costs for receiving and handling at Project site, labor, installation, overhead and profit, and similar costs related to products and materials accepted by Owner under this Section shall be included as part of the allowance.
1.7
UNUSED MATERIALS A.
Return unused materials purchased under an allowance to manufacturer or supplier for credit to Owner, after installation has been completed and accepted. 1.
1.8
If requested by Architect, prepare unused material for storage by Owner when it is not economically practical to return the material for credit. If directed by Architect, deliver unused material to Owner's storage space. Otherwise, disposal of unused material is Contractor's responsibility.
UNUSED ALLOWANCES A.
All unused Allowances are and will remain the Owner’s property. The Contractor shall return any remaining Allowance balances to the Owner upon completion of all punch list items and Final Acceptance of the Building. 1. Allowance balances will be returned to the Owner by Change Order.
ALLOWANCES
012100- 2
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
2.
ALLOWANCES SECTION 012100 08/06
Change Orders for returning Allowance balances to the Owner will be initiated and approved prior to the Contractor submitting for Final Payment. Allowance balances will not be included in the Final Application for Payment.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1
EXAMINATION A.
3.2
PREPARATION A.
3.3
Examine products covered by an allowance promptly on delivery for damage or defects. Return damaged or defective products to manufacturer for replacement.
Coordinate materials and their installation for each allowance with related materials and installations to ensure that each allowance item is completely integrated and interfaced with related work. SCHEDULE OF ALLOWANCES Lump Sum Allowance No. 1, Owner Directed Work:
$
200,000.00
END OF SECTION 012100
ALLOWANCES
012100- 3
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
ALTERNATES SECTION 012300 08/06
SECTION 012300 - ALTERNATES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. In the event of any conflicts between the requirements of these Sections, the more stringent requirement shall apply. SUMMARY
A. 1.3
This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for alternates. DEFINITIONS
A.
Alternate: An amount proposed by bidders and stated on the Bid Form for certain work defined in the Bidding Requirements that may be added to or deducted from the Base Bid amount if Owner decides to accept a corresponding change either in the amount of construction to be completed or in the products, materials, equipment, systems, or installation methods described in the Contract Documents. 1.
1.4
The cost or credit for each alternate is the net addition to or deduction from the Contract Sum to incorporate alternate into the Work. No other adjustments are made to the Contract Sum.
PROCEDURES A.
Coordination: Modify or adjust affected adjacent work as necessary to completely integrate work of the alternate into Project. 1.
Include as part of each alternate, miscellaneous devices, accessory objects, and similar items incidental to or required for a complete installation whether or not indicated as part of alternate.
B.
Notification: Immediately following award of the Contract, notify each party involved, in writing, of the status of each alternate. Indicate if alternates have been accepted, rejected, or deferred for later consideration. Include a complete description of negotiated modifications to alternates.
C.
Execute accepted alternates under the same conditions as other work of the Contract.
D.
Schedule: A Schedule of Alternates is included at the end of this Section. If specification Sections are referenced in alternate schedule, the specification section contains the requirements
ALTERNATES
012300 - 1
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
ALTERNATES SECTION 012300 08/06
for materials necessary to achieve the work described under each alternate. If specifications are not listed in the schedule below, base the alternate price on the description below. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1
SCHEDULE OF ADD – ALTERNATES A.
Add Alternate No. 1; Contractor shall provide a cost for providing and installing all work on the Ground Floor related to the EMS Offices, Medical Archive Storage and Ambulance Garage Addition, as indicated on the documents.
B.
Add Alternate No. 2; Contractor shall provide a cost for providing and installing all work related to the planters located in the Lobby, as indicated on the documents.
C.
Add Alternate No. 3; Contractor shall provide a cost for providing and installing all work related to the exterior signage letters, as indicated on drawing A200 and in specification section 101400 - Signage.
D.
Add Alternate No. 4; Contractor shall provide a cost for providing and installing all work related to the card reader access system, as indicated on drawing CR-100.
E.
Add Alternate No. 5; Contractor shall provide a cost for providing and installing all work related to the replacing the existing plumbing fixtures in Toilet Rooms A102 and A104, as indicated on the documents. As part of the Base Bid the Contractor is required to remove and reinstall the existing fixtures in order to install the new finishes.
F.
Add Alternate No. 6; Contractor shall provide a cost for providing and installing all work related to the replacement of the aluminum storefront windows and doors at front of building adjacent to 322, as indicated on the documents.
G.
Add Alternate No. 7; Contractor shall provide a cost for providing and installing all work related to the New Entry Plaza at front of building adjacent to 322, as indicated on the documents.
H.
Add Alternate No. 8; Contractor shall provide a cost for providing and installing all work related to the new Columns/Trellis at Entry Plaza at front of building adjacent to 322, as indicated on the documents.
END OF SECTION 012300
ALTERNATES
012300 - 2
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
PROCEDURES AND CONTROLS SECTION 012400 08/06
SECTION 012400 – PROCEDURES AND CONTROLS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General Conditions, General Conduct of the Work and Special Requirements, Supplementary Conditions, and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. In the event of any conflicts between the requirements of these Sections, the more stringent requirement shall apply. DESCRIPTION OF WORK
A.
The types of minimum requirements for procedures and performance or control work of a general nature, to be fulfilled collectively by contractors, include but are not necessarily limited to the following categories: 1.
Coordination and meetings.
2.
Administration/supervisory personnel.
3.
Examination and checking of contract drawings.
4.
Surveys and records or reports.
5.
Limitations for use of site.
6.
Protection of Persons and Property.
7.
Special reports.
8.
Subcontractor, material approval.
9.
Tradesmen and workmanship standards.
10.
Inspections, tests and reports.
11.
Progress photographs.
12.
General installation provisions.
13.
Control Wiring
14.
Chases, recesses and openings.
15.
Sleeves, built-in items.
16.
Cutting and patching.
17.
Uncovering and correction of work.
18.
Cleaning and protection.
19.
Conservation and salvage.
PROCEDURES AND CONTROLS
012400 - 1
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
1.3
PROCEDURES AND CONTROLS SECTION 012400 08/06
COORDINATION AND MEETINGS A.
General: Contractor shall prepare a written memorandum of general instructions on required coordination activities including notices/reports/meetings, and distribute memorandum to each engaged entity performing work at project site, with copies to Architect and Owner.
B.
Coordination Drawings: Where work by separate entities requires off-site fabrication of products and materials which must be accurately interfaced and closely intermeshed to produce required results, prepare coordination drawings to indicate how work shown by separate shop drawings will be interfaced, intermeshed, and sequenced for installation. 1.
C.
Comply with submittal requirements of "Submittals" section, and other requirements outlined in the other Divisions.
Biweekly Job Meeting: The Contractor’s Project Manger and Superintendent, the Owner's Project Manager and the Architect shall attend biweekly job meetings convened by the Owner for the purpose of affording the opportunity to review Contractor's coordination efforts, to expedite the performance of administrative tasks, and to generally assess the work progress. Contractor shall require representation (at each meeting) by every entity currently involved in coordination or planning for the work (of the entire project). Contractor shall participate in meetings in a manner, which will resolve coordination problems. 1.
Time and location of job meetings shall be designated by the mutual agreement of the Contractor, Architect and Owner.
2.
Job meetings shall be chaired by the Architect, who shall record the proceedings in the form of minutes and shall be responsible for proper distribution thereof to all parties. Initial minutes will be distributed within three (3) business days after the meeting.
3.
Any and all corrections or clarifications to these minutes shall be received by the Architect in writing within three (3) days of their issuance. After the interval allowed for corrections and clarifications, Job Meeting Minutes will stand as part of the project record.
4.
All decisions, instructions and interpretations given by Owner, with concurrence of the Architect, at these meetings shall be binding and conclusive on Contractor.
5.
Architect and Owner shall have the right to schedule Special Job Meetings or increase the frequency of job meetings if, in his opinion, the progress and condition of the work warrant it. Attendance at such meetings is mandatory.
6.
Subcontractors and suppliers shall attend at the request of the Architect or Owner as appropriate to the agenda topics at each meeting.
7.
Agenda: a.
Review of Work progress.
b.
Field observations, problems, and decisions.
c.
Identification of problems, which impede planned progress.
d.
Maintenance of Progress Schedule- updated by Contractor and discussed at every meeting.
PROCEDURES AND CONTROLS
012400 - 2
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
D.
PROCEDURES AND CONTROLS SECTION 012400 08/06
e.
Corrective measures to regain projected schedule milestones and deadlines.
f.
Planned progress during succeeding work period and two (2) week look ahead.
g.
Effect of proposed changes on progress schedule and coordination.
h.
Review and update Submittal Log for every meeting.
i.
Other business relating to the Work.
Pre-Construction Meeting: Owner will schedule a meeting after Notice of Award. 1. Attendance Required: a. Owner b. Architect c. Contractor 2.
Agenda: a. Execution of Owner/Contractor Agreement. b. Submission of executed bonds and insurance certificates. c. Distribution of Contract Documents. d. Submission of list of Subcontractors, list of Products, schedule of values, etc. e. Procedures and processing of field decisions, submittals, substitutions, applications for payment, proposal requests, Change Orders, and Contract closeout procedures. f. Scheduling (Preliminary Progress Schedule by Contractor).
The above Agenda is a comprehensive list of items that could be discussed at the PreConstruction Meeting. Some items will be included while the Owner may choose to handle other items by other means. 3.
Architect will record minutes and distribute copies within two (2) days after meeting to participants, with two copies to Contractor, Owner, and those affected by any decisions made.
E.
Pre-Installation Conferences: 1. When required by individual specification sections, contractor shall convene a preinstallation conference prior to the start of installation for the portion of work in question. 2. Require attendance of all Subcontractors, suppliers, manufacturers (if necessary), Owner Architect (at the Owners request), Engineers (at the Owners request) directly affecting of affected by the Work in question.
F.
Application for Payment “PENCIL COPY” review meeting: 1. Contractor to schedule a Pencil Copy Review Meeting five (5) working days prior to payment period deadline stipulated in the Agreement.
PROCEDURES AND CONTROLS
012400 - 3
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
2.
1.4
PROCEDURES AND CONTROLS SECTION 012400 08/06
Contractor will be responsible to incorporate all agreed upon changes to the Pencil Copy version of the Application and submit the revised Application in accordance with all Contract requirements.
ADMINISTRATIVE/SUPERVISORY PERSONNEL A.
General: In addition to a Home Office Project Manager and a Field Construction Superintendent and other administrative and supervisory personnel required for performance of the work, the Contractor shall provide specific coordinating personnel as may be required for proper interface between the trades and other work of the total project.
B.
Project Superintendent: The Contractor shall provide a full-time Project Superintendent, who is experienced in administration and supervision of building construction of a type similar in nature and scope to this Project, including mechanical and electrical work, and who is hereby authorized to act as the general coordinator of interfaces between the work of all the trades. For purpose of this provision, "interface" is defined to include the scheduling and sequencing of work, sharing of access to work spaces, installations, each trade's protection of work by other trades, cutting and patching, tolerances, preparation of coordination drawings, inspections, tests, and temporary facilities and services.
C.
Submittal of Staff Names, Duties: Within 15 days of contract date, the Contractor shall submit to the Owner and Architect a listing of Contractor's principal staff assignments and consultants, naming persons and listing their addresses, telephone numbers and past construction experience.
1.5
EXAMINATION AND CHECKING OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS A.
Contractor shall be responsible for reviewing the contract documents in accordance with the requirements specified herein. 1.
Contractor shall examine and check all quantities and dimensions given on contract drawings, and shall be responsible for noting any errors which can be discovered by such examination and check, and shall be responsible for satisfactory joining and fitting of all parts of the work; any check or observation by Architect/Engineer shall not relieve the Contractor of any responsibility as to correctness of the work.
2.
Field verification of dimensions on drawings is specifically directed and required of the Contractor as a matter of course, because locations, distances and elevations will be governed by actual field conditions. Contractor shall review plans, site plans and details of construction on the drawings, and adjust his work to conform to all conditions indicated thereon or reasonably inferable therefrom.
3.
Discrepancies shown on different plans and details, or between drawings, and actual field conditions, or between drawings and specifications, shall promptly be brought to the attention of the Architect for interpretation and resolution.
4.
If, in Contractor's opinion, any work is indicated on drawings or specified in such a manner as will make it impossible to produce such in conformance with the contact, he shall refer same to Architect for interpretation. If additional and supplementary instructions are necessary, Architect/Engineer will prepare and issue same in an appropriate form to the Contractor, with a copy being forwarded to the Owner.
PROCEDURES AND CONTROLS
012400 - 4
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
5.
1.6
PROCEDURES AND CONTROLS SECTION 012400 08/06
Contractor is directed never to scale dimensions or locations from contract drawings. Consult Architect/Engineer for dimensions and locations of all items.
SURVEYS AND RECORDS/REPORTS A.
1.7
General: Working from lines and levels established by property survey, and as shown in relation to the work, the Contractor shall establish and maintain bench marks and other dependable markers to set lines and levels for the work at each story of construction and elsewhere on site as needed to properly locate each element of entire project. Contractor shall calculate and measure required dimensions as shown (within recognized tolerances if not otherwise indicated); and shall not scale drawings to determine dimensions. Advise tradesmen performing the work, of marked lines and levels provided for their use in layout of work.
LIMITATIONS FOR USE OF SITE A.
General: It is the intent of the Owner to preserve the present character of the campus to the greatest extent possible, both during and after the period of construction. To this end the Contractor will be subject to certain operational controls in the movement of personnel and equipment on and off the construction site. The Contractor's cooperation with the general goal of protecting and preserving the Institute campus, and with the specific controls specified hereinafter, shall be mandatory. The following general controls shall be observed: 1.
Construction activities, including location of temporary support facilities, stockpiling of materials, loading and unloading, parking for construction personnel and other related activities shall be restricted to areas as specified by the Owner.
2.
The accumulation or stockpiling of debris, rubbish or other material resulting from demolition or construction operations will not be permitted. Removal and off-site disposal must proceed concurrent with demolition and construction activities, to the end that the site shall at all times present a neat, orderly and workmanship appearance. No liquid or solid material of any kind is to be disposed of on campus property. No burning of trash or debris will be permitted on the site.
3.
The Contractor shall be responsible for the prevention, abatement and control of any environmental pollution arising from demolition or construction activities in the performance of the work, in full compliance with all applicable Federal and State laws and regulations. a.
4.
B.
Existing trees and other vegetation on and adjacent to the project site shall be protected. Refer to Section 015000 - "Temporary Facilities" - for specific requirements concerning fencing. Under no circumstances shall materials be stored or heavy equipment operated beneath the drip lines of existing trees.
Contractor shall be responsible for the control of dust arising form demolition or construction operations within the project site or along the Access Routes.
Allocation of Space: In addition to site utilization limitations and requirements shown on drawings, and indicated by other contract documents, Contractor shall administer allocation of
PROCEDURES AND CONTROLS
012400 - 5
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
PROCEDURES AND CONTROLS SECTION 012400 08/06
available space equitably among separate subcontractors and other entities needing access and space, so as to produce overall efficiency in performance of total work of project. C.
Deliveries: Contractor shall schedule deliveries so as to minimize space and time requirements for storage of materials and equipment on site.
D.
Construction Access: 1.
Contractor shall plan, coordinate and execute all construction activities in such manner as to avoid traffic disruption over local streets. a.
2.
Prior to the start of work, Contractor shall contact the Police Department and determine approved travel routes for delivery vehicles on local streets. b. Contractor shall obtain and pay for all necessary permits in connection with the operation of overweight and over length vehicles on City streets. Contractor shall be responsible for controlling all traffic entering and leaving the Owner's property including provision of flagmen as necessary. Contractor shall be responsible to require mud removal from rubber-tired vehicles departing the immediate project site. Operation of tracked vehicles shall be restricted to the project site as defined by the contract limit lines, and is not permitted on paved areas.
3.
Whenever and wherever the project work must be performed outside the contract limit lines, and after the necessary permits have been secured from local authorities, Contractor shall erect and maintain barricades, danger signals and warning signs at working sites, closed roads, intersections and other places of danger to traffic, the work, or the public. Barricades and obstructions of any kind shall be marked with lights or flares at not more than five (5) foot intervals visible for a distance of not less than 500 feet. Contractor shall provide sufficient watchmen and traffic directors and shall take all necessary precautions for the proper protection of the work and the safety of the public.
4.
Contractor shall be responsible for identification, control and maintenance of construction traffic within the contract limit lines. Identification and control shall include the provision of temporary traffic signs and the installation of barricades and warning lights to protect the work and to identify excavations or other hazards, all as may be required. Maintenance shall include the provision and placing of ballast materials as may be required, grading and compaction, removal of debris, removal of snow, and general care to insure a serviceable roadbed at all times. a.
5.
E.
The Owner shall be responsible for snow removal from paved roadways and parking lots in the vicinity of the project area, but not within the work areas or areas immediate to the Contractor's temporary facilities. Prior to final completion, perform all cleaning and repairs as necessary to restore all existing areas within the limits of any and all work required as a part of the scope of these contract documents, to their original condition.
Temporary Parking for Construction Personnel: The Owner shall designate available areas for parking. 1.
Offsite parking will be available for employee parking, in an area to be designated by the Owner on RUI property. Construction personnel will not be permitted to park in campus
PROCEDURES AND CONTROLS
012400 - 6
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
PROCEDURES AND CONTROLS SECTION 012400 08/06
parking lots, except as specifically designated and authorized by the Owner. The designated parking area may change due to seasonal demands of the Owner. F.
G.
H.
1.8
Staging and Storage Area: The Contractor shall have the authority and responsibility to plan and locate storage areas, equipment marshaling areas, and temporary field facilities. Staging and storage areas shall be so located and utilized as to afford unrestricted access to all of the work at all times. Such areas shall not encroach upon access routes to the work, nor shall they be so located or utilized as to impede free access of emergency vehicles. Such areas must be approved by the Owner prior to use by the contractor. 1.
Staging and storage areas shall be located wholly within the contract limit lines and site enclosure fence.
2.
All loading and unloading operations shall occur inside the contract limit lines and behind the site enclosure fence.
3.
Storage of materials and equipment outside the site enclosure fence or on City streets is absolutely prohibited.
4.
Prior to final completion, perform all cleanup, disposal, grading, topsoiling, seeding and other work as necessary to restore the entire staging/storage area to its original condition.
Verification of Underground Utilities: Contractor shall have the responsibility to verify the actual locations of existing underground utility lines. Should verified underground utility locations conflict with excavation required in connection with the work, Contractor shall notify the Owner's project manager immediately. Hand excavation shall be required at locations in close proximity to verified existing utilities. 1.
The Owner does not guarantee the accuracy and completeness of information shown on any contract drawings for underground utilities; Contractor must be responsible for ascertaining all facts concerning utility locations.
2.
Damage to existing underground utilities, caused as a result of Contractor's negligence or failure to comply with the requirements listed herein, shall be repaired and/or replaced at Contractor's expense, to the complete satisfaction of the Owner and utility company by close of business of the day of damage.
Cleaning and Trash Disposal: "Temporary Facilities".
Comply with requirements specified in Section 01500,
PROTECTION OF PERSONS AND PROPERTY A.
Safety Precautions and Programs: Contractor shall be responsible for initiating, maintaining and supervising all safety precautions and programs in connection with the work. He shall designate a responsible member of his organization at the site whose duty shall be the prevention of accidents. This person shall be the Contractor's superintendent, unless otherwise designated by the Contractor, in writing, to the Owner.
PROCEDURES AND CONTROLS
012400 - 7
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
PROCEDURES AND CONTROLS SECTION 012400 08/06
B.
Protection of Persons: Contractor shall take all necessary precautions for the safety of employees on the work, and shall comply with all applicable provisions of Federal and State safety laws, union safety regulations, and building codes to prevent accidents or injury to persons on, about or adjacent to the premises where the work is being performed. Particular attention is called to the requirements of the Federal Occupational Safety and Health Act (OSHA). In connection with the work of its own forces, Contractor shall direct and properly maintain, at all times, as required by the conditions and progress of the work, all necessary safeguards for the protection of workers and the public and shall post danger signs warning against the hazards created by such features of construction as protruding nails, hoists, well holes, elevator hatchways, scaffolding, window openings, stairways and falling materials.
1.
Security/protection provisions are specified in "Temporary Facilities" section.
C.
Protection of Work and Property: Contractor shall take all precautions for the safety of, and shall provide all reasonable protection to prevent damage, injury or loss to: 1. All the work and all materials and equipment to be incorporated therein, whether in storage on or off the site, under the care, custody or control of the Contractor or any of his Subcontractors, or Sub-subcontractors; and
2.
Other property at the site or adjacent thereto, including trees, shrubs, lawns, walks, pavements, roadways, structures and utilities not designated for removal, relocation or replacement in the course of construction. a.
Refer to "Temporary Facilities" section for specific requirements concerning fencing around existing trees.
D.
Emergencies: In any emergency affecting the safety of persons or property, Contractor shall act with diligence, at his discretion, to prevent threatening injury, damage or loss. In such case, he shall immediately notify the Owner, of the action taken and shall forthwith prepare and submit a detailed and documented report to the Owner and the Architect.
E.
Insurance and Indemnification: Comply with requirements of the Contract Agreement.
1.9
SPECIAL REPORTS A.
General: Except as otherwise indicated, submit special reports directly to Owner within one day of occurrence requiring special report, with copy to Architect/Engineer and others affected by occurrence.
B.
Reporting Unusual Events: When an event of unusual and significant nature occurs at site, the Contractor shall prepare and submit a special report listing chain of events, persons participating, response by Contractor's personnel, evaluations of results or effects, and similar pertinent information. When such events are known or predictable in advance, it is the responsibility of the Contractor to advise the Owner in advance at earliest possible date.
C.
Reporting Accidents: Contractor shall prepare and submit reports of significant accidents, at site and anywhere else work is in progress. Record and document data and actions; comply
PROCEDURES AND CONTROLS
012400 - 8
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
PROCEDURES AND CONTROLS SECTION 012400 08/06
with industry standards. For this purpose, a significant accident is defined to include events where bodily injury is sustained, or property loss of substance is sustained, or where the event posed a significant threat of loss or personal injury. 1.10
SUBCONTRACTOR, MATERIAL APPROVAL
A.
Material Approval: Contractor shall submit to the Owner and Architect, for approval, a list of all vendors and manufacturers for the supply of materials and equipment, whether specified or not, starting within fifteen (15) calendar days after award of contract; said list shall be complete within forty-five (45) days thereafter. In instances where specified materials and equipment are subject to the Owner’s and Architect's approval by way of the submittal process, no contract shall be entered into with any vendor, supplier or manufacturer before the Owner and Architect have approved his name in writing.
B.
Subcontractor Approval: Contractor shall, beginning within fifteen (15) calendar days after award of contract and ending within forty-five (45) days thereafter, notify the Architect and Owner in writing of the names of all subcontractors proposed for the work, and shall not employ any without prior written approval of the Owner, or any that Owner may within a reasonable time reject.
1.11
TRADESMEN AND WORKMANSHIP STANDARDS
A.
General: Contractor shall instigate and maintain procedures to ensure that tradesmen performing work at site are skilled and knowledgeable in methods and craftsmanship needed to produce required quality-levels for workmanship in completed work. Remove and replace work, which does not comply with workmanship standards as specified and as recognized in the construction industry for applications indicated. Remove and replace other work damaged or deteriorated by faulty workmanship or its replacement.
B.
Availability of Tradesmen: At each progress or job meeting, Contractor shall review availability of tradesmen and projected needs to accomplish work as scheduled. Require each entity employing tradesmen to report on current and pending trade actions and jurisdictional matters, which might affect progress of work. Where possible dispute or delay is identified, consider alternatives and take actions to avoid disputes and delays.
C.
Labor Peace Clause: 1.
2.
The Contractor agrees that in the performance of the work called for under these Contract Documents, it will employ only such labor as will not delay or interfere with the speedy and diligent progress of the project and as will be acceptable to and work in harmony with all other workmen employed by the Owner. In the event of labor difficulties (including, but not limited to, strikes, walkouts, picketing, boycotts, shutdowns, or inability to obtain a sufficient number of competent laborers or mechanics), which interfere with the work, or any part thereof, it shall be the responsibility of the contractor to take all measures necessary and possible to insure the projects progress and completion as prescribed by the time schedule including, but not limited to, seeking injunctive relief in an appropriate Court of Common Pleas, filing an unfair labor practices charge(s) with the National Labor Relations Board, discharging employees who engage in an unprotected strike or work stoppage, or any other applicable
PROCEDURES AND CONTROLS
012400 - 9
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
3.
1.12
PROCEDURES AND CONTROLS SECTION 012400 08/06
legal or equitable action related to the aforesaid labor difficulty which occurs in connection with the performance of this contract. In the event of a strike or stoppage of work resulting from a dispute involving or affecting the labor employed by the contractor (including subcontractors and suppliers), the Owner may, at its option, terminate this contract. However, where practicable the contractor will give subcontractors 24 hours to resolve the strike or stoppage of work before terminating its contract. In the event there is a conflict between this clause and any other agreement between contractor and the Owner, including but not limited to other provisions of this contract, other written agreements and verbal agreements, this clause will take precedent. In the event of such termination, the Owner shall have the right to take possession, for the purpose of completing such work, of all materials, tools, and appliances on its premises and employ any person or persons to finish the work and provide the materials and labor for such work. The Contractor shall not be entitled to receive any further payments under this agreement until the work shall be finished completely, at which time the contractor shall be paid whatever balance is found to be due to contractor for amounts expended by it either for labor, materials, or otherwise, plus contractors percentage of profit as provided in this agreement, less, however such expenses or damages as the Owner may suffer by so completing the work. The Contractor shall not be entitled to prospective profits on portions of the project not performed by it or with respect to the materials not furnished by it. Further, it is understood and agreed that should the expenses to the Owner in completing the contract be increased by reason of such discontinuance of the services of this contractor, then this contractor shall be responsible to the Owner for such entire increase in addition to the other expenses or damages referred to above.
INSPECTIONS, TESTS AND REPORTS
A.
General: Required inspection and testing services are intended to assist in determination of probable compliances of the work with requirements, but do not relieve Contractor of responsibility for those compliances, or for general fulfillment of requirements of contract documents. Specified inspections and tests are not intended to limit Contractor's quality control program. Afford reasonable access to agencies performing tests and inspections.
B.
Inspection and Testing by Independent Agencies: General requirements are specified in "Quality Control Services" section of these specifications (Section 01400). Particular requirements are specified in the technical sections (Divisions 2 through 16).
C.
Inspection and Testing by Authorities with Jurisdiction: If the Contract Documents, laws, ordinances, rules, regulations or order of any public authority having jurisdiction require any portion of the Work to be inspected, tested or approved, the Contractor shall give the Owner not less than five (5) working days notice in writing of its readiness for inspections or testing. The Contractor shall bear all costs of such inspections, tests or approvals conducted by public authorities.
D.
Inspection and Testing by Contractors: When inspections and tests are required by the technical sections of these specifications to be performed by Contractors on installed materials and equipment, all such inspections and tests shall be conducted in the presence of, and upon timely notice to, the Owner, and the results thereof approved prior to acceptance of the installation.
PROCEDURES AND CONTROLS
012400 - 10
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
PROCEDURES AND CONTROLS SECTION 012400 08/06
Fuel, power and any other items or services required for the proper inspecting and testing of equipment and for the period of instructing the Owner's operating personnel shall be at the cost and expense of the Contractor furnishing such equipment. E.
1.13
Special Inspection and Testing: If the Owner or Architect/Engineer determines that any Work requires special inspection, testing or approval, not otherwise required herein, he will instruct the Contractor to order such special inspection, testing or approval, and the Contractor shall give notice as provided in subparagraph C. If such special testing or inspection reveals a failure of the Work to comply with the requirements of the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall bear all costs thereof, including compensation for the Architect/Engineer's additional services made necessary by such failure; otherwise the Owner shall bear all costs and an appropriate Change Order will be issued. PROGRESS PHOTOGRAPHS
A.
Refer to Specification Section 01300, “Submittals” for requirements pertaining to Progress Photographs.
B.
Provide photographs of the site and construction throughout progress of Work produced by an experienced photographer or job superintendent experienced in taking construction photographs, acceptable to the Owner.
C.
Take photo’s in a timely fashion to allow for their submission with each application for a payment and/ as follows (as apply): 1.
Installation of site utilities.
2.
Installation of footings.
3.
Installation of foundations.
4.
Building pad proof roll.
5.
Building pad sub grade (vapor barrier and stone).
6.
Installation of concrete floors, decks, walls, etc.
7.
Installation of masonry for stair towers, elevator, exterior walls, etc.
8.
Installation of structural steel, steel deck and joist, etc.
9.
Rough grading.
10.
Installation of parking lot paving, parking lot lighting, line stripping, etc.
11.
Installation of interior and exterior framing.
12.
Plumbing and electrical rough-ins.
13.
HVAC ductwork and units.
14.
Installation of telecommunications cabling and devices.
15.
Installation of roofing.
16.
Installation of windows, doors, hardware, etc.
PROCEDURES AND CONTROLS
012400 - 11
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
D.
17.
Enclosure of walls and ceilings.
18.
Interior and exterior finishes.
19.
Installations of millwork, casework, trim work, etc.
20.
Landscaping
21.
Final Completion.
PROCEDURES AND CONTROLS SECTION 012400 08/06
Prints: Color; three (3) prints of each view. 4” X 8” or larger of each view. Provide enough photos at each stage of construction to give someone not familiar with the Project a clear understanding of the progress of the work. Review photos with the Owner’s representative at each stage of construction requiring photographs. The Owner will determine if additional photos will be needed. 1.
Gloss: smooth texture; single weight; high contrast.
2.
Identify each print on the back. Identify name of Project, orientation of view, date and time of view.
E.
Deliver prints with each Application for Payment or at times specified by Owner with transmittal letter.
F.
Deliver negatives to Owner with Project record closeout documents. Catalogue and index negatives in chronological sequence; provide typed table of content.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (not applicable)
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1
GENERAL INSTALLATION PROVISIONS A.
Pre-Installation Conference: Well in advance of installation of every major unit of work which requires coordination and interfacing with other work, Contractor shall meet at project site with subcontractors, installers and representatives of manufacturers and fabricators who are involved in or affected by unit of work, and in its coordination or integration with other work which has preceded or will follow. Contractor shall advise Owner and Architect of scheduled meeting dates. At each meeting review progress of other work and preparations for particular work under consideration, including requirements of contract documents, options, related change orders, purchases, deliveries, shop drawings, product data, quality control samples, possible conflicts, compatibility problems, time schedules, weather limitations, temporary facilities, space and access limitations, structural limitations, governing regulations, safety, inspection and testing requirements, required performance results, recording requirements, and protection. Contractor shall record significant discussions of each conference, and agreements and disagreements, along with final plan of action. Distribute record of meeting promptly to everyone concerned, including Architect/Engineer and Owner. 1.
Do not proceed with the work if associated pre-installation conference cannot be concluded successfully. Instigate actions to resolve impediments to performance of the work, and reconvene conference at earliest date feasible.
PROCEDURES AND CONTROLS
012400 - 12
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
PROCEDURES AND CONTROLS SECTION 012400 08/06
B.
Installer's Inspection of Conditions: Require Installer of each major unit of work to inspect substrate to receive the work, and conditions under which the work will be performed, and to report (in writing to Contractor) unsatisfactory conditions. Do not proceed with the work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner acceptable to Installer.
C.
Manufacturer's Instructions: Where installations include manufactured products, comply with manufacturer's applicable instructions and recommendations for installation, to whatever extent these are more explicit or more stringent than applicable requirements indicated in contract documents.
D.
Inspect each item of materials or equipment immediately prior to installation, and reject damaged and defective items.
E.
Provide attachment and connection devices and methods for securing work properly as it is installed; true to line and level, and within recognized industry tolerances if not otherwise indicated. Allow for expansions and building movements. Provide uniform joint widths in exposed work, organized for best possible visual effect. Refer questionable visual-effect choices to Architect for final decision.
F.
Recheck measurements and dimensions of the work, as an integral step of starting each installation.
G.
Install work during conditions of temperature, humidity, exposure, forecasted weather, and status of project completion, which will ensure best possible results for each unit of work, in coordination with entire work. Isolate each unit of work from non-compatible work, as required to prevent deterioration.
H.
Coordinate enclosure (closing-in) of work with inspections and tests, so as to minimize necessity of uncovering work for that purpose.
I.
Mounting Heights: Except as otherwise indicated, mount individual units of work at industryrecognized standard mounting heights, for applications indicated. Refer questionable mounting height choices to Architect/Engineer for final decision.
3.2.
The contractor shall include in his/her proposal the cost of all control wiring and its installation for all mechanical equipment including, but not limited to, heating, ventilating and air conditioning systems, ATC systems, boilers, remote monitoring systems, etc. which systems require electrical control wiring. The contractor shall employ a sub-contractor approved by the University for all such control wiring. The sub-contractor shall provide a final certificate of electrical inspection of the control wiring. Installed or control wiring must connect to a point of electrical power supply as shown on the contract documents.
3.3
CHASES, RECESSES AND OPENINGS
PROCEDURES AND CONTROLS
012400 - 13
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
A.
Contractor shall build chases, recesses, openings, channels and flues, and shall leave or create holes where shown on drawings, or where directed for piping, electrical conduits, switchboxes, panelboards, flues and ducts, or any other feature of the mechanical and electrical work. All trades requiring chases, recesses, openings, etc. shall furnish to the Contractor, complete detailed drawings for all chases, recesses and openings required in connection with such work in ample time to allow the construction to proceed without interruption or delay. Comply with requirements of "Submittals" section of these specifications. 1. Contractor shall close, build in and finish around or over all chases, recesses, openings, etc. after installation of mechanical and electrical work has been completed. Should any fail to furnish the above required information in time, he shall, at his own expense, arrange for all cutting, rebuilding, patching and finishing, but shall employ the Contractor whose work must be cut to do so. 2.
3.4
PROCEDURES AND CONTROLS SECTION 012400 08/06
Contractor shall obtain prior written approval from the Architect/Engineer and the Owner before cutting or boring through beams, floor construction or supporting members.
SLEEVES, BUILT-IN ITEMS A.
3.5 A.
Each trade shall be responsible for furnishing and setting of sleeves, built-in items, anchors, inserts, etc. for his work. Contractor shall build these items into the construction. 1. Comply with requirements of "Submittals" section in the preparation of sleeve drawings. CUTTING AND PATCHING General: Do not cut-and-patch structural work in a manner resulting in reduction of loadcarrying capacity or load/deflection ratio; submit proposed cutting and patching to Architect/Engineer for structural approval before proceeding. Do not cut-and-patch operational elements and safety-related components in a manner resulting in reduction of capacities to perform in manner intended or resulting in decreased operational-life, increased maintenance, or decreased safety. Do not cut-and-patch work which is exposed on exterior or exposed in occupied spaces of building, in a manner resulting in reduction of visual qualities or resulting in substantial evidence of cut-and-patch work, both as judged solely by Architect. Remove and replace work judged by Architect to be cut-and-patched in a visually unsatisfactory manner. 1.
Contractor shall do all cutting, fitting, adjusting and patching as may be required to permit the several parts to properly come together as intended and indicated.
2.
Engage original Fabricator/Installer to perform cutting-and-patching of structural work, operational/ safety-related components, and visually exposed work; or, if not available, engage only recognized experts; employ only proven methods.
3.
Do not cut or alter work performed under separate contracts without the Architect’s written permission.
4.
Use adequate numbers of skilled workmen who are thoroughly trained and experienced in the necessary crafts and who are completely familiar with the specific requirements and methods needed for proper performance of the work of this Section.
5.
Verify that existing site conditions and substrate surfaces are acceptable for subsequent work. Beginning new work means acceptance of existing conditions.
PROCEDURES AND CONTROLS
012400 - 14
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
PROCEDURES AND CONTROLS SECTION 012400 08/06
6.
Verify that existing substrate is capable of structural support or attachment of new work being applied or attached.
7.
Examine and verify specific conditions described in individual specification sections.
8.
Verify that utility services are available, of the correct characteristics, and in the correct locations.
9.
Prior to Cutting: Examine existing conditions prior to commencing work, including elements subject to damage or movement during cutting and patching. After uncovering existing work, assess conditions affecting performance of work. Beginning of cutting or patching means acceptance of existing conditions.
B.
Materials: Except as otherwise indicated or approved by Architect/Engineer, provide materials for cutting-and-patching which will result in equal-or-better work than work being cut-andpatched, in terms of performance characteristics and including visual effect where applicable. Use materials identical with original materials where feasible and where recognized that satisfactory results can be produced thereby.
C.
Temporary Support and Protection: Provide adequate temporary support for work to be cut, to prevent failure. Do not endanger other work. Provide adequate protection of other work during cutting-and-patching, to prevent damage; and provide protection of the work from adverse weather exposure.
D.
Cut work using methods least likely to damage work to be retained and work adjoining.
E.
1.
Where physical cutting action is required, cut work with sawing and grinding tools, not with hammering and chopping tools. Core drill openings through concrete work. Comply with the requirements of applicable sections of Division 2 where cutting-and-patching requires excavating and backfilling.
2.
Fit work air tight to pipes, sleeves, ducts, conduit, and other penetrations through surfaces.
3.
At penetrations of fire rated walls, partitions, ceilings, or floor construction, completely seal voids with fire rated materials in accordance with Section 07841 to full thickness of the penetrated elements.
4.
Refinish surfaces to match adjacent finish. For continuous surfaces, refinish to nearest intersection or natural break. For an assembly, refinish entire unit.
Patch with seams, which are durable and as invisible as possible. Comply with specified tolerances for the work. 1.
F.
Where feasible, inspect and test patched areas to demonstrate integrity of work.
Restore exposed finishes of patched areas; and, where necessary extend finish restoration onto retained work adjoining, in a manner, which will eliminate evidence of patching. 1.
Where patch occurs in a smooth painted surface, extend final paint coat over entire unbroken surface containing patch, after patched area has received prime and base coats.
PROCEDURES AND CONTROLS
012400 - 15
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
PROCEDURES AND CONTROLS SECTION 012400 08/06
G.
Execute cutting and patching including excavation and fill to complete the work, to uncover work to install improperly sequenced work, to remove and replace defective or non-conforming work, to remove samples of installed work for testing when requested, to provide opening in the work for penetrations of mechanical and electrical work, to execute patching to complement adjacent work, and to fit Products together to integrate with other work.
H.
Execute work by methods to avoid damage to other work, and which will provide appropriate surfaces to receive patching and finishing. In existing work, minimize damage and restore to original conditions.
I.
ALL CUTTING AND PATCHING SHALL BE CONSIDERED PART OF THE BASE BID PRICE WHEN THE WORK IS REQUIRED AS PART OF THE OVERALL PROJECT. NO ADDITIONAL PAYMENT WILL BE CONSIDERED FOR WORK OF THIS SECTION UNLESS ALL APPLICABLE PARTIES OBTAIN PRIOR AUTHORIZATION OR WRITTEN APPROVAL.
3.6
UNCOVERING AND CORRECTION OF WORK A.
Comply with requirements of the General Conditions of the Contract, and with additional requirements specified herein. 1.
3.7
Subsequent Disclosure of Faulty Work: Failure of Owner or Architect/Engineer to exercise powers of rejection or condemnation against the work of the Contractor during construction shall not be construed as an acceptance on Owner's part or Architect/ Engineer's part that Contractor's work has been faithfully performed, if the fact be otherwise.
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
Protect site from puddling or running water. Provide water barriers as required to protect site from soil erosion.
B.
Ventilate enclosed areas to assist cure of materials, to dissipate humidity, and to prevent accumulation of dust, fumes, vapors, or gases.
C.
Pollution Control: Provide methods, means, and facilities to prevent contamination of soil, water, and air from discharge of noxious, toxic substances, and pollutants produced by construction activities. Comply with all governmental and code requirements.
3.8
PREPERATION FOR CUTTING AND PATCHING AND/OR NEW WORK.
A.
Prepare surfaces and remove surface finishes to provide for proper installation of work and finishes.
B.
Clean substrate surfaces prior to applying next material or substance.
C.
Seal cracks or openings of substrate prior to applying next material or substance.
PROCEDURES AND CONTROLS
012400 - 16
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
D.
3.9
PROCEDURES AND CONTROLS SECTION 012400 08/06
Apply manufacturers required or recommended substrate primer, sealer, or conditioner prior to applying any new material or substance in contact or bond.
LAYING OUT THE WORK
A.
Verify locations of survey control points prior to starting work.
B.
Promptly notify Owner’s Representative and Architect of any discrepancies discovered.
C.
Protect survey control points prior to starting site work; preserve permanent reference points during construction.
D.
Promptly report to Architect/Engineer and Owner’s Representative the loss or destruction of any reference point or relocation required because of changes in grades or other reasons.
E.
Utilize recognized engineering survey practices.
F.
Establish elevations, lines and levels. Locate and lay out by instrumentation and similar appropriate means: 1. Site improvements including but not limited to pavements; stakes for grading, fill and topsoil placement; utility locations, slopes, and invert elevations, etc. 2. Building foundation, column locations, all floor elevations, stairwells, elevator shafts, machine and mechanical rooms, etc. 3. All other work as necessary to complete all the requirements of the contract documents.
G.
Periodically verify layouts by same means.
H.
Maintain a complete and accurate log of control and survey work as it progresses.
3.10
GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS
A.
Install Products as specified in individual sections and in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations.
B.
Make neat transitions. Patch work to match adjacent work in texture and appearance. Where new Work abuts or aligns with existing, perform a smooth and even transition.
C.
When existing finished surfaces are cut so that a smooth transition with new Work is not possible, terminate existing surface along a straight line at a natural line of division and make recommendations to the Architect and Owner.
3.11 A.
CLEANING AND PROTECTION General: During handling and installation of work at project site, Contractor shall clean and protect work in progress and adjoining work on a basis of perpetual maintenance. Apply suitable protective covering on newly installed work where reasonably required to ensure freedom from damage or deterioration at time of substantial completion; otherwise, clean and perform maintenance on newly installed work as frequently as necessary through remainder of
PROCEDURES AND CONTROLS
012400 - 17
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
PROCEDURES AND CONTROLS SECTION 012400 08/06
construction period. Adjust and lubricate operable components to ensure operability without damaging effects. B.
Removal of all debris and rubbish resulting from or relating to the construction work; rubbish shall not be thrown from building openings above the ground floor unless confined within chutes; 1.
Progress Cleaning: a. b. c. d. e. f. g.
Maintain areas free of waste material, debris, and rubbish (on a daily basis). Maintain site in a clean and orderly condition, as determined by the Owner. Remove debris and rubbish from pipe chases, plenums, attics, crawl spaces, and other closed or remote spaces, prior to enclosing the space. Broom and vacuum clean interior areas prior to start of surface finishing, and continue cleaning to eliminate dust. Collect and remove waste materials, debris, and rubbish from site periodically and dispose of off-site. Protect installed work and provide special protection where specified in individual specification sections. Provide temporary and removable protection for installed Products. Control activity during and after installation in the immediate work area to prevent damage. Protect finished floors and other surfaces from traffic, dirt, wear, damage, or movement of heavy objects, by protecting with durable sheet materials appropriate for the task involved.
B.
Limiting Exposures of Work: To extent possible through reasonable control and protection methods, Contractor shall supervise performance of work in a manner and by means which will ensure that none of the work, whether completed or in progress, will be subjected to harmful, dangerous, damaging, or otherwise deleterious exposures during construction period. Such exposures include (where applicable, but not by way of limitation) static loading, dynamic loading, internal pressures, external pressures, high or low temperatures, thermal shock, high or low humidity, air contamination or pollution, water, ice, solvents, chemicals, light, radiation, puncture, abrasion, heavy traffic, soiling, bacteria, insect infestation, combustion, electrical current, high speed operation, improper lubrication, unusual wear, misuse, incompatible interface, destructive testing, misalignment, excessive weathering, unprotected storage, improper shipping/handling, theft and vandalism.
C.
Construction Debris: The Contractor shall intermittently remove waste and rubble so that at no time shall there be undue accumulations. Upon completion, the Contractor shall dress up all areas affected by this work whether inside or outside the boundary of the Project. Loading, crating, hauling and dumping will be at the contractor's expense.
D.
Rubbish: The Contractor shall provide covered metal trash cans in sufficient quantity to accept the accumulation of rubbish and garbage from lunch and the like of employees of all Contractors working on site. 1. The Contractor shall instruct his and his subcontractors’ employees to deposit their trash and garbage in these containers and not elsewhere about the site; and also not to use the containers for construction scraps, rubbish, trash and surplus materials.
PROCEDURES AND CONTROLS
012400 - 18
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
2.
PROCEDURES AND CONTROLS SECTION 012400 08/06
The Contractor shall empty these containers daily and haul the rubbish to a legal disposal site off the property.
E.
Roads and Pathways: 1. The Contractor is responsible for the removal of construction dirt and debris in public areas on the site and in the surrounding areas serving the site. 2. Dirt and mud tracked onto streets by the Contractor or its subcontractors is to be immediately cleaned up by the Contractor to the satisfaction of the Owner and the local municipal authorities.
F.
Trucks: All trucks leaving the construction area are to be covered in accordance with NJDOT over the road requirements. Trucks leaving the site are to be clean and free of mud or other materials.
G.
Quality Assurance: University streets and pathways are to be maintained in a clean safe condition at all times. Under no circumstances shall the Contractor leave the site each day without inspecting and verifying that streets and paths to the construction site, access areas, lay down areas, and gates in the area of the site are clean of all construction related materials and are clean and sage for use by the Rowan University population. The Contractor will immediately correct any violation of this provision upon notification by the Owner.
3.12 A.
CONSERVATION AND SALVAGE General: It is a general procedural requirement for Contractor's supervision and administration of the work that construction operations be carried out with maximum practical consideration for conservation of energy, water and materials; and with maximum practical consideration for salvaging materials and equipment involved in performance of the work but not incorporated therein.
END OF SECTION 012400
PROCEDURES AND CONTROLS
012400 - 19
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES SECTION 012500 08/06
SECTION 012500 - CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. In the event of any conflicts between the requirements of these Sections, the more stringent requirement shall apply. SUMMARY
A.
This Section specifies administrative and procedural requirements for handling and processing Contract modifications.
B.
Related Sections include the following: 1. 2. 3.
1.3
Division 1 Section "Allowances" for procedural requirements for handling and processing allowances. Division 1 Section "Unit Prices" for administrative requirements for using unit prices. Division 1 Section "Product Requirements" for administrative procedures for handling requests for substitutions made after Contract award.
MINOR CHANGES IN THE WORK A.
Architect may issue through Owners project manager supplemental instructions authorizing Changes in the Work, not involving adjustment to the Contract Time, as “Architects Supplemental Instructions” (ASI). Architects Supplemental Instructions may or may not involve adjustments to the contract sum. THERE WILL BE NO ADJUSTMENTS TO THE CONTRACT TIME ALLOWED FOR THIS PROJECT. 1. 2.
For ASI’s involving no adjustment to the contract sum or time, the contractor is authorized to execute the change or clarification immediately. For ASI’s resulting in an adjustment to the contract sum, do not consider them instructions either to stop work in progress or to execute the proposed change without obtaining written authorization from the Owner. Written authorization can include the provisions of the general conditions, Article 14, paragraphs 14.5.3 and 14.7.1, an approved change order or a Construction Change Directive.
CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES
012500 - 1
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
1.4
CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES SECTION 012500 08/06
PROPOSAL REQUESTS A.
In the event the Contractor believes that any change directed by the Owner or Architect would entitle it to additional compensation to complete its work under this contract, the Contractor shall immediately notify the Owners project manager of this fact WITHIN 48 HOURS OF RECEIPT OF THE CHANGE REQUESTED. The contractor shall then prepare and submit an original of the Change Order Request (COR) with all supporting documentation to the Owners project manager and submit two (2) copies of the Change Order Request (COR) with all supporting documentation to the Architect and University within five (5) calendar days of its receipt of the directive by the Owner and/or Architect.
B.
Owner-Initiated Proposal Requests: Owner may issue proposal requests or may have the Architect issue such requests. In any event a detailed description of proposed changes in the Work will be submitted to the contractor that may require adjustment to the Contract Sum. THERE WILL BE NO ADJUSTMENTS TO TIME FOR ANY GIVEN CHANGE ORDER REQUESTED. If necessary, the description will include supplemental or revised Drawings and Specifications. 1.
Proposal Requests issued by Architect are for information only. For ASI’s resulting in adjustments to the contract sum, do not consider them instructions either to stop work in progress or to execute the proposed change without first obtaining written authorization from the Owner.
2.
If the contractor feels the ASI or proposal request requires a change to the contract sum then the contractor shall notify the Owners project manager of this fact within 48 hours of receipt of the ASI or OIPR directive.
3.
Within five (5) business days after receipt of directive, ASI or proposal request from the Owner, submit a Change Order Request estimating cost adjustments to the Contract Sum necessary to execute the change. The contractor shall then prepare and submit an original of the Change Order Request (COR) with all supporting documentation to the Owners project manager and submit two (2) copies of the COR with all supporting documentation to the architect. a.
b. c.
d.
C.
Include a list of quantities of products required or eliminated and unit costs, with total amount of purchases and credits to be made. If requested, furnish survey data to substantiate quantities. Indicate applicable delivery charges, equipment rental, and amounts of trade discounts. Include costs of labor directly attributable to the change. 1. Labor shall be broken down by man-hours, hourly wages, fringe benefits per hour and any other benefits payable. Include an updated Contractor's Construction Schedule that indicates the effect of the change, including, but not limited to, changes in activity duration, start and finish times, and activity relationship. Use available total float however the date of Substantial and Final Completion cannot be extended.
In the event that the Contractor encounters a condition that it considers a change, the Contractor shall immediately notify the Owners Project Manager prior to disturbing the condition and shall then prepare and submit an original of the COR with all supporting documentation to the
CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES
012500 - 2
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES SECTION 012500 08/06 Owners project manager and two (2) copies of a Change Order Request with all required supporting documentation to the architect within five (5) calendar days of encountering the condition. The condition shall not be disturbed until the Project Manager has inspected the condition.
D.
Contractor-Initiated Proposals: If latent or unforeseen conditions require modifications to the Contract, Contractor may propose changes by submitting a Change Order Request (COR) to Owners project manager. The contractor shall prepare and submit one (1) original of the COR with all supporting documentation to the Owners project manager and submit two (2) copies of the COR with all supporting documentation to the architect. 1.
2.
3. 4. 5.
6. E. 1.5
Include a statement outlining reasons for the change and the effect of the change on the Work. Provide a complete description of the proposed change. Indicate the effect of the proposed change on the Contract Sum. Include a list of quantities of products required or eliminated and unit costs, with total amount of purchases and credits to be made. If requested, furnish survey data to substantiate quantities. Indicate applicable delivery charges, equipment rental, and amounts of trade discounts. Include costs of labor and supervision directly attributable to the change. Include an updated Contractor's Construction Schedule that indicates the effect of the change, including, but not limited to, changes in activity duration, start and finish times, and activity relationship. Use available total float however the date of Substantial and Final Completion cannot be extended. Comply with requirements in General Conditions Article 4.15 if the proposed change requires substitution of one product or system for product or system specified.
Proposal Request Form: Use AIA Document G709 for Proposal Requests. ALLOWANCES
A.
Allowance Adjustment: To adjust allowance amounts, base each Allowance Request Proposal on the difference between purchase amount and the allowance, multiplied by final measurement of work-in-place. If applicable, include reasonable allowances for cutting losses, tolerances, mixing wastes, normal product imperfections, and similar margins. Only allowances included as part of the Bid Price will be considered for an Allowance Authorization. All other Proposals must be hard costed. 1. 2. 3. 4.
B.
Include installation costs in purchase amount only where indicated as part of the allowance. If requested, prepare explanation and documentation to substantiate distribution of overhead costs and other margins claimed. Submit substantiation of a change in scope of work, if any, claimed in Change Orders related to allowances. Owner reserves the right to establish the quantity of work-in-place by independent quantity survey, measure, or count.
Submit claims for increased costs because of a change in scope or nature of the allowance described in the Contract Documents, whether for the Purchase Order amount or Contractor's handling, labor, installation, overhead, and profit. Submit claims within ten (10) business days
CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES
012500 - 3
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES SECTION 012500 08/06 of receipt of the Change Order or Construction Change Directive authorizing work to proceed. Owner will reject claims submitted later than ten (10) business days after such authorization. 1.
2. C.
1.6
Do not include Contractor's or subcontractor's indirect expense in the Change Order cost amount unless it is clearly shown that the nature or extent of work has changed from what could have been foreseen from information in the Contract Documents. No change to Contractor's indirect expense is permitted for selection of higher- or lowerpriced materials or systems of the same scope and nature as originally indicated.
Use the same procedure(s) followed for handling Change Order Requests (COR’s) and Change Orders with Allowances. (Except use Allowance Forms rather than Change Order Forms). CHANGE ORDER PROCEDURES
A.
Upon the Owner’s approval of a Change Order Request (COR), the Owner will direct the Architect to issue a Change Order for signatures of the Contractor and Owner on AIA Document G701. 1. The Change Order breakdown shall be in sufficient detail to permit an analysis of all material, labor, equipment, sub-contract and overhead costs as well as profit. Any amount proposed for sub-contracts shall be supported by a similar price breakdown.
B.
Each Change Order must contain a detailed description of the change and the amount by which the Contract Price will be increased or decreased. 1. Changes resulting in an increase in contract time shall not be allowed or approved for this project.
C.
COMPUTATION OF ADDITIONAL COMPENSATION 1. In connection with any request for additional compensation the Contractor shall furnish a price breakdown, as follows: a. Labor shall be broken down by the man-hour, hourly wages, fringe benefits per hour and any other benefits payable by the Contractor; b. Materials shall be broken down by quantity and unit prices. 2. Unless otherwise directed, the breakdown shall cover all work involved in the change whether such work was deleted, added or changed. 3. The breakdown shall be in sufficient detail to permit an analysis of all material, labor, equipment, sub-contract and overhead costs as well as profit. Any amount proposed for sub-contracts shall be supported by a similar price breakdown. 4. The following rates shall apply in computing indirect costs and profit for the negotiation of additional compensation under all provisions of this contract, which provide for such adjustments that do not exceed twenty-five thousand dollars ($25,000.00). The resulting change in the contract amount will include the indirect impact cost of extended performance computed in accordance with the terms of this article and no further consideration of such costs arising from the specific modification will be given. The percentages for overhead and profit shall be negotiated and may vary according to the nature, extent and complexity of the work involved. If not negotiated prior to the start of construction then the rates herein designated shall apply. The percentages shall be applicable for deleted work as well as additional work. When a change consists of both added and deleted work, the applicable percentages shall be applied to the net cost or credit. In any event, the percentages shall not exceed the sum of the following:
CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES
012500 - 4
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES SECTION 012500 08/06 overhead will be the sum of ten percent (10%) of direct labor costs.
a.
1.7
(1)
For the purpose of the article, the term direct labor shall include all labor by contractor’s employees necessary to perform the actual work on site. Foremen, equipment operators and skilled, semi-skilled and common laborers directly assigned to the specific operation are direct labor; project managers, superintendents, office personnel, and subcontractors are not direct labor.
(2)
The term direct labor costs shall consist of the contract or actual payroll rate of wage per hour and fringe benefits paid for each and every hour that such employees are actually engaged in the performance of the work. Overhead will be the sum of ten percent (10) % of direct material costs
(1)
For the purpose of the article, the term direct material costs shall consist of the actual costs of the materials, including applicable tax and transportation charges
c.
For rented equipment, an hourly rental rate will be used which will be determined by using the monthly rental rates taken from the current edition of the rental rate blue book for construction equipment and dividing it by one hundred seventy-six (176). An allowance will be made for operating costs for each and every hour the equipment is actually operating in accordance with the rate listed in the aforesaid rental book. The contractor will be allowed only sixty-five percent (65%) of the rental rate on contractor owned equipment.
d.
Bond premiums, insurance, payroll taxes and travel subsistence, if applicable, will be allowed at actual cost (only) for the equitable adjustment allowed. No mark-up will be allowed for overhead on these indirect cost items.
e.
The contractor's profit on the sub-contractor's work will be five percent (5%) of the sub-contractor's costs. Sub-contractor indirect costs will be computed in the same manner as for the contractor. The contractor agrees to incorporate this article in each of it sub-contracts.
f.
A profit of six percent (6%) where profit is allowable by the terms of the applicable contract provision shall be added to the contractor's total cost for the equitable adjustment allowed for the work conducted by the contractors own workforce. Indirect costs will not be duplicated in direct costs.
g.
When more than one (1) tier of sub-contractors exists, they shall be treated as one (1) sub-contractor for the purpose of mark-ups.
CONSTRUCTION CHANGE DIRECTIVE A.
Construction Change Directive: Architect at the direction of the Owners project manager may issue a Construction Change Directive on AIA Document G714. Construction Change Directive instructs Contractor to proceed with a change in the Work, for subsequent inclusion in a Change Order.
CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES
012500 - 5
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
1. B.
CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES SECTION 012500 08/06 Construction Change Directive contains a complete description of change in the Work. It also designates method to be followed to determine change in the Contract Sum.
Documentation: Maintain detailed records on a time and material basis of work required by the Construction Change Directive. 1.
After completion of change, submit an itemized account and supporting data necessary to substantiate cost adjustments to the Contract.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used) END OF SECTION 01250
CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES
012500 - 6
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
PAYMENT PROCEDURES SECTION 012900 08/06
SECTION 01290 - PAYMENT PROCEDURES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. In the event of any conflicts between the requirements of these Sections, the more stringent requirement shall apply. SUMMARY
A.
This Section specifies administrative and procedural requirements necessary to prepare and process Applications for Payment.
B.
Related Sections include the following: 1. 2. 3. 4.
1.3
Division 1 Section "Allowances" for procedural requirements governing handling and processing of allowances. Division 1 Section "Unit Prices" for administrative requirements governing use of unit prices. Division 1 Section "Contract Modification Procedures" for administrative procedures for handling changes to the Contract. Division 1 Section "Construction Progress Documentation" for administrative requirements governing preparation and submittal of Contractor's Construction Schedule and Submittals Schedule.
DEFINITIONS A.
1.4
Schedule of Values: A statement furnished by Contractor allocating portions of the Contract Sum to various portions of the Work and used as the basis for reviewing Contractor's Applications for Payment. SCHEDULE OF VALUES
A.
Coordination: Coordinate preparation of the Schedule of Values with preparation of Contractor's Construction Schedule. 1.
Correlate line items in the Schedule of Values with other required administrative forms and schedules, including the following: a. b.
Application for Payment forms with Continuation Sheets. Submittals Schedule.
PAYMENT PROCEDURES
012900 - 1
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
2. 3. B.
PAYMENT PROCEDURES SECTION 012900 08/06
Submit the Schedule of Values submission to Architect and Owners Construction Manager in accordance with the general conditions and general conduct of work. Sub schedules: Where the Work is separated into phases requiring separately phased payments, provide sub schedules showing values correlated with each phase of payment.
Format and Content: Use the Project Manual table of contents as a guide to establish line items for the Schedule of Values. Provide at least one line item for each Specification Section. 1.
Identification: Include the following Project identification on the Schedule of Values: a. b. c. d. e.
2.
Arrange the Schedule of Values in tabular form with separate columns to indicate the following for each item listed: a. b. c. d. e. f. g. h.
3.
4. 5.
Project name and location. Name of Architect. Architect's project number. Contractor's name and address. Date of submittal.
Related Specification Section or Division. Description of the Work. Name of subcontractor. Name of manufacturer or fabricator. Name of supplier. Change Orders (numbers) that affect value. Dollar values Cost totals. 1) Percentage of the Contract Sum to nearest one-hundredth percent, adjusted to total 100 percent.
Provide a breakdown of the Contract Sum in enough detail to facilitate continued evaluation of Applications for Payment and progress reports. Coordinate with the Project Manual table of contents. Provide several line items for principal subcontract amounts, where appropriate. a. Use data from approved Schedule of Values. Provide dollar value in each column for each line item for portion of work performed. Round amounts to nearest whole dollar; total shall equal the Contract Sum. Provide a separate line item in the Schedule of Values for each part of the Work where Applications for Payment may include materials or equipment purchased or fabricated and stored, but not yet installed. a.
Differentiate between items stored on-site and items stored off-site.
b.
The University may, in its sole discretion, pay the Contractor for material delivered on the site and preparatory work done to be taken into consideration. Material delivered to the contractor at locations other than the site may also be taken into consideration if (1) such consideration is specifically authorized by the contract and (2) the contractor furnishes a form entitled "Contractor's Summary of Stored Materials" and agreement and bill of sale certification, respectively, for stored
PAYMENT PROCEDURES
012900 - 2
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
PAYMENT PROCEDURES SECTION 012900 08/06
materials and (3) the contractor furnishes evidence of insurance for said materials or a bonded warehousing agreement. 6. 7.
8.
Provide separate line items in the Schedule of Values for initial cost of materials, for each subsequent stage of completion, and for total installed value of that part of the Work. Allowances: Provide a separate line item in the Schedule of Values for each allowance. Show line-item value of unit-cost allowances, as a product of the unit cost, multiplied by measured quantity. Use information indicated in the Contract Documents to determine quantities. Allowances will only be accepted for items listed in the Bid Documents. Each item in the Schedule of Values and Applications for Payment shall be complete. Include total cost and proportionate share of general overhead and profit for each item. a.
9.
Schedule Updating: Update and resubmit the Schedule of Values before the next Applications for Payment when Change Orders or Construction Change Directives result in a change in the Contract Sum. a.
1.5
Temporary facilities and other major cost items that are not direct cost of actual work-in-place must be shown as separate line items in the Schedule of Values.
List each authorized Change Order as a separate line item, listing Change Order number and dollar amount as for an original item of work.
APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT A.
Each Application for Payment shall be consistent with previous applications and payments as certified by Architect and paid for by Owner. 1.
Initial Application for Payment, Application for Payment at time of Substantial Completion, and final Application for Payment involve additional requirements.
2.
Submit three (3) copies of each Application for Payment, at least five (5) business days prior to the actual submission date as specified. This Application will be reviewed and adjusted by all parties (Architect, Owner and Contractor) at a “PENCIL COPY REVIEW” meeting prior to final approval.
B.
Payment Application Times: The date for each progress payment is indicated in the Agreement between Owner and Contractor. The period of construction Work covered by each Application for Payment is the period indicated in the Agreement.
C.
Payment Application Times: The date for each progress payment is per the General Conditions. The period covered by each Application for Payment starts on the day following the end of the preceding period and ends 15 days before the date for each progress payment.
D.
Payment Application Forms: Use AIA Document G702 and AIA Document G703 Continuation Sheets
E.
Application Preparation: Complete every entry on form. Notarize and execute by a person authorized to sign legal documents on behalf of Contractor. Project Manager will return incomplete applications without action.
PAYMENT PROCEDURES
012900 - 3
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
1. 2. F.
Transmit each copy with a transmittal form listing attachments and recording appropriate information about application.
Release of Mechanic's Lien: With each Application for Payment, submit partial or final releases of mechanic's lien (as may apply) from every entity that is lawfully entitled to file a mechanic's lien arising out of the Contract and related to the Work covered by the payment. 1. 2. 3. 4.
5. H.
Entries shall match data on the Schedule of Values and Contractor's Construction Schedule. Use updated schedules if revisions were made. Include amounts of Change Orders and Construction Change Directives issued before last day of construction period covered by application.
Transmittal: Submit 3 (three) signed and notarized original copies of each Application for Payment to Project Manager by a method ensuring receipt within 24 hours. All copy’s shall include ‘Attachment to G702- Certification for Payment”, Release of Liens Forms (included in the Contract Documents) entirely completed for the contractor, all subcontractors and anyone else whose payment is listed in the Schedule of Values for the application being requested, AIA G706 A-Contractors Affidavit…, Certified Payrolls and Monthly Work Force Reports, updated and current Construction Schedule, updated and current Submittal Log, and current Project Photograph’s. 1.
G.
PAYMENT PROCEDURES SECTION 012900 08/06
Submit partial waivers on each item for amount requested, before deduction for retainage, on each item. When an application shows completion of an item, submit final or full waivers. Owner reserves the right to designate which entities involved in the Work must submit waivers. Submit final Application for Payment with or proceeded by final waivers from every entity involved with performance of the Work covered by the application that is lawfully entitled to a lien. Release Forms: Submit release of lien on forms, executed in a manner acceptable to Owner. (Use Form listed in Division 0 of the Specifications).
Initial Application for Payment: Administrative actions and submittals that must precede or coincide with submittal of first Application for Payment include the following: 1. 2. 3.
4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12.
List of subcontractors. Schedule of Values. Contractor's Construction Schedule (preliminary if not final). a) A final schedule must be submitted prior to Owners payment of the second (2nd) progress payment. Products list. Schedule of unit prices. Submittals Schedule (preliminary if not final). List of Contractor's staff assignments. List of Contractor's principal consultants. Copies of building permits. Copies of authorizations and licenses from authorities having jurisdiction for performance of the Work. Initial progress report. Report of preconstruction conference.
PAYMENT PROCEDURES
012900 - 4
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
13. 14. 15. 16. 17. I.
2.
3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8.
9.
Evidence of completion of Project closeout requirements. Insurance certificates for products and completed operations where required and proof that taxes, fees, and similar obligations were paid. Updated final statement, accounting for final changes to the Contract Sum. AIA Document G706, "Contractor's Affidavit of Payment of Debts and Claims." AIA Document G706A, "Contractor's Affidavit of Release of Liens." AIA Document G707, "Consent of Surety to Final Payment." Evidence that claims have been settled. Final meter readings for utilities, a measured record of stored fuel, and similar data as of date of Substantial Completion or when Owner took possession of and assumed responsibility for corresponding elements of the Work. Final, liquidated damages settlement statement.
When Owner or Architect/Engineer requires substantiating information, submit data justifying dollar amounts in question. Provide one (1) copy of data with cover letter for each copy of submittal. Show application number and date, and line item by number and description. 1.
N.
Include documentation supporting claim that the Work is substantially complete and a statement showing an accounting of changes to the Contract Sum. This application shall reflect Certificates of Partial Substantial Completion issued previously for Owner occupancy of designated portions of the Work.
Final Payment Application: Submit final Application for Payment with releases and supporting documentation not previously submitted and accepted, including, but not limited, to the following: 1. 2.
M.
Certificates of insurance and insurance policies. Performance and payment bonds. Data needed to acquire Owner's insurance. Initial settlement survey and damage report if required. Current construction photographs as specified herein.
Application for Payment at Substantial Completion: After issuing the Certificate of Substantial Completion, submit an Application for Payment showing 100 percent completion for portion of the Work claimed as substantially complete. 1.
J.
PAYMENT PROCEDURES SECTION 012900 08/06
any other information or documentation required by other provisions of the contract documents shall be supplied.
In order to be proper an Application for Payment must include the following as applicable: 1. 2.
total amount, payee name and address, department/agency, payee declaration, payee reference number and identification number. contract number, contractor’s name, period of the Application, completion date, number of sheets, amount due this period, amount to date, retainage, certification by payee, certification signed by the Project Manager and Architect and approval of payment signed by the contracting officer or his/her designee, previous payment requests, total deductions and additions.
PAYMENT PROCEDURES
012900 - 5
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
3.
4.
PAYMENT PROCEDURES SECTION 012900 08/06
In making progress payments for work, the University will retain ten percent (10%) of the approved invoice of payment until final acceptance and completion of all work covered by the contract. After fifty percent (50%) of the work has been completed, upon written request by the contractor and provided the contracting officer determines that the contractor's performance and progress have been satisfactory, the University will make partial payments thereafter in full of the approved payment amount. If, however, progress is not maintained in accordance with the approved schedule, the contracting officer may elect to reinstitute retainage of ten percent (10%) of amounts due to the contractor. The contracting officer shall have the sole authority to determine whether contractor’s performance and progress warrant waiver of ten percent (10%) retainage.
O.
Upon acceptance and completion of each building or other clearly definable severable portion of the contract work for which the price is stated separately within the contract, payment may be made in full at the discretion of the contracting officer including retained percentages thereon less authorized deductions.
P.
All authorized Applications are to be sent to the Owners authorized representative at the address provided at the pre-construction conference. Receipt shall start the prompt payment clock unless returned to the contractor for correction within thirty (30) calendar days after receipt. Reference section 10.2.4 (d) of the General Conditions.
1.6
FINAL PAYMENT A.
Upon final acceptance, the amount due the contractor under this contract shall be paid upon satisfactory completion by the contractor of all contract close-out requirements as required by the University, completion of a University audit on all contract values and payments and after the contractor shall have furnished the University with a final release of liens from the contractor and all subcontractors, sub-subcontractors, vendors, suppliers and any other entity affiliated with the contractor for completion of this project of any and all claims against the University arising by virtue of this contract other than claims in stated amounts as may be specifically excepted by the contractor from the release.
B.
Upon satisfying the above conditions, the contractor shall submit a properly executed Application for Final Payment to the University through the Project Manager. The University Controller shall date stamp the Application. This action by the University Controller shall constitute receipt of a properly executed State invoice application.
C.
If, for any reason, the contractor refuses final payment, the project shall be closed-out by the University unilaterally processing a final acceptance certificate. The University will hold all residual funds in escrow until all claims of the University and all contractors are satisfied.
END OF SECTION 01290
PAYMENT PROCEDURES
012900 - 6
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
COORDINATION SECTION 01310 08/06
SECTION 01310 - COORDINATION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS A.
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General Conditions, General Conduct of the Work and Special Requirements, Supplementary Conditions, and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. In the event of any conflicts between the requirements of these Sections, the more stringent requirement shall apply
A.
This Section includes administrative and supervisory requirements necessary for coordinating construction operations including, but not necessarily limited to, the following: 1. 2. 3.
4. 5.
B.
General project coordination procedures. Conservation. Coordination Drawings. Administrative and supervisory personnel. Cleaning and protection.
Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section: 1. 2.
3.
Division 1 Section "Field Engineering" specifies procedures for field engineering services, including establishment of benchmarks and control points. Division 1 Section "Submittals" for preparing and submitting the Contractor's Construction Schedule. Division 1 Section "Contract Closeout" for coordinating contract closeout.
COORDINATION
1.3
A.
Coordinate construction operations included in various Sections of these Specifications to assure efficient and orderly installation of each part of the Work. Coordinate construction operations included under different Sections that depend on each other for proper installation, connection, and operation.
I. 2. 3.
Schedule construction operations in the sequence required to obtain the best results where installation of one part of the Work depends on installation of other components, before or after its own installation. Coordinate installation of different components to assure maximum accessibility for required maintenance, service, and repair. Make provisions to accommodate items scheduled for later installation.
COORDINATION
01310- 1
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
COORDINATION SECTION 01310 08/06
B.
The mechanical. electrical and fire protection drawingsa r e diagrammatic only and are not intended to show the alignment, physical locations o r configurations of such work. Such work shall be coordinated by the Contractor and shall be installed to clear all obstructions, permit proper clearances for the work of other trades, satisfv all code requirements and present an orderlv appearance where exposed a t no additional cost to the Owner.
C.
Where necessary, prepare memoranda for distribution to each party involved, outlining special procedures required for coordination. Include such items as required notices, reports, and attendance at meetings. 1.
Prepare similar memoranda for the Owner and separate contractors where coordination of their work is required.
D.
Administrative Procedures: Coordinate scheduling and timing of required administrative procedures with other construction activities to avoid conflicts and assure orderly progress of the Work. Such administrative activities include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Prepare and coordinate scheduling, delivery and processing of submittals, and work of the various sections of the Project Manual to ensure efficient and orderly sequence of installation of interdependent construction elements, with provisions for accommodating items installed later. 2. Verify that utility requirements and characteristics of operating equipment are compatible with building utilities. Coordinate work of various sections having interdependent responsibilities for installing, connecting to, and placing in service, such equipment. 3. Coordinate space requirements, supports, and installation of mechanical and electrical work, which are indicated diagrammatically on the Drawings. Follow routing shown for pipes, ducts and conduit, as closely as practicable; place runs parallel with lines of building. Utilize spaces efficiently to maximize accessibility for other installations, for maintenance and for repairs. 4. Installation and removal oftemporasy facilities. 5. Progress meetings. 6. In finished areas except as otherwise indicated, conceal pipes, ducts, and wiring within the construction. Coordinate locations of fixtures and outlets with finish elements. 7. Coordinate completion and clean up of work of separate sections. 8. After Owner occupancy of premises, coordinate access to site for correction of defective work and work not in accordance with Contract Documents, to minimize disruption of Owner's activities. 9. Project closeout activities.
E.
Conservation: Coordinate construction operations to assure that operations are carried out with consideration given to conservation of energy, water, and materials. 1.
Salvage materials and equipment involved in performance of, but not actually incorporated in, the Work.
COORDINATION
01310 - 2
COORDINATION SECTION 01310 08/06
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
1.4
SUBMITTALS A.
Coordination Drawings: Prepare coordination drawings where careful coordination is needed for installation of products and materials fabricated by separate entities. Prepare coordination drawings where limited space availability necessitates maximum utilization of space for efficient installation of different components.
1. 2. 3.
B.
Show the relationship of components shown on separate Shop Drawings. Indicate required installation sequences. Cornply with requirements contained in Section "Submittals." Note the coordination drawing submittal requirements under section 01330 a. "Submittals", paragraph 2.3.9
Staff Names: Within 15 days of commencetnent of construction operations, submit a list of the Contractor's principal staff assignments, including the superintendent and other personnel in attendance at the Project Site. Identify individuals and their duties and responsibilities. List their addresses and telephone numbers. 1.
Post copies of the list in the Project meeting room, and the temporary field office.
PART 2 - EXECUTION 2.1
GENERAL COORDINATION PROVISIONS A.
Inspection of Conditions: Require the Installer of each major component to inspect both the substrate and conditions under which Work is to be performed. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in an acceptable manner.
B.
Coordinate temporary enclosures with required inspections and tests to minimize the necessity of uncovering completed construction for that purpose.
2.2
CLEANING AND PROTECTION A.
Clean and protect construction in progress and adjoining materials in place, during handling and installation. Apply protective covering where required to assure protection from damage or deterioration at Substantial Completion.
B.
Clean and provide maintenance on completed construction as frequently as necessary through the remainder of the construction period. Adjust and lubricate operable components to assure operability without damaging effects.
C.
Limiting Exposures: Supervise construction operations to assure that no part of the construction, completed or in progress is subject to harmful, dangerous, damaging, or othetwise deleterious exposure during the construction period. END OF SECTION 01310
COORDINATION
01310 - 3
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS SCHEDULE SECTION 013200 08/06
SECTION 01320 – CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS SCHEDULE PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS A.
1.2
1.3
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General Conditions (Contract Administration Division Section D), General Conduct of the Work and Special Requirements, and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. In the event of any conflicts between the requirements of these Sections, the more stringent requirement shall apply. SUBMITTALS
A.
Within three (3) days after the date established in the Notice to Proceed, University Contract and/or purchase order submit preliminary schedule indicating the scope of work for the duration of the project. A Gantt chart format will be acceptable however the final approved schedule must be in both a Gantt chart and CPM schedule format. If another method other than CPM is used the critical path and float time must be established and programmed into the schedule.
B.
Initial Working CPM Schedule Submittal: To the extent necessary for the Contractor to reflect in the arrow diagram the plan for completion of this contract, the contractor shall meet with and furnish all necessary information for the preparation of the scheduling system within ten (10) calendar days after award of this contract. This information shall include, but not necessarily be limited to, logical sequencing of work operations; activity time estimated, intended crew flow, activity costs and estimated manpower requirements of each activity. 1. The contractor shall be responsible to reflect all sub-contractor work as well as his/her own work in proper coordinated sequence on the network diagram. The contractor shall be prepared to meet as many times as necessary with the Project Manager for the timely development of the project schedule. SCHEDULE FORMAT
A. Listings: In chronological order according to the start date for each activity. Identify each activity with the applicable specification section number. At a minimum provide the following. 2. Include a separate bar for each portion of work or operation. 3. Identify the first workday of each week. 4. Identify each critical path task or portion of work. 5. Identify task durations, predecessors and dependent tasks. 6. Identify milestone dates for completion/start of each critical path element. B. The contractor shall utilize the earliest scheduled start and finish dates in planning, coordinating and performing the work under this contract including all activities of sub-contractors, equipment vendors and suppliers.
CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION
013200- 1
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS SCHEDULE SECTION 013200 08/06
PART 2 - PRODUCTS – NOT USED PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1
CONTENT A.
Construction logic and activity time durations shall be established by the contractor subject to approval by the Owner’s Project Manager consistent with contract requirements and reflective of proper coordination between trades.
B.
The Owner’s Project Manager shall establish the specific level of detail to be reflected in the scheduling system.
C.
Seasonal weather conditions shall be considered in the planning and scheduling of all work influenced by high or low ambient temperatures for the completion of all contract work within the allotted contract time. In addition, appropriate allowances shall be made for anticipated time losses due to normal rain and snow conditions by statistically expanding the estimated time durations for weather sensitive activities with the constraint that the substantial completion deadline cannot change.
D.
The coordinated combined Progress Schedule the Contractor will develop shall incorporate the schedules of all Prime Contractors engaged on the project. The Schedule shall be in a form as specified herein and elsewhere in the contract documents and in sufficient detail to satisfy the Architect/Engineer and the University.
E.
If applicable, the Contractor shall submit copies of his initial draft of this Schedule to all Prime Contractors. Each Prime Contractor shall then prepare a Progress Schedule for his own work, properly coordinated with the General Construction Contractor's initial draft and then submit it to the General Construction Contractor for his preparation of the final draft of a Single Coordinated Progress Schedule. Contract Requisitions will not be processed by the University until and unless such a single coordinated Progress Schedule shall have been submitted to and approved by the University Project Manager and/or Contracting Officer. This submission shall be no later than thirty (30) colander days after the award of the Contract. If any Prime Contractor delays his submission, the Project Schedule will be submitted without his input and any payments otherwise due him will be withheld until he complies.
F.
The Progress Schedule based upon the Contractor's logic and time estimates shall indicate, in suitable detail for display, all significant features of the Work of each Contractor, including the placing of orders and anticipated delivery dates for critical items and all other critical path activities, submissions and approvals of Shop Drawings, all work activities to be performed by each Contractor and the beginning and time durations thereof, float time and the dates of substantial and final completion of the various branches of the Work. 1.
Show complete sequence of construction activity, with dates for beginning and completion of each element of construction.
2.
Identify each item by specification section number or per bid form breakdown.
CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION
013200- 2
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
3.2
CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS SCHEDULE SECTION 013200 08/06
3.
Show accumulated percentage of completion of each item, and total percentage of Work completed, as of the first day of each month.
4.
Indicate delivery dates as milestones for Owner-furnished items and any critical path items.
5.
Provide legend for symbols and abbreviations used.
6.
Show critical path tasks; differentiate them from other construction tasks.
7.
Schedule will be based upon a five-day workweek.
REVIEW AND EVALUATION OF SCHEDULE A.
Review and Approval of Initial Working Schedule: Within ten (10) calendar days after receipt of the initial arrow diagram and computer produced schedule, the University's representative shall meet with the contractor and for joint review, correction or adjustment of the proposed plan and schedule to evaluate the cost values assigned to each activity. Within ten (10) calendar days after the joint review, the Contractor will revise the arrow diagram and the computerproduced schedule in accordance with agreement reached during the joint review and shall submit two (2) copies each of the revised arrow diagram, computer produced schedule and cost requisition to the University. The resubmission will be reviewed by the University and, if found to be as previously agreed upon, will be approved. An approved copy of each will be returned to the Contractor. The contractor shall review the schedule to insure that it reflects all changes agreed to and, if all changes have been made, the contractor shall approve and sign the network diagrams, computer produced schedule and cost requisition listing at that time. Approval will be without reservation and the contractor will be deemed to have accepted the schedule as adequate, proper and binding in all respects and shall not raise objections to the schedule. After the network diagrams, computer-produced schedule and cost requisition listing have been signed, the Contractor shall forward one (1) set of signed copies of all scheduling documents to the University Project Manger. The arrow diagram and the computer-produced schedule with approved signatures shall constitute the project work schedule until subsequently revised in accordance with the requirements of this section.
B.
Evaluate project status to determine work behind schedule and work ahead of schedule. Submit revised recovery schedule with action plan to bring “behind schedule” tasks and milestones back into original timeline.
3.3
UPDATING SCHEDULES A.
Maintain schedules to record actual start and finish dates of completed activities. 1. Updated schedules must be submitted at each progress meeting and with each application for payment or as required by Architect or Owner. These schedules must include the following: a. approved changes in activity sequencing
CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION
013200- 3
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
b. c. d. e.
f. B.
3.4
CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS SCHEDULE SECTION 013200 08/06
changes in activity durations for unstarted or partially completed activities where agreed upon the effect to the network of any delays in any activities in progress and/or the impact of known delays, which are expected to affect future work the effect of contractor modifications; i.e., activity durations, logic and cost estimates; to the network changes to activity logic where agreed upon to reflect revision in the contractor's work plan; i.e., changes in activity duration, cost estimates and activity sequences for the purpose of regaining lost time or improving progress changes to milestones, and due dates (except substantial completion) which have been agreed upon by the University since the last revision of the schedule.
At the same time the network is updated, the contractor and the University's representative shall jointly make entries on the preceding network diagram schedule to show actual progress, to identify those activities started by date and those completed by date during the previous period to show the estimated time required to complete each activity started but not yet completed, to show activity percent completed and to reflect any changes in the arrow diagram approved in accordance with the preceding paragraph. After completion of the joint review and the University's approval of all entries, the Contractor will submit updated network diagrams and an updated computer produced calendar dated schedule to the University and the contractor. 1. The resultant computer print-out and network diagrams shall be recognized by the contractor as solely his/her updated construction schedule to complete all remaining contractor work except that portion affected by interim University decisions. DISTRIBUTION OF SCHEDULES
A.
Upon approval at each level of schedule development (preliminary, final for Contractors work and Single Coordinated including all Prime Contractors work) the Contractor shall prepare and distribute (10) copies of the schedule at each level to the University. The Contractor shall also prepare and distribute two (2) copies of the final schedule showing Prime Contractors work to each Prime Contractor. In the event a new Prime Contractor is added to the job the General Construction Contractor shall furnish a revised schedule immediately with copies as indicated. The final coordinated schedule shall be signed and dated by all Prime Contractors involved and shall become part of the contract documents.
B.
Distribute copies of updated (current) schedules to Contractors project site file, subcontractors, suppliers, Architect and Owner at each bi-weekly progress meeting. Also submit an updated (current) schedule with each Application for Payment or more often as required by the Architect and/or Owner.
3.5
SCHEDULE ADJUSTMENTS A.
Upon Owner and/or Architects request, if Contractor falls behind the approved schedule, the Contractor must submit a revised schedule to show how the Contractor intends to accomplish the completion of the work within the original contract time.
CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION
013200- 4
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
1.
B.
C.
3.6
CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS SCHEDULE SECTION 013200 08/06
Within seven (7) days after receipt of notice from the Owner, the contractor shall submit to the University in writing an explanation of corrective action taken or proposed. The contracting officer shall make a decision binding on all parties after reviewing the written submissions.
Responsibility for Completion: The contractor agrees that whenever it becomes apparent from the current monthly computer produced calendar dated schedule that any contract completion date will not be met, he/she will take some or all of the following actions at no additional cost to the University. 1.
increase construction manpower in such trades and numbers as will substantially eliminate the backlog of work in the opinion of the Construction Manager and contracting officer
2.
increase the number of working hours per shift, shifts per working days, working days per week or the amount of construction equipment of any combination of the foregoing sufficiently to substantially eliminate the backlog of work in the judgment of the Construction Manager and contracting officer
3.
reschedule activities to achieve maximum practical concurrence of accomplishment of activities
Lost time due to weather conditions will not accrue nor be credited to Contractor for weather delays with time added to the Substantial Completion milestone deadline. No weather delays will be granted once the building is under roof. BI-WEEKLY REPORTING
A.
Upon request from the Owner, the Contractor shall furnish for approval, his proposed operating schedule for the next immediate two-week period of time. This schedule will be submitted at each bi-weekly progress meeting along with the overall updated schedule. 1.
Every two (2) weeks, the Architect will conduct a coordination and scheduling meeting on the job site. At this meeting, the contractor shall provide detailed information in the form of a bar chart schedule regarding the work schedule to be performed during the upcoming two (2) weeks. Bi-weekly scheduling by the contractor shall be in accordance with the priorities and degree of concurrent work required by the official schedule for the project. The contractor shall be prepared to explain a difference between the contractor's bi-weekly schedules and the priorities required by the latest updating of the official schedule.
2.
At the bi-weekly scheduling meeting, the Owner and Architect shall review the bar charts for the preceding two (2) weeks and the contractor shall report the progress actually achieved for each activity, which was scheduled to be performed during the two (2) weeks, including the actual dates on which the work was performed. The contractor agrees that this information shall constitute the official historical record of project
CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION
013200- 5
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS SCHEDULE SECTION 013200 08/06
progress. At each bi-weekly scheduling meeting, the contractor shall document any current delays to work operations. In addition, the contractor shall provide any available information regarding any potential delays, which they anticipate; i.e., procurement delays, expected strikes, etc.
3.7 A.
3.
Following the bi-weekly scheduling meeting, the Contractor shall issue to the Owner and Architect a new set of bi-weekly bar charts as developed at the meeting, which shall constitute the construction schedule for the upcoming two (2) weeks. The Contractor shall also issue a narrative bi-weekly progress analysis documenting progress achieved during the preceding two (2) weeks and analyze delays reported to constitute current or anticipated impacts to timely construction. The revised bar chart schedule and progress narrative shall agree with the meeting minutes and items discussed and agreed to at the bi-weekly meeting.
4.
The contractor shall be represented at the bi-weekly scheduling meeting by their Construction Manager who shall have complete authority to provide the information required for the development of the next two (2) weeks bar chart schedule, documentation of past progress and documentation of delays. The contractor representatives shall also be authorized to discuss correction action planned to overcome delaying conditions at these meetings.
DAILY REPORTS Daily Construction Reports: Prepare a daily construction report recording the following information concerning events at the Project site: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. 15. 16. 17.
List of subcontractors at Project site. List of separate contractors at Project site. Approximate count of personnel at Project site. Equipment at Project site. Material deliveries. High and low temperatures and general weather conditions. Accidents. Meetings and significant decisions. Unusual events (refer to special reports). Stoppages, delays, shortages, and losses. Meter readings and similar recordings. Emergency procedures. Orders and requests of authorities having jurisdiction. Change Orders received and implemented. Construction Change Directives received and implemented. Services connected and disconnected. Equipment or system tests and startups.
CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION
013200- 6
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
18. 19. B.
CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS SCHEDULE SECTION 013200 08/06
Partial Completions and occupancies. Substantial Completions authorized.
Field Condition Reports: Immediately on discovery of a difference between field conditions and the Contract Documents prepare and submit a detailed report. Submit with requests for interpretation. Include a detailed description of the differing conditions, together with recommendations for changing the Contract Documents.
END OF SECTION 01320
CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION
013200- 7
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES SECTION 013300 08/06
SECTION 01330 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General Conditions, General Conduct of the Work, Supplementary Conditions, and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. In the event of any conflicts between the requirements of these Sections, the more stringent requirement shall apply. SUMMARY
A.
This Section augments requirements set forth in the General Conditions and specifies administrative and procedural requirements for submittals required for performance of the Work, including: 1. Contractor’s Use of Architect’s CAD Files. 2. Shop Drawings. 3. Product Data. 4. Samples. 5. Informational Submittals. 6. Delegated Design.
B.
Administrative Submittals: Refer to General Conditions, other Division 1 Sections and other Contract Documents for requirements for administrative submittals. Such submittals include, but are not limited to: 1. Permits. 2. Contractor’s Construction Schedule. 3. Submittal Schedule. 4. Schedule of Values. 5. Applications for payment. 6. List of Subcontractors.
C.
Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 1 Section "Project Management and Coordination" for submitting and distributing meeting and conference minutes and for submitting Coordination Drawings. 2. Division 1 Section "Quality Requirements" for submitting test and inspection reports and for mockup requirements. 3. Division 1 Section "Closeout Procedures" for submitting warranties. 4. Division 1 Section "Operation and Maintenance Data" for submitting operation and maintenance manuals.
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
013300- 1
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
5. 6.
1.3
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES SECTION 013300 08/06
Division 1 Section "Demonstration and Training" for submitting videotapes of demonstration of equipment and training of Owner's personnel. Divisions 2 through 16 Sections for specific requirements for submittals in those Sections.
DEFINITIONS A.
Action Submittals: Written and graphic information that requires Architect and Construction Manager's responsive action.
B.
Informational Submittals: Written information that does not require Architect and Construction Manager's responsive action. Submittals may be rejected for not complying with requirements.
C.
Concurrent Review: Simultaneous review by Architect and other discipline(s).
D.
Shop Drawings: Original fabrication drawings.
E.
Product Data: Manufacturer’s standard product literature and samples.
1.4
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES A.
Coordination: Coordinate preparation and processing of submittals with performance of construction activities. 1. Coordinate each submittal with fabrication, purchasing, testing, delivery, other submittals, and related activities that require sequential activity. 2. Coordinate transmittal of different types of submittals for related parts of the Work so processing will not be delayed because of need to review submittals concurrently for coordination. a. Architect reserves the right to withhold action on a submittal requiring coordination with other submittals until related submittals are received.
B.
Submittals Schedule: Comply with General Conditions and other requirements of the Contract Administration Division. A submittal schedule will be developed by the Contractor within 10 working days of Notice to Proceed and approved by the Architect within 10 working days after receipt for review. 1. Follow the submittal requirements listed in this Section and elsewhere throughout the Contract Documents however and in addition to submittals required in other specification sections, one (1) copy of all HVAC, sprinkler, plumbing, electrical, and control system submittal must be forwarded to the Owners Project Manager. At minimum, for submittals other then those listed under this item a transmittal must be forwarded to the Project Manager.
C.
Contractor shall record all submittal information on the required “Submittal Log”. Distribute Log at each progress meeting.
D.
Processing Time: Allow enough time for submittal review, including time for resubmittals, as follows. Time for review shall commence on Architect's receipt of submittal. No extension of
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
013300- 2
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES SECTION 013300 08/06
the Contract Time will be authorized because of failure to transmit submittals enough in advance of the Work to permit processing, including resubmittals. 1. Initial Review: Allow 10 working days for initial review of each submittal. Allow additional time if coordination with subsequent submittals is required. Architect will advise Contractor when a submittal being processed must be delayed for coordination. 2. Intermediate Review: If intermediate submittal is necessary, process it in same manner as initial submittal. 3. Resubmittal Review: Allow 5 working days for review of each resubmittal. 4. Concurrent Consultant Review: Where the Contract Documents indicate that submittals may be transmitted simultaneously to Architect and to Architect's consultants, allow 10 working days for initial review of each submittal. Submittal will be returned to Contractor, through Architect. Submittals in the following sections require concurrent consultant review: a. Division 3: All Sections. b. Division 5: Sections 05120 “Structural Steel”, 05310 “Steel Deck”, 05300 “Steel Joists. c. Division 9: Acoustic Sections d. Division 13: All Sections. e. Division 15: All Sections. f. Division 16: All Sections.
E.
5.
Concurrent Transmittal to Consultant: Where indicated above and acceptable to Architect, Contractor may transmit submittals directly to Architect’s consultants in the required number of copies, while at the same time transmitting two additional copies of the entire submittal including the transmittal to the Architect.
6.
Concurrent Transmittal to Owner: a. Transmit two (2) additional copies of all shop drawings, product data and coordination drawings and coordination drawings and one (1) set of each sample submittal to Owner’s Project Manager.
Identification: Place a permanent label or title block on each submittal for identification. 1. Indicate name of firm or entity that prepared each submittal on label or title block. 2. Provide a space approximately 4 by 5 inches on label or beside title block to record Contractor's review and approval markings and action taken by Architect. 3. Include the following information on label for processing and recording action taken: a. Project name. b. Date. c. Name and address of Architect. d. Name and address of Contractor. e. Name and address of subcontractor. f. Name and address of supplier. g. Name of manufacturer.
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
013300- 3
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
h.
i. j. k.
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES SECTION 013300 08/06
Submittal number or other unique identifier, including revision identifier. 1) Architect will assign own numbers to each submittal, which may be different than those assigned by the Contractor. Number and title of appropriate Specification Section, and Keynote reference where applicable. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate. Other necessary identification.
F.
Deviations: Encircle or otherwise specifically identify deviations from the Contract Documents on submittals.
G.
Additional Copies: Unless additional copies are required for final submittal, and unless Architect observes noncompliance with provisions in the Contract Documents, initial submittal may serve as final submittal. 1. Submit specified number of copies of submittal to concurrent reviewer in addition to one complete copy and transmittal to Architect. 2. Additional copies submitted for maintenance manuals will not be marked with action taken and will be returned.
H.
Transmittal: Package each submittal individually and appropriately for transmittal and handling. Transmit each submittal using a transmittal form. Architect will return submittals, without review, received from sources other than Contractor. 1. Transmittal Form: Provide locations on form for the following information: a. Project name. b. Date. c. Destination (To:). d. Source (From:). e. Names of subcontractor, manufacturer, and supplier. f. Category and type of submittal. g. Submittal purpose and description. h. Specification Section number and title. i. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate. j. Submittal and transmittal distribution record. k. Remarks. l. Signature of transmitter. 2. On the transmittal record relevant information and requests for data. On the form, or separate sheet, record deviations from Contract Document requirements, including minor variations and limitations. Include Contractor’s Certification that information complies with Contract Document requirements.
I.
Contractor’s Certification: All scale and full-size shop, erection or setting drawings, roughing drawings, sleeve and opening drawings, product data, and samples shall be examined and checked by qualified technical employees of Contractor as to accuracy, completeness and compliance with all contract documents prior to submission to the Architect for his review. These drawings, data and samples shall be stamped and signed by Contractor certifying to such
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
013300- 4
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES SECTION 013300 08/06
examination and compliance. Any drawings, data and samples not checked, stamped, and signed by Contractor will be returned unchecked, to Contractor. Contractor will be held responsible for any delay in the progress of the work due to his failure to observe these requirements, and the time for the completion of his contract will not be extended on account of his failure to submit drawings, data and samples promptly in accordance herewith. J.
Resubmittals: Make resubmittals in same form and number of copies as initial submittal. 1. Note date and content of previous submittal. 2. Note date and content of revision in label or title block and clearly indicate extent of revision. 3. Resubmit submittals until they are marked “No Exceptions Taken", or “Make Corrections Noted”.
K.
Distribution: Furnish copies of final submittals to manufacturers, subcontractors, suppliers, fabricators, installers, and authorities having jurisdiction, and others as necessary for performance of construction activities. Furnish one (1) copy of final submittals to Owner. Show distribution on transmittal forms.
L.
Use for Construction: Use only final submittals with mark indicating "No Exceptions Taken” or “Make Corrections Noted” by Architect.
M.
In instances where sepias, shop drawings and/or erection of drawings of a scale larger than the contract drawings are prepared by a contract, such drawings and sepias will be accepted in lieu of marked-up contract drawings provided they are updated according to the contract documents. A master sheet of the same dimensions as the contract drawings shall be prepared by the contractor on a tracing which shall indicate, sheet by sheet, a cross-reference to all shop drawings pertaining to that drawing. All drawings and sepias as required by Section 2.8 F below, shall be labeled "as-built" and dated above the tile block.
1.5
CONTRACTOR'S USE OF ARCHITECT'S CAD FILES A.
General: Architect may provide electronic copies of CAD files of the Contract Drawings for Contractor’s use in preparing submittals subject to execution by the Contractor of a waiver and payment to the Architect for this service in the amount of $250. In accordance with the language of the waiver, the agreement is non-transferable by the Contractor to any Subcontractor, from any Subcontractor to the Contractor or from any Subcontractor to another Subcontractor. A separate waiver and payment is required for each individual contractor or subcontractor requesting electronic copies of CAD Drawings. 1. A sample copy of the waiver is included at the end of this Section. Upon request, Architect will provide an original. 2. This service is not available prior to the award of the contract. 3. Architect’s consultants may or may not provide CAD files under the above agreement. Such consultants reserve the right to refuse to provide CAD files, regardless of whether or not the aforementioned waiver and fee agreement is executed. Consultants may, if they agree to provide CAD files, attach additional conditions to those listed above and below. Architect’s consultants include the following disciplines: civil, landscape, structural, mechanical, electrical, plumbing, and fire protection. Architect will advise
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
013300- 5
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
4. 5.
6.
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES SECTION 013300 08/06
Contractor if any consultants will not provide CAD files prior to executing above agreement. CAD files will be provided in Autocad 2002 format or newer version only. CAD files will be provided in Architect’s office standard conventions for file structure, file names, layering standards, drafting standards, etc. Architect will not make revisions to these standards for the convenience of the Contractor. CAD files may or may not contain differences from the Contract Documents, including work and information related, but not limited to, alternate designs, obsolete designs, addenda, bulletins, construction sketches, and informational sketches. Such differences may or may not be clearly indicated. Where such differences are found, they do not supercede the Contract Documents.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1
ACTION SUBMITTALS A.
General: Prepare and submit Action Submittals required by individual Specification Sections.
B.
When the following are specified in individual sections, submit them for review: 1. Shop drawings. 2. Samples for selection. 3. Samples for verification. 4. HVAC Test and Balance Reports.
C.
Submit to Architect for review for the limited purpose of checking for conformance with information given and the design concept expressed in the contract documents.
D.
Architect will consult with the Owner prior to rendering a decision or approval.
2.2
PRODUCT DATA A.
Collect information into a single submittal for each element of construction and type of product or equipment. 1. If information must be specially prepared for submittal because standard printed data are not suitable for use, submit as Shop Drawings, not as Product Data. 2. Mark each copy of each submittal to show which products and options are applicable. 3. Include the following information, as applicable: a. Manufacturer's written recommendations. b. Manufacturer's product specifications. c. Manufacturer's installation instructions. d. Standard color charts. e. Manufacturer's catalog cuts. f. Wiring diagrams showing factory-installed wiring.
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
013300- 6
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
4. 5.
2.3
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES SECTION 013300 08/06
g. Printed performance curves. h. Operational range diagrams. i. Mill reports. j. Standard product operation and maintenance manuals. k. Compliance with specified referenced standards. l. Testing by recognized testing agency. m. Application of testing agency labels and seals. n. Notation of coordination requirements. Submit Product Data before or concurrent with Samples. Each item of materials listed shall be marked “as specified” or “unspecified” as the case may be. Number of Copies: Submit one original and three copies. For color charts submit four original color charts. One original and one copy will be returned. Reproduction for distribution to subcontractors, manufacturers, fabricators and suppliers is the responsibility of the Contractor. a. Concurrent Submittals to Consultants: Submit one original and three copies to concurrent reviewer and two copies to Architect. In the case of color charts and other non-reproducible information, submit four originals to concurrent reviewer and two original to Architect. b. Concurrent Submittals to Owner: Submit one (1) copy. c. Copy Owner with any transmittals for Product data sent to Architect or Consultants.
SHOP DRAWINGS: A.
Shop Drawings: 1. Prepare Project-specific information, drawn accurately to scale. Do not base Shop Drawings on reproductions of the Contract Documents or standard printed data. 2.
Preparation: Fully illustrate requirements in the Contract Documents. Include the following information, as applicable: a. Dimensions. b. Identification of products. c. Fabrication and installation drawings. d. Roughing-in and setting diagrams. e. Wiring diagrams showing field-installed wiring, including power, signal, and control wiring. f. Shopwork manufacturing instructions. g. Templates and patterns. h. Schedules. i. Design calculations. j. Compliance with specified standards. k. Notation of coordination requirements.
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
013300- 7
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES SECTION 013300 08/06
l. m. n. o.
4.
Notation of dimensions established by field measurement. Relationship to adjoining construction clearly indicated. Seal and signature of professional engineer if specified. Wiring Diagrams: Differentiate between manufacturer-installed and field-installed wiring. Sheet Size: Except for templates, patterns, and similar full-size drawings, submit Shop Drawings on sheets at least 8-1/2 by 11 inches but no larger than 36 by 48 inches. Number of Copies: Submit one original (Contractor’s option of bond print or correctable translucent reproducible print) and three additional copies. One original and one copy will be returned. Reproduction for distribution to subcontractors, manufacturers, fabricators and suppliers is the responsibility of the Contractor. a. Concurrent Submittals: Submit one original and three copies to concurrent reviewer and two copies to Architect. b. Concurrent Submittals to Owner: Submit one (1) copy to Owner c. Copy Owner with any transmittals for Product data sent to Architect or Consultants.
5.
Special Types of Shop Drawings:
3.
6.
a.
Sleeve and Opening Drawings: Comply with requirements set forth in the General Conditions. 1) Comply with shop drawing requirements for submittal and review as specified in this Section.
b.
Roughing Drawings: Furnish manufacturers certified roughing drawings, indicating accurate locations and sizes of all service utility connections, for machinery and equipment requiring such connections. Submit roughing drawings together with shop drawings for respective machinery and equipment.
Mechanical/Electrical Shop Drawing Minimum Requirements: Shop Drawings prepared by mechanical specialty trades shall comply with the following minimum requirements: a.
The accurate dimensions locate all horizontal ducts from column centerline. Locate all offsets, transitions, elbows, fire dampers, registers, grilles and diffusers.
b.
All components shall be located to avoid recessed lighting, piping, conduits, cable trays and other in-plenum assemblies and where required shall be located so as to provide access to the component through removable ceiling material panels or access doors.
c.
Vertical riser ducts shall be located and dimensioned from column centerlines in two (2) directions. Each vertical duct riser shall be shown in its total length when concealed inside of a shaft.
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
013300- 8
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
7.
d.
Each horizontal duct run shall be drawn to scale and size (width and depth noted) and an ELEVATION (bottom of duct) be clearly noted. This elevation shall clear all beams in the floor above and the ceiling construction below.
e.
Sheet metal shop drawings shall be made using not less than ¼" scale per foot; increase scale as required in congested areas or as directed by the Contractor.
All piping, including fire protection, storm, sanitary, domestic, heating and cooling systems. a.
Give location of lines from column centerlines, indicate size, indicate centerline ELEVATION of piping and indicate drainage pitch as required.
b.
Where a piping line is indicated locate centerline ELEVATION and pitch at intervals not to exceed twenty (20) feet. Priority status shall be accorded preparation of dimensioned piping drawings for all piping below slabs-on-grade. Show all line pitches, critical inverts, in-slab fixtures as drains, floor sinks, troughs, cleanouts, etc. and outfall tie-in to site plumbing. Coordinate under slab piping with arrangement(s) of equipment furnished by others where applicable.
c.
8.
9.
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES SECTION 013300 08/06
Electrical Trade: a.
Plan layouts, not less than ¼" scale, of transformer vaults, main electrical rooms, satellite electrical and/or communications closets, emergency generator spaces showing equipment to scale and locations thereof.
b.
Main feeder distribution routing, horizontal and vertical sweep transitions to scale, of conduit over 1" showing ceiling plenum to scale.
Coordination: a.
Coordination of the work of the several trades and the fitting and routing of the systems within concealed areas to avoid conflicts is the responsibility of the contractor(s). The Architect reserves the right to request coordinated drawings of congested areas showing all systems in plan and section to appropriate scale to insure the proper fitting of the work. The Contractor shall comply if so requested by the Architect.
b.
Provide coordinated drawings of all main mechanical, electrical, communications, and other rooms listed below showing equipment required by all trades including structure, piping, hanger assemblies, HVAC ductwork, conduit, electrical devices, fire alarm devices, control centers, pipe grids, acoustic enclosures, other devices. Drawings dimensioned in both plan and section(s); not less than 3/8"=1’-0” scale.
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
013300- 9
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
2.4
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES SECTION 013300 08/06
COORDINATION DRAWINGS
A.
Prepare and submit Coordination Drawings where close and careful coordination is required for installation of products and materials fabricated off-site by separate entities, and where limited space availability necessitates maximum utilization of space for efficient installation of different components. See paragraph 2.3.9 above. 1. 2. 3.
Show the interrelationship of components shown on separate Shop Drawings. Indicate required installation sequences. Refer to Division-15 and Division-16 "General Provisions" Sections for specific Composite Drawing requirements for mechanical and electrical installations.
B.
Role of Expediter: Contractor shall be responsible for expediting the preparation of the Coordination Drawings. Actual preparation of the drawings is described below. Contractor shall meet with subcontractors to develop a format for the Coordination Drawings (e.g. CAD, pin-register drafting, conventional drafting on Mylar using multiple pencil colors, etc.) such that reproductions obtained from the final Coordination Drawings can distinguish between the work of the various trades. Contractor shall resolve all conflicts arising in the coordination process.
C.
Preparation Responsibility: Preparation of Coordination Drawings is the responsibility of the Contractor and all subcontractors principally involved. Production of the drawings shall proceed as follows: a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
D.
HVAC subcontractor shall initiate the drawings by indicating his work, drawn at a scale of 3/8" per foot, showing dimensions, layouts, elevations and sections, all in relation to building construction (all steel structure, floor / roof slabs, ceilings, beams and columns). Where applicable, the GWB subcontractor shall indicate the layout of all acoustic ceiling construction extent including all hanger devices and locations. AC ceiling construction indicated as well. Fire Protection subcontractor shall then indicate the layout, sizes, dimensions and elevations of his work, using the HVAC subcontractor's drawings as a base, with dimensions in reference to fixed building construction. Electrical subcontractor shall add his work to the base drawings begun by HVAC and Fire Protection subcontractors. Indicate locations and dimensions of light fixtures and electrical equipment conduit/cable-tray infrastructure, fire alarm equipment with reference to fixed building construction. Plumbing subcontractor shall then add layouts, sizes and elevations of his work to the drawings of the above-mentioned trades, also dimensioned with reference to building structure.
Conflicts arising between the work of several trades shall be resolved between the respective trades, with the assistance of the General Contractor as expediter; and the drawings revised. Final Coordination Drawings shall be submitted by the Contractor to the Architect as required for submittals.
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
013300- 10
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
2.5
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES SECTION 013300 08/06
SAMPLES: A.
2.6
Submit Samples for review of kind, color, pattern, and texture for a check of these characteristics with other elements and for a comparison of these characteristics between submittal and actual component as delivered and installed. 1. Transmit Samples that contain multiple, related components such as accessories together in one submittal package. 2. Identification: Attach label on unexposed side of Samples that includes the following: a. Generic description of Sample. b. Product name and name of manufacturer. c. Sample source. d. Number and title of appropriate Specification Section. 3. Disposition: Maintain sets of approved Samples at Project site, available for qualitycontrol comparisons throughout the course of construction activity. Sample sets may be used to determine final acceptance of construction associated with each set. a. Samples not incorporated into the Work, or otherwise designated as Owner's property, are the property of Contractor. 4. Samples for Initial Selection: Submit manufacturer's color charts consisting of units or sections of units showing the full range of colors, textures, and patterns available. a. Number of Samples: Submit three full set(s) of available choices where color, pattern, texture, or similar characteristics are required to be selected from manufacturer's product line. Architect will return submittal with options selected. 5. Samples for Verification: Submit full-size units or Samples of size indicated, prepared from same material to be used for the Work, cured and finished in manner specified, and physically identical with material or product proposed for use, and that show full range of color and texture variations expected. Samples include, but are not limited to, the following: partial sections of manufactured or fabricated components; small cuts or containers of materials; complete units of repetitively used materials; swatches showing color, texture, and pattern; color range sets; and components used for independent testing and inspection. a. Number of Samples: Submit four sets of Samples. Architect will retain one Sample sets; remainder will be returned. Mark up and retain one returned Sample set as a Project Record Sample. 1) Submit a single Sample where assembly details, workmanship, fabrication techniques, connections, operation, and other similar characteristics are to be demonstrated. 2) If variation in color, pattern, texture, or other characteristic is inherent in material or product represented by a Sample, submit at least three sets of paired units that show approximate limits of variations. INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A.
General: Prepare and submit Informational Submittals required by other Specification Sections. 1. Number of Copies: Submit two copies of each submittal, unless otherwise indicated. Architect will not return copies.
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
013300- 11
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
2.
3.
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES SECTION 013300 08/06
Certificates and Certifications: Provide a notarized statement that includes signature of entity responsible for preparing certification. An officer shall sign certificates and certifications or other individual authorized to sign documents on behalf of that entity. Test and Inspection Reports: Comply with requirements specified in Division 1 Section "Quality Requirements."
B.
Coordination Drawings: "Coordination."
C.
Qualification Data: Prepare written information that demonstrates capabilities and experience of firm or person. Include lists of completed projects with project names and addresses, names and addresses of architects and owners, and other information specified.
D.
Welding Certificates: Prepare written certification that welding procedures and personnel comply with requirements in the Contract Documents. Submit record of Welding Procedure Specification (WPS) and Procedure Qualification Record (PQR) on AWS forms. Include names of firms and personnel certified.
E.
Installer Certificates: Prepare written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that Installer complies with requirements in the Contract Documents and, where required, is authorized by manufacturer for this specific Project.
F.
Manufacturer Certificates: Prepare written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that manufacturer complies with requirements in the Contract Documents. Include evidence of manufacturing experience where required.
G.
Product Certificates: Prepare written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that product complies with requirements in the Contract Documents.
H.
Material Certificates: Prepare written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that material complies with requirements in the Contract Documents.
I.
Material Test Reports: Prepare reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing agency's standard form, indicating and interpreting test results of material for compliance with requirements in the Contract Documents.
J.
Product Test Reports: Prepare written reports indicating current product produced by manufacturer complies with requirements in the Contract Documents. Base reports on evaluation of tests performed by manufacturer and witnessed by a qualified testing agency, or on comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency.
K.
Research/Evaluation Reports: Prepare written evidence, from a model code organization acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, that product complies with building code in effect for Project. Include the following information: 1. Name of evaluation organization. 2. Date of evaluation. 3. Time period when report is in effect. 4. Product and manufacturers' names.
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
Comply with requirements specified in Division 1 Section
013300- 12
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
5. 6. 7.
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES SECTION 013300 08/06
Description of product. Test procedures and results. Limitations of use.
L.
Schedule of Tests and Inspections: Comply with requirements specified in Division 1 Section "Quality Requirements."
M.
Preconstruction Test Reports: Prepare reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing agency's standard form, indicating and interpreting results of tests performed before installation of product, for compliance with performance requirements in the Contract Documents.
N.
Compatibility Test Reports: Prepare reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing agency's standard form, indicating and interpreting results of compatibility tests performed before installation of product. Include written recommendations for primers and substrate preparation needed for adhesion.
O.
Field Test Reports: Prepare reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing agency's standard form, indicating and interpreting results of field tests performed either during installation of product or after product is installed in its final location, for compliance with requirements in the Contract Documents.
P.
Maintenance Data: Prepare written and graphic instructions and procedures for operation and normal maintenance of products and equipment. Comply with requirements specified in Division 1 Section "Operation and Maintenance Data."
Q.
Design Data: Prepare written and graphic information, including, but not limited to, performance and design criteria, list of applicable codes and regulations, and calculations. Include list of assumptions and other performance and design criteria and a summary of loads. Include load diagrams if applicable. Provide name and version of software, if any, used for calculations. Include page numbers.
R.
Manufacturer's Instructions: Prepare written or published information that documents manufacturer's recommendations, guidelines, and procedures for installing or operating a product or equipment. Include name of product and name, address, and telephone number of manufacturer. Include the following, as applicable: 1. Preparation of substrates. 2. Required substrate tolerances. 3. Sequence of installation or erection. 4. Required installation tolerances. 5. Required adjustments. 6. Recommendations for cleaning and protection.
S.
Manufacturer's Field Reports: Prepare written information documenting factory-authorized service representative's tests and inspections. Include the following, as applicable: 1. Name, address, and telephone number of factory-authorized service representative making report. 2. Statement on condition of substrates and their acceptability for installation of product.
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
013300- 13
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
3. 4. 5. 6. 7. T.
2.7
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES SECTION 013300 08/06
Statement that products at Project site comply with requirements. Summary of installation procedures being followed, whether they comply with requirements and, if not, what corrective action was taken. Results of operational and other tests and a statement of whether observed performance complies with requirements. Statement whether conditions, products, and installation will affect warranty. Other required items indicated in individual Specification Sections.
Insurance Certificates and Bonds: Prepare written information indicating current status of insurance or bonding coverage. Include name of entity covered by insurance or bond, limits of coverage, amounts of deductibles, if any, and term of the coverage. DELEGATED DESIGN
A.
Performance and Design Criteria: Where professional design services or certifications by a design professional are specifically required of Contractor by the Contract Documents, provide products and systems complying with specific performance and design criteria indicated. 1. If criteria indicated are not sufficient to perform services or certification required, submit a written request for additional information to Architect.
B.
Delegated-Design Submittal: In addition to Shop Drawings, Product Data, and other required submittals, submit three copies of a statement, signed and sealed by the responsible design professional, for each product and system specifically assigned to Contractor to be designed or certified by a design professional. 1. Indicate that products and systems comply with performance and design criteria in the Contract Documents. Include list of codes, loads, and other factors used in performing these services.
2.8
ADMINISTRATIVE SUBMITTALS A.
Contractor’s Construction Schedule: Comply with the General Conditions and other requirements of the Contract Administration Division. 1. If preliminary schedule requires revision after review, submit revised schedule within 5 business days. 2. Submit updated schedule with each Application for Payment.
B.
Submittals Schedule: Comply with the General Conditions and other requirements of the Contract Administration Division. 1. Submit updated Submittal Log with each Application for Payment.
C.
Application for Payment: Comply with the General Conditions and other requirements of the Contract Administration Division.
D.
Schedule of Values: Comply with the General Conditions and other requirements of the Contract Administration Division.
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
013300- 14
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES SECTION 013300 08/06
E.
Subcontract List: Comply with the General Conditions and other requirements of the Contract Administration Division. Prepare a written summary identifying individuals or firms proposed for each portion of the Work, including those who are to furnish products or equipment fabricated to a special design. Include the following information in tabular form: 1. Name, address, and telephone number of entity performing subcontract or supplying products. 2. Number and title of related Specification Section(s) covered by subcontract. 3. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate, covered by subcontract. 4. Number of Copies: Submit three copies of subcontractor list, unless otherwise indicated. Architect will return two copies. a. Mark up and retain one returned copy as a Project Record Document. 5. Submit one (1) copy of initial subcontractor list to Owner within (10) business days after Owner’s Notice to Proceed. No portion of the work shall be started until the Contractor has furnished the Owner with a list showing the sub-contractor and/or material supplier responsible for the portion of the actual work needing to be started. The list will be updated until the list reflects the complete group of all subcontractors, suppliers, vendors, etc. employed to carry out the work.
F.
The contractor shall keep one (1) set of drawings on the project at all times which are to be marked "as-built". During the course of the project, they shall mark these drawings with colored pencils to reflect any changes as well as dimension, the location of all pipe runs, conduits, traps, footing depths or any other information not already shown on the drawings or differing there from. All buried utilities outside the building shall be located by a metes and bounds survey performed by a licensed surveyor who shall certify as to its accuracy. These marked-up drawings and surveys shall be made available to the contracting officer, the Construction Manager and the Architect/Engineer at any time during the progress of the work upon their request. These shall include the drawings of principal sub-contractors as well. The Owner’s Project Manager as well as the Architect on a monthly basis as a prerequisite to the review of the contractor’s payment applications will review as-built drawings.
2.9
SUBMITTALS FOR PROJECT CLOSE OUT A.
When the following are specified in individual sections, submit them at project closeout: 1. Project record documents. 2. Operation and maintenance data 3. Warranties. 4. Bonds (if and when required by the Owner). 5. Other types as indicated.
B.
Manufacturers Instructions, Product Literature, Certificates, and Reports. 1. All instructions, literature, certificates, test reports, other technical data and correspondence shall be submitted in four (4) copies. The Owner shall retain Two (2) copies, and the other two (2) returned to the Contractor.
C.
Written Certifications
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
013300- 15
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
1.
D.
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES SECTION 013300 08/06
Provide written certifications where required, in the following formats: a. Manufacturer’s Written Certifications: Shall be submitted in letter form on the manufacturer’s letterhead, signed by an authorized representative, indicating that all required components and elements of their manufacture are in conformity with the requirements so stated under the individual sections of these Specifications. Technical data, additional support material, or other information may be submitted with the certification letter. b. Installer’s Written Certifications: Shall be submitted in letter form on the installer’s company letterhead, signed by a legal authorized company officer, indicating that their respective installation an/or Work are in conformity with the requirements so stated under the individual sections of these Specifications.
Submit all of the above items in this Section for the Owner’s benefit during and after project completion.
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1
CONTRACTOR'S REVIEW A.
Review each submittal and check for coordination with other Work of the Contract and for compliance with the Contract Documents. Note corrections and field dimensions. Mark with approval stamp before submitting to Architect. The Architect / Consultants will not review submittals that do not bear Contractor's approval stamp and will return them without action.
B.
Approval Stamp: Stamp each submittal with a uniform, approval stamp. Include Project name and location, submittal number, Specification Section title and number, name of reviewer, date of Contractor's approval, and statement certifying that submittal has been reviewed, checked, and approved for compliance with the Contract Documents.
3.2
ARCHITECT'S ACTION A.
General: Architect will not review submittals that do not bear Contractor's approval stamp and will return them without action.
B.
Action Submittals: Architect will review each submittal, make marks to indicate corrections or modifications required, and return it. Architect will stamp each submittal with an action stamp and will mark stamp appropriately to indicate action taken, as follows: 1. Final Unrestricted Release: When submittals are marked “No Exceptions Taken” (NET), that part of the Work covered by the submittal may precede provided it complies with requirements of the Contract Documents; final acceptance will depend upon compliance. 2. Final-But-Restricted Release: When submittals are marked “Make Corrections Noted” (MCN), that part of the Work covered by the submittal may precede provided it complies with notations or corrections on the submittal and requirements of the Contract Documents; final acceptance will depend on that compliance.
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
013300- 16
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
3.
4.
5.
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES SECTION 013300 08/06
Returned for Resubmittal: When submittal is marked “Amend and Resubmit” (AR), do not proceed with that part of the Work covered by the submittal, including purchasing, fabrication, delivery, or other activity. Revise or prepare a new submittal in accordance with the notations; resubmit without delay. Repeat if necessary to obtain a different action mark. a. Do not permit submittals marked “Amend and Resubmit” to be used at the Project site, or elsewhere where Work is in progress. Disapproved for Non-Compliance: When submittal is marked “Rejected - See Remarks” (R), Architect’s explanation for rejection will be included. Do not proceed with the work. Prepare a completely new submission. Other Action: Where a submittal is primarily for information or record purposes, special processing or other activity, the submittal will be returned, marked “Action Not Required”.
C.
Informational Submittals: Architect will review each submittal and will not return it, or will return it if it does not comply with requirements. Architect will forward each submittal to appropriate party.
D.
Partial submittals are not acceptable, will be considered nonresponsive, and will be returned without review.
E.
Submittals not required by the Contract Documents may not be reviewed and may be discarded.
F.
Architect's Review: Review of shop and setting drawings, roughing drawings, sleeve and opening drawings, product data and samples by Architect will be a general review for conformance with design concept and compliance with information given in contact documents only, and shall not relieve Contractor of responsibility for accuracy of such submissions, nor for proper fitting, construction of work, or for furnishings of materials or work required by the contract and not indicated on submissions. Field dimensions, fabrication details, and job fitting are entirely Contractor's responsibility. Review shall not be construed as approving departures from contract requirements. Any proposed deviations from contract requirements, together with Contractor's explanations thereof, shall be stated in the letter of transmittal. Approval of a specific item shall not indicate approval of an entire assembly of which the item is a component. Should contractor check and certify submissions which indicate changes or deviations from the contract documents, and such changes are found acceptable to Architect, any and all additional costs resulting therefrom, including any cost for changes required to adjacent work or the work of other trades shall be the sole responsibility of Contractor.
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
013300- 17
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES SECTION 013300 08/06
RELEASE AGREEMENT – DIGITAL INFORMATION SAMPLE Architects and subconsultants have prepared design documents for the project identified as: These design documents are instruments of the Architect’s and subconsultants’ service and they retain all rights to such work. The design documents requested have been issued in hard copy form, which is the basis of a contract with the project Owner. The undersigned has requested copies of these design documents in digital format. Architect provides the digital files under the following understandings and conditions: 1.
2. 3. 4. 5.
6. 7. 8.
The digital files provided are not the contract documents. The digital files provided may differ from the contract documents and have not been verified against the actual (hard-copy) contract documents. The digital files can deteriorate undetected or be altered without the knowledge of Architect. The use of the digital information is wholly at the risk of the undersigned. Architect is under no obligation to provide any software, hardware, any supplemental files, linked data or operational support required to read and/or manipulate the digital files. Architect is under no obligation to correct, modify, update or to notify the undersigned of the need to correct, modify or update the digital files. The undersigned agrees to indemnify, release and hold Architect and their consultants and the Owner harmless from any responsibility or obligation as to the accuracy or completeness of the digital information and further waives any claim it may have for compensation for additional work, delay costs, losses, consequential damages, and expenses including but not limited to attorney fees resulting from the undersigned relying upon or utilizing the digital information. The digital files are provided for the exclusive use of the undersigned personnel only. The information will not be transferable or transmitted by the undersigned for use by others. The above shall constitute an agreement between Architect and the undersigned for providing a service. This agreement does not constitute a waiver of copyright or transfer of ownership of the said information and documents.
This agreement accepted by:
By:________________________________
Witness:________________________
Title:_______________________________
Date:_______________________________ Company:__________________________________________________________________ Address:___________________________________________________________________ END OF SECTION 01330
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
013300- 18
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
QUALITY CONTROL SECTION 014000 08/06
SECTION 01400 - QUALITY CONTROL REQUIREMENTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS A
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General Conditions, General Conduct of the Work and Special Requirements, Supplementary Conditions, and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. In the event of any conflicts between the requirements of these Sections, the more stringent requirement shall apply. 1
1.2
In Divisions 1 through 16 Sections: a
The term "Architect" shall be synonymous with the term “Professional”.
b
The terms “Subcontractor”, “Sub-subcontractor”, “Installer”, “Applicator”, “Erector” and similar terms are synonymous with the term “Trade Contractor”.
SUMMARY A.
This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for quality-control services.
B.
Quality-control services include inspections, tests, and related actions, including reports performed by Contractor, by independent agencies, and by governing authorities. They do not include contract enforcement activities performed by Architect.
C.
Inspection and testing services are required to verify compliance with requirements specified or indicated. These services do not relieve Contractor of responsibility for compliance with Contract Document requirements.
D.
Requirements of this Section relate to fabrication and installation procedures.
E.
1.
Specific quality-control requirements for individual construction activities are specified in the Sections that specify those activities. Requirements in those Sections may also cover production of standard products.
2.
Specified inspections, tests, and related actions do not limit Contractor's quality-control procedures that facilitate compliance with Contract Document requirements.
3.
Requirements for Contractor to provide quality-control services required by Architect, Owner, or authorities having jurisdiction are not limited by provisions of this Section.
Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section: 1.
F.
Testing by the Contractor of installed materials and equipment is specified in the Technical Sections (Divisions 2 through 17) of these Specifications.
Testing requirements for real property installed equipment (RPIE) to be furnished by the contractor when such testing is required by code, contract or the manufacturer shall be
QUALITY CONTROL REQUIREMENTS
014000 - 1
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
QUALITY CONTROL SECTION 014000 08/06
performed in a pre-approved testing laboratory or in the absence of such by the manufacturer or its authorized representative at its place of business. The contractor shall provide a five (5) days notice to the University and Architect/Engineer through the Project Manager. The University and the Architect/Engineer shall have the right to witness all tests. G.
1.3
The contractor will hire and pay for a qualified testing agency. RESPONSIBILITIES
A.
Contractor Responsibilities: Unless otherwise indicated as the responsibility of another identified entity, Contractor shall provide inspections, tests, and other quality-control services specified elsewhere in the Contract Documents and/or required by authorities having jurisdiction. Costs for these services are included in the Contract Sum. 1.
B.
C.
Where individual Sections specifically indicate that certain inspections, tests, and other quality-control services are to be done these services will be the Contractor's responsibility. The Contractor shall employ and pay a qualified independent testing agency to perform quality-control services. Costs for these services are included in the Contract Sum.
Retesting: The Contractor is responsible for retesting where results of inspections, tests, or other quality-control services prove unsatisfactory and indicate noncompliance with Contract Document requirements, regardless of whether the original test was Contractor's responsibility. 1.
The cost of retesting construction, revised or replaced by the Contractor, is the Contractor's responsibility where required tests performed on original construction indicated noncompliance with Contract Document requirements. The contractor shall pay for all costs including administrative cost incurred by the University.
2.
When the University and/or Architect/Engineer require special or additional inspections, testing or approvals due to Contractor's failure to comply with contract specifications, industry standards, good building practices, any applicable code procedures including but not limited to ASIC, ASTM, etc., whether or not testing is required by the contract documents for any individual component, entire system or process, the Contractor will secure the service of such special or additional inspections, testing or approvals. In the event such special or additional inspections and testing reveal a failure of the work to comply with the terms and conditions of the contract, the contractor shall also bear all costs necessary to repair or replace the work as required by the Architect/Engineer.
Associated Services: Cooperate with agencies performing required inspections, tests, and similar services, and provide reasonable auxiliary services as requested. Notify the agency sufficiently in advance of operations to permit assignment of personnel. Auxiliary services required include, but are not limited to, the following: 1.
Provide access to the Work.
2.
Furnish incidental labor and facilities necessary to facilitate inspections and tests.
QUALITY CONTROL REQUIREMENTS
014000 - 2
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
D.
E.
3.
Take adequate quantities of representative samples of materials that require testing or assist the agency in taking samples.
4.
Provide facilities for storage and curing of test samples.
5.
Deliver samples to testing laboratories.
6.
Provide the agency with a preliminary design mix proposed for use for materials mixes that require control by the testing agency.
7.
Provide security and protection of samples and test equipment at the Project Site.
Duties of the Testing Agency: The independent agency engaged to perform inspections, sampling, and testing of materials and construction specified in individual Sections shall cooperate with the Architect, the Contractor and the Owner in performance of the agency's duties. The testing agency shall provide qualified personnel to perform required inspections and tests. 1.
The agency shall notify the Architect, the Contractor, and the Owner promptly of irregularities or deficiencies observed in the Work during performance of its services.
2.
The agency is not authorized to release, revoke, alter, or enlarge requirements of the Contract Documents or approve or accept any portion of the Work.
3.
The agency shall not perform any duties of the Contractor.
Coordination: Coordinate the sequence of activities to accommodate required services with a minimum of delay. Coordinate activities to avoid the necessity of removing and replacing construction to accommodate inspections and tests. 1.
1.4
QUALITY CONTROL SECTION 014000 08/06
The Contractor is responsible for scheduling times for inspections, tests, taking samples, and similar activities.
SUBMITTALS A.
Submit a certified written report of each inspection, test, or similar service. 1.
Distribute copies of each report to Owner, Architect and Engineer. Distribution of reports shall be made promptly, upon the completion of each test or inspection. A field report will be distributed to the Owner’s Project Manager prior to the Inspector leaving the jobsite on any day during which a test or inspection has been done. A final inspection report will be required from the inspection agency to all parties within five (5) business days following the inspection. Test reports will be required within (5) business days following the actual test date.
2.
Submit additional copies of each written report directly to the governing authority, when the authority so directs.
3.
Report Data: Refer to specification sections of Divisions 2 through 17 for submittal requirements applicable to inspection and test reports. In general, each report shall include:
QUALITY CONTROL REQUIREMENTS
014000 - 3
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
4.
1.5
QUALITY CONTROL SECTION 014000 08/06
a.
Date of issue.
b.
Project title and number.
c.
Name, address, and telephone number of testing agency.
d.
Dates and locations of samples and tests or inspections.
e.
Names of individuals making the inspection or test.
f.
Designation of the Work and test method.
g.
Identification of product and Specification Section.
h.
Complete inspection or test data.
i.
Test results and an interpretation of test results.
j.
Ambient conditions at the time of sample taking and testing.
k.
Comments or professional opinion on whether inspected or tested Work complies with Contract Document requirements.
l.
Name and signature of laboratory inspector.
m.
Recommendations on retesting.
All submittals of inspections and test reports or requests for approval shall be accompanied by a certification signed by the contractor attesting to his/her knowledge of the submittal, acceptance of its findings and acknowledgement that material tested meets the required standards and certify the report's representation of the facts. Failure to provide the written certification shall be grounds for rejection of the submittal.
QUALITY ASSURANCE A.
Qualifications for Service Agencies: Engage inspection and testing service agencies, including independent testing laboratories, that are prequalified as complying with the American Council of Independent Laboratories' "Recommended Requirements for Independent Laboratory Qualification" and that specialize in the types of inspections and tests to be performed. 1.
Each independent inspection and testing agency engaged on the Project shall be authorized by authorities having jurisdiction to operate in the state where the Project is located.
2.
Each independent inspection and testing agency engaged on the Project shall be prequalified by the Division of Building and Construction of the State of New Jersey to perform the types of tests and inspections required.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Applicable)
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 REPAIRS AND PROTECTION
QUALITY CONTROL REQUIREMENTS
014000 - 4
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
QUALITY CONTROL SECTION 014000 08/06
A.
General: Upon completion of inspection, testing, sample taking and similar services, repair damaged construction and restore substrates and finishes. Comply with Contract Document requirements for Division 1 Section "Cutting and Patching."
B.
Protect construction exposed by or for quality control service activities, and protect repaired construction.
C.
Repair and protection is Contractor's responsibility, regardless of the assignment of responsibility for inspection, testing, or similar services.
END OF SECTION 01400
QUALITY CONTROL REQUIREMENTS
014000 - 5
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
TESTING SERVICES SECTION 014100 08/06
SECTION 01410 - TESTING LABORATORY SERVICES PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELEATED DOCUMENTS A.
1.2
1.3
1.4
Drawings and general provisions of the contract, including general conditions, general conduct of the work and special requirements, supplementary conditions, and other Division 1 specification sections, apply to this section. In the event of any conflicts between the requirements of these sections, the more stringent requirement shall apply.
SECTION INCLUDES A.
Selection and payment.
B.
Contractor submittals.
C.
Laboratory responsibilities.
D.
Laboratory reports.
E.
Limits on testing laboratory authority.
F.
Contractor responsibilities.
RELATED SECTIONS A.
General Conditions: Inspections, testing, and approvals required by public authorities.
B.
Individual Specification Sections: Inspections and tests required, and standards for testing.
C.
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General Conditions, General Conduct of the Work and Special Requirements, Supplementary Conditions, and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. In the event of any conflicts between the requirements of these sections, the more stringent requirement shall apply.
REFERENCE STANDARDS A.
American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM):ASTM C802 - Practice for Conducting an Interlaboratory Test Program to Determine the Precision of Test Methods for Construction.
B.
ASTM C1077 - Practice for Laboratories Testing Concrete and Concrete Aggregates for Use in Construction and Criteria for Laboratory Evaluation.
C.
ASTM D290 - Recommended Practice for Bituminous Mixing Plant Inspection.
TESTING LABORATORY SERVICES
014100-1
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
1.5
1.6
TESTING SERVICES SECTION 014100 08/06
D.
ASTM D3740 - Practice for Evaluation of Agencies Engaged in Testing and/or Inspection of Soil and Rock as Used in Engineering Design and Construction.
E.
ASTM D4561 - Practice for Quality Control Systems or an Inspection and Testing Agency for Bituminous Paving Materials.
F.
ASTM E329 - Practice for Use in the Evaluation of Inspection and Testing Agencies as Used in Construction.
G.
ASTM E548 - Practice for Preparation of Criteria for Use in the Evaluation of Testing Laboratories and Inspection Bodies.
H.
Testing, Quality Assurance, and Evaluating Building Components in Accordance with Test Methods Promulgated by ASTM Committee E6.
SELECTION AND PAYMENT A.
Contractor shall employ and pay for services of an independent Testing Laboratory, and Balancing Laboratory/Organization, approved by Owner and Architect/Engineer, to perform all specified inspecting and testing.
B.
Employment of testing laboratory in NO WAY relieves Contractor of obligation to perform Work in accordance with requirements of Contract Documents.
QUALITY ASSURANCE A.
Comply with requirements of ASTM C802, ASTM C1077, ASTM D290, ASTM D3740, ASTM D4561, ASTM E329, ASTM E548, and ASTM E699.
B.
Testing Laboratory Qualifications: Shall have been inspected by a nationally recognized inspection agency, acceptable to Owner and Architect/Engineer. Evidence of such inspection and current status shall be provided to Owner and Architect/Engineer. In addition, the approved lab shall document participation in a nationally recognized soils and concrete reference testing program during the twelve (12) months preceding the start of work on this project. Results of reference testing shall indicate an acceptable rating for the laboratory to be considered by the Owner and Architect/Engineer.
C.
Laboratory: Authorized to operate in the State in which Project is located.
D.
Laboratory Staff: Maintain a full time registered Professional Engineer on staff to review services.
E.
Testing Equipment: Shall be calibrated at reasonable intervals with devices of accuracy traceable to either National Bureau of Standards or accepted values of natural physical constants.
TESTING LABORATORY SERVICES
014100-2
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
1.7
1.8
1.9
TESTING SERVICES SECTION 014100 08/06
CONTRACTOR SUBMITTALS A.
PRIOR TO START OF WORK, submit testing laboratory name, address, and telephone number, and names of full time registered Engineer and responsible officer.
B.
Submit copy of report of laboratory facilities inspection made by Materials Reference Laboratory of National Bureau of Standards during most recent inspection, with memorandum of remedies of any deficiencies reported by the inspection.
LABORATORY RESPONSIBILITIES A.
Test samples of required items submitted by Contractor.
B.
Provide qualified personnel at site. Cooperate with Architect/Engineer and Contractor in performance of services.
C.
Perform specified inspecting, sampling, and testing of Products in accordance with specified standards.
D.
Ascertain compliance of materials and mixes with requirements of Contract Documents.
E.
Promptly notify Architect/Engineer and Contractor of observed irregularities or non-conformance of Work or Products.
F.
Perform additional inspection and tests required by Architect/Engineer.
LABORATORY REPORTS A.
After each inspection and test within five (5) business days, promptly submit three (3) copies of laboratory report to Owner, Architect/ Engineer, and to Contractor. Include: 1.
Date issued
2.
Project title and number
3.
Name of inspector
4.
Date and time of sampling or inspection
5.
Identification of product and specifications section
6.
Location in the Project
7.
Type of inspection or test
8.
Date of test
9.
Results of tests
TESTING LABORATORY SERVICES
014100-3
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
10. B. 1.10
Conformance with Contract Documents.
When requested by Architect/Engineer, provide interpretation of test results.
LIMITS ON TESTING LABORATORY AUTHORITY A. B. C. D.
1.11
TESTING SERVICES SECTION 014100 08/06
Laboratory MAY NOT release, revoke, alter, or enlarge on requirements of Contract Documents. Laboratory MAY NOT approve or accept any portion of the Work. Laboratory MAY NOT assume any duties of Contractor. Laboratory HAS NO authority to stop the Work.
CONTRACTOR RESPONSIBILITIES A.
Deliver to laboratory at designated location, adequate samples of materials proposed to be used, which require testing.
B.
Cooperate with laboratory personnel, and provide access to the Work and to manufacturers' facilities.
C.
Provide incidental labor and facilities:
D.
1.
to provide access to Work to be tested,
2.
to obtain and handle samples at the site or at source of Products to be tested,
3.
to facilitate tests and inspections,
4.
to provide storage and curing of test samples.
Notify Architect/Engineer, Owner and laboratory 24 hours prior to expected time for operations requiring inspecting and testing services.
PART 2 2
- PRODUCTS Not Applicable
PART 3 3
- EXECUTION Not Applicable END OF SECTION 01410
TESTING LABORATORY SERVICES
014100-4
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
REFERENCE STANDARDS AND DEFINITIONS SECTION 014200 08/06
SECTION 014200 - REFERENCES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS A.
1.2
1.3
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. In the event of any conflicts between the requirements of these Sections, the more stringent requirement shall apply. DEFINITIONS
A.
General: Basic Contract definitions are included in the Conditions of the Contract.
B.
"Approved": When used to convey Architect's action on Contractor's submittals, applications, and requests, "approved" is limited to Architect's duties and responsibilities as stated in the Conditions of the Contract.
C.
"Directed": A command or instruction by Architect. Other terms including "requested," "authorized," "selected," "required," and "permitted" have the same meaning as "directed."
D.
"Indicated": Requirements expressed by graphic representations or in written form on Drawings, in Specifications, and in other Contract Documents. Other terms including "shown," "noted," "scheduled," and "specified" have the same meaning as "indicated."
E.
"Regulations": Laws, ordinances, statutes, and lawful orders issued by authorities having jurisdiction, and rules, conventions, and agreements within the construction industry that control performance of the Work.
F.
"Furnish": Supply and deliver to Project site, ready for unloading, unpacking, assembly, installation, and similar operations.
G.
"Install": Operations at Project site including unloading, temporarily storing, unpacking, assembling, erecting, placing, anchoring, applying, working to dimension, finishing, curing, protecting, cleaning, and similar operations.
H.
"Provide": Furnish and install, complete and ready for the intended use.
I.
"Project Site": Space available for performing construction activities. The extent of Project site is shown on Drawings and may or may not be identical with the description of the land on which Project is to be built. INDUSTRY STANDARDS
REFERENCE STANDARDS AND DEFINITIONS
014200 - 1
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
REFERENCE STANDARDS AND DEFINITIONS SECTION 014200 08/06
A.
Applicability of Standards: Unless the Contract Documents include more stringent requirements, applicable construction industry standards have the same force and effect as if bound or copied directly into the Contract Documents to the extent referenced. Such standards are made a part of the Contract Documents by reference.
B.
Publication Dates: Comply with standards in effect as of date of the Contract Documents unless otherwise indicated.
C.
Copies of Standards: Each entity engaged in construction on Project should be familiar with industry standards applicable to its construction activity. Copies of applicable standards are not bound with the Contract Documents. 1.
D.
Where copies of standards are needed to perform a required construction activity, obtain copies directly from publication source.
Abbreviations and Acronyms for Standards and Regulations: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the organizations responsible for the standards and regulations in the following list. Names, telephone numbers, and Web sites are subject to change and are believed to be accurate and up-to-date as of the date of the Contract Documents.
ADAAG
Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) Architectural Barriers Act (ABA)
(800) 8722253 (202) 2720080
Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities Available from Access Board www.access-board.gov CFR
Code of Federal Regulations Available from Government Printing Office
(866) 5121800 (202) 5121800
www.gpoaccess.gov/cfr/index.html DOD
Department of Defense Military Specifications and Standards
(215) 6976257
Available from Department of Defense Single Stock Point http://dodssp.daps.dla.mil DSCC
Defense Supply Center Columbus (See FS)
FED-STD
Federal Standard (See FS)
FS
Federal Specification
(215) 6976257
Available from Department of Defense Single Stock Point http://dodssp.daps.dla.mil
REFERENCE STANDARDS AND DEFINITIONS
014200 - 2
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
REFERENCE STANDARDS AND DEFINITIONS SECTION 014200 08/06
Available from Defense Standardization Program www.dps.dla.mil Available from General Services Administration
(202) 6198925
www.gsa.gov Available from National Institute of Building Sciences
(202) 2897800
www.nibs.org FTMS
Federal Test Method Standard (See FS)
MIL
(See MILSPEC)
MIL-STD
(See MILSPEC)
MILSPEC
Military Specification and Standards
(215) 6976257
Available from Department of Defense Single Stock Point http://dodssp.daps.dla.mil UFAS
Uniform Federal Accessibility Standards Available from Access Board
(800) 8722253 (202) 2720080
www.access-board.gov 1.4
ABBREVIATIONS AND ACRONYMS A.
Industry Organizations: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the entities indicated in Thomson Gale's "Encyclopedia of Associations" or in Columbia Books' "National Trade & Professional Associations of the U.S."
B.
Industry Organizations: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the entities in the following list. Names, telephone numbers, and Web sites are subject to change and are believed to be accurate and up-to-date as of the date of the Contract Documents.
AA
Aluminum Association, Inc. (The) www.aluminum.org
(703) 358-2960
AAADM
American Association of Automatic Door Manufacturers www.aaadm.com
(216) 241-7333
AABC
Associated Air Balance Council
(202) 737-0202
REFERENCE STANDARDS AND DEFINITIONS
014200 - 3
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
REFERENCE STANDARDS AND DEFINITIONS SECTION 014200 08/06
www.aabchq.com AAMA
American Architectural Manufacturers Association www.aamanet.org
(847) 303-5664
AASHTO
American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials www.transportation.org
(202) 624-5800
AATCC
American Association of Textile Chemists and Colorists (The) www.aatcc.org
(919) 549-8141
ABAA
Air Barrier Association of America www.airbarrier.org
(866) 956-5888
ABMA
American Bearing Manufacturers Association www.abma-dc.org
(202) 367-1155
ACI
ACI International (American Concrete Institute) www.aci-int.org
(248) 848-3700
ACPA
American Concrete Pipe Association www.concrete-pipe.org
(972) 506-7216
AEIC
Association of Edison Illuminating Companies, Inc. (The) www.aeic.org
(205) 257-2530
AF&PA
American Forest & Paper Association www.afandpa.org
(800) 878-8878 (202) 463-2700
AGA
American Gas Association www.aga.org
(202) 824-7000
AGC
Associated General Contractors of America (The) www.agc.org
(703) 548-3118
AHA
American Hardboard Association (Now part of CPA)
AHAM
Association of Home Appliance Manufacturers www.aham.org
(202) 872-5955
AI
Asphalt Institute www.asphaltinstitute.org
(859) 288-4960
AIA
American Institute of Architects (The) www.aia.org
(800) 242-3837 (202) 626-7300
AISC
American Institute of Steel Construction
(800) 644-2400
REFERENCE STANDARDS AND DEFINITIONS
014200 - 4
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
REFERENCE STANDARDS AND DEFINITIONS SECTION 014200 08/06
www.aisc.org
(312) 670-2400
AISI
American Iron and Steel Institute www.steel.org
(202) 452-7100
AITC
American Institute of Timber Construction www.aitc-glulam.org
(303) 792-9559
ALCA
Associated Landscape Contractors of America (Now PLANET - Professional Landcare Network)
ALSC
American Lumber Standard Committee, Incorporated www.alsc.org
(301) 972-1700
AMCA
Air Movement and Control Association International, Inc. www.amca.org
(847) 394-0150
ANSI
American National Standards Institute www.ansi.org
(202) 293-8020
AOSA
Association of Official Seed Analysts, Inc. www.aosaseed.com
(505) 522-1437
APA
APA - The Engineered Wood Association www.apawood.org
(253) 565-6600
APA
Architectural Precast Association www.archprecast.org
(239) 454-6989
API
American Petroleum Institute www.api.org
(202) 682-8000
ARI
Air-Conditioning & Refrigeration Institute www.ari.org
(703) 524-8800
ARMA
Asphalt Roofing Manufacturers Association www.asphaltroofing.org
(202) 207-0917
ASCE
American Society of Civil Engineers www.asce.org
(800) 548-2723 (703) 295-6300
ASHRAE
American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air-Conditioning Engineers www.ashrae.org
(800) 527-4723 (404) 636-8400
ASME
ASME International (The American Society of Mechanical Engineers International) www.asme.org
(800) 843-2763 (973) 882-1170
ASSE
American Society of Sanitary Engineering
(440) 835-3040
REFERENCE STANDARDS AND DEFINITIONS
014200 - 5
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
REFERENCE STANDARDS AND DEFINITIONS SECTION 014200 08/06
www.asse-plumbing.org ASTM
ASTM International (American Society for Testing and Materials International) www.astm.org
(610) 832-9585
AWCI
AWCI International (Association of the Wall and Ceiling Industry International) www.awci.org
(703) 534-8300
AWCMA
American Window Covering Manufacturers Association (Now WCSC)
AWI
Architectural Woodwork Institute www.awinet.org
(800) 449-8811 (703) 733-0600
AWPA
American Wood-Preservers' Association www.awpa.com
(334) 874-9800
AWS
American Welding Society www.aws.org
(800) 443-9353 (305) 443-9353
AWWA
American Water Works Association www.awwa.org
(800) 926-7337 (303) 794-7711
BHMA
Builders Hardware Manufacturers Association www.buildershardware.com
(212) 297-2122
BIA
Brick Industry Association (The) www.bia.org
(703) 620-0010
BICSI
BICSI www.bicsi.org
(800) 242-7405 (813) 979-1991
BIFMA
BIFMA International (Business and Institutional Furniture Manufacturer's Association International) www.bifma.com
(616) 285-3963
BISSC
Baking Industry Sanitation Standards Committee www.bissc.org
(866) 342-4772
CCC
Carpet Cushion Council www.carpetcushion.org
(203) 637-1312
CDA
Copper Development Association www.copper.org
(800) 232-3282 (212) 251-7200
CEA
Canadian Electricity Association www.canelect.ca
(613) 230-9263
REFERENCE STANDARDS AND DEFINITIONS
014200 - 6
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
REFERENCE STANDARDS AND DEFINITIONS SECTION 014200 08/06
CFFA
Chemical Fabrics & Film Association, Inc. www.chemicalfabricsandfilm.com
(216) 241-7333
CGA
Compressed Gas Association www.cganet.com
(703) 788-2700
CIMA
Cellulose Insulation Manufacturers Association www.cellulose.org
(888) 881-2462 (937) 222-2462
CISCA
Ceilings & Interior Systems Construction Association www.cisca.org
(630) 584-1919
CISPI
Cast Iron Soil Pipe Institute www.cispi.org
(423) 892-0137
CLFMI
Chain Link Fence Manufacturers Institute www.chainlinkinfo.org
(301) 596-2583
CPA
Composite Panel Association www.pbmdf.com
(301) 670-0604
CPPA
Corrugated Polyethylene Pipe Association www.cppa-info.org
(800) 510-2772 (202) 462-9607
CRI
Carpet & Rug Institute (The) www.carpet-rug.com
(800) 882-8846 (706) 278-3176
CRSI
Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute www.crsi.org
(847) 517-1200
CSA
CSA International (Formerly: IAS - International Approval Services) www.csa-international.org
(866) 797-4272 (416) 747-4000
CSI
Cast Stone Institute www.caststone.org
(770) 972-3011
CSI
Construction Specifications Institute (The) www.csinet.org
(800) 689-2900 (703) 684-0300
CSSB
Cedar Shake & Shingle Bureau www.cedarbureau.org
(604) 820-7700
CTI
Cooling Technology Institute (Formerly: Cooling Tower Institute) www.cti.org
(281) 583-4087
DHI
Door and Hardware Institute www.dhi.org
(703) 222-2010
REFERENCE STANDARDS AND DEFINITIONS
014200 - 7
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
REFERENCE STANDARDS AND DEFINITIONS SECTION 014200 08/06
EIA
Electronic Industries Alliance www.eia.org
(703) 907-7500
EIMA
EIFS Industry Members Association www.eima.com
(800) 294-3462 (770) 968-7945
EJCDC
Engineers Joint Contract Documents Committee www.ejdc.org
(703) 295-5000
EJMA
Expansion Joint Manufacturers Association, Inc. www.ejma.org
(914) 332-0040
ESD
ESD Association www.esda.org
(315) 339-6937
FIBA
Federation Internationale de Basketball Amateur (The International Basketball Federation) www.fiba.com
41 22 545 00 00
FIVB
Federation Internationale de Volleyball (The International Volleyball Federation) www.fivb.ch
41 21 345 35 35
FMG
FM Global (Formerly: FM - Factory Mutual System) www.fmglobal.com
(401) 275-3000
FMRC
Factory Mutual Research (Now FMG)
FRSA
Florida Roofing, Sheet Metal & Air Conditioning Contractors Association, Inc. www.floridaroof.com
(407) 671-3772
FSA
Fluid Sealing Association www.fluidsealing.com
(610) 971-4850
FSC
Forest Stewardship Council www.fsc.org
49 228 367 66 0
GA
Gypsum Association www.gypsum.org
(202) 289-5440
GANA
Glass Association of North America www.glasswebsite.com
(785) 271-0208
GRI
(Now GSI)
GS
Green Seal
REFERENCE STANDARDS AND DEFINITIONS
(202) 872-6400 014200 - 8
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
REFERENCE STANDARDS AND DEFINITIONS SECTION 014200 08/06
www.greenseal.org GSI
Geosynthetic Institute www.geosynthetic-institute.org
(610) 522-8440
HI
Hydraulic Institute www.pumps.org
(888) 786-7744 (973) 267-9700
HI
Hydronics Institute www.gamanet.org
(908) 464-8200
HMMA
Hollow Metal Manufacturers Association (Part of NAAMM)
HPVA
Hardwood Plywood & Veneer Association www.hpva.org
(703) 435-2900
HPW
H. P. White Laboratory, Inc. www.hpwhite.com
(410) 838-6550
IAS
International Approval Services (Now CSA International)
IBF
International Badminton Federation www.intbadfed.org
(6-03) 9283-7155
ICEA
Insulated Cable Engineers Association, Inc. www.icea.net
(770) 830-0369
ICRI
International Concrete Repair Institute, Inc. www.icri.org
(847) 827-0830
IEC
International Electrotechnical Commission www.iec.ch
41 22 919 02 11
IEEE
Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc. (The) www.ieee.org
(212) 419-7900
IESNA
Illuminating Engineering Society of North America www.iesna.org
(212) 248-5000
IEST
Institute of Environmental Sciences and Technology www.iest.org
(847) 255-1561
IGCC
Insulating Glass Certification Council www.igcc.org
(315) 646-2234
IGMA
Insulating Glass Manufacturers Alliance www.igmaonline.org
(613) 233-1510
REFERENCE STANDARDS AND DEFINITIONS
014200 - 9
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
REFERENCE STANDARDS AND DEFINITIONS SECTION 014200 08/06
ILI
Indiana Limestone Institute of America, Inc. www.iliai.com
(812) 275-4426
ISO
International Organization for Standardization www.iso.ch
41 22 749 01 11
Available from ANSI www.ansi.org
(202) 293-8020
ISSFA
International Solid Surface Fabricators Association www.issfa.net
(877) 464-7732 (702) 567-8150
ITS
Intertek www.intertek.com
(800) 345-3851 (713) 407-3500
ITU
International Telecommunication Union www.itu.int/home
41 22 730 51 11
KCMA
Kitchen Cabinet Manufacturers Association www.kcma.org
(703) 264-1690
LMA
Laminating Materials Association (Now part of CPA)
LPI
Lightning Protection Institute www.lightning.org
(800) 488-6864 (804) 314-8955
MBMA
Metal Building Manufacturers Association www.mbma.com
(216) 241-7333
MFMA
Maple Flooring Manufacturers Association, Inc. www.maplefloor.org
(847) 480-9138
MFMA
Metal Framing Manufacturers Association www.metalframingmfg.org
(312) 644-6610
MH
Material Handling (Now MHIA)
MHIA
Material Handling Industry of America www.mhia.org
(800) 345-1815 (704) 676-1190
MIA
Marble Institute of America www.marble-institute.com
(440) 250-9222
MPI
Master Painters Institute www.paintinfo.com
(888) 674-8937
MSS
Manufacturers Standardization Society of The Valve and Fittings Industry Inc.
(703) 281-6613
REFERENCE STANDARDS AND DEFINITIONS
014200 - 10
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
REFERENCE STANDARDS AND DEFINITIONS SECTION 014200 08/06
www.mss-hq.com NAAMM
National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers www.naamm.org
(312) 332-0405
NACE
NACE International (National Association of Corrosion Engineers International) www.nace.org
(800) 797-6623 (281) 228-6200
NADCA
National Air Duct Cleaners Association www.nadca.com
(202) 737-2926
NAGWS
National Association for Girls and Women in Sport
(800) 213-7193, ext. 453
www.aahperd.org/nagws/ NAIMA
North American Insulation Manufacturers Association www.naima.org
(703) 684-0084
NBGQA
National Building Granite Quarries Association, Inc. www.nbgqa.com
(800) 557-2848
NCAA
National Collegiate Athletic Association (The) www.ncaa.org
(317) 917-6222
NCMA
National Concrete Masonry Association www.ncma.org
(703) 713-1900
NCPI
National Clay Pipe Institute www.ncpi.org
(262) 248-9094
NCTA
National Cable & Telecommunications Association www.ncta.com
(202) 775-3550
NEBB
National Environmental Balancing Bureau www.nebb.org
(301) 977-3698
NECA
National Electrical Contractors Association www.necanet.org
(301) 657-3110
NeLMA
Northeastern Lumber Manufacturers' Association www.nelma.org
(207) 829-6901
NEMA
National Electrical Manufacturers Association www.nema.org
(703) 841-3200
NETA
InterNational Electrical Testing Association www.netaworld.org
(888) 300-6382 (303) 697-8441
NFHS
National Federation of State High School Associations
(317) 972-6900
REFERENCE STANDARDS AND DEFINITIONS
014200 - 11
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
REFERENCE STANDARDS AND DEFINITIONS SECTION 014200 08/06
www.nfhs.org NFPA
NFPA (National Fire Protection Association) www.nfpa.org
(800) 344-3555 (617) 770-3000
NFRC
National Fenestration Rating Council www.nfrc.org
(301) 589-1776
NGA
National Glass Association www.glass.org
(866) 342-5642 (703) 442-4890
NHLA
National Hardwood Lumber Association www.natlhardwood.org
(800) 933-0318 (901) 377-1818
NLGA
National Lumber Grades Authority www.nlga.org
(604) 524-2393
NOFMA
NOFMA: The Wood Flooring Manufacturers Association (Formerly: National Oak Flooring Manufacturers Association) www.nofma.org
(901) 526-5016
NRCA
National Roofing Contractors Association www.nrca.net
(800) 323-9545 (847) 299-9070
NRMCA
National Ready Mixed Concrete Association www.nrmca.org
(888) 846-7622 (301) 587-1400
NSF
NSF International (National Sanitation Foundation International) www.nsf.org
(800) 673-6275 (734) 769-8010
NSSGA
National Stone, Sand & Gravel Association www.nssga.org
(800) 342-1415 (703) 525-8788
NTMA
National Terrazzo & Mosaic Association, Inc. (The) www.ntma.com
(800) 323-9736 (540) 751-0930
NTRMA
National Tile Roofing Manufacturers Association (Now TRI)
NWWDA
National Wood Window and Door Association (Now WDMA)
OPL
Omega Point Laboratories, Inc. (Acquired by ITS - Intertek) www.opl.com
(800) 966-5253 (210) 635-8100
PCI
Precast/Prestressed Concrete Institute www.pci.org
(312) 786-0300
REFERENCE STANDARDS AND DEFINITIONS
014200 - 12
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
REFERENCE STANDARDS AND DEFINITIONS SECTION 014200 08/06
PDCA
Painting & Decorating Contractors of America www.pdca.com
(800) 332-7322 (314) 514-7322
PDI
Plumbing & Drainage Institute www.pdionline.org
(800) 589-8956 (978) 557-0720
PGI
PVC Geomembrane Institute http://pgi-tp.ce.uiuc.edu
(217) 333-3929
PLANET
Professional Landcare Network (800) 395-2522 (Formerly: ACLA - Associated Landscape Contractors of America) (703) 736-9666 www.landcarenetwork.org
PTI
Post-Tensioning Institute www.post-tensioning.org
(602) 870-7540
RCSC
Research Council on Structural Connections www.boltcouncil.org
(800) 644-2400 (312) 670-2400
RFCI
Resilient Floor Covering Institute www.rfci.com
(301) 340-8580
RIS
Redwood Inspection Service www.calredwood.org
(888) 225-7339 (415) 382-0662
RTI
(Formerly: NTRMA - National Tile Roofing Manufacturers Association) (Now TRI)
SAE
SAE International www.sae.org
(877) 606-7323 (724) 776-4841
SDI
Steel Deck Institute www.sdi.org
(847) 458-4647
SDI
Steel Door Institute www.steeldoor.org
(440) 899-0010
SEFA
Scientific Equipment and Furniture Association www.sefalabs.com
(516) 294-5424
SGCC
Safety Glazing Certification Council www.sgcc.org
(315) 646-2234
SIA
Security Industry Association www.siaonline.org
(703) 683-2075
SIGMA
Sealed Insulating Glass Manufacturers Association (Now IGMA)
REFERENCE STANDARDS AND DEFINITIONS
014200 - 13
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
REFERENCE STANDARDS AND DEFINITIONS SECTION 014200 08/06
SJI
Steel Joist Institute www.steeljoist.org
(843) 626-1995
SMA
Screen Manufacturers Association www.smacentral.org
(561) 533-0991
SMACNA Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors' National Association www.smacna.org
(703) 803-2980
SMPTE
Society of Motion Picture and Television Engineers www.smpte.org
(914) 761-1100
SPFA
Spray Polyurethane Foam Alliance (Formerly: SPI/SPFD - The Society of the Plastics Industry, Inc.; Spray Polyurethane Foam Division) www.sprayfoam.org
(800) 523-6154
SPIB
Southern Pine Inspection Bureau (The) www.spib.org
(850) 434-2611
SPRI
Single Ply Roofing Industry www.spri.org
(781) 647-7026
SSINA
Specialty Steel Industry of North America www.ssina.com
(800) 982-0355 (202) 342-8630
SSPC
SSPC: The Society for Protective Coatings www.sspc.org
(877) 281-7772 (412) 281-2331
STI
Steel Tank Institute www.steeltank.com
(847) 438-8265
SWI
Steel Window Institute www.steelwindows.com
(216) 241-7333
SWRI
Sealant, Waterproofing, & Restoration Institute www.swrionline.org
(816) 472-7974
TCA
Tile Council of America, Inc. www.tileusa.com
(864) 646-8453
TIA/EIA
Telecommunications Industry Association/Electronic Industries Alliance www.tiaonline.org
(703) 907-7700
TMS
The Masonry Society www.masonrysociety.org
(303) 939-9700
TPI
Truss Plate Institute, Inc.
(703) 683-1010
REFERENCE STANDARDS AND DEFINITIONS
014200 - 14
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
REFERENCE STANDARDS AND DEFINITIONS SECTION 014200 08/06
www.tpinst.org TPI
Turfgrass Producers International www.turfgrasssod.org
(847) 649-5555
TRI
Tile Roofing Institute (Formerly: RTI - Roof Tile Institute) www.tileroofing.org
(312) 670-4177
UL
Underwriters Laboratories Inc. www.ul.com
(877) 854-3577 (847) 272-8800
UNI
Uni-Bell PVC Pipe Association www.uni-bell.org
(972) 243-3902
USAV
USA Volleyball www.usavolleyball.org
(888) 786-5539 (719) 228-6800
USGBC
U.S. Green Building Council www.usgbc.org
(202) 828-7422
USITT
United States Institute for Theatre Technology, Inc. www.usitt.org
(800) 938-7488 (315) 463-6463
WASTEC
Waste Equipment Technology Association www.wastec.org
(800) 424-2869 (202) 244-4700
WCLIB
West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau www.wclib.org
(800) 283-1486 (503) 639-0651
WCMA
Window Covering Manufacturers Association (Now WCSC)
WCSC
Window Covering Safety Council (Formerly: WCMA - Window Covering Manufacturers Association) www.windowcoverings.org
(800) 506-4636 (212) 297-2109
WDMA
Window & Door Manufacturers Association (Formerly: NWWDA - National Wood Window and Door Association) www.wdma.com
(800) 223-2301 (847) 299-5200
WI
Woodwork Institute (Formerly: WIC - Woodwork Institute of California) www.wicnet.org
(916) 372-9943
WIC
Woodwork Institute of California (Now WI)
REFERENCE STANDARDS AND DEFINITIONS
014200 - 15
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
REFERENCE STANDARDS AND DEFINITIONS SECTION 014200 08/06
WMMPA
Wood Moulding & Millwork Producers Association www.wmmpa.com
(800) 550-7889 (530) 661-9591
WSRCA
Western States Roofing Contractors Association www.wsrca.com
(800) 725-0333 (650) 570-5441
WWPA
Western Wood Products Association www.wwpa.org
(503) 224-3930
C.
Code Agencies: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the entities in the following list. Names, telephone numbers, and Web sites are subject to change and are believed to be accurate and upto-date as of the date of the Contract Documents.
BOCA
BOCA International, Inc. (See ICC)
IAPMO
International Association of Plumbing and Mechanical Officials
(909) 4724100
www.iapmo.org ICBO
International Conference of Building Officials (See ICC)
ICBO ES ICBO Evaluation Service, Inc. (See ICC-ES) ICC
International Code Council www.iccsafe.org
ICC-ES
ICC Evaluation Service, Inc. www.icc-es.org
SBCCI D.
(888) 4227233 (703) 9314533 (800) 4236587 (562) 6990543
Southern Building Code Congress International, Inc. (See ICC)
Federal Government Agencies: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the entities in the following list. Names, telephone numbers, and Web sites are subject to change and are believed to be accurate and up-to-date as of the date of the Contract Documents.
CE
Army Corps of Engineers www.usace.army.mil
CPSC
Consumer Product Safety Commission www.cpsc.gov
REFERENCE STANDARDS AND DEFINITIONS
(800) 638-2772 (301) 504-7923
014200 - 16
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
REFERENCE STANDARDS AND DEFINITIONS SECTION 014200 08/06
DOC
Department of Commerce www.commerce.gov
(202) 482-2000
DOD
Department of Defense http://.dodssp.daps.dla.mil
(215) 697-6257
DOE
Department of Energy www.energy.gov
(202) 586-9220
EPA
Environmental Protection Agency www.epa.gov
(202) 272-0167
FAA
Federal Aviation Administration www.faa.gov
(866) 835-5322
FCC
Federal Communications Commission www.fcc.gov
(888) 225-5322
FDA
Food and Drug Administration www.fda.gov
(888) 463-6332
GSA
General Services Administration www.gsa.gov
(800) 488-3111
HUD
Department of Housing and Urban Development www.hud.gov
(202) 708-1112
LBL
Lawrence Berkeley National Laboratory www.lbl.gov
(510) 486-4000
NCHRP National Cooperative Highway Research Program (See TRB) NIST
National Institute of Standards and Technology www.nist.gov
(301) 975-6478
OSHA
Occupational Safety & Health Administration www.osha.gov
(800) 321-6742 (202) 693-1999
PBS
Public Building Service (See GSA)
PHS
Office of Public Health and Science www.osophs.dhhs.gov/ophs
(202) 690-7694
RUS
Rural Utilities Service (See USDA)
(202) 720-9540
SD
State Department
(202) 647-4000
REFERENCE STANDARDS AND DEFINITIONS
014200 - 17
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
REFERENCE STANDARDS AND DEFINITIONS SECTION 014200 08/06
www.state.gov TRB
Transportation Research Board www.nas.edu/trb
(202) 334-2934
USDA
Department of Agriculture www.usda.gov
(202) 720-2791
USPS
Postal Service www.usps.com
(202) 268-2000
E.
State Government Agencies: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the entities in the following list. Names, telephone numbers, and Web sites are subject to change and are believed to be accurate and up-to-date as of the date of the Contract Documents.
CBHF State of California, Department of Consumer Affairs Bureau of Home Furnishings and Thermal Insulation
(800) 9525210 (916) 5742041
www.dca.ca.gov/bhfti CPUC California Public Utilities Commission
(415) 7032782
www.cpuc.ca.gov TFS
Texas Forest Service
(936) 6398180
Forest Resource Development http://txforestservice.tamu.edu PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used) END OF SECTION 014200
REFERENCE STANDARDS AND DEFINITIONS
014200 - 18
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES AND TEMPORARY CONTROLS SECTION 015000 08/06
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. In the event of any conflicts between the requirements of these Sections, the more stringent requirement shall apply.
1.2
SUMMARY
A. This Section includes requirements for construction facilities and temporary controls, including temporary utilities, support facilities, and security and protection. Temporary utilities include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.
Temporary water service and distribution. Temporary electric power and light. Temporary heat. Telephone service. Sanitary facilities, including drinking water. Storm and sanitary sewer.
B. Support facilities include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10.
Field offices and storage sheds. Temporary roads, paving and truck wash-down station. Dewatering facilities and drains. Temporary enclosures. Hoists. Temporary project identification signs and bulletin boards. Waste disposal services. Rodent and pest control. Construction aids and miscellaneous services and facilities. Security and protection facilities include, but are not limited to, the following:
C. Security and protection facilities include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. 2. 3. 4.
Temporary fire protection. Barricades, warning signs, and lights. Sidewalk bridge or enclosure fence for the site. Environmental protection.
D. The Contractor is responsible for all costs associated with the supply, maintenance or usage of temporary utilities and construction related facilities unless indicated otherwise in this Section.
1.3
QUALITY ASSURANCE
CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES AND TEMPORARY CONTROLS
015000-1
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES AND TEMPORARY CONTROLS SECTION 015000 08/06
A. Regulations: Comply with industry standards and applicable laws and regulations of authorities having jurisdiction including, but not limited to, the following: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.
Building code requirements. Health and safety regulations. Utility company regulations. Police, fire department, and rescue squad rules. Environmental protection regulations.
B. Standards: Comply with NFPA 241 "Standard for Safeguarding Construction, Alterations, and Demolition Operations," ANSI A10 Series standards for "Safety Requirements for Construction and Demolition," and NECA Electrical Design Library "Temporary Electrical Facilities." 1.
Electrical Service: Comply with NEMA, NECA, and UL standards and regulations for temporary electric service. Install service in compliance with NFPA 70 "National Electric Code."
C. Inspections: Arrange for authorities having jurisdiction to inspect and test each temporary utility before use. Obtain required certifications and permits. 1.4
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Temporary Utilities: Prepare a schedule indicating dates for implementation and termination of each temporary utility. B. Conditions of Use: Keep temporary services and facilities clean and neat in appearance. Operate in a safe and efficient manner. Relocate temporary services and facilities as the Work progresses. Do not overload facilities or permit them to interfere with progress. Take necessary fire-prevention measures. Do not allow hazardous, dangerous, or unsanitary conditions, or public nuisances to develop or persist on-site.
C. Provide waste removal services as required to maintain the site in a clean and orderly condition. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1
MATERIALS A. General: Provide new materials. If acceptable to the Owner, the Contractor may use undamaged, previously used materials in serviceable condition. Provide materials suitable for use intended. B. Lumber and Plywood: Comply with requirements in Division 6 Section "Rough Carpentry."
1.
2.
Job-built temporary offices, shops, and sheds within the construction area, provide UL-labeled, fire-treated lumber and plywood for framing, sheathing, and siding. For signs and directory boards, provide exterior-type, Grade B-B high-density concrete form overlay plywood of sizes and thicknesses indicated.
CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES AND TEMPORARY CONTROLS
015000-2
ROWAN UNIVERSITY 3.
CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES AND TEMPORARY CONTROLS SECTION 015000 08/06 For safety barriers, sidewalk bridges, and similar uses, provide minimum 5/8inch- thick exterior plywood.
C. NOT USED.
D. NOT USED E. Paint: Comply with requirements. 1. 2.
For job-built temporary offices, shops, sheds, fences, and other exposed lumber and plywood, provide exterior-grade acrylic-latex emulsion over exterior primer. For sign panels and applying graphics, provide exterior-grade alkyd gloss enamel over exterior primer.
F. Tarpaulins: Provide waterproof, fire-resistant, UL-labeled tarpaulins with flame-spread rating of 15 or less. For temporary enclosures, provide translucent, nylon-reinforced, laminated polyethylene or polyvinyl chloride, fire-retardant tarpaulins. G. Water: Provide potable water approved by local health authorities. H. Open-Mesh Fencing: Provide 0.120-inch- thick, galvanized 2-inch chain link fabric fencing 6 feet high with galvanized steel pipe posts, 1-1/2 inches I.D. for line posts and 2-1/2 inches I.D. for corner posts. 2.2
EQUIPMENT
A. General: Provide new equipment. If acceptable to the Owner, the Contractor may use undamaged, previously used equipment in serviceable condition. Provide equipment suitable for use intended.
B. Water Hoses: Provide 3/4-inch, heavy-duty, abrasion-resistant, flexible rubber hoses 100 feet long, with pressure rating greater than the maximum pressure of the water distribution system. Provide adjustable shutoff nozzles at hose discharge.
C. Electrical Outlets: Provide properly configured, NEMA-polarized outlets to prevent insertion of 110- to 120-Volt plugs into higher voltage outlets. Provide receptacle outlets equipped with ground-fault circuit interrupters, reset button, and pilot light for connection of power tools and equipment.
D. Electrical Power Cords: Provide grounded extension cords. Use hard-service cords where exposed to abrasion and traffic. Provide waterproof connectors to connect separate lengths of electric cords if single lengths will not reach areas where construction activities are in progress. Do not exceed safe length-voltage ratio.
E. Lamps and Light Fixtures: Provide general service incandescent lamps of wattage required for adequate illumination. Provide guard cages or tempered-glass enclosures where exposed to breakage. Provide exterior fixtures where exposed to moisture.
CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES AND TEMPORARY CONTROLS
015000-3
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES AND TEMPORARY CONTROLS SECTION 015000 08/06 F. Heating Units: Provide temporary heating units that have been tested and labeled by UL, FM, or another recognized trade association related to the type of fuel being consumed.
G. Temporary Toilet Units: Provide self-contained, single-occupant toilet units of the chemical, aerated recirculation, or combustion type. Provide units properly vented and fully enclosed with a glass-fiber-reinforced polyester shell or similar nonabsorbent material.
H. Fire Extinguishers: Provide hand-carried, portable, UL-rated; Class A fire extinguishers for temporary offices and similar spaces. In other locations, provide hand-carried, portable, ULrated, Class ABC, dry-chemical extinguishers or a combination of extinguishers of NFPArecommended classes for the exposures. 1.
Comply with NFPA 10 and NFPA 241 for classification, extinguishing agent, and size required by location and class of fire exposure.
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1
INSTALLATION A. Use qualified personnel for installation of temporary facilities. Locate facilities where they will serve the Project adequately and result in minimum interference with performance of the Work. and the areas adjacent to the Work area. Relocate and modify facilities as required. B. Provide each facility ready for use when needed to avoid delay. Maintain and modify as required. Do not remove until facilities are no longer needed.
3.2
TEMPORARY UTILITY INSTALLATION
A. General: Engage the appropriate local utility company to install temporary service or connect to existing service. Where company provides only part of the service, provide the remainder with matching, compatible materials and equipment. Comply with company recommendations. 1. 2. 3. 4.
5. 6.
Arrange with company and existing users for a time when service can be interrupted, if necessary, to make connections for temporary services. Provide adequate capacity at each stage of construction. Prior to temporary utility availability, provide trucked-in services. Obtain easements to bring temporary utilities to the site where the Owner's easements cannot be used for that purpose. Use Charges: Cost or use charges for temporary facilities are not chargeable to the Owner. Neither the Owner will accept cost or use charges as a basis of claims for Change Orders. Install services to cause minimum disruption to area’s adjacent to the work area. Add provisions for work not in Contract but served by temporary facilities, if required.
B. Water Service: If necessary, install water service and distribution piping of sizes and pressures adequate for construction. 1.
Sterilization: Sterilize temporary water piping prior to use.
CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES AND TEMPORARY CONTROLS
015000-4
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
C.
D.
CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES AND TEMPORARY CONTROLS SECTION 015000 08/06 Temporary Electric Power Service: Provide weatherproof, grounded electric power service and distribution system of sufficient size, capacity, and power characteristics during construction period. Include meters, transformers, overload-protected disconnects, automatic ground-fault interrupters, and main distribution switchgear. Cost of temporary electric power usage is the Contractors responsibility. Cost shall be included in the bid.
Initial temporary service shall be three (3) phase, or single phase. Temporary light and power installations, wiring and miscellaneous electrical hardware must meet the electric code. Electrical characteristics shall be provided to meet all temporary light and power reasonably required as herein and hereinafter specified or as included under the general conditions. The contractor shall pay the cost of running temporary services. All costs shall be included in the bid. 1.
2.
Power Distribution System: Install wiring overhead and rise vertically where least exposed to damage. Where permitted, wiring circuits not exceeding 125 Volts, ac 20 Ampere rating, and lighting circuits may be nonmetallic-sheathed cable where overhead and exposed for surveillance. Provide proper support for all aerial wiring to avoid wire sag.
E.
Power outlets shall be fed independently of the temporary lighting system. The extension of service shall include the necessary wiring of sufficient capacity to the location of the well for the operation of the well pump in the event a water well is the source of water supply for the project. Where service of a type other than herein mentioned is required, the contractor requiring it shall pay all costs of such special service.
F.
Temporary Lighting: Provide temporary lighting with local switching. Cost of temporary lighting usage is the contractors’ responsibility. Cost shall be included in the bid. 1.
The contractor shall provide double sockets at a maximum of thirty feet (30') on centers in large areas. One (1) socket shall contain a 150-watt lamp and the other socket shall be a grounding type to accept a receptacle plug for small, single-phase loads to be used for short periods of time.
2.
Install and operate temporary lighting that will fulfill security and protection requirements without operating the entire system. Provide temporary lighting that will provide adequate illumination for construction operations and traffic conditions.
G.
The contractor shall observe the requirements of the Federal Occupational Safety and Health Act (OSHA) of 1970 with regard to temporary light and power.
H.
Temporary Heat: Provide temporary heat required by construction activities. Select safe equipment that will not have a harmful effect. Any cost associated with the supply, maintenance and usage of temporary heat will be the responsibility of the contractor. Cost of temporary heat shall be included in the bid.
I.
Use of gasoline-burning space heaters, open flame, or salamander heating units is prohibited.
J.
Should electricians be required to supervise and maintain equipment required for the provision of heat, the payment for the services of the supervisors and/or maintenance personnel shall be
CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES AND TEMPORARY CONTROLS
015000-5
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES AND TEMPORARY CONTROLS SECTION 015000 08/06 the responsibility of the contractor. The contractor shall pay the cost of all fuel consumed in the operation of the generating unit for supplying temporary heat.
K.
All heating equipment shall be NFPA approved. Heaters shall be approved by a recognized testing laboratory and must be equipped with a positive shut-off safety valve. Notwithstanding the above, all temporary heating equipment will comply with all Federal and State laws and regulations.
L.
Temporary Telephones: Pay telephones for workmen can be installed on site at the Contractors option and expense. At each telephone, post a list of important telephone numbers. Cost of all telephones and telephone service shall be the contractors’ responsibility. The cost of telephones and telephone service shall be included in the bid.
M. Contractor is to provide sanitary facilities which include temporary toilets, wash facilities, and drinking-water. Comply with regulations and health codes for the type, number, location, operation, and maintenance of fixtures and facilities. Install facilities as directed by the Owner. 1.
One (1) unit shall be provided for each thirty (30) employees. An employee shall be defined as an individual directly employed by the Contractor or employed by any subcontractor hired by the Contractor. Employees will also be considered a person hired by a contractor hired by this Contractors sub-contractors.
2.
Each unit shall be serviced as needed, but at least twice a week, including the removal of waste matter, sterilizing, recharging tank, refilling tissue holders and thorough cleaning and scrubbing of the entire interior which shall be maintained in a neat and clean condition.
3.
Remove units from the site at the completion of the work or when so directed by Project Manager.
4.
Provide toilet tissue, paper towels, paper cups, and similar disposable materials for each facility. Provide covered waste containers for used material.
5.
The Contractor shall provide and maintain in proper working order and in clean and sanitary condition adequate sanitary facilities which shall include but not be limited to privacy enclosures, waste receptacles, and janitorial services for these facilities. a) Toilets shall be serviced by a firm qualified and experienced in such function.
6.
The Contractor shall enforce use of supplied facilities by all personnel.
7.
The Owner shall approve locations of portable sanitary, facilities.
N.
Toilets: Contractor to install self-contained toilet units. Shield toilets to ensure privacy. Use of pit-type privies will not be permitted.
O.
Provide separate facilities for male and female personnel.
CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES AND TEMPORARY CONTROLS
015000-6
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
P.
CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES AND TEMPORARY CONTROLS SECTION 015000 08/06 Wash Facilities: Contractor to install wash facilities supplied with potable water at convenient locations for personnel involved in handling materials that require wash-up for a healthy and sanitary condition. Dispose of drainage properly. Supply cleaning compounds appropriate for each condition.
Q.
Drinking-Water Fixtures: Contractor to provide drinking-water as required, including paper cup supply.
R.
It is the contractor’s responsibility to get the water to the site.
S.
Provide containerized, tap-dispenser, bottled-water drinking-water units, including paper supply where and when adequate valve water supply is not available.
The contractor may utilize the Owner’s sanitary/wash facilities, drinking water, etc. if these amenities are available. The contractor shall only use these facilities with Owner’s permission. The contractor will be responsible to reimburse the Owner for all Owner provided utilities use by the Contractor. Further, should the contractor elect to utilize Owner provided utilities the contractor will be responsible to repair all damage and replace all damaged items before the project will be considered substantially completed. The Owner will not be required to make final payment to the contractor until such damage is repair or replaced to its original or better than original condition. T.
Sewers and Drainage: If sewers are available, provide temporary connections to remove effluent that can be discharged lawfully. If sewers are not available or cannot be used, provide containers to remove and dispose of effluent off-site in a lawful manner. 1. 2. 3.
U.
Connect temporary sewers to the municipal system, as directed by sewer department officials. Maintain temporary sewers and drainage facilities in a clean, sanitary condition. Following heavy use, restore normal conditions promptly. Provide earthen embankments and similar barriers in and around excavations and subgrade construction, sufficient to prevent flooding by runoff of storm water from heavy rains.
Temporary Drainage – Erosion Control: 1.
The Contractor shall provide at all times adequate drainage from his area of operations, including dewatering runoff.
2.
The Contractor shall also provide water pollution and erosion control in accordance with local or municipal codes covering drainage or runoff.
3.
All drainage ditches and culverts draining the site and adjacent property shall be maintained free of obstructions at all times. If, in the opinion of the Owner, the drainage of any area in the vicinity of the site is obstructed or retarded due to the Contractor’s performance or negligence, the Contractor shall immediately remedy the cause of such obstruction or retardation at no additional cost.
CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES AND TEMPORARY CONTROLS
015000-7
ROWAN UNIVERSITY 4. 5.
CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES AND TEMPORARY CONTROLS SECTION 015000 08/06 It is the responsibility of the Contractor to clean and restore to full operational capability any obstructed site drain for the duration of the project.
The Contractor shall at all times keep public paths and walkways clean and clear of any construction materials, debris, earth, soils, and runoff. Contractor shall immediately upon notice, clean and remove any effects of runoff from the site and restore the cleanliness of the area affected.
SUPPORT FACILITIES INSTALLATION
A. Locate storage sheds, and other temporary construction and support facilities for easy access and as directed by the Owner. 1.
Maintain support facilities until near Substantial Completion. Remove prior to Substantial Completion.
B. Provide incombustible construction for shops, and sheds. Comply with requirements of NFPA 241. C. Storage and Fabrication Sheds: Install storage and fabrication sheds sized, furnished, and equipped to accommodate materials and equipment involved, including temporary utility service. Sheds may be open shelters or fully enclosed spaces within the building or elsewhere onsite. 1.
The contractor will provide and maintain, for his/her own use, as each deems necessary, suitable and safe temporary storage, tool shops and employee's sheds for proper protection, storage, work and shelter respectively. The contractor will properly maintain and remove them at the completion of the work. The Project Manager shall direct locations. The contractor making use of these areas shall be responsible for correcting defects and damage caused by such use and for keeping these areas clear and clean.
D. Dewatering Facilities and Drains: For temporary drainage and dewatering facilities and operations not directly associated with construction activities included under individual Sections, comply with dewatering requirements of applicable Division 2 Sections. Where feasible, utilize the same facilities. Maintain the site, excavations, and construction free of water. E. Temporary Enclosures: Provide temporary enclosures for protection of construction, in progress and completed, from exposure, foul weather, other construction operations, and similar activities. 1. Install tarpaulins securely, with incombustible wood framing and other materials. Close openings of 25 sq. ft. or less with plywood or similar materials. 2. Where temporary wood or plywood enclosure exceeds 100 sq. ft. in area, use UL-labeled, fire-retardant-treated material for framing and main sheathing. F. Temporary Lifts and Hoists: Provide facilities for hoisting materials and employees. Truck cranes and similar devices used for hoisting materials are considered "tools and equipment" and not temporary facilities.
CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES AND TEMPORARY CONTROLS
015000-8
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES AND TEMPORARY CONTROLS SECTION 015000 08/06 G. Project Identification and Temporary Signs: Prepare project identification and other signs of size indicated. Install signs where indicated to inform the public and persons seeking entrance to the Project. Support on posts or framing of preservative-treated wood or steel. Do not permit installation of unauthorized signs. 1.
Temporary Signs: Prepare signs to provide directional information to construction personnel and visitors.
H. Collection and Disposal of Waste: Collect waste from construction areas and elsewhere daily. Comply with requirements of NFPA 241 for removal of combustible waste material and debris. Enforce requirements strictly. Do not hold materials more than 7 days during normal weather or 3 days when the temperature is expected to rise above 80 deg F. Handle hazardous, dangerous, or unsanitary waste materials separately from other waste by containerizing properly. Dispose of material lawfully. 1.
3.3
Provide containers with lids. Dispose of waste off-site periodically.
I.
Rodent and Pest Control: Before deep foundation work has been completed, retain a local exterminator or pest control company to recommend practices to minimize attraction and harboring of rodents, roaches, and other pests. Employ this service to perform extermination and control procedures at regular intervals so the Project will be free of pests and their residues at Substantial Completion. Perform control operations lawfully, using environmentally safe materials.
J.
Individual Project circumstances may require use of other construction aids and miscellaneous facilities, such as walkways, scaffoldings, platforms, swing stages, ramps and bridges, incidental sheeting and shoring, demolition waste chutes, and similar construction aids. Add requirements as necessary to suit Project. SECURITY AND PROTECTION FACILITIES INSTALLATION
A. Temporary Fire Protection: Install and maintain temporary fire-protection facilities of the types needed to protect against reasonably predictable and controllable fire losses. Comply with NFPA 10 "Standard for Portable Fire Extinguishers" and NFPA 241 "Standard for Safeguarding Construction, Alterations, and Demolition Operations." 1.
Locate fire extinguishers where convenient and effective for their intended purpose, but not less than one extinguisher on each floor at or near each usable stairwell.
2. 3.
Store combustible materials in containers in fire-safe locations. Maintain unobstructed access to fire extinguishers, fire hydrants, temporary fireprotection facilities, stairways, and other access routes for fighting fires. Prohibit smoking in hazardous fire-exposure areas. Provide supervision of welding operations, combustion-type temporary heating units, and similar sources of fire ignition.
4.
B. Barricades, Warning Signs, and Lights: Comply with standards and code requirements for erection of structurally adequate barricades. Paint with appropriate colors, graphics, and warning
CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES AND TEMPORARY CONTROLS
015000-9
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES AND TEMPORARY CONTROLS SECTION 015000 08/06 signs to inform personnel and the public of the hazard being protected against. Where appropriate and needed, provide lighting, including flashing red or amber lights.
C. Security Enclosure and Lockup: Install substantial temporary enclosure of partially completed areas of construction. Provide locking entrances to prevent unauthorized entrance, vandalism, theft, and similar violations of security. 1.
Storage: Where materials and equipment must be stored, and are of value or attractive for theft, provide a secure lockup. Enforce discipline in connection with the installation and release of material to minimize the opportunity for theft and vandalism.
D. Environmental Protection: Provide protection, operate temporary facilities, and conduct construction in ways and by methods that comply with environmental regulations, and minimize the possibility that air, waterways, and subsoil might be contaminated or polluted or that other undesirable effects might result. Avoid use of tools and equipment that produce harmful noise. Restrict use of noise-making tools and equipment to hours that will minimize complaints from persons or firms near the site. 1.
No burning will be permitted on the site.
2.
It will be the Contractor’s responsibility to control dust by a means acceptable to the Owner. The Contractor shall make due allowance in his bid to cover these non-productive costs.
E. Protection of Utilities: 1.
The Contractor shall exercise special care when working near existing utility installations such as lights, ducts, structures, underground trench laid cables, cable markers, pads, water lines, underground oil lines, railroads and other installations, to ensure that no damage is done to them and that the underground wiring to such utilities is not damaged or rooted out, or pipelines broken or punctured.
2.
If the Contractor damages any installation, the Contractor shall repair at no cost to the Owner the damaged item to the Owner’s satisfaction. At the Owners discretion, repairs will be done continuously on a 24-hour per day basis until completed. The Contractor shall submit for approval the name of an electrical contractor and a plumbing contractor who shall be available on a 24 hour a day basis to affect any repairs as may be necessary due to Contractor error.
3.
The Contractor shall obtain (if available) as-built site underground information prior to beginning excavation to minimize the possibility of interruption or damage to existing facilities. The lack of this information shall not excuse damage to the utilities by the contractor or the requirement to make necessary repairs immediately, the Contractor shall pay for Cost of the repair work.
CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES AND TEMPORARY CONTROLS
015000-10
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES AND TEMPORARY CONTROLS SECTION 015000 08/06 F. Protection and Restoration of Property and Landscape: The Contractor shall be responsible for the preservation of all public and private property. All land monuments and property markers shall be preserved until the Owner has witnessed and recorded their location.
G. Protection of Existing Trees, Shrubs, and Vegetation to Remain: Contractor shall take all means necessary to protect existing trees, shrubs, and vegetation. Contractor and its forces shall abide by the boundaries set by the Drawings for the protection of root systems of all designated trees, shrubs and vegetation. Protection shall be completely in place prior to the start of construction work in any area. Contractor shall clearly mark all restricted areas as indicated on the Drawings and prevent the use of the area by all personnel and equipment until final cleanup.
H. Project Security:
3.4
1.
The Contractor shall be responsible for monitoring all personnel requiring access to the work site including his personnel, subcontractor’s personnel, other contractors working in the same construction area, material delivery trucks, authorized visitors to the site, etc.
2.
The Contractor shall be held responsible for the security and protection of its own, subcontractors and sub-subcontractors equipment, vehicles, trailers, tools, materials, and all other items necessary for the work under this Contract.
3.
The Contractor shall be held responsible for the admission of any unauthorized personnel into his work area.
4.
In general, provide security and facilities to protect Work, existing facilities, and the Owner’s operations from unauthorized entry, vandalism or theft.
OPERATION, TERMINATION, AND REMOVAL A. Supervision: Enforce strict discipline in use of temporary facilities. Limit availability of temporary facilities to essential and intended uses to minimize waste and abuse. B. Maintenance: Maintain facilities in good operating condition until removal. Protect from damage by freezing temperatures and similar elements. 1. Protection: Prevent water-filled piping from freezing. Maintain markers for underground lines. Protect from damage during excavation operations. C. Termination and Removal: Unless the Owner requests that it be maintained longer, remove each temporary facility when the need has ended. or no later than Substantial Completion. Complete or, if necessary, restore existing permanent construction that may have been damaged as a result of the use, maintenance or operation of temporary facility for this project. Repair damaged new work, repair or replace, as directed by the Owner, existing work and or conditions, clean exposed surfaces, and replace construction that cannot be satisfactorily repaired as a result of the use, maintenance or operation of temporary facilities for the project.
CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES AND TEMPORARY CONTROLS
015000-11
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
1.
CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES AND TEMPORARY CONTROLS SECTION 015000 08/06
Where the area is intended for future landscape development, remove any material, equipment, debris, trash, soil and aggregate fill used as part or in conjunction with the project that do not comply with requirements for fill or subsoil in the area. Remove materials contaminated with road oil, asphalt and other petrochemical compounds, and other substances that might impair growth of plant materials or lawns. Repair or replace street paving, curbs, and sidewalks damaged during and as a result of work conducted as part of this project. Replace and/or repair as required and direct by the governing authority and the Owner.
END OF SECTION 01500
CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES AND TEMPORARY CONTROLS
015000-12
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
FIELD ENGINEERING SECTION 01700 08/06
SECTION 01700 - FIELD ENGINEERING PART I - GENERAL 1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS A.
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General Conditions General Conduct of the Work and Special Requirements, Supplementary Conditions, and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. In the event of any conflicts between the requirements of these Sections, the more stringent requirement shall apply.
B.
General: This Section specifies administrative and procedural requirements for fieldengineering s e r v i c e i n c luding, but not limited to, the following:
1. 2. C.
Land survey work. Geoteclinical monitoring.
Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section: I.
2. 3.
Division 1 Section "Coordination" for procedures for coordinating field engineering with other construction activities. Division I Section "Submittals" for submitting Project record surveys. Division 1 Section "Project Closeout" for submitting final property survey with Project Record Documents and recording of Owner-accepted deviations from indicated lines and levels.
SUBMITTALS
1.2
A.
Certificates: Submit a certificate signed by the land surveyor or professional engineer certifying the location and elevation of improvements.
B.
Project Record Documents: Submit a record of Work performed and record survey data as required under provisions of "Submittals" and "Project Closeout" Sections.
1.3
QUALITY ASSURANCE A.
Surveyor Qualifications: Engage a land surveyor registered in the state where the Project is located, to perform required land-surveying services and project layout work.
B.
Engineer Qualifications: Engage an engineer of the discipline required; licensed in the state where the Project is located, to perform required engineering services.
PART 2 -PRODUCTS (Not Applicable)
FIELD ENGINEERING
01700 - 1
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
FIELD ENGINEERING SECTION 01700 08/06
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1
EXAMINATION A.
Identification: The Construction Manager will identify existing control points.
B.
Verify layout information shown on the Drawings, in relation to the property survey and existing benchmarks, before proceeding to lay out the Work. Locate and protect existing benchmarks and control points. Preserve permanent reference points during construction. I. 2.
Do not change or relocate benchmarks or control points without prior written approval. Promptly report lost or destroyed reference points or requirements to relocate reference points because of necessary changes in grades or locations. Promptly replace lost or destroyed Project control points. Base replacements on the original survey control points.
C.
Establish and maintain a minimum of 2 permanent benchmarks on the site, referenced to data established by survey control points. Record benchmark locations, with horizontal and vertical data, on Project Record 1. Documents.
D.
Existing Utilities and Equipment: The existence and location of underground and other utilities and constructioN indicated as existing are not guaranteed. Before beginning sitework, investigate and verify the existence and location of underground utilities and other construction. I.
3.2
Prior to construction, verify the location and invert elevation at points of connection of sanitary sewer, storm sewer, and water-service piping, connection of sanitary sewer, storm sewer, and water-service piping.
PERFORMANCE A.
Work from lines and levels established by the property survey. Establish benchmarks and markers to set lines and levels at each story of construction and elsewhere as needed to locate each element of the Project. Calculate and measure required dimensions within indicated or recognized tolerances. Do not scale Drawings to determine dimensions. 1. 2.
B.
Advise entities engaged in construction activities of marked lines and levels provided for their use. As construction proceeds, check every major element for line, level, and plumb.
Surveyor's Log: Maintain a surveyor's log of control and other survey work. Make this log available for reference.
1.
Record deviations from required lines and levels, and advise the Architect when deviations that exceed indicated or recognized tolerances are detected. 0 n Project Record Drawings, record deviations that are accepted and not corrected.
FIELD ENGINEERING
01700 - 2
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
FIELD ENGINEERING SECTION 01700 08/06
2.
On completion of foundation walls, major site improvements, and other work requiring field-engineering services, prepare a certified "AS-BUILT" survey showing dimensions, locations, angles, and elevations of construction and sitework.
C.
Site Improvements: Locate and lay out site improvements, including pavements, stakes for grading, fill and topsoil placement, utility slopes, and invert elevations.
D.
Building Lines and Levels: Locate and lay out hatter boards for structures, building foundations, column grids and locations, floor levels, and control lines and levels required for mechanical and electrical work.
E.
Existing Utilities: Furnish information necessary to adjust, move, or relocate existing structures, utility poles, lines, services, or other appurtenances located in or affected by construction. Coordinate with local authorities having jurisdiction.
F.
Final Property Survey: Prepare a final property survey showing significant features (real property) for the Project. Include on the survey a certification; signed by the surveyor, that principal metes, bounds, lines, and levels of the Project are accurately positioned as shown on the survey. 1.
Recording: At Substantial Completion, have the final property survey recorded by or with local governing authorities as the official "property survey."
2.
Furnish a copy of the recorded final property survey to the Owner. END OF SECTION 01700
FIELD ENGINEERING
01700 - 3
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
CONTRACT CLOSEOUT SECTION 017700 08/06
SECTION 017700– CONTRACT CLOSEOUT PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. In the event of any conflicts between the requirements of these Sections, the more stringent requirement shall apply. SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for contract closeout, including, but not limited to, the following: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.
B.
1.3
Inspection procedures. Project record document submittal. Operation and maintenance manual submittal. Submittal of warranties. Final cleaning.
Closeout requirements for specific construction activities are included in the appropriate Sections in Divisions 2 through 50. SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION
A.
Substantial Completion: The date of Substantial Completion for the Work, or designated portion thereof, is the date certified by the Architect and the New Jersey Department of Community Affairs (DCA), who is the State entity in charge of permits and code inspections, when construction is sufficiently complete, in accordance with the Contract Documents, so the Owner may occupy the project, or the designated portions thereof, for the use for which it was intended PRIOR to the Mandatory Final Completion Date. Substantial Completion shall be accomplished and the full project and all designated portions thereof, ready for use and occupancy by the Owner by the completion milestone deadline indicated in the project schedule attached as part of this Project Manual. It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to notify the Architect and Owner in not less than seven (7) calendar days prior to the Substantial Completion Milestone deadline for a “substantial completion” inspection. The University shall issue a Certificate of Substantial Completion (AIA Document G704) at the point in time when the inspection has been fully completed and the appropriate approvals and certificates have been granted by governing authorities and obtained by the Contractor. IT IS THE INTENT OF THESE SPECIFICAITONS THAT SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION FOR THE FIRST FLOOR IS ACHIEVED NO LATER THAN August 1st, 2013 AND THAT SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION FOR THE GROUND FLOOR IS ACHIEVED NO LATER THAN September 30th, 2013. THE CONTRACTOR MUST INCLUDE ANY
CONTRACT CLOSEOUT
017700 - 1
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
CONTRACT CLOSEOUT SECTION 017700 08/06 AND ALL COSTS INCLUDING ANY OVERTIME NECESSARY TO ATTAIN SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION BY THE DEADLINE LISTED ABOVE BASED UPON BEING AWARDED THE PROJECT ON OR BEFORE December 27, 2012. PENALTIES AND CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES WILL BE IMPOSED AS DETAILED IN SECTION 011400 – WORK RESTRICTIONS.
B.
Preliminary Procedures: Before requesting inspection for certification of Substantial Completion, complete the following. List items below that are incomplete in request. 1.
In the Application for Payment that coincides with, or first follows, the date Substantial Completion is claimed, show 100 percent completion for the portion of the Work claimed as substantially complete. a.
2. 3. 4.
5.
6. 7. 8. 9. 10.
11. C.
Include supporting documentation for completion as indicated in these Contract Documents and a statement showing an accounting of changes to the Contract Sum. b. If 100 percent completion cannot be shown, include a list of incomplete items (a project punch list), the value of incomplete construction, reasons the Work is not complete, and a timeline during which the work must be completed. Advise Owner of pending insurance changeover requirements. Submit specific warranties, workmanship bonds, maintenance agreements, final certifications, and similar documents. Obtain and submit releases enabling the Owner unrestricted use of the Work and access to services and utilities. Include occupancy permits, operating certificates, and similar releases. Prepare and submit Project Record Documents, operation and maintenance manuals, Final Completion construction photographs, damage or settlement surveys, property surveys, and similar final record information. Deliver tools, spare parts, extra materials, and similar items to location designated by Owner. Label with manufacturer's name and model number where applicable. Make final changeover of permanent locks and deliver keys to Owner. Advise Owner's personnel of changeover in security provisions. Complete startup testing of systems and instruction of the Owner’s operation and maintenance personnel. Disconnect and remove temporary facilities from Project site, along with mockups, construction tools, and similar elements. When mechanical, electrical or other equipment is installed, it shall be the responsibility of the contractor to maintain, warrant and operate it for such period of time as required by the contract documents or as necessary for the proper inspecting and testing of the equipment for adequately instructing the University's operating personnel. All costs associated with the maintenance, warranty, operations, inspection and testing of equipment in addition to instructing University personnel shall be borne by the contractor. All tests shall be conducted in the presence of and upon timely notice to the contracting officer, Project Manager and Architect/Engineer prior to acceptance of the equipment. Owner’s warranties will start at Final Acceptance of the Project.
Pre-final Inspection: 1.
When the Contractor has completed all work and is satisfied the Project is in compliance with the Contract Documents, it will notify the Owner and Architect, in writing, that the
CONTRACT CLOSEOUT
017700 - 2
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
2.
3.
D.
Substantial Completion: 1.
2.
3. 4.
5.
1.4
CONTRACT CLOSEOUT SECTION 017700 08/06 Project is complete and ready for inspection. The Owner and Architect will arrange for and conduct an inspection of the Project by the Owner, Architect, Engineers and the Contractor. The Owner will be provided with a reasonable time to arrange for and conduct an inspection. The Owner and Architect will document any deficiencies on a written punch list and will arrange a meeting with the Contractor to review the punch list, explain deficient items and designate a time frame in which the punch list must be completed. The Contractor will correct all the deficiencies within the designated time frame and notify the Owner in writing, when the Project is ready for re-inspection. The Owner will arrange and conduct the re-inspection of the Project to review the corrected items. The formal list of deficiencies found shall not be considered a final list of all deficient items. Any deficiencies found during instructions to the Owner, inspection for Substantial Completion, beneficial occupancy, or inspection for final acceptance, the Contractor will correct all deficient items per the contract documents prior to final acceptance.
Upon completion of deficient items and instruction to the Owner, the Contractor will arrange for an inspection of the Project with the Owner and the Architect. This inspection may result in a list of additional items to complete after occupancy, but before final payment and/or may require additional correction prior to occupancy by the Owner. Upon formal notice from the Owner, the Contractor shall then arrange for the submission of all outstanding record documents, including: maintenance manuals, guarantees, warranties, maintenance contracts, and any additional instructions necessary for the operation of the project. The Contractor shall acquaint the Owner with acceptance tests, guarantees, warranties, and maintenance manuals. The Contractor shall also obtain a ‘Certificate of Occupancy’ or similar releases required to permit the Owner’s occupancy of the Project. Should the instruction period find deficiencies, the Owner will notify the Contractor in writing of deficient items. If the inspection confirms that the Project is ‘substantially complete’ and is ‘ready for occupancy’, the Owner through the Architect/Engineer will issue a “Certificate of Substantial Completion’. The Certificate will confirm that the Project can be occupied for its intended use. Attached to the Certificate will be any final punch list to be completed. Prior to issuance of the Certificate, the Contractor shall submit a schedule for completion of remaining deficiencies, approved or amended by the Owner. Inspection Procedures: On receipt of a request for inspection, the Architect will either proceed with inspection or advise the Contractor of unfilled requirements. The Architect will prepare the Certificate of Substantial Completion following inspection or advise the Contractor of construction that must be completed or corrected before the certificate will be issued. a. The Architect will repeat inspection when requested and assured that the Work is substantially complete. b. Results of the completed inspection will form the basis of requirements for final acceptance.
BENEFICIAL OCCUPANCY A.
Upon issuance of the ‘Certificate of Substantial Completion’, the Owner may then occupy the Project (or the designated area of the Project).
CONTRACT CLOSEOUT
017700 - 3
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
1.5
CONTRACT CLOSEOUT SECTION 017700 08/06
FINAL ACCEPTANCE A.
Final Inspection: Upon completion of any remaining deficiencies the Contractor shall notify the Owner in writing, that the Project is complete and ready for final inspection. The Contractor shall arrange for and conduct the final inspection of the Project with the Owner.
B.
Final Acceptance: If the final inspection indicates satisfactory completion of the Work, the Owner through the Architect/Engineer will issue a Change Order adjusting to the final quantities. Following acceptance of the final Change Order, receipt of required affidavits, final release of liens, consent of surety for final payment along with all other documentation required by the contractor documents, the Owner through the Architect will authorize a final Certificate for Payment.
C.
1.
Mandatory or Final Completion: Final Completion shall be accomplished and the full project, and all designated portions thereof, completed and ready for use without any further work required within the time frame identified for each phase of work from the date of issuance and as listed on the Certificate of Substantial Completion by the Architect.
2.
The guarantee period for all materials, equipment and workmanship shall start on the date of ‘Final Acceptance’ unless otherwise noted on the Certificate.
Preliminary Procedures: Before requesting final inspection for certification of final acceptance and final payment, complete the following. List exceptions in the request. 1.
2. 3.
4.
5. 6. 7. D.
Submit the final payment request with releases and supporting documentation not previously submitted and accepted. Include insurance certificates for products and completed operations where required. Submit an updated final statement, accounting for final additional changes to the Contract Sum. Submit a certified copy of the Architect's final inspection list of items to be completed or corrected, endorsed and dated by the Architect. The certified copy of the list shall state that each item has been completed or otherwise resolved for acceptance and shall be endorsed and dated by the Architect. Submit final meter readings for utilities, a measured record of stored fuel, and similar data as of the date of Substantial Completion or when the Owner took possession of and assumed responsibility for corresponding elements of the Work. Submit consent of surety to final payment. Submit a final liquidated damages settlement statement. Submit evidence of final, continuing insurance coverage complying with insurance requirements.
Re-inspection Procedure: The Architect will re-inspect the Work upon receipt of notice that the Work, including inspection list items from earlier inspections, has been completed, except for items whose completion is delayed under circumstances acceptable to the Owner. 1.
2.
Upon completion of re-inspection, the Architect will prepare a certificate of final acceptance. If the Work is incomplete, the Architect will advise the Contractor of Work that is incomplete or of obligations that have not been fulfilled but are required for final acceptance. If necessary, re-inspection will be repeated.
CONTRACT CLOSEOUT
017700 - 4
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
3.
1.6
CONTRACT CLOSEOUT SECTION 017700 08/06 Should the Project require inspections beyond the inspections noted above, i.e. a pre-final and a final inspection only the Owner will reduce from the Contractor’s final payment those monies necessary to provide for the cost of the additional inspections. The reduction shall not be considered as a part of any “Liquidated Damages’ for failure to complete within the specified Contract Time. The reduction shall not be considered as a penalty to the Contractor; but shall be for the actual cost of monies required for the reimbursement of fees for the Architect, Engineers, Owner and any other specialists necessary for obtaining final approval of the Work.
EXCESSIVE DEFICIENCIES A.
1.7
During any inspection for Project completion, if it is determined by the Owner, that the Contractor has not sufficiently completed the Work in compliance with the Contract Documents, the Owner may declare that the Project is not sufficiently complete to continue the inspection of the Work. Within three (3) working days of this declaration, the Owner will issue in writing, a list of excessive deficiencies found. Upon receipt of the Owners notice of excessive deficiencies the Contractor will have ten (10) working days to remove such deficiencies. If such deficiencies have not been corrected in the time frame herein specified the Owner can at its’ option complete the Work. Any costs incurred by the Owner as a result of its’ assuming the responsibilities of the Contractor in this regard will be deducted from any monies remaining to be paid to the Contractor. Should the costs associated with the Owner having to assume responsibility for the work to correct excessive deficiencies exceed the amount of funds remaining to be paid the Contractor shall be liable to the Owner for the difference. RECORD DOCUMENT SUBMITTALS
A.
General: Do not use record documents for construction purposes. Protect record documents from deterioration and loss in a secure, fire-resistant location. Provide access to record documents for the Architect's reference during normal working hours.
B.
Record Drawings: Maintain a clean, undamaged set of blue or black line white-prints of Contract Drawings and Shop Drawings. Mark the set to show the actual installation where the installation varies from the Work as originally shown. Mark which drawing is most capable of showing conditions fully and accurately. Where Shop Drawings are used, record a crossreference at the corresponding location on the Contract Drawings. Give particular attention to concealed elements that would be difficult to measure and record at a later date. 1. 2. 3. 4.
C.
Mark record sets with red erasable pencil. Use other colors to distinguish between variations in separate categories of the Work. Mark new information that is important to the Owner but was not shown on Contract Drawings or Shop Drawings. Note related change-order numbers where applicable. Organize record drawing sheets into manageable sets. Bind sets with durable-paper cover sheets; print suitable titles, dates, and other identification on the cover of each set.
Record Specifications: Maintain one complete copy of the Project Manual, including addenda. Include with the Project Manual one copy of other written construction documents, such as Change Orders and modifications issued in printed form during construction.
CONTRACT CLOSEOUT
017700 - 5
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
1. 2.
3. 4. D.
CONTRACT CLOSEOUT SECTION 017700 08/06 Mark these documents to show substantial variations in actual Work performed in comparison with the text of the Specifications and modifications. Give particular attention to substitutions and selection of options and information on concealed construction that cannot otherwise be readily discerned later by direct observation. Note related record drawing information and Product Data. Upon completion of the Work, submit record Specifications to the Architect for the Owner's records.
Record Product Data: Maintain one copy of each Product Data submittal. Note related Change Orders and markup of record drawings and Specifications. 1.
2. 3.
Mark these documents to show significant variations in actual Work performed in comparison with information submitted. Include variations in products delivered to the site and from the manufacturer's installation instructions and recommendations. Give particular attention to concealed products and portions of the Work that cannot otherwise be readily discerned later by direct observation. Upon completion of markup, submit complete set of record Product Data to the Architect for the Owner's records.
E.
Record Sample Submitted: Immediately prior to Substantial Completion, the Contractor shall meet with the Architect and the Owner's personnel at the Project Site to determine which Samples are to be transmitted to the Owner for record purposes. Comply with the Owner's instructions regarding delivery to the Owner's Sample storage area.
F.
Miscellaneous Record Submittals: Refer to other Specification Sections for requirements of miscellaneous record keeping and submittals in connection with actual performance of the Work. Immediately prior to the date or dates of Substantial Completion, complete miscellaneous records and place in good order. Identify miscellaneous records properly and bind or file, ready for continued use and reference. Submit to the Architect for the Owner's records.
G.
Maintenance Manuals: Organize operation and maintenance data into suitable sets of manageable size. Bind properly indexed data in individual, heavy-duty, 2-inch (51-mm), 3ring, vinyl-covered binders, with pocket folders for folded sheet information. Mark appropriate identification on front and spine of each binder. Include the following types of information: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8.
H.
Emergency instructions. Spare parts list. Copies of warranties. Wiring diagrams. Recommended "turn-around" cycles. Inspection procedures. Shop Drawings and Product Data. Fixture lamping schedule.
Roughing Drawings and Operating Manuals: Plumbing, HVAC, electrical and other machinery and mechanical equipment items requiring utility service connections shall have their respective shop drawings accompanied by manufacturer's certified roughing drawings indicating accurate locations and sizes of all service utility connections.
CONTRACT CLOSEOUT
017700 - 6
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
I.
CONTRACT CLOSEOUT SECTION 017700 08/06 Sleeve and Opening Drawings: Prior to installing service utilities or other piping, etc. through structural elements of the building, the contractor shall prepare and submit accurate dimensioned drawings to the Construction Manager for approval of the Architect and/or Structural Engineer for approval indicating the positions and sizes of all sleeves and openings required to accommodate his/her work and installation of his/her piping, equipment, etc. and all with reference to the established dimensional grid of the building. Such drawings must be submitted in sufficient time to allow proper coordination with reinforcing steel shop drawings and proper placing in the field.
J.
Control Valve and Circuit Location Charts and Diagrams: The contractor shall prepare a complete set of inked or typewritten control valve and circuit location diagrams, charts, diagrams and lists under frame glass in appropriate designed equipment rooms as directed. The contractor shall also furnish one-line diagrams as well as such color-coding of piping and wiring and identifying charges as specified or required. This information is to be framed under glass and installed where directed. The Contractor shall also provide the University a second complete set of the control valve and circuit location diagrams, charts, diagrams and lists not under glass.
K.
Warranties: 1.
2. 3.
4. 5. 6.
7.
1.8
For equipment or component parts of equipment put into service during construction with Owner’s permission, submit documents within the (10) days after completion of the applicable item of work. Leave the date of beginning of time of warranty until the Date of Final Acceptance of the building and prior to receipt of final payment. Make other submittals within ten (10) days after Date of Substantial Completion, prior to final Application for Payment. For items of Work for which acceptance is delayed beyond the Date of Substantial Completion, submit within (10) days after written acceptance, listing the date of acceptance as the beginning of the warranty period. Final payment will not be approved until the Owner has received all warranties. Warranty periods for all items installed as part of the Work under this Contract will start at ‘Final Acceptance’ of the entire scope of Work on the Project. Co-execute submittals when required. Warranty Manual: Bind all warranties and bonds in a commercial type 81/2” X 11” three D side ring binder with durable plastic covers. a. Cover: Identify each binder with typed or printed title WARRANTIES AND BONDS, with title of Project; name, address and telephone number of General Contractor and equipment suppliers; and name of responsible company principal. b. Table of Contents: Neatly typed, in the sequence of the Table of Contents of the Project Manual, with each item identified with the number and title of the specification section in which specified, and the name of the product or work item. c. Transmit two (2) copies of the “Warranties Manual” to the University prior to submission of Final Application for Payment. A certificate of Asbestos shall certify that no asbestos or asbestos-containing products are or have been installed as part of this project.
CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES A.
Operation and Maintenance Instructions: Arrange for each Installer of equipment that requires regular maintenance to meet with the Owner's personnel to provide instruction in proper
CONTRACT CLOSEOUT
017700 - 7
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
CONTRACT CLOSEOUT SECTION 017700 08/06 operation and maintenance. Provide instruction by manufacturer's representatives if installers are not experienced in operation and maintenance procedures. Include a detailed review of the following items: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12.
B.
Maintenance manuals. Record documents. Spare parts and materials. Tools. Lubricants. Fuels. Identification systems. Control sequences. Hazards. Cleaning. Warranties and bonds. Maintenance agreements and similar continuing commitments.
As part of instruction for operating equipment, demonstrate the following procedures: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7.
Startup. Shutdown. Emergency operations. Noise and vibration adjustments. Safety procedures. Economy and efficiency adjustments. Effective energy utilization.
C.
Allow a minimum of three (3) hours training for all of the Owners personnel who will be involved with the maintenance or operation for each piece of equipment or system that requires any type of maintenance or operation.
D.
For equipment, or component parts of equipment put into service during construction and operated by the Owner, submit completed documents within ten (10) days after written acceptance and prior to receipt of final payment.
E.
The contractor shall submit the as-built documents to the Owner’s Project Manager for review by the Architect/Engineer whether altered or not with a certification as to the accuracy of the information thereon at the time of contract completion and before final payment will be made to the contractor. After acceptance by the Architect/Engineer, the contractor will furnish two (2) sets of all shop and/or erection drawings used for as-built documentation. 1.
All as-built drawings as submitted by the contractor shall be labeled "as-built" and dated above the title block. This information shall be checked, edited and certified by the Architect/Engineer who shall then transpose such information from the contractor's asbuilt drawings to the original tracings and certify that such tracing reflect "as-built" status and deliver said tracings to the University. Where shop drawings have been used by the contractor for as-built documentation the tracing provided shall include cross-reference information, which shall be included in the set of as-built drawings furnished to the University. The Contractor shall be responsible for and shall pay for the cost of erasable transparencies for its as-built drawings.
CONTRACT CLOSEOUT
017700 - 8
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
CONTRACT CLOSEOUT SECTION 017700 08/06
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1
MATERIALS A.
Cleaning Agents: Use cleaning materials and agents recommended by manufacturer or fabricator of the surface to be cleaned. Do not use cleaning agents that are potentially hazardous to health or property or that might damage finished surfaces.
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1
FINAL CLEANING A.
General: The General Conditions require general cleaning during construction. Regular site cleaning is included in Division 1 Section "Construction Facilities and Temporary Controls."
B.
Cleaning: Employ experienced workers or professional cleaners for final cleaning. Clean each surface or unit to the condition expected in a normal, commercial building cleaning and maintenance program. Comply with manufacturer's instructions. 1.
Complete the following cleaning operations before requesting inspection for certification of Substantial Completion. a. b.
c.
d.
e.
Remove labels that are not permanent labels. Clean transparent materials, including mirrors and glass in doors and windows. Remove glazing compounds and other substances that are vision-detracting materials. Replace chipped or broken glass and other damaged transparent materials. 1) removal of putty stains from glass and mirrors; wash and polish inside and outside; Clean exposed exterior and interior hard-surfaced finishes to a dust-free condition, free of stains, films, and similar foreign substances. Restore reflective surfaces to their original condition. Leave concrete floors broom clean and dust free. Vacuum carpeted surfaces. 1) removal of spots, paint and soil from resilient, glaze and unglazed masonry and ceramic flooring and wall work; Vacuum as required and advisable and wipe surfaces of mechanical and electrical equipment. Remove excess lubrication and other substances. Clean plumbing fixtures to a sanitary condition. Clean light fixtures and lamps to a mark free condition. Clean the site, including landscape development areas, of rubbish, litter, and other foreign substances. Sweep paved areas broom clean; remove stains, spills, mud, stones and other foreign deposits. Rake grounds that are neither paved nor planted to a smooth, even-textured surface. 1) restoration of all landscaping, roadway and walkways to pre-existing condition; damage to trees and plantings shall be repaired in the next planting season and such shall be guaranteed for one (1) year from date of repair and/or replanting;
CONTRACT CLOSEOUT
017700 - 9
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
f.
g. h.
i.
CONTRACT CLOSEOUT SECTION 017700 08/06 removal of marks, undesirable stains, fingerprints, other soil, dust or dirt from painted, decorated or stained woodwork, plaster or plasterboard, metal acoustic tile and equipment surfaces; removal of temporary floor protections; clean, wash or otherwise treat and/or polish all finished floors as directed; clean exterior and interior metal surfaces, including doors and window frames and hardware, of oil stains, dust, dirt, paint and the like; polish where applicable and leave without fingerprints or blemishes; removal of all pollutants of any kind or nature deposited or remaining upon the site or upon the University's property as a result of the construction work on this project;
C.
Pest Control: Engage an experienced, licensed exterminator to make a final inspection and rid the Project of rodents, insects, and other pests.
D.
Removal of Protection: Remove temporary protection and facilities installed for protection of the Work during construction.
E.
Compliance: Comply with regulations of authorities having jurisdiction and safety standards for cleaning. Do not burn waste materials. Do not bury debris or excess materials on the Owner's property. Do not discharge volatile, harmful, or dangerous materials into drainage systems. Remove waste materials from the site and dispose of lawfully. 1.
Where extra materials of value remain after completion of associated Work, they become the Owner's property. Dispose of these materials as directed by the Owner. END OF SECTION 017700
CONTRACT CLOSEOUT
017700 - 10
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA SECTION 017820 08/06
SECTION 017820 - OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. In the event of any conflicts between the requirements of these Sections, the more stringent requirement shall apply. SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for preparing operation and maintenance manuals, including the following: 1. 2. 3. 4.
B.
Related Sections include the following: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.
1.3
Operation and maintenance documentation directory. Emergency manuals. Operation manuals for systems, subsystems, and equipment. Maintenance manuals for the care and maintenance of products, materials, and finishes systems and equipment.
Division 1 Section "Summary” for coordinating operation and maintenance manuals covering the Work of multiple contracts. Division 1 Section "Submittal Procedures" for submitting copies of submittals for operation and maintenance manuals. Division 1 Section "Closeout Procedures" for submitting operation and maintenance manuals. Division 1 Section "Project Record Documents" for preparing Record Drawings for operation and maintenance manuals. Divisions 2 through 16 Sections for specific operation and maintenance manual requirements for the Work in those Sections.
DEFINITIONS A.
System: An organized collection of parts, equipment, or subsystems united by regular interaction.
B.
Subsystem: A portion of a system with characteristics similar to a system.
1.4
SUBMITTALS A.
Initial Submittal: Submit 2 (two) draft copies of each manual at least 15 days before requesting inspection for Substantial Completion. Include a complete operation and maintenance
OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA
017820 - 1
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA SECTION 017820 08/06 directory. Owner will return one copy of draft and mark whether general scope and content of manual are acceptable.
B.
Final Submittal: Submit two copies of each manual in final form at least 15 days before final inspection. Architect will return copy with comments within 15days after final inspection. 1. 2.
1.5
Submit four (4) sets prior to final inspection, bound in 81/2” X 11” binders with durable plastic covers, acceptable to the Owner. Submit final volumes revised, to the authorized representative of the Owner as required in these Contract Documents.
COORDINATION A.
Where operation and maintenance documentation includes information on installations by more than one factory-authorized service representative, assemble and coordinate information furnished by representatives and prepare manuals.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1
OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DOCUMENTATION DIRECTORY A.
Organization: Include a section in the directory for each of the following: 1. 2. 3. 4.
List of documents. List of systems. List of equipment. Table of contents.
B.
List of Systems and Subsystems: List systems alphabetically. Include references to operation and maintenance manuals that contain information about each system.
C.
List of Equipment: List equipment for each system, organized alphabetically by system. For pieces of equipment not part of system, list alphabetically in separate list.
D.
Tables of Contents: Include a table of contents for each emergency, operation, and maintenance manual.
E.
Identification: In the documentation directory and in each operation and maintenance manual, identify each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment with same designation used in the Contract Documents. If no designation exists, assign a designation according to ASHRAE Guideline 4, "Preparation of Operating and Maintenance Documentation for Building Systems."
OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA
017820 - 2
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
2.2
OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA SECTION 017820 08/06
MANUALS, GENERAL A.
Organization: Unless otherwise indicated, organize each manual into a separate section for each system and subsystem, and a separate section for each piece of equipment not part of a system. Each manual shall contain the following materials, in the order listed: 1. 2. 3.
B.
Title Page: Enclose title page in transparent plastic sleeve. Include the following information: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7.
C.
Subject matter included in manual. Name and address of Project. Name and address of Owner. Date of submittal. Name, address, and telephone number of Contractor. Name and address of Architect. Cross-reference to related systems in other operation and maintenance manuals.
Table of Contents: List each product included in manual, identified by product name, indexed to the content of the volume, and cross-referenced to Specification Section number in Project Manual. 1.
D.
Title page. Table of contents. Manual contents.
If operation or maintenance documentation requires more than one volume to accommodate data, include comprehensive table of contents for all volumes in each volume of the set.
Manual Contents: Organize into sets of manageable size. Arrange contents alphabetically by system, subsystem, and equipment. If possible, assemble instructions for subsystems, equipment, and components of one system into a single binder. 1.
Binders: Heavy-duty, 3-ring, vinyl-covered, loose-leaf binders, in thickness necessary to accommodate contents, sized to hold 8-1/2-by-11-inch paper; with clear plastic sleeve on spine to hold label describing contents and with pockets inside covers to hold folded oversize sheets. a.
2.
If two or more binders are necessary to accommodate data of a system, organize data in each binder into groupings by subsystem and related components. Crossreference other binders if necessary to provide essential information for proper operation or maintenance of equipment or system.
Identify each binder on front and spine, with printed title "OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL," Project title or name, and subject matter of contents. Indicate volume number for multiple-volume sets. These manuals shall include a complete description of all systems and equipment, diagrams indicating connectors, oiling requirements, types of lubricants to be used and method of operating equipment. Included within the manuals shall be a list of names, addresses and telephone numbers of subcontractors involved in the installation and firms capable of performing services for each mechanical item.
OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA
017820 - 3
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
3.
4. 5.
6. 7. 8.
OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA SECTION 017820 08/06 Dividers: Heavy-paper dividers with plastic-covered tabs for each section. Mark each tab to indicate contents. Include typed list of products and major components of equipment included in the section on each divider, cross-referenced to Specification Section number and title of Project Manual. Internally subdivide the binders contents with permanent page dividers, logically organized as described below and with tab titling clearly printed under reinforced laminated plastic tabs. PART 1: Directory, listing names, addresses, contact persons and telephone numbers of Architects, Engineers, Contractors, Subcontractors and suppliers. PART 2: Maintenance instructions subdivided by MasterSpec Format Sections as listed within these Contract Documents. For each Section identify names, addresses, contact persons and telephone numbers of Subcontractors and suppliers. Identify the following (in addition to the items listed in “G” above): a. Significant design criteria b. List of equipment. c. Parts list for each component. d. Maintenance instructions for equipment and systems. e. Maintenance instructions for special finishes, including recommended cleaning methods and materials and special precautions identifying detrimental agents. Protective Plastic Sleeves: Transparent plastic sleeves designed to enclose diagnostic software diskettes for computerized electronic equipment. Supplementary Text: Prepared on 8-1/2-by-11-inch white bond paper. Drawings: Attach reinforced, punched binder tabs on drawings and bind with text. a. b.
2.3
If oversize drawings are necessary, fold drawings to same size as text pages and use as foldouts. If drawings are too large to be used as foldouts, fold and place drawings in labeled envelopes and bind envelopes in rear of manual. At appropriate locations in manual, insert typewritten pages indicating drawing titles, descriptions of contents, and drawing locations.
EMERGENCY MANUALS A.
Content: Organize manual into a separate section for each of the following: 1. 2. 3.
B.
Type of emergency. Emergency instructions. Emergency procedures.
Type of Emergency: Where applicable for each type of emergency indicated below, include instructions and procedures for each system, subsystem, piece of equipment, and component: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8.
Fire. Flood. Gas leak. Water leak. Power failure. Water outage. System, subsystem, or equipment failure. Chemical release or spill.
OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA
017820 - 4
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
C.
D.
OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA SECTION 017820 08/06 Emergency Instructions: Describe and explain warnings, trouble indications, error messages, and similar codes and signals. Include responsibilities of Owner's operating personnel for notification of Installer, supplier, and manufacturer to maintain warranties. Emergency Procedures: Include the following, as applicable: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.
2.4
Instructions on stopping. Shutdown instructions for each type of emergency. Operating instructions for conditions outside normal operating limits. Required sequences for electric or electronic systems. Special operating instructions and procedures.
OPERATION MANUALS A.
Content: In addition to requirements in this Section, include operation data required in individual Specification Sections and the following information: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10.
B.
Descriptions: Include the following: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9.
C.
System, subsystem, and equipment descriptions. Performance and design criteria if Contractor is delegated design responsibility. Operating standards. Operating procedures. Operating logs. Wiring diagrams. Control diagrams. Piped system diagrams. Precautions against improper use. License requirements including inspection and renewal dates.
Product name and model number. Manufacturer's name. Equipment identification with serial number of each component. Equipment function. Operating characteristics. Limiting conditions. Performance curves. Engineering data and tests. Complete nomenclature and number of replacement parts.
Operating Procedures: Include the following, as applicable: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8.
Startup procedures. Equipment or system break-in procedures. Routine and normal operating instructions. Regulation and control procedures. Instructions on stopping. Normal shutdown instructions. Seasonal and weekend operating instructions. Required sequences for electric or electronic systems.
OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA
017820 - 5
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
9.
OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA SECTION 017820 08/06 Special operating instructions and procedures.
D.
Systems and Equipment Controls: Describe the sequence of operation, and diagram controls as installed.
E.
Piped Systems: Diagram piping as installed, and identify color-coding where required for identification.
2.5
PRODUCT MAINTENANCE MANUAL A.
Content: Organize manual into a separate section for each product, material, and finish. Include source information, product information, maintenance procedures, repair materials and sources, and warranties and bonds, as described below.
B.
Source Information: List each product included in manual identified by product name and arranged to match manual's table of contents. For each product, list name, address, and telephone number of Installer or supplier and maintenance service agent, and cross-reference Specification Section number and title in Project Manual.
C.
Product Information: Include the following, as applicable: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.
D.
Product name and model number. Manufacturer's name. Color, pattern, and texture. Material and chemical composition. Reordering information for specially manufactured products.
Maintenance Procedures: Include manufacturer's written recommendations and the following: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.
Inspection procedures. Types of cleaning agents to be used and methods of cleaning. List of cleaning agents and methods of cleaning detrimental to product. Schedule for routine cleaning and maintenance. Repair instructions.
E.
Repair Materials and Sources: Include lists of materials and local sources of materials and related services.
F.
Warranties and Bonds: Include copies of warranties and bonds and lists of circumstances and conditions that would affect validity of warranties or bonds. 1.
2.6
Include procedures to follow and required notifications for warranty claims.
SYSTEMS AND EQUIPMENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL A.
Content: For each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment not part of a system, include source information, manufacturers' maintenance documentation, maintenance procedures, maintenance and service schedules, spare parts list and source information, maintenance service contracts, and warranty and bond information, as described below.
OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA
017820 - 6
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
B.
C.
OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA SECTION 017820 08/06 Source Information: List each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment included in manual identified by product name and arranged to match manual's table of contents. For each product, list name, address, and telephone number of Installer or supplier and maintenance service agent, and cross-reference Specification Section number and title in Project Manual.
Manufacturers' Maintenance Documentation: Manufacturers' maintenance documentation including the following information for each component part or piece of equipment: 1. 2. 3. 4.
D.
Maintenance Procedures: Include the following information and items that detail essential maintenance procedures: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.
E.
Standard printed maintenance instructions and bulletins. Drawings, diagrams, and instructions required for maintenance, including disassembly and component removal, replacement, and assembly. Identification and nomenclature of parts and components. List of items recommended to be stocked as spare parts.
Test and inspection instructions. Troubleshooting guide. Precautions against improper maintenance. Disassembly; component removal, repair, and replacement; and reassembly instructions. Aligning, adjusting, and checking instructions. Demonstration and training videotape, if available.
Maintenance and Service Schedules: Include service and lubrication requirements, list of required lubricants for equipment, and separate schedules for preventive and routine maintenance and service with standard time allotment. 1. 2.
Scheduled Maintenance and Service: Tabulate actions for daily, weekly, monthly, quarterly, semiannual, and annual frequencies. Maintenance and Service Record: Include manufacturers' forms for recording maintenance.
F.
Spare Parts, Extra Materials and Maintenance Materials 1. Provide products, spare parts, maintenance and extra materials in quantities specified in individual specification sections. If there are no quantities specified then provide a minimum of five percent (5%) of: a. all interior finish materials (attic stock). b. the number of lamps and ballast needed for every light fixture. c. the total number of automatic light sensors d. the total number of each filter type required for each Mechanical Unit requiring filters. 2. Provide 100% of all spare parts necessary to operate and maintain all equipment and building systems within the design parameters and/or as recommended by the manufacturer or supplier. 3. Deliver to Project Manager and obtain receipt prior to final payment. 4. Spare Parts List and Source Information: Include lists of replacement and repair parts, with parts identified and cross-referenced to manufacturers' maintenance documentation and local sources of maintenance materials and related services.
G.
Special Tools
OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA
017820 - 7
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
1.
OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA SECTION 017820 08/06 Provide any “ special tools” (one of each type) if required as part of the operation and maintenance of any of the systems herein specified. “Special tools” are devices that are considered unique to a specified system and necessary for maintenance and operation of that system, and not normally part of the maintenance department inventory.
H.
Maintenance Service Contracts: Include copies of maintenance agreements with name and telephone number of service agent.
I.
Warranties and Bonds: Include copies of warranties and bonds and lists of circumstances and conditions that would affect validity of warranties or bonds. 1.
Include procedures to follow and required notifications for warranty claims.
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1
MANUAL PREPARATION A.
Operation and Maintenance Documentation Directory: Prepare a separate manual that provides an organized reference to emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.
B.
Emergency Manual: Assemble a complete set of emergency information indicating procedures for use by emergency personnel and by Owner's operating personnel for types of emergencies indicated.
C.
Product Maintenance Manual: Assemble a complete set of maintenance data indicating care and maintenance of each product, material, and finish incorporated into the Work.
D.
Operation and Maintenance Manuals: Assemble a complete set of operation and maintenance data indicating operation and maintenance of each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment not part of a system. 1. 2.
E.
Manufacturers' Data: Where manuals contain manufacturers' standard printed data, include only sheets pertinent to product or component installed. Mark each sheet to identify each product or component incorporated into the Work. If data include more than one item in a tabular format, identify each item using appropriate references from the Contract Documents. Identify data applicable to the Work and delete references to information not applicable. 1.
F.
Engage a factory-authorized service representative to assemble and prepare information for each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment not part of a system. Prepare a separate manual for each system and subsystem, in the form of an instructional manual for use by Owner's operating personnel.
Prepare supplementary text if manufacturers' standard printed data are not available and where the information is necessary for proper operation and maintenance of equipment or systems.
Drawings: Prepare drawings supplementing manufacturers' printed data to illustrate the relationship of component parts of equipment and systems and to illustrate control sequence and
OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA
017820 - 8
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA SECTION 017820 08/06 flow diagrams. Coordinate these drawings with information contained in Record Drawings to ensure correct illustration of completed installation. 1.
2. G.
Do not use original Project Record Documents as part of operation and maintenance manuals. Comply with requirements of newly prepared Record Drawings in Division 1 Section "Project Record Documents."
Comply with Division 1 Section "Closeout Procedures" for schedule for submitting operation and maintenance documentation.
END OF SECTION 01782
OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA
017820 - 9
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING SECTION 018200 08/06
SECTION 018200 - DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. In the event of any conflicts between the requirements of these Sections, the more stringent requirement shall apply. SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for instructing Owner's personnel, including the following: 1. 2. 3.
B.
Demonstration of operation of systems, subsystems, and equipment. Training in operation and maintenance of systems, subsystems, and equipment. Demonstration and training videotapes.
Related Sections include the following: 1. 2. 3.
Division 1 Section "Allowances" for administrative and procedural requirements for demonstration and training allowances. Division 1 Section "Project Management and Coordination" for requirements for preinstruction conferences. Divisions 2 through 16 Sections for specific requirements for demonstration and training for products in those Sections.
C.
Allowances: Furnish demonstration and training instruction time under the Demonstration and Training Allowance as specified in Division 1 Section "Allowances."
D.
Unit Price for Instruction Time: Length of instruction time will be measured by actual time spent performing demonstration and training in required location. No payment will be made for time spent assembling educational materials, setting up, or cleaning up.
1.3
SUBMITTALS A.
Instruction Program: Submit two (2) copies of outline of instructional program for demonstration and training, including a schedule of proposed dates, times, length of instruction time, and instructors' names for each training module. Include learning objective and outline for each training module. 1.
B.
At completion of training, submit two (2) complete training manual(s) for Owner's use.
Qualification Data: For instructors.
DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING
018200 - 1
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING SECTION 018200 08/06 For each training module, submit list of participants and length of
C.
Attendance Record: instruction time.
D.
Evaluations: For each participant and for each training module, submit results and documentation of performance-based test.
E.
Demonstration and Training Videotapes: Submit two (2) copies within seven (7) days of end of each training module. 1.
Identification: On each copy, provide an applied label with the following information: a. b. c. d. e. f.
2.
1.4
Name of Project. Name and address of photographer. Name of Architect. Name of Contractor. Date videotape was recorded. Description of vantage point, indicating location, direction (by compass point), and elevation or story of construction.
Transcript: Prepared on 8-1/2-by-11-inch paper, punched and bound in heavy-duty, 3ring, vinyl-covered binders. Mark appropriate identification on front and spine of each binder. Include a cover sheet with same label information as the corresponding videotape. Include name of Project and date of videotape on each page.
QUALITY ASSURANCE A.
Facilitator Qualifications: A firm or individual experienced in training or educating maintenance personnel in a training program similar in content and extent to that indicated for this Project, and whose work has resulted in training or education with a record of successful learning performance.
B.
Instructor Qualifications: A factory-authorized service representative, complying with requirements in Division 1 Section "Quality Requirements," experienced in operation and maintenance procedures and training.
C.
Photographer Qualifications: A professional photographer who is experienced photographing construction projects.
D.
Preinstruction Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Project Management and Coordination." Review methods and procedures related to demonstration and training including, but not limited to, the following: 1. 2. 3. 4.
Inspect and discuss locations and other facilities required for instruction. Review and finalize instruction schedule and verify availability of educational materials, instructors' personnel, audiovisual equipment, and facilities needed to avoid delays. Review required content of instruction. For instruction that must occur outside, review weather and forecasted weather conditions and procedures to follow if conditions are unfavorable.
DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING
018200 - 2
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
1.5
DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING SECTION 018200 08/06
COORDINATION A.
Coordinate instruction schedule with Owner's operations. minimize disrupting Owner's operations.
Adjust schedule as required to
B.
Coordinate instructors, including providing notification of dates, times, length of instruction time, and course content.
C.
Coordinate content of training modules with content of approved emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. Do not submit instruction program until operation and maintenance data has been reviewed and approved by Architect.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1
INSTRUCTION PROGRAM A.
Program Structure: Develop an instruction program that includes individual training modules for each system and equipment not part of a system, as required by individual Specification Sections, and as follows: 1. 2.
3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. 15.
B.
Motorized doors, including overhead coiling doors, overhead coiling grilles, and automatic entrance doors. Equipment, including stage equipment, projection screens, loading dock equipment, waste compactors, food-service equipment, residential appliances and laboratory fume hoods, etc. Fire-protection systems, including fire alarm, fire pumps and fire-extinguishing systems. Intrusion detection systems. Conveying systems, including elevators, wheelchair lifts, escalators and cranes. Medical equipment, including medical gas equipment and piping. Laboratory equipment, including laboratory air and vacuum equipment and piping. Heat generation, including boilers, feed water equipment, pumps, steam distribution piping, and water distribution piping. Refrigeration systems, including chillers, cooling towers, condensers, pumps and distribution piping. HVAC systems, including air-handling equipment, air distribution systems and terminal equipment and devices. HVAC instrumentation and controls. Electrical service and distribution, including transformers, switchboards, panel boards, uninterruptible power supplies and motor controls. Packaged engine generators, including transfer switches. Lighting equipment and controls. Communication systems, including intercommunication, surveillance, clocks and programming, voice and data and television equipment.
Training Modules: Develop a learning objective and teaching outline for each module. Include a description of specific skills and knowledge that participant is expected to master. For each module, include instruction for the following:
DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING
018200 - 3
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
1.
DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING SECTION 018200 08/06 Basis of System Design, Operational Requirements, and Criteria: Include the following: a. b. c. d. e. f. g. h.
2.
Documentation: Review the following items in detail: a. b. c. d. e. f. g.
3.
Instructions on meaning of warnings, trouble indications, and error messages. Instructions on stopping. Shutdown instructions for each type of emergency. Operating instructions for conditions outside of normal operating limits. Sequences for electric or electronic systems. Special operating instructions and procedures.
Operations: Include the following, as applicable: a. b. c. d. e. f. g. h. i. j. k. l. m.
5.
Emergency manuals. Operations manuals. Maintenance manuals. Project Record Documents. Identification systems. Warranties and bonds. Maintenance service agreements and similar continuing commitments.
Emergencies: Include the following, as applicable: a. b. c. d. e. f.
4.
System, subsystem, and equipment descriptions. Performance and design criteria if Contractor is delegated design responsibility. Operating standards. Regulatory requirements. Equipment function. Operating characteristics. Limiting conditions. Performance curves.
Startup procedures. Equipment or system break-in procedures. Routine and normal operating instructions. Regulation and control procedures. Control sequences. Safety procedures. Instructions on stopping. Normal shutdown instructions. Operating procedures for emergencies. Operating procedures for system, subsystem, or equipment failure. Seasonal and weekend operating instructions. Required sequences for electric or electronic systems. Special operating instructions and procedures.
Adjustments: Include the following: a. b. c.
Alignments. Checking adjustments. Noise and vibration adjustments.
DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING
018200 - 4
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
d. 6.
Diagnostic instructions. Test and inspection procedures.
Maintenance: Include the following: a. b. c. d. e. f. g.
8.
Economy and efficiency adjustments.
Troubleshooting: Include the following: a. b.
7.
DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING SECTION 018200 08/06
Inspection procedures. Types of cleaning agents to be used and methods of cleaning. List of cleaning agents and methods of cleaning detrimental to product. Procedures for routine cleaning Procedures for preventive maintenance. Procedures for routine maintenance. Instruction on use of special tools.
Repairs: Include the following: a. b. c. d. e.
Diagnosis instructions. Repair instructions. Disassembly; component removal, repair, and replacement; and reassembly instructions. Instructions for identifying parts and components. Review of spare parts needed for operation and maintenance.
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1
PREPARATION A.
Assemble educational materials necessary for instruction, including documentation and training module. Assemble training modules into a combined training manual.
B.
Set up instructional equipment at instruction location.
3.2
INSTRUCTION A.
Facilitator: Engage a qualified facilitator to prepare instruction program and training modules, to coordinate instructors, and to coordinate between Contractor and Owner for number of participants, instruction times, and location.
B.
Engage qualified instructors to instruct Owner's personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain systems, subsystems, and equipment not part of a system. 1. 2. 3.
Architect will furnish an instructor to describe basis of system design, operational requirements, criteria, and regulatory requirements. Owner will furnish an instructor to describe Owner's operational philosophy. Owner will furnish Contractor with names and positions of participants.
DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING
018200 - 5
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
C.
DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING SECTION 018200 08/06 Scheduling: Provide instruction at mutually agreed on times. For equipment that requires seasonal operation, provide similar instruction at start of each season. 1.
Schedule training with Owner with at least seven (7) colander days' advance notice.
D.
Evaluation: At conclusion of each training module, assess and document each participant's mastery of module by use of an oral and a demonstration performance-based test.
E.
Cleanup: Collect used and leftover educational materials and give to Owner. Remove instructional equipment. Restore systems and equipment to condition existing before initial training use.
3.3
DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING VIDEOTAPES A.
General: Engage a qualified commercial photographer to record demonstration and training videotapes. Record each training module separately. Include classroom instructions and demonstrations, board diagrams, and other visual aids, but not student practice. 1.
At beginning of each training module, record each chart containing learning objective and lesson outline.
B.
Videotape Format: Provide high-quality VHS color videotape in full-size cassettes.
C.
Recording: Mount camera on tripod before starting recording, unless otherwise necessary to show area of demonstration and training. Display continuous running time.
D.
Narration: Describe scenes on videotape by dubbing audio narration off-site after videotape is recorded. Include description of items being viewed. Describe vantage point, indicating location, direction (by compass point), and elevation or story of construction.
E.
Transcript: Provide a typewritten transcript of the narration. Display images and running time captured from videotape opposite the corresponding narration segment. END OF SECTION 01820
DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING
018200 - 6
HVAC AND ELECTRICAL COMMISIONING SECTION 01820 SECTION 01 820 HVAC AND ELECTRICAL COMMISSIONING
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
1.1
HVAC COMMISSIONING
a.
The Contractor shall include in their base bid all labor and material to fully participate in the Commissioning of the Systems they are installing. It is required that the Contractors Representative(s) to the Commissioning team be trained in the full function and use to the tested equipment in an application as found under this Contract.
b.
If the Contractor does not have skilled personnel available within their own resources, they shall be required to retain, at no additional cost to the Owner, representative(s) from the equipment manufacturer to participate in Commissioning of that particular System.
c.
During the Comn~issioningProcess, the Contractor shall be required to demonstrate, under a controlled test environment, the full functionality of the tested system, both as an individual component, and as an element of the entire system being tested. Commissioning testing is not to be used as a substitute to the contractors nonnal startup and testing of systems.
d.
The following is a guide for the minirnu~nbase days the comlnissioning agent anticipates shall be required to comtnission the listed systems. It must be emphasized the hours shown are rnini~numhours. They are not a representation ofman days. For example, a contractor may require a factory star-up technician and one or Inore of their own personnel to support an individual test. Additional time required for retesting of syste~nsor devices that fail the con~missioningtesting procedures is not included in this estimate of time. This is only an estimatc and needs to be utilized as a tool to determine base commissioning support ]lours. All Mechanical / HVAC Systems - 6 days Domestic Water Systems - 2 days Control Systems - 9 days
HVAC AND ELECTRICAL COMMISSIONING
01820 - 1
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
1.2
HVAC AND ELECTRICAL COMMISIONING SECTION 01820 08/06
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM COMMISSIONING a.
The Contractor shall include in their base bid all labor and material to fully participate in the Commissioning of the Systems they are installing. It is required that the Contractors Representative(s) to the Commissioning team be trained in the full function and use to the tested equipment in an application as found under this Contract.
b.
If the Contractor does not have skilled personnel available within their own resources they . shall be required to retain, at no additional cost to the Owner, representative(s) from the equipment manufacturer to participate in Commissioning of that particular System.
c.
During the Commissioning Process, the Contractor shall be required to demonstrate, under a controlled test environment, the full functionality of the tested system, both as an individual component, and as an element of the entire system being tested. Commissioning testing is not to be used as a substitute to the contractors normal start-up and testing of systems.
d.
The following is a guide for the minimum base days the commissioning agent anticipates shall be required to commission the listed systems. It must be emphasized the hours shown are minimum hours. They are not a representation of man days. For example, a contractor may require a factory start-up technician and one or more of their own personnel to support an individual test. Additional time required for re-testing of systems or devices that fail the commissioning testing procedures is not included in this estimate of time. This is only an estimate and needs to be utilized as a tool to determinebase commissioning support hours. Incoming switch gear - 2 days Fire Alarm Interface w/HVAC Systems - 2 days Lighting systems - 1 day
HVAC AND ELECTRICAL COMMISSIONING
01820 - 2
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
SELECTIVE STRUCTURE DEMOLITION SECTION 024119
SECTION 024119 - SELECTIVE STRUCTURE DEMOLITION PART 1- GENERAL 1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General Conditions and Supplementary Conditions, and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. In the event of any conflicts between the requirements of these Sections, the more stringent requirement shall apply.
SUMMARY A.
This Section includes the following: 1.
B.
Related Sections include the following: 1. 2.
1.3
1.4
Demolition and removal of selected portions of building or structure.
Division 01 Section "Summary" for use of premises and Owner-occupancy requirements. Division 01 Section "Construction Facilities and Temporary Controls" for temporary construction and environmental-protection measures for selective demolition operations.
DEFINITIONS A.
Remove: Detach items from existing construction and legally dispose of them off-site, unless indicated to be removed and salvaged or removed and reinstalled.
B.
Existing to Remain: Existing items of construction that are not to be removed and that are not otherwise indicated to be removed, removed and salvaged, or removed and reinstalled.
SUBMITTALS A.
Schedule of Selective Demolition Activities: Indicate the following: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.
B.
Detailed sequence of selective demolition and removal work, with starting and ending dates for each activity. Ensure Owner's on-site operations are uninterrupted. Interruption of utility services. Indicate how long utility services will be interrupted. Coordination for shutoff, capping, and continuation of utility services. Locations of proposed dust- and noise-control temporary partitions and means of egress. Coordination of Owner's continuing occupancy of portions of existing site and of Owner's partial occupancy of completed Work. Means of protection for items to remain and items in path of waste removal from building.
Predemolition Photographs or Videotapes: Show existing conditions of adjoining construction and site improvements, including finish surfaces, that might be misconstrued
SELECTIVE STRUCTURE DEMOLITION
024119-1
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
SELECTIVE STRUCTURE DEMOLITION SECTION 024119
as damage caused by selective demolition operations. Comply with Division 01 Section "Photographic Documentation." Submit before Work begins. 1.5
1.6
QUALITY ASSURANCE A.
Demolition Firm Qualifications: An experienced firm that has specialized in demolition work similar in material and extent to that indicated for this Project.
B.
Regulatory Requirements: Comply with governing EPA notification regulations before beginning selective demolition. Comply with hauling and disposal regulations of authorities having jurisdiction.
C.
Standards: Comply with ANSI A10.6 and NFPA 241.
D.
Predemolition Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in Division 01 Section "Project Management and Coordination."
PROJECT CONDITIONS A.
Owner will occupy site immediately adjacent to selective demolition area. Conduct selective demolition so Owner's operations will not be disrupted.
B.
Conditions existing at time of inspection for bidding purpose will be maintained by Owner as far as practical. All items not removed by owner shall be disposed of by contractor.
C.
Notify Architect of discrepancies between existing conditions and Drawings before proceeding with selective demolition.
D.
Hazardous Materials: It is expected that hazardous materials will be encountered in the Work. 1.
If materials suspected of containing hazardous materials are encountered, do not disturb; immediately notify Architect and Owner. Owner will remove hazardous materials under a separate contract.
E.
Storage or sale of removed items or materials on-site is not permitted.
F.
Utility Service: Maintain existing utilities indicated to remain in service and protect them against damage during selective demolition operations. 1.
Maintain fire-protection facilities in service during selective demolition operations.
PART 2- PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3-EXECUTION 3.1
EXAMINATION A.
Verify that utilities have been disconnected and capped prior to beginning work on utility systems.
SELECTIVE STRUCTURE DEMOLITION
024119-2
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
B.
Survey existing conditions and correlate with requirements indicated to determine extent of selective demolition required.
C.
When unanticipated mechanical, electrical, or structural elements that conflict with intended function or design are encountered, investigate and measure the nature and extent of conflict. Promptly submit a written report to Architect.
D.
Survey of Existing Conditions: Record existing conditions by use of preconstruction photographs or preconstruction videotapes. 1.
E.
3.2
Before selective demolition or removal of existing building elements that will be reproduced or duplicated in final Work, make permanent record of measurements, materials, and construction details required to make exact reproduction.
Perform surveys as the Work progresses to detect hazards resulting from selective demolition activities.
UTILITY SERVICES AND MECHANICAL/ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS A.
Existing Services/Systems: Maintain services/systems indicated to remain and protect them against damage during selective demolition operations. 1.
2. 3.
4.
3.3
SELECTIVE STRUCTURE DEMOLITION SECTION 024119
Service/System Requirements: Locate, identify, disconnect, and seal or cap off indicated utility services and mechanical/electrical systems serving areas to be selectively demolished. Arrange to shut off indicated utilities with Owner. If services/systems are required to be removed, relocated, or abandoned, before proceeding with selective demolition provide temporary services/systems that bypass area of selective demolition and that maintain continuity of services/systems to other parts of building. Cut off pipe or conduit in walls or partitions to be removed. Cap, valve, or plug and seal remaining portion of pipe or conduit after bypassing.
PREPARATION A.
Site Access and Temporary Controls: Conduct selective demolition and debris-removal operations to ensure minimum interference with roads, streets, walks, walkways, and other adjacent occupied and used facilities. 1.
B.
Comply with requirements for access and protection specified in Division 01 Section "Temporary Facilities and Controls."
Temporary Facilities: Provide temporary barricades and other protection required to prevent injury to people and damage to adjacent buildings and facilities to remain. 1. 2. 3.
Provide protection to ensure safe passage of people around selective demolition area and to and from occupied portions of building. Protect walls, ceilings, floors, and other existing finish work that are to remain or that are exposed during selective demolition operations. Remove furniture, furnishings, and equipment that have not been removed. Relocate item indicated on documents.
SELECTIVE STRUCTURE DEMOLITION
024119-3
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
4.
C.
Strengthen or add new supports when required during progress of selective demolition.
SELECTIVE DEMOLITION, GENERAL A.
General: Demolish and remove existing construction only to the extent required by new construction and as indicated. Use methods required to complete the Work within limitations of governing regulations and as follows: 1.
2. 3.
4. 5. 6. 7. 8. B.
3.5
Comply with requirements for temporary enclosures, dust control, heating, and cooling specified in Division 01 Section "Temporary Facilities and Controls."
Temporary Shoring: Provide and maintain shoring, bracing, and structural supports as required to preserve stability and prevent movement, settlement, or collapse of construction and finishes to remain, and to prevent unexpected or uncontrolled movement or collapse of construction being demolished. 1.
3.4
SELECTIVE STRUCTURE DEMOLITION SECTION 024119
Neatly cut openings and holes plumb, square, and true to dimensions required. Use cutting methods least likely to damage construction to remain or adjoining construction. Use hand tools or small power tools designed for sawing or grinding, not hammering and chopping, to minimize disturbance of adjacent surfaces. Temporarily cover openings to remain. Cut or drill from the exposed or finished side into concealed surfaces to avoid marring existing finished surfaces. Do not use cutting torches until work area is cleared of flammable materials. At concealed spaces, such as duct and pipe interiors, verify condition and contents of hidden space before starting flame-cutting operations. Maintain fire watch and portable fire-suppression devices during flame-cutting operations. Maintain adequate ventilation when using cutting torches. Remove decayed, vermin-infested, or otherwise dangerous or unsuitable materials and promptly dispose of off-site. Remove structural framing members and lower to ground by method suitable to avoid free fall and to prevent ground impact or dust generation. Locate selective demolition equipment and remove debris and materials so as not to impose excessive loads on supporting walls, floors, or framing. Dispose of demolished items and materials promptly.
Existing Items to Remain: Protect construction indicated to remain against damage and soiling during selective demolition. When permitted by Architect, items may be removed to a suitable, protected storage location during selective demolition and cleaned and reinstalled in their original locations after selective demolition operations are complete.
SELECTIVE DEMOLITION PROCEDURES FOR SPECIFIC MATERIALS
A.
Concrete: Demolish in sections. Cut concrete full depth at junctures with construction to remain and at regular intervals, using power-driven saw, then remove concrete between saw cuts.
SELECTIVE STRUCTURE DEMOLITION
024119-4
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
B.
3.6
Masonry: Demolish in small sections. Cut masonry at junctures with construction to remain, using power-driven saw, then remove masonry between saw cuts.
DISPOSAL OF DEMOLISHED MATERIALS A.
General: Except for items or materials indicated to be reused, salvaged, reinstalled, or otherwise indicated to remain Owner's property, remove demolished materials from Project site and legally dispose of them in an EPA-approved landfill. 1. 2. 3.
3.7
SELECTIVE STRUCTURE DEMOLITION SECTION 024119
Do not allow demolished materials to accumulate on-site. Remove and transport debris in a manner that will prevent spillage on adjacent surfaces and areas. Remove debris from elevated portions of building by chute, hoist, or other device that will convey debris to grade level in a controlled descent.
B.
Burning: Do not burn demolished materials.
C.
Disposal: Transport demolished materials off Owner's property and legally dispose of them.
CLEANING A.
Clean adjacent structures and improvements of dust, dirt, and debris caused by selective demolition operations. Return adjacent areas to condition existing before selective demolition operations began.
END OF SECTION 024119
SELECTIVE STRUCTURE DEMOLITION
024119-5
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE SECTION 033000
SECTION 033000 - CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY A.
Section includes cast-in-place concrete, including formwork, reinforcement, concrete materials, mixture design, placement procedures, and finishes, for the following: 1. 2. 3. 4.
B.
Related Sections: 1. 2. 3.
1.3
Section 033300 "Architectural Concrete" for general building applications of specially finished formed concrete. Section 312000 "Earth Moving" for drainage fill under slabs-on-grade. Section 321313 "Concrete Paving" for concrete pavement and walks.
DEFINITIONS A.
1.4
Footings. Foundation walls. Slabs-on-grade. Floor
Cementitious Materials: Portland cement alone or in combination with one or more of the following: blended hydraulic cement, fly ash and other pozzolans, ground granulated blast-furnace slag, and silica fume; subject to compliance with requirements.
ACTION SUBMITTALS A.
Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B.
Design Mixtures: For each concrete mixture. Submit alternate design mixtures when characteristics of materials, Project conditions, weather, test results, or other circumstances warrant adjustments. 1.
Indicate amounts of mixing water to be withheld for later addition at Project site.
C.
Steel Reinforcement Shop Drawings: Placing drawings that detail fabrication, bending, and placement. Include bar sizes, lengths, material, grade, bar schedules, stirrup spacing, bent bar diagrams, bar arrangement, splices and laps, mechanical connections, tie spacing, hoop spacing, and supports for concrete reinforcement.
D.
Construction Joint Layout: Indicate proposed construction joints required to construct the structure.
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
033000-1
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
1. 1.5
Location of construction joints is subject to approval of the Architect.
INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A.
Material Test Reports: For the following, from a qualified testing agency, indicating compliance with requirements: 1.
1.6
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE SECTION 033000
Aggregates.
B.
Floor surface flatness and levelness measurements indicating compliance with specified tolerances.
C.
Field quality-control reports.
QUALITY ASSURANCE A.
Installer Qualifications: A qualified installer who employs on Project personnel qualified as ACI-certified Flatwork Technician and Finisher and a supervisor who is an ACI-certified Concrete Flatwork Technician.
B.
Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing ready-mixed concrete products and that complies with ASTM C 94/C 94M requirements for production facilities and equipment. 1.
C.
Manufacturer certified according to NRMCA's "Certification of Ready Mixed Concrete Production Facilities."
Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent agency, qualified according to ASTM C 1077 and ASTM E 329 for testing indicated. 1. 2.
Personnel conducting field tests shall be qualified as ACI Concrete Field Testing Technician, Grade 1, according to ACI CP-1 or an equivalent certification program. Personnel performing laboratory tests shall be ACI-certified Concrete Strength Testing Technician and Concrete Laboratory Testing Technician - Grade I. Testing Agency laboratory supervisor shall be an ACI-certified Concrete Laboratory Testing Technician - Grade II.
D.
Source Limitations: Obtain each type or class of cementitious material of the same brand from the same manufacturer's plant, obtain aggregate from single source, and obtain admixtures from single source from single manufacturer.
E.
Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.4/D 1.4M, "Structural Welding Code - Reinforcing Steel."
F.
ACI Publications: Comply with the following unless modified by requirements in the Contract Documents: 1.
ACI 301, "Specifications for Structural Concrete," ACI 117, "Specifications for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials."
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
033000-2
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
G.
Concrete Testing Service: Engage a qualified independent testing agency to perform material evaluation tests and to design concrete mixtures.
H.
Mockups: Cast concrete slab-on-grade and formed-surface panels to demonstrate typical joints, surface finish, texture, tolerances, floor treatments, and standard of workmanship. 1. 2.
1.7
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE SECTION 033000
Build panel approximately 100 sq. ft. for slab-on-grade and 100 sq. ft.for formed in the location indicated or, if not indicated, as directed by Architect. Approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion.
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A.
Waterstops: Store waterstops under cover to protect from moisture, sunlight, dirt, oil, and other contaminants.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1
FORM-FACING MATERIALS A.
Smooth-Formed Finished Concrete: Form-facing panels that will provide continuous, true, and smooth concrete surfaces. Furnish in largest practicable sizes to minimize number of joints. 1. 2.
Plywood, metal, or other approved panel materials. Exterior-grade plywood panels, suitable for concrete forms, complying with DOC PS 1, and as follows: a. Structural 1, B-B or better; mill oiled and edge sealed.
B.
Rough-Formed Finished Concrete: Plywood, lumber, metal, or another approved material. Provide lumber dressed on at least two edges and one side for tight fit.
C.
Chamfer Strips: Wood, metal, PVC, or rubber strips, 3/4 by 3/4 inch (19 by 19 mm), minimum.
D.
Rustication Strips: Wood, metal, PVC, or rubber strips, kerfed for ease of form removal.
E.
Form-Release Agent: Commercially formulated form-release agent that will not bond with, stain, or adversely affect concrete surfaces and will not impair subsequent treatments of concrete surfaces. 1.
F.
Formulate form-release agent with rust inhibitor for steel form-facing materials.
Form Ties: Factory-fabricated, removable or snap-off metal or glass-fiber-reinforced plastic form ties designed to resist lateral pressure of fresh concrete on forms and to prevent spalling of concrete on removal. 1. 2.
Furnish units that will leave no corrodible metal closer than 1 inch (25 mm) to the plane of exposed concrete surface. Furnish ties with integral water-barrier plates to walls indicated to receive dampproofing or waterproofing.
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
033000-3
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
2.2
2.3
STEEL REINFORCEMENT A.
Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60, deformed.
B.
Plain-Steel Welded Wire Reinforcement: ASTM A 185/A 185M, plain, fabricated from as-drawn steel wire into flat sheets.
REINFORCEMENT ACCESSORIES A.
Bar Supports: Bolsters, chairs, spacers, and other devices for spacing, supporting, and fastening reinforcing bars and welded wire reinforcement in place. Manufacture bar supports from steel wire, plastic, or precast concrete according to CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice," of greater compressive strength than concrete and as follows: 1.
2. 3.
2.4
Cementitious Material: Use the following cementitious materials, of the same type, brand, and source, throughout Project: 1.
Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I white.
B.
Normal-Weight Aggregates: ASTM C 33, Class 3S coarse aggregate or better, graded. Provide aggregates from a single source 1. Maximum Coarse-Aggregate Size: 3/4 inch nominal. 2. Fine Aggregate: Free of materials with deleterious reactivity to alkali in cement.
C.
Water: ASTM C 94/C 94M[ and potable]
WATERSTOPS A.
Flexible PVC Waterstops: CE CRD-C 572, for embedding in concrete to prevent passage of fluids through joints. Factory fabricate corners, intersections, and directional changes. 1. 2.
2.6
For concrete surfaces exposed to view where legs of wire bar supports contact forms, use CRSI Class 1 plastic-protected steel wire or CRSI Class 2 stainless-steel bar supports. For epoxy-coated reinforcement, use epoxy-coated or other dielectric-polymer-coated wire bar supports. For zinc-coated reinforcement, use galvanized wire or dielectric-polymer-coated wire bar supports.
CONCRETE MATERIALS A.
2.5
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE SECTION 033000
Profile: Ribbed with center bulb Dimensions: 6 inches by 3/8 inch thick; nontapered.
CURING MATERIALS A.
Absorptive Cover: AASHTO M 182, Class 2, burlap cloth made from jute or kenaf, weighing approximately 9 oz./sq. yd. when dry
B.
Moisture-Retaining Cover: ASTM C 171, polyethylene film or white burlap-polyethylene sheet.
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
033000-4
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
C. 2.7
Water: Potable.
RELATED MATERIALS A.
Expansion- and Isolation-Joint-Filler Strips: ASTM D 1751, asphalt-saturated cellulosic fiber
B.
Semirigid Joint Filler: Two-component, semirigid, 100 percent solids, epoxy resin with a Type A shore durometer hardness of 80 per ASTM D 2240.
C.
Bonding Agent: ASTM C 1059/C 1059M, Type II, non-redispersible, acrylic emulsion or styrene butadiene.
D.
Epoxy Bonding Adhesive: ASTM C 881, two-component epoxy resin, capable of humid curing and bonding to damp surfaces, of class suitable for application temperature and of grade to suit requirements, and as follows: 1.
2.8
Types I and II, non-load bearing or Types IV and V, load bearing, for bonding hardened or freshly mixed concrete to hardened concrete.
CONCRETE MIXTURES, GENERAL A.
Prepare design mixtures for each type and strength of concrete, proportioned on the basis of laboratory trial mixture or field test data, or both, according to ACI 301. 1.
Use a qualified independent testing agency for preparing and reporting proposed mixture designs based on laboratory trial mixtures.
B.
Limit water-soluble, chloride-ion content in hardened concrete to 0.06 percent by weight of cement.
C.
Admixtures: Use admixtures according to manufacturer's written instructions. 1. 2. 3.
2.9
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE SECTION 033000
Use water-reducing high-range water-reducing or plasticizing admixture in concrete, as required, for placement and workability. Use water-reducing and retarding admixture when required by high temperatures, low humidity, or other adverse placement conditions. Use water-reducing admixture in pumped concrete, concrete for heavy-use industrial slabs and parking structure slabs, concrete required to be watertight, and concrete with a water-cementitious materials ratio below 0.50.
CONCRETE MIXTURES FOR BUILDING ELEMENTS A.
Footings: Proportion normal-weight concrete mixture as follows: 1. 2. 3.
Minimum Compressive Strength: 3000 psi at 28 days. Maximum Water-Cementitious Materials Ratio: 0.50 Slump Limit: 4 inches for concrete with verified slump of 2 to 4 inches before adding high-range water-reducing admixture or plasticizing admixture plus or minus 1 inch (25 mm).
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
033000-5
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
4.
B.
1. 2.
Minimum Compressive Strength: 3000 psi at 28 days. Maximum Water-Cementitious Materials Ratio: 0.50
3.
Slump Limit: 4 inches for concrete with verified slump of 2 to 4 inches before adding high-range water-reducing admixture or plasticizing admixture, plus or minus 1 inch (25 mm). Air Content: 6 percent, plus or minus 1.5 percent at point of delivery for 3/4-inch nominal maximum aggregate size.
Slabs-on-Grade: Proportion normal-weight concrete mixture as follows: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.
2.10
Minimum Compressive Strength 4000 psi at 28 days. Minimum Cementitious Materials Content: 470 lb/cu. yd 520 lb/cu. yd. Slump Limit: 4 inches, plus or minus 1 inch. Air Content: 6 percent, plus or minus 1.5 percent at point of delivery for 1-inch 3/4-inch nominal maximum aggregate size. Air Content: Do not allow air content of trowel-finished floors to exceed 3 percent. Steel-Fiber Reinforcement: Add to concrete mixture, according to manufacturer's written instructions, at a rate of 50 lb/cu. yd.
FABRICATING REINFORCEMENT A.
2.11
Air Content: 6 percent, plus or minus 1.5 percent at point of delivery for 3/4-inch nominal maximum aggregate size.
Foundation Walls: Proportion normal-weight concrete mixture as follows:
4.
C.
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE SECTION 033000
Fabricate steel reinforcement according to CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice."
CONCRETE MIXING A.
Ready-Mixed Concrete: Measure, batch, mix, and deliver concrete according to ASTM C 94/C 94M and furnish batch ticket information. 1.
When air temperature is between 85 and 90 deg F, reduce mixing and delivery time from 1-1/2 hours to 75 minutes; when air temperature is above 90 deg F, reduce mixing and delivery time to 60 minutes.
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1
FORMWORK A.
Design, erect, shore, brace, and maintain formwork, according to ACI 301, to support vertical, lateral, static, and dynamic loads, and construction loads that might be applied, until structure can support such loads.
B.
Construct formwork so concrete members and structures are of size, shape, alignment, elevation, and position indicated, within tolerance limits of ACI 117.
C.
Limit concrete surface irregularities, designated by ACI 347 as abrupt or gradual, as follows:
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
033000-6
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
1. 2.
Construct forms tight enough to prevent loss of concrete mortar.
E.
Fabricate forms for easy removal without hammering or prying against concrete surfaces. Provide crush or wrecking plates where stripping may damage cast concrete surfaces. Provide top forms for inclined surfaces steeper than 1.5 horizontal to 1 vertical. Install keyways, reglets, recesses, and the like, for easy removal. Do not use rust-stained steel form-facing material.
F.
Set edge forms, bulkheads, and intermediate screed strips for slabs to achieve required elevations and slopes in finished concrete surfaces. Provide and secure units to support screed strips; use strike-off templates or compacting-type screeds.
G.
Provide temporary openings for cleanouts and inspection ports where interior area of formwork is inaccessible. Close openings with panels tightly fitted to forms and securely braced to prevent loss of concrete mortar. Locate temporary openings in forms at inconspicuous locations.
H.
Chamfer exterior corners and edges of permanently exposed concrete. At concrete piers and walls. Do not chamber exterior slabs.
I.
Form openings, chases, offsets, sinkages, keyways, reglets, blocking, screeds, and bulkheads required in the Work. Determine sizes and locations from trades providing such items.
J.
Clean forms and adjacent surfaces to receive concrete. Remove chips, wood, sawdust, dirt, and other debris just before placing concrete.
K.
Retighten forms and bracing before placing concrete, as required, to prevent mortar leaks and maintain proper alignment.
L.
Coat contact surfaces of forms with form-release agent, according to manufacturer's written instructions, before placing reinforcement.
EMBEDDED ITEMS A.
Place and secure anchorage devices and other embedded items required for adjoining work that is attached to or supported by cast-in-place concrete. Use setting drawings, templates, diagrams, instructions, and directions furnished with items to be embedded.
1.
3.3
Class A, 1/8 inch for smooth-formed finished surfaces. Class C, 1/2 inch for rough-formed finished surfaces.
D.
1. 2.
3.2
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE SECTION 033000
Install anchor rods, accurately located, to elevations required and complying with tolerances in Section 7.5 of AISC's "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges."
REMOVING AND REUSING FORMS A.
General: Formwork for sides of beams, walls, columns, and similar parts of the Work that does not support weight of concrete may be removed after cumulatively curing at not less
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
033000-7
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE SECTION 033000
than 50 deg F for 24 hours after placing concrete. Concrete has to be hard enough to not be damaged by form-removal operations and curing and protection operations need to be maintained. 1.
B.
C.
3.4
Leave formwork for beam soffits, joists, slabs, and other structural elements that supports weight of concrete in place until concrete has its 28-day design compressive strength. 2. Remove forms only if shores have been arranged to permit removal of forms without loosening or disturbing shores. Clean and repair surfaces of forms to be reused in the Work. Split, frayed, delaminated, or otherwise damaged form-facing material will not be acceptable for exposed surfaces. Apply new form-release agent. When forms are reused, clean surfaces, remove fins and laitance, and tighten to close joints. Align and secure joints to avoid offsets. Do not use patched forms for exposed concrete surfaces unless approved by Architect.
SHORES AND RESHORES A.
Comply with ACI 318 and ACI 301 for design, installation, and removal of shoring and reshoring. 1.
B.
3.5
3.6
Do not remove shoring or reshoring until measurement of slab tolerances is complete.
Plan sequence of removal of shores and reshore to avoid damage to concrete. Locate and provide adequate reshoring to support construction without excessive stress or deflection.
STEEL REINFORCEMENT A.
General: Comply with CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice" for placing reinforcement.
B.
Clean reinforcement of loose rust and mill scale, earth, ice, and other foreign materials that would reduce bond to concrete.
C.
Accurately position, support, and secure reinforcement against displacement. Locate and support reinforcement with bar supports to maintain minimum concrete cover. Do not tack weld crossing reinforcing bars.
D.
Set wire ties with ends directed into concrete, not toward exposed concrete surfaces.
E.
Install welded wire reinforcement in longest practicable lengths on bar supports spaced to minimize sagging. Lap edges and ends of adjoining sheets at least one mesh spacing. Offset laps of adjoining sheet widths to prevent continuous laps in either direction. Lace overlaps with wire.
JOINTS A.
General: Construct joints true to line with faces perpendicular to surface plane of concrete.
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
033000-8
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
B.
Construction Joints: Install so strength and appearance of concrete are not impaired, at locations indicated or as approved by Architect. 1.
2. 3.
4. 5. 6.
C.
2.
3.
3.7
Grooved Joints: Form contraction joints after initial floating by grooving and finishing each edge of joint to a radius of 1/8 inch. Repeat grooving of contraction joints after applying surface finishes. Eliminate groover tool marks on concrete surfaces.
Isolation Joints in Slabs-on-Grade: After removing formwork, install joint-filler strips at slab junctions with vertical surfaces, such as column pedestals, foundation walls, grade beams, and other locations, as indicated. 1.
E.
Place joints perpendicular to main reinforcement. Continue reinforcement across construction joints unless otherwise indicated. Do not continue reinforcement through sides of strip placements of floors and slabs. Form keyed joints as indicated. Embed keys at least 1-1/2 inches into concrete. Locate joints for beams, slabs, joists, and girders in the middle third of spans. Offset joints in girders a minimum distance of twice the beam width from a beam-girder intersection. Locate horizontal joints in walls and columns at underside of floors, slabs, beams, and girders and at the top of footings or floor slabs. Use a bonding agent at locations where fresh concrete is placed against hardened or partially hardened concrete surfaces. Use epoxy-bonding adhesive at locations where fresh concrete is placed against hardened or partially hardened concrete surfaces.
Contraction Joints in Slabs-on-Grade: Form weakened-plane contraction joints, sectioning concrete into areas as indicated. Construct contraction joints for a depth equal to at least one-fourth of concrete thickness as follows: 1.
D.
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE SECTION 033000
Extend joint-filler strips full width and depth of joint, terminating flush with finished concrete surface unless otherwise indicated. Terminate full-width joint-filler strips not less than 1/2 inch or more than 1 inch below finished concrete surface where joint sealants, specified in Section 079200 "Joint Sealants," are indicated. Install joint-filler strips in lengths as long as practicable. Where more than one length is required, lace or clip sections together.
Doweled Joints: Install dowel bars and support assemblies at joints where indicated. Lubricate or asphalt coat one-half of dowel length to prevent concrete bonding to one side of joint.
WATERSTOPS A.
Flexible Waterstops: Install in construction joints and at other joints indicated to form a continuous diaphragm. Install in longest lengths practicable. Support and protect exposed waterstops during progress of the Work. Field fabricate joints in waterstops according to manufacturer's written instructions.
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
033000-9
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
3.8
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE SECTION 033000
CONCRETE PLACEMENT A.
Before placing concrete, verify that installation of formwork, reinforcement, and embedded items is complete and that required inspections have been performed.
B.
Do not add water to concrete during delivery, at Project site, or during placement unless approved by Architect.
C.
Before test sampling and placing concrete, water may be added at Project site, subject to limitations of ACI 301. 1.
D.
Deposit concrete continuously in one layer or in horizontal layers of such thickness that no new concrete will be placed on concrete that has hardened enough to cause seams or planes of weakness. If a section cannot be placed continuously, provide construction joints as indicated. Deposit concrete to avoid segregation. 1.
Deposit concrete in horizontal layers of depth to not exceed formwork design pressures and in a manner to avoid inclined construction joints.
2.
Consolidate placed concrete with mechanical vibrating equipment according to ACI 301. Do not use vibrators to transport concrete inside forms. Insert and withdraw vibrators vertically at uniformly spaced locations to rapidly penetrate placed layer and at least 6 inches into preceding layer. Do not insert vibrators into lower layers of concrete that have begun to lose plasticity. At each insertion, limit duration of vibration to time necessary to consolidate concrete and complete embedment of reinforcement and other embedded items without causing mixture constituents to segregate.
3.
E.
Deposit and consolidate concrete for floors and slabs in a continuous operation, within limits of construction joints, until placement of a panel or section is complete. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.
F.
Do not add water to concrete after adding high-range water-reducing admixtures to mixture.
Consolidate concrete during placement operations so concrete is thoroughly worked around reinforcement and other embedded items and into corners. Maintain reinforcement in position on chairs during concrete placement. Screed slab surfaces with a straightedge and strike off to correct elevations. Slope surfaces uniformly to drains where required. Begin initial floating using bull floats or darbies to form a uniform and open-textured surface plane, before excess bleedwater appears on the surface. Do not further disturb slab surfaces before starting finishing operations.
Cold-Weather Placement: Comply with ACI 306.1 and as follows. Protect concrete work from physical damage or reduced strength that could be caused by frost, freezing actions, or low temperatures. 1.
When average high and low temperature is expected to fall below 40 deg F for three successive days, maintain delivered concrete mixture temperature within the temperature range required by ACI 301.
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
033000-10
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
2. 3.
G.
2.
Maintain concrete temperature below 90 deg F at time of placement. Chilled mixing water or chopped ice may be used to control temperature, provided water equivalent of ice is calculated to total amount of mixing water. Using liquid nitrogen to cool concrete is Contractor's option. Fog-spray forms, steel reinforcement, and subgrade just before placing concrete. Keep subgrade uniformly moist without standing water, soft spots, or dry areas.
FINISHING FORMED SURFACES A.
Rough-Formed Finish: As-cast concrete texture imparted by form-facing material with tie holes and defects repaired and patched. Remove fins and other projections that exceed specified limits on formed-surface irregularities. 1.
B.
3.10
Do not use frozen materials or materials containing ice or snow. Do not place concrete on frozen subgrade or on subgrade containing frozen materials. Do not use calcium chloride, salt, or other materials containing antifreeze agents or chemical accelerators unless otherwise specified and approved in mixture designs.
Hot-Weather Placement: Comply with ACI 301 and as follows: 1.
3.9
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE SECTION 033000
Apply to concrete surfaces not exposed to public view.
Related Unformed Surfaces: At tops of walls, horizontal offsets, and similar unformed surfaces adjacent to formed surfaces, strike off smooth and finish with a texture matching adjacent formed surfaces. Continue final surface treatment of formed surfaces uniformly across adjacent unformed surfaces unless otherwise indicated.
FINISHING FLOORS AND SLABS A.
General: Comply with ACI 302.1R recommendations for screeding, restraightening, and finishing operations for concrete surfaces. Do not wet concrete surfaces.
B.
Float Finish: Consolidate surface with power-driven floats or by hand floating if area is small or inaccessible to power driven floats. Restraighten, cut down high spots, and fill low spots. Repeat float passes and restraightening until surface is left with a uniform, smooth, granular texture. 1.
C.
Apply float finish to surfaces to receive trowel finish.
Trowel Finish: After applying float finish, apply first troweling and consolidate concrete by hand or power-driven trowel. Continue troweling passes and restraighten until surface is free of trowel marks and uniform in texture and appearance. Grind smooth any surface defects that would telegraph through applied coatings or floor coverings. 1. 2.
Apply a trowel finish to surfaces exposed to view or to be covered with resilient flooring, carpet, ceramic or epoxy flooring. Finish surfaces to the following tolerances, according to ASTM E 1155 for a randomly trafficked floor surface: a.
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
Specified overall values of flatness, F(F) 25; and of levelness, F(L) 20; with minimum local values of flatness, F(F) 17; and of levelness, F(L) 15.
033000-11
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
3.
D.
3.12
Finish and measure surface so gap at any point between concrete surface and an unleveled, freestanding, 10-ft.- long straightedge resting on two high spots and placed anywhere on the surface does not 1/8 inch.
Broom Finish: Apply a broom finish to exterior concrete platforms, steps, ramps, and entry plaza. 1.
3.11
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE SECTION 033000
Immediately after float finishing, slightly roughen trafficked surface by brooming with fiber-bristle broom perpendicular to main traffic route. Coordinate required final finish with Architect before application.
MISCELLANEOUS CONCRETE ITEMS A.
Filling In: Fill in holes and openings left in concrete structures after work of other trades is in place unless otherwise indicated. Mix, place, and cure concrete, as specified, to blend with in-place construction. Provide other miscellaneous concrete filling indicated or required to complete the Work.
B.
Curbs: Provide monolithic finish to interior curbs by stripping forms while concrete is still green and by steel-troweling surfaces to a hard, dense finish with corners, intersections, and terminations slightly rounded.
C.
Equipment Bases and Foundations: Provide machine and equipment bases and foundations as shown on Drawings. Set anchor bolts for machines and equipment at correct elevations, complying with diagrams or templates from manufacturer furnishing machines and equipment.
D.
Steel Pan Stairs: Provide concrete fill for steel pan stair treads, landings, and associated items. Cast-in inserts and accessories as shown on Drawings. Screed, tamp, and trowel finish concrete surfaces.
CONCRETE PROTECTING AND CURING A.
General: Protect freshly placed concrete from premature drying and excessive cold or hot temperatures. Comply with ACI 306.1 for cold-weather protection and ACI 301 for hot-weather protection during curing.
B.
Formed Surfaces: Cure formed concrete surfaces, including underside of beams, supported slabs, and other similar surfaces. If forms remain during curing period, moist cure after loosening forms. If removing forms before end of curing period, continue curing for the remainder of the curing period.
C.
Cure concrete according to ACI 308.1, by one or a combination of the following methods: 1.
Moisture Curing: Keep surfaces continuously moist for not less than seven days with the following materials: a. b.
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
Water. Continuous water-fog spray.
033000-12
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
c.
2.
b. c.
Moisture cure or use moisture-retaining covers to cure concrete surfaces to receive floor coverings. Moisture cure or use moisture-retaining covers to cure concrete surfaces to receive penetrating liquid floor treatments. Cure concrete surfaces to receive floor coverings with either a moisture-retaining cover or a curing compound that the manufacturer certifies will not interfere with bonding of floor covering used on Project.
JOINT FILLING A.
Prepare, clean, and install joint filler according to manufacturer's written instructions. 1.
3.14
Absorptive cover, water saturated, and kept continuously wet. Cover concrete surfaces and edges with 12-inch (300-mm) lap over adjacent absorptive covers.
Moisture-Retaining-Cover Curing: Cover concrete surfaces with moisture-retaining cover for curing concrete, placed in widest practicable width, with sides and ends lapped at least 12 inches (300 mm), and sealed by waterproof tape or adhesive. Cure for not less than seven days. Immediately repair any holes or tears during curing period using cover material and waterproof tape. a.
3.13
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE SECTION 033000
Defer joint filling until concrete has aged at least one month(s) not fill joints until construction traffic has permanently ceased.
B.
Remove dirt, debris, saw cuttings, curing compounds, and sealers from joints; leave contact faces of joint clean and dry.
C.
Install semirigid joint filler full depth in saw-cut joints and at least 2 inches (50 mm) deep in formed joints. Overfill joint and trim joint filler flush with top of joint after hardening.
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A..
Testing and Inspecting: Contractor shall engage a qualified testing and inspecting agency to perform tests and inspections and to submit reports.
B.
Inspections: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.
C.
Steel reinforcement placement. Headed bolts and studs. Verification of use of required design mixture. Concrete placement, including conveying and depositing. Curing procedures and maintenance of curing temperature. Verification of concrete strength before removal of shores and forms from beams and slabs.
Concrete Tests: Testing of composite samples of fresh concrete obtained according to ASTM C 172 shall be performed according to the following requirements:
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
033000-13
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE SECTION 033000
1.
Testing Frequency: Obtain one composite sample for each day's pour of each concrete mixture exceeding 5 cu. yd., but less than 25 cu. yd., plus one set for each additional 50 cu. yd.,or fraction thereof.
2.
Slump: ASTM C 143/C 143M; one test at point of placement for each composite sample, but not less than one test for each day's pour of each concrete mixture. Perform additional tests when concrete consistency appears to change. Air Content: ASTM C 231, pressure method, for normal-weight concrete; [ASTM C 173/C 173M, volumetric method, for structural lightweight concrete; one test for each composite sample, but not less than one test for each day's pour of each concrete mixture. Concrete Temperature: ASTM C 1064/C 1064M; one test hourly when air temperature is 40 deg F (4.4 deg C) and below and when 80 deg F (27 deg C) and above, and one test for each composite sample.
3.
4.
5.
Compression Test Specimens: ASTM C 31/C 31M. a.
6.
Compressive-Strength Tests: ASTM C 39/C 39M; test one set of two laboratory-cured specimens at 7 days and one set of two specimens at 28 days. a.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
Cast and laboratory cure two sets of two standard cylinder specimens for each composite sample.
Test one set of two field-cured specimens at 7 days and one set of two specimens at 28 days.
When strength of field-cured cylinders is less than 85 percent of companion laboratory-cured cylinders, Contractor shall evaluate operations and provide corrective procedures for protecting and curing in-place concrete. Strength of each concrete mixture will be satisfactory if every average of any three consecutive compressive-strength tests equals or exceeds specified compressive strength and no compressive-strength test value falls below specified compressive strength by more than 500 psi. Test results shall be reported in writing to Architect, concrete manufacturer, and Contractor within 48 hours of testing. Reports of compressive-strength tests shall contain Project identification name and number, date of concrete placement, name of concrete testing and inspecting agency, location of concrete batch in Work, design compressive strength at 28 days, concrete mixture proportions and materials, compressive breaking strength, and type of break for both 7- and 28-day tests. Nondestructive Testing: Impact hammer, sonoscope, or other nondestructive device may be permitted by Architect but will not be used as sole basis for approval or rejection of concrete. Additional Tests: Testing and inspecting agency shall make additional tests of concrete when test results indicate that slump, air entrainment, compressive strengths, or other requirements have not been met, as directed by Architect. Testing and inspecting agency may conduct tests to determine adequacy of concrete by cored cylinders complying with ASTM C 42/C 42M or by other methods as directed by Architect. Additional testing and inspecting, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine compliance of replaced or additional work with specified requirements.
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
033000-14
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
13.
D.
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE SECTION 033000
Correct deficiencies in the Work that test reports and inspections indicate do not comply with the Contract Documents.
Measure floor and slab flatness and levelness according to ASTM E 1155 within 24 hours of finishing.
END OF SECTION 033000
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
033000-15
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
ARCHITECTURAL CONCRETE SECTION 033300
SECTION 033300 - ARCHITECTURAL CONCRETE PART 1- GENERAL 1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY A.
This Section specifies cast-in-place architectural concrete including form facings, reinforcement accessories, concrete materials, concrete mixture design, placement procedures, and finishes.
B.
Related Sections include the following: 1. 2. 3.
1.3
DEFINITIONS A.
1.4
Division 03 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete" for formwork; material, fabrication, and installation requirements for steel reinforcement; and field quality control. Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants" for elastomeric joint sealants in contraction and other joints in cast-in-place architectural concrete. Division 32 Section " Concrete Paving" for surface-imprinted concrete pavement and finishes.
Cast-in-Place Architectural Concrete: Formed concrete that is exposed to view on surfaces of completed structure or building and that requires special concrete materials, formwork, placement, or finishes to obtain specified architectural appearance.
SUBMITTALS A.
Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B.
Design Mixtures: For each concrete mixture. Submit alternate design mixtures when characteristics of materials, Project conditions, weather, test results, or other circumstances warrant adjustments.
C.
Formwork Shop Drawings: Show formwork construction including form-facing joints, rustications, construction and contraction joints, form joint-sealant details, form tie locations and patterns, inserts and embedments, cutouts, cleanout panels, and other items that visually affect cast-in-place architectural concrete.
D.
Samples: For each of the following materials: 1. 2. 3. 4.
Form-facing panel. Form ties. Form liners. Coarse- and fine-aggregate gradations.
ARCHITECTURAL CONCRETE
033300 - 1
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
ARCHITECTURAL CONCRETE SECTION 033300
5. E.
Qualification Data: For testing agency.
F.
Material Test Reports: For the following, from a qualified testing agency, indicating compliance with requirements: 1.
1.5
Chamfers and rustications.
Aggregates. Include service record data indicating absence of deleterious expansion of concrete due to alkali-aggregate reactivity.
QUALITY ASSURANCE A.
Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing ready-mixed concrete products and that complies with ASTM C 94/C 94M requirements for production facilities and equipment. 1.
B.
Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent agency qualified according to ASTM C 1077 and ASTM E 329 for testing indicated, as documented according to ASTM E 548. 1.
2.
C.
D.
Manufacturer certified according to NRMCA's "Certification of Ready Mixed Concrete Production Facilities."
Personnel conducting field tests shall be qualified as ACI Concrete Field Testing Technician, Grade 1, according to ACI CP-01 or an equivalent certification program. Personnel performing laboratory tests shall be an ACI-certified Concrete Strength Testing Technician and Concrete Laboratory Testing Technician - Grade I. Testing Agency laboratory supervisor shall be an ACI-certified Concrete Laboratory Testing Technician - Grade II.
Source Limitations for Cast-in-Place Architectural Concrete: Obtain each color, size, type, and variety of concrete material and concrete mixture from one manufacturer with resources to provide cast-in-place architectural concrete of consistent quality in appearance and physical properties. ACI Publications: Comply with the following unless modified by requirements in the Contract Documents: 1. 2.
ACI 301, "Specification for Structural Concrete," Sections 1 through 5 and Section 6, "Architectural Concrete." ACI 303.1, "Specification for Cast-in-Place Architectural Concrete."
E.
Concrete Testing Service: Engage a qualified independent testing agency to perform material evaluation tests and to design concrete mixtures.
F.
Mockups: Before casting architectural concrete, build mockups to verify selections made under sample submittals and to demonstrate typical joints, surface finish, texture, tolerances, and standard of workmanship. Build mockups to comply with the following requirements, using materials indicated for the completed Work:
ARCHITECTURAL CONCRETE
033300 - 2
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
ARCHITECTURAL CONCRETE SECTION 033300
1. 2. 3.
4.
Build mockups in the location and of the size indicated or, if not indicated, as directed by Architect. Demonstrate curing, cleaning, and protecting of cast-in-place architectural concrete, finishes, and contraction joints, as applicable. In presence of Architect, damage part of the exposed-face surface for each finish, color, and texture, and demonstrate materials and techniques proposed for repair of tie holes and surface blemishes to match adjacent undamaged surfaces. Obtain Architect's approval of mockups before casting architectural concrete.
PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1
FORM-FACING MATERIALS A.
General: Comply with Division 03 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete" for formwork and other form-facing material requirements.
B.
Form-Facing Panels for As-Cast Finishes: Steel, glass-fiber-reinforced plastic, or other approved nonabsorptive panel materials that will provide continuous, true, and smooth architectural concrete surfaces. Furnish in largest practicable sizes to minimize number of joints.
C.
Form Liners: Units of face design, texture, arrangement, and configuration to match design reference sample. Furnish with manufacturer's recommended liquid-release agent that will not bond with, stain, or adversely affect concrete surfaces and will not impair subsequent surface treatments of concrete. 1.
D.
Basis of Design: Fitzgerald Formliners, model #16989 – Split Slate, 0.25” deep, Elastomeric Urethane, 192” wide x 48” high, or approved equal. Chamfer Strips: Metal, rigid plastic, elastomeric rubber, or dressed wood, 3/4 by 3/4 inch, minimum; nonstaining; in longest practicable lengths.
E.
Form Joint Sealant: Elastomeric sealant complying with ASTM C 920, Type M or S, Grade NS, that adheres to form joint substrates.
F.
Sealer: Penetrating, clear, polyurethane wood form sealer formulated to reduce absorption of bleed water and prevent migration of set-retarding chemicals from wood.
G.
Form-Release Agent: Commercially formulated colorless form-release agent that will not bond with, stain, or adversely affect architectural concrete surfaces and will not impair subsequent treatments of those surfaces. 1.
H.
Formulate form-release agent with rust inhibitor for steel form-facing materials.
Form Ties: Factory-fabricated, internally disconnecting or removable ties designed to resist lateral pressure of fresh concrete on forms and to prevent spalling of concrete on removal. 1.
Furnish internally disconnecting ties that will leave no metal closer than 1-1/2 inches (38 mm)from the architectural concrete surface.
ARCHITECTURAL CONCRETE
033300 - 3
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
ARCHITECTURAL CONCRETE SECTION 033300
2.2
STEEL REINFORCEMENT AND ACCESSORIES A.
General: Comply with Division 03 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete" for steel reinforcement and other requirements for reinforcement accessories.
B.
Bar Supports: Bolsters, chairs, spacers, and other devices for spacing, supporting, and fastening reinforcing bars and welded-wire fabric in place; manufacture according to CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice." 1.
2.3
Where legs of wire bar supports contact forms, use gray, all-plastic bar supports.
CONCRETE MATERIALS A.
Cementitious Material: Use the following cementitious materials, of the same type, brand, and source, throughout Project: 1.
B.
Normal-Weight Aggregates: ASTM C 33, Class 5S coarse aggregate or better, graded. Provide aggregates from a single source with documented service record data of at least 10 years' satisfactory service in similar applications and service conditions using similar aggregates and cementitious materials. 1. 2.
2.4
Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I, white.
Maximum Coarse Aggregate Size: 1/2 inch (13 mm). Gradation: Uniformly graded.
C.
Normal-Weight Fine Aggregate: ASTM C 33, manufactured or natural sand, from same source for entire Project.
D.
Water: Potable, complying with ASTM C 94/C 94M except free of wash water from mixer washout operations.
ADMIXTURES A.
Air-Entraining Admixture: ASTM C 260.
B.
Chemical Admixtures: Provide admixtures certified by manufacturer to be compatible with other admixtures and that will not contribute water-soluble chloride ions exceeding those permitted in hardened concrete. Do not use calcium chloride or admixtures containing calcium chloride. 1.
C.
Water-Reducing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type D.
Color Pigment: ASTM C 979, synthetic mineral-oxide pigments or colored water-reducing admixtures; color stable, free of carbon black, nonfading, and resistant to lime and other alkalis. 1.
Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.
ARCHITECTURAL CONCRETE
033300 - 4
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
ARCHITECTURAL CONCRETE SECTION 033300
2.5
2.6
CURING MATERIALS A.
Absorptive Cover: AASHTO M 182, Class 2, burlap cloth made from jute or kenaf, weighing approximately 9 oz./sq. yd. (305 g/sq. m) when dry.
B.
Moisture-Retaining Cover: ASTM C 171, polyethylene film or white burlap-polyethylene sheet.
REPAIR MATERIALS A.
2.7
Bonding Agent: ASTM C 1059, Type II, nonredispersible, acrylic emulsion or styrene butadiene.
CONCRETE MIXTURES, GENERAL A.
Prepare design mixtures for each type and strength of cast-in-place architectural concrete proportioned on basis of laboratory trial mixture or field test data, or both, according to ACI 301. 1.
B.
Proportion concrete mixtures as follows: 1. 2. 3. 4.
2.8
Use a qualified independent testing agency for preparing and reporting proposed design mixtures based on laboratory trial mixtures.
Compressive Strength (28 Days): 3000 psi. Maximum Water-Cementitious Materials Ratio: 0.46. Slump Limit: 4 inches, plus or minus 1 inch. Air Content: 6 percent, plus or minus 1.5 percent at point of delivery for3/4-inch nominal maximum aggregate size.
C.
Cementitious Materials: For cast-in-place architectural concrete exposed to deicers, limit percentage, by weight, of cementitious materials other than portland cement according to ACI 301 requirements.
D.
Limit water-soluble, chloride-ion content in hardened concrete to 0.06 percent by weight of cement.
E.
Admixtures: Use admixtures according to manufacturer's written instructions.
F.
Color Pigment: Add color pigment to concrete mixture according to manufacturer's written instructions and to result in hardened concrete color consistent with approved mockup.
CONCRETE MIXING A.
Ready-Mixed Architectural Concrete: Measure, batch, mix, and deliver concrete according to ASTM C 94/C 94M and furnish batch ticket information. 1.
Clean equipment used to mix and deliver cast-in-place architectural concrete to prevent contamination from other concrete.
ARCHITECTURAL CONCRETE
033300 - 5
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
ARCHITECTURAL CONCRETE SECTION 033300
2.
When air temperature is between 85 and 90 deg F, reduce mixing and delivery time from 1-1/2 hours to 75 minutes; when air temperature is above 90 deg F, reduce mixing and delivery time to 60 minutes.
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1
FORMWORK A.
General: Comply with Division 03 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete" for formwork, embedded items, and shoring and reshoring.
B.
Limit deflection of form-facing panels to not exceed ACI 303.1 requirements.
C.
Fabricate forms to result in cast-in-place architectural concrete that complies with ACI 117, "Specifications for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials."
D.
Fabricate forms for easy removal without hammering or prying against concrete surfaces. Provide crush or wrecking plates where stripping may damage cast-in-place surfaces. Provide top forms for inclined surfaces steeper than 1.5 horizontal to 1 vertical. Kerf wood rustications, keyways, reglets, recesses, and the like, for easy removal. 1. 2.
Seal form joints and penetrations at form ties with form joint tape or form joint sealant to prevent cement paste leakage. Do not use rust-stained steel form-facing material.
E.
Provide temporary openings for cleanouts and inspection ports where interior area of formwork is inaccessible. Close openings with panels tightly fitted to forms and securely braced to prevent loss of concrete mortar. Locate temporary openings in forms at inconspicuous locations.
F.
Chamfer exterior corners and edges of cast-in-place architectural concrete.
G.
Coat contact surfaces of wood rustications and chamfer strips with sealer before placing reinforcement, anchoring devices, and embedded items.
H.
Form openings, chases, offsets, sinkages, keyways, reglets, blocking, screeds, and bulkheads required in the Work. Determine sizes and locations from trades providing such items.
I.
Clean forms and adjacent surfaces to receive concrete. Remove chips, wood, sawdust, dirt, and other debris just before placing concrete.
J.
Retighten forms and bracing before placing concrete, as required, to prevent mortar leaks and maintain proper alignment.
K.
Coat contact surfaces of forms with form-release agent, according to manufacturer's written instructions, before placing reinforcement.
ARCHITECTURAL CONCRETE
033300 - 6
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
ARCHITECTURAL CONCRETE SECTION 033300
L.
3.2
3.3
Place form liners accurately to provide finished surface texture indicated. Provide solid backing and attach securely to prevent deflection and maintain stability of liners during concreting. Prevent form liners from sagging and stretching in hot weather. Seal joints of form liners and form liner accessories to prevent mortar leaks. Coat form liner with form-release agent.
REINFORCEMENT AND INSERTS A.
General: Comply with Division 03 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete" for fabricating and installing steel reinforcement. Securely fasten steel reinforcement and wire ties against shifting during concrete placement.
B.
Set wire ties with ends directed into concrete, not toward exposed concrete surfaces.
REMOVING AND REUSING FORMS A.
Formwork for sides of beams, walls, columns, and similar parts of the Work that does not support weight of concrete may be removed after cumulatively curing at not less than 50 deg F (10 deg C) for 24 hours after placing concrete, if concrete is hard enough to not be damaged by form-removal operations and curing and protection operations are maintained. 1.
3.4
Schedule form removal to maintain surface appearance that matches approved mockups.
B.
Clean and repair surfaces of forms to be reused in the Work. Do not use split, frayed, delaminated, or otherwise damaged form-facing material. Apply new form-release agent.
C.
When forms are reused, clean surfaces, remove fins and laitance, and tighten to close joints. Align and secure joints to avoid offsets. Do not use patched forms for cast-in-place architectural concrete surfaces.
JOINTS A.
Construction Joints: Install construction joints true to line with faces perpendicular to surface plane of cast-in-place architectural concrete so strength and appearance of concrete are not impaired, at locations indicated or as approved by Architect. 1. 2.
3. 4. 5.
Place joints perpendicular to main reinforcement. Continue reinforcement across construction joints, unless otherwise indicated. Form keyed joints as indicated. Align construction joint within rustications attached to form-facing material. Locate horizontal joints in walls and columns at underside of floors, slabs, beams, and girders and at the top of footings or floor slabs. Space vertical joints in walls. Locate joints beside piers integral with walls, near corners, and in concealed locations where possible. Use bonding agent at locations where fresh concrete is placed against hardened or partially hardened concrete surfaces.
ARCHITECTURAL CONCRETE
033300 - 7
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
ARCHITECTURAL CONCRETE SECTION 033300
B.
3.5
Contraction Joints: Form weakened-plane contraction joints true to line with faces perpendicular to surface plane of cast-in-place architectural concrete so strength and appearance of concrete are not impaired, at locations indicated or as approved by Architect.
CONCRETE PLACEMENT A.
Before placing concrete, verify that installation of formwork, form-release agent, reinforcement, and embedded items is complete and that required inspections have been performed.
B.
Do not add water to concrete during delivery, at Project site, or during placement unless approved by Architect.
C.
Deposit concrete continuously between construction joints. Deposit concrete to avoid segregation. 1. 2. 3.
D.
Cold-Weather Placement: Comply with ACI 306.1 and as follows. Protect concrete work from physical damage or reduced strength that could be caused by frost, freezing actions, or low temperatures. 1.
2.
3. 4.
E.
Deposit concrete in horizontal layers of depth to not exceed formwork design pressures and in a manner to avoid inclined construction joints. Consolidate placed concrete with mechanical vibrating equipment according to ACI 303.1. Do not use vibrators to transport concrete inside forms. Insert and withdraw vibrators vertically at uniformly spaced locations to rapidly penetrate placed layer and at least 6 inches into preceding layer. Do not insert vibrators into lower layers of concrete that have begun to lose plasticity. Do not permit vibrators to contact forms.
When average high and low temperature is expected to fall below 40 deg F for three successive days, maintain delivered concrete mixture temperature within the temperature range required by ACI 301. Do not use frozen materials or materials containing ice or snow. Do not place concrete on frozen subgrade or on subgrade containing frozen materials. Do not use calcium chloride, salt, or other materials containing antifreeze agents. Do not use chemical accelerators unless otherwise specified and approved in design mixtures.
Hot-Weather Placement: Comply with ACI 301 and as follows: 1.
2.
Maintain concrete temperature below 90 deg F at time of placement. Chilled mixing water or chopped ice may be used to control temperature, provided water equivalent of ice is calculated to total amount of mixing water. Using liquid nitrogen to cool concrete is Contractor's option. Fog-spray forms, steel reinforcement, and subgrade just before placing concrete. Keep subgrade uniformly moist without standing water, soft spots, or dry areas.
ARCHITECTURAL CONCRETE
033300 - 8
ARCHITECTURAL CONCRETE
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
SECTION 033300 3.6
FINISHES, GENERAL A.
Architectural Concrete Finish: Match Architect's design reference sample, identified and described as indicated, to satisfaction of Architect.
B.
Related Unformed Surfaces: At tops of walls, horizontal offsets, and similar unformed surfaces adjacent to formed surfaces, strike off smooth and finish with a texture matching adjacent formed surfaces. 1.
C. 3.7
Continue final surface treatment of formed surfaces uniformly across adjacent unformed surfaces, unless otherwise indicated.
Maintain uniformity of special finishes over construction joints, unless otherwise indicated.
AS-CAST FORMED FINISHES A.
Smooth-Formed Finish: As-cast concrete texture imparted by form-facing material, arranged in an orderly and symmetrical manner with a minimum of seams. Remove fins and other projections exceeding specified limits on formed-surface irregularities. Repair and patch tie holes and defects.
B.
Rubbed Finish: Apply the following to smooth-form-finished as-cast concrete where indicated: 1.
Smooth-Rubbed Finish: Not later than one day after form removal, moisten concrete surfaces and rub with carborundum brick or another abrasive until producing a uniform color and texture. Do not apply cement grout other than that created by the rubbing process.
C.
3.8
Form-Liner Finish: Produce a textured surface free of pockets, streaks, and honeycombs, and of uniform appearance, color, and texture. CONCRETE PROTECTING AND CURING A.
General: Protect freshly placed concrete from premature drying and excessive cold or hot temperatures. Comply with ACI 306.1 for cold-weather protection and with ACI 301 for hot-weather protection during curing.
B.
Begin curing cast-in-place architectural concrete immediately after removing forms from concrete. Cure according to ACI 308.1, by one or a combination of the following methods that will not mottle, discolor, or stain concrete: 1.
Moisture Curing: Keep exposed surfaces of cast-in-place architectural concrete continuously moist for not less than seven days with the following materials: a. b. c.
Water. Continuous water-fog spray. Absorptive cover, water saturated and kept continuously wet. Cover concrete surfaces and edges with 12-inch lap over adjacent absorptive covers.
ARCHITECTURAL CONCRETE
033300 - 9
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
ARCHITECTURAL CONCRETE SECTION 033300
2.
3.9
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A.
3.10
Moisture-Retaining-Cover Curing: Cover concrete surfaces with moisture-retaining cover for curing concrete, placed in widest practicable width, with sides and ends lapped at least 12 inches, and sealed by waterproof tape or adhesive. Cure for not less than seven days. Immediately repair any holes or tears during curing period; use cover material and waterproof tape.
General: Comply with Division 03 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete" for field quality-control requirements.
REPAIRS, PROTECTION, AND CLEANING A.
Repair and cure damaged finished surfaces of cast-in-place architectural concrete when approved by Architect. Match repairs to color, texture, and uniformity of surrounding surfaces and to repairs on approved mockups. 1.
Remove and replace cast-in-place architectural concrete that cannot be repaired and cured to Architect's approval.
B.
Protect corners, edges, and surfaces of cast-in-place architectural concrete from damage; use guards and barricades.
C.
Protect cast-in-place architectural concrete from staining, laitance, and contamination during remainder of construction period.
D.
Clean cast-in-place architectural concrete surfaces after finish treatment to remove stains, markings, dust, and debris.
E.
Wash and rinse surfaces according to concrete finish applicator's written recommendations. Protect other Work from staining or damage due to cleaning operations. 1.
Do not use cleaning materials or processes that could change the appearance of cast-in-place architectural concrete finishes.
END OF SECTION 033300
ARCHITECTURAL CONCRETE
033300 - 10
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
MAINTENANCE OF UNIT MASONRY SECTION 04012
SECTION 040120 - MAINTENANCE OF UNIT MASONRY PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY A.
Section includes maintenance of unit masonry consisting of brick clay masonry restoration and cleaning as follows: 1. 2. 3.
B.
Related Sections: 1. 2. 3.
1.3
1.4
A.
Very Low-Pressure Spray: Under 100 psi
B.
Low-Pressure Spray: 100 to 400 psi; 4 to 6 gpm
C.
Medium-Pressure Spray: 400 to 800 psi 4 to 6 gpm
D.
High-Pressure Spray: 800 to 1200 psi 4 to 6 gpm
E.
Saturation Coefficient: Ratio of the weight of water absorbed during immersion in cold water to weight absorbed during immersion in boiling water; used as an indication of resistance of masonry units to freezing and thawing.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include recommendations for application and use. Include test data substantiating that products comply with requirements.
INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A.
1.6
Section 042000 "Unit Masonry" for new clay masonry construction. Section 071900 "Water Repellents" for water repellents applied to clay masonry. Section 076200 "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim" for metal flashing installed in or on restored clay masonry.
DEFINITIONS
A.
1.5
Repairing unit masonry, including replacing units. Repointing joints. Cleaning exposed unit masonry surfaces.
Preconstruction Test Reports: For replacement masonry units.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
MAINTENANCE OF UNIT MASONRY
040120-1
A.
Restoration Specialist Qualifications: Engage an experienced masonry restoration and cleaning firm to perform work of this Section. Firm shall have completed work similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project with a record of successful in-service performance. Experience installing standard unit masonry is not sufficient experience for masonry restoration work.
1. 2.
3.
At Contractor's option, work may be divided between two specialist firms: one for cleaning work and one for repair work. Field Supervision: Restoration specialist firms shall maintain experienced full-time supervisors on Project site during times that clay masonry restoration and cleaning work is in progress. Supervisors shall not be changed during Project except for causes beyond the control of restoration specialist firm. Restoration Worker Qualifications: Persons who are experienced and specialize] in restoration work of types they will be performing.
B.
Source Limitations: Obtain each type of material for masonry restoration (face brick, cement, sand, etc.) from one source with resources to provide materials of consistent quality in appearance and physical properties.
C.
Cleaning and Repair Appearance Standard: Cleaned and repaired surfaces are to have a uniform appearance as viewed from 20 feet away by Architect. Perform additional paint and stain removal, general cleaning, and spot cleaning of small areas that are noticeably different, so that surface blends smoothly into surrounding areas.
D.
Mockups: Prepare mockups of restoration and cleaning to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution and for fabrication and installation. 1.
Masonry Repair: Prepare sample areas for each type of masonry material indicated to have repair work performed. If not otherwise indicated, size each mockup not smaller than 2 adjacent whole units or approximately 48 inches in least dimension. Erect sample areas in existing walls unless otherwise indicated, to demonstrate quality of materials, workmanship, and blending with existing work. Include the following as a minimum: a.
Replacement: 1.
b.
2. 3.
Two brick units replaced.
Patching: Three small holes at least 1 inch in diameter for each type of masonry material indicated to be patched, so as to leave no evidence of repair.
Repointing: Rake out joints in 2 separate areas for each type of repointing required and repoint one of the areas. Cleaning: Clean an area approximately 25 sq. ft. for each type of masonry and surface condition. a.
b.
Test cleaners and methods on samples of adjacent materials for possible adverse reactions. Do not use cleaners and methods known to have deleterious effect. Allow a waiting period of not less than seven days after completion of sample cleaning to permit a study of sample panels for negative reactions.
MAINTENANCE OF UNIT MASONRY
040120-2
4.
5.
1.7
1.8
Approval of mockups does not constitute approval of deviations from the Contract Documents contained in mockups unless Architect specifically approves such deviations in writing. Approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion.
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A.
Deliver masonry units to Project site strapped together in suitable packs or pallets or in heavy-duty cartons.
B.
Deliver other materials to Project site in manufacturer's original and unopened containers, labeled with manufacturer's name and type of products.
C.
Store cementitious materials on elevated platforms, under cover, and in a dry location. Do not use cementitious materials that have become damp.
D.
Store hydrated lime in manufacturer's original and unopened containers. Discard lime if containers have been damaged or have been opened for more than two days.
E.
Store lime putty covered with water in sealed containers.
F.
Store sand where grading and other required characteristics can be maintained and contamination avoided.
PROJECT CONDITIONS A.
Weather Limitations: Proceed with installation only when existing and forecasted weather conditions permit masonry restoration and cleaning work to be performed according to manufacturers' written instructions and specified requirements.
B.
Repair masonry units and repoint mortar joints only when air temperature is between 40 and 90 deg F and is predicted to remain so for at least 7 days after completion of the Work unless otherwise indicated.
C.
Cold-Weather Requirements: Comply with the following procedures for masonry repair and mortar-joint pointing unless otherwise indicated: 1.
When mean daily air temperature is below 40 deg F (4 deg C), provide enclosure and heat to maintain temperatures above 32 deg F (0 deg C) within the enclosure for 7 days after repair and pointing.
D.
Hot-Weather Requirements: Protect masonry repair and mortar-joint pointing when temperature and humidity conditions produce excessive evaporation of water from mortar and repair materials. Provide artificial shade and wind breaks and use cooled materials as required to minimize evaporation. Do not apply mortar to substrates with temperatures of 90 deg F and above unless otherwise indicated.
E.
For manufactured repair materials, perform work within the environmental limits set by each manufacturer.
MAINTENANCE OF UNIT MASONRY
040120-3
F.
1.9
COORDINATION A.
1.10
Clean masonry surfaces only when air temperature is 40 deg F (4 deg C) and above and is predicted to remain so for at least 7 days after completion of cleaning.
Coordinate masonry restoration and cleaning with public circulation patterns at Project site. Some work is near public circulation patterns. Public circulation patterns cannot be closed off entirely, and in places can be only temporarily redirected around small areas of work. Plan and execute the Work accordingly.
SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING
A.
Order replacement materials at earliest possible date to avoid delaying completion of the Work.
B.
Order sand for pointing mortar immediately after approval of mockups. Take delivery of and store at Project site a sufficient quantity to complete Project.
C.
Perform masonry restoration work in the following sequence: 1. 2. 3. 4.
5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11.
Remove plant growth. Inspect for open mortar joints and repair before cleaning to prevent the intrusion of water and other cleaning materials into the wall. Clean masonry surfaces. Where water repellents, specified in Section 071900 "Water Repellents," are to be used on or near masonry work, delay application of these chemicals until after pointing. Rake out mortar from joints surrounding masonry to be replaced and from joints adjacent to masonry repairs along joints. Repair masonry, including replacing existing masonry with new masonry materials. Rake out mortar from joints to be repointed. Point mortar and sealant joints. After repairs and repointing have been completed and cured, perform a final cleaning to remove residues from this work. Inspect for open mortar joints and repair before cleaning to prevent the intrusion of water and other cleaning materials into the wall. Clean masonry surfaces.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1
MASONRY MATERIALS A.
Face Brick: Provide face brick, including specially molded, ground, cut, or sawed shapes where required to complete masonry restoration work. 1.
Provide units with colors, color variation within units, surface texture, size, and shape to match existing brickwork and with physical properties a.
For existing brickwork that exhibits a range of colors or color variation within units, provide brick that proportionally matches that range and variation rather than brick that matches an individual color within that range.
MAINTENANCE OF UNIT MASONRY
040120-4
2.
Special Shapes:
a.
b. c.
4.
2.2
Tolerances as Fabricated: Comply with tolerance requirements in ASTM C 216, Type FBX
MORTAR MATERIALS A.
Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I or Type II, white or gray or both where required for color matching of exposed mortar. 1.
Provide cement containing not more than 0.60 percent total alkali when tested according to ASTM C 114.
B.
Hydrated Lime: ASTM C 207, Type S.
C.
Factory-Prepared Lime Putty: ASTM C 1489.
D.
Quicklime: ASTM C 5, pulverized lime.
E.
Mortar Sand: ASTM C 144 unless otherwise indicated. 1. 2. 3.
2.3
Provide specially molded, 100 percent solid shapes for applications where core holes or "frogs" could be exposed to view or weather when in final position and where shapes produced by sawing would result in sawed surfaces being exposed to view. Provide specially ground units, shaped to match patterns and existing special shapes to be replaced. Mechanical chopping or breaking brick, or bonding pieces of brick together by adhesive, are not acceptable procedures for fabricating special shapes.
Color: Provide natural of color necessary to produce required mortar color. For pointing mortar, provide sand with rounded edges. Match size, texture, and gradation of existing mortar sand as closely as possible. Blend several sands if necessary to achieve suitable match.
F.
Mortar Pigments: Natural and synthetic iron oxides, compounded for mortar mixes. Use only pigments with a record of satisfactory performance in masonry mortars.
G.
Water: Potable.
CLEANING MATERIALS A.
Water: Potable.
B.
Hot Water: Water heated to a temperature of 140 to 160 deg F.
C.
Job-Mixed Detergent Solution: Solution prepared by mixing 2 cups of tetrasodium polyphosphate, 1/2 cup of laundry detergent, and 20 quarts of hot water for every 5 gal.of solution required.
D.
Job-Mixed Mold, Mildew, and Algae Remover: Solution prepared by mixing 2 cups of tetrasodium polyphosphate, 5 quarts of 5 percent sodium hypochlorite (bleach), and 15 quarts of hot water for every 5 gal.of solution required.
MAINTENANCE OF UNIT MASONRY
040120-5
2.4
ACCESSORY MATERIALS A.
B.
Liquid Strippable Masking Agent: Manufacturer's standard liquid, film-forming, strippable masking material for protecting glass, metal, and polished stone surfaces from damaging effects of acidic and alkaline masonry cleaners. Sealant Materials: 1.
2. 3.
C.
Provide manufacturer's standard chemically curing, elastomeric sealant(s) of base polymer and characteristics indicated below that comply with applicable requirements in Section 079200 "Joint Sealants. Colors: Provide colors of exposed sealants to match colors of masonry adjoining installed sealant unless otherwise indicated. Ground-Mortar Aggregate: Custom crushed and ground pointing mortar sand or existing mortar retrieved from joints. Grind to a particle size that matches the adjacent mortar aggregate and color. Remove all fines passing the [100] sieve.
Joint-Sealant Backing: 1.
2.
Cylindrical Sealant Backings: ASTM C 1330, Type C (closed-cell material with a surface skin) and of size and density to control sealant depth and otherwise contribute to producing optimum sealant performance. Bond-Breaker Tape: Polyethylene tape or other plastic tape recommended by sealant manufacturer for preventing sealant from adhering to rigid, inflexible joint-filler materials or joint surfaces at back of joint where such adhesion would result in sealant failure. Provide self-adhesive tape where acceptable.
D.
Setting Buttons: Resilient plastic buttons, nonstaining to masonry, sized to suit joint thicknesses and bed depths of masonry units without intruding into required depths of pointing materials.
E.
Masking Tape: Nonstaining, nonabsorbent material, compatible with pointing mortar, joint primers, sealants, and surfaces adjacent to joints; that will easily come off entirely, including adhesive.
F.
Miscellaneous Products: Select materials and methods of use based on the following, subject to approval of a mockup: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.
Previous effectiveness in performing the work involved. Little possibility of damaging exposed surfaces. Consistency of each application. Uniformity of the resulting overall appearance. Do not use products or tools that could do the following: a.
b. 2.5
Remove, alter, or in any way harm the present condition or future preservation of existing surfaces, including surrounding surfaces not in contract. QLeave a residue on surfaces.
MORTAR MIXES A.
Preparing Lime Putty: Slake quicklime and prepare lime putty according to appendix to ASTM C 5 and manufacturer's written instructions.
MAINTENANCE OF UNIT MASONRY
040120-6
B.
Measurement and Mixing: Measure cementitious materials and sand in a dry condition by volume or equivalent weight. Do not measure by shovel; use known measure. Mix materials in a clean, mechanical batch mixer. 1.
C.
Colored Mortar: Produce mortar of color required by using specified ingredients. Do not alter specified proportions without Architect's approval 1.
2.6
Mixing Pointing Mortar: Thoroughly mix cementitious materials and sand together before adding any water. Then mix again adding only enough water to produce a damp, unworkable mix that will retain its form when pressed into a ball. Maintain mortar in this dampened condition for 15 to 30 minutes. Add remaining water in small portions until mortar reaches desired consistency. Use mortar within one hour of final mixing; do not retemper or use partially hardened material.
Mortar Pigments: Where mortar pigments are indicated, do not exceed a pigment-to-cement ratio of 1:10 by weight.
D.
Do not use admixtures in mortar unless otherwise indicated.
E.
Mortar Proportions: Mix mortar materials in the following proportions: 1.
Pointing Mortar for Brick: 1 part portland cement, 2 parts lime, and 6 parts sand a. Add mortar pigments to produce mortar colors required.
2.
Rebuilding (Setting) Mortar: Same as pointing mortar.
CHEMICAL CLEANING SOLUTIONS A.
Dilute chemical cleaners with water to produce solutions not exceeding concentration recommended by chemical-cleaner manufacturer.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
PROTECTION A.
Protect persons, motor vehicles, surrounding surfaces of building being restored, building site, plants, and surrounding buildings from harm resulting from masonry restoration work. 1.
B.
Erect temporary protective covers over walkways and at points of pedestrian and vehicular entrance and exit that must remain in service during course of restoration and cleaning work.
Comply with chemical-cleaner manufacturer's written instructions for protecting building and other surfaces against damage from exposure to its products. Prevent chemical-cleaning solutions from coming into contact with people, motor vehicles, landscaping, buildings, and other surfaces that could be harmed by such contact. 1.
Cover adjacent surfaces with materials that are proven to resist chemical cleaners used unless chemical cleaners being used will not damage adjacent surfaces. Use
MAINTENANCE OF UNIT MASONRY
040120-7
2. 3. 4. 5.
C.
Prevent mortar from staining face of surrounding masonry and other surfaces. 1. 2. 3. 4.
3.2
materials that contain only waterproof, UV-resistant adhesives. Apply masking agents to comply with manufacturer's written instructions. Do not apply liquid masking agent to painted or porous surfaces. When no longer needed, promptly remove masking to prevent adhesive staining. Keep wall wet below area being cleaned to prevent streaking from runoff. Do not clean masonry during winds of sufficient force to spread cleaning solutions to unprotected surfaces. Neutralize and collect alkaline and acid wastes for disposal off Owner's property. Dispose of runoff from cleaning operations by legal means and in a manner that prevents soil erosion, undermining of paving and foundations, damage to landscaping, and water penetration into building interiors.
Cover sills, ledges, and projections to protect from mortar droppings.\ Keep wall area wet below rebuilding and pointing work to discourage mortar from adhering. Immediately remove mortar in contact with exposed masonry and other surfaces. Clean mortar splatters from scaffolding at end of each day.
BRICK REMOVAL AND REPLACEMENT A.
At locations indicated, remove bricks that are damaged, spalled, or deteriorated Carefully demolish or remove entire units from joint to joint, without damaging surrounding masonry, in a manner that permits replacement with full-size units. 1.
When removing single bricks, remove material from center of brick and work toward outside edges.
B.
Support and protect remaining masonry that surrounds removal area. Maintain flashing, reinforcement, lintels, and adjoining construction in an undamaged condition.
C.
Notify Architect of unforeseen detrimental conditions including voids, cracks, bulges, and loose units in existing masonry backup, rotted wood, rusted metal, and other deteriorated items.
D.
Remove in an undamaged condition as many whole bricks as possible. 1. 2. 3. 4.
Remove mortar, loose particles, and soil from brick by cleaning with hand chisels, brushes, and water. Remove sealants by cutting close to brick with utility knife and cleaning with solvents. Store brick for reuse. Store off ground, on skids, and protected from weather. Deliver cleaned brick not required for reuse to Owner unless otherwise indicated.
E.
Clean bricks surrounding removal areas by removing mortar, dust, and loose particles in preparation for replacement.
F.
Replace removed damaged brick with other removed brickin good quality, where possible, or with new brick matching existing brick, including size. Do not use broken units unless they can be cut to usable size.
MAINTENANCE OF UNIT MASONRY
040120-8
G.
Install replacement brick into bonding and coursing pattern of existing brick. If cutting is required, use a motor-driven saw designed to cut masonry with clean, sharp, unchipped edges. 1. 2.
H.
Lay replacement brick with completely filled bed, head, and collar joints. Butter ends with sufficient mortar to fill head joints and shove into place. Wet both replacement and surrounding bricks that have ASTM C 67 initial rates of absorption (suction) of more than 30 g/30 sq. in. per min. Use wetting methods that ensure that units are nearly saturated but surface is dry when laid. 1. 2.
3.
3.4
Maintain joint width for replacement units to match existing joints. Use setting buttons or shims to set units accurately spaced with uniform joints.
Tool exposed mortar joints in repaired areas to match joints of surrounding existing brickwork. Rake out mortar used for laying brick before mortar sets and point new mortar joints in repaired area to comply with requirements for repointing existing masonry, and at same time as repointing of surrounding area. When mortar is sufficiently hard to support units, remove shims and other devices interfering with pointing of joints.
CLEANING MASONRY, GENERAL A.
B.
Proceed with cleaning in an orderly manner; work from top to bottom of each scaffold width and from one end of each elevation to the other. Ensure that dirty residues and rinse water will not wash over cleaned, dry surfaces. Use only those cleaning methods indicated for each masonry material and location. 1.
2.
Do not use wire brushes or brushes that are not resistant to chemical cleaner being used. Do not use plastic-bristle brushes if natural-fiber brushes will resist chemical cleaner being used. Use spray equipment that provides controlled application at volume and pressure indicated, measured at spray tip. Adjust pressure and volume to ensure that cleaning methods do not damage masonry. a.
3. 4. 5. 6.
Equip units with pressure gages.
For chemical-cleaner spray application, use low-pressure tank or chemical pump suitable for chemical cleaner indicated, equipped with cone-shaped spray tip. For water-spray application, use fan-shaped spray tip that disperses water at an angle of 25 to 50 degrees. For high-pressure water-spray application, use fan-shaped spray tip that disperses water at an angle of at least 40 degrees. For heated water-spray application, use equipment capable of maintaining temperature between 140 and 160 deg F at flow rates indicated.
C.
Perform each cleaning method indicated in a manner that results in uniform coverage of all surfaces, including corners, moldings, and interstices, and that produces an even effect without streaking or damaging masonry surfaces.
D.
Chemical-Cleaner Application Methods: Apply chemical cleaners to masonry surfaces to comply with chemical-cleaner manufacturer's written instructions; use brush or spray application. Do not spray apply at pressures exceeding 50 psi. Do not allow chemicals to remain on surface for periods longer than those indicated or recommended by manufacturer.
MAINTENANCE OF UNIT MASONRY
040120-9
E.
Rinse off chemical residue and soil by working upward from bottom to top of each treated area at each stage or scaffold setting. Periodically during each rinse, test pH of rinse water running off of cleaned area to determine that chemical cleaner is completely removed. 1.
F.
3.4
After cleaning is complete, remove protection no longer required. Remove tape and adhesive marks.
CLEANING BRICKWORK A.
Detergent Cleaning: 1. 2.
3. 4.
B.
Wet masonry with hot water applied by low-pressure spray. Scrub masonry with detergent solution using medium-soft brushes until soil is thoroughly dislodged and can be removed by rinsing. Use small brushes to remove soil from mortar joints and crevices. Dip brush in solution often to ensure that adequate fresh detergent is used and that masonry surface remains wet. Rinse with cold water applied by low-pressure spray to remove detergent solution and soil. Repeat cleaning procedure above where required to produce cleaning effect established by mockup.
Mold, Mildew, and Algae Removal: 1. 2. 3.
4. 5.
3.5
Apply neutralizing agent and repeat rinse if necessary to produce tested pH of between 6.7 and 7.5.
Wet masonry with hot water applied by low-pressure spray. Apply mold, mildew, and algae remover by brush or low-pressure spray. Scrub masonry with medium-soft brushes until mold, mildew, and algae are thoroughly dislodged and can be removed by rinsing. Use small brushes for mortar joints and crevices. Dip brush in mold, mildew, and algae remover often to ensure that adequate fresh cleaner is used and that masonry surface remains wet. Rinse with cold water applied by low-pressure spray to remove mold, mildew, and algae remover and soil. Repeat cleaning procedure above where required to produce cleaning effect established by mockup.
REPOINTING MASONRY A.
Rake out and repoint joints to the following extent: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9.
All joints in areas indicated. Joints where mortar is missing or where they contain holes. Cracked joints where cracks can be penetrated at least 1/4 inch (6 mm) by a knife blade 0.027 inch (0.7 mm) thick. Cracked joints where cracks are 1/16 inch or more in width and of any depth Joints where they sound hollow when tapped by metal object. Joints where they are worn back 1/4 inch or more from surface. Joints where they are deteriorated to point that mortar can be easily removed by hand, without tools. Joints where they have been filled with substances other than mortar. Joints indicated as sealant-filled joints.
MAINTENANCE OF UNIT MASONRY
040120-10
B.
Do not rake out and repoint joints where not required.
C.
Rake out joints as follows, according to procedures demonstrated in approved mockup: 1. 2.
3.
Remove mortar from joints to depth of joint width plus 1/8 inch but not less than 1/2 inch (13 mm) or not less than that required to expose sound, unweathered mortar. Remove mortar from masonry surfaces within raked-out joints to provide reveals with square backs and to expose masonry for contact with pointing mortar. Brush, vacuum, or flush joints to remove dirt and loose debris. Do not spall edges of masonry units or widen joints. Replace or patch damaged masonry units as directed by Architect. a.
b.
Cut out mortar by hand with chisel and resilient mallet. Do not use power-operated grinders without Architect's written approval based on approved quality-control program. Cut out center of mortar bed joints using angle grinders with diamond-impregnated metal blades. Remove remaining mortar by hand with chisel and resilient mallet. Strictly adhere to approved quality-control program.
D.
Notify Architect of unforeseen detrimental conditions including voids in mortar joints, cracks, loose masonry units, rotted wood, rusted metal, and other deteriorated items.
E.
Pointing with Mortar: 1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Rinse joint surfaces with water to remove dust and mortar particles. Time rinsing application so, at time of pointing, joint surfaces are damp but free of standing water. If rinse water dries, dampen joint surfaces before pointing. Apply pointing mortar first to areas where existing mortar was removed to depths greater than surrounding areas. Apply in layers not greater than 3/8 inch (9 mm) until a uniform depth is formed. Fully compact each layer thoroughly and allow it to become thumbprint hard before applying next layer. After low areas have been filled to same depth as remaining joints, point all joints by placing mortar in layers not greater than 3/8 inch (9 mm). Fully compact each layer and allow to become thumbprint hard before applying next layer. Where existing masonry units have worn or rounded edges, slightly recess finished mortar surface below face of masonry to avoid widened joint faces. Take care not to spread mortar beyond joint edges onto exposed masonry surfaces or to featheredge the mortar. When mortar is thumbprint hard, tool joints to match original appearance of joints as demonstrated in approved mockup. Remove excess mortar from edge of joint by brushing. Cure mortar by maintaining in thoroughly damp condition for at least 72 consecutive hours including weekends and holidays. a.
b.
6.
Acceptable curing methods include covering with wet burlap and plastic sheeting, periodic hand misting, and periodic mist spraying using system of pipes, mist heads, and timers. Adjust curing methods to ensure that pointing mortar is damp throughout its depth without eroding surface mortar.
Hairline cracking within the mortar or mortar separation at edge of a joint is unacceptable. Completely remove such mortar and repoint.
MAINTENANCE OF UNIT MASONRY
040120-11
F.
3.6
Where repointing work precedes cleaning of existing masonry, allow mortar to harden at least 30 days before beginning cleaning work.
FINAL CLEANING A.
After mortar has fully hardened, thoroughly clean exposed masonry surfaces of excess mortar and foreign matter; use wood scrapers, stiff-nylon or -fiber brushes, and clean water, spray applied at low pressure. 1. 2.
Do not use metal scrapers or brushes. Do not use acidic or alkaline cleaners.
B.
Wash adjacent woodwork and other nonmasonry surfaces. Use detergent and soft brushes or cloths.
C.
Clean mortar and debris from roof; remove debris from gutters and downspouts. Rinse off roof and flush gutters and downspouts.
D.
Sweep and rake adjacent pavement and grounds to remove mortar and debris. Where necessary, pressure wash pavement surfaces to remove mortar, dust, dirt, and stains.
END OF SECTION 040120
MAINTENANCE OF UNIT MASONRY
040120-12
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY SECTION 042200
SECTION 042200 - CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY
PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. In the event of any conflicts between the requirements of these Sections, the more stringent requirement shall apply.
SECTION REQUIREMENTS A.
Comply with ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1
MASONRY UNITS A.
2.2
Concrete Masonry Units: ASTM C 90; Weight Classification, Normal Weight.
MORTAR A.
Mortar: ASTM C 270, proportion specification. 1. 2.
2.3
Do not use calcium chloride in mortar. For interior non-load-bearing partitions, and for other applications where another type is not indicated, use Type N.
REINFORCEMENT, TIES, AND ANCHORS A.
Joint Reinforcement: ASTM A 951. 1. 2. 3. 4.
Coating: Mill galvanized at interior walls. Wire Diameter for Side Rods: W1.7 or 0.148 inch. Wire Diameter for Cross Rods: W1.7 or 0.148 inch. For single-wythe masonry, provide either ladder design or truss design.
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1
INSTALLATION, GENERAL A.
Cut masonry units with saw. Install with cut surfaces and, where possible, cut edges concealed.
B.
Matching Existing Masonry: Match coursing, bonding, color, and texture of existing masonry.
CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY
042200-1
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
3.2
CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY SECTION 042200
C.
Stopping and Resuming Work: Rack back units; do not tooth.
D.
Build non-load-bearing interior partitions as indicated.
E.
Tool exposed joints slightly concave when thumbprint hard, unless otherwise indicated.
F.
Keep all areas clean of mortar droppings and other materials during construction.
CLEANING A.
Clean masonry as work progresses. Remove mortar fins and smears before tooling joints.
B.
Final Cleaning: After mortar is thoroughly cured, clean exposed masonry. 1. 2.
Wet wall surfaces with water before applying acidic cleaner, then remove cleaner promptly by rinsing thoroughly with clear water. Clean masonry with a proprietary acidic cleaner applied according to manufacturer's written instructions.
END OF SECTION 042000
CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY
042200-2
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING SECTION 051200
SECTION 051200 - STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY A.
Section Includes: 1. 2. 3.
B.
Related Requirements: 1.
2.
1.3
Section 055000 "Metal Fabrications" for steel lintels and shelf angles not attached to structural-steel frame, miscellaneous steel fabrications, and other steel items not defined as structural steel. Section 099113 "Exterior Painting" and Section 099123 "Interior Painting"for surface-preparation and priming requirements.
DEFINITIONS A.
Structural Steel: Elements of the structural frame indicated on Drawings and as described in AISC 303, "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges."
B.
Heavy Sections: Rolled and built-up sections as follows: 1. 2. 3.
C.
1.4
Structural steel. Field-installed shear connectors. Grout.
Shapes included in ASTM A 6/A 6M with flanges thicker than 1-1/2 inches (38 mm). Welded built-up members with plates thicker than 2 inches (50 mm). Column base plates thicker than 2 inches (50 mm).
Demand Critical Welds: Those welds, the failure of which would result in significant degradation of the strength and stiffness of the Seismic-Load-Resisting System and which are indicated as "Demand Critical" or "Seismic Critical" on Drawings.
COORDINATION A.
Coordinate selection of shop primers with topcoats to be applied over them. Comply with paint and coating manufacturers' written recommendations to ensure that shop primers and topcoats are compatible with one another.
STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING
051200-1
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
B.
1.5
Coordinate installation of anchorage items to be embedded in or attached to other construction without delaying the Work. Provide setting diagrams, sheet metal templates, instructions, and directions for installation.
PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS A.
1.6
Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.
ACTION SUBMITTALS A.
Product Data: For each type of product.
B.
Shop Drawings: Show fabrication of structural-steel components. 1. 2. 3.
4. 5. 6. 7. C.
Include details of cuts, connections, splices, camber, holes, and other pertinent data. Include embedment Drawings. Indicate welds by standard AWS symbols, distinguishing between shop and field welds, and show size, length, and type of each weld. Show backing bars that are to be removed and supplemental fillet welds where backing bars are to remain. Indicate type, size, and length of bolts, distinguishing between shop and field bolts. Identify pretensioned and slip-critical, high-strength bolted connections. Identify members and connections of the Seismic-Load-Resisting System. Indicate locations and dimensions of protected zones. Identify demand critical welds.
Welding Procedure Specifications (WPSs) and Procedure Qualification Records (PQRs): Provide according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel," for each welded joint, including the following: 1. 2.
1.7
STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING SECTION 051200
Power source (constant current or constant voltage). Electrode manufacturer and trade name, for demand critical welds.
INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A.
Qualification Data: For testing agency.
B.
Welding certificates.
C.
Paint Compatibility Certificates: From manufacturers of topcoats applied over shop primers, certifying that shop primers are compatible with topcoats.
D.
Mill test reports for structural steel, including chemical and physical properties.
E.
Product Test Reports: For the following: 1. 2. 3. 4.
Bolts, nuts, and washers including mechanical properties and chemical analysis. Direct-tension indicators. Tension-control, high-strength, bolt-nut-washer assemblies. Shear stud connectors.
STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING
051200-2
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
5. 6.
1.8
Shop primers. Nonshrink grout.
F.
Survey of existing conditions.
G.
Source quality-control reports.
H.
Field quality-control reports.
QUALITY ASSURANCE A.
Installer Qualifications: A qualified installer who participates in the AISC Quality Certification Program and is designated an AISC-Certified Erector, Category ACSE.
B.
Shop-Painting Applicators: Qualified according to AISC's Sophisticated Paint Endorsement P1 or to SSPC-QP 3, "Standard Procedure for Evaluating Qualifications of Shop Painting Applicators."
C.
Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel." 1.
D.
Welders and welding operators performing work on bottom-flange, demand-critical welds shall pass the supplemental welder qualification testing, as required by AWS D1.8/D1.8M. FCAW-S and FCAW-G shall be considered separate processes for welding personnel qualification.
Comply with applicable provisions of the following specifications and documents: 1. 2. 3. 4.
1.9
STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING SECTION 051200
AISC 303. AISC 341 and AISC 341s1. AISC 360. RCSC's "Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts."
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A.
Store materials to permit easy access for inspection and identification. Keep steel members off ground and spaced by using pallets, dunnage, or other supports and spacers. Protect steel members and packaged materials from corrosion and deterioration. 1.
B.
Do not store materials on structure in a manner that might cause distortion, damage, or overload to members or supporting structures. Repair or replace damaged materials or structures as directed.
Store fasteners in a protected place in sealed containers with manufacturer's labels intact. 1. 2.
Fasteners may be repackaged provided Owner's testing and inspecting agency observes repackaging and seals containers. Clean and relubricate bolts and nuts that become dry or rusty before use.
STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING
051200-3
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
3.
STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING SECTION 051200
Comply with manufacturers' written recommendations for cleaning and lubricating ASTM F 1852 fasteners and for retesting fasteners after lubrication.
PAT 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1
2.2
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A.
Connections: Provide details of connections required by the Contract Documents to be selected or completed by structural-steel fabricator, to withstand loads indicated and comply with other information and restrictions indicated.
B.
Moment Connections: Type PR, partially Type FR, fully restrained.
C.
Construction Combined system of moment frame, braced frame, and shear walls.
STRUCTURAL-STEEL MATERIALS A.
Recycled Content of Steel Products: Postconsumer recycled content plus one-half of preconsumer recycled content not less than 25 percent.
B.
W-Shapes: ASTM A 992/A 992M
C.
Channels, Angles, M or S Shapes: ASTM A 36/A 36M
D.
Plate and Bar: ASTM A 36/A 36M
E.
Corrosion-Resisting Structural-Steel Shapes, Plates, and Bars: ASTM A 588/A 588M, Grade 50.
F.
Cold-Formed Hollow Structural Sections: ASTM A 500/A 500M, Grade B, structural tubing.
G.
Corrosion-Resisting, Cold-Formed Hollow Structural Sections: ASTM A 847/A 847M, structural tubing.
H.
Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type E or Type S, Grade B. 1. 2.
2.3
Weight Class: Standard. Finish: Black
I.
Steel Castings: ASTM A 216/A 216M, Grade WCB with supplementary requirement S11.
J.
Steel Forgings: ASTM A 668/A 668M.
K.
Welding Electrodes: Comply with AWS requirements.
BOLTS, CONNECTORS, AND ANCHORS
STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING
051200-4
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
A.
High-Strength Bolts, Nuts, and Washers: ASTM A 325, Type 1, heavy-hex steel structural bolts; ASTM A 563, Grade C, heavy-hex carbon-steel nuts; and ASTM F 436, Type 1, hardened carbon-steel washers; all with plain finish. 1.
2.5
Shear Connectors: ASTM A 108, Grades 1015 through 1020, headed-stud type, cold-finished carbon steel; AWS D1.1/D1.1M, Type B.
C.
Unheaded Anchor Rods: ASTM F 1554, Grade 36
D.
Headed Anchor Rods: ASTM F 1554, Grade 36
E.
Threaded Rods: ASTM A 36/A 36M Nuts: ASTM A 563 hex carbon steel. Washers ASTM A 36/A 36M carbon steel. Finish: Plain
F.
Eye Bolts and Nuts: Made from cold-finished carbon steel bars, ASTM A 108, Grade 1030.
G.
Sleeve Nuts: Made from cold-finished carbon steel bars, ASTM A 108, Grade 1018.
PRIMER A.
Low-Emitting Materials: Paints and coatings shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California Department of Public Health's (formerly, the California Department of Health Services') "Standard Method for the Testing and Evaluation of Volatile Organic Chemical Emissions from Indoor Sources Using Environmental Chambers."
B.
Primer: Comply with Section 099113 "Exterior Painting" and Section 099123 "Interior Painting."
C.
Primer: SSPC-Paint 25 BCS, [Type I] [Type II], zinc oxide, alkyd, linseed oil primer.
GROUT A.
2.6
Direct-Tension Indicators: ASTM F 959, Type 325, compressible-washer type with plain finish.
B.
1. 2. 3.
2.4
STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING SECTION 051200
Nonmetallic, Shrinkage-Resistant Grout: ASTM C 1107/C 1107M, factory-packaged, nonmetallic aggregate grout, noncorrosive and nonstaining, mixed with water to consistency suitable for application and a 30-minute working time.
FABRICATION A.
Structural Steel: Fabricate and assemble in shop to greatest extent possible. Fabricate according to AISC 303, "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges," and to AISC 360.
STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING
051200-5
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
1. 2. 3. 4. 5.
B.
Camber structural-steel members where indicated. Fabricate beams with rolling camber up. Identify high-strength structural steel according to ASTM A 6/A 6M and maintain markings until structural steel has been erected. Mark and match-mark materials for field assembly. Complete structural-steel assemblies, including welding of units, before starting shop-priming operations.
Thermal Cutting: Perform thermal cutting by machine to greatest extent possible.
1.
Plane thermally cut edges to be welded to comply with requirements in AWS D1.1/D1.1M.
C.
Bolt Holes: Cut, drill, mechanically thermal cut, or punch standard bolt holes perpendicular to metal surfaces.Finishing: Accurately finish ends of columns and other members transmitting bearing loads.
D.
Finishing: Accurately finish ends of columns and other members transmitting bearing loads.
E.
Cleaning: Clean and prepare steel surfaces that are to remain unpainted according to SSPC-SP 1, "Solvent Cleaning.
F.
Shear Connectors: Prepare steel surfaces as recommended by manufacturer of shear connectors. Use automatic end welding of headed-stud shear connectors according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M and manufacturer's written instructions.
G.
Steel Wall-Opening Framing: Select true and straight members for fabricating steel wall-opening framing to be attached to structural-steel frame. Straighten as required to provide uniform, square, and true members in completed wall framing. Build up welded framing, weld exposed joints continuously, and grind smooth.
H.
Welded Door Frames: Build up welded door frames attached to structural-steel frame. Weld exposed joints continuously and grind smooth. Plug-weld fixed steel bar stops to frames. Secure removable stops to frames with countersunk machine screws, uniformly spaced not more than 10 inches (250 mm) o.c. unless otherwise indicated.
I.
Holes: Provide holes required for securing other work to structural steel and for other work to pass through steel members. 1. 2. 3.
2.7
STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING SECTION 051200
Cut, drill, or punch holes perpendicular to steel surfaces. Do not thermally cut bolt holes or enlarge holes by burning. Baseplate Holes: Cut, drill, mechanically thermal cut, or punch holes perpendicular to steel surfaces. Weld threaded nuts to framing and other specialty items indicated to receive other work.
SHOP CONNECTIONS
STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING
051200-6
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
A.
High-Strength Bolts: Shop install high-strength bolts according to RCSC's "Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts" for type of bolt and type of joint specified. 1.
B.
Assemble and weld built-up sections by methods that maintain true alignment of axes without exceeding tolerances in AISC 303 for mill material.
SHOP PRIMING A.
Shop prime steel surfaces except the following: 1. 2. 4. 5. 6.
B.
C.
SSPC-SP 2, "Hand Tool Cleaning." SSPC-SP 3, "Power Tool Cleaning." SSPC-SP 11, "Power Tool Cleaning to Bare Metal."
Priming: Immediately after surface preparation, apply primer according to manufacturer's written instructions and at rate recommended by SSPC to provide a minimum dry film thickness of 1.5 mils. Use priming methods that result in full coverage of joints, corners, edges, and exposed surfaces. 1. 2.
D.
Surfaces embedded in concrete or mortar. Extend priming of partially embedded members to a depth of 2 inches (50 mm). Surfaces to be field welded. Surfaces to receive sprayed fire-resistive materials (applied fireproofing). Galvanized surfaces. Surfaces enclosed in interior construction.
Surface Preparation: Clean surfaces to be painted. Remove loose rust and mill scale and spatter, slag, or flux deposits. Prepare surfaces according to the following specifications and standards: 1. 2. 3.
2.9
Joint Type: Snug tightened
Weld Connections: Comply with AWS D1.1/D1.1M for tolerances, appearances, welding procedure specifications, weld quality, and methods used in correcting welding work. 1.
2..8
STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING SECTION 051200
Stripe paint corners, crevices, bolts, welds, and sharp edges. Apply two coats of shop paint to surfaces that are inaccessible after assembly or erection. Change color of second coat to distinguish it from first.
Painting: Prepare steel and apply a one-coat, nonasphaltic primer complying with SSPC-PS Guide 7.00, "Painting System Guide 7.00: Guide for Selecting One-Coat Shop Painting Systems," to provide a dry film thickness of not less than 1.5 mils
GALVANIZING A.
Hot-Dip Galvanized Finish: Apply zinc coating by the hot-dip process to structural steel according to ASTM A 123/A 123M.
STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING
051200-7
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
1. 2.
2.10
STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING SECTION 051200
Fill vent and drain holes that are exposed in the finished Work unless they function as weep holes, by plugging with zinc solder and filing off smooth. Galvanize lintels shelf angles and welded door frames attached to structural-steel frame and located in exterior walls.
SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A.
Testing Agency: Contractor will engage a qualified testing agency to perform shop tests and inspections. 1.
Provide testing agency with access to places where structural-steel work is being fabricated or produced to perform tests and inspections.
B.
Bolted Connections: Inspect and test shop-bolted connections according to RCSC's "Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts."
C.
Welded Connections: AWS D1.1/D1.1M
D.
In addition to visual inspection, test and inspect shop-welded shear connectors according to requirements in AWS D1.1/D1.1M for stud welding and as follows: 1. 2.
E.
Visually inspect shop-welded connections according to
Perform bend tests if visual inspections reveal either a less-than-continuous 360-degree flash or welding repairs to any shear connector. Conduct tests according to requirements in AWS D1.1/D1.1M on additional shear connectors if weld fracture occurs on shear connectors already tested.
Prepare test and inspection reports.
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1
EXAMINATION A.
Verify, with certified steel erector present, elevations of concrete- and masonry-bearing surfaces and locations of anchor rods, bearing plates, and other embedments for compliance with requirements. 1.
B. 3.2
Prepare a certified survey of existing conditions. Include bearing surfaces, anchor rods, bearing plates, and other embedments showing dimensions, locations, angles, and elevations.
Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
PREPARATION
A.
Provide temporary shores, guys, braces, and other supports during erection to keep structural steel secure, plumb, and in alignment against temporary construction loads and loads equal in intensity to design loads. Remove temporary supports when permanent structural steel, connections, and bracing are in place unless otherwise indicated.
STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING
051200-8
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
1.
3.3
Do not remove temporary shoring supporting composite deck construction until cast-in-place concrete has attained its design compressive strength.
ERECTION A.
Set structural steel accurately in locations and to elevations indicated and according to AISC 303 and AISC 360.
B.
Baseplates Bearing Plates and Leveling Plates: Clean concrete- and masonry-bearing surfaces of bond-reducing materials, and roughen surfaces prior to setting plates. Clean bottom surface of plates. 1. 2. 3.
4.
Set plates for structural members on wedges, shims, or setting nuts as required. Weld plate washers to top of baseplate. Snug-tighten anchor rods after supported members have been positioned and plumbed. Do not remove wedges or shims but, if protruding, cut off flush with edge of plate before packing with grout. Promptly pack grout solidly between bearing surfaces and plates so no voids remain. Neatly finish exposed surfaces; protect grout and allow to cure. Comply with manufacturer's written installation instructions for shrinkage-resistant grouts.
C.
Maintain erection tolerances of structural steel within AISC 303, "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges."
D.
Align and adjust various members that form part of complete frame or structure before permanently fastening. Before assembly, clean bearing surfaces and other surfaces that are in permanent contact with members. Perform necessary adjustments to compensate for discrepancies in elevations and alignment. 1. 2.
3.4
STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING SECTION 051200
Level and plumb individual members of structure. Make allowances for difference between temperature at time of erection and mean temperature when structure is completed and in service.
E.
Splice members only where indicated.
F. G.
Do not use thermal cutting during erection. Do not enlarge unfair holes in members by burning or using drift pins. Ream holes that must be enlarged to admit bolts.
H.
Shear Connectors: Prepare steel surfaces as recommended by manufacturer of shear connectors. Use automatic end welding of headed-stud shear connectors according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M and manufacturer's written instructions.
FIELD CONNECTION A.
High-Strength Bolts: Install high-strength bolts according to RCSC's "Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts" for type of bolt and type of joint specified. 1.
Joint Type: Snug tightened
STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING
051200-9
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
B.
Weld Connections: Comply with AWS D1.1/D1.1M for tolerances, appearances, welding procedure specifications, weld quality, and methods used in correcting welding work. 1. 2. 3.
3.5
Comply with AISC 303 and AISC 360 for bearing, alignment, adequacy of temporary connections, and removal of paint on surfaces adjacent to field welds. Remove backing bars or runoff tabs, back gouge, and grind steel smooth. Assemble and weld built-up sections by methods that maintain true alignment of axes without exceeding tolerances in AISC 303, "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges," for mill material.
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A.
Special Inspections: contractor will engage a qualified special inspector to perform the following special inspections: 1. 2. 3.
Verify structural-steel materials and inspect steel frame joint details. Verify weld materials and inspect welds. Verify connection materials and inspect high-strength bolted connections.
B.
Testing Agency: contractor will engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections.
C.
Bolted Connections: Inspect and test bolted connections according to RCSC's "Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts."
D.
Welded Connections: Visually inspect field welds according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M.
E.
In addition to visual inspection, test and inspect field-welded shear connectors according to requirements in AWS D1.1/D1.1M for stud welding and as follows: 1. 2.
3.7
STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING SECTION 051200
Perform bend tests if visual inspections reveal either a less-than-continuous 360-degree flash or welding repairs to any shear connector. Conduct tests according to requirements in AWS D1.1/D1.1M on additional shear connectors if weld fracture occurs on shear connectors already tested.
REPAIRS AND PROTECTION A.
Galvanized Surfaces: Clean areas where galvanizing is damaged or missing and repair galvanizing to comply with ASTM A 780/A 780M.
B.
Touchup Painting: Immediately after erection, clean exposed areas where primer is damaged or missing and paint with the same material as used for shop painting to comply with SSPC-PA 1 for touching up shop-painted surfaces. 1.
C.
Clean and prepare surfaces by SSPC-SP 2 hand-tool cleaning or SSPC-SP 3 power-tool cleaning.
Touchup Painting: Cleaning and touchup painting are specified in Section 099113 "Exterior Painting" and Section 099123 "Interior Painting."
STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING
051200-10
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING SECTION 051200
END OF SECTION 051200
STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING
051200-11
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
STEEL DECKING SECTION 053100
SECTION 053100 - STEEL DECKING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY A.
Section Includes: 1. 2.
B.
Related Requirements: 1. 2. 3. 4.
1.3
Section 051200 "Structural Steel Framing" for shop- and field-welded shear connectors. Section 055000 "Metal Fabrications" for framing deck openings with miscellaneous steel shapes. Section 099113 "Exterior Painting" for repair painting of primed deck and finish painting of deck. Section 099123 "Interior Painting" for repair painting of primed deck and finish painting of deck.
ACTION SUBMITTALS A.
Product Data: For each type of deck, accessory, and product indicated.
B.
Shop Drawings: 1.
1.4
Roof deck. Floor deck.
Include layout and types of deck panels, anchorage details, reinforcing channels, pans, cut deck openings, special jointing, accessories, and attachments to other construction.
QUALITY ASSURANCE A.
Testing Agency Qualifications: Qualified according to ASTM E 329 for testing indicated.
B.
Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.3, "Structural Welding Code - Sheet Steel."
C.
Electrical Raceway Units: Provide UL-labeled cellular floor-deck units complying with UL 209 and listed in UL's "Electrical Construction Equipment Directory" for use with standard header ducts and outlets for electrical distribution systems.
D.
FM Global Listing: Provide steel roof deck evaluated by FM Global and listed in its "Approval Guide, Building Materials" for Class 1 fire rating and Class 1-90 windstorm ratings.
STEEL DECKING
053100-1
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
1.5
STEEL DECKING SECTION 053100
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A.
Protect steel deck from corrosion, deformation, and other damage during delivery, storage, and handling.
B.
Stack steel deck on platforms or pallets and slope to provide drainage. Protect with a waterproof covering and ventilate to avoid condensation. 1.
Protect and ventilate acoustical cellular roof deck with factory-installed insulation to maintain insulation free of moisture.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1
2.2
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A.
AISI Specifications: Comply with calculated structural characteristics of steel deck according to AISI's "North American Specification for the Design of Cold-Formed Steel Structural Members."
B.
Low-Emitting Materials: Paints and coatings shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers."
ACCESSORIES A.
General: Provide manufacturer's standard accessory materials for deck that comply with requirements indicated.
B.
Mechanical Fasteners: Corrosion-resistant, low-velocity, power-actuated or pneumatically driven carbon-steel fasteners; or self-drilling, self-threading screws.
C.
Side-Lap Fasteners: Corrosion-resistant, hexagonal washer head; self-drilling, carbon-steel screws, No. 10 minimum diameter.
D.
Flexible Closure Strips: Vulcanized, closed-cell, synthetic rubber.
E.
Miscellaneous Sheet Metal Deck Accessories: Steel sheet, minimum yield strength of 33,000 psi , not less than 0.0359-inch design uncoated thickness, of same material and finish as deck; of profile indicated or required for application.
F.
Galvanizing Repair Paint: ASTM A 780.
G.
Repair Paint: Manufacturer's standard rust-inhibitive primer of same color as primer.
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1
EXAMINATION A.
Examine supporting frame and field conditions for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance.
STEEL DECKING
053100-2
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
B. 3.2
3.3
STEEL DECKING SECTION 053100
Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
INSTALLATION, GENERAL A.
Install deck panels and accessories according to applicable specifications and commentary in SDI Publication No. 31, manufacturer's written instructions, and requirements in this Section.
B.
Install temporary shoring before placing deck panels if required to meet deflection limitations.
C.
Locate deck bundles to prevent overloading of supporting members.
D.
Place deck panels on supporting frame and adjust to final position with ends accurately aligned and bearing on supporting frame before being permanently fastened. Do not stretch or contract side-lap interlocks.
E.
Place deck panels flat and square and fasten to supporting frame without warp or deflection.
F.
Cut and neatly fit deck panels and accessories around openings and other work projecting through or adjacent to deck.
G.
Provide additional reinforcement and closure pieces at openings as required for strength, continuity of deck, and support of other work.
H.
Comply with AWS requirements and procedures for manual shielded metal arc welding, appearance and quality of welds, and methods used for correcting welding work.
I.
Mechanical fasteners may be used in lieu of welding to fasten deck. Locate mechanical fasteners and install according to deck manufacturer's written instructions.
DECK INSTALLATION A.
Fasten deck panels to steel supporting members by arc spot (puddle) welds of the surface diameter indicated or arc seam welds with an equal perimeter that is not less than 1-1/2 inches long, and as follows: 1. 2.
3. B.
Weld Diameter: 5/8 inch, nominal. Weld Spacing: Weld edge and interior ribs of deck units with a minimum of two welds per deck unit at each support. Space welds 18 inches apart, maximum, based on roof-area definitions in FMG Loss Prevention Data Sheet 1-28. Weld Washers: Install weld washers at each weld location.
Side-Lap and Perimeter Edge Fastening: Fasten side laps and perimeter edges of panels between supports, at intervals not exceeding the lesser of 1/2 of the span or 18 inches and as follows: 1.
STEEL DECKING
Mechanically fasten with self-drilling, No. 10 diameter or larger, carbon-steel screws.
053100-3
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
C.
End Bearing: Install deck ends over supporting frame with a minimum end bearing of 1-1/2 inches with end joints as follows: 1.
D.
3.4
End Joints: Lapped 2 inches minimum.
Miscellaneous Deck Accessories: Install ridge and valley plates, finish strips, end closures, and reinforcing channels according to deck manufacturer's written instructions. Weld or mechanically fasten to substrate to provide a complete deck installation. 1.
E.
STEEL DECKING SECTION 053100
Weld cover plates at changes in direction of roof-deck panels unless otherwise indicated.
Flexible Closure Strips: Install flexible closure strips over partitions, walls, and where indicated. Install with adhesive according to manufacturer's written instructions to ensure complete closure.
PROTECTION A.
Provide final protection and maintain conditions to ensure that steel deck is without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.
END OF SECTION 053100
STEEL DECKING
053100-4
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING SECTION 054000
SECTION 054000 - COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY A.
Section Includes: 1. 2.
B.
Related Requirements: 1. 2.
1.3
Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.
ACTION SUBMITTALS A.
Product Data: For each type of cold-formed steel framing product and accessory.
B.
Shop Drawings: 1. 2.
1.5
Section 055000 "Metal Fabrications" for masonry shelf angles and connections. Section 092216 "Non-Structural Metal Framing" for interior non-load-bearing, metal-stud framing and ceiling-suspension assemblies.
PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS A.
1.4
Load-bearing wall framing. Roof rafter framing.
Include layout, spacings, sizes, thicknesses, and types of cold-formed steel framing; fabrication; and fastening and anchorage details, including mechanical fasteners. Indicate reinforcing channels, opening framing, supplemental framing, strapping, bracing, bridging, splices, accessories, connection details, and attachment to adjoining work.
QUALITY ASSURANCE A.
Testing Agency Qualifications: Qualified according to ASTM E 329 for testing indicated.
B.
Product Tests: Mill certificates or data from a qualified independent testing agenc, or in-house testing with calibrated test equipment indicating steel sheet complies with requirements, including base-metal thickness, yield strength, tensile strength, total elongation, chemical requirements, and metallic-coating thickness.
C.
Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to the following: 1. 2.
AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel. AWS D1.3/D1.3M, "Structural Welding Code - Sheet Steel."
COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING
054000-1
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
D.
1.6
COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING SECTION 054000
Comply with AISI S230 "Standard for Cold-Formed Steel Framing - Prescriptive Method for One and Two Family Dwellings."
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A.
Protect cold-formed steel framing from corrosion, moisture staining, deformation, and other damage during delivery, storage, and handling.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1
MANUFACTURERS A.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.
2.2
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A.
AISI Specifications and Standards: Unless more stringent requirements are indicated, comply with AISI S100 and AISI S200.
B.
Fire-Resistance Ratings: Comply with ASTM E 119; testing by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency. 1.
2.3
Indicate design designations from UL's "Fire Resistance Directory" or from the listings of another qualified testing agency.
COLD-FORMED STEEL FRAMING, GENERAL A.
Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1003/A 1003M, Structural Grade, Type H, metallic coated, of grade and coating weight as follows:
1. 2. B.
Grade: ST33H (ST230H) Coating: G60
Steel Sheet for Clips: ASTM A 653/A 653M, structural steel, zinc coated, of grade and coating as follows: 1. 2.
2.4
Dietrich Metal Framing; a Worthington Industries company. MarinoWARE. Steel Construction Systems. United Metal Products, Inc. United Steel Manufacturing.
Grade: 33 Coating: G60
LOAD-BEARING WALL FRAMING
COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING
054000-2
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
A.
Steel Studs: Manufacturer's standard C-shaped steel studs, of web depths indicated, punched, with stiffened flanges, and as follows: 1. 2.
B.
Steel Rafters and exterior soffit frame: Manufacturer's standard C-shaped steel sections, of web depths indicated, with stiffened flanges, and as follows: 1. 2.
Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: As indicated on drawings. Flange Width: 2 inches , minimum.
FRAMING ACCESSORIES A.
Fabricate steel-framing accessories from steel sheet, ASTM A 1003/A 1003M, Structural Grade, Type H, metallic coated, of same grade and coating weight used for framing members.
B.
Provide accessories of manufacturer's standard thickness and configuration, unless otherwise indicated, as follows: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10 11.
2.7
Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: As indicated on drawings. Flange Width: 2 inches
ROOF-RAFTER FRAMING A.
2.6
Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: Matching steel studs Flange Width: 1-1/4 inches
Steel Box or Back-to-Back Headers: Manufacturer's standard C-shapes used to form header beams, of web depths indicated, unpunched, with stiffened flanges, and as follows: 1. 2.
2.5
Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: As indicated on drawings. Flange Width 2 inches
Steel Track: Manufacturer's standard U-shaped steel track, of web depths indicated, unpunched, with straight flanges, and as follows: 1. 2.
C.
COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING SECTION 054000
Supplementary framing. Bracing, bridging, and solid blocking. Web stiffeners. Anchor clips. End clips. Foundation clips. Gusset plates. Stud kickers and knee braces. Joist hangers and end closures. Hole reinforcing plates. Backer plates.
ANCHORS, CLIPS, AND FASTENERS A.
Steel Shapes and Clips: ASTM A 36/A 36M, zinc coated by hot-dip process according to ASTM A 123/A 123M.
COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING
054000-3
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
B.
Anchor Bolts: ASTM F 1554, Grade 36, threaded carbon-steel hex-headed bolts and carbon-steel nuts; and flat, hardened-steel washers; zinc coated by hot-dip process according to ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class C
C.
Expansion Anchors: Fabricated from corrosion-resistant materials, with allowable load or strength design capacities calculated according to ICC-ES AC193 and ACI 318 greater than or equal to the design load, as determined by testing per ASTM E 488 conducted by a qualified testing agency.
D.
Power-Actuated Anchors: Fastener system of type suitable for application indicated, fabricated from corrosion-resistant materials, with allowable load capacities calculated according to ICC-ES AC70, greater than or equal to the design load, as determined by testing per ASTM E 1190 conducted by a qualified testing agency.
E.
Mechanical Fasteners: ASTM C 1513, corrosion-resistant-coated, self-drilling, self-tapping, steel drill screws. 1.
F. 2.8
2.9
COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING SECTION 054000
Head Type: elsewhere.
Low-profile head beneath sheathing, manufacturer's standard
Welding Electrodes: Comply with AWS standards.
MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A.
Galvanizing Repair Paint: ASTM A 780.
B.
Nonmetallic, Nonshrink Grout: Premixed, nonmetallic, noncorrosive, nonstaining grout containing selected silica sands, portland cement, shrinkage-compensating agents, and plasticizing and water-reducing agents, complying with ASTM C 1107/C 1107M, with fluid consistency and 30-minute working time.
C.
Shims: Load bearing, high-density multimonomer plastic, and nonleaching; or of cold-formed steel of same grade and coating as framing members supported by shims.
D.
Sealer Gaskets: Closed-cell neoprene foam, 1/4 inch thick, selected from manufacturer's standard widths to match width of bottom track or rim track members.
FABRICATION A.
Fabricate cold-formed steel framing and accessories plumb, square, and true to line, and with connections securely fastened, according to referenced AISI's specifications and standards, manufacturer's written instructions, and requirements in this Section. 1. 2. 3.
Fabricate framing assemblies using jigs or templates. Cut framing members by sawing or shearing; do not torch cut. Fasten cold-formed steel framing members by welding, screw fastening, clinch fastening, pneumatic pin fastening, or riveting as standard with fabricator. Wire tying of framing members is not permitted.
COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING
054000-4
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
a.
b.
4.
COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING SECTION 054000 Comply with AWS D1.3/D1.3M requirements and procedures for welding, appearance and quality of welds, and methods used in correcting welding work. Locate mechanical fasteners and install according to Shop Drawings, with screw penetrating joined members by no fewer than three exposed screw threads.
Fasten other materials to cold-formed steel framing by welding, bolting, pneumatic pin fastening, or screw fastening, according to Shop Drawings.
B.
Reinforce, stiffen, and brace framing assemblies to withstand handling, delivery, and erection stresses. Lift fabricated assemblies to prevent damage or permanent distortion.
C.
Fabrication Tolerances: Fabricate assemblies level, plumb, and true to line to a maximum allowable tolerance variation of 1/8 inch in 10 feet and as follows: 1.
2.
Spacing: Space individual framing members no more than plus or minus 1/8 inch from plan location. Cumulative error shall not exceed minimum fastening requirements of sheathing or other finishing materials. Squareness: Fabricate each cold-formed steel framing assembly to a maximum out-of-square tolerance of 1/8 inch.
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1
3.2
3.3
EXAMINATION A.
Examine supporting substrates and abutting structural framing for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.
B.
Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
PREPARATION A.
Install load bearing shims or grout between the underside of load-bearing wall bottom track and the top of foundation wall or slab at locations with a gap larger than 1/4 inch (6 mm) to ensure a uniform bearing surface on supporting concrete or masonry construction.
B.
Install sealer gaskets at the underside of wall bottom track or rim track and at the top of foundation wall or slab at stud or joist locations.
INSTALLATION, GENERAL A.
Cold-formed steel framing may be shop or field fabricated for installation, or it may be field assembled.
B.
Install cold-formed steel framing according to AISI S200 and to manufacturer's written instructions unless more stringent requirements are indicated.
C.
Install shop- or field-fabricated, cold-formed framing and securely anchor to supporting structure.
COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING
054000-5
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
1.
D.
Screw, bolt, or weld wall panels at horizontal and vertical junctures to produce flush, even, true-to-line joints with maximum variation in plane and true position between fabricated panels not exceeding 1/16 inch (1.6 mm).
Install cold-formed steel framing and accessories plumb, square, and true to line, and with connections securely fastened. 1. 2.
Cut framing members by sawing or shearing; do not torch cut. Fasten cold-formed steel framing members by welding, screw fastening, clinch fastening, or riveting. Wire tying of framing members is not permitted. a.
b.
Comply with AWS D1.3/D1.3M requirements and procedures for welding, appearance and quality of welds, and methods used in correcting welding work. Locate mechanical fasteners and install according to Shop Drawings, and complying with requirements for spacing, edge distances, and screw penetration.
E.
Install framing members in one-piece lengths unless splice connections are indicated for track or tension members.
F.
Install temporary bracing and supports to secure framing and support loads comparable in intensity to those for which structure was designed. Maintain braces and supports in place, undisturbed, until entire integrated supporting structure has been completed and permanent connections to framing are secured.
G.
Do not bridge building expansion joints with cold-formed steel framing. Independently frame both sides of joints.
H.
Install insulation, specified in Section 072100 "Thermal Insulation," in built-up exterior framing members, such as headers, sills, boxed joists, and multiple studs at openings, that are inaccessible on completion of framing work.
I.
Fasten hole reinforcing plate over web penetrations that exceed size of manufacturer's approved or standard punched openings.
J.
Erection Tolerances: Install cold-formed steel framing level, plumb, and true to line to a maximum allowable tolerance variation of 1/8 inch in 10 feet and as follows: 1.
3.4
COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING SECTION 054000
Space individual framing members no more than plus or minus 1/8 inch from plan location. Cumulative error shall not exceed minimum fastening requirements of sheathing or other finishing materials.
LOAD-BEARING WALL INSTALLATION A.
Install continuous top and bottom tracks sized to match studs. Align tracks accurately and securely anchor at corners and ends, and at spacings as follows: 1.
Anchor Spacing: To match stud spacing.
COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING
054000-6
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
B.
COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING SECTION 054000
Squarely seat studs against top and bottom tracks with gap not exceeding of 1/8 inch (3 mm) between the end of wall framing member and the web of track. Fasten both flanges of studs to top and bottom tracks. Space studs as follows: 1.
Stud Spacing: 16 inches
C.
Set studs plumb, except as needed for diagonal bracing or required for nonplumb walls or warped surfaces and similar configurations.
D.
Align studs vertically where floor framing interrupts wall-framing continuity. Where studs cannot be aligned, continuously reinforce track to transfer loads.
E.
Align floor and roof framing over studs according to AISI S200, Section C1. Where framing cannot be aligned, continuously reinforce track to transfer loads.
F.
Anchor studs abutting structural columns or walls, including masonry walls, to supporting structure as indicated.
G.
Install headers over wall openings wider than stud spacing. Locate headers above openings as indicated. Fabricate headers of compound shapes indicated or required to transfer load to supporting studs, complete with clip-angle connectors, web stiffeners, or gusset plates. 1.
2.
H.
Install supplementary framing, blocking, and bracing in stud framing indicated to support fixtures, equipment, services, casework, heavy trim, furnishings, and similar work requiring attachment to framing. 1.
I.
If type of supplementary support is not indicated, comply with stud manufacturer's written recommendations and industry standards in each case, considering weight or load resulting from item supported.
Install horizontal bridging in stud system, spaced vertically as indicated.Fasten at each stud intersection. 1.
2.
J.
Frame wall openings with not less than a double stud at each jamb of frame as indicated on Shop Drawings. Fasten jamb members together to uniformly distribute loads. Install runner tracks and jack studs above and below wall openings. Anchor tracks to jamb studs with clip angles or by welding, and space jack studs same as full-height wall studs.
Bridging: Cold-rolled steel channel, welded or mechanically fastened to webs of punched studs with a minimum of two screws into each flange of the clip angle for framing members up to 6 inches deep. Bridging: Combination of flat, taut, steel sheet straps of width and thickness indicated and stud-track solid blocking of width and thickness to match studs. Fasten flat straps to stud flanges and secure solid blocking to stud webs or flanges.
Install steel sheet diagonal bracing straps to both stud flanges, terminate at and fasten to reinforced top and bottom tracks. Fasten clip-angle connectors to multiple studs at ends of bracing and anchor to structure.
COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING
054000-7
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
K.
3.5
3.6
COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING SECTION 054000
Install miscellaneous framing and connections, including supplementary framing, web stiffeners, clip angles, continuous angles, anchors, and fasteners, to provide a complete and stable wall-framing system.
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A.
Testing: Contractor will engage a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency to perform field tests and inspections and prepare test reports.
B.
Field and shop welds will be subject to testing and inspecting.
C.
Testing agency will report test results promptly and in writing to Contractor and Architect.
D.
Remove and replace work where test results indicate that it does not comply with specified requirements.
E.
Additional testing and inspecting, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine compliance of replaced or additional work with specified requirements.
REPAIRS AND PROTECTION A.
Galvanizing Repairs: Prepare and repair damaged galvanized coatings on fabricated and installed cold-formed steel framing with galvanized repair paint according to ASTM A 780 and manufacturer's written instructions.
B.
Provide final protection and maintain conditions, in a manner acceptable to manufacturer and Installer, that ensure that cold-formed steel framing is without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.
END OF SECTION 054000
COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING
054000-8
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
METAL FABRICATIONS SECTION 055000
SECTION 055000 - METAL FABRICATIONS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS A.
Retain or delete this article in all Sections of Project Manual.
B.
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2
SUMMARY A.
Section Includes: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10.
B.
Related Sections: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.
1.3
Steel framing and supports for overhead doors. Steel framing and supports for countertops. Steel framing and supports for mechanical and electrical equipment. Steel framing and supports for applications where framing and supports are not specified in other Sections. Shelf angles. Miscellaneous steel trim including steel angle corner guards and steel edgings. Metal bollards. Loose bearing and leveling plates for applications where they are not specified in other Sections. Loose steel lintels. Aluminum Trellis Systems.
Division 03 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete" for installing anchor bolts, steel pipe sleeves, slotted-channel inserts, wedge-type inserts, and other items cast into concrete. Division 04 Section "Unit Masonry" for installing loose lintels, anchor bolts, and other items built into unit masonry. Division 05 Section "Structural Steel Framing." Division 05 Section "Metal Stairs." Division 05 Section "Pipe and Tube Railings." Division 05 Sections for metal framing anchors.
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A.
Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements from ambient and surface temperature changes acting on exterior metal fabrications by preventing buckling, opening of joints, overstressing of components, failure of connections, and other detrimental effects.
METAL FABRICATIONS
055000 - 1
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
1. 1.4
METAL FABRICATIONS SECTION 055000
Temperature Change: 120 deg F, ambient; 180 deg F, material surfaces.
SUBMITTALS A.
Product Data: For the following: 1. 2. 3. 4.
B.
Building columns. Paint products. Grout. Aluminum Trellis System.
Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details for metal fabrications. 1.
Include plans, elevations, sections, and details of metal fabrications and their connections. Show anchorage and accessory items.
C.
Delegated-Design Submittal: For Aluminum Trellis system and installed products indicated to comply with performance requirements and design criteria, including analysis data and structural calculations signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation.
D.
Qualification Data: For qualified professional engineer. Licensed in the state of New Jersey.
E.
Mill Certificates: Signed by manufacturers of stainless-steel certifying that products furnished comply with requirements.
F.
Welding certificates.
G.
Paint Compatibility Certificates: From manufacturers of topcoats applied over shop primers certifying that shop primers are compatible with topcoats.
1.5
QUALITY ASSURANCE A.
1.6
Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel." PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
1.7
Field Measurements: Verify actual locations of walls and other construction contiguous with metal fabrications by field measurements before fabrication. COORDINATION
A.
Coordinate selection of shop primers with topcoats to be applied over them. Comply with paint and coating manufacturers' written recommendations to ensure that shop primers and topcoats are compatible with one another.
METAL FABRICATIONS
055000 - 2
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
B.
METAL FABRICATIONS SECTION 055000
Coordinate installation of anchorages and steel weld plates and angles for casting into concrete. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items with integral anchors, that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry. Deliver such items to Project site in time for installation.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1
METALS, GENERAL A.
2.2
Metal Surfaces, General: Provide materials with smooth, flat surfaces unless otherwise indicated. For metal fabrications exposed to view in the completed Work, provide materials without seam marks, roller marks, rolled trade names, or blemishes. FERROUS METALS
A.
Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M.
B.
Steel Tubing: ASTM A 500, cold-formed steel tubing.
C.
Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, standard weight (Schedule 40) unless otherwise indicated.
D.
Stainless-Steel Sheet, Strip, Plate, and Flat Bars: ASTM A 666, Type 304.
2.3
NONFERROUS METALS A.
Aluminum Plate and Sheet: ASTM B 209, Alloy 6061-T6.
B.
Aluminum Extrusions: ASTM B 221, Alloy 6063-T6.
C.
Aluminum Castings: ASTM B 26/B 26M, Alloy 443.0-F.
2.4
FASTENERS A.
General: Unless otherwise indicated, provide Type 316 stainless-steel fasteners for exterior use and zinc-plated fasteners with coating complying with ASTM B 633 or ASTM F 1941, Class Fe/Zn 5, at exterior walls. Select fasteners for type, grade, and class required. 1.
Belts, nuts, washers and fasteners for Aluminum Trellis System shall be specified by the system fabricator.
2.
Angles for Kiosks shall be stainless steel, 2” h. x 1-1/2” w. x 1/8” th.
B.
Steel Bolts and Nuts: Regular hexagon-head bolts, ASTM A 325, Type 3; with hex nuts, ASTM A 563, Grade C3; and, where indicated, flat washers.
C.
Stainless-Steel Bolts and Nuts: Regular hexagon-head annealed stainless-steel bolts, ASTM F 593; with hex nuts, ASTM F 594; and, where indicated, flat washers; Alloy Group 2.
METAL FABRICATIONS
055000 - 3
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
D.
METAL FABRICATIONS SECTION 055000
Anchor Bolts: ASTM F 1554, Grade 36, of dimensions indicated; with nuts, ASTM A 563; and, where indicated, flat washers. 1.
Hot-dip galvanize or provide mechanically deposited, zinc coating where item being fastened is indicated to be galvanized.
E.
Eyebolts: ASTM A 489.
F.
Machine Screws: ASME B18.6.3.
G.
Lag Screws: ASME B18.2.1.
H.
Wood Screws: Flat head, ASME B18.6.1.
I.
Plain Washers: Round, ASME B18.22.1.
J.
Lock Washers: Helical, spring type, ASME B18.21.1.
K.
Anchors, General: Anchors capable of sustaining, without failure, a load equal to six times the load imposed when installed in unit masonry and four times the load imposed when installed in concrete, as determined by testing according to ASTM E 488, conducted by a qualified independent testing agency.
L.
Cast-in-Place Anchors in Concrete: Either threaded type or wedge type unless otherwise indicated; galvanized ferrous castings, either ASTM A 47/A 47M malleable iron or ASTM A 27/A 27M cast steel. Provide bolts, washers, and shims as needed, all hot-dip galvanized per ASTM F 2329.
M.
Post-Installed Anchors: Torque-controlled expansion anchors or chemical anchors. 1. 2.
2.5
Material for Interior Locations: Carbon-steel components zinc plated to comply with ASTM B 633 or ASTM F 1941, Class Fe/Zn 5, unless otherwise indicated. Material for Exterior Locations and Where Stainless Steel is Indicated: Alloy Group 2 stainless-steel bolts, ASTM F 593, and nuts, ASTM F 594.
MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A.
Welding Rods and Bare Electrodes: Select according to AWS specifications for metal alloy welded.
B.
Universal Shop Primer: Fast-curing, lead- and chromate-free, universal modified-alkyd primer complying with MPI#79 and compatible with topcoat. 1.
C.
Use primer containing pigments that make it easily distinguishable from zinc-rich primer.
Bituminous Paint: Cold-applied asphalt emulsion complying with ASTM D 1187.
METAL FABRICATIONS
055000 - 4
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
D.
2.6
METAL FABRICATIONS SECTION 055000
Non-shrink, Nonmetallic Grout: Factory-packaged, nonstaining, noncorrosive, nongaseous grout complying with ASTM C 1107. Provide grout specifically recommended by manufacturer for interior and exterior applications. FABRICATION, GENERAL
A.
Shop Assembly: Preassemble items in the shop to greatest extent possible. Disassemble units only as necessary for shipping and handling limitations. Use connections that maintain structural value of joined pieces. Clearly mark units for reassembly and coordinated installation.
B.
Cut, drill, and punch metals cleanly and accurately. Remove burrs and ease edges to a radius of approximately 1/32 inch unless otherwise indicated. Remove sharp or rough areas on exposed surfaces.
C.
Form bent-metal corners to smallest radius possible without causing grain separation or otherwise impairing work.
D.
Form exposed work with accurate angles and surfaces and straight edges.
E.
Weld corners and seams continuously to comply with the following: 1. 2. 3. 4.
Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion resistance of base metals. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap. Remove welding flux immediately. At exposed connections, finish exposed welds and surfaces smooth and blended so no roughness shows after finishing and contour of welded surface matches that of adjacent surface.
F.
Form exposed connections with hairline joints, flush and smooth, using concealed fasteners or welds where possible. Where exposed fasteners are required, use Phillips flat-head (countersunk) fasteners unless otherwise indicated. Locate joints where least conspicuous.
G.
Fabricate seams and other connections that will be exposed to weather in a manner to exclude water. Provide weep holes where water may accumulate.
H.
Cut, reinforce, drill, and tap metal fabrications as indicated to receive finish hardware, screws, and similar items.
I.
Provide for anchorage of type indicated; coordinate with supporting structure. Space anchoring devices to secure metal fabrications rigidly in place and to support indicated loads. 1.
Where units are indicated to be cast into concrete or built into masonry, equip with integrally welded steel strap anchors, 1/8 by 1-1/2 inches, with a minimum 6-inch embedment and 2-inch hook, not less than 8 inches from ends and corners of units and 24 inches o.c., unless otherwise indicated.
METAL FABRICATIONS
055000 - 5
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
2.7
METAL FABRICATIONS SECTION 055000
MISCELLANEOUS FRAMING AND SUPPORTS A.
General: Provide steel framing and supports not specified in other Sections as needed to complete the Work.
B.
Fabricate units from steel shapes, plates, and bars of welded construction unless otherwise indicated. Fabricate to sizes, shapes, and profiles indicated and as necessary to receive adjacent construction. 1. 2.
C.
Fabricate steel girders for metal frame construction from continuous steel shapes of sizes indicated. 1. 2. 3.
D.
Fabricate units from slotted channel framing where indicated. Furnish inserts for units installed after concrete is placed.
Provide bearing plates welded to beams where indicated. Drill or punch girders and plates for field-bolted connections where indicated. Where wood nailers are attached to girders with bolts or lag screws, drill or punch holes at 24 inches on-center.
Fabricate steel columns for supporting metal frame construction from steel shapes with steel baseplates and top plates as indicated. Drill or punch baseplates and top plates for anchor and connection bolts and weld to pipe with fillet welds all around. Make welds the same size as pipe wall thickness unless otherwise indicated. 1.
Unless otherwise indicated, provide 1/2-inch baseplates with four 5/8-inch anchor bolts and 1/4-inch top plates.
E.
Galvanize miscellaneous framing and supports where indicated.
F.
Prime miscellaneous framing and supports with zinc-rich primer where indicated.
2.8
SHELF ANGLES A.
Fabricate shelf angles from steel angles of sizes indicated and for attachment to metal framing. Provide horizontally slotted holes to receive 3/4-inch bolts, spaced not more than 6 inches from ends and 24 inches on-center, unless otherwise indicated. 1. 2.
Provide mitered and welded units at corners. Provide open joints in shelf angles at expansion and control joints. Make open joint approximately 2 inches larger than expansion or control joint.
B.
For cavity walls, provide vertical channel brackets to support angles from backup metal framing.
C.
Galvanize shelf angles located in exterior walls.
D.
Prime shelf angles located in exterior walls with zinc-rich primer.
METAL FABRICATIONS
055000 - 6
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
E.
2.9
METAL FABRICATIONS SECTION 055000
Furnish wedge-type concrete inserts, complete with fasteners, to attach shelf angles to cast-inplace concrete. MISCELLANEOUS STEEL TRIM
A.
Unless otherwise indicated, fabricate units from steel shapes, plates, and bars of profiles shown with continuously welded joints and smooth exposed edges. Miter corners and use concealed field splices where possible.
B.
Provide cutouts, fittings, and anchorages as needed to coordinate assembly and installation with other work. 1.
Provide with integrally welded steel strap anchors for embedding in concrete or masonry construction.
C.
Galvanize exterior miscellaneous steel trim.
D.
Prime exterior miscellaneous steel trim with zinc-rich primer.
2.10
LOOSE BEARING AND LEVELING PLATES
A.
Provide loose bearing and leveling plates for steel items bearing on masonry or concrete construction. Drill plates to receive anchor bolts and for grouting.
B.
Galvanize plates.
C.
Prime plates with zinc-rich primer.
2.11
LOOSE STEEL LINTELS
A.
Fabricate loose steel lintels from steel angles and shapes of size indicated for openings and recesses in masonry walls and partitions at locations indicated. Fabricate in single lengths for each opening unless otherwise indicated. Weld adjoining members together to form a single unit where indicated.
B.
Size loose lintels to provide bearing length at each side of openings equal to 1/12 of clear span but not less than 8 inches unless otherwise indicated.
C.
Galvanize loose steel lintels located in exterior walls.
D.
Prime loose steel lintels located in exterior walls with zinc-rich primer.
2.12 A.
STEEL WELD PLATES AND ANGLES Provide steel weld plates and angles not specified in other Sections, for items supported from concrete construction as needed to complete the Work. Provide each unit with no fewer than two integrally welded steel strap anchors for embedding in concrete.
METAL FABRICATIONS
055000 - 7
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
2.13 A.
ALUMINUM TRELLIS SYSTEM Description: Custom Aluminum Column and Trellis System as fabricated by metalworks, 200 Gale Lane, Kennett Square, PA, phone 800-321-7816, or approved equal. Provide a complete integrated set of aluminum fabricators custom mutually dependent components and assemblies that form a column and trellis system capable of withstanding structural and other loads, compliant with New Jersey edition of IBC Chapter 16, thermal induced current movement, and exposure to weather without failure of infiltration of water into hollow metal sections. 1.
B.
METAL FABRICATIONS SECTION 055000
Framing System minimum member sizes shall be as indicated on the drawings.
Delegated Design: Design column and Trellis System and all connects, including comprehensive engineering analysis by a New Jersey qualified professional engineer, using performance requirements and design criteria indicated below 1. Structural performance: Metal systems shall withstand the effects of gravity loads and the following loads and stresses. a. Design Loads: As indicated on drawings. b. Deflection limits: Design metal system assemblies to withstand design loads with deflections no greater than the following: 1. Beams: Vertical deflection of 1/240 of the span 2. Metal Grille Panels: Vertical deflection of 1/240 of the span. 3. Design secondary: Framing system to accommodate deflection of primary framing and construction tolerances, and to maintain clearances at openings.
C.
Drift Limits: Engineering structure to withstand design loads with drift limits no greater than the following: 1.
Lateral Drift: Maximum of 1/400 of the building height.
2.
Seismic Performance: Metal building systems shall withstand the effects of earthquake motions determined according to ASCE/SEI7.
3.
Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements resulting from the following maximum change (range) in ambient and surface temperatures by preventing buckling, opening of joints, overstressing of components, failure of connections, and other detrimental effects. Base engineering calculations on surface temperatures of materials due to both solar heat gain and nighttime-sky heat loss. a. Temperature Change ( Range): 120 deg F, ambient 180 deg F, material surfaces.
4. 2.14
Wind Uplift Resistance: Provide metal roof panel assemblies that comply with UL 580 for class 90.
KIOSK SUPPORTS
METAL FABRICATIONS
055000 - 8
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
A. 2.15
METAL FABRICATIONS SECTION 055000
Description: Supports for Kiosk Counters shall be stainless steel, 11 gauge , tapered sheets, as indicated on the drawings. Support with stainless steel angles. FINISHES, GENERAL
A.
Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes.
B.
Finish metal fabrications after assembly.
C.
Finish exposed surfaces to remove tool and die marks and stretch lines, and to blend into surrounding surface.
2.16 A.
STEEL AND IRON FINISHES Galvanizing: Hot-dip galvanize items as indicated to comply with ASTM A 153/A 153M for steel and iron hardware and with ASTM A 123/A 123M for other steel and iron products. 1.
B.
Shop prime iron and steel items not indicated to be galvanized unless they are to be embedded in concrete, sprayed-on fireproofing, or masonry, or unless otherwise indicated. 1.
C.
3.
A.
Exterior Items: SSPC-SP 6/NACE No. 3, "Commercial Blast Cleaning." Items Indicated to Receive Zinc-Rich Primer: SSPC-SP 6/NACE No. 3, "Commercial Blast Cleaning." Other Items: SSPC-SP 3, "Power Tool Cleaning."
Shop Priming: Apply shop primer to comply with SSPC-PA 1, "Paint Application Specification No. 1: Shop, Field, and Maintenance Painting of Steel," for shop painting. 1.
2.17
Shop prime with universal shop primer unless zinc-rich primer is indicated.
Preparation for Shop Priming: Prepare surfaces to comply with requirements indicated below: 1. 2.
D.
Do not quench or apply post galvanizing treatments that might interfere with paint adhesion.
Stripe paint corners, crevices, bolts, welds, and sharp edges.
ALUMINUM FINISHES Power COA Finish: AAMA 2603 Except with minimum dry thickness of 1.5 Mils. Comply with coating manufacturer’s written instructions for cleaning conversion coating, and applying and backing finish. 1.
Color and Gloss: As selected by Architect from manufacturer’s full range.Retain finishes in two paragraphs below to suit Project. If retaining more than one, indicate location of each on Drawings or by inserts.
METAL FABRICATIONS
055000 - 9
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
METAL FABRICATIONS SECTION 055000
PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.1
INSTALLATION, GENERAL A.
Cutting, Fitting, and Placement: Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required for installing metal fabrications. Set metal fabrications accurately in location, alignment, and elevation; with edges and surfaces level, plumb, true, and free of rack; and measured from established lines and levels.
B.
Fit exposed connections accurately together to form hairline joints. Weld connections that are not to be left as exposed joints but cannot be shop welded because of shipping size limitations. Do not weld, cut, or abrade surfaces of exterior units that have been hot-dip galvanized after fabrication and are for bolted or screwed field connections.
C.
Field Welding: Comply with the following requirements: 1. 2. 3. 4.
Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion resistance of base metals. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap. Remove welding flux immediately. At exposed connections, finish exposed welds and surfaces smooth and blended so no roughness shows after finishing and contour of welded surface matches that of adjacent surface.
D.
Fastening to In-Place Construction: Provide anchorage devices and fasteners where metal fabrications are required to be fastened to in-place construction. Provide threaded fasteners for use with concrete and masonry inserts, toggle bolts, through bolts, lag screws, wood screws, and other connectors.
E.
Provide temporary bracing or anchors in formwork for items that are to be built into concrete, masonry, or similar construction.
F.
Corrosion Protection: Coat concealed surfaces of aluminum that will come into contact with grout, concrete, masonry, wood, or dissimilar metals with the following: 1. 2.
3.2
Cast Aluminum: Heavy coat of bituminous paint. Extruded Aluminum: Two coats of clear lacquer.Retain articles below if applicable to Project. Insert others where needed to specify requirements applicable to a specific item not covered under general installation requirements above.
INSTALLING MISCELLANEOUS FRAMING AND SUPPORTS A.
General: Install framing and supports to comply with requirements of items being supported, including manufacturers' written instructions and requirements indicated on Shop Drawings.
B.
Anchor supports for operable partitions securely to and rigidly brace from building structure.
METAL FABRICATIONS
055000 - 10
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
C.
Support steel girders on solid grouted masonry, concrete, or steel pipe columns. Secure girders with anchor bolts embedded in grouted masonry or concrete or with bolts through top plates of pipe columns. 1.
D.
Where grout space under bearing plates is indicated for girders supported on concrete or masonry, install as specified in "Installing Bearing and Leveling Plates" Article.
Install pipe columns on concrete footings with grouted baseplates. Position and grout column baseplates as specified in "Installing Bearing and Leveling Plates" Article. 1.
3.3
METAL FABRICATIONS SECTION 055000
Grout baseplates of columns supporting steel girders after girders are installed and leveled.
INSTALLING BEARING AND LEVELING PLATES A.
Clean concrete and masonry bearing surfaces of bond-reducing materials, and roughen to improve bond to surfaces. Clean bottom surface of plates.
B.
Set bearing and leveling plates on wedges, shims, or leveling nuts. After bearing members have been positioned and plumbed, tighten anchor bolts. Do not remove wedges or shims but, if protruding, cut off flush with edge of bearing plate before packing with grout. 1.
2. 3.4
Use non-shrink grout, either metallic or nonmetallic, in concealed locations where not exposed to moisture; use non-shrink, nonmetallic grout in exposed locations unless otherwise indicated. Pack grout solidly between bearing surfaces and plates to ensure that no voids remain.
ALMINUM COLUMN AND TRELLIS SYSTEM A.
3.5
Install in accordance with fabricators instructions. ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A.
Touchup Painting: Immediately after erection, clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas. Paint uncoated and abraded areas with the same material as used for shop painting to comply with SSPC-PA 1 for touching up shop-painted surfaces. 1.
Apply by brush or spray to provide a minimum 2.0-mil dry film thickness.
B.
Touchup Painting: Cleaning and touchup painting of field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas of shop paint are specified in Division 09 painting Sections.
C.
Galvanized Surfaces: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and repair galvanizing to comply with ASTM A 780.
END OF SECTION 055000
METAL FABRICATIONS
055000 - 11
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
METAL STAIRS SECTION 055100
SECTION 055100 - METAL STAIRS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY A.
Section Includes: 1.
B.
Related Sections: 1. 2. 3.
1.3
Section 033000 "Cast-in-Place Concrete" for concrete fill for stair treads and platforms. Section 061000 "Rough Carpentry" for wood blocking for anchoring railings. Section 092216 "Non-Structural Metal Framing" for metal backing for anchoring railings.
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A.
Delegated Design: Design metal stairs, including comprehensive engineering analysis by a qualified professional engineer, using performance requirements and design criteria indicated.
B.
Structural Performance of Stairs: Metal stairs shall withstand the effects of gravity loads and the following loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.
C.
1.4
Preassembled steel stairs with concrete-filled treads.
Uniform Load: 100 lbf/sq. ft. Concentrated Load: 300 lbf applied on an area of 4 sq. in.. Uniform and concentrated loads need not be assumed to act concurrently. Stair Framing: Capable of withstanding stresses resulting from railing loads in addition to loads specified above. Limit deflection of treads, platforms, and framing members to L/360 or 1/4 inch, whichever is less.
Seismic Performance: Metal stairs shall withstand the effects of earthquake motions determined according to ASCE/SEI 7.
1. Component Importance Factor is 1.5. ACTION SUBMITTALS A.
Product Data: For metal stairs and the following: 1. 2. 3.
METAL STAIRS
Prefilled metal-pan stair treads. Abrasive nosings Paint products. 055100-1
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
1.5
B.
Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work.
C.
Delegated-Design Submittal: For installed products indicated to comply with performance requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation.
QUALITY ASSURANCE A.
Installer Qualifications: Fabricator of products.
B.
NAAMM Stair Standard: Comply with "Recommended Voluntary Minimum Standards for Fixed Metal Stairs" in NAAMM AMP 510, "Metal Stairs Manual," for class of stair designated, unless more stringent requirements are indicated. 1.
Preassembled Stairs: Commercial class.
C.
Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel."
D.
Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to the following: 1. 2.
1.6
METAL STAIRS SECTION 055100
AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel." AWS D1.3, "Structural Welding Code - Sheet Steel."
COORDINATION A.
Coordinate selection of shop primers with topcoats to be applied over them. Comply with paint and coating manufacturers' written recommendations to ensure that shop primers and topcoats are compatible with one another.
B.
Coordinate installation of anchorages for metal stairs. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items with integral anchors, that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry. Deliver such items to Project site in time for installation.
C.
Coordinate locations of hanger rods and struts with other work so that they will not encroach on required stair width and will be within the fire-resistance-rated stair enclosure.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1
METALS, GENERAL A.
2.2
Metal Surfaces, General: Provide materials with smooth, flat surfaces unless otherwise indicated. For components exposed to view in the completed Work, provide materials without seam marks, roller marks, rolled trade names, or blemishes.
FERROUS METALS A.
Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M.
METAL STAIRS
055100-2
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
2.3
B.
Wire Rod for Grating Crossbars: ASTM A 510 (ASTM A 510M).
C.
Uncoated, Cold-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M structural steel, Grade 25, unless another grade is required by design loads; exposed.
FASTENERS A.
General: Provide zinc-plated fasteners with coating complying with ASTM B 633 or ASTM F 1941, Class Fe/Zn 12 for exterior use, and Class Fe/Zn 5 where built into exterior walls. Select fasteners for type, grade, and class required.
B.
Bolts and Nuts: Regular hexagon-head bolts, ASTM A 307, Grade A with hex nuts, ASTM A 563; and, where indicated, flat washers.
C.
Anchor Bolts: ASTM F 1554, Grade 36, of dimensions indicated; with nuts, ASTM A 563 (ASTM A 563M); and, where indicated, flat washers. 1.
Provide mechanically deposited or hot-dip, zinc-coated anchor bolts for stairs indicated to be shop primed with zinc-rich primer.
D.
Machine Screws: ASME B18.6.3
E.
Lag Screws: ASME B18.2.1
F.
Plain Washers: Round, ASME B18.22.1.
G.
Lock Washers: Helical, spring type, ASME B18.21.1
H.
Post-Installed Anchors: Torque-controlled expansion anchors or chemical anchors capable of sustaining, without failure, a load equal to six times the load imposed when installed in unit masonry and four times the load imposed when installed in concrete, as determined by testing according to ASTM E 488, conducted by a qualified independent testing agency. 1.
2.4
METAL STAIRS SECTION 055100
Material for Interior Locations: Carbon-steel components zinc plated to comply with ASTM B 633 or ASTM F 1941 Class Fe/Zn 5, unless otherwise indicated.
MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A.
Welding Rods and Bare Electrodes: Select according to AWS specifications for metal alloy welded.
B.
Universal Shop Primer: Fast-curing, lead- and chromate-free, universal modified-alkyd primer complying with MPI#79 and compatible with topcoat. 1.
C.
Use primer containing pigments that make it easily distinguishable from zinc-rich primer.
Concrete Materials and Properties: Comply with requirements in Section 033000 "Cast-in-Place Concrete" for normal-weight, air-entrained, ready-mix concrete with a minimum 28-day compressive strength of 3000 psi unless otherwise indicated.
METAL STAIRS
055100-3
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
2.5
FABRICATION, GENERAL A.
Preassembled Stairs: Assemble stairs in shop to greatest extent possible. Disassemble units only as necessary for shipping and handling limitations. Clearly mark units for reassembly and coordinated installation.
B.
Cut, drill, and punch metals cleanly and accurately. Remove burrs and ease edges to a radius of approximately 1/32 inch unless otherwise indicated. Remove sharp or rough areas on exposed surfaces.
C.
Form bent-metal corners to smallest radius possible without causing grain separation or otherwise impairing work.
D.
Form exposed work with accurate angles and surfaces and straight edges.
E.
Weld connections to comply with the following: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.
2.6
METAL STAIRS SECTION 055100
Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion resistance of base metals. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap. Remove welding flux immediately. Weld exposed corners and seams continuously unless otherwise indicated. At exposed connections, finish exposed welds to comply with NOMMA's "Voluntary Joint Finish Standards" for Type 1 welds: no evidence of a welded joint
F.
Form exposed connections with hairline joints, flush and smooth, using concealed fasteners where possible. Where exposed fasteners are required, use Phillips flat-head (countersunk) screws or bolts unless otherwise indicated. Locate joints where least conspicuous.
G.
Fabricate joints that will be exposed to weather in a manner to exclude water. Provide weep holes where water may accumulate.
STEEL-FRAMED STAIRS A.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. 2. 3. 4.
B.
Alfab, Inc. American Stair, Inc. Sharon Companies Ltd. (The). Or approved equal.
Stair Framing: 1.
Fabricate stringers of steel plates or channels. a.
METAL STAIRS
Provide closures for exposed ends of channel stringers.
055100-4
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
METAL STAIRS SECTION 055100
2.
Construct platforms of steel plate or channel headers and miscellaneous framing members as needed to comply with performance requirements. 3. Weld or bolt stringers to headers; weld framing members to stringers and headers. 4. Where stairs are enclosed by gypsum board assemblies, provide hanger rods or struts to support landings from floor construction above or below. Locate hanger rods and struts where they will not encroach on required stair width and will be within the fire-resistance-rated stair enclosure. 5. Where masonry walls support metal stairs, provide temporary supporting struts designed for erecting steel stair components before installing masonry. C.
Metal-Pan Stairs: Form risers, subtread pans, and subplatforms to configurations shown from steel sheet of thickness needed to comply with performance requirements but not less than 0.067 inch. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.
2.7
Steel Sheet: Uncoated cold-rolled steel sheet. Directly weld metal pans to stringers; locate welds on top of subtreads where they will be concealed by concrete fill. Do not weld risers to stringers. Shape metal pans to include nosing integral with riser. Attach abrasive nosings to risers. At Contractor's option, provide stair assemblies with metal-pan subtreads filled with reinforced concrete during fabrication.
FINISHES A.
Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes.
B.
Finish metal stairs after assembly.
C.
Preparation for Shop Priming: Prepare uncoated ferrous-metal surfaces to comply with minimum requirements indicated below for SSPC surface preparation specifications and environmental exposure conditions of installed products: 1.
D.
Interior Stairs: SSPC-SP 3, "Power Tool Cleaning."
Apply shop primer to uncoated surfaces of metal stair components, except those with galvanized finishes and those to be embedded in concrete or masonry unless otherwise indicated. Comply with SSPC-PA 1, "Paint Application Specification No. 1: Shop, Field, and Maintenance Painting of Steel," for shop painting. 1.
Stripe paint corners, crevices, bolts, welds, and sharp edges.
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1
INSTALLATION, GENERAL A.
Fastening to In-Place Construction: Provide anchorage devices and fasteners where necessary for securing metal stairs to in-place construction. Include threaded fasteners for concrete and masonry inserts, through-bolts, lag bolts, and other connectors.
METAL STAIRS
055100-5
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
B.
Cutting, Fitting, and Placement: Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required for installing metal stairs. Set units accurately in location, alignment, and elevation, measured from established lines and levels and free of rack.
C.
Install metal stairs by welding stair framing to steel structure or to weld plates cast into concrete unless otherwise indicated.
D.
Provide temporary bracing or anchors in formwork for items that are to be built into concrete, masonry, or similar construction.
E.
Fit exposed connections accurately together to form hairline joints. Weld connections that are not to be left as exposed joints but cannot be shop welded because of shipping size limitations. Do not weld, cut, or abrade surfaces of exterior units that have been hot-dip galvanized after fabrication and are for bolted or screwed field connections.
F.
Field Welding: Comply with requirements for welding in "Fabrication, General" Article.
G.
Place and finish concrete fill for treads and platforms to comply with Section 033000 "Cast-in-Place Concrete." 1.
3.2
METAL STAIRS SECTION 055100
Install abrasive nosings with anchors fully embedded in concrete. Center nosings on tread width.
ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A.
Touchup Painting: Immediately after erection, clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas of shop paint, and paint exposed areas with same material as used for shop painting to comply with SSPC-PA 1 for touching up shop-painted surfaces. 1.
B.
Apply by brush or spray to provide a minimum 2.0-mil dry film thickness.
Touchup Painting: Cleaning and touchup painting of field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas of shop paint are specified in Section 099113 "Exterior Painting" and Section 099123 "Interior Painting."
END OF SECTION 055100
METAL STAIRS
055100-6
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS SECTION 0552123
055213 - PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY A.
Section Includes: 1.
B.
Related Sections: 1. 2. 3.
1.3
Aluminum tube railings.
Section 055100 "Metal Stairs" for steel tube railings associated with metal stairs. Section 061000 "Rough Carpentry" for wood blocking for anchoring railings. Section 092216 "Non-Structural Metal Framing" for metal backing for anchoring railings.
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A.
Delegated Design: Design railings, including comprehensive engineering analysis by a qualified professional engineer, using performance requirements and design criteria indicated.
B.
General: In engineering railings to withstand structural loads indicated, determine allowable design working stresses of railing materials based on the following: 1.
C.
Aluminum: The lesser of minimum yield strength divided by 1.65 or minimum ultimate tensile strength divided by 1.95.
Structural Performance: Railings shall withstand the effects of gravity loads, structural loads required by ASCE7 and the New Jersey Edition of the IBC and the following loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated: 1.
Handrails and Top Rails of Guards: a. b. c.
2.
Uniform load of 50 lbf/ ft. applied in any direction. Concentrated load of 200 lbf applied in any direction. Uniform and concentrated loads need not be assumed to act concurrently.
Infill of Guards: a. b.
PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS
Concentrated load of 50 lbf applied horizontally on an area of 1 sq. ft. Infill load and other loads need not be assumed to act concurrently.
055213-1
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
D.
Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements from ambient and surface temperature changes acting on exterior metal fabrications by preventing buckling, opening of joints, overstressing of components, failure of connections, and other detrimental effects. 1.
E.
1.4
Control of Corrosion: Prevent galvanic action and other forms of corrosion by insulating metals and other materials from direct contact with incompatible materials.
Product Data: For the following: 1. 2.
Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work.
C.
Samples for Initial Selection: For products involving selection of color, texture, or design.
D.
Delegated-Design Submittal: For installed products indicated to comply with performance requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation.
INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS Welding certificates.
QUALITY ASSURANCE A.
Source Limitations: manufacturer.
B.
Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel."
C.
Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to the following: 1. 2. 3.
1.7
Obtain each type of railing from single source from single
AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel." AWS D1.2/D1.2M, "Structural Welding Code - Aluminum." AWS D1.6, "Structural Welding Code - Stainless Steel."
PROJECT CONDITIONS A.
1.8
Manufacturer's product lines of mechanically connected railings. Grout, anchoring cement, and paint products.
B.
A. 1.6
Temperature Change: 120 deg F, ambient; 180 deg F, material surfaces.
ACTION SUBMITTALS A.
1.5
PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS SECTION 0552123
Field Measurements: Verify actual locations of walls and other construction contiguous with metal fabrications by field measurements before fabrication.
COORDINATION AND SCHEDULING
PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS
055213-2
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS SECTION 0552123
A.
Coordinate selection of shop primers with topcoats to be applied over them. Comply with paint and coating manufacturers' written recommendations to ensure that shop primers and topcoats are compatible with one another.
B.
Coordinate installation of anchorages for railings. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items with integral anchors, that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry. Deliver such items to Project site in time for installation.
C.
Schedule installation so wall attachments are made only to completed walls. Do not support railings temporarily by any means that do not satisfy structural performance requirements.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1
2.2
2.3
METALS, GENERAL A.
Metal Surfaces, General: Provide materials with smooth surfaces, without seam marks, roller marks, rolled trade names, stains, discolorations, or blemishes.
B.
Brackets, Flanges, and Anchors: Cast or formed metal of same type of material and finish as supported rails unless otherwise indicated.
ALUMINUM A.
Aluminum, General: Provide alloy and temper recommended by aluminum producer and finisher for type of use and finish indicated, and with not less than the strength and durability properties of alloy and temper designated below for each aluminum form required.
B.
Extruded Bars: ASTM B 221, Alloy 6063-T5/T52.
C.
Extruded Structural Round Tubing: ASTM B 429/B 429M, Alloy 6063-T6.
D.
Plate and Sheet: ASTM B 209, Alloy 6061-T6.
FASTENERS A.
General: Provide the following: 1. Aluminum Railings: Type 316 stainless-steel fasteners.
B.
Fasteners for Anchoring Railings to Other Construction: Select fasteners of type, grade, and class required to produce connections suitable for anchoring railings to other types of construction indicated and capable of withstanding design loads.
C.
Fasteners for Interconnecting Railing Components: 1. 2.
3.
Provide concealed fasteners for interconnecting railing components and for attaching them to other work, unless otherwise indicated. Provide concealed fasteners for interconnecting railing components and for attaching them to other work, unless exposed fasteners are unavoidable or are the standard fastening method for railings indicated. Provide square or hex socket flat-head machine screws for exposed fasteners unless otherwise indicated.
PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS
055213-3
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
D.
Post-Installed Anchors: Torque-controlled expansion anchors or chemical anchors capable of sustaining, without failure, a load equal to six times the load imposed when installed in unit masonry and four times the load imposed when installed in concrete, as determined by testing according to ASTM E 488, conducted by a qualified independent testing agency. 1.
2.4
Material for Exterior Locations stainless-steel bolts, ASTM F 593, and nuts, ASTM F 594.
MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A.
Welding Rods and Bare Electrodes: Select according to AWS specifications for metal alloy welded. 1.
For aluminum railings, provide type and alloy as recommended by producer of metal to be welded and as required for color match, strength, and compatibility in fabricated items.
B.
Bituminous Paint: Cold-applied asphalt emulsion complying with ASTM D 1187.
C.
Nonshrink, Nonmetallic Grout: Factory-packaged, nonstaining, noncorrosive, nongaseous grout complying with ASTM C 1107. Provide grout specifically recommended by manufacturer for interior and exterior applications.
D.
Anchoring Cement: Factory-packaged, nonshrink, nonstaining, hydraulic-controlled expansion cement formulation for mixing with water at Project site to create pourable anchoring, patching, and grouting compound. 1.
E.
2.5
PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS SECTION 0552123
Water-Resistant Product: At exterior locations provide formulation that is resistant to erosion from water exposure without needing protection by a sealer or waterproof coating and that is recommended by manufacturer for exterior use.
Gate Latch and Spring Loaded Hinges: Provide gate latch and spring loaded hinges for gates at Gurney Loading Dock.
FABRICATION A.
General: Fabricate railings to comply with requirements indicated for design, dimensions, member sizes and spacing, details, finish, and anchorage, but not less than that required to support structural loads.
B.
Assemble railings in the shop to greatest extent possible to minimize field splicing and assembly. Disassemble units only as necessary for shipping and handling limitations. Clearly mark units for reassembly and coordinated installation. Use connections that maintain structural value of joined pieces.
C.
Cut, drill, and punch metals cleanly and accurately. Remove burrs and ease edges to a radius of approximately 1/32 inch unless otherwise indicated. Remove sharp or rough areas on exposed surfaces.
D.
Form work true to line and level with accurate angles and surfaces.
PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS
055213-4
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
E.
Fabricate connections that will be exposed to weather in a manner to exclude water. Provide weep holes where water may accumulate.
F.
Cut, reinforce, drill, and tap as indicated to receive finish hardware, screws, and similar items.
G.
Connections: Fabricate railings with welded connections unless otherwise indicated.
H.
Welded Connections for Aluminum Pipe: Fabricate railings to interconnect members with concealed internal welds that eliminate surface grinding, using manufacturer's standard system of sleeve and socket fittings.
I.
Form changes in direction as follows: 1.
By bending or fitted connections.
J.
Bend members in jigs to produce uniform curvature for each configuration required; maintain cross section of member throughout entire bend without buckling, twisting, cracking, or otherwise deforming exposed surfaces of components.
K.
Close exposed ends of railing members with prefabricated end fittings.
L.
Provide wall returns at ends of wall-mounted handrails unless otherwise indicated. Close ends of returns unless clearance between end of rail and wall is 1/4 inch (6 mm) or less.
M.
Brackets, Flanges, Fittings, and Anchors: Provide wall brackets, flanges, miscellaneous fittings, and anchors to interconnect railing members to other work unless otherwise indicated. 1.
N.
2.6
PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS SECTION 0552123
At brackets and fittings fastened to plaster or gypsum board partitions, provide crush-resistant fillers, or other means to transfer loads through wall finishes to structural supports and prevent bracket or fitting rotation and crushing of substrate.
Provide inserts and other anchorage devices for connecting railings to concrete or masonry work. Fabricate anchorage devices capable of withstanding loads imposed by railings. Coordinate anchorage devices with supporting structure.
FINISHES, GENERAL A.
Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes.
B.
Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping.
C.
Appearance of Finished Work: Variations in appearance of abutting or adjacent pieces are acceptable if they are within one-half of the range of approved Samples. Noticeable variations in the same piece are not acceptable. Variations in appearance of other components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast.
PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS
055213-5
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
D.
2.7
PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS SECTION 0552123
Provide exposed fasteners with finish matching appearance, including color and texture, of railings.
ALUMINUM FINISHES A.
Baked-Enamel or Powder-Coat Finish: AAMA 2603 except with a minimum dry film thickness of 1.5 mils. Comply with coating manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning, conversion coating, and applying and baking finish. 1.
Color and Gloss: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1
EXAMINATION A.
3.2
Examine plaster and gypsum board assemblies, where reinforced to receive anchors, to verify that locations of concealed reinforcements have been clearly marked for Installer. Locate reinforcements and mark locations if not already done.
INSTALLATION, GENERAL A.
Fit exposed connections together to form tight, hairline joints.
B.
Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required for installing railings. Set railings accurately in location, alignment, and elevation; measured from established lines and levels and free of rack. 1.
2. 3.
3.3
Do not weld, cut, or abrade surfaces of railing components that have been coated or finished after fabrication and that are intended for field connection by mechanical or other means without further cutting or fitting. Set posts plumb within a tolerance of 1/16 inch in 3 feet (2 mm in 1 m). Align rails so variations from level for horizontal members and variations from parallel with rake of steps and ramps for sloping members do not exceed 1/4 inch in 12 feet.
C.
Corrosion Protection: Coat concealed surfaces of aluminum that will be in contact with grout, concrete, masonry, wood, or dissimilar metals, with a heavy coat of bituminous paint.
D.
Adjust railings before anchoring to ensure matching alignment at abutting joints.
E.
Fastening to In-Place Construction: Use anchorage devices and fasteners where necessary for securing railings and for properly transferring loads to in-place construction.
RAILING CONNECTIONS A.
Welded Connections: Use fully welded joints for permanently connecting railing components. Comply with requirements for welded connections in "Fabrication" Article whether welding is performed in the shop or in the field.
B.
Expansion Joints: Install expansion joints at locations indicated but not farther apart than required to accommodate thermal movement. Provide slip-joint internal sleeve extending
PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS
055213-6
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS SECTION 0552123
2 inches (50 mm) beyond joint on either side, fasten internal sleeve securely to one side, and locate joint within 6 inches of post. 3.4
3.5
ANCHORING POSTS A.
Form or core-drill holes not less than 5 inches deep and 3/4 inch larger than OD of post for installing posts in concrete. Clean holes of loose material, insert posts, and fill annular space between post and concrete with nonshrink, nonmetallic grout or anchoring cement, mixed and placed to comply with anchoring material manufacturer's written instructions.
B.
Cover anchorage joint with flange of same metal as post, attached to post with set screws.
C.
Leave anchorage joint exposed with anchoring material flush with adjacent surface.
D.
Install removable railing sections, where indicated, in slip-fit metal sockets cast in concrete.
ATTACHING RAILINGS A.
Secure wall brackets and railing end flanges to building construction as follows: 1. 2. 3. 4.
3.6
ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A.
Clean aluminum by washing thoroughly with clean water and soap and rinsing with clean water.
B.
Touchup Painting: Immediately after erection, clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas of shop paint, and paint exposed areas with the same material as used for shop painting to comply with SSPC-PA 1 for touching up shop-painted surfaces. 1.
3.7
For concrete and solid masonry anchorage, use drilled-in expansion shields and hanger or lag bolts. For hollow masonry anchorage, use toggle bolts. For steel-framed partitions, use hanger or lag bolts set into wood backing between studs. Coordinate with stud installation to locate backing members. For steel-framed partitions, use self-tapping screws fastened to steel framing or to concealed steel reinforcements.
Apply by brush or spray to provide a minimum 2.0-mil dry film thickness.
PROTECTION A.
Protect finishes of railings from damage during construction period with temporary protective coverings approved by railing manufacturer. Remove protective coverings at time of Substantial Completion.
END OF SECTION 055213
PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS
055213-7
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
ROUGH CARPENTRY SECTION 061000
SECTION 061000 - ROUGH CARPENTRY PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. In the event of any conflicts between the requirements of these Sections, the more stringent requirement shall apply.
SUMMARY A.
This Section includes the following: 1. 2.
Blocking. Fire-treated plywood.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1
WOOD PRODUCTS, GENERAL A.
2.2
Lumber: Provide dressed lumber, S4S, marked with grade stamp of inspection agency.
LUMBER A.
Dimension Lumber: 1. 2.
2.3
FIRE-TREATED PLYWOOD A.
Fire-Retardant-Treated Plywood: Comply with performance requirements in AWPAC27, labeled by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 1.
2.4
Maximum Moisture Content: 15 percent for 2-inch nominal thickness or less, 19 percent for more than 2-inch nominal thickness. Blocking: Construction or No. 2 Eastern softwoods: NELMA; Northern species: NLGA; Mixed southern pine: SPIB; or Western woods: WCLIB or WWPA.
Use Interior Type A, for Ambulance metal stud wall protection.
MISCELLANEOUS PRODUCTS A.
Fasteners: Size and type indicated. Where rough carpentry is exposed to weather, in ground contact, or in area of high relative humidity, provide fasteners with hot-dip zinc coating complying with ASTM A 153/A 153M. 1. 2.
ROUGH CARPENTRY
Power-Driven Fasteners: CABO NER-272. Bolts: Steel bolts complying with ASTM A 307, Grade A; with ASTM A 563 hex nuts and, where indicated, flat washers. 061000 - 1
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
ROUGH CARPENTRY SECTION 061000
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1
INSTALLATION A.
Set rough carpentry to required levels and lines, with members plumb, true to line, cut, and fitted. Locate nailers, blocking, and similar supports to comply with requirements for attaching other construction.
B.
Securely attach rough carpentry to substrates, complying with the following: 1. 2.
CABO NER-272 for power-driven fasteners. Published requirements of metal framing anchor manufacturer.
END OF SECTION 061000
ROUGH CARPENTRY
061000 - 2
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK SECTION 064023
SECTION 064023 - INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. In the event of any conflicts between the requirements of these Sections, the more stringent requirement shall apply.
SUMMARY A.
This Section includes the following: 1. 2.
1.3
Casings and moldings. Custom counters and opening shelving.
SECTION REQUIREMENTS A.
Submittals: Product Data for solid-surfacing materials and fabric, Shop Drawings, and Samples showing the full range of colors, textures, and patterns available for each type of finish.
B.
Quality Standard: Architectural Woodwork Institute's "Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards."
C.
Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install woodwork until building is enclosed, wet work is completed, and HVAC system is operating.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1
MATERIALS A.
Lumber: DOC PS 20 and applicable grading rules of inspection agencies certified by ALSC's Board of Review. 1.
Factory mark each piece of lumber with grade stamp of inspection agency indicating grade, species, moisture content at time of surfacing, and mill.
B.
Hardboard: AHA A135.4.
C.
Softwood Plywood: DOC PS 1.
D.
Hardwood Plywood and Face Veneers: HPVA HP-1, made with adhesive containing no urea formaldehyde.
E.
High-Pressure Decorative Laminate: NEMA LD 3. 1.
Products:
INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK
064023 - 1
ROWAN UNIVERSITY a.
F.
Products: a. Meganite, style - Blanca granite, color 701, or approved equal for exam rooms and nurse’s station wall cap. b. Meganite; Style - White Mosaic Granite, color - 775, or approved equal, for all other areas indicated on documents.
STANDING AND RUNNING TRIM A.
Moldings for Clear Finish: Made to patterns included in WMMPA WM 12. 1.
2. 3. 4. 5. 2.3
Wilson Art; or Stile-oxide, color- 1787-60 or approved equal for breakroom and nurse’s station.
Solid-Surfacing Material: Homogeneous solid sheets of filled plastic resin complying with ISSFA-2. 1.
2.2
INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK SECTION 064023
Softwood Moldings: WMMPA WM 4, P-grade. a. Species: Maple. b. Maximum Moisture Content: 15 percent with at least 85 percent of shipment at 12 percent or less. Finger Jointing: Allowed. Molding Pattern: As indicated on Drawings. Any AWI certified millwork company can provide the casings and trim. Finish: See Division 9 “Interior Painting”.
INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK A.
Complete fabrication to maximum extent possible before shipment to Project site. Disassemble components only as necessary for shipment and installation. Where necessary for fitting at site, provide ample allowance for scribing, trimming, and fitting.
B.
Backout or groove backs of flat trim members and kerf backs of other wide, flat members, except for members with ends exposed in finished work.
C.
Solid-Surfacing Material Countertops and Open Shelving: Custom grade. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7.
Solid-Surfacing Countertops at Kiosks, information desk, reception. Material Thickness: 1/2 inch. Plywood Veneer Open Shelving Material Thickness: 3/4 inch. Fabricate countertop with 3/4" plywood substrate and 1-1/2" bullnosed edges. Fabricate tops with shop-applied edges. Fabricate for installation of pamphlet racks in countertops, cut-outs to be done in shop. Provide 3/8" thick tempered glass for racks. Fabricate open shelves with maple veneer, plain sliced, and clear polyurethane satin finish. Fabricate support wall with wood studs, curved to match drawings, and one (1) layers of 3/8" veneer plywood, so the radius counters have smooth transitions, with plywood as indicated below: a.
Columbia Forest Products; Radius Bending Plywood, or approved equal.
INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK
064023 - 2
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
8. 9. 10. D.
2. 4.
High-Pressure Decorative Laminate Countertops at Nurse’s Station and Break Rooms. Material Thickness: manufacturer’s standard thickness. Fabricate countertop with 3/4" plywood substrate and 1-1/2" wood bullnosed edges. Fabricate tops with post formed edges.
SHOP FINISHING OF INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK A.
Finishes: Same grades as items to be finished.
B.
Finish architectural woodwork at the fabrication shop; defer only final touch up until after installation. 1. 2. 3.
C. 2.5
Provide plastic laminate, Wilson Art - Black-1595-60, on front face of info desk facing Lobby base. Provide 1-1/2" x 1-1/2" aluminum angles (2) at each bracket for support. Anchor angles to bracket and countertop support wall. Provide 3/4" x 3/4" Aluminum “u” shaped reveals.
High-Pressure Decorative Laminate Material Countertops: Custom grade. 1.
2.4
INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK SECTION 064023
Apply one coat of sealer or primer to concealed surfaces of woodwork. Apply a vinyl wash coat to woodwork made from closed-grain wood before staining and finishing. After staining, if any, apply paste wood filler to open-grain woods and wipe off excess. Tint filler to match stained wood.
Transparent Finish: AWI finish system catalyzed polyurethane.
MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A.
Fasteners for Interior Finish Carpentry: Nails, screws, and other anchoring devices of type, size, material, and finish required for application indicated to provide secure attachment, concealed where possible. 1.
B.
Galvanized finish is required at all areas adjacent to the kitchen preparation areas, provide fasteners and anchorages with hot-dip galvanized coating complying with ASTM A 153/A 153M.
Glue: Aliphatic-resin, polyurethane, or resorcinol wood glue recommended by manufacturer for general carpentry use.
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1
INSTALLATION A.
Before installation, condition woodwork to average prevailing humidity conditions in installation areas.
INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK
064023 - 3
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK SECTION 064023
B.
Install woodwork to comply with referenced quality standard for grade specified.
C.
Install woodwork level, plumb, true, and straight. Shim as required with concealed shims. Install level and plumb (including tops) to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 96 inches.
D.
Scribe and cut woodwork to fit adjoining work, refinish cut surfaces, and repair damaged finish at cuts.
E.
Anchor woodwork to anchors or blocking built in or directly attached to substrates. Fasten with countersunk concealed fasteners and blind nailing. Use fine finishing nails or finishing screws for exposed nailing, countersunk and filled flush with woodwork.
F.
Standing and Running Trim: Install with minimum number of joints possible, using full-length pieces (from maximum length of lumber available) to greatest extent possible. Do not use pieces less than 36 inches long, except where shorter single-length pieces are necessary. Scarf running joints and stagger in adjacent and related members.
G.
Countertops: Install so countertops are accurately aligned. 1.
H.
Fasten wall support through back, at ends and not more than 16 inches o.c. with epoxy anchors into existing concrete floor.
Anchor countertops securely to wall supports. Seal space between countertop and wall.
END OF SECTION 064023
INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK
064023 - 4
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
BITUMINOUS DAMPROOFING SECTION 071113
071113 - BITUMINOUS DAMPPROOFING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY A.
Section Includes: 1.
B.
Related Requirements: 1.
1.3
Section 033000 "Cast-in-Place Concrete" for bituminous vapor retarders.
ACTION SUBMITTALS A.
1.4
Cold-applied, cut-back-asphalt dampproofing.
Product Data: For each type of product.
FIELD CONDITIONS A.
Weather Limitations: Proceed with application only when existing and forecasted weather conditions permit dampproofing to be performed according to manufacturers' written instructions.
B.
Ventilation: Provide adequate ventilation during application of dampproofing in enclosed spaces. Maintain ventilation until dampproofing has cured.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1
2.2
MATERIALS, GENERAL A.
Source Limitations: Obtain primary dampproofing materials and primers from single source from single manufacturer. Provide protection course and auxiliary materials recommended in writing by manufacturer of primary materials.
B.
VOC Content: Products shall comply with VOC content limits of authorities having jurisdiction unless otherwise required.
COLD-APPLIED, CUT-BACK-ASPHALT DAMPPROOFING A.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. 2.
BASF Construction Chemicals - Building Systems; Sonneborn Brand Products. Euclid Chemical Company (The); an RPM company.
BITUMINOUS DAMPROOFING
071113-1
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
3. 4. 5. 6.
2.3
BITUMINOUS DAMPROOFING SECTION 071113
Henry Company. Karnak Corporation. Malarkey Roofing Products. Meadows, W. R., Inc.
B.
Brush and Spray Coats: ASTM D 4479, Type I, fibered or nonfibered.
C.
VOC Content: 250 or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).
AUXILIARY MATERIALS A.
General: Furnish auxiliary materials recommended in writing by dampproofing manufacturer for intended use and compatible with bituminous dampproofing.
B.
Cut-Back-Asphalt Primer: ASTM D 41.
C.
Patching Compound: Epoxy or latex-modified repair mortar of type recommended in writing by dampproofing manufacturer.
D.
Protection Course: Extruded-polystyrene board insulation, unfaced, ASTM C 578, Type X, 1/2 inch thick.
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1
3.2
3.3
EXAMINATION A.
Examine substrates, areas, and conditions with Applicator present, for compliance with requirements for surface smoothness, surface moisture, and other conditions affecting performance of bituminous dampproofing work.
B.
Proceed with application only after substrate construction and penetrating work have been completed and unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
PREPARATION A.
Mask or otherwise protect adjoining exposed surfaces from being stained, spotted, or coated with dampproofing. Prevent dampproofing materials from entering and clogging weep holes and drains.
B.
Clean substrates of projections and substances detrimental to the dampproofing work; fill voids, seal joints, and remove bond breakers if any, as recommended in writing by prime material manufacturer.
APPLICATION, GENERAL A.
Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for dampproofing application, cure time between coats, and drying time before backfilling unless more stringent requirements are indicated. 1.
Apply dampproofing to provide continuous plane of protection.
BITUMINOUS DAMPROOFING
071113-2
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
2.
B.
2.
Concrete Foundations: Apply two brush or spray coats at not less than 1.25 gal./100 sq. ft. for first coat and 1 gal./100 sq. ft. for second coat.
INSTALLATION OF PROTECTION COURSE A.
3.6
Extend dampproofing over outer face of structural members and concrete slabs that interrupt inner wythe. Lap dampproofing at least 1/4 inch onto shelf angles supporting veneer.
COLD-APPLIED, CUT-BACK-ASPHALT DAMPPROOFING A.
3.5
Extend dampproofing 12 inches onto intersecting walls and footings, but do not extend onto surfaces exposed to view when Project is completed.
Where dampproofing exterior face of inner wythe of exterior masonry cavity walls, lap dampproofing at least 1/4 inch onto flashing, masonry reinforcement, veneer ties, and other items that penetrate inner wythe. 1.
3.4
Apply additional coats if recommended in writing by manufacturer or to achieve a smooth surface and uninterrupted coverage.
Where dampproofing footings and foundation walls, apply from finished-grade line to top of footing; extend over top of footing and down a minimum of 6 inches over outside face of footing. 1.
C.
BITUMINOUS DAMPROOFING SECTION 071113
Where indicated, install protection course over completed-and-cured dampproofing. Comply with dampproofing-material and protection-course manufacturers' written instructions for attaching protection course.
CLEANING A.
Clean spillage and soiling from adjacent construction using cleaning agents and procedures recommended in writing by manufacturer of affected construction.
END OF SECTION 071113
BITUMINOUS DAMPROOFING
071113-3
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
THERMAL INSULATION SECTION 072100
072100 - THERMAL INSULATION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY A.
Section Includes: 1. 2. 3. 4.
B.
Related Sections: 1.
1.3
Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
QUALITY ASSURANCE A.
1.5
Section 054000 and 092216 for installation in metal-framed assemblies of insulation specified by referencing the Section.
ACTION SUBMITTALS A.
1.4
Foam-plastic board insulation. Glass-fiber blanket insulation. Faced metal building insulation. Sound batt insulation.
Surface-Burning Characteristics: As determined by testing identical products according to ASTM E 84 by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency.
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A.
Protect insulation materials from physical damage and from deterioration due to moisture, soiling, and other sources. Store inside and in a dry location. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for handling, storing, and protecting during installation.
B.
Protect foam-plastic board insulation as follows: 1. 2. 3.
Do not expose to sunlight except to necessary extent for period of installation and concealment. Protect against ignition at all times. Do not deliver foam-plastic board materials to Project site before installation time. Quickly complete installation and concealment of foam-plastic board insulation in each area of construction.
THERMAL INSULATION
072100 - 1
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
THERMAL INSULATION SECTION 072100
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1
FOAM-PLASTIC BOARD INSULATION A.
Extruded-Polystyrene Board Insulation: ASTM C 578, of type and minimum compressive strength indicated below, with maximum flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of 75 and 450, respectively, per ASTM E 84. 1.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. b. c. d.
B.
2.2
Adhesive for Bonding Insulation: Product with demonstrated capability to bond insulation securely to substrates without damaging insulation and substrates.
GLASS-FIBER BLANKET INSULATION A.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. 2. 3. 4.
2.3
DiversiFoam Products. Dow Chemical Company (The). Owens Corning. Pactiv Building Products.
CertainTeed Corporation. Johns Manville. Knauf Insulation. Owens Corning.
B.
Unfaced, Glass-Fiber Blanket Insulation: ASTM C 665, Type I; 31/2" thick with maximum flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of 25 and 50, respectively, per ASTM E 84; passing ASTM E 136 for combustion characteristics.
C.
Foil-Faced, Glass-Fiber Blanket Insulation: ASTM C 665, Type III (reflective faced) 3 ½” thick, Class B (faced surface with a flame-propagation resistance of 0.12 W/sq. cm); Category 1 (membrane is a vapor barrier), faced with foil scrim, foil-scrim kraft, or foil-scrim polyethylene.
FACED METAL BUILDING INSULATON A.
Faced Metal Building Insulation: ASTMC 991, Type II glass-fiber-blanket insulation; 9 ½" thick 0.5-lb/cu. ft. density, 2-inch wide, continuous, vapor-tight edges tabs; with a flame spread index of 25 or less and a smoke development rating of 450 or less. Insulation to be installed at walls and roof. 1.
To be used at interior appications in ambulance addition.
THERMAL INSULATION
072100 - 2
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
2.4
B.
Retainer Strips: 0.025-inch nominal-thickness, formed, metallic-coated steel or PVC retainer clips colored to match insulation facing.
C.
Vapor-Retarder Tape; Pressure-sensitive tape of type recommended by vapor-retarder manufacturer for sealing joints and penetrations in vapor retarder.
SOUND ATTENUATION BATTS A.
Type: 2 ½ “ thick unfaced glass fiber acoustical insulation complying with ASTM C 998, Type I.. In concealed locations and exposed locations.
B.
Surface Burning Characteristics: 1. 2.
2.5
Maximum flame spread: 10 Maximum smoke developed: 10
C.
Combustion Characteristics:
D.
Fire Resistance Ratings: - Passes ASTM E 119 as part of a complete fire tested wall assembly.
E.
Dimensional Stability: 1. Linear Shrinkage less than .01%.
INSULATION FASTENERS A.
2.6
THERMAL INSULATION SECTION 072100
Insulation Standoff: Spacer fabricated from glavanized mild-steel sheet for fitting over spindle of insulation anchor to maintain air space of 1 inch at walls and 3 inches at roofs between face of insulation and substrate to which anchor is attached.
ACCESSORIES A.
Air & Water Barrier: Tamko TW Moisture Wrap, or approved equal, self-adhering rubberized asphalt sheet membrane. 1. Thickness and size: 40 mil and 36" x 75' 2. Tensile Strength: 994 (ASTM D 1970) 3. Permeance: .05 perms, max. (ASTM E 96)
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1
INSTALLATION, GENERAL A.
Comply with insulation manufacturer's written instructions applicable to products and applications indicated.
B.
Install insulation that is undamaged, dry, and unsoiled and that has not been left exposed to ice, rain, or snow at any time.
C.
Extend insulation to envelop entire area to be insulated. Cut and fit tightly around
THERMAL INSULATION
072100 - 3
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
THERMAL INSULATION SECTION 072100
obstructions and fill voids with insulation. Remove projections that interfere with placement. D.
3.2
Provide sizes to fit applications indicated and selected from manufacturer's standard thicknesses, widths, and lengths. Apply single layer of insulation units to produce thickness indicated unless multiple layers are otherwise shown or required to make up total thickness.
INSTALLATION OF BELOW-GRADE INSULATION A.
On vertical footing and foundation wall surfaces, set insulation units using manufacturer's recommended adhesive according to manufacturer's written instructions. 1.
B.
On horizontal surfaces under slabs, loosely lay insulation units according to manufacturer's written instructions. Stagger end joints and tightly abut insulation units. 1.
3.3
If not otherwise indicated, extend insulation a minimum of 24 inches 36 inches below exterior grade line.
If not otherwise indicated, extend insulation a minimum of 24 inches in from exterior walls.
INSTALLATION OF INSULATION FOR FRAMED CONSTRUCTION A.
Apply insulation units to substrates by method indicated, complying with manufacturer's written instructions. If no specific method is indicated, bond units to substrate with adhesive or use mechanical anchorage to provide permanent placement and support of units.
B.
Foam-Plastic Board Insulation: Seal joints between units by applying adhesive, mastic, or sealant to edges of each unit to form a tight seal as units are shoved into place. Fill voids in completed installation with adhesive, mastic, or sealant as recommended by insulation manufacturer.
C.
Glass-Fiber Blanket Insulation: Install in cavities formed by framing members according to the following requirements: 1.
2. 3. 4. 5.
Use insulation widths and lengths that fill the cavities formed by framing members. If more than one length is required to fill the cavities, provide lengths that will produce a snug fit between ends. Place insulation in cavities formed by framing members to produce a friction fit between edges of insulation and adjoining framing members. Maintain 3-inch (76-mm) clearance of insulation around recessed lighting fixtures not rated for or protected from contact with insulation. Install eave ventilation troughs between roof framing members in insulated attic spaces at vented eaves. For metal-framed wall cavities where cavity heights exceed 96 inches (2438 mm), support unfaced blankets mechanically and support faced blankets by taping flanges of insulation to flanges of metal studs.
THERMAL INSULATION
072100 - 4
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
3.4
INSTALLATION OF INSULATION IN CEILINGS FOR SOUND ATTENUATION A.
3.5
Where glass-fiber blankets are indicated for sound attenuation above ceilings, install blanket insulation over. Extend insulation up over partitions and 12" horizontally away from wall on each side.
THERMAL INSULATION INSTALLATION A.
General: Install insulation concurrently with metal panel installation, in thickness indicated to cover entire surface, according to manufacturer’s written instructions. 1.
2. 3.
4.
B.
3.6
THERMAL INSULATION SECTION 072100
Set vapor-retarder-faced units with vapor retarder toward warm sides of construction unless otherwise indicated. Do not obstruct ventilation spaces except for firestopping. Tape joints and ruptures in vapor retarder, and seal each continuous area of insulation to the surrounding construction to ensure airtight installation. Install factory-laminated, vapor-retarde-faced blankets straight and true in onepiece lengths, with both sets of facing tabs sealed, to provide a complete vapor retarder. Install blankets straight and true in one-piece lengths. Install vapor retarder over insulation, with both sets of facing tabs sealed, to provide a complete vapor retarder.
Blanket Roof Insulation: Comply with the following installation method: 1.
Between-Purlin Installation: Extend insulation and vapor retarder between purlins. Carry vapor-retarder facing tabs up and over pulin, overlapping adjoining facing of next insulation course and maintaining continuity of retarder. Hold in place with bands and crossbands below insulation.
2.
Retainer Strips: Install retainer strips at each longitudinal insulation joint, straight and taut nesting with secondary framing to hold insulation in place.
AIR & WATER BARRIER INSTALLATION A.
Install in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.
END OF SECTION 072100
THERMAL INSULATION
072100 - 5
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
PREFORMED METAL ROOFING AND WALL PANELS SECTION 074113
SECTION 074113 – PREFORMED METAL ROOFING AND WALL PANELS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1
1.2
DESCRIPTION: A.
Work described in this section includes preformed metal roofing and wall system complete with clips, perimeter and penetration flashing and closures. They are to be provided by the roof manufacturer and painted to match. Gutters and downspouts are to be provided by a roof system manufacturer approved fabricator and included in the warranty.
B.
The roof system is to be installed over open metal deck that are attached to the structural system
RELATED SECTIONS. A.
1.3
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General Supplementary Conditions and Specification Sections apply to this section.
SUBMITTALS: A.
Shop drawings: Show cladding system with flashings and accessories in plan and elevation; sections and details. Include metal thickness' and finishes, panel lengths, joining details, anchorage details, flashings and special fabrication provisions for termination and penetrations; existing beam locations, purlin and girt locations, thermal expansion provisions and special supports. Indicate relationships with adjacent and interfacing work. Shop drawings must be completed by the metal panel manufacturer's engineering department. Any and/or all changes recommended by the successful bidder must be approved by the manufacturer in writing prior to submittal.
B.
Product Data: Include manufacturer's detailed material and system description, sealant and closure installation instructions, engineering performance data and finish specifications.
C.
Design test reports: 1.
Indicate fastener types and spacings; and provide fastener pullout values.
2.
Submit copy of manufacturer's minimum design load calculations according to ASCE-7-05.
3.
Submit copy of certification from manufacturer stating that specified system has been tested in accordance with ASTM-1592 requirements by an independent Engineering Firm. All test results must be submitted including Air (ASTM E 283 & E 1680) and Water (ASTM E 331 & E 1646) Infiltration Tests. These test
PREFORMED METAL ROOFING AND WALL PANELS
074113- 1
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
PREFORMED METAL ROOFING AND WALL PANELS SECTION 074113
results must meet or exceed those listed in Section 1.8 (Design and Performance Criteria) and be stamped by an independent Engineering Firm. 1.4
1.5
INSTALLER QUALIFICATIONS: A
Engage an experienced metal roofing contractor (erector) to install standing seam system who has a minimum of three (3) years experience specializing in the installation of structural standing seam systems.
B
Contractor must be certified by manufacturer specified as supplier of structural standing seam system and obtain written certification from manufacturer that installer is approved for installation of specified system. If requested, contractor must supply owner with a copy of this certification.
C.
Successful contractor is required to maintain a full-time supervisor/foreman who is on the job-site at all times during installation of new roof system. Foreman must have a minimum of five (5) years experience with the installation of system similar to that specified.
D.
Successful contractor must obtain all components of roof system from a single manufacturer including any roll good materials if required. Any secondary products that are required which cannot be supplied by the specified manufacturer must be recommended and approved in writing by primary manufacturer prior to bidding.
E.
If required, fabricator/installer shall submit work experience and evidence of adequate financial responsibility. The owners representative reserves the right to inspect fabrication facilities in determining qualifications.
MANUFACTURERS QUALIFICATIONS / ALTERNATE MANUFACTURERS: A.
The materials outlined in the Material and Method Specifications are the type of materials that should be used on this project. Bidder will not be allowed to supply panels formed at the job-site on portable rollformers; metal panels must be pre-manufactured and engineered for this project. Bidder will not be allowed to change materials after the bid opening date 1.
Submit certified test reports from a testing laboratory that bear the stamp of a registered P.E. to show compliance with specified performance criteria. Test reports must meet the specified negative uplift pressures as listed per this specification for the gauge, panel width and clip spacing specified as confirmed by manufacturers ASTM-E 1592 test results.
2.
Tests shall have been made for identical systems within the ranges of specified performance criteria.
3.
Empirical calculations for roof performance shall only be acceptable for positive loads.
PREFORMED METAL ROOFING AND WALL PANELS
074113- 2
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
B.
1.6
PREFORMED METAL ROOFING AND WALL PANELS SECTION 074113
4.
Indicate fastener types and spacings and provide fastener pullout values.
5.
Submit copy of UL 90 classification in accordance with UL 580 test procedure.
6.
Submit copy of certification from manufacturer stating that specified system has been tested in accordance with ASTM-1592 requirements by an independent Engineering Firm. All test results must be submitted including Air (ASTM E 283 & E1680) and Water (ASTM E 331 & E 1646) Infiltration Tests and meet or exceed those listed in Section 1.8 (Design and Performance Criteria)
7.
A list of a minimum of five (5) jobs where the proposed alternate material was used under similar conditions. The reference list shall include date of project, size of project, address and contact telephone number.
8.
A written statement from the manufacturer stating that they will provide the building owner with a daily site inspection for a minimum of one (1) hour by an experienced, full time employee of the company.
9.
A written statement from a corporate officer of the manufacturing company stating that he or she has reviewed the specifications and confirms that the proposed system meets or exceeds all performance requirements listed as well as meets the panel size, gauge, weight, clip design, sealant design, uplift pressures and height of the vertical seam.
10.
A copy of manufacturer's warranty covering both material and labor for all roofing included in the contract.
The following samples must be submitted by alternate manufacturers: 1.
Submit sample of panel section, at least 6" x 6" showing seam profile and also a sample of color selected.
2.
Submit sample of panel clip.
3.
Submit sample of hat section and/or bearing plate if required.
4.
Submit sample of base sheet, roll goods and/or mastics if required.
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING: A.
B.
Manufacturer's responsibility: 1.
Protect components during fabrication and packing from mechanical abuse, stains, discoloration, and corrosion.
2.
Provide protective interleaving between contact areas of exposed surfaces to prevent abrasion during shipment, storage, and handling.
Installer's responsibility:
PREFORMED METAL ROOFING AND WALL PANELS
074113- 3
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
1.7
1.
Store materials off ground providing for drainage; under cover providing for air circulation; and protected from wind movement, foreign material contamination, mechanical damage, cement, lime or other corrosive substances.
2.
Handle materials to prevent damage to surfaces, edges and ends of roofing sheets and sheet metal items. Damaged material shall be rejected and removed from the site.
3.
Protect panels from wind-related damages.
4.
Inspect materials upon delivery. Reject and remove physically damaged or marred material from project site.
JOB CONDITIONS: A.
Determine that work of other trades will not hamper or conflict with necessary fabrication and storage requirements for preformed metal roofing system.
B.
Protection:
C.
1.8
PREFORMED METAL ROOFING AND WALL PANELS SECTION 074113
1.
Provide protection or avoid traffic on completed roof surfaces.
2.
Do not overload roof with stored materials.
3.
Support no roof-mounted equipment directly on roofing system.
Ascertain that work of other trades which penetrates the roof or is to be made watertight by the roof is in place and approved prior to installation of roofing.
QUALITY CRITERIA: A.
Applicable standards: 1.
American Iron and Steel Institute (AISI): 1986 Specification for the Design of Cold-Formed Steel Structural Members.
2.
American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM): B209-96
Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate.
D1056-91
Specification for Flexible Cellular Materials - Sponge or Expanded Rubber.
D3575-84
Test Methods for Flexible Cellular Materials made from Olefin Polymers.
PREFORMED METAL ROOFING AND WALL PANELS
074113- 4
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
PREFORMED METAL ROOFING AND WALL PANELS SECTION 074113
E283-93
Test Method for Rate of Air Leakage Through Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls, and Doors Under Specified Pressure Differences Across the Specimen.
E1680-95
Test Method for Rate of Air Leakage Through Exterior Metal Roof Panel Systems.
E1592-95
Standard Test Method for Structural Performance of Sheet Metal Roof and Siding Systems by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference.
E331-86
Test Method for Water Penetration of Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls, and Doors by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference.
E1646-95
Test Method for Water Penetration of Exterior Metal Roof Panel Systems by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference.
3.
Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National Association (SMACNA): 1993 Architectural Sheet Metal Manual, 5th edition.
4.
Underwriters' Laboratories (UL): Standard UL - 580 Tests for Wind-Uplift Resistance of Roof Assemblies. Standard UL - 263 Tests for Fire Resistance Standard UL - 790 Class A Fire Rating.
B.
1.9
Applicable erection tolerances: Maximum variation from true planes or lines: 1/4" in 20'0"; 3/8" in 40'-0" or more.
QUALITY ASSURANCE: A.
Installer Qualifications: Engage an Installer who has completed the Manufacturer's Approved Roofing Contractor course and is currently certified for the installation of this roof system.
B.
If required, fabricator/installer shall submit work experience and evidence of adequate financial Responsibility. The Owner's representative reserves the right to inspect fabrication facilities in determining qualifications.
C.
Source Limitations: Obtain all components of roof system from a single manufacturer, including roll goods materials if required. Secondary products that are required shall be recommended and approved in writing by the roofing system Manufacturer. 1.
Upon request of the Architect, submit Manufacturer's written approval of secondary components in list form, signed by an authorized agent of the Manufacturer.
PREFORMED METAL ROOFING AND WALL PANELS
074113- 5
ROWAN UNIVERSITY 2.
PREFORMED METAL ROOFING AND WALL PANELS SECTION 074113
Manufacturer shall have direct authority and control over all fabrication of steel components as well as the raw materials used in their fabrication.
D.
Source Quality Control: Manufacturer shall have in place a documented, standardized quality control program such as ISO-9001 approval.
E.
Engage the Manufacturer's Field Representative to conduct required periodic inspections of work in progress as described herein and shall furnish written documentation of all such inspections.
F.
Manufacturer shall provide the project Owner with a written statement that they will provide a site inspection every work day that confirms that the project is being constructed as specified, by an experienced, full time employee of the company.
G.
Alternate Manufacturers: The following manufacturer criteria must be submitted. 1.
Submit each item listed in article 1.4 (A through E) for evaluation of the proposed system.
2.
Tests shall have been made for identical systems within the ranges of specified performance criteria.
3.
Empirical calculations for roof performance shall only be acceptable for positive loads.
4.
A list of a minimum of five (5) jobs where the proposed alternate material was used under similar conditions. The reference list shall include date of project, size of project, project address, and telephone number of architect/owner contact.
5.
A financial statement demonstrating a minimum of a 4:1 ratio of assets to liabilities.
6.
A written statement from the manufacturer stating that they will provide the building owner with a daily site inspection for a minimum of one (1) hour per day by an experienced, full time employee of the company.
7.
A written statement from the manufacturer stating that they will provide the engineer of record with a daily site inspection by an experienced full time employee of the company.
8.
A written statement from a corporate officer of the manufacturing company stating that he or she has reviewed the specifications and confirms that the proposed system meets or exceeds all performance requirements listed as well as meets the panel size, gauge, weight, clip design, sealant design, uplift pressures and height of the vertical seam
PREFORMED METAL ROOFING AND WALL PANELS
074113- 6
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
1.10
PREFORMED METAL ROOFING AND WALL PANELS SECTION 074113
9.
A copy of manufacturer's 25 year warranty. Warranty must include coverage for all trim, flashing, and penetrations associated with this roof and wall panel system.
10.
Proof that the manufacturer has been in business for a minimum number of years equal to the warranty period required for this project.
DESIGN AND PERFORMANCE CRITERIA: A.
B.
Thermal Movement: 1.
Completed metal roofing and flashing system shall be capable of withstanding expansion and contraction of components caused by changes in temperature without buckling, producing excess stress on structure, anchors or fasteners, or reducing performance ability.
2.
Interface between panel and clip shall provide for unlimited thermal movement in each direction along the longitudinal direction.
3.
Location of metal roofing rigid connector shall be at roof ridge unless otherwise approved and designed per job conditions by specified manufacturer.
Uniform wind load capacity: 1.
2.
Installed roof and wall system shall withstand positive and negative design wind loading pressures, calculated by the manufacturer’s engineer complying with: a.
Lateral Load Criteria indicated on structural drawings.
b.
Design Roof Height – as indicated on drawings’
c.
Hurricane prone - no
d.
Slope 1:12
e.
Minimum building width; as indicated on drawings’
Capacity shall be determined using pleated airbag method in accordance with ASTM E 1592, testing of sheet metal roof panels as follows: a.
Roof test specimens shall be either full length or representative of the main body of the roof, free from edge restraint or perimeter attachments, continuous over one or more supports, and containing at least five panel modules for standing seam roof.
b.
No attachments shall be permitted at sides or end perimeter other than those that occur uniformly throughout roof. Side and end seals shall be flexible and in no way restrain crosswise distortion of panels.
PREFORMED METAL ROOFING AND WALL PANELS
074113- 7
ROWAN UNIVERSITY c.
3.
C.
D.
E.
PREFORMED METAL ROOFING AND WALL PANELS SECTION 074113 Panels and accessories shall be production materials of same type and thickness proposed for use on project.
Installed roof system shall carry positive uniform design loads with a maximum system deflection of L/180 as measured at the rib (web) of the panel.
ASTM E283: Static pressure air infiltration through metal roof panels: Pressure
Leakage Rate
1.57 PSF
0.0007 cfm/sq.ft.
6.24 PSF
0.0002 cfm/sq.ft.
20.0 PSF
0.0036 cfm/sq.ft.
ASTM 1680: Standard Test Method For Rate Of Air Leakage Through Metal Roof Panel Systems: Pressure
Area Leakage Rate
Seam Leakage rate
1.57 PSF
0.0012 cfm/sq.ft.
0.0012 cfm./ l.f.
6.24 PSF
0.0000 cfm/sq.ft.
0.0001 cfm./ l.f.
20.0 PSF
0.0011 cfm/sq.ft.
0.0011 cfm./ l.f.
ASTM E331: Static pressure water infiltration: Pressure
Result
5 Gal/Hr Per S.F. and Static Pressure Of 20.0 Psf for 15 minutes Leakage F.
No
ASTM 1646: Standard Test Method for Water Penetrations of Exterior Metal Roof Panels by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference: Pressure
Result
5 Gal/Hr Per S.F. and Static Pressure Of 20.0 Psf for 15 minutes G.
No Leakage
Water penetration (dynamic pressure): No water penetration, other than condensation, when exposed to dynamic rain and 70 mph wind velocities for not less than five minutes duration, when tested in accord with principles of AAMA 501.1.
PREFORMED METAL ROOFING AND WALL PANELS
074113- 8
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
1.10
PREFORMED METAL ROOFING AND WALL PANELS SECTION 074113
H.
Capacities for gauge, span or loading other than those tested may be determined by interpolation of test results within the range of test data. Extrapolation for conditions outside test range are not acceptable.
I.
Equilivant Uniform Design Snow Load:
see structural drawings
Sliding Force:
as calculated by manufacturer’s engineer
Tributary Vector Force:
94 lbs per panel
Amount of Snow Guards
1 row
¼” Cold Finish SS Bolts per Seam
1
1/8” SS rivets per Seam
2
WARRANTIES: A.
Owner shall receive one (1) warranty from manufacturer of roof and wall panels covering all of the following criteria. Multiple warranties are not acceptable. 1.
Manufacturer’s 25 year limited watertight warranty on Roof Panels and 10 years on Wall Panels
2.
20 year coverage on finish including checking, crazing, peeling, chalking, fading and/or adhesion.
3.
Warranty shall commence on date of substantial completion.
4.
Installer shall provide manufacturer with 2 year warranty covering roofing system installation and watertightness.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.0
METAL ROOF SYSTEM A.
METAL ROOF SYSTEM: 1.
Whenever a particular make of material, trade name and/or manufacturer's name is specified herein, it shall be regarded as being indicative of the minimum standard of quality required. A bidder who proposes to quote on the basis of an alternate material and/or system will only be considered if the proposed alternate is submitted on time and is documented as being equivalent or superior in quality to the specified system as described in these specifications. Additionally, all manufacturer and contractor /fabricator guidelines must be met as specified. a) b) c)
The Garland Company, Inc. Tremco Approved equal
PREFORMED METAL ROOFING AND WALL PANELS
074113- 9
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
2.
B.
C.
Product names for the metal roof panel system and waterproofing materials used in this section shall be based on performance requirements from materials manufactured by The Garland Company, Cleveland, OH. and form the basis of the contract documents.
Panel Material 1.
Panel material: . 24 ga., Galvalume steel, type AZ-55, smooth as per ASTM A792-96.
2.
Flashing and flat stock material: Fabricate in profiles indicated on drawings of same material, thickness, and finish as roof system, unless indicated otherwise.
3.
Nominal width 16” for roof panel
Finish on surfaces: 1.
D.
PREFORMED METAL ROOFING AND WALL PANELS SECTION 074113
Exposed surfaces for coated aluminum: a.
Two coat coil applied, baked-on full-strength (70% resin) fluorocarbon coating system (polyvinylidene fluoride, PVF2), applied by manufacturer's approved applicator.
b.
Coating system shall provide nominal 1.0 mil dry film thickness, consisting of primer and color coat.
c.
Color shall be selected by the Owner / Architect from manufacturer’s standard or premium colors
Characteristics: 1.
Configuration, Roofing: Standing seams incorporating mechanically interlocked, concealed anchor clips allowing unlimited thermal movement, and of configuration which will prevent entrance or passage of water. a.
Panel/Cap configuration must have a total of four (4) layers of steel surrounding anchor clip for prevention of water infiltration and increased system strength designed to limit potential for panel blow-off.
b.
Profile of panel shall have mesa's every 1 1/2” o.c. continuous throughout panel which are a minimum of 1.5” wide. These will absorb thermal stresses, reduce oil canning in panel and increase load carrying capacity.
c.
Exposed fasteners, screws and/or roof mastic are unacceptable and will be rejected. System configuration only allows for exposed fasteners at trim details (as per manufacturer's guidelines)
PREFORMED METAL ROOFING AND WALL PANELS
074113- 10
ROWAN UNIVERSITY d.
PREFORMED METAL ROOFING AND WALL PANELS SECTION 074113 Panels must be furnished in continuous lengths from eave to eave with no overlaps unless approved by manufacturer to length of run.
2.
Seam must be 2-3/8" minimum height for added upward pressures and aesthetic appeal. Seam shall have continuous anchor reveals to allow anchor clips to resist positive and negative loading and allow unlimited expansion and contraction of panels due to thermal changes. Integral (not mechanically sealed) seams are not acceptable.
3.
Concealed Anchor Clips: Clips must be 16 guage, 40,000 p.s.i. ONE (1) piece stainless steel clip with projecting legs for additional panel alignment and provision for unlimited thermal movement in each direction along the longitudinal dimension.
4.
a.
Two-piece (2) clips are NOT acceptable.
b.
Clip design must isolate sealant in panel cap from clip to insure that no sealant damage occurs from the clip during expansion and contraction.
c.
Clip must maintain a clearance of a minimum of 3/8" between panel and substrate for proper ventilation to help prevent condensation on underside of panel and eliminate the contact of panel fastener head to panel.
Seam cap: Snap-on cap shall be a minimum of 1" wide "T" shaped of continuous length up to 45 feet according to job condition and field seamed by means of manufacturer's standard seaming machine. a.
Cap shall be designed to receive continuous double bead of hot applied, foamed in place gasketing sealant which will not come in contact with the anchor clip to allow unlimited thermal movement of panel without damage to cap sealant.
b.
Sealant shall be non-fatigue, nitrogen injected water barrier.
5.
Standing Seam Panel Width: (16")
6.
Stiffening ribs, mesas: Located in flat of panel to minimize oil canning and telegraphing of structural members.
7
Panel length: Full length without joints, including bends.
8.
Replaceability: Panels shall be of a symmetrical design with snap on cap configuration such that individual panels may be removable for replacement without removing adjacent panels.
9.
Panel ends shall be panned at ridge, headwall, and hip conditions where applicable.
PREFORMED METAL ROOFING AND WALL PANELS
074113- 11
ROWAN UNIVERSITY 2.1
PREFORMED METAL ROOFING AND WALL PANELS SECTION 074113
METAL WALL PANELS A.
The products, quality, and performance criteria specified shall be regarded as the minimum standard of quality required for the project.
B.
Basis of Design: R-MER Wall Pan System manufactured by the Garland Company, Cleveland, OH or approved equal.
C.
Materials.
D.
1.
Panel material: [24 ga. or 22 ga.], Galvalume steel, type AZ-55, smooth as per ASTM A792-96.
2.
Flashing and flat stock material: Fabricate in profiles indicated on drawings of same material, thickness, and finish as wall panel system, unless indicated otherwise.
Finish on surfaces: 1.
2.
Exposed surfaces for coated panels: a.
Two coat coil applied, baked-on full-strength (70% resin) fluorocarbon coating system (polyvinylidene fluoride, PVF2), applied by manufacturer's approved applicator.
b.
Coating system shall provide nominal 1.0 mil dry film thickness, consisting of primer and color coat.
c.
Color : Color selected by architect from manufacturer’s fill range.
Unexposed surfaces for coated panels shall be baked-on polyester coating with .20 - .30 dry film thickness (TDF).
3. Exposed and unexposed surfaces for uncoated panels shall be as shipped from the mill. E.
Characteristics: 1.
Fabrication: Panels shall be factory roll-formed from the specified metal. Field rolled panels will not be allowed.1.
2.
Configuration: Interlocking flush/flat seams incorporating concealed anchor clips. Through fastened or exposed fastener systems are not acceptable.
3.
Panel seam legs shall be one and one half (1 1/2) inch nominal concealed depth behind the panel face. Seam shall allow for expansion and contraction of panels due to thermal changes.3. Anchor clips: Clips shall be 22 gauge galvalume steel designed to allow thermal movement of the panel in each direction along the longitudinal dimension.
PREFORMED METAL ROOFING AND WALL PANELS
074113- 12
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
PREFORMED METAL ROOFING AND WALL PANELS SECTION 074113
4.
Panel Width (Seam Spacing): [12"] nominal.
5.
Panel lengths: Full length without joints to the extent as is practical.
6.
Profile of the panel face shall be flat and free from any mechanical finishes.
E. Accessories: 1. Fasteners:
2. 2.2
b.
Exposed fasteners: Series 410 stainless steel screws or one eighth (1/8) inch diameter stainless steel waterproof rivets. All exposed fasteners shall be factory painted to match the color of the wall panels.
Provide all miscellaneous accessories for complete installation.
Sealant: 1.
2.
2.4
Concealed fasteners: Corrosion resistant steel screws, #10 x 1" long, pancake head, Phillips drive. Use self-drilling, self-tapping for metal substrate or A-point for plywood substrate.
ACCESSORY PRODUCTS: A.
2.3
a.
Acceptable product: a.
Concealed Application : Tuff-Stuff.
b.
Exposed Application : General Electric Co., SILGLAZE II 2800.
Colors: As selected by architect from sealant manufacturer's standard selection.
FABRICATION: A.
Shop fabricate metal roofing and flashing components to the maximum extent possible, forming metal work with clear, sharp, straight, and uniform bends and rises. Hem exposed edges of flashings.
B.
Form flashing components from full single width sheet in minimum 10'-0" sections. Provide mitered corners, joined using closed end pop rivets and joint sealant.
C.
Fabricate roofing and related sheet metal work in accord with approved shop drawings and applicable standards.
SNOW FENCE SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
PREFORMED METAL ROOFING AND WALL PANELS
074113- 13
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
PREFORMED METAL ROOFING AND WALL PANELS SECTION 074113
A.
Roof Attachement Clamps: Provide aluminum standing seam roof clamp. Carbon steel or plastic parts are not acceptable. No fastener penetrations of the roof membrane will be permitted. No systems that rely on adhesives for attachment will be permitted. Clamp to attach to the standing seam will have three stainless steel set screws (3/8” minimum diameter) having rounded point.
B.
Crossmember: S-5! “ColorGard” extrusion with receptacle in face to provide for insert of color strip. Color strip is to be the same prefinished material and originate from the same supplier as the roof panels. Crossmember is to be continuous and include splice connectors to join adjacent sections, ensuring alignment and structural continuity. Cross member is attached to clamps using 3/8” diameter stainless steel bolts.
C.
Snow/ Ice Clips: Mandatory on panel seam heights of 2” or greater. Furnish only if shown on plans for panel seam heights below 2” S-5! “SnoClips” are to be aluminum or stainless steel, with rubber “foot”. Clip to attach to cross member and rest on panel flat, between panel seams to retard movement of snow/ice beneath crossmember. Use two clips per panel for seam spacing of 16” or more; one clip per panel for seam spacing under 16”.
D.
Clamps and VersaBracket: Manufactured from certified 6061 T6 extruded aluminum, in strict conformity with The Aluminum Association, Incorporated “Aluminum Standards and Data” and ASTM standard B-221. Cast parts are not permitted.
E.
Crossmember: Manufactured from certified 6061 T6 aluminum, in strict conformity with The Aluminum Association, Incorporated “Aluminum Standards and Data” and ASTM standard B-221. Minimum breaking strength of 175 pounds per linear inch. Crossmember must be furnished with splice pieces to align adjacent sections and maintain continuity.
F.
Color Strip
G.
1.
Steel : Aluminum-Zinc Alloy Coated, ASTM A792, Coating Designation AZ50, in thickness of .0217 or .0336 by min. 36 in. by coil, chemically treated, commercial lock-forming quality.
2.
Steel Finishes: Fluorocarbon, epoxy primer baked both sides, as approved by finish coat manufacturer:
Fasteners and Other Hardware: Each Clamp is to be secured to the panel seam with a minimum of three set screws, having nominal diameter of 0.375”. Set screws are to have a round nose point to prevent damage to the panel finish. Cup point set screws are not acceptable. Set screws and other clamp hardware is to be either 300 series stainless steel (18-8 alloy) having no iron content, or aluminum. Attachment bolt for clamp is to be 0.375” diameter with washer. One row of snow fence required for this project.
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1
PREPARATION:
PREFORMED METAL ROOFING AND WALL PANELS
074113- 14
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
A.
Inspection: Examine the alignment and placement of the building structure and substrate. Correct any objectionable warp, waves or buckles in the substrate before proceeding with installation of the preformed metal roofing. The installed roof panels will follow the contour of the structure and may appear irregular if not corrected.
B.
Establish straight side and crosswise benchmarks.
C.
Use proper size and length fastener for strength requirements. Approximately 5/16” is allowable for maximum fastener head size beneath the panel.
D.
Rectangular Roofs shall be checked for square and straightness. Gable ends may not be straight; set a true line for the gable clips and flashing with stringline.
E.
Measure the roof lengthwise to confirm panel lengths, overhangs, coverage of flashings at eaves and ridges and verify clearances for thermal movement.
F.
Pre-roofing conference: Prior to beginning metal roofing work, a pre-roofing conference shall be held to review work to be accomplished. 1.
3.2
3.3
PREFORMED METAL ROOFING AND WALL PANELS SECTION 074113
Architect, Owner, contractor, metal roofing subcontractor, metal roofing system manufacturer's representative and all other subcontractors who have equipment penetrating roof or whose work involves access to roof shall be present.
WALL AND ROOF PANEL INSTALLATION, GENERAL A.
Install roof system when the atmospheric dry bulb temperature is minimum forty (40) degrees Fahrenheit and rising.
B.
Install all components of the roof system in exact accordance with the manufacturer's standard published procedures as applicable to these project conditions and substrates.
ROOFING AND FLASHING INSTALLATION: A.
All details will be shown on manufacturer’s shop drawings to successful bidder; install roofing and flashings in accordance with approved shop drawings and manufacturer's product data, within specified erection tolerances.
B.
Attach the 16 gauge one piece panel clips with two fasteners per clip according to the proper spacing specified above. The clips are to be attached to the metal joist centered.
C.
Installation of Roof Panels: Roof panels can be installed by starting from either end and working towards the opposite end. Due to the symmetrical design of the specified panel system, it is also acceptable to start from the middle of the roof and work toward each end. 1.
A stainless steel pop rivet shall be secured through the anchor reveal of the panel leg and extend into the arms of the panel clip located at the ridge of the system. This is done at each arm of the clip along the ridge. The panel is then anchored at both sides of the clip.
PREFORMED METAL ROOFING AND WALL PANELS
074113- 15
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
PREFORMED METAL ROOFING AND WALL PANELS SECTION 074113 a. Be sure to capture all drilling debris during this operation with a rag or cloth placed on the panels at the drilling operation.
3.4
2.
The seam caps are shipped with two rolls of factory applied hot melt sealant located inside the caps. To install the caps, hook one side of the cap over the panel edge and rotate over the opposite panel leg. For ease of installation, start at one end of the panel and work toward the opposite end. Caps come in 45’ lengths maximum
3.
A hand crimping tool is used to crimp the cap around the top of two adjacent panels
4.
Caps shall then be permanently seamed with manufacturers mechanical seamer.
D
Limit exposed fasteners to extent indicated on shop drawings.
E.
Anchorage shall allow for temperature expansion/contraction movement without stress or elongation of panels, clips, or anchors. Attach clips to structural substrate using fasteners of size and spacing as determined by manufacturer's design analysis to resist specified uplift and thermal movement forces.
F.
Seal laps and joints in accordance with roofing system manufacturer's product data.
G.
Coordinate flashing and sheet metal work to provide weathertight conditions at roof terminations. Fabricate and install in accordance with standards of SMACNA Manual.
H.
Provide for temperature expansion/contraction movement of panels at roof penetrations and roof mounted equipment in accordance with system manufacturer's product data and design calculations.
I.
Installed system shall be true to line and plane and free of dents, and physical defects with a minimum of oil canning.
J.
Form joints in linear sheet metal to allow for 1/4" minimum expansion at 20'-0" o.c. maximum and 8'-0" from corners.
K.
At joints in linear sheet metal items, set sheet metal items in two 1/4" beads of butyl sealant. Extend sealant over all metal surfaces. Mate components for positive seal. Allow no sealant to migrate onto exposed surfaces.
L.
Remove damaged work and replace with new, undamaged components.
M.
All vent stacks must be a minimum of 10” above the finished roof surface. Do not use copper or other incompatible materials. Paint all metal stacks and copper counterflashing with manufacturer’s recommended coating to prevent rust and other harmful byproducts from affecting panel finish.
SNOW FENCE INSTALLATION
PREFORMED METAL ROOFING AND WALL PANELS
074113- 16
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
3.5
3.6
PREFORMED METAL ROOFING AND WALL PANELS SECTION 074113
A.
Layout: Carefully lay out desired assembly locations true-to-line prior to installing clamps or Versabrakets. Clamps shall avoid panel attachment clips if the clip is a single piece design.
B.
Clamp Installation: Assemble set screws to clamp and clamp to seam following all manufacturers printed instructions. Both set screws are to be at the same side of clamp. When application relies upon tested load-to-failure values, manufacturer’s minimum recommended set screw tension shall be randomly verified using calibrated torgue wrench per manufacturer’s instructions.
C.
System Installation: Install snow retention assemblies straight and true-to-line. Secure all color strip material to ColorGard per manufacturer’s instructions. Join adjacent sections with splice pieces provided. Do not cantilever crossmember more than 6” past the last clamp in an assembly.
WALL PANEL INSTALLATION A.
Comply with all details and install roofing materials and flashings in accordance with approved Manufacturer's [details shop drawings] and manufacturer's product data within specified erection tolerances.
B.
Isolate dissimilar metals and masonry or concrete from metals with bituminous coating. Use gasketed fasteners where required to prevent corrosive action between fastener, substrate, and panels.
C.
Limit exposed fasteners to extent indicated on [details shop drawings].
D.
Seal laps and joints in accordance with system manufacturer's product data.
E.
Installed system shall be true to line and plane and free of dents, and physical defects. In light gauge panels with wide flat surfaces, some oil canning may be present. Oil canning does not affect the finish or structural integrity of the panel and is therefore not cause for rejection.
F.
Form joints in linear sheet metal to allow for one fourth (1/4) inch minimum expansion at twenty (20'-0") feet on center maximum and eight (8'-0") feet from corners.
G.
At joints in linear sheet metal items, set sheet metal items in two (2) one fourth (1/4) inch beads of butyl sealant. Extend sealant over all metal surfaces. Mate components for positive seal. Allow no sealant to migrate onto exposed surfaces.
CLEANING AND PROTECTION: A.
Remove protective film (if any) from exposed surfaces of metal roofing, promptly upon installation. Strip with care to avoid damage to finishes. Clean exposed surfaces of roofing and accessories after completion of installation. Leave in clean condition at date of substantial completion. Touch up minor abrasions and scratches in finish.
PREFORMED METAL ROOFING AND WALL PANELS
074113- 17
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
PREFORMED METAL ROOFING AND WALL PANELS SECTION 074113
B.
Provide final protection in a manner acceptable to installer, which ensures metal roofing being without damage or deterioration at time of substantial completion.
C.
Touch up exposed fasteners using paint furnished by roofing panel manufacturer and matching exposed panel surface finish.
END OF SECTION 074113
PREFORMED METAL ROOFING AND WALL PANELS
074113- 18
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM SECTION 076200
SECTION 076200 - SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY A.
Section Includes: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.
B.
Related Requirements: 1. 2. 3. 4.
1.3
1.4
Manufactured through-wall flashing with counterflashing. Formed roof-drainage sheet metal fabrications. Formed low-slope roof sheet metal fabrications. Formed wall sheet metal fabrications. Formed equipment support flashing and equipment opening caps.
Section 061000 "Rough Carpentry" for wood nailers, curbs, and blocking. Section 074113 Metal Preformed Roofing and Wall P anels for sheet metal flashing and trim integral with metal wall panels. Section 077200 "Roof Accessories" for set-on-type curbs, equipment supports, roof hatches, vents, and other manufactured roof accessory units. Section 079200 “Joint Sealants” Sealants at flashing locations.
COORDINATION A.
Coordinate sheet metal flashing and trim layout and seams with sizes and locations of penetrations to be flashed, and joints and seams in adjacent materials.
B.
Coordinate sheet metal flashing and trim installation with adjoining roofing and wall materials, joints, and seams to provide leakproof, secure, and noncorrosive installation.
ACTION SUBMITTALS A.
Product Data: For each type of product. 1.
B.
Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for each manufactured product and accessory.
Shop Drawings: For sheet metal flashing and trim. 1. 2. 3. 4.
Include plans, elevations, sections, and attachment details. Detail fabrication and installation layouts, expansion-joint locations, and keyed details. Distinguish between shop- and field-assembled work. Include identification of material, thickness, weight, and finish for each item and location in Project. Include details for forming, including profiles, shapes, seams, and dimensions.
SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM
076200-1
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. C.
1.5
Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of sheet metal and accessory indicated with factory-applied finishes.
Sample Warranty: For special warranty.
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A.
1.7
Maintenance Data: For sheet metal flashing and trim, and its accessories, to include in maintenance manuals.
QUALITY ASSURANCE A.
Fabricator Qualifications: Employs skilled workers who custom fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim similar to that required for this Project and whose products have a record of successful in-service performance. 1.
1.8
Include details for joining, supporting, and securing, including layout and spacing of fasteners, cleats, clips, and other attachments. Include pattern of seams. Include details of termination points and assemblies. Include details of expansion joints and expansion-joint covers, including showing direction of expansion and contraction from fixed points. Include details of roof-penetration flashing. Include details of edge conditions, including eaves, ridges, valleys, rakes, crickets, and counterflashings as applicable. Include details of special conditions. Include details of connections to adjoining work. Detail formed flashing and trim at scale of not less than 3 inches per 12 inches
INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A.
1.6
SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM SECTION 076200
For copings and roof edge flashings that are FM Approvals approved, shop shall be listed as able to fabricate required details as tested and approved.
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A.
Do not store sheet metal flashing and trim materials in contact with other materials that might cause staining, denting, or other surface damage. Store sheet metal flashing and trim materials away from uncured concrete and masonry.
B.
Protect strippable protective covering on sheet metal flashing and trim from exposure to sunlight and high humidity, except to extent necessary for period of sheet metal flashing and trim installation.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A.
General: Sheet metal flashing and trim assemblies shall withstand wind loads, structural movement, thermally induced movement, and exposure to weather without failure due to
SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM
076200-2
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM SECTION 076200
defective manufacture, fabrication, installation, or other defects in construction. Completed sheet metal flashing and trim shall not rattle, leak, or loosen, and shall remain watertight. B.
Sheet Metal Standard for Flashing and Trim: Comply with NRCA's "The NRCA Roofing Manual" and SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" requirements for dimensions and profiles shown unless more stringent requirements are indicated.
C.
Sheet Metal Standard for Copper: Comply with CDA's "Copper in Architecture Handbook." Conform to dimensions and profiles shown unless more stringent requirements are indicated.
D.
FM Approvals Listing: Manufacture and install roof edge flashings that are listed in FM Approvals' "RoofNav" and approved for windstorm classification, Class 1-90. Identify materials with name of fabricator and design approved by FM Approvals.
E.
Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements from ambient and surface temperature changes to prevent buckling, opening of joints, overstressing of components, failure of joint sealants, failure of connections, and other detrimental effects. Base calculations on surface temperatures of materials due to both solar heat gain and nighttime-sky heat loss. 1.
2.2
Temperature Change: 120 deg F, ambient; 180 deg F, material surfaces.
SHEET METALS A.
General: Protect mechanical and other finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying strippable, temporary protective film before shipping.
B.
Copper Sheet: ASTM B 370, cold-rolled copper sheet, H00 or H01 temper. 1.
C.
Nonpatinated Exposed Finish: Mill.
Aluminum Sheet: ASTM B 209 (ASTM B 209M), alloy as standard with manufacturer for finish required, with temper as required to suit forming operations and performance required; with smooth, surface. 1. 2.
Clear Anodic Finish, Coil Coated: AAMA 611, AA-M12C22A41, Class I, 0.018 mm or thicker. Exposed Coil-Coated Finish: a.
3. 4.
D.
Two-Coat Fluoropolymer: AAMA 620. Fluoropolymer finish containing not less than 70 percent PVDF resin by weight in color coat. Prepare, pretreat, and apply coating to exposed metal surfaces to comply with coating and resin manufacturers' written instructions.
Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. Concealed Finish: Pretreat with manufacturer's standard white or light-colored acrylic or polyester backer finish, consisting of prime coat and wash coat with minimum total dry film thickness of 0.5 mil (0.013 mm).
Metallic-Coated Steel Sheet: Provide zinc-coated (galvanized) steel sheet according to ASTM A 653/A 653M, G90 coating designation prepainted by coil-coating process to comply with ASTM A 755/A 755M.
SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM
076200-3
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
1. 2.
Surface: Smooth. Exposed Coil-Coated Finish: a.
2.3
SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM SECTION 076200
Two-Coat Fluoropolymer: AAMA 621. Fluoropolymer finish containing not less than 70 percent PVDF resin by weight in color coat. Prepare, pretreat, and apply coating to exposed metal surfaces to comply with coating and resin manufacturers' written instructions.
3.
Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range
4.
Concealed Finish: Pretreat with manufacturer's standard white or light-colored acrylic or polyester backer finish, consisting of prime coat and wash coat with minimum total dry film thickness of 0.5 mil.
MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A.
General: Provide materials and types of fasteners solder, protective coatings, sealants, and other miscellaneous items as required for complete sheet metal flashing and trim installation and as recommended by manufacturer of primary sheet metal or manufactured item unless otherwise indicated.
B.
Fasteners: Screws, annular threaded nails, self-tapping screws, self-locking rivets and bolts, and other suitable fasteners designed to withstand design loads and recommended by manufacturer of primary sheet metal or manufactured item. 1.
General: Blind fasteners or self-drilling screws, gasketed, with hex-washer head. a.
b. c.
2. 3. 4.
C.
Fasteners for Copper Sheet: Copper, hardware bronze or passivated Series 300 stainless steel. Fasteners for Aluminum Sheet: Aluminum or Series 300 stainless steel. Fasteners for Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Steel Sheet: Series 300 stainless steel or hot-dip galvanized steel according to ASTM A 153/A 153M or ASTM F 2329.
Solder: 1. 2.
D.
Exposed Fasteners: Heads matching color of sheet metal using plastic caps or factory-applied coating. Provide metal-backed EPDM or PVC sealing washers under heads of exposed fasteners bearing on weather side of metal. Blind Fasteners: High-strength aluminum or stainless-steel rivets suitable for metal being fastened. Spikes and Ferrules: Same material as gutter; with spike with ferrule matching internal gutter width.
For Copper: ASTM B 32, Grade Sn50, 50 percent tin and 50 percent lead with maximum lead content of 0.2 percent. For Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Steel: ASTM B 32, [Grade Sn50, 50 percent tin and 50 percent lead or Grade Sn60, 60 percent tin and 40 percent lead
Sealant Tape: Pressure-sensitive, 100 percent solids, polyisobutylene compound sealant tape with release-paper backing. Provide permanently elastic, nonsag, nontoxic, nonstaining tape 1/2 inch (13 mm) wide and 1/8 inch (3 mm) thick.
SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM
076200-4
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
2.4
E.
Elastomeric Sealant: ASTM C 920, elastomeric silicone polymer sealant; of type, grade, class, and use classifications required to seal joints in sheet metal flashing and trim and remain watertight.
F.
Butyl Sealant: ASTM C 1311, single-component, solvent-release butyl rubber sealant; polyisobutylene plasticized; heavy bodied for hooked-type expansion joints with limited movement.
G.
Epoxy Seam Sealer: Two-part, noncorrosive, aluminum seam-cementing compound, recommended by aluminum manufacturer for exterior nonmoving joints, including riveted joints.
H.
Bituminous Coating: Cold-applied asphalt emulsion according to ASTM D 1187.
I.
Asphalt Roofing Cement: ASTM D 4586, asbestos free, of consistency required for application.
J.
Concrete Splashblocks: Provide at each downspout a concrete spalshblock. Splashblock to be precast concrete, 30" x 12" x 3, color - almond.
MANUFACTURED SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM A.
Through-Wall, Ribbed, Sheet Metal Flashing: Manufacture through-wall sheet metal flashing for embedment in masonry, with ribs at 3-inch (75-mm) intervals along length of flashing to provide integral mortar bond. Manufacture through-wall flashing with interlocking counterflashing on exterior face, of same metal as flashing. 1.
2.5
SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM SECTION 076200
Copper: 10-oz. minimum for fully concealed flashing; 16 oz. elsewhere.
FABRICATION, GENERAL A.
General: Custom fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim to comply with details shown and recommendations in cited sheet metal standard that apply to design, dimensions, geometry, metal thickness, and other characteristics of item required. Fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim in shop to greatest extent possible. 1.
2. 3.
4.
B.
Fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim in thickness or weight needed to comply with performance requirements, but not less than that specified for each application and metal. Obtain field measurements for accurate fit before shop fabrication. Form sheet metal flashing and trim to fit substrates without excessive oil canning, buckling, and tool marks; true to line, levels, and slopes; and with exposed edges folded back to form hems. Conceal fasteners and expansion provisions where possible. Do not use exposed fasteners on faces exposed to view.
Fabrication Tolerances: Fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim that is capable of installation to a tolerance of 1/4 inch in 20 feet on slope and location lines indicated on Drawings and within 1/8-inch offset of adjoining faces and of alignment of matching profiles.
SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM
076200-5
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM SECTION 076200
C.
Fabrication Tolerances: Fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim that is capable of installation to tolerances specified in MCA's "Guide Specification for Residential Metal Roofing."
D.
Expansion Provisions: Form metal for thermal expansion of exposed flashing and trim. 1.
E.
2.6
Form expansion joints of intermeshing hooked flanges, not less than 1 inch deep, filled with butyl sealant concealed within joints. 2. Use lapped expansion joints only where indicated on Drawings. Sealant Joints: Where movable, nonexpansion-type joints are required, form metal to provide for proper installation of elastomeric sealant according to cited sheet metal standard.
F.
Fabricate cleats and attachment devices from same material as accessory being anchored or from compatible, noncorrosive metal.
G.
Fabricate cleats and attachment devices of sizes as recommended by cited sheet metal standard for application, but not less than thickness of metal being secured.
H.
Seams: Fabricate nonmoving seams with flat-lock seams. Form seams and seal with elastomeric sealant unless otherwise recommended by sealant manufacturer for intended use. Rivet joints where necessary for strength.
I.
Seams for Aluminum: Fabricate nonmoving seams with flat-lock seams. Form seams and seal with epoxy seam sealer. Rivet joints where necessary for strength.
J.
Do not use graphite pencils to mark metal surfaces.
ROOF-DRAINAGE SHEET METAL FABRICATIONS A.
Hanging Gutters: Fabricate to cross section required, complete with end pieces, outlet tubes, and other accessories as required. Fabricate in minimum 96-inch- long sections. Furnish flat-stock gutter brackets and flat-stock gutter spacers and straps fabricated from same metal as gutters, of size recommended by cited sheet metal standard but with thickness not less than twice the gutter thickness. Fabricate expansion joints, expansion-joint covers, gutter bead reinforcing bars, and gutter accessories from same metal as gutters. Shop fabricate interior and exterior corners. 1. 2. 3. 4.
Gutter Profile As indicated on the drawings according to cited sheet metal standard. Expansion Joints: Lap type. Accessories: Wire-ball downspout strainer Valley baffles. Gutters with Girth up to 15 Inches : Fabricate from the following materials: a. b.
B.
Aluminum: 0.032 inch thick. Galvanized Steel: 0.022 inch thick.
Downspouts: Fabricate rectangular downspouts to dimensions indicated, complete with mitered elbows. Furnish with metal hangers from same material as downspouts and anchors Shop fabricate elbows. 1. 2.
Manufactured Hanger Style: Fig 1-34B according to SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual." Fabricate from the following materials:
SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM
076200-6
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
a. b. C.
Aluminum: 0.040 inch thick.
LOW-SLOPE ROOF SHEET METAL FABRICATIONS A.
Roof Edge Flashing (Gravel Stop) and Fascia Cap: Fabricate in minimum 96-inch- long, but not exceeding 12-foot-long sections. Furnish with 6-inch- wide, joint cover plates. Shop fabricate interior and exterior corners. 1.
Joint Style: Butted with expansion space and 6-inch wide, concealed backup plate.
2.
Fabricate from the following Materials: a.
B.
C.
Aluminum-Zinc Alloy-Coated Steel: 0.028 inch thick.
Counterflashing: Shop fabricate interior and exterior corners. Fabricate from the following materials: 1.
E.
Aluminum-Zinc Alloy-Coated Steel: 0.034 inch thick.
Base Flashing: Shop fabricate interior and exterior corners. Fabricate from the following materials: 1.
D.
To match roof and wall panels
Roof-to-Wall Transition Expansion-Joint Cover: Fabricate from the following materials: 1.
Aluminum-Zinc Alloy-Coated Steel: 0.022 inch thick.
Roof-Penetration Flashing: Fabricate from the following materials: 1.
2.8
Aluminum: 0.024 inch thick. Galvanized Steel: 0.022 inch thick.
Splash Pans: Fabricate to dimensions and shape required and from the following materials: 1.
2.7
SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM SECTION 076200
Aluminum-Zinc Alloy-Coated Steel: 0.028 inch thick.
WALL SHEET METAL FABRICATION A.
Through-Wall Flashing: Fabricate continuous flashings in minimum 96-inch- (2400-mm-) long, but not exceeding 12-foot- (3.6-m-) long, sections, under copings, and at shelf angles. Fabricate discontinuous lintel, sill, and similar flashings to extend 6 inchesbeyond each side of wall openings; and form with 2-inch- (50-mm-) high, end dams. Fabricate from the following materials: 1.
B.
Copper: 16 oz./sq. ft..
Opening Flashings in Frame Construction: Fabricate head, sill, jamb, and similar flashings to extend 4 inches beyond wall openings. Form head and sill flashing with 2-inch- (50-mm-) high, end dams. Fabricate from the following materials:
SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM
076200-7
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
1. C.
Aluminum-Zinc Alloy-Coated Steel: 0.022 inch thick.
Wall Expansion-Joint Cover: Fabricate from the following materials: 1.
2.9
SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM SECTION 076200
Aluminum-Zinc Alloy-Coated Steel: 0.028 inch thick.
MISCELLANEOUS SHEET METAL FABRICATIONS A.
Equipment Support Flashing: Fabricate from the following materials: 1.
Aluminum-Zinc Alloy-Coated Steel: 0.028 inch thick.
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1
EXAMINATION A.
Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances, substrate, and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. 1. 2. 3.
B. 3.2
Verify compliance with requirements for installation tolerances of substrates. Verify that substrate is sound, dry, smooth, clean, sloped for drainage, and securely anchored. Verify that air- or water-resistant barriers have been installed over sheathing or backing substrate to prevent air infiltration or water penetration.
Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
INSTALLATION, GENERAL A.
Metal Protection: Where dissimilar metals contact each other, or where metal contacts pressure-treated wood or other corrosive substrates, protect against galvanic action or corrosion by painting contact surfaces with bituminous coating or by other permanent separation as recommended by sheet metal manufacturer or cited sheet metal standard. 1.
B.
Expansion Provisions: Provide for thermal expansion of exposed flashing and trim. Space movement joints at maximum of 10 feet with no joints within 24 inches (600 mm) of corner or intersection. 1. 2.
C.
Coat concealed side of uncoated-aluminum sheet metal flashing and trim with bituminous coating where flashing and trim contact wood, ferrous metal, or cementitious construction.
Form expansion joints of intermeshing hooked flanges, not less than 1 inch deep, filled with sealant concealed within joints. Use lapped expansion joints only where indicated on Drawings.
Fasteners: Use fastener sizes that penetrate substrate not less than recommended by fastener manufacturer to achieve maximum pull-out resistance
SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM
076200-8
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
D.
Conceal fasteners and expansion provisions where possible in exposed work and locate to minimize possibility of leakage. Cover and seal fasteners and anchors as required for a tight installation.
E.
Seal joints as required for watertight construction. 1.
2.
F. 3.3
Use sealant-filled joints unless otherwise indicated. Embed hooked flanges of joint members not less than 1 inch into sealant. Form joints to completely conceal sealant. When ambient temperature at time of installation is between 40 and 70 deg F, set joint members for 50 percent movement each way. Adjust setting proportionately for installation at higher ambient temperatures. Do not install sealant-type joints at temperatures below 40 deg F. Prepare joints and apply sealants to comply with requirements in Section 079200 "Joint Sealants."
Rivets: Rivet joints in uncoated aluminum where necessary for strength.
ROOF-DRAINAGE SYSTEM INSTALLATION A.
General: Install sheet metal roof-drainage items to produce complete roof-drainage system according to cited sheet metal standard unless otherwise indicated. Coordinate installation of roof perimeter flashing with installation of roof-drainage system.
B.
Hanging Gutters: Join sections with joints sealed with sealant. Provide for thermal expansion. Attach gutters at eave or fascia to firmly anchor them in position. Provide end closures and seal watertight with sealant. Slope to downspouts. 1. 2. 3. 4.
C.
Fasten gutter spacers to front and back of gutter. Anchor and loosely lock back edge of gutter to continuous eave or apron flashing. Anchor gutter with gutter brackets spaced not more than 36 inches apart to roof deck, unless otherwise indicated, and loosely lock to front gutter bead. Install gutter with expansion joints at locations indicated, but not exceeding 30 feet apart. Install expansion-joint caps.
Downspouts: Join sections with 1-1/2-inch telescoping joints. 1. 2. 3.
3.4
SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM SECTION 076200
Provide hangers with fasteners designed to hold downspouts securely to walls. Locate hangers at top and bottom and at approximately 60 inches Provide elbows at base of downspout to direct water away from building. Connect downspouts to underground drainage system.
ROOF FLASHING INSTALLATION A.
General: Install sheet metal flashing and trim to comply with performance requirements sheet metal manufacturer's written installation instructions, and cited sheet metal standard. Provide concealed fasteners where possible, and set units true to line, levels, and slopes. Install work with laps, joints, and seams that are permanently watertight and weather resistant.
SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM
076200-9
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
3.5
3.6
B.
Roof Edge Flashing: Anchor to resist uplift and outward forces according to recommendations in FM Global Property Loss Prevention Data Sheet 1-49 for FM Approvals' listing for required windstorm classification.
C.
Copings: Anchor to resist uplift and outward forces according to recommendations in FM Global Property Loss Prevention Data Sheet 1-49 for specified FM Approvals' listing for required windstorm classification.
D.
Pipe or Post Counterflashing: Install counterflashing umbrella with close-fitting collar with top edge flared for elastomeric sealant, extending minimum of 4 inches (100 mm) over base flashing. Install stainless-steel draw band and tighten.
E.
Counterflashing: Coordinate installation of counterflashing with installation of base flashing. Insert counterflashing in reglets or receivers and fit tightly to base flashing. Extend counterflashing 4 inches over base flashing. Lap counterflashing joints minimum of 4 inches. Secure in waterproof manner by means of snap-in installation and sealant or lead wedges and sealant unless otherwise indicated.
F.
Roof-Penetration Flashing: Coordinate installation of roof-penetration flashing with installation of roofing and other items penetrating roof. Seal with elastomeric sealant and clamp flashing to pipes that penetrate roof.
WALL FLASHING INSTALLATION A.
General: Install sheet metal wall flashing to intercept and exclude penetrating moisture according to cited sheet metal standard unless otherwise indicated. Coordinate installation of wall flashing with installation of wall-opening components such as windows, doors, and louvers.
B.
Through-Wall Flashing: Installation of through-wall flashing is specified in Section 042000 "Unit Masonry."
C.
Opening Flashings in Frame Construction: Install continuous head, sill, jamb, and similar flashings to extend 4 inches beyond wall openings.
MISCELLANEOUS FLASHING INSTALLATION A.
3.7
SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM SECTION 076200
Equipment Support Flashing and Equipment Opening Caps: Coordinate installation of equipment support flashing with installation of roofing and equipment. Weld or seal flashing with elastomeric sealant to equipment support member.
ERECTION TOLERANCES A.
Installation Tolerances: Shim and align sheet metal flashing and trim within installed tolerance of 1/4 inch in 20 feet on slope and location lines indicated on Drawings and within 1/8-inch offset of adjoining faces and of alignment of matching profiles.
B.
Installation Tolerances: Shim and align sheet metal flashing and trim within installed tolerances specified in MCA's "Guide Specification for Residential Metal Roofing."
SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM
076200-10
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
3.8
SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM SECTION 076200
CLEANING AND PROTECTION A.
Clean exposed metal surfaces of substances that interfere with uniform oxidation and weathering.
B.
Clean off excess sealants.
C.
Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films as sheet metal flashing and trim are installed unless otherwise indicated in manufacturer's written installation instructions. On completion of sheet metal flashing and trim installation, remove unused materials and clean finished surfaces as recommended by sheet metal flashing and trim manufacturer. Maintain sheet metal flashing and trim in clean condition during construction.
D.
Replace sheet metal flashing and trim that have been damaged or that have deteriorated beyond successful repair by finish touchup or similar minor repair procedures.
END OF SECTION 076200
SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM
076200-11
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
ROOF ACCESSORIES SECTION 077200
SECTION 077200 - ROOF ACCESSORIES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY A.
Section Includes: 1. 2.
B.
Related Sections: 1.
2. 1.3
1.5
General Performance: Roof accessories shall withstand exposure to weather and resist thermally induced movement without failure, rattling, leaking, or fastener disengagement due to defective manufacture, fabrication, installation, or other defects in construction.
ACTION SUBMITTALS A.
Product Data: For each type of roof accessory indicated. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes.
B.
Shop Drawings: For roof accessories. Include plans, elevations, keyed details, and attachments to other work. Indicate dimensions, loadings, and special conditions. Distinguish between plant- and field-assembled work.
INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A.
Coordination Drawings: Roof plans, drawn to scale, and coordinating penetrations and roof-mounted items. Show the following: 1. 2. 3. 4.
1.6
Section 076200 "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim" for shop- and field-formed metal flashing, roof-drainage systems, roof expansion-joint covers, and miscellaneous sheet metal trim and accessories. Section 233423 "HVAC Power Ventilators" for power roof-mounted ventilators.
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A.
1.4
Roof curbs. Pipe supports.
Size and location of roof accessories specified in this Section. Method of attaching roof accessories to roof or building structure. Other roof-mounted items including mechanical and electrical equipment, ductwork, piping, and conduit. Required clearances.
COORDINATION
ROOF ACCESSORIES
077200-1
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
1.7
ROOF ACCESSORIES SECTION 077200
A.
Coordinate layout and installation of roof accessories with roofing membrane and base flashing and interfacing and adjoining construction to provide a leakproof, weathertight, secure, and noncorrosive installation.
B.
Coordinate dimensions with rough-in information or Shop Drawings of equipment to be supported.
WARRANTY A.
Special Warranty on Painted Finishes: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair finishes or replace roof accessories that show evidence of deterioration of factory-applied finishes within specified warranty period. 1.
Fluoropolymer Finish: Deterioration includes, but is not limited to, the following: a. b. c.
2.
Color fading more than 5 Hunter units when tested according to ASTM D 2244. Chalking in excess of a No. 8 rating when tested according to ASTM D 4214. Cracking, checking, peeling, or failure of paint to adhere to bare metal.
Finish Warranty Period: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1
METAL MATERIALS A.
Aluminum-Zinc Alloy-Coated Steel Sheet: ASTM A 792/A 792M, AZ50 (AZM150) coated. 1.
B.
Baked-Enamel or Powder-Coat Finish: Immediately after cleaning and pretreating, apply manufacturer's standard two-coat, baked-on finish consisting of prime coat and thermosetting topcoat, with a minimum dry film thickness of 1 mil (0.025 mm) for topcoat. Comply with coating manufacturer's written instructions for applying and baking to achieve a minimum dry film thickness of 2 mils (0.05 mm).
Aluminum Sheet: ASTM B 209, manufacturer's standard alloy for finish required, with temper to suit forming operations and performance required. 1.
Baked-Enamel or Powder-Coat Finish: AAMA 2603 except with a minimum dry film thickness of 1.5 mils (0.04 mm). Comply with coating manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning, conversion coating, and applying and baking finish.
C.
Aluminum Extrusions and Tubes: ASTM B 221 (ASTM B 221M), manufacturer's standard alloy and temper for type of use, finished to match assembly where used, otherwise mill finished.
D.
Steel Shapes: ASTM A 36/A 36M, hot-dip galvanized according to ASTM A 123/A 123M unless otherwise indicated.
E.
Steel Tube: ASTM A 500, round tube.
ROOF ACCESSORIES
077200-2
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
2.2
F.
Galvanized-Steel Tube: ASTM A 500, round tube, hot-dip galvanized according to ASTM A 123/A 123M.
G.
Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, galvanized.
MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A.
General: Provide materials and types of fasteners, protective coatings, sealants, and other miscellaneous items required by manufacturer for a complete installation.
B.
Glass-Fiber Board Insulation: ASTM C 726, thickness as indicated.
C.
Bituminous Coating: Cold-applied asphalt emulsion complying with ASTM D 1187.
D.
Underlayment: 1. 2. 3.
E.
Felt: ASTM D 226, Type II (No. 30), asphalt-saturated organic felt, nonperforated. Polyethylene Sheet:6-mil thick polyethylene sheet complying with ASTM D 4397. Slip Sheet: Building paper, 3-lb/100 sq. ft. minimum, rosin sized.
Fasteners: Roof accessory manufacturer's recommended fasteners suitable for application and metals being fastened. Match finish of exposed fasteners with finish of material being fastened. Provide nonremovable fastener heads to exterior exposed fasteners. Furnish the following unless otherwise indicated: 1.
2.
2.3
ROOF ACCESSORIES SECTION 077200
Fasteners for Zinc-Coated or Aluminum-Zinc Alloy-Coated Steel: Series 300 stainless steel or hot-dip zinc-coated steel according to ASTM A 153/A 153M or ASTM F 2329. Fasteners for Aluminum Sheet: Aluminum or Series 300 stainless steel.
F.
Gaskets: Manufacturer's standard tubular or fingered design of neoprene, EPDM, PVC, or silicone or a flat design of foam rubber, sponge neoprene, or cork.
G.
Elastomeric Sealant: ASTM C 920, elastomeric silicone polymer sealant as recommended by roof accessory manufacturer for installation indicated; low modulus; of type, grade, class, and use classifications required to seal joints and remain watertight.
H.
Butyl Sealant: ASTM C 1311, single-component, solvent-release butyl rubber sealant; polyisobutylene plasticized; heavy bodied for expansion joints with limited movement.
I.
Asphalt Roofing Cement: ASTM D 4586, asbestos free, of consistency required for application.
ROOF CURBS A.
Roof Curbs: Internally reinforced roof-curb units capable of supporting superimposed live and dead loads, including equipment loads and other construction indicated on Drawings; with welded or mechanically fastened and sealed corner joints, integral metal cant, and integrally formed deck-mounting flange at perimeter bottom.
ROOF ACCESSORIES
077200-3
ROWAN UNIVERSITY 1.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. b. c. d.
Size: Coordinate dimensions with roughing-in information or Shop Drawings of equipment to be supported.
C.
Material: Aluminum-zinc alloy-coated steel sheet, 0.052 inch(1.32 mm) thick.
D.
Finish: Baked enamel or powder coat Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.
Construction: 1. 2. 3.
Insulation: Factory insulated with 1-1/2-inch-fiber board insulation. Fabricate curbs to minimum height of 12 inches unless otherwise indicated. Top Surface: Level around perimeter with roof slope accommodated by sloping the deck-mounting flange.
PIPE SUPPORTS A.
Pipe Supports: Adjustable-height, extruded-aluminum tube, filled with urethane insulation; 2 inches in diameter; with aluminum baseplate, EPDM base seal, manufacturer's recommended hardware for mounting to structure or structural roof deck as indicated, and extruded-aluminum carrier assemblies; suitable for quantity of pipe runs and sizes. 1. 2.
2.5
Greenheck Fan Corporation. Milcor Inc.; Commercial Products Group of Hart & Cooley, Inc. Roof Products, Inc. Vent Products Co., Inc.
B.
1. 2.
2.4
ROOF ACCESSORIES SECTION 077200
Pipe Support Flashing: Manufacturer's standard sleeve flashing with integral base flange; aluminum sheet, 0.063 inch Finish: Manufacturer's standard.
GENERAL FINISH REQUIREMENTS A.
Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes.
B.
Appearance of Finished Work: Noticeable variations in same piece are not acceptable. Variations in appearance of adjoining components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast.
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1
EXAMINATION A.
Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, to verify actual locations, dimensions, and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.
ROOF ACCESSORIES
077200-4
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
3.2
B.
Verify that substrate is sound, dry, smooth, clean, sloped for drainage, and securely anchored.
C.
Verify dimensions of roof openings for roof accessories.
D.
Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
INSTALLATION A.
General: Install roof accessories according to manufacturer's written instructions. 1. 2. 3. 4.
B.
Install roof accessories level, plumb, true to line and elevation, and without warping, jogs in alignment, excessive oil canning, buckling, or tool marks. Anchor roof accessories securely in place so they are capable of resisting indicated loads. Use fasteners, separators, sealants, and other miscellaneous items as required to complete installation of roof accessories and fit them to substrates. Install roof accessories to resist exposure to weather without failing, rattling, leaking, or loosening of fasteners and seals.
Metal Protection: Protect metals against galvanic action by separating dissimilar metals from contact with each other or with corrosive substrates by painting contact surfaces with bituminous coating or by other permanent separation as recommended by manufacturer. 1. 2.
3.
3.3
ROOF ACCESSORIES SECTION 077200
Coat concealed side of uncoated aluminum roof accessories with bituminous coating where in contact with wood, ferrous metal, or cementitious construction. Underlayment: Where installing roof accessories directly on cementitious or wood substrates, install a course of felt underlayment and cover with a slip sheet, or install a course of polyethylene sheet. Bed flanges in thick coat of asphalt roofing cement where required by manufacturers of roof accessories for waterproof performance.
C.
Roof Curb Installation: Install each roof curb so top surface is level.
D.
Pipe Support Installation: Install pipe supports so top surfaces are in contact with and provide equally distributed support along length of supported item.
E.
Seal joints with elastomeric or butyl sealant as required by roof accessory manufacturer.
REPAIR AND CLEANING A.
Touch up factory-primed surfaces with compatible primer ready for field painting according to Section 099113 "Exterior Painting" and Section 099123 "Interior Painting."
B.
Clean exposed surfaces according to manufacturer's written instructions.
C.
Clean off excess sealants.
D.
Replace roof accessories that have been damaged or that cannot be successfully repaired by finish touchup or similar minor repair procedures.
ROOF ACCESSORIES
077200-5
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
ROOF ACCESSORIES SECTION 077200
END OF SECTION 077200
ROOF ACCESSORIES
077200-6
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING SECTION 078413
SECTION 078413 - PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY A.
Section Includes: 1. 2.
1.3
Penetrations in fire-resistance-rated walls. Penetrations in horizontal assemblies.
ACTION SUBMITTALS A.
Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B.
Installer Qualifications: A firm experienced in installing penetration firestopping similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project, whose work has resulted in construction with a record of successful performance. Qualifications include having the necessary experience, staff, and training to install manufacturer's products per specified requirements. Manufacturer's willingness to sell its penetration firestopping products to Contractor or to Installer engaged by Contractor does not in itself confer qualification on buyer.
C.
Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: following requirements: 1. 2.
Penetration firestopping tests are performed by a qualified testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Penetration firestopping is identical to those tested per testing standard referenced in "Penetration Firestopping" Article. Provide rated systems complying with the following requirements: a. b.
Penetration firestopping products bear classification marking of qualified testing and inspecting agency. Classification markings on penetration firestopping correspond to designations listed by the following: 1). 2).
D. 1.4
Penetration firestopping shall comply with the
UL in its "Fire Resistance Directory." FM Global in its "Building Materials Approval Guide."
Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.
PROJECT CONDITIONS
PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING
078413-1
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
1.5
PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING SECTION 078413
A.
Environmental Limitations: Do not install penetration firestopping when ambient or substrate temperatures are outside limits permitted by penetration firestopping manufacturers or when substrates are wet because of rain, frost, condensation, or other causes.
B.
Install and cure penetration firestopping per manufacturer's written instructions using natural means of ventilations or, where this is inadequate, forced-air circulation.
COORDINATION A.
Coordinate construction of openings and penetrating items to ensure that penetration firestopping is installed according to specified requirements.
B.
Coordinate sizing of sleeves, openings, core-drilled holes, or cut openings to accommodate penetration firestopping.
C.
Notify Owner's testing agency at least seven days in advance of penetration firestopping installations; confirm dates and times on day preceding each series of installations.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1
MANUFACTURERS A.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8.
2.2
A/D Fire Protection Systems Inc. Grace Construction Products. Hilti, Inc. Johns Manville. Nelson Firestop Products. 3M Fire Protection Products. Tremco, Inc.; Tremco Fire Protection Systems Group. USG Corporation.
PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING A.
Provide penetration firestopping that is produced and installed to resist spread of fire according to requirements indicated, resist passage of smoke and other gases, and maintain original fire-resistance rating of construction penetrated. Penetration firestopping systems shall be compatible with one another, with the substrates forming openings, and with penetrating items if any.
B.
Penetrations in Fire-Resistance-Rated Walls: Provide penetration firestopping with ratings determined per ASTM E 814 or UL 1479, based on testing at a positive pressure differential of 0.01-inch wg. 1. 2.
Fire-resistance-rated walls include fire partitions. F-Rating: Not less than the fire-resistance rating of constructions penetrated.
PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING
078413-2
ROWAN UNIVERSITY C.
Penetrations in Horizontal Assemblies: Provide penetration firestopping with ratings determined per ASTM E 814 or UL 1479, based on testing at a positive pressure differential of 0.01-inch wg. 1. 2. 3.
D.
PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING SECTION 078413
Horizontal assemblies include floor/ceiling assemblies. F-Rating: At least 1 hour, but not less than the fire-resistance rating of constructions penetrated. T-Rating: At least 1 hour, but not less than the fire-resistance rating of constructions penetrated except for floor penetrations within the cavity of a wall.
VOC Content: Penetration firestopping sealants and sealant primers shall comply with the following limits for VOC content when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24): 1. 2. 3.
Sealants: 250 G/L. Sealant Primers for Nonporous Substrates: 250 g/L. Sealant Primers for Porous Substrates: 775 g/L.
E
Low-Emitting Materials: Penetration firestopping sealants and sealant primers shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers."
F.
Accessories: Provide components for each penetration firestopping system that are needed to install fill materials and to maintain ratings required. Use only those components specified by penetration firestopping manufacturer and approved by qualified testing and inspecting agency for firestopping indicated. 1.
Permanent forming/damming/backing materials, including the following: a. b.
2. 3. 4.
Slag-wool-fiber or rock-wool-fiber insulation. Sealants used in combination with other forming/damming/backing materials to prevent leakage of fill materials in liquid state. c. Fire-rated form board. d. Fillers for sealants. Temporary forming materials. Collars. Steel sleeves.
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1
3.2
EXAMINATION A.
Examine substrates and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for opening configurations, penetrating items, substrates, and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.
B.
Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
PREPARATION
PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING
078413-3
ROWAN UNIVERSITY A.
Surface Cleaning: Clean out openings immediately before installing penetration firestopping to comply with manufacturer's written instructions and with the following requirements: 1. 2.
3. B.
3.3
3.4
3.5
PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING SECTION 078413
Remove from surfaces of opening substrates and from penetrating items foreign materials that could interfere with adhesion of penetration firestopping. Clean opening substrates and penetrating items to produce clean, sound surfaces capable of developing optimum bond with penetration firestopping. Remove loose particles remaining from cleaning operation. Remove laitance and form-release agents from concrete.
Priming: Prime substrates where recommended in writing by manufacturer using that manufacturer's recommended products and methods. Confine primers to areas of bond; do not allow spillage and migration onto exposed surfaces.
INSTALLATION A.
General: Install penetration firestopping to comply with manufacturer's written installation instructions and published drawings for products and applications indicated.
B.
Install forming materials and other accessories of types required to support fill materials during their application and in the position needed to produce cross-sectional shapes and depths required to achieve fire ratings indicated.
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A.
Contractor will engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections.
B.
Where deficiencies are found or penetration firestopping is damaged or removed because of testing, repair or replace penetration firestopping to comply with requirements.
C.
Proceed with enclosing penetration firestopping with other construction only after inspection reports are issued and installations comply with requirements.
CLEANING AND PROTECTION A.
Clean off excess fill materials adjacent to openings as the Work progresses by methods and with cleaning materials that are approved in writing by penetration firestopping manufacturers and that do not damage materials in which openings occur.
B.
Provide final protection and maintain conditions during and after installation that ensure that penetration firestopping is without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. If, despite such protection, damage or deterioration occurs, immediately cut out and remove damaged or deteriorated penetration firestopping and install new materials to produce systems complying with specified requirements.
END OF SECTION 078413
PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING
078413-4
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
JOINT SEALANTS SECTION 079200
SECTION 079200 - JOINT SEALANTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY A.
Section Includes: 1. 2.
B.
Related Sections: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8.
1.3
1.4
1.5
Silicone joint sealants. Acoustical joint sealants.
Section 042000 "Unit Masonry" for masonry control and expansion joint fillers and gaskets. Section 076900 “ Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim, for joint at metal flashing. Section 084423 "Structural-Sealant-Glazed Curtain Walls" for structural and other glazing sealants. Section 088000 "Glazing" for glazing sealants. Section 092900 "Gypsum Board" for sealing perimeter joints. Section 093000 "Tiling" for sealing tile joints. Section 095123 "Acoustical Tile Ceilings" for sealing edge moldings at perimeters with acoustical sealant. Section 321373 "Concrete Paving Joint Sealants" for sealing joints in pavements, walkways, and curbing.
ACTION SUBMITTALS A.
Product Data: For each joint-sealant product indicated.
B.
Samples for Initial Selection: Manufacturer's color charts consisting of strips of cured sealants showing the full range of colors available for each product exposed to view.
INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A.
Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency, indicating that sealants comply with requirements.
B.
Field-Adhesion Test Reports: For each sealant application tested.
C.
Warranties: Sample of special warranties.
QUALITY ASSURANCE A.
Installer Qualifications: Manufacturer's authorized representative who is trained and approved for installation of units required for this Project.
JOINT SEALANTS
079200-1
ROWAN UNIVERSITY B.
1.6
Source Limitations: Obtain each kind of joint sealant from single source from single manufacturer.
PROJECT CONDITIONS A.
Do not proceed with installation of joint sealants under the following conditions: 1. 2. 3. 4.
1.7
JOINT SEALANTS SECTION 079200
When ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside limits permitted by joint-sealant manufacturer[ or are below 40 deg F. When joint substrates are wet. Where joint widths are less than those allowed by joint-sealant manufacturer for applications indicated. Where contaminants capable of interfering with adhesion have not yet been removed from joint substrates.
WARRANTY A.
Special warranties specified in this article exclude deterioration or failure of joint sealants from the following: 1.
2. 3. 4.
Movement of the structure caused by structural settlement or errors attributable to design or construction resulting in stresses on the sealant exceeding sealant manufacturer's written specifications for sealant elongation and compression. Disintegration of joint substrates from natural causes exceeding design specifications. Mechanical damage caused by individuals, tools, or other outside agents. Changes in sealant appearance caused by accumulation of dirt or other atmospheric contaminants.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1
MATERIALS, GENERAL A.
Compatibility: Provide joint sealants, backings, and other related materials that are compatible with one another and with joint substrates under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by joint-sealant manufacturer, based on testing and field experience.
B.
VOC Content of Interior Sealants: Sealants and sealant primers used inside the weatherproofing system shall comply with the following limits for VOC content when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24): 1. 2. 3.
C.
Architectural Sealants: 250 G/L. Sealant Primers for Nonporous Substrates: 250 G/L. Sealant Primers for Porous Substrates: 775 G/L.
Low-Emitting Interior Sealants: Sealants and sealant primers used inside the weatherproofing system shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers."
JOINT SEALANTS
079200-2
ROWAN UNIVERSITY D.
Liquid-Applied Joint Sealants: Comply with ASTM C 920 and other requirements indicated for each liquid-applied joint sealant specified, including those referencing ASTM C 920 classifications for type, grade, class, and uses related to exposure and joint substrates. 1.
2.2
Suitability for Immersion in Liquids. Where sealants are indicated for Use I for joints that will be continuously immersed in liquids, provide products that have undergone testing according to ASTM C 1247. Liquid used for testing sealants is deionized water, unless otherwise indicated.
E.
Stain-Test-Response Characteristics: Where sealants are specified to be nonstaining to porous substrates, provide products that have undergone testing according to ASTM C 1248 and have not stained porous joint substrates indicated for Project.
F.
Suitability for Contact with Food: Where sealants are indicated for joints that will come in repeated contact with food, provide products that comply with 21 CFR 177.2600.
G.
Colors of Exposed Joint Sealants: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.
SILICONE JOINT SEALANTS A.
Single-Component, Nonsag, Neutral-Curing Silicone Joint Sealant: ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 100/50, for Use NT. 1.
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. b. c. d. e.
B.
Dow Corning Corporation; 790 NS Parking Structure Sealant. GE Advanced Materials - Silicones; SilPruf LM SCS2700. Pecora Corporation; 301 NS. Sika Corporation, Construction Products Division; SikaSil-C990. Tremco Incorporated; Spectrem 1.
Multicomponent, Pourable, Traffic-Grade, Neutral-Curing Silicone Joint Sealant: ASTM C 920, Type M, Grade P, Class 100/50, for Use T. 1.
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. b. c.
2.3
JOINT SEALANTS SECTION 079200
Dow Corning Corporation; FC Parking Structure Sealant. May National Associates, Inc.; Bondaflex Sil 728 RCS. Or Approved Equal.
ACOUSTICAL JOINT SEALANTS A.
Acoustical Joint Sealant: Manufacturer's standard nonsag, paintable, nonstaining latex sealant complying with ASTM C 834. Product effectively reduces airborne sound transmission through perimeter joints and openings in building construction as demonstrated by testing representative assemblies according to ASTM E 90. 1.
JOINT SEALANTS
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 079200-3
ROWAN UNIVERSITY a. b. c. 2.4
2.5
JOINT SEALANTS SECTION 079200 Pecora Corporation; AC-20 FTR. USG Corporation; SHEETROCK Acoustical Sealant. Or Approved Equal.
JOINT SEALANT BACKING A.
General: Provide sealant backings of material that are nonstaining; are compatible with joint substrates, sealants, primers, and other joint fillers; and are approved for applications indicated by sealant manufacturer based on field experience and laboratory testing.
B.
Cylindrical Sealant Backings: ASTM C 1330, Type C (closed-cell material with a surface skin) Type O (open-cell material) Type B (bicellular material with a surface skin) or any of the preceding types, as approved in writing by joint-sealant manufacturer for joint application indicated, and of size and density to control sealant depth and otherwise contribute to producing optimum sealant performance.
C.
Bond-Breaker Tape: Polyethylene tape or other plastic tape recommended by sealant manufacturer for preventing sealant from adhering to rigid, inflexible joint-filler materials or joint surfaces at back of joint. Provide self-adhesive tape where applicable.
MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A.
Primer: Material recommended by joint-sealant manufacturer where required for adhesion of sealant to joint substrates indicated, as determined from preconstruction joint-sealant-substrate tests and field tests.
B.
Cleaners for Nonporous Surfaces: Chemical cleaners acceptable to manufacturers of sealants and sealant backing materials, free of oily residues or other substances capable of staining or harming joint substrates and adjacent nonporous surfaces in any way, and formulated to promote optimum adhesion of sealants to joint substrates.
C.
Masking Tape: Nonstaining, nonabsorbent material compatible with joint sealants and surfaces adjacent to joints.
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1
3.2
EXAMINATION A.
Examine joints indicated to receive joint sealants, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for joint configuration, installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting joint-sealant performance.
B.
Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
PREPARATION A.
Surface Cleaning of Joints: Clean out joints immediately before installing joint sealants to comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written instructions and the following requirements:
JOINT SEALANTS
079200-4
ROWAN UNIVERSITY 1.
2.
Remove all foreign material from joint substrates that could interfere with adhesion of joint sealant, including dust, paints (except for permanent, protective coatings tested and approved for sealant adhesion and compatibility by sealant manufacturer), old joint sealants, oil, grease, waterproofing, water repellents, water, surface dirt, and frost. Clean porous joint substrate surfaces by brushing, grinding, mechanical abrading, or a combination of these methods to produce a clean, sound substrate capable of developing optimum bond with joint sealants. Remove loose particles remaining after cleaning operations above by vacuuming or blowing out joints with oil-free compressed air. Porous joint substrates include the following: a. b. c.
3. 4.
Concrete. Masonry. Unglazed surfaces of ceramic tile.
Remove laitance and form-release agents from concrete. Clean nonporous joint substrate surfaces with chemical cleaners or other means that do not stain, harm substrates, or leave residues capable of interfering with adhesion of joint sealants. Nonporous joint substrates include the following: a. b. c.
3.3
JOINT SEALANTS SECTION 079200
Metal. Glass. Porcelain enamel.
B.
Joint Priming: Prime joint substrates where recommended by joint-sealant manufacturer or as indicated by preconstruction joint-sealant-substrate tests or prior experience. Apply primer to comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written instructions. Confine primers to areas of joint-sealant bond; do not allow spillage or migration onto adjoining surfaces.
C.
Masking Tape: Use masking tape where required to prevent contact of sealant or primer with adjoining surfaces that otherwise would be permanently stained or damaged by such contact or by cleaning methods required to remove sealant smears. Remove tape immediately after tooling without disturbing joint seal.
INSTALLATION OF JOINT SEALANTS A.
General: Comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written installation instructions for products and applications indicated, unless more stringent requirements apply.
B.
Sealant Installation Standard: Comply with recommendations in ASTM C 1193 for use of joint sealants as applicable to materials, applications, and conditions indicated.
C.
Install sealant backings of kind indicated to support sealants during application and at position required to produce cross-sectional shapes and depths of installed sealants relative to joint widths that allow optimum sealant movement capability. 1. 2. 3.
JOINT SEALANTS
Do not leave gaps between ends of sealant backings. Do not stretch, twist, puncture, or tear sealant backings. Remove absorbent sealant backings that have become wet before sealant application and replace them with dry materials.
079200-5
ROWAN UNIVERSITY D.
Install bond-breaker tape behind sealants where sealant backings are not used between sealants and backs of joints.
E.
Install sealants using proven techniques that comply with the following and at the same time backings are installed: 1. Place sealants so they directly contact and fully wet joint substrates. 2. Completely fill recesses in each joint configuration. 3. Produce uniform, cross-sectional shapes and depths relative to joint widths that allow optimum sealant movement capability.
F.
Tooling of Nonsag Sealants: Immediately after sealant application and before skinning or curing begins, tool sealants according to requirements specified in subparagraphs below to form smooth, uniform beads of configuration indicated; to eliminate air pockets; and to ensure contact and adhesion of sealant with sides of joint. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.
Remove excess sealant from surfaces adjacent to joints. Use tooling agents that are approved in writing by sealant manufacturer and that do not discolor sealants or adjacent surfaces. Provide concave joint profile per Figure 8A in ASTM C 1193, unless otherwise indicated. Provide flush joint profile where indicated per Figure 8B in ASTM C 1193. Provide recessed joint configuration of recess depth and at locations indicated per Figure 8C in ASTM C 1193. a.
G.
3.4
JOINT SEALANTS SECTION 079200
Use masking tape to protect surfaces adjacent to recessed tooled joints.
Acoustical Sealant Installation: At sound-rated assemblies and elsewhere as indicated, seal construction at perimeters, behind control joints, and at openings and penetrations with a continuous bead of acoustical sealant. Install acoustical sealant at both faces of partitions at perimeters and through penetrations. Comply with ASTM C 919 and with manufacturer's written recommendations.
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A.
Field-Adhesion Testing: Field test joint-sealant adhesion to joint substrates as follows: 1.
Extent of Testing: Test completed and cured sealant joints as follows: a. b.
2.
Test Method: Test joint sealants according to Method A, Field-Applied Sealant Joint Hand Pull Tab, in Appendix X1 in ASTM C 1193 or Method A, Tail Procedure, in ASTM C 1521. a.
JOINT SEALANTS
Perform tests for the first 1000 feet of joint length for each kind of sealant and joint substrate. Perform 1 test for each 1000 feetof joint length thereafter or 1 test per each floor per elevation.
For joints with dissimilar substrates, verify adhesion to each substrate separately; extend cut along one side, verifying adhesion to opposite side. Repeat procedure for opposite side.
079200-6
ROWAN UNIVERSITY 3.
Inspect tested joints and report on the following: a. b. c.
B.
3.5
4.
Record test results in a field-adhesion-test log. Include dates when sealants were installed, names of persons who installed sealants, test dates, test locations, whether joints were primed, adhesion results and percent elongations, sealant fill, sealant configuration, and sealant dimensions.
5.
Repair sealants pulled from test area by applying new sealants following same procedures used originally to seal joints. Ensure that original sealant surfaces are clean and that new sealant contacts original sealant.
Evaluation of Field-Adhesion Test Results: Sealants not evidencing adhesive failure from testing or noncompliance with other indicated requirements will be considered satisfactory. Remove sealants that fail to adhere to joint substrates during testing or to comply with other requirements. Retest failed applications until test results prove sealants comply with indicated requirements.
Clean off excess sealant or sealant smears adjacent to joints as the Work progresses by methods and with cleaning materials approved in writing by manufacturers of joint sealants and of products in which joints occur.
PROTECTION A.
3.7
Whether sealants filled joint cavities and are free of voids. Whether sealant dimensions and configurations comply with specified requirements. Whether sealants in joints connected to pulled-out portion failed to adhere to joint substrates or tore cohesively. Include data on pull distance used to test each kind of product and joint substrate. Compare these results to determine if adhesion passes sealant manufacturer's field-adhesion hand-pull test criteria.
CLEANING A.
3.6
JOINT SEALANTS SECTION 079200
Protect joint sealants during and after curing period from contact with contaminating substances and from damage resulting from construction operations or other causes so sealants are without deterioration or damage at time of Substantial Completion. If, despite such protection, damage or deterioration occurs, cut out and remove damaged or deteriorated joint sealants immediately so installations with repaired areas are indistinguishable from original work.
JOINT-SEALANT SCHEDULE A.
Joint-Sealant Application: Exterior joints in horizontal traffic surfaces. 1.
Joint Locations: a.
2. JOINT SEALANTS
Isolation and contraction joints in cast-in-place concrete slabs.
Silicone Joint Sealant: Multicomponent, pourable, traffic grade, neutral curing. 079200-7
ROWAN UNIVERSITY 3.
B
Joint-Sealant Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of colors.
Joint-Sealant Application: Exterior joints in vertical surfaces and horizontal nontraffic surfaces. 1.
Joint Locations: a. b. c. d.
2. 3.
C.
Silicone Joint Sealant: Single component, nonsag, neutral curing, Class 100/50. Joint-Sealant Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of colors.
Joint Locations: a. b.
2.
Perimeter joints of exterior openings where indicated. Perimeter joints between interior wall surfaces and frames of interior doors and windows.
Joint-Sealant Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of colors.
Joint-Sealant Application: Mildew-resistant interior joints in vertical surfaces and horizontal nontraffic surfaces. 1.
Joint Sealant Location: a.
2.
E.
Construction joints in cast-in-place concrete. Joints between metal panels. Joints between different materials listed above. Perimeter joints between materials listed above and frames of doors and windows..
Joint-Sealant Application: Interior joints in vertical surfaces and horizontal nontraffic surfaces. 1.
D.
JOINT SEALANTS SECTION 079200
Joints between plumbing fixtures and adjoining walls, floors, and counters.
Joint-Sealant Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of colors. Assume up to 4 colors for interior of buiding.
Joint-Sealant Application: Interior acoustical joints in vertical surfaces and horizontal nontraffic surfaces. 1.
Joint Location: a.
Acoustical joints where indicated.
2.
Joint Sealant: Acoustical.
3.
Joint-Sealant Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.
JOINT SEALANTS
079200-8
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
JOINT SEALANTS SECTION 079200
END OF SECTION 079200
JOINT SEALANTS
079200-9
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES SECTION 081113
SECTION 081113 - HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY A.
Section includes hollow-metal work.
B.
Related Requirements: 1. 2. 3.
1.3
DEFINITIONS A.
1.4
Minimum Thickness: Minimum thickness of base metal without coatings according to NAAMM-HMMA 803 or SDI A250.8.
COORDINATION A.
1.5
Section 081416 “Flush Wood Doors” for wood door installation in hollow metal frame. Section 087100 "Door Hardware" for door hardware for hollow-metal doors. Section 088000 “Glazing” for glass for fire rated hollow metal frames.
Coordinate anchorage installation for hollow-metal frames. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items with integral anchors. Deliver such items to Project site in time for installation.
ACTION SUBMITTALS A.
Product Data: For each type of product. 1.
B.
Include construction details, material descriptions, core descriptions, fire-resistance ratings, and finishes.
Shop Drawings: Include the following: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8.
Elevations of each door type. Details of doors, including vertical- and horizontal-edge details and metal thicknesses. Frame details for each frame type, including dimensioned profiles and metal thicknesses. Locations of reinforcement and preparations for hardware. Details of each different wall opening condition. Details of anchorages, joints, field splices, and connections. Details of accessories. Details of moldings, removable stops, and glazing.
HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES
081113-1
ROWAN UNIVERSITY 9. C.
1.6
HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES SECTION 081113
Details of conduit and preparations for power, signal, and control systems.
Schedule: Provide a schedule of hollow-metal work prepared by or under the supervision of supplier, using same reference numbers for details and openings as those on Drawings. Coordinate with final Door Hardware Schedule.
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A.
Deliver hollow-metal work palletized, packaged, or crated to provide protection during transit and Project-site storage. Do not use nonvented plastic. 1.
Provide additional protection to prevent damage to factory-finished units.
B.
Deliver welded frames with two removable spreader bars across bottom of frames, tack welded to jambs and mullions.
C.
Store hollow-metal work vertically under cover at Project site with head up. Place on minimum 4-inch high wood blocking. Provide minimum 1/4-inch space between each stacked door to permit air circulation.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1
MANUFACTURERS A.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8.
B. 2.2
2.3
Ceco Door Products; an Assa Abloy Group company. Commercial Door & Hardware Inc. Curries Company; an Assa Abloy Group company. Karpen Steel Custom Doors & Frames. North American Door Corp. Pioneer Industries, Inc. Republic Doors and Frames. Steelcraft; an Ingersoll-Rand company.
Source Limitations: Obtain hollow-metal work from single source from single manufacturer.
REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A.
Fire-Rated Assemblies: Complying with NFPA 80 and listed and labeled by a qualified testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction for fire-protection ratingsindicated, based on testing at positive pressure according to NFPA 252 or UL 10C.
B.
Fire-Rated, Borrowed-Light Assemblies: Complying with NFPA 80 and listed and labeled by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction for fire-protection ratings indicated, based on testing according to NFPA 257 or UL 9.
INTERIOR DOORS AND FRAMES
HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES
081113-2
ROWAN UNIVERSITY A.
Construct interior doors and frames to comply with the standards indicated for materials, fabrication, hardware locations, hardware reinforcement, tolerances, and clearances, and as specified.
B.
Standard-Duty Doors and Frames: SDI A250.8, Level 1. At locations indicated in the Door and Frame Schedule. 1. 2.
Physical Performance: Level C according to SDI A250.4. Doors: a. b. c. d. e.
3.
b.
4.
Type: As indicated in the Door and Frame Schedule. Thickness 1-3/4 inches. Face: Uncoated, cold-rolled steel sheet, minimum thickness of 0.032 inch. Edge Construction Model 1, Full Flush. Core: Manufacturer's standard kraft-paper honeycomb, polystyrene, polyurethane, polyisocyanurate, mineral-board, or vertical steel-stiffener core at manufacturer's discretion.
Frames: a.
2.4
HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES SECTION 081113
Materials: Uncoated, cold-rolled steel sheet, minimum thickness of 0.042 inch (1.0 mm). Construction: Full profile welded. At new construction. Knock down only at existing wall construction.
Exposed Finish: Prime.
EXTERIOR HOLLOW-METAL DOORS AND FRAMES A.
Construct exterior doors and frames to comply with the standards indicated for materials, fabrication, hardware locations, hardware reinforcement, tolerances, and clearances, and as specified.
B.
Commercial Doors and Frames: NAAMM-HMMA 861. At locations indicated in the Door and Frame Schedule. 1. 2.
Physical Performance: Level A according to SDI A250.4. Doors: a. b. c. d. e.
3.
Type: As indicated in the Door and Frame Schedule. Thickness: 1-3/4 inches. Face: Metallic-coated steel sheet, minimum thickness of 0.053 inch, with minimum G60 coating. Edge Construction: Continuously welded with no visible seam. Core: Steel stiffened.
Frames:
HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES
081113-3
ROWAN UNIVERSITY a. b. 4. 2.5
Materials: Metallic-coated steel sheet, minimum thickness of 0.067 inch, with minimum G60 coating. Construction: Full profile welded.
Exposed Finish: Prime.
FRAME ANCHORS A.
Jamb Anchors: 1. 2.
2.6
HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES SECTION 081113
Stud-Wall Type: Designed to engage stud, welded to back of frames; not less than 0.042 inch thick. Postinstalled Expansion Type for In-Place Concrete or Masonry: Minimum 3/8-inch-diameter bolts with expansion shields or inserts. Provide pipe spacer from frame to wall, with throat reinforcement plate, welded to frame at each anchor location.
MATERIALS A.
Cold-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B; suitable for exposed applications.
B.
Hot-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1011/A 1011M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B; free of scale, pitting, or surface defects; pickled and oiled.
C.
Metallic-Coated Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B.
D.
Frame Anchors: ASTM A 879/A 879M, Commercial Steel (CS), 04Z coating designation; mill phosphatized. 1.
For anchors built into exterior walls, steel sheet complying with ASTM A 1008/A 1008M or ASTM A 1011/A 1011M, hot-dip galvanized according to ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class B.
E.
Inserts, Bolts, and Fasteners: Hot-dip galvanized according to ASTM A 153/A 153M.
F.
Power-Actuated Fasteners in Concrete: Fastener system of type suitable for application indicated, fabricated from corrosion-resistant materials, with clips or other accessory devices for attaching hollow-metal frames of type indicated.
G.
Grout: ASTM C 476, except with a maximum slump of 4 inches, as measured according to ASTM C 143/C 143M.
H.
Mineral-Fiber Insulation: ASTM C 665, Type I (blankets without membrane facing); consisting of fibers manufactured from slag or rock wool; with maximum flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of 25 and 50, respectively; passing ASTM E 136 for combustion characteristics.
I.
Glazing: Comply with requirements in Section 088000 "Glazing."
HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES
081113-4
ROWAN UNIVERSITY J.
2.7
HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES SECTION 081113
Bituminous Coating: Cold-applied asphalt mastic, compounded for 15-mil0. dry film thickness per coat. Provide inert-type noncorrosive compound free of asbestos fibers, sulfur components, and other deleterious impurities.
FABRICATION A.
Fabricate hollow-metal work to be rigid and free of defects, warp, or buckle. Accurately form metal to required sizes and profiles, with minimum radius for metal thickness. Where practical, fit and assemble units in manufacturer's plant. To ensure proper assembly at Project site, clearly identify work that cannot be permanently factory assembled before shipment.
B.
Hollow-Metal Doors: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.
C.
Vertical Edges for Single-Acting Doors: Provide beveled or square edges at manufacturer's discretion. Top Edge Closures: Close top edges of doors with flush closures of same material as face sheets. Bottom Edge Closures: Close bottom edges of doors with end closures or channels of same material as face sheets. Exterior Doors: Provide weep-hole openings in bottoms of exterior doors to permit moisture to escape. Seal joints in top edges of doors against water penetration. Astragals: Provide overlapping astragal on one leaf of pairs of doors where required by NFPA 80 for fire-performance rating or where indicated. Extend minimum 3/4 inch beyond edge of door on which astragal is mounted or as required to comply with published listing of qualified testing agency.
Hollow-Metal Frames: Where frames are fabricated in sections due to shipping or handling limitations, provide alignment plates or angles at each joint, fabricated of same thickness metal as frames. 1.
2. 3.
Frames: Provide closed tubular members with no visible face seams or joints, fabricated from same material as door frame. Fasten members at crossings and to jambs by butt welding. Provide countersunk, flat- or oval-head exposed screws and bolts for exposed fasteners unless otherwise indicated. Jamb Anchors: Provide number and spacing of anchors as follows: a.
Stud-Wall Type: Locate anchors not more than 18 inches from top and bottom of frame. Space anchors not more than 32 inches o.c. and as follows: 1) 2)
b.
4.
Three anchors per jamb up to 60 inches high. Four anchors per jamb from 60 to 90 inches high.
Postinstalled Expansion Type: Locate anchors not more than 6 inches (152 mm) from top and bottom of frame. Space anchors not more than 26 inches (660 mm) o.c.
Door Silencers: Except on weather-stripped frames, drill stops to receive door silencers as follows. Keep holes clear during construction.
HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES
081113-5
ROWAN UNIVERSITY a. b.
Fabricate concealed stiffeners and edge channels from either cold- or hot-rolled steel sheet.
E.
Hardware Preparation: Factory prepare hollow-metal work to receive templated mortised hardware; include cutouts, reinforcement, mortising, drilling, and tapping according to SDI A250.6, the Door Hardware Schedule, and templates.
2.
F.
Reinforce doors and frames to receive nontemplated, mortised, and surface-mounted door hardware. Comply with applicable requirements in SDI A250.6 and BHMA A156.115 for preparation of hollow-metal work for hardware.
Stops and Moldings: Provide stops and moldings around glazed lites and louvers where indicated. Form corners of stops and moldings with butted or mitered hairline joints. 1. 2. 3 4. 5.
Single Glazed Lites: Provide fixed stops and moldings welded on secure side of hollow-metal work. Multiple Glazed Lites: Provide fixed and removable stops and moldings so that each glazed lite is capable of being removed independently. Provide fixed frame moldings on outside of exterior and on secure side of interior doors and frames. Provide loose stops and moldings on inside of hollow-metal work. Coordinate rabbet width between fixed and removable stops with glazing and installation types indicated.
STEEL FINISHES A.
Prime Finish: Clean, pretreat, and apply manufacturer's standard primer. 1.
2.9
Single-Door Frames: Drill stop in strike jamb to receive three door silencers. Double-Door Frames: Drill stop in head jamb to receive two door silencers.
D.
1.
2.8
HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES SECTION 081113
Shop Primer: Manufacturer's standard, fast-curing, lead- and chromate-free primer complying with SDI A250.10; recommended by primer manufacturer for substrate; compatible with substrate and field-applied coatings despite prolonged exposure.
ACCESSORIES A.
Mullions and Transom Bars: Join to adjacent members by welding or rigid mechanical anchors.
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1
EXAMINATION A.
Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.
B.
Examine roughing-in for embedded and built-in anchors to verify actual locations before frame installation.
HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES
081113-6
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
3.2
3.3
HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES SECTION 081113
C.
Prepare written report, endorsed by Installer, listing conditions detrimental to performance of the Work.
D.
Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
PREPARATION A.
Remove welded-in shipping spreaders installed at factory. Restore exposed finish by grinding, filling, and dressing, as required to make repaired area smooth, flush, and invisible on exposed faces.
B.
Drill and tap doors and frames to receive nontemplated, mortised, and surface-mounted door hardware.
INSTALLATION A.
General: Install hollow-metal work plumb, rigid, properly aligned, and securely fastened in place. Comply with Drawings and manufacturer's written instructions.
B.
Hollow-Metal Frames: Install hollow-metal frames of size and profile indicated. Comply with SDI A250.11 or NAAMM-HMMA 840 as required by standards specified. 1.
Set frames accurately in position; plumbed, aligned, and braced securely until permanent anchors are set. After wall construction is complete, remove temporary braces, leaving surfaces smooth and undamaged. a. b.
c. d. e. f. g.
At fire-rated openings, install frames according to NFPA 80. Where frames are fabricated in sections because of shipping or handling limitations, field splice at approved locations by welding face joint continuously; grind, fill, dress, and make splice smooth, flush, and invisible on exposed faces. Install frames with removable stops located on secure side of opening. Install door silencers in frames before grouting. Remove temporary braces necessary for installation only after frames have been properly set and secured. Check plumb, square, and twist of frames as walls are constructed. Shim as necessary to comply with installation tolerances. Field apply bituminous coating to backs of frames that will be filled with grout containing antifreezing agents.
2.
Metal-Stud Partitions: Solidly pack mineral-fiber insulation inside frames.
3.
In-Place Concrete or Masonry Construction: Secure frames in place with postinstalled expansion anchors. Countersink anchors, and fill and make smooth, flush, and invisible on exposed faces. Installation Tolerances: Adjust hollow-metal door frames for squareness, alignment, twist, and plumb to the following tolerances: a. Squareness: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at door rabbet on a line 90 degrees from jamb perpendicular to frame head. b. Alignment: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at jambs on a horizontal line parallel to plane of wall.
4.
HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES
081113-7
ROWAN UNIVERSITY c. d. C.
Non-Fire-Rated Steel Doors: a. b. c. d.
2.
Between Door and Frame Jambs and Head: 1/8 inch plus or minus 1/32 inch. Between Edges of Pairs of Doors: 1/8 inch to 1/4 inch plus or minus 1/32 inch. At Bottom of Door: 3/4 inch plus or minus 1/32 inch. Between Door Face and Stop: 1/16 inch to 1/8 inch plus or minus 1/32 inch.
Fire-Rated Doors: Install doors with clearances according to NFPA 80.
Glazing: Comply with installation requirements in Section 088000 "Glazing" and with hollow-metal manufacturer's written instructions. 1.
3.4
Twist: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at opposite face corners of jambs on parallel lines, and perpendicular to plane of wall. Plumbness: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at jambs at floor.
Hollow-Metal Doors: Fit hollow-metal doors accurately in frames, within clearances specified below. Shim as necessary. 1.
D.
HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES SECTION 081113
Secure stops with countersunk flat- or oval-head machine screws spaced uniformly not more than 9 inches o.c. and not more than 2 inches o.c. from each corner.
ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A.
Final Adjustments: Check and readjust operating hardware items immediately before final inspection. Leave work in complete and proper operating condition. Remove and replace defective work, including hollow-metal work that is warped, bowed, or otherwise unacceptable.
B.
Remove grout and other bonding material from hollow-metal work immediately after installation.
C.
Prime-Coat Touchup: Immediately after erection, sand smooth rusted or damaged areas of prime coat and apply touchup of compatible air-drying, rust-inhibitive primer.
D.
Metallic-Coated Surface Touchup: Clean abraded areas and repair with galvanizing repair paint according to manufacturer's written instructions.
END OF SECTION 081113
HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES
081113-8
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
FLUSH WOOD DOORS SECTION 081416
SECTION 081416 - FLUSH WOOD DOORS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY A.
Section Includes: 1. 2. 3.
B.
Related Requirements: 1. 2.
1.3
A.
Product Data: For each type of door. Include details of core and edge constructionand trim for openings. Include factory-finishing specifications.
B.
Shop Drawings: Indicate location, size, and hand of each door; elevation of each kind of door; construction details not covered in Product Data; and the following:
C.
Samples for Initial Selection: For factory-finished doors.
Sample Warranty: For special warranty.
QUALITY ASSURANCE A.
1.6
Dimensions and locations of blocking. Dimensions and locations of mortises and holes for hardware. Dimensions and locations of cutouts. Undercuts. Requirements for veneer matching. Doors to be factory finished and finish requirements. Fire-protection ratings for fire-rated doors.
INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A.
1.5
Section 081113 “ Hollow Metal Doors and Frames” for door frames including fire-rated door frames. Section 088000 "Glazing" for glass view panels in flush wood doors.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7.
1.4
Solid-core doors with wood-veneer faces. Factory finishing flush wood doors. Factory fitting flush wood doors to frames and factory machining for hardware.
Manufacturer Qualifications: A qualified manufacturer that is a certified participant in AWI's Quality Certification Program.
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
FLUSH WOOD DOORS
081416-1
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
1.7
1.8
FLUSH WOOD DOORS SECTION 081416
A.
Comply with requirements of referenced standard and manufacturer's written instructions.
B.
Package doors individually in plastic bags or cardboard cartons.
C.
Mark each door on bottom rail with opening number used on Shop Drawings.
FIELD CONDITIONS A.
Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install doors until spaces are enclosed and weathertight, wet work in spaces is complete and dry, and HVAC system is operating and maintaining ambient temperature and humidity conditions at occupancy levels during remainder of construction period.
B.
Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install doors until spaces are enclosed and weathertight, wet work in spaces is complete and dry, and HVAC system is operating and maintaining temperature between 60 and 90 deg F and relative humidity between 17 and 50 percent during remainder of construction period.
WARRANTY A.
Special Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace doors that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1.
Failures include, but are not limited to, the following: a. b.
2. 3.
Warping (bow, cup, or twist) more than 1/4 inch in a 42-by-84-inch section. Telegraphing of core construction in face veneers exceeding 0.01 inch in a 3-inch span.
Warranty shall also include installation and finishing that may be required due to repair or replacement of defective doors. Warranty Period for Solid-Core Interior Doors: Life of installation.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUFACTURERS A.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.
Algoma Hardwoods, Inc. Eggers Industries. General Veneer Manufacturing Co. Marshfield Door Systems, Inc. Mohawk Doors; a Masonite company. Oshkosh Door Company.
FLUSH WOOD DOORS
081416-2
ROWAN UNIVERSITY B. 2.2
Source Limitations: Obtain flush wood doors from single manufacturer.
FLUSH WOOD DOORS, GENERAL A.
Quality Standard: In addition to requirements specified, comply with AWI's, AWMAC's, and WI's "Architectural Woodwork Standards WDMA I.S.1-A, "Architectural Wood Flush Doors." 1.
Provide AWI Quality Certification Labels indicating that doors comply with requirements of grades specified.
B.
Regional Materials: Flush wood doors shall be manufactured within 500 miles (800 km) of Project site.
C.
Low-Emitting Materials: Fabricate doors with adhesives and composite wood products that do not contain urea formaldehyde.
D.
Fire-Rated Wood Doors: Doors complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and labeled by a qualified testing agency, for fire-protection ratings indicated, based on testing at positive pressure according to NFPA 252 or UL 10C. 1.
2.
3. 4. 5.
6.
Oversize Fire-Rated Door Assemblies: For units exceeding sizes of tested assemblies, provide certification by a qualified testing agency that doors comply with standard construction requirements for tested and labeled fire-rated door assemblies except for size. Temperature-Rise Limit: At vertical exit enclosures and exit passageways, provide doors that have a maximum transmitted temperature end point of not more than 450 deg F above ambient after 30 minutes of standard fire-test exposure. Cores: Provide core specified or mineral core as needed to provide fire-protection rating indicated. Edge Construction: Provide edge construction with intumescent seals concealed by outer stile. Comply with specified requirements for exposed edges. Pairs: Provide fire-retardant stiles that are listed and labeled for applications indicated without formed-steel edges and astragals. Provide stiles with concealed intumescent seals. Comply with specified requirements for exposed edges. Pairs: Provide formed-steel edges and astragals with intumescent seals. a. b.
E.
Finish steel edges and astragals with baked enamel same color as doors. Finish steel edges and astragals to match door hardware (locksets or exit devices).
Structural-Composite-Lumber-Core Doors: 1.
Structural Composite Lumber: WDMA I.S.10. a. b.
2.3
FLUSH WOOD DOORS SECTION 081416
Screw Withdrawal, Face: 700 lbf. Screw Withdrawal, Edge: 400 lbf.
VENEER-FACED DOORS FOR TRANSPARENT FINISH
FLUSH WOOD DOORS
081416-3
ROWAN UNIVERSITY A.
Interior Solid-Core Doors. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8.
2.4
Grade: Premium, with Grade A faces. Species: Select white maple Cut: Quarter sliced. Match between Veneer Leaves: Book match. Assembly of Veneer Leaves on Door Faces: Center-balance match. Pair and Set Match: Provide for doors hung in same opening or separated only by mullions.. Core: Either glued wood stave or structural composite lumber. Construction: Five or seven plies. Stiles and rails are bonded to core, then entire unit is abrasive planed before veneering.
FABRICATION A.
Factory fit doors to suit frame-opening sizes indicated. Comply with clearance requirements of referenced quality standard for fitting unless otherwise indicated. 1.
B.
2.
C.
Comply with NFPA 80 requirements for fire-rated doors.
Factory machine doors for hardware that is not surface applied. Locate hardware to comply with DHI-WDHS-3. Comply with final hardware schedules, door frame Shop Drawings, BHMA-156.115-W, and hardware templates. 1.
Coordinate with hardware mortises in metal frames to verify dimensions and alignment before factory machining. Metal Astragals: Factory machine astragals and formed-steel edges for hardware for pairs of fire-rated doors.
Transom and Side Panels: Fabricate matching panels with same construction, exposed surfaces, and finish as specified for associated doors. Finish bottom edges of transoms and top edges of rabbeted doors same as door stiles. 1.
2.5
FLUSH WOOD DOORS SECTION 081416
Fabricate door and transom panels with full-width, solid-lumber[, rabbeted,] meeting rails. Provide factory-installed spring bolts for concealed attachment into jambs of metal door frames
FACTORY FINISHING A.
General: Comply with referenced quality standard for factory finishing. Complete fabrication, including fitting doors for openings and machining for hardware that is not surface applied, before finishing. 1.
Finish faces, all four edges, edges of cutouts, and mortises. Stains and fillers may be omitted on top and bottom edges, edges of cutouts, and mortises.
B.
Factory finish doors.
C.
Transparent Finish: 1.
Grade: Premium.
FLUSH WOOD DOORS
081416-4
ROWAN UNIVERSITY 2. 3. 4. 5.
FLUSH WOOD DOORS SECTION 081416
Finish: WDMA TR-6 catalyzed polyurethane. Staining: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. Effect: Open-grain finish Sheen
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1
EXAMINATION A.
Examine doors and installed door frames, with Installer present, before hanging doors. 1.
2. B. 3.2
Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
INSTALLATION A.
Hardware: For installation, see Section 087100 "Door Hardware."
B.
Installation Instructions: Install doors to comply with manufacturer's written instructions and referenced quality standard, and as indicated. 1.
3.3
Verify that installed frames comply with indicated requirements for type, size, location, and swing characteristics and have been installed with level heads and plumb jambs. Reject doors with defects.
Install fire-rated doors according to NFPA 80.
C.
Factory-Fitted Doors: Align in frames for uniform clearance at each edge.
D.
Factory-Finished Doors: Restore finish before installation if fitting or machining is required at Project site.
ADJUSTING A.
Operation: Rehang or replace doors that do not swing or operate freely.
B.
Finished Doors: Replace doors that are damaged or that do not comply with requirements. Doors may be repaired or refinished if Work complies with requirements and shows no evidence of repair or refinishing.
END OF SECTION 081416
FLUSH WOOD DOORS
081416-5
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES SECTION 083113
SECTION 083113 - ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS A.
1.2
Drawing and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY A.
This Section includes the following: 1. 2.
B.
Related Sections include the following: 1. 2.
C.
1.3
Wall access doors and frames. Ceiling access doors and frames.
Division 9 Section "Acoustical Tile Ceilings" for access tile in suspended acoustical tile ceilings. Division 23 Section "Air Duct Accessories" for heating and air-conditioning duct access doors.
Provide access doors where required by Mechanical, Plumbing, and Electrical Drawings for access.
SUBMITTALS A.
Product Data: For each type of door and frame indicated. Include construction details relative to materials, individual components and profiles, finishes, and fire ratings (if required) for access doors and frames.
B.
Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details of customized doors and frames. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other Work.
C.
Samples: For each door face material, at least 3 by 5 inches in size, in specified finish.
D.
Schedule: Provide complete door and frame schedule, including types, general locations, sizes, construction details, latching or locking provisions, and other data pertinent to installation.
E.
Coordination Drawings: Reflected ceiling plans drawn to scale and coordinating penetrations and ceiling-mounted items with concealed framing, suspension systems, piping, ductwork, and other construction. Show the following: 1. 2.
Method of attaching door frames to surrounding construction. Ceiling-mounted items including access doors and frames, lighting fixtures, diffusers, grilles, speakers, sprinklers, and special trim.
ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES
083113-1
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
1.4
1.5
ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES SECTION 083113
QUALITY ASSURANCE A.
Source Limitations: manufacturer.
Obtain doors and frames through one source from a single
B.
Size Variations: Obtain Architect's acceptance of manufacturer's standard-size units, which may vary slightly from sizes indicated.
COORDINATION A.
Verification: Determine specific locations and sizes for access doors needed to gain access to concealed equipment, and indicate on schedule specified in "Submittals" Article.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1
MANUFACTURERS A.
Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1.
2.2
MATERIALS A.
2.3
Stainless-Steel Sheet, Strip, Plate, and Flat Bars: ASTM A 666, Type 304; with minimum sheet thickness indicated representing specified thickness according to ASTM A 480/A 480M.
ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES A.
Flush, Insulated, Access Doors and Frames with Exposed Trim: stainless-steel sheet. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8.
2.4
Access Doors: a. Milcor Limited Partnership, J.L. Industries, or Nystrom Building Products.
Fabricated from
Locations: Where required or indicated. Fire-Resistance Rating: none. Temperature Rise Rating: none. Door: Flush panel with a core of mineral-fiber insulation enclosed in sheet metal with a minimum thickness of 0.036 inch. Frame: Minimum 0.060 inch thick sheet metal with 1 inch wide, surface-mounted trim. Hinges: Continuous piano hinge. Automatic Closer: Spring type. Latch: Self-latching bolt operated by flush screwdriver with interior release.
FABRICATION
ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES
083113-2
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
A.
General: Provide access door assemblies manufactured as integral units ready for installation.
B.
Metal Surfaces: For metal surfaces exposed to view in the completed Work, provide materials with smooth, flat surfaces without blemishes. Do not use materials with exposed pitting, seam marks, roller marks, rolled trade names, or roughness.
C.
Steel Doors and Frames: Grind exposed welds smooth and flush with adjacent surfaces. Furnish attachment devices and fasteners of type required to secure access panels to types of supports indicated. 1. 2.
D.
2.5
2.6
ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES SECTION 083113
Exposed Flanges: Nominal 1 to 1½ inches wide around perimeter of frame. Provide mounting holes in frames to attach frames to metal or wood framing in plaster and drywall construction and to attach masonry anchors in masonry construction. Furnish adjustable metal masonry anchors.
Latching Mechanisms: Furnish number required to hold doors in flush, smooth plane when closed.
FINISHES, GENERAL A.
Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes.
B.
Finish metal fabrications after assembly.
STAINLESS-STEEL FINISHES A.
Remove tool and die marks and stretch lines or blend into finish.
B.
Grind and polish surfaces to produce uniform, directionally textured, polished finish indicated, free of cross scratches. Run grain with long dimension of each piece.
C.
Bright, Directional Polish: No. 4 finish. 1.
When polishing is completed, passivate and rinse surfaces. Remove embedded foreign matter and leave surfaces chemically clean.
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1
PREPARATION A.
3.2
Advise installers of other work about specific requirements relating to access door and floor door installation, including sizes of openings to receive access door and frame, as well as locations of supports, inserts, and anchoring devices.
INSTALLATION A.
Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing access doors and frames.
ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES
083113-3
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
B.
3.3
ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES SECTION 083113
Set frames accurately in position and attach securely to supports with plane of face panels aligned with adjacent finish surfaces.
ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A.
Adjust doors and hardware after installation for proper operation.
B.
Remove and replace doors and frames that are warped, bowed, or otherwise damaged.
END OF SECTION 083113
ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES
083113-4
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
COILING COUNTER DOORS SECTION 083313
SECTION 083313 - COILING COUNTER DOORS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY A.
Section Includes: 1.
B.
Related Requirements: 1.
1.3
Section 055000 "Metal Fabrications" for miscellaneous steel supports.
ACTION SUBMITTALS A.
Product Data: For each type and size of coiling counter door and accessory. 1.
B.
3.
C.
Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components, profiles for slats, and finishes.
Shop Drawings: For each installation and for special components not dimensioned or detailed in manufacturer's product data. 1. 2.
1.4
Counter doors.
Include plans, elevations, sections, and mounting details. Include details of equipment assemblies, and indicate dimensions, required clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field connection. Include points of attachment and their corresponding static and dynamic loads imposed on structure.
Samples for Initial Selection: Manufacturer's finish charts showing full range of colors and textures available for units with factory-applied finishes.
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A.
Maintenance Data: For coiling counter doors to include in maintenance manuals.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1
MANUFACTURERS, GENERAL A.
2.2
Source Limitations: manufacturer.
Obtain coiling counter doors from single source from single
COUNTER DOOR ASSEMBLY
COILING COUNTER DOORS
083313-1
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
A.
Counter Door: Coiling counter door formed with curtain of interlocking metal slats. 1.
Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide QMIUSA or Approved Equal. a.
Style-Storage, Model-Punched Slate (Style 51)
B.
Operation Cycles: Door components and operators capable of operating for not less than 20,000. One operation cycle is complete when a door is opened from the closed position to the fully open position and returned to the closed position.
C.
Door Curtain Material: Aluminum, 6063-T5 alloy.
D.
Door Curtain Slats: Flat profile slats of1-1/4-inch 1-1/2-inch center-to-center height. 1. 2.
Perforated Slats: AL7 - Style 51 Gasket Seal. Manufacturer's standard continuous gaskets between slats.
E.
Bottom Bar: Manufacturer's standard continuous channel or tubular shape, fabricated and finished to match door
F.
Curtain Jamb Guides: Manufacture’s standard Jam 8 Guide with exposed finish matching curtain slats. Provide continuous integral wear strips to prevent metal-to-metal contact and to minimize operational noise.
G.
Hood: Match curtain material and finish. 1. 2.
Shape: Square Mounting: Face of wall.
H.
Sill Configuration: No sill.
I.
Locking Devices: Equip door with locking device assembly. 1.
Locking Device Assembly: Single-jamb side outside with cylinder.
J.
Manual Door Operator: Push-up operation.
K.
Curtain Accessories: Equip door with poll hook.
L.
Door Finish: 1.
2.3
COILING COUNTER DOORS SECTION 083313
Aluminum Finish: As selected by Architect from full range of industry colors and color densities.
DOOR CURTAIN MATERIALS AND CONSTRUCTION A.
Door Curtains: Fabricate coiling counter-door curtain of interlocking metal slats in a continuous length for width of door without splices. Unless otherwise indicated, provide
COILING COUNTER DOORS
083313-2
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
COILING COUNTER DOORS SECTION 083313
slats of thickness and mechanical properties recommended by door manufacturer for performance, size, and type of door indicated, and as follows: B.
Curtain Jamb Guides: Manufacturer's standard angles or channels and angles of same material and finish as curtain slats unless otherwise indicated, with sufficient depth and strength to retain curtain, to allow curtain to operate smoothly, and to withstand loading. Slot bolt holes for guide adjustment. Provide removable stops on guides to prevent overtravel of curtain. 1.
2.4
HOODS A.
2.5
General: Form sheet metal hood to entirely enclose coiled curtain and operating mechanism at opening head. Contour to fit end brackets to which hood is attached. Roll and reinforce top and bottom edges for stiffness. Form closed ends for surface-mounted hoods and fascia for any portion of between-jamb mounting that projects beyond wall face. Equip hood with intermediate support brackets as required to prevent sagging.
LOCKING DEVICES A.
Locking Device Assembly: Fabricate with cylinder lock, spring-loaded dead bolt, operating handle, cam plate, and adjustable locking bars to engage through slots in tracks. 1. 2.
2.6
2.7
Removable Posts and Jamb Guides: Manufacturer's standard.
Lock Cylinders: Cylinders to match owner’s system- lock II best - NC and keyed to building keying system. Keys: Three for each cylinder.
CURTAIN ACCESSORIES A.
Astragal: Equip each door bottom bar with a replaceable, adjustable, continuous, compressible gasket of flexible vinyl, rubber, or neoprene as a cushion bumper.
B.
Push/Pull Handles: Equip each push-up-operated or emergency-operated door with lifting handles on each side of door, finished to match door.
C.
Poll Hooks: Provide pole hooks and poles for doors more than 72 inches high.
COUNTERBALANCING MECHANISM A.
General: Counterbalance doors by means of manufacturer's standard mechanism with an adjustable-tension, steel helical torsion spring mounted around a steel shaft and contained in a spring barrel connected to top of curtain with barrel rings. Use grease-sealed bearings or self-lubricating graphite bearings for rotating members.
B.
Counterbalance Barrel: Fabricate spring barrel of manufacturer's standard hot-formed, structural-quality, carbon-steel pipe, of sufficient diameter and wall thickness to support rolled-up curtain without distortion of slats and to limit barrel deflection to not more than 0.03 in./ft. of span under full load.
COILING COUNTER DOORS
083313-3
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
2.8
2.9
C.
Counterbalance Spring: One or more oil-tempered, heat-treated steel helical torsion springs. Size springs to counterbalance weight of curtain, with uniform adjustment accessible from outside barrel. Secure ends of springs to barrel and shaft with cast-steel barrel plugs.
D.
Torsion Rod for Counterbalance Shaft: Fabricate of manufacturer's standard cold-rolled steel, sized to hold fixed spring ends and carry torsional load.
E.
Brackets: Manufacturer's standard mounting brackets of either cast iron or cold-rolled steel plate.
MANUAL DOOR OPERATORS A.
General: Equip door with manual door operator by door manufacturer.
B.
Push-up Door Operation: Design counterbalance mechanism so that required lift or pull for door operation does not exceed 25 lbf.
GENERAL FINISH REQUIREMENTS A.
2.10
COILING COUNTER DOORS SECTION 083313
Appearance of Finished Work: Noticeable variations in same piece are not acceptable. Variations in appearance of adjoining components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast.
ALUMINUM FINISHES A.
Baked-Enamel or Powder-Coat Finish: AAMA 2603. Comply with coating manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning, conversion coating, application, and baking.
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1
3.2
3.3
EXAMINATION A.
Examine substrates areas and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for substrate construction and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.
B.
Examine locations of electrical connections.
C.
Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
INSTALLATION A.
Install coiling counter doors and operating equipment complete with necessary hardware, anchors, inserts, hangers, and equipment supports; according to manufacturer's written instructions and as specified.
B.
Install coiling counter doors, hoods, controls, and operators at the mounting locations indicated for each door.
STARTUP SERVICE
COILING COUNTER DOORS
083313-4
ROWAN UNIVERSITY A.
Engage a factory-authorized service representative to perform startup service. 1. 2.
3.4
3.5
COILING COUNTER DOORS SECTION 083313
Perform installation and startup checks according to manufacturer's written instructions. Test and adjust controls and safety devices. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment.
ADJUSTING A.
Adjust hardware and moving parts to function smoothly so that doors operate easily, free of warp, twist, or distortion.
B.
Lubricate bearings and sliding parts as recommended by manufacturer.
DEMONSTRATION A.
Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain coiling counter doors.
END OF SECTION 083313
COILING COUNTER DOORS
083313-5
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
SECTIONAL OVERHEAD DOORS SECTION 083613
SECTION 083613 - SECTIONAL OVERHEAD DOORS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY A.
This Section includes the following types of sectional overhead doors: 1. 2. 3.
B.
Related Sections include the following: 1. 2. 3.
1.3
Operation Cycle: One complete cycle of a door begins with the door in the closed position. The door is then moved to the open position and back to the closed position.
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A.
Structural Performance: Provide sectional overhead doors capable of withstanding the effects of gravity loads and the following loads and stresses without evidencing permanent deformation of door components: 1.
B.
1.5
Division 8 Section "Door Hardware" for lock cylinders and keying. Division 26 Section "Conductors and Cables" for electrical service and connections for powered operators, and accessories. Division 26 Section "Disconnect Switches and Circuit Breakers" for disconnect switches and circuit breakers for powered operators.
DEFINITIONS A.
1.4
Doors with insulated aluminum-framed aluminum panels with vision panels. Tracks. Operators.
Wind Load: Uniform pressure (velocity pressure) of 20 lbf/sq. ft., acting inward and outward.
Operation-Cycle Requirements: Design sectional overhead door components and operator to operate for not less than 10,000 cycles.
SUBMITTALS A.
Product Data: For each type and size of sectional overhead door and accessory. Include details of construction relative to materials, dimensions of individual components, profiles, and finishes. Provide roughing-in diagrams, operating instructions, and maintenance information. Include the following: 1.
Setting drawings, templates, and installation instructions for built-in or embedded anchor devices.
SECTIONAL OVERHEAD DOORS
083613-1
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
2. 3.
B.
Summary of forces and loads on walls and jambs. Motors: Show nameplate data and ratings; characteristics; mounting arrangements; size and location of winding termination lugs, conduit entry, and grounding lug; and coatings.
Shop Drawings: For special components and installations not dimensioned or detailed in manufacturer's data sheets. 1.
1.6
SECTIONAL OVERHEAD DOORS SECTION 083613
Wiring Diagrams: Detail wiring for power, signal, and control systems. Differentiate between manufacturer-installed and field-installed wiring and between components provided by door manufacturer and those provided by others.
C.
Samples for Initial Selection: Manufacturer's color charts showing the full range of colors available for units with factory-applied finishes.
D.
Installer Certificates: Signed by manufacturer certifying that installers comply with specified requirements.
E.
Manufacturers' Certificates: Signed by manufacturers certifying that they comply with requirements specified in "Quality Assurance" Article. On request, submit evidence of manufacturing experience.
QUALITY ASSURANCE A.
Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced installer who is an authorized representative of the sectional overhead door manufacturer for both installation and maintenance of units required for this Project.
B.
Manufacturer Qualifications: Engage a firm experienced in manufacturing sectional overhead doors similar to those indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance.
C.
Source Limitations: Obtain sectional overhead doors through one source from a single manufacturer. 1.
Obtain operators and controls from the sectional overhead door manufacturer.
D.
Product Options: Drawings indicate size, profiles, and dimensional requirements of sectional overhead doors and accessories and are based on the specific system indicated. Other manufacturers' systems with equal performance and dimensional characteristics may be considered. Refer to Division 1 Section "Substitutions."
E.
Listing and Labeling: Provide electrically operated fixtures specified in this Section that are listed and labeled. 1. 2.
The Terms "Listed" and "Labeled": As defined in NFPA 70, Article 100. Listing and Labeling Agency Qualifications: A "Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory" as defined in OSHA Regulation 1910.7.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
SECTIONAL OVERHEAD DOORS
083613-2
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
2.1
MANUFACTURERS A.
Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. 2. 3.
B.
2.2
SECTIONAL OVERHEAD DOORS SECTION 083613
Overhead Door Corporation. Raynor Garage Doors. Roll-Lite Door Corp.; Div. of Clopay Building Products Co.
Design is based on “599 Heavy Duty Thermacore Sectional Door Series” as manufactured by Overhead Door or approved equal.
ALUMINUM SECTIONS A.
Construct door sections from Galvanized Steel with optional powder coating. 1.
B.
Exterior Surface Face: Flat.
Fabricate door panels from a single sheet to provide sections not more than 24 inches high and nominally 2 inches deep. Roll horizontal meeting edges to a continuous, interlocking, keyed, rabbeted, shiplap, or tongue-in-groove weathertight seal, with a reinforcing flange return. 1.
For insulated doors, provide door sections with continuous thermal-break construction, separating faces of door.
C.
Enclose open section with Galvanized Steel channel end stiles welded in place. Provide not less than 0.064 inch galvanized intermediate stiles, cut to door section profile, spaced at not more than 48 inches o.c., and welded in place.
D.
Reinforce bottom section with a continuous channel or angle complying with bottom section profile and allowing installation of astragal.
E.
Reinforce sections with continuous horizontal and diagonal reinforcement, as required to stiffen door and for wind loading. Provide galvanized steel bars, struts, trusses or strip steel, formed to depth and bolted or welded in place.
F.
Provide reinforcement for hardware attachment.
G.
Insulation: Insulate inner core of sections with manufacturer's standard rigid cellular polystyrene or polyurethane thermal insulation, with maximum flame-spread and smoke-developed indices of 75 and 450, respectively, according to ASTM E 84; or with fiberglass thermal insulation. Secure insulation to door section. Enclose insulation completely, with no exposed insulation material evident.
H.
Fabricate sections so finished door assembly is rigid and aligned, with tight hairline joints, and free of warp, twist, and deformation.
SECTIONAL OVERHEAD DOORS
083613-3
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
I.
Finish aluminum door sections as follows: 1. 2. 3.
2.3
General: Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes. Surface Preparation: Clean galvanized surfaces with nonpetroleum solvent so surfaces are free of oil and surface contaminants. Apply manufacturer's standard primer and powder-coat-applied finish coats to interior and exterior door faces after forming, according to coating manufacturer's written instructions for application, thermosetting, and minimum dry film thickness. a. Color and Gloss: As indicated by manufacturer's color and gloss designations. b. Color and Gloss: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of colors and glosses.
TRACKS, SUPPORTS, AND ACCESSORIES A.
Tracks: Provide manufacturer's 2-inch standard galvanized steel track system, sized for door size and weight, designed for lift type indicated and clearances shown, and complying with ASTM A 653, for minimum G60 zinc coating. Provide complete track assembly including brackets, bracing, and reinforcement for rigid support of ball-bearing roller guides for required door type and size. Slot vertical sections of track at 2 inches o.c. for door-drop safety device. Slope tracks at proper angle from vertical or otherwise design to ensure tight closure at jambs when door unit is closed. Weld or bolt to track supports.
B.
Track Reinforcement and Supports: Provide galvanized steel track reinforcement and support members, complying with ASTM A 36 and ASTM A 123. Secure, reinforce, and support tracks as required for door size and weight to provide strength and rigidity without sag, sway, and vibration during opening and closing of doors. Contractor required to provide all supports for attachment to metal building frame.
C.
Support and attach tracks to opening jambs with continuous angle welded to tracks and attached to wall. Support horizontal (ceiling) tracks with continuous angle welded to track and supported by laterally braced attachments to overhead structural members at curve and end of tracks.
D.
Weatherseals: Provide replaceable, adjustable, continuous, compressible weather-stripping gaskets of flexible vinyl, rubber, or neoprene fitted to bottom and at top of overhead door. 1. 2.
2.5
SECTIONAL OVERHEAD DOORS SECTION 083613
Provide motor-operated doors with combination bottom weatherseal and sensor edge. In addition, provide continuous flexible seals at door jambs for a weathertight installation.
HARDWARE A.
General: Provide heavy-duty, corrosion-resistant hardware, with hot-dip galvanized, stainless-steel, or other corrosion-resistant fasteners, to suit door type.
SECTIONAL OVERHEAD DOORS
083613-4
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
B.
Hinges: Provide heavy-duty galvanized steel hinges, of not less than 0.0747 inch thick uncoated steel, at each end stile and at each intermediate stile, per manufacturer's written recommendations for door size. Attach hinges to door sections through stiles and rails with bolts and lock nuts or lock washers and nuts. Use rivets or self-tapping fasteners where access to nuts is not possible. Provide double-end hinges, where required, for doors exceeding 16 feet in width, unless otherwise recommended by door manufacturer.
C.
Rollers: Provide heavy-duty rollers, with steel ball bearings in case-hardened steel races, mounted with varying projections to suit slope of track. Extend roller shaft through both hinges where double hinges are required. Provide 2 inch diameter roller tires for 2 inch track, and as follows: 1.
Case-hardened steel tires.
D.
Push/Pull Handles: For push-up-operated or emergency-operated doors, provide galvanized steel lifting handles on each side of door.
E.
Slide Bolt: Fabricate with side locking bolts to engage through slots in tracks for locking by padlock, located on single-jamb side, operable from inside only.
F.
Fabricate locking device assembly with lock, spring-loaded dead bolt, operating handle, cam plate, and adjustable locking bar to engage through slots in tracks. 1.
2.6
SECTIONAL OVERHEAD DOORS SECTION 083613
Locking Bars: Single-jamb side, operable from inside only.
G.
Chain Lock Keeper: Suitable for padlock.
H.
Door unit is power operated, provide safety interlock switch to disengage power supply when door is locked.
COUNTERBALANCING MECHANISM A.
Extension Spring: Operation by extension-spring counterbalance mechanism with aircraft-type steel cable over ball-bearing sheaves. Provide oil-tempered wired springs with internal safety rods. Combine operation with a spring bumper in each horizontal track to cushion door at end of opening operation.
B.
Cable Drums: Provide cast-aluminum or gray-iron casting cable drums grooved to receive cable. Mount counterbalance mechanism with manufacturer's standard ball-bearing brackets at each end of shaft. Provide 1 additional midpoint bracket for shafts up to 16 feet long and 2 additional brackets at one-third points to support shafts more than 16 feet long, unless closer spacing is recommended by door manufacturer.
C.
Cable Safety Device: Include a spring-loaded, steel or bronze cam mounted to bottom door roller assembly on each side, designed to automatically stop door if either cable breaks.
D.
Bracket: Provide anchor support bracket, as required to connect stationary end of spring to the wall, to level shaft and prevent sag.
E.
Provide a spring bumper at each horizontal track to cushion door at end of opening operation.
SECTIONAL OVERHEAD DOORS
083613-5
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
2.7
SECTIONAL OVERHEAD DOORS SECTION 083613
ELECTRIC DOOR OPERATORS A.
General: Provide electric door operator assembly of size and capacity recommended and provided by door manufacturer for door and operational life specified, complete with electric motor and factory-prewired motor controls, starter, gear-reduction unit, solenoid-operated brake, clutch, remote-control stations, control devices, integral gearing for locking door, and accessories required for proper operation.
B.
Comply with NFPA 70.
C.
Disconnect Device: Provide hand-operated disconnect or mechanism for automatically engaging sprocket-chain operator and releasing brake for emergency manual operation while disconnecting motor, without affecting timing of limit switch. Mount disconnect and operator so they are accessible from floor level. Include interlock device to automatically prevent motor from operating when emergency operator is engaged.
D.
Design operator so motor may be removed without disturbing limit-switch adjustment and without affecting emergency auxiliary operator.
E.
Provide control equipment complying with NEMA ICS 1, NEMA ICS 2, and NEMA ICS 6, with NFPA 70 Class 2 control circuit, maximum 24-V, ac or dc.
F.
Door-Operator Type: Provide unit consisting of electric motor and the following: 1.
G.
Electric Motors: Provide high-starting torque, reversible, continuous-duty, Class A insulated, electric motors, complying with NEMA MG 1, with overload protection, sized to start, accelerate, and operate door in either direction, from any position, at not less than 2/3 fps and not more than 1 fps, without exceeding nameplate ratings or considering service factor. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.
H.
Trolley or drawbar type, with V-belt primary drive, chain and sprocket secondary drive, and quick disconnect-release for manual operation.
Type: Polyphase, medium-induction type. Service Factor: According to NEMA MG 1, unless otherwise indicated. Coordinate wiring requirements and electrical characteristics of motors with building electrical system. Provide open dripproof-type motor, and controller with NEMA ICS 6, Type 1 enclosure. Provide totally enclosed, nonventilated or fan-cooled motors, fitted with plugged drain, and controller with NEMA ICS 6, Type 4 enclosure where indicated.
Remote-Control Station: Provide momentary-contact, 3-button control station with push-button controls labeled "Open," "Close," and "Stop." 1. 2.
Provide interior units, full-guarded, surface-mounted, heavy-duty type, with general-purpose NEMA ICS 6, Type 1 enclosure. Provide exterior units, full-guarded, standard-duty, surface-mounted, weatherproof type, NEMA ICS 6, Type 4 enclosure, key operated.
SECTIONAL OVERHEAD DOORS
083613-6
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
I.
Obstruction Detection Device: Provide each motorized door with indicated external automatic safety sensor able to protect full width of door opening. Activation of sensor immediately stops and reverses downward door travel. 1.
J.
SECTIONAL OVERHEAD DOORS SECTION 083613
Sensor Edge: Provide each motorized door with an automatic safety sensor edge, located within astragal or weather stripping mounted to bottom bar. Contact with sensor immediately stops and reverses downward door travel. Connect to control circuit using manufacturer's standard take-up reel or self-coiling cable. a. Provide pneumatically actuated automatic bottom bar. b. Provide electrically actuated automatic bottom bar. 1. Self-Monitoring Type: Provide self-monitoring, 4-wire configured device.
Limit Switches: Provide adjustable switches, interlocked with motor controls and set to automatically stop door at fully opened and fully closed positions.
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1
EXAMINATION A.
Examine wall and overhead areas, including opening framing and blocking, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances, clearances, and other conditions affecting performance of Work of this Section. 1.
3.2
3.3
INSTALLATION A.
General: Install door, track, and operating equipment complete with necessary hardware, jamb and head mold strips, anchors, inserts, hangers, and equipment supports according to Shop Drawings, manufacturer's written instructions, and as specified.
B.
Fasten vertical track assembly to framing at not less than 24 inches o.c. Hang horizontal track from structural overhead framing with angle or channel hangers welded and bolt fastened in place. Provide sway bracing, diagonal bracing, and reinforcement as required for rigid installation of track and door-operating equipment.
ADJUSTING A.
Lubricate bearings and sliding parts; adjust doors to operate easily, free from warp, twist, or distortion and fitting weathertight for entire perimeter.
B.
Adjust belt-driven motors as follows: 1. 2. 3.
3.4
Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
Use adjustable motor-mounting bases for belt-driven motors. Align pulleys and install belts. Tension belt according to manufacturer's written instructions.
DEMONSTRATION
SECTIONAL OVERHEAD DOORS
083613-7
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
A.
SECTIONAL OVERHEAD DOORS SECTION 083613
Startup Services: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to perform startup services and to train Owner's maintenance personnel as specified below: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.
Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment. Train Owner's maintenance personnel on procedures and schedules related to startup and shutdown, troubleshooting, servicing, and preventive maintenance. Review data in the maintenance manuals. Refer to Division 1 Section "Contract Closeout." Review data in the maintenance manuals. Refer to Division 1 Section "Operation and Maintenance Data." Schedule training with Owner with at least 7 days' advance notice.
END OF SECTION 083613
SECTIONAL OVERHEAD DOORS
083613-8
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES & STOREFRONTS SECTION 084113 SECTION 084113 - ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES & STOREFRONTS
PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. In the event of any conflicts between the requirements of these Sections, the more stringent requirement shall apply.
SUMMARY A.
This Section includes aluminum-framed entrances and storefronts:
B.
Related Sections include the following: 1. 2.
1.3
Division 08 Sections for glazing specified in this Section. Division 08 Sections for hardware specified in this Section.
SECTION REQUIREMENTS A.
Air Infiltration: Limited to 1.0 cfm/sq. ft. of system surface area when tested according to ASTM E 283 at a pressure differential of 1.57 lbf/sq. ft. For a pair of doors.
B.
Water Penetration: Systems do not evidence water leakage when tested according to ASTM E 331 at minimum differential pressure of 20 percent of positive wind-load design pressure, but not less than 6.24 lbf/sq. ft.
C.
Warranty: Two (2) years from substantial completion.
D.
Submittals: Product Data, Shop Drawings, and color Samples. 1.
For entrance systems, include hardware schedule and locations.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1
ALUMINUM-FRAMED STOREFRONTS A.
Products: 1.
B. C.
Kawneer; 500 Heavy Wall Entrances, wide stile 5" vertical face dimension , 2" depth is the basis of design to match existing doors, or approved equal.
Aluminum: Alloy and temper recommended by manufacturer for type of use and finish indicated; ASTM B 221, 6063-T5 alloy and temper. Glazing: 1" thick tempered insulating, double pane glass.
ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES & STOREFRONTS
084113 - 1
ROWAN UNIVERSITY D.
ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES & STOREFRONTS SECTION 084113 Sealants and Joint Fillers: Single-component, neutral-curing silicone sealant, ASTM C 920, Type S; Grade NS; Class 25; Uses T, NT, M, G, A, and O.
E.
Framing Members: Manufacturer's standard extruded-aluminum framing members of thickness required and reinforced as required to support imposed loads.
F.
Doors: 2-inch- thick glazed doors with minimum 0.188-inch- thick, extruded tubular rail and stile members, mechanically fastened corners with reinforcing brackets that are deep penetration and fillet welded or that incorporate concealed tie-rods, snap-on extruded-aluminum glazing stops, and preformed gaskets.
G.
Fasteners and Accessories: Compatible with adjacent materials, corrosion-resistant, nonstaining, and nonbleeding. Use concealed fasteners except for application of door hardware.
H.
Aluminum Finish: Comply with NAAMMs "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products. Flouropolymer, 3-coat system, complying with AAMA 2605. 1.
I.
Color: - Anodized Aluminum.
Hardware 1. 2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Exit Devices: Kawneer’s Paneline EL Panic Device with concealed exit rods. Locksets and Latchesets: a. BHMA A156.3, Grade 1 for exit devices. b. Kawneer Pull “CO-9" on exterior side and deadbolt lock on interior side, door only unlocked from outside side with key. c. Provide trim matching locksets. Keys: Key locks to Owner's existing master-key system. a. Cylinders with seven [7]-pin tumblers and removable cores. b. Best, Model 1E-7 with length to match lockset, provide cylinders for locking doors that require pulls, unless otherwise specified. c. Contractor to have the cores delivered to the Project Manager from BEST for the Contractor to install. Door Closer: a. Norton, Model 8301, Architectural Series closer, ADA Compliant, UL Listed, metal plated finish - bronze. b. Mount closers on interior side of door opening. Provide regular-arm, parallel-arm, or top-jamb-mounted closers as necessary. c. Adjustable delayed opening (accessible to people with disabilities) feature on closers. Hinges: a. Kawneer, Heavy Duty Continuous Geared, Aluminum anodized finish, 2 pair per door opening.
Threshold: a. Kawneer, ADA compliant, Aluminum threshold, Aluminum anodized finish.
ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES & STOREFRONTS
084113 - 2
ROWAN UNIVERSITY 7.
8.
ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES & STOREFRONTS SECTION 084113
Weatherstripping: a. Hager, Jamb Weatherstripping, Model 722S, press-on fire seal, UL Listed. b. Hager, Door Bottom, Model 751S - Pile, UL Listed, finish to match lockset. Provide hardware finishes as follows: a. Hinges: Aluminum Anodized finish. b. Locksets, Latchsets, and Exit Devices: Aluminum Anodized finish. c. Closers: Matching finish of lockset/latchset. d. Other Hardware: Matching finish of lockset/latchset, unless otherwise specified.
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1
INSTALLATION
A.
Site Verification of Conditions: Installer must verify that base conditions previously installed under other sections are acceptable for product installation according to with manufacturer's instructions. Notify the Contractor in writing of conditions detrimental to the proper and timely completion of work. Do not start work until all negative conditions are corrected in a manner acceptable to the installer and manufacturer.
B.
Isolate metal surfaces in contact with incompatible materials, including wood, by painting contact surfaces with bituminous coating or primer, or by applying sealant or tape recommended by manufacturer.
C.
Install components to provide a clean and neat finish. Drill holes in existing floor and threshold to provide a catch for the exit rod. Provide colored epoxy patch at corridor floor where old rods were mounted.
D.
Install doors without warp or rack. Adjust doors and hardware to provide tight fit at contact points and smooth operation.
E.
Install header and framing members in a bed of sealant or with joint filler or gaskets. Coordinate installation with new wall other components of construction.
3.2
CLEANING, ADJUSTMENT AND PROTECTION
A.
CLEANING: After installation, installer to take following steps: 1. Remove temporary coverings and protection of adjacent work areas. 2. Remove construction debris from construction site and legally dispose of debris. 3. Repair or replace damaged installed products. 4. Clean product surfaces and lubricate operating equipment for optimum condition and safety.
B.
ADJUSTMENT: AAADM certified technician shall inspect and adjust installation to assure compliance with ANSI A156.10.
END OF SECTION 084113
ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES & STOREFRONTS
084113 - 3
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
GLAZED ALUMINUM CURTAIN WALLS SECTION 084413
SECTION 084413 - GLAZED ALUMINUM CURTAIN WALLS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS A.
1.2
SUMMARY A.
1.3
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
Section includes glazed aluminum curtain walls.
ACTION SUBMITTALS A.
Product Data: For each type of product. 1.
B.
Shop Drawings: For glazed aluminum curtain walls. Include plans, elevations, sections, full-size details, and attachments to other work. 1. 2.
1.4
1.5
Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes.
Include details of provisions for assembly expansion and contraction and for draining moisture occurring within the assembly to the exterior. Show connection to and continuity with adjacent thermal, weather, air, and vapor barriers.
C.
Samples for Initial Selection: For units with factory-applied color finishes.
D.
Delegated-Design Submittal: For glazed aluminum curtain walls indicated to comply with performance requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation.
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A.
Maintenance Data: For glazed aluminum curtain walls to include in maintenance manuals.
B.
Maintenance Data for Structural Sealant: For structural-sealant-glazed curtain walls to include in maintenance manuals. Include ASTM C 1401 recommendations for post-installation-phase quality-control program.
PRECONSTRUCTION LABORATORY MOCKUPS A.
Build preconstruction laboratory mockups at testing agency facility; use personnel, products, and methods of construction that will be used at Project site.
B.
Preconstruction Laboratory Mockup Testing Program: Test preconstruction laboratory mockups according to requirements in "Performance Requirements" Article. Perform the following tests in the following order: 1. Structural: ASTM E 330 at 50 percent of positive test load.
GLAZED ALUMINUM CURTAIN WALLS
084413-1
ROWAN UNIVERSITY 2. 3. 4. 5.
Air Infiltration: ASTM E 283. Water Penetration under Static Pressure: ASTM E 331. Water Penetration under Dynamic Pressure: AAMA 501.1. Structural: ASTM E 330 at 100 percent of positive and negative test loads. Repeat the following: a. b.
6.
Air Infiltration: ASTM E 283. Water Penetration under Static Pressure: ASTM E 331.
Structural: ASTM E 330 at 100 and 150 percent of positive and negative test loads. Repeat the following: a. b.
1.6
Air Infiltration: ASTM E 283. Water Penetration under Static Pressure: ASTM E 331.
Thermal Cycling: According to AAMA 501.5. Repeat the following: a. b.
9.
Air Infiltration: ASTM E 283. Water Penetration under Static Pressure: ASTM E 331.
Vertical Interstory Movement: AAMA 501.7. Repeat the following: a. b.
8.
Air Infiltration: ASTM E 283. Water Penetration under Static Pressure: ASTM E 331.
Interstory Drift: AAMA 501.4 at 100 percent of design displacement. Repeat the following: a. b.
7.
GLAZED ALUMINUM CURTAIN WALLS SECTION 084413
Air Infiltration: ASTM E 283. Water Penetration under Static Pressure: ASTM E 331.
WARRANTY A.
Special Assembly Warranty: Installer agrees to repair or replace components of glazed aluminum curtain wall that do not comply with requirements or that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1.
Failures include, but are not limited to, the following: a. b. c. d. e.
2. B.
Structural failures including, but not limited to, excessive deflection. Noise or vibration created by wind and thermal and structural movements. Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond normal weathering. Water penetration through fixed glazing and framing areas. Failure of operating components.
Warranty Period: Three years from date of Substantial Completion.
Special Finish Warranty: Standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair finishes or replace aluminum that shows evidence of deterioration of factory-applied finishes within specified warranty period.
GLAZED ALUMINUM CURTAIN WALLS
084413-2
ROWAN UNIVERSITY 1.
Deterioration includes, but is not limited to, the following: a. b. c.
2.
GLAZED ALUMINUM CURTAIN WALLS SECTION 084413
Color fading more than 5 Hunter units when tested according to ASTM D 2244. Chalking in excess of a No. 8 rating when tested according to ASTM D 4214. Cracking, checking, peeling, or failure of paint to adhere to bare metal.
Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A.
Delegated Design: Engage a qualified professional engineer, as defined in Section 014000 "Quality Requirements," to design glazed aluminum curtain walls.
B.
General Performance: Comply with performance requirements specified, as determined by testing of glazed aluminum curtain walls representing those indicated for this Project without failure due to defective manufacture, fabrication, installation, or other defects in construction. 1.
2.
Glazed aluminum curtain walls shall withstand movements of supporting structure including, but not limited to, story drift, twist, column shortening, long-term creep, and deflection from uniformly distributed and concentrated live loads. Failure also includes the following: a. b. c. d. e.
C.
Structural Loads: 1. 2.
D.
Thermal stresses transferring to building structure. Glass breakage. Noise or vibration created by wind and thermal and structural movements. Loosening or weakening of fasteners, attachments, and other components. Failure of operating units.
Wind Loads: As indicated on Drawings. Other Design Loads: As indicated on Drawings.
Deflection of Framing Members: At design wind pressure, as follows: 1.
2.
3.
Deflection Normal to Wall Plane: Limited to edge of glass in a direction perpendicular to glass plane not exceeding 1/175 of the glass edge length for each individual glazing lite or an amount that restricts edge deflection of individual glazing lites to 3/4 inch, whichever is less. Deflection Parallel to Glazing Plane: Limited to 1/360 of clear span or 1/8 inch, whichever is smaller. Cantilever Deflection: Where framing members overhang an anchor point, as follows:
GLAZED ALUMINUM CURTAIN WALLS
084413-3
ROWAN UNIVERSITY a.
E.
2.
3.
When tested at positive and negative wind-load design pressures, assemblies do not evidence deflection exceeding specified limits. When tested at 150 percent of positive and negative wind-load design pressures, assemblies, including anchorage, do not evidence material failures, structural distress, or permanent deformation of main framing members exceeding 0.2 percent of span. Test Durations: As required by design wind velocity, but not less than [ 10 seconds.
Air Infiltration: Test according to ASTM E 283 for infiltration as follows: 1.
Fixed Framing and Glass Area: a.
G.
Seismic Drift Causing Glass Fallout: Complying with criteria for passing based on building occupancy type when tested according to AAMA 501.6 at design displacement.
Energy Performance: Certify and label energy performance according to NFRC as follows: 1.
2. 3.
J.
No evidence of water penetration through fixed glazing and framing areas when tested according to a minimum static-air-pressure differential of 20 percent of positive wind-load design pressure, but not less than 6.24 lbf/sq. ft.
Seismic Performance: Glazed aluminum curtain walls shall withstand the effects of earthquake motions determined according to ASCE/SEI 7. 1.
I.
Maximum air leakage of 0.06 cfm/sq. ft. at a static-air-pressure differential of 1.57 lbf/sq. ft.
Water Penetration under Static Pressure: Test according to ASTM E 331 as follows: 1.
H.
Perpendicular to Plane of Wall: No greater than 1/240 of clear span plus 1/4-inch for spans greater than 11 feet 8-1/4 inchesor 1/175 times span, for spans less than 11 feet 8-1/4 inches.
Structural: Test according to ASTM E 330 as follows: 1.
F.
GLAZED ALUMINUM CURTAIN WALLS SECTION 084413
Thermal Transmittance (U-factor): Fixed glazing and framing areas shall have U-factor of not more than 0.45 Btu/sq. ft. x h x deg F as determined according to NFRC 100. Solar Heat Gain Coefficient: Fixed glazing and framing areas shall have a solar heat gain coefficient of no greater than 0.35 as determined according to NFRC 200. Condensation Resistance: Fixed glazing and framing areas shall have an NFRC-certified condensation resistance rating of no less than 15 as determined according to NFRC 500.
Noise Reduction: Test according to ASTM E 90, with ratings determined by ASTM E 1332, as follows: 1.
Outdoor-Indoor Transmission Class: Minimum 26
GLAZED ALUMINUM CURTAIN WALLS
084413-4
ROWAN UNIVERSITY K.
Windborne-Debris Impact Resistance: Pass missile-impact and cyclic-pressure tests when tested according to ASTM E 1886 and testing information in ASTM E 1996 for. 1.
L.
2.3
Large-Missile Test: For glazed openings located within 30 feet of grade.
Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements resulting from ambient and surface temperature changes: 1.
2.2
GLAZED ALUMINUM CURTAIN WALLS SECTION 084413
Temperature Change: 120 deg F, ambient; 180 deg F, material surfaces.
MANUFACTURERS A.
Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide EFCO, E-Wall System, Model 5800, or approved equal.
B.
Source Limitations: Obtain all components of curtain wall system, including framing spandrel panels venting windows Entrances sun control and accessories, from single manufacturer.
FRAMING A.
Framing Members: Manufacturer's extruded- or formed-aluminum framing members of thickness required and reinforced as required to support imposed loads. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.
B.
Construction: Thermally broken Glazing System: Retained mechanically with gaskets on four sides. Glazing Plane: Front. Finish: Clear anodic finish Fabrication Method: Factory-fabricated unitized system.
Pressure Caps: Manufacturer's standard aluminum components that mechanically retain glazing. 1.
Include snap-on trim that conceals fasteners.
C.
Brackets and Reinforcements: Manufacturer's standard high-strength aluminum with nonstaining, nonferrous shims for aligning system components.
D.
Materials: 1.
Aluminum: Alloy and temper recommended by manufacturer for type of use and finish indicated. a. b. c. d.
Sheet and Plate: ASTM B 209 (ASTM B 209M). Extruded Bars, Rods, Profiles, and Tubes: ASTM B 221 (ASTM B 221M). Extruded Structural Pipe and Tubes: ASTM B 429/B 429M. Structural Profiles: ASTM B 308/B 308M.
GLAZED ALUMINUM CURTAIN WALLS
084413-5
ROWAN UNIVERSITY 2.
2.4
Steel Reinforcement: Manufacturer's standard zinc-rich, corrosion-resistant primer complying with SSPC-PS Guide No. 12.00; applied immediately after surface preparation and pretreatment. Select surface preparation methods according to recommendations in SSPC-SP COM, and prepare surfaces according to applicable SSPC standard. a. Structural Shapes, Plates, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M. b. Cold-Rolled Sheet and Strip: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M. c. Hot-Rolled Sheet and Strip: ASTM A 1011/A 1011M.
INSULATED SPANDREL PANELS A.
Insulated Spandrel Panels: Mirrored, glass-faced flat panels with no deviations in plane exceeding 0.8 percent of panel dimension in width or length. 1. 2.
Overall Panel Thickness: 1 inch Exterior Skin: Mirrored Glass. a. b. c. d.
3.
4. B.
Thickness: 1/8" Thick Tempered Finish: Mirrored Glass. Texture: Smooth. Backing Sheet.
Interior Skin: Manufacturer's standard galvanized-steel sheet. a. b. c. d.
Thickness: Manufacturer's standard for finish and texture indicated Finish: Matching curtain-wall framing Texture: Smooth Backing Sheet: 1/8-inch-thick tempered hardboard.
Thermal Insulation Core: Manufacturer's standard.
Surface-Burning Characteristics: Comply with ASTM E 84; testing by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency. 1. 2.
2.5
GLAZED ALUMINUM CURTAIN WALLS SECTION 084413
Flame-Spread Index: 25 or less. Smoke-Developed Index: 450 or less.
GLAZING A.
Glazing: Comply with Section 088000 "Glazing."
B.
Glazing Gaskets: Manufacturer's standard sealed-corner pressure-glazing system of black, resilient elastomeric glazing gaskets, setting blocks, and shims or spacers.
C.
Glazing Sealants: As recommended by manufacturer.
D.
Weatherseal Sealants: ASTM C 920 for Type S; Grade NS; Class 25; Uses NT, G, A, and O; chemically curing silicone formulation that is compatible with structural sealant and other system components with which it comes in contact; recommended by structural-sealant, weatherseal-sealant, and structural-sealant-glazed curtain-wall manufacturers for this use.
GLAZED ALUMINUM CURTAIN WALLS
084413-6
ROWAN UNIVERSITY 1. 2.6
Color: Match structural sealant.
ACCESSORIES A.
Fasteners and Accessories: Manufacturer's standard corrosion-resistant, nonstaining, nonbleeding fasteners and accessories compatible with adjacent materials. 1. 2.
2.7
GLAZED ALUMINUM CURTAIN WALLS SECTION 084413
Use self-locking devices where fasteners are subject to loosening or turning out from thermal and structural movements, wind loads, or vibration. Reinforce members as required to receive fastener threads.
B.
Anchors: Three-way adjustable anchors with minimum adjustment of 1 inch that accommodate fabrication and installation tolerances in material and finish compatible with adjoining materials and recommended by manufacturer.
C.
Concealed Flashing: Manufacturer's standard corrosion-resistant, nonstaining, nonbleeding flashing compatible with adjacent materials.
D.
Bituminous Paint: Cold-applied asphalt-mastic paint complying with SSPC-Paint 12 requirements except containing no asbestos, formulated for 30-mil (0.762-mm) thickness per coat.
FABRICATION A.
Form or extrude aluminum shapes before finishing.
B.
Weld in concealed locations to greatest extent possible to minimize distortion or discoloration of finish. Remove weld spatter and welding oxides from exposed surfaces by descaling or grinding.
C.
Fabricate components that, when assembled, have the following characteristics: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.
D.
Profiles that are sharp, straight, and free of defects or deformations. Accurately fitted joints with ends coped or mitered. Physical and thermal isolation of glazing from framing members. Accommodations for thermal and mechanical movements of glazing and framing to maintain required glazing edge clearances. Fasteners, anchors, and connection devices that are concealed from view to greatest extent possible.
Fabricate components to resist water penetration as follows: 1.
Pressure-equalized system or double barrier design with primary air and vapor barrier at interior side of glazed aluminum curtain wall and secondary seal weeped and vented to exterior.
E.
Curtain-Wall Framing: Fabricate components for assembly using manufacturer's standard assembly method.
F.
Factory-Assembled Frame Units:
GLAZED ALUMINUM CURTAIN WALLS
084413-7
ROWAN UNIVERSITY 1. 2 3. 4. 5. G.
2.8
GLAZED ALUMINUM CURTAIN WALLS SECTION 084413
Rigidly secure nonmovement joints. Prepare surfaces that are in contact structural sealant according to sealant manufacturer's written instructions to ensure compatibility and adhesion. Preparation includes, but is not limited to, cleaning and priming surfaces. Seal joints watertight unless otherwise indicated. Install glazing to comply with requirements in Section 088000 "Glazing."
After fabrication, clearly mark components to identify their locations in Project according to Shop Drawings.
ALUMINUM FINISHES A.
Clear Anodic Finish: AAMA 611, AA-M12C22A41, Class I, 0.018 mm or thicker.
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1
3.2
EXAMINATION A.
Examine areas, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.
B.
Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
INSTALLATION A.
General: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7.
B.
Comply with manufacturer's written instructions. Do not install damaged components. Fit joints to produce hairline joints free of burrs and distortion. Rigidly secure nonmovement joints. Install anchors with separators and isolators to prevent metal corrosion and electrolytic deterioration and to prevent impeding movement of moving joints. Where welding is required, weld components in concealed locations to minimize distortion or discoloration of finish. Protect glazing surfaces from welding. Seal joints watertight unless otherwise indicated.
Metal Protection: 1.
2.
Where aluminum is in contact with dissimilar metals, protect against galvanic action by painting contact surfaces with primer, applying sealant or tape, or installing nonconductive spacers as recommended by manufacturer for this purpose. Where aluminum is in contact concrete or masonry, protect against corrosion by painting contact surfaces with bituminous paint.
C.
Install components to drain water passing joints, condensation occurring within framing members, and moisture migrating within glazed aluminum curtain wall to exterior.
D.
Install components plumb and true in alignment with established lines and grades.
F.
Install glazing as specified in Section 088000 "Glazing."
GLAZED ALUMINUM CURTAIN WALLS
084413-8
ROWAN UNIVERSITY G.
3.3
Install weatherseal sealant according to Section 079200 "Joint Sealants" and according to sealant manufacturer's written instructions to produce weatherproof joints. Install joint filler behind sealant as recommended by sealant manufacturer.
ERECTION TOLERANCES A.
Erection Tolerances: Install glazed aluminum curtain walls to comply with the following maximum tolerances: 1. 2. 3.
Plumb: 1/8 inch in 10 feet; 1/4 inch in 40 feet. Level: 1/8 inch in 20 feet; 1/4 inch in 40 feet. Alignment: a. b. c.
4.
3.4
Where surfaces abut in line or are separated by reveal or protruding element up to 1/2 inch wide, limit offset from true alignment to 1/16 inch. Where surfaces are separated by reveal or protruding element from 1/2 to 1 inch wide, limit offset from true alignment to 1/8 inch. Where surfaces are separated by reveal or protruding element of 1 inch wide or more, limit offset from true alignment to 1/4 inch.
Location: Limit variation from plane to 1/8 inch in 12 feet ; 1/2 inch over total length.
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A.
Testing Agency: Contractor shall engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections.
B.
Test Area: Perform tests o one bay at least 30 feet (9.1 m), by one story.
C.
Field Quality-Control Testing: Perform the following test on representative areas of glazed aluminum curtain walls. 1.
a.
GLAZED ALUMINUM CURTAIN WALLS SECTION 084413
Water-Spray Test: Before installation of interior finishes has begun, areas designated by Architect shall be tested according to AAMA 501.2 and shall not evidence water penetration.
Perform a minimum of two tests in areas as directed by Architect. 2.
Air Infiltration: ASTM E 783 at 1.5 times the rate specified for laboratory testing in "Performance Requirements" Article but not more than 0.09 cfm/sq. ft. (0.45 L/s per sq. m) at a static-air-pressure differential of 1.57 lbf/sq. ft. (75 Pa). a.
3.
Perform a minimum of two tests in areas as directed by Architect.
Water Penetration: ASTM E 1105 at a minimum uniform and cyclic static-air-pressure differential of 0.67 times the static-air-pressure differential specified for laboratory testing in "Performance Requirements" Article, but not less than 6.24 lbf/sq. ft., and shall not evidence water penetration.
GLAZED ALUMINUM CURTAIN WALLS
084413-9
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
GLAZED ALUMINUM CURTAIN WALLS SECTION 084413
D
Glazed aluminum curtain walls will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections.
E.
Prepare test and inspection reports.
END OF SECTION 084413
GLAZED ALUMINUM CURTAIN WALLS
084413-10
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
ALUMINUM WINDOWS SECTION 085113
SECTION 085113 - ALUMINUM WINDOWS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY A.
Section includes aluminum windows for exterior locations.
B.
Related Requirements: 1.
1.3
ACTION SUBMITTALS A.
Product Data: For each type of product. 1.
1.5
Include construction details, material descriptions, glazing and fabrication methods, dimensions of individual components and profiles, hardware, and finishes for aluminum windows.
B.
Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, hardware, accessories, insect screens, operational clearances, and details of installation, including anchor, flashing, and sealant installation.
C.
Samples for Initial Selection: For units with factory-applied color finishes. 1.
1.4
Section 084113 "Aluminum-Framed Entrances and Storefronts" for coordinating finish among aluminum fenestration units.
Include similar Samples of hardware and accessories involving color selection.
INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A.
Product Test Reports: For each type of aluminum window, for tests performed by a qualified testing agency.
B.
Sample Warranties: For manufacturer's warranties.
QUALITY ASSURANCE A.
Manufacturer Qualifications: A manufacturer capable of fabricating aluminum windows that meet or exceed performance requirements indicated and of documenting this performance by test reports, and calculations.
B.
Installer Qualifications: An installer acceptable to aluminum window manufacturer for installation of units required for this Project.
ALUMINUM WINDOWS
085113-1
ROWAN UNIVERSITY 1.6
ALUMINUM WINDOWS SECTION 085113
WARRANTY A.
Manufacturer's Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace aluminum windows that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1.
Failures include, but are not limited to, the following: a. b. c. d.
2.
Failure to meet performance requirements. Structural failures including excessive deflection, water leakage, condensation, and air infiltration. Deterioration of materials and finishes beyond normal weathering. Failure of insulating glass.
Warranty Period: a. b. c.
Window: Five years from date of Substantial Completion. Glazing Units: years from date of Substantial Completion. Aluminum Finish: years from date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1
MANUFACTURERS A.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1.
B.
2.2
Source Limitations: manufacturer.
Obtain aluminum windows from single source from single
WINDOW PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A.
Product Standard: Comply with AAMA/WDMA/CSA 101/I.S.2/A440 for definitions and minimum standards of performance, materials, components, accessories, and fabrication unless more stringent requirements are indicated. 1.
2.3
EFCO Corporation; a Pella company or approved equal.
Window Certification: AMMA certified with label attached to each window.
B.
Performance Class and Grade: AAMA/WDMA/CSA 101/I.S.2/A440 as follows: 1. Minimum Performance Class: LC 2. Minimum Performance Grade:25
C.
Thermal Transmittance: NFRC 100 maximum whole-window U-factor of 0.30 Btu/sq. ft. x h x deg F
ALUMINUM WINDOWS A.
Types: Provide the following operating types in locations indicated on Drawings: 1.
EFCO Fixed., Series-6615, 3-7/8" Depth, or Approved Equal.
ALUMINUM WINDOWS
085113-2
ROWAN UNIVERSITY B.
F r a me s a n d S a s h e s : A l u mi n u m AAMA/WDMA/CSA 101/I.S.2/A440. 1.
C.
Thermally Improved Construction: Fabricate frames, sashes, and muntins with an integral, concealed, low-conductance thermal barrier located between exterior materials and window members exposed on interior side in a manner that eliminates direct metal-to-metal contact.
Insulating-Glass Units: ASTM E 2190 1.
Glass: ASTM C 1036, Type 1, Class 1, q3. a.
2. 3.
Lites: Two. Low-E Coating: Pyrolytic on second surface
Glazing System: Manufacturer's standard factory-glazing system that produces weathertight seal.
E.
Hardware, General: Provide manufacturer's standard hardware fabricated from aluminum, stainless steel, carbon steel complying with AAMA 907, or other corrosion-resistant material compatible with adjacent materials; designed to smoothly operate, tightly close, and securely lock windows, and sized to accommodate sash weight and dimensions.
F.
Exposed Hardware Color and Finish: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.
Fasteners: Noncorrosive and compatible with window members, trim, hardware, anchors, and other components. 1.
2.5
Tint: Gray
D.
1.
2.4
ALUMINUM WINDOWS SECTION 085113 ex t r u si o n s co mp l y i n g wi t h
Exposed Fasteners: Do not use exposed fasteners to the greatest extent possible. For application of hardware, use fasteners that match finish hardware being fastened.
ACCESSORIES A.
Interior Trim: Drawings.
Extruded-aluminum profiles in sizes and configurations indicated on
B.
Receptor System: Two-piece, snap-together, thermally broken, extruded-aluminum receptor system that anchors windows in place.
FABRICATION A.
Fabricate aluminum windows in sizes indicated. Include a complete system for assembling components and anchoring windows.
B.
Glaze aluminum windows in the factory.
C.
Weather strip each operable sash to provide weathertight installation.
ALUMINUM WINDOWS
085113-3
ROWAN UNIVERSITY D.
ALUMINUM WINDOWS SECTION 085113 Weep Holes: Provide weep holes and internal passages to conduct infiltrating water to exterior.
E.
Provide water-shed members above side-hinged sashes and similar lines of natural water penetration.
F.
Mullions: Provide mullions and cover plates, matching window units, complete with anchors for support to structure and installation of window units. Allow for erection tolerances and provide for movement of window units due to thermal expansion and building deflections, as indicated. Provide mullions and cover plates capable of withstanding design wind loads of window units.
G.
Window Assemblies: Provide fixed units in configuration indicated. Provide window frames, sashes, hardware, and other trim and components necessary for a complete, secure, and weathertight installation, including the following: 1. 2. 3.
H.
2.6
2.7
Mullion posts with interior and exterior trim. Interior and exterior extension and trim. Exterior head and sill casings and trim.
Complete fabrication, assembly, finishing, hardware application, and other work in the factory to greatest extent possible. Disassemble components only as necessary for shipment and installation.
GENERAL FINISH REQUIREMENTS A.
Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes.
B.
Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping.
C.
Appearance of Finished Work: Variations in appearance of abutting or adjacent pieces are acceptable if they are within one-half of the range of approved Samples. Noticeable variations in the same piece are not acceptable. Variations in appearance of other components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast.
ALUMINUM FINISHES A.
Finish designations prefixed by AA comply with the system established by the Aluminum Association for designating aluminum finishes.
B.
Class I, Clear Anodic Finish: AA-M12C22A41 (Mechanical Finish: nonspecular as fabricated; Chemical Finish: etched, medium matte; Anodic Coating: Architectural Class I, clear coating 0.018 mm or thicker) complying with AAMA 611.
.PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1
EXAMINATION
ALUMINUM WINDOWS
085113-4
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
3.2
3.3
A.
ALUMINUM WINDOWS SECTION 085113 Examine openings, substrates, structural support, anchorage, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.
B.
Verify rough opening dimensions, levelness of sill plate, and operational clearances.
C.
Examine wall flashings, vapor retarders, water and weather barriers, and other built-in components to ensure weathertight window installation.
D.
Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
INSTALLATION A.
Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing windows, hardware, accessories, and other components. For installation procedures and requirements not addressed in manufacturer's written instructions, comply with installation requirements in ASTM E 2112.
B.
Install windows level, plumb, square, true to line, without distortion or impeding thermal movement, anchored securely in place to structural support, and in proper relation to wall flashing and other adjacent construction to produce weathertight construction.
C.
Install windows and components to drain condensation, water penetrating joints, and moisture migrating within windows to the exterior.
D.
Separate aluminum and other corrodible surfaces from sources of corrosion or electrolytic action at points of contact with other materials.
ADJUSTING, CLEANING, AND PROTECTION A.
Clean exposed surfaces immediately after installing windows. Avoid damaging protective coatings and finishes. Remove excess sealants, glazing materials, dirt, and other substances. 1.
Keep protective films and coverings in place until final cleaning.
B.
Remove and replace glass that has been broken, chipped, cracked, abraded, or damaged during construction period.
C.
Protect window surfaces from contact with contaminating substances resulting from construction operations. If contaminating substances do contact window surfaces, remove contaminants immediately according to manufacturer's written instructions.
END OF SECTION 085113
ALUMINUM WINDOWS
085113-5
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
DOOR HARDWARE SECTION 087100
SECTION 087100 - DOOR HARDWARE PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes the following: 1.
Commercial door hardware for the following: a. b. c. d.
B.
Related Sections include the following: 1. 2. 3.
1.3
Swinging doors. Sliding doors. Folding doors. Other doors to the extent indicated.
Division 8 Section "Steel Doors and Frames" Division 8 Section "Flush Wood Doors" Division 8 Section "Aluminum Entrances and Storefronts"
SUBMITTALS A.
Product Data: Include installation details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes.
B.
Shop Drawings: Details of electrified door hardware, indicating the following: 1.
Wiring Diagrams: Detail wiring for power, signal, and control systems and differentiate between manufacturer-installed and field-installed wiring. Include the following: a. b. c. d.
2. C.
System schematic. Point-to-point wiring diagram. Riser diagram. Elevation of each door.
Detail interface between electrified door hardware and access fire alarm, control, and security building control system.
Samples for Initial Selection: Manufacturer's color charts consisting of units or sections of units showing the full range of colors, textures, and patterns available for each type of door hardware indicated.
DOOR HARDWARE
087100- 1
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
1.
D.
Samples will be returned to Contractor. Units that are acceptable and remain undamaged through submittal, review, and field comparison process may, after final check of operation, be incorporated into the Work, within limitations of keying requirements.
Door Hardware Schedule: Prepared by or under the supervision of supplier, detailing fabrication and assembly of door hardware, as well as procedures and diagrams. Coordinate the final Door Hardware Schedule with doors, frames, and related work to ensure proper size, thickness, hand, function, and finish of door hardware. 1. 2.
Format: Comply with scheduling sequence and vertical format in DHI's "Sequence and Format for the Hardware Schedule." Organization: Organize the Door Hardware Schedule into door hardware sets indicating complete designations of every item required for each door or opening. a.
3.
Organize door hardware sets in same order as in the Door Hardware Schedule at the end of Part 3.
Content: Include the following information: a. b. c. d. e. f. g. h.
Type, style, function, size, label, hand, and finish of each door hardware item. Manufacturer of each item. Fastenings and other pertinent information. Location of each door hardware set, cross-referenced to Drawings, both on floor plans and in door and frame schedule. Explanation of abbreviations, symbols, and codes contained in schedule. Mounting locations for door hardware. Door and frame sizes and materials. Description of each electrified door hardware function, including location, sequence of operation, and interface with other building control systems. 1)
4.
5.
E.
DOOR HARDWARE SECTION 087100
Sequence of Operation: Include description of component functions that occur in the following situations: authorized person wants to enter; authorized person wants to exit; unauthorized person wants to enter; unauthorized person wants to exit.
Submittal Sequence: Submit the final Door Hardware Schedule at earliest possible date, particularly where approval of the Door Hardware Schedule must precede fabrication of other work that is critical in the Project construction schedule. Include Product Data, Samples, Shop Drawings of other work affected by door hardware, and other information essential to the coordinated review of the Door Hardware Schedule. Submittal Sequence: Submit initial draft of final schedule along with essential Product Data to facilitate the fabrication of other work that is critical in the Project construction schedule. Submit the final Door Hardware Schedule after Samples, Product Data, coordination with Shop Drawings of other work, delivery schedules, and similar information has been completed and accepted.
Keying Schedule: Prepared by or under the supervision of supplier, detailing Owner's final keying instructions for locks. Include schematic keying diagram and index each key set to unique door designations.
DOOR HARDWARE
087100- 2
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
F.
Product Certificates: Signed by manufacturers of electrified door hardware certifying that products furnished comply with requirements. 1.
G.
DOOR HARDWARE SECTION 087100
Certify that door hardware approved for use on types and sizes of labeled fire doors complies with listed fire door assemblies.
Qualification Data: For firms and persons specified in "Quality Assurance" Article. 1.
Include lists of completed projects with project names and addresses of architects and owners, and other information specified.
H.
Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by manufacturer and witnessed by a qualified testing agency, indicating current products comply with requirements.
I.
Maintenance Data: For each type of door hardware to include in maintenance manuals specified in Division 1.
J.
Warranties: Special warranties specified in this Section.
1.4
QUALITY ASSURANCE A.
Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who has completed door hardware similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project and whose work has resulted in construction with a record of successful in-service performance.
B.
Supplier Qualifications: Door hardware supplier with warehousing facilities in Project's vicinity and who is or employs a qualified Architectural Hardware Consultant, available during the course of the Work to consult with Contractor, Architect, and Owner about door hardware and keying. 1.
Electrified Door Hardware Supplier Qualifications: An experienced door hardware supplier who has completed projects with electrified door hardware similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project, whose work has resulted in construction with a record of successful in-service performance, and who is acceptable to manufacturer of primary materials. a.
2. C.
Engineering Responsibility: Prepare data for electrified door hardware, including Shop Drawings, based on testing and engineering analysis of manufacturer's standard units in assemblies similar to those indicated for this Project.
Scheduling Responsibility: Preparation of door hardware and keying schedules.
Architectural Hardware Consultant Qualifications: A person who is currently certified by the Door and Hardware Institute as an Architectural Hardware Consultant and who is experienced in providing consulting services for door hardware installations that are comparable in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project. 1.
Electrified Door Hardware Qualifications: Experienced in providing consulting services for electrified door hardware installations.
DOOR HARDWARE
087100- 3
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
D.
Source Limitations: Obtain each type and variety of door hardware from a single manufacturer, unless otherwise indicated. 1.
E.
Provide electrified door hardware from same manufacturer as mechanical door hardware, unless otherwise indicated. Manufacturers that are listed to perform electrical modifications, by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, are acceptable.
Regulatory Requirements: Comply with provisions of the following: 1.
Where indicated to comply with accessibility requirements, comply with Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA), "Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities (ADAAG)," ANSI A117.1, FED-STD-795, "Uniform Federal Accessibility Standards," as follows: a.
b.
Handles, Pulls, Latches, Locks, and other Operating Devices: Shape that is easy to grasp with one hand and does not require tight grasping, tight pinching, or twisting of the wrist. Door Closers: Comply with the following maximum opening-force requirements indicated: 1) 2) 3)
c. 2.
b. c. d. 3.
Thresholds: Not more than 1/2 inch high, Not more than 3/4 inch high for exterior sliding doors. Bevel raised thresholds with a slope of not more than 1:2.
Latches, Locks, and Exit Devices: Not more than 15 lbf to release the latch. Locks shall not require the use of a key, tool, or special knowledge for operation. Delayed-Egress Locks: Lock releases within 15 seconds after applying a force not more than 15 lbf for not more than 3 seconds. Door Closers: Not more than 30 lbf to set door in motion and not more than 15 lbf to open door to minimum required width. Thresholds: Not more than 1/2 inch high.
Electrified Door Hardware: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
Fire-Rated Door Assemblies: Provide door hardware for assemblies complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and labeled by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, for fire ratings indicated, based on testing according to NFPA 252. 1.
G.
Interior Hinged Doors: 5 lbf applied perpendicular to door. Sliding or Folding Doors: 5 lbf applied parallel to door at latch. Fire Doors: Minimum opening force allowable by authorities having jurisdiction.
NFPA 101: Comply with the following for means of egress doors: a.
F.
DOOR HARDWARE SECTION 087100
Test Pressure: Test at atmospheric pressure.
Keying Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Project Meetings." Incorporate keying conference decisions into final
DOOR HARDWARE
087100- 4
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
DOOR HARDWARE SECTION 087100
keying schedule after reviewing door hardware keying system including, but not limited to, the following: 1. 2. 3. 4.
Function of building, flow of traffic, purpose of each area, degree of security required, and plans for future expansion. Preliminary key system schematic diagram. Requirements for key control system. Address for delivery of keys.
H.
Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Project Meetings."
I.
All Electric Door Hardware shall be furnished and installed by the General Contractor. All Electric Door Hardware shall be wired by the Electrical Contractor. Both the Electrical & General Contractor shall meet and coordinate all work before proceeding.
J.
Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Project Meetings." Review methods and procedures related to electrified door hardware including, but not limited to, the following: 1. 2. 3. 4.
1.5
Inspect and discuss electrical roughing-in and other preparatory work performed by other trades. Review sequence of operation for each type of electrified door hardware. Review and finalize construction schedule and verify availability of materials, Installer's personnel, equipment, and facilities needed to make progress and avoid delays. Review required testing, inspecting, and certifying procedures.
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A.
Inventory door hardware on receipt and provide secure lock-up for door hardware delivered to Project site.
B.
Tag each item with Door Number related to the final Approved Door Hardware Schedule, and include basic installation instructions with each item or package.
C.
Deliver keys to manufacturer of key control system, or Owner as Directed.
D.
Deliver keys to Owner by registered mail or overnight package service.
1.6
COORDINATION A.
Coordinate layout and installation of recessed pivots and closers with floor construction. Cast anchoring inserts into concrete. Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified in Division 3 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete."
B.
Templates: Obtain and distribute to the parties involved templates for doors, frames, and other work specified to be factory prepared for installing door hardware. Check Shop Drawings of other work to confirm that adequate provisions are made for locating and installing door hardware to comply with indicated requirements.
DOOR HARDWARE
087100- 5
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
C.
1.7
DOOR HARDWARE SECTION 087100
Electrical System Roughing-in: Coordinate layout and installation of electrified door hardware with connections to power supplies, fire alarm system and detection devices, access control system, security system, and building control system. WARRANTY
A.
General Warranty: Special warranties specified in this Article shall not deprive Owner of other rights Owner may have under other provisions of the Contract Documents and shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other warranties made by Contractor under requirements of the Contract Documents.
B.
Special Warranty: Written warranty, executed by manufacturer agreeing to repair or replace components of door hardware that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. 2. 3.
Structural failures including excessive deflection, cracking, or breakage. Faulty operation of operators and door hardware. Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond normal weathering.
C.
Warranty Period for Locksets: Three, (3) years from date of Substantial Completion, unless otherwise indicated.
D.
Warranty Period for Manual Closers: Ten, (10) years from date of Substantial Completion, unless otherwise indicated.
E.
Warranty Period for Exit Devices: Three, (3) years from date of Substantial Completion, unless otherwise indicated.
1.8
MAINTENANCE SERVICE A.
Maintenance Tools and Instructions: Furnish a complete set of specialized tools and maintenance instructions as needed for Owner's continued adjustment, maintenance, and removal and replacement of door hardware.
B.
Maintenance Service: Beginning at Substantial Completion, provide six months' full maintenance by skilled employees of door hardware Installer. Include quarterly preventive maintenance, repair or replacement of worn or defective components, lubrication, cleaning, and adjusting as required for proper door hardware operation. Provide parts and supplies as used in the manufacture and installation of original products.
C.
Engage a factory authorized service representative to train Owner’s maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain door hardware and door hardware finishes.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1
SCHEDULED DOOR HARDWARE
DOOR HARDWARE
087100- 6
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
A.
General: Provide door hardware for each door to comply with requirements in this Section, door hardware sets indicated in door and frame schedule, and the Door Hardware Schedule at the end of Part 3. 1. 2.
B.
Door Hardware Sets: Provide quantity, item, size, finish or color indicated, and named manufacturer's products. Retain subparagraph below for electrified door hardware. Sequence of Operation: Provide electrified door hardware function, sequence of operation, and interface with other building control systems indicated.
Designations: Requirements for design, grade, function, finish, size, and other distinctive qualities of each type of door hardware are indicated in the Door Hardware Schedule at the end of Part 3. Products are identified by using door hardware designations, as follows: 1.
2.
2.2
DOOR HARDWARE SECTION 087100
Named Manufacturer's Products: Product designation and manufacturer are listed for each door hardware type required for the purpose of establishing minimum requirements. Manufacturers' names are abbreviated in the Door Hardware Schedule. References to BHMA Standards: Provide products complying with these standards and requirements for description, quality, and function.
HINGES A.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1.
Butt Hinges: a. Stanley Commercial Hardware
2.
Continuous Hinges: a. b.
Architectural Builders Hardware Mfg., Inc. Stanley Commercial Hardware
B.
Standards: Comply with the following: 1. Hinges ANSI/BHMA Standard A156.1 Grade 1 2. Continuous Hinges ANSI/BHMA Standard A156.26 Grade 1
C.
Template Requirements: Except for hinges and pivots to be installed entirely (both leaves) into wood doors and frames, provide only template-produced units.
D.
Concealed bearings are made from engineered polymer material with PTFE and Aramid fiber; bearing is maintenance free, no oil, no grease.
E.
Butt hinges equipped with easily seated, non-rising pin. Hole in bottom of pin enables quick pin removal for ease of installation.
F.
Continuous hinge material to be 14 gauge, 304 stainless steel
G.
Continuous hinge steel pin to be .25 diameter, 304 stainless steel
H.
Continuous hinge exterior barrel diameter .438 (7/16)
DOOR HARDWARE
087100- 7
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
DOOR HARDWARE SECTION 087100
I.
Continuous hinge knuckle to be 2”, including split nylon bearing at each separation for a quiet, smooth, self-lubricating operation
J.
All hinges to carry Warnock Hersey Int. or UL for fire rated doors and frames up to 3 hours
K.
Continuous hinges to have Symmetrically templated hole pattern
L.
Continuous hinge to have a 10 year Warranty
M.
Hinge Weight: Unless otherwise indicated, provide the following: 1. Supports weights up to 600lbs.
N.
Hinge Base Metal: Unless otherwise indicated, provide the following: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.
O.
Exterior Continuous Hinges: Stainless steel, with stainless-steel pin, Interior Continuous Hinges: Stainless steel, with stainless-steel pin. Continuous Hinges for Fire-Rated Assemblies: Stainless steel, with stainless-steel pin. Exterior Butt Hinges: Stainless Steel or Brass or Bronze Interior Butt Hinges: Steel or Brass or Bronze
Hinge Options: Comply with the following where indicated in the Door Hardware Schedule or on Drawings: 1. 2. 3.
Hospital Tips: Slope ends of hinge barrel. Maximum Security Pin: Fix pin in hinge barrel after it is inserted. Nonremovable Pins: Provide set screw in hinge barrel that, when tightened into a groove in hinge pin, prevents removal of pin while door is closed; for the following applications: a. b.
Outswinging exterior doors. Outswinging corridor doors with locks.
P.
Continuous-Geared Aluminum Hinges: Minimum 0.120-inch- thick, hinge leaves with minimum overall width of 4 inches; fabricated to full height of door and frame. Finish components after milling and drilling are complete. Fabricate hinges to template screw locations.
Q.
All geared hinges to be heavy-gauge aluminum alloy with solid support blocks of selflubricating DELRIN.
R.
All geared hinges to meet Dynamic and static load test for compliance with ANSI A156.1, (BHMA) for 350,000 cycles at 15 cycles per minute.
S.
Fasteners: Comply with the following: 1. 2. 3. 4.
Machine Screws: For metal doors and frames. Install into drilled and tapped holes. Wood Screws: For wood doors and frames. Threaded-to-the-Head Wood Screws: For fire-rated wood doors. Screws: Phillips flat-head screws; machine screws drilled and tapped holes for metal doors, wood screws for wood doors and frames. Finish screw heads to match surface of hinges.
DOOR HARDWARE
087100- 8
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
2.3
DOOR HARDWARE SECTION 087100
LOCKS AND LATCHES A.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1.
B.
Mechanical Locks and Latches: a. Best Lock Corporation, Rowan University Standard, No Substitution
Standards: Comply with the following: 1. 2. 3.
Bored Locks and Latches: BHMA A156.2. Mortise Locks and Latches: BHMA A156.13. Electromagnetic Locks: BHMA A156.23.
C.
Bored Locks: ANSI A156.2, BHMA Series 4000, Grade 1, and is UL Listed.
D.
Mortise Locks: Stamped steel case with steel or brass parts; ANSI A156.13, Series 1000, BHMA Grade 1 Operational and Grade 2 Security and be UL Listed.
E.
Certified Products: Provide door hardware listed in the following BHMA directories: 1. 2.
F.
Lock Trim: Comply with the following: 1.
Lever: Mortise Locks & Latches, Forged or Cast brass, bronze or stainless steel construction
2.
Lever: Cylindrical Locks & Latches, Zinc material with a minimum wall thickness of .060 Dummy Trim: Match lever lock trim and escutcheons.
3. G.
Lock Functions: Function numbers and descriptions indicated in the Door Hardware Schedule comply with the following: 1. 2.
H.
Bored Locks: BHMA A156.2. Mortise Locks: BHMA A156.13.
Lock Throw: Comply with testing requirements for length of bolts to comply with labeled fire door requirements, and as follows: 1. 2. 3.
I.
Mechanical Locks and Latches: BHMA's "Directory of Certified Locks & Latches." Electromagnetic Locks: BHMA's "Directory of Certified Electromagnetic & Delayed Egress Locks."
Bored Locks: Minimum 9/16-inch latch bolt throw. Mortise Locks: Minimum 3/4-inch latch bolt throw. Deadbolts: Minimum 1-inch bolt throw.
Backset: 2-3/4 inches, unless otherwise indicated.
DOOR HARDWARE
087100- 9
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
DOOR HARDWARE SECTION 087100
J.
Mortise Locks & Latches shall have an anti-friction, 3/4-inch throw latch bolt with anti-friction piece made of self-lubricated stainless steel. Latch bolt with plastic insert and three-piece latch bolt are unacceptable on this project.
K.
Mortise Locks & Latches shall have levers to be operated with a roller bearing spindle hub mechanism.
L.
Cylindrical Locks & Latches to have solid shank with no opening for access to keyed lever keeper.
2.4
DOOR BOLTS A.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1.
B.
Flush Bolts: a. Burns Manufacturing Company, Inc. b. Triangle Brass Manufacturing Company, Inc.
Standards: Comply with the following: 1. 2.
Automatic and Self-Latching Flush Bolts: BHMA A156.3. Manual Flush Bolts: BHMA A156.16.
C.
Flush Bolts: BHMA Grade 1, designed for mortising into door edge.
D.
Bolt Throw: Comply with testing requirements for length of bolts to comply with labeled fire door requirements, and as follows: 1.
2.5
Mortise Flush Bolts: Minimum 3/4-inch throw.
EXIT DEVICES A.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Precision Hardware, Inc., Rowan University Standard, No Substitution
B.
Standard: BHMA A156.3. 1.
BHMA Grade: Grade 1
C.
Certified Products: Devices."
D.
Panic Exit Devices: Listed and labeled by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, for panic protection, based on testing according to UL 305.
DOOR HARDWARE
Provide exit devices listed in BHMA's "Directory of Certified Exit
087100- 10
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
DOOR HARDWARE SECTION 087100
E.
Fire Exit Devices: Complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and labeled by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, for fire and panic protection, based on testing according to UL 305 and NFPA 252.
F.
Warranty: Exit device to have published Five (5) Year Warranty.
G.
Exit device shall be “touch pad” type with a touch pad that shall extend a minimum of one half (1/2) of the door width.
H.
Exit device shall have a one-quarter (1/4) gap between the face of the door and the touch bar channel eliminating the need for shims or cutting away the glass molding.
I.
Exit device lock stile chassis shall be investment cast steel. Stamped steel units will not be accepted. All device latch bolts shall be stainless steel and shall be deadlocking type.
J.
Exit device strikes shall be adjustable type investment cast stainless steel.
K.
Exit device shall include sound reduction dampening for both depression and extension of the touch pad.
L.
Exit device end cap shall be all metal and secured with a bracket that interlocks both at the touch bar channel base and hinge side filler to prevent end cap “peel-back”.
M.
All exposed surfaces of the exit device housing shall be no less than 14 gauge brass or bronze; or no less than 16 gauge stainless steel. Aluminum housing type exit devices are not acceptable.
N.
Dummy Push Bar: Nonfunctioning push bar matching functional push bar. 1.
O.
Outside Trim: Lever, Lever with cylinder, Pull, Pull with cylinder, material and finish to match locksets, unless otherwise indicated. 1.
2.6
Operation: Rigid
Match design for locksets and latchsets, unless otherwise indicated.
CYLINDERS AND KEYING A.
The local Best Access System service center shall furnish new master keys and cores directly to owner. All costs for cores, keys and master keying for this project are part of this bid package. All costs to install cores after construction if required are part of this bid package with hardware supplier installing cores on site. All costs for on site owner training (minimum 8-hours) if required by owner is included in this bid package.
B.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Cylinders: a. Best Lock Corporation, Rowan University Standard, No Substitution b. All cylinders shall be Best Patented Cormax, 7-pin interchangeable cores.
C.
Standards: Comply with the following:
DOOR HARDWARE
087100- 11
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
1. D.
DOOR HARDWARE SECTION 087100
Cylinders: BHMA A156.5.
Cylinder Grade: BHMA Grade 1, Cylinders: Manufacturer's standard tumbler type, constructed from brass or bronze, stainless steel, or nickel silver, and complying with the following: 1. 2. 3. 4.
Number of Pins: Seven. Mortise Type: Threaded cylinders with rings and straight- or clover-type cam. Rim Type: Cylinders with back plate, flat-type vertical or horizontal tailpiece, and raised trim ring. Bored-Lock Type: Cylinders with tailpieces to suit locks.
E.
Permanent Cores: Manufacturer's standard; finish face to match lockset; complying with the following: 1. Removable Cores: Core insert, removable by use of a special key, and for use with only the core manufacturer's locksets.
F.
Construction Keying: Comply with the following: 1.
Construction Cores: Provide Brass construction cores in all locksets and cylinders that are replaceable by permanent cores. a.
G.
Keying System: Unless otherwise indicated, provide a factory-registered keying system complying with the following requirements: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.
H.
Replace Brass construction cores with permanent cores, as indicated in keying schedule
No Master Key System: Cylinders are operated by change keys only. Master Key System: Cylinders are operated by a change key and a master key. Grand Master Key System: Cylinders are operated by a change key, a master key, and a grand master key. Great-Grand Master Key System: Cylinders are operated by a change key, a master key, a grand master key, and a great-grand master key. Existing System: Master key or grand master key locks to Owner's existing system. Keyed Alike: Key all cylinders to the same change key.
Keys: Provide nickel-silver keys complying with the following: 1.
Stamping: Permanently inscribe each key with a visual key control number and include the following notation: a.
2.
Notation: "DO NOT DUPLICATE."
Quantity: In addition to one extra blank key for each lock, provide the following: a. b. c. d.
DOOR HARDWARE
Cylinder Change Keys: Three. Master Keys: Five. Grand Master Keys: Five. Great-Grand Master Keys: Five.
087100- 12
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
e. f. g. 2.7
DOOR HARDWARE SECTION 087100
Control Keys: Five Construction Master Keys: Ten Construction Core Control Keys: Five
STRIKES A.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1.
Electric Strikes: a. b.
B.
Standards: Comply with the following: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.
C.
Security Door Controls Inc. Folger Adam Security Inc.
Strikes for Bored Locks and Latches: BHMA A156.2. Strikes for Mortise Locks and Latches: BHMA A156.13. Strikes for Interconnected Locks and Latches: BHMA A156.12. Strikes for Auxiliary Deadlocks: BHMA A156.5. Dustproof Strikes: BHMA A156.16. Electric Strikes: BHMA A156.5.
Strikes: Provide manufacturer's standard strike with strike box for each latch or lock bolt, with curved lip extended to protect frame, finished to match door hardware set, unless otherwise indicated, and as follows: 1. 2. 3.
Flat-Lip Strikes: For locks with three-piece antifriction latch bolts, as recommended by manufacturer. Extra-Long-Lip Strikes: For locks used on frames with applied wood casing trim. Aluminum-Frame Strike Box: Provide manufacturer's special strike box fabricated for aluminum framing.
D.
Dustproof Strikes: BHMA Grade 1
E.
Electric Strikes: BHMA Grade 1
2.8
OPERATING TRIM A.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. 2.
Burns Manufacturing Company, Inc. Stanley Commercial Hardware
B.
Standard: Comply with BHMA A156.6.
C.
Materials: Fabricate from aluminum, brass, bronze, stainless steel, unless otherwise indicated.
DOOR HARDWARE
087100- 13
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
2.9
DOOR HARDWARE SECTION 087100
ACCESSORIES FOR PAIRS OF DOORS A.
B.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1.
Coordinators: a. Burns Manufacturing Company, Inc. b. Triangle Brass Manufacturing Company, Inc.
2.
Removable Mullions: a. Precision Hardware, Inc., Rowan University Standard, No Substitution
3.
Astragals: a. Stanley Commercial Hardware b. Architectural Builders Hardware, Inc.
Standards: Comply with the following: 1. 2.
C.
2.10 A.
Fire-Exit Removable Mullions: Provide removable mullions for use with fire exit devices complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and labeled by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, for fire and panic protection, based on testing according to UL 305 and NFPA 252. Mullions shall be used only with exit devices for which they have been tested. CLOSERS Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1.
B.
Coordinators: BHMA A156.3. Removable Mullions: BHMA A156.3.
Surface-Mounted Closers: a. Stanley Commercial Hardware, Rowan University Standard, No Substitution
Standards: Comply with the following: 1.
Closers: BHMA A156.4.
C.
Surface Closers: BHMA Grade 1
D.
Certified Products: Closers."
E.
Size of Units: Unless otherwise indicated, comply with manufacturer's written recommendations for size of door closers depending on size of door, exposure to weather, and anticipated frequency of use. Provide factory-sized closers, adjustable to meet field conditions and requirements for opening force.
DOOR HARDWARE
Provide door closers listed in BHMA's "Directory of Certified Door
087100- 14
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
2.11 A.
DOOR HARDWARE SECTION 087100
PROTECTIVE TRIM UNITS Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1.
Metal Protective Trim Units: a. Burns Manufacturing Company, Inc. b. Triangle Brass Manufacturing Company, Inc.
B.
Standard: Comply with BHMA A156.6.
C.
Materials: Fabricate protection plates from the following: 1. Stainless Steel: 0.050 inch thick; beveled 4 sides.
D.
Fasteners: Provide manufacturer's standard exposed fasteners for door trim units consisting of either machine or self-tapping screws.
E.
Furnish protection plates sized 2” less than door width on push side and 1” less than door width on pull side, by height specified in Door Hardware Schedule.
2.12 A.
STOPS AND HOLDERS Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. 2.
B.
Architectural Builders Hardware Mfg., Inc. Triangle Brass Manufacturing Company, Inc.
Standards: Comply with the following: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.
Stops and Bumpers: BHMA A156.16. Mechanical Door Holders: BHMA A156.16. Electromagnetic Door Holders: BHMA A156.15. Combination Overhead Holders and Stops: BHMA A156.8. Door Silencers: BHMA A156.16.
C.
Stops and Bumpers: BHMA Grade 1
D.
Mechanical Door Holders: BHMA Grade 1
E.
Combination Overhead Stops and Holders: BHMA Grade 1
F.
Electromagnetic Door Holders for Labeled Fire Door Assemblies: detectors and interface with fire alarm system.
G.
Silencers for Metal Door Frames: BHMA Grade 1; neoprene or rubber, minimum diameter 1/2 inch ; fabricated for drilled-in application to frame.
2.13
Coordinate with fire
DOOR GASKETING
DOOR HARDWARE
087100- 15
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
A.
DOOR HARDWARE SECTION 087100
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1.
Door Gasketing: a. Reese Manufacturing Co., Inc. b. National Guard Products, Inc.
2.
Door Bottoms: a. Reese Manufacturing Co., Inc. b. National Guard Products
B.
Standard: Comply with BHMA A156.22.
C.
General: Provide continuous weather-strip gasketing on exterior doors and provide smoke, light, or sound gasketing on interior doors where indicated or scheduled. Provide noncorrosive fasteners for exterior applications and elsewhere as indicated. 1. 2. 3.
Perimeter Gasketing: Apply to head and jamb, forming seal between door and frame. Meeting Stile Gasketing: Fasten to meeting stiles, forming seal when doors are closed. Door Bottoms: Apply to bottom of door, forming seal with threshold when door is closed.
D.
Air Leakage: Not to exceed 0.50 cfm per foot of crack length for gaseting other than for smoke control, as tested according to ASTM E 283.
E.
Smoke-Labeled Gasketing: Assemblies complying with NFPA 105 that are listed and labeled by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, for smokecontrol ratings indicated, based on testing according to UL 1784. 1.
Provide smoke-labeled gasketing on 20-minute-rated doors and on smoke-labeled doors.
F.
Fire-Labeled Gasketing: Assemblies complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and labeled by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, for fire ratings indicated, based on testing according to UL 10B or NFPA 252.
G.
Sound-Rated Gasketing: Assemblies that are listed and labeled by a testing and inspecting agency, for sound ratings indicated, based on testing according to ASTM E 1408.
H.
Replaceable Seal Strips: Provide only those units where resilient or flexible seal strips are easily replaceable and readily available from stocks maintained by manufacturer.
I.
Gasketing Materials: Comply with ASTM D 2000 and AAMA 701/702.
2.14 A.
THRESHOLDS Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Reese Manufacturing Co., Inc. 2. National Guard Products, Inc.
DOOR HARDWARE
087100- 16
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
B. 2.15 A.
DOOR HARDWARE SECTION 087100
Standard: Comply with BHMA A156.21. FABRICATION Manufacturer's Nameplate: Do not provide manufacturers' products that have manufacturer's name or trade name displayed in a visible location (omit removable nameplates) except in conjunction with required fire-rated labels and as otherwise approved by Architect. 1.
Manufacturer's identification will be permitted on rim of lock cylinders only.
B.
Base Metals: Produce door hardware units of base metal, fabricated by forming method indicated, using manufacturer's standard metal alloy, composition, temper, and hardness. Furnish metals of a quality equal to or greater than that of specified door hardware units and BHMA A156.18 for finishes. Do not furnish manufacturer's standard materials or forming methods if different from specified standard.
C.
Fasteners: Provide door hardware manufactured to comply with published templates generally prepared for machine, wood, and sheet metal screws. Provide screws according to commercially recognized industry standards for application intended. Provide Phillips flat-head screws with finished heads to match surface of door hardware, unless otherwise indicated. 1.
2.
Concealed Fasteners: For door hardware units that are exposed when door is closed, except for units already specified with concealed fasteners. Do not use through bolts for installation where bolt head or nut on opposite face is exposed unless it is the only means of securely attaching the door hardware. Where through bolts are used on hollow door and frame construction, provide sleeves for each through bolt. Steel Machine or Wood Screws: For the following fire-rated applications: a. b. c.
3.
Steel Through Bolts: For the following fire-rated applications, unless door blocking is provided: a. b. c.
4. 5.
2.16
Mortise hinges to doors. Strike plates to frames. Closers to doors and frames.
Surface hinges to doors. Closers to doors and frames. Surface-mounted exit devices.
Spacers or Sex Bolts: For through bolting of hollow metal doors. Fasteners for Wood Doors: Comply with requirements of DHI WDHS.2, "Recommended Fasteners for Wood Doors."
FINISHES
A.
Standard: Comply with BHMA A156.18.
B.
Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping.
DOOR HARDWARE
087100- 17
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
DOOR HARDWARE SECTION 087100
C.
Appearance of Finished Work: Variations in appearance of abutting or adjacent pieces are acceptable if they are within one-half of the range of approved Samples. Noticeable variations in the same piece are not acceptable. Variations in appearance of other components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast.
D.
BHMA Designations: Comply with base material and finish requirements indicated by the following: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.
BHMA 600: BHMA 626: BHMA 628: BHMA 630: BHMA 652: BHMA 689:
Primed for painting, over steel base metal. Satin chromium plated over nickel, over brass or bronze base metal. Satin aluminum, clear anodized, over aluminum base metal. Satin stainless steel, over stainless steel base metal. Satin chromium plated over nickel, over steel base metal. Aluminum painted, over any base metal.
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1
EXAMINATION A.
Examine doors and frames, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances, labeled fire door assembly construction, wall and floor construction, and other conditions affecting performance.
B.
Examine roughing-in for electrical power systems to verify actual locations of wiring connections before electrified door hardware installation.
C.
Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2
PREPARATION A.
Steel Doors and Frames: Comply with DHI A115 series. 1.
B. 3.3
Surface-Applied Door Hardware: Drill and tap doors and frames according to SDI 107.
Wood Doors: Comply with DHI A115-W series. INSTALLATION
A.
Mounting Heights: Mount door hardware units at heights indicated in following applicable publications, unless specifically indicated or required to comply with governing regulations: 1. 2.
Standard Steel Doors and Frames: DHI's "Recommended Locations for Architectural Hardware for Standard Steel Doors and Frames." Custom Steel Doors and Frames: DHI's "Recommended Locations for Builders' Hardware for Custom Steel Doors and Frames."
DOOR HARDWARE
087100- 18
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
3. B.
DOOR HARDWARE SECTION 087100
Wood Doors: DHI WDHS.3, "Recommended Locations for Architectural Hardware for Wood Flush Doors."
Install each door hardware item to comply with manufacturer's written instructions. Where cutting and fitting are required to install door hardware onto or into surfaces that are later to be painted or finished in another way, coordinate removal, storage, and reinstallation of surface protective trim units with finishing work specified in Division 9 Sections. Do not install surface-mounted items until finishes have been completed on substrates involved. 1. 2.
Set units level, plumb, and true to line and location. Adjust and reinforce attachment substrates as necessary for proper installation and operation. Drill and countersink units that are not factory prepared for anchorage fasteners. Space fasteners and anchors according to industry standards.
C.
Key Control System: Place keys on markers and hooks in key control system cabinet, as determined by final keying schedule. Supply key cabinet with 25% expansion. Factory install keys in cabinet or in field with owner’s representative. Key cabinet to be supplied with a “Complete System” equal to the Telkee System.
D.
Boxed Power Supplies: Locate power supplies as indicated or, if not indicated, above accessible ceilings, in equipment room. Verify location with Architect. 1. 2.
E.
3.4
Configuration: Provide one power supply for each door opening. Configuration: Provide the least number of power supplies required to adequately serve doors with electrified door hardware.
Thresholds: Set thresholds for exterior and acoustical doors in full bed of sealant complying with requirements specified in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants." FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Independent Architectural Hardware Consultant: Owner or Architect will engage a qualified independent Architectural Hardware Consultant to perform inspections and to prepare inspection reports. 1.
3.5
Independent Architectural Hardware Consultant will inspect door hardware and state in each report whether installed work complies with or deviates from requirements, including whether door hardware is properly installed and adjusted.
ADJUSTING A.
Initial Adjustment: Adjust and check each operating item of door hardware and each door to ensure proper operation or function of every unit. Replace units that cannot be adjusted to operate as intended. Adjust door control devices to compensate for final operation of heating and ventilating equipment and to comply with referenced accessibility requirements. 1.
Spring Hinges: Adjust to achieve positive latching when door is allowed to close freely from an open position of 30 degrees.
DOOR HARDWARE
087100- 19
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
2. 3.
B.
Electric Strikes: Adjust horizontal and vertical alignment of keeper to properly engage lock bolt. Door Closers: Adjust sweep period so that, from an open position of 70 degrees, the door will take at least 3 seconds to move to a point 3 inches from the latch, measured to the leading edge of the door.
Six-Month Adjustment: Approximately six months after date of Substantial Completion, Installer shall perform the following: 1. 2. 3.
3.6
DOOR HARDWARE SECTION 087100
Examine and readjust each item of door hardware as necessary to ensure function of doors, door hardware, and electrified door hardware. Consult with and instruct Owner's personnel on recommended maintenance procedures. Replace door hardware items that have deteriorated or failed due to faulty design, materials, or installation of door hardware units.
CLEANING AND PROTECTION A.
Clean adjacent surfaces soiled by door hardware installation.
B.
Clean operating items as necessary to restore proper function and finish.
C.
Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure door hardware is without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.
3.7
DEMONSTRATION A.
3.8
Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain door hardware and door hardware finishes. DOOR HARDWARE SCHEDULE
Hardware Set #: 0001 - PRS DRS ALUM DRS & ALUM FR EXTERIOR - 101 Qty 2 2 2 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 2 1 2 1
Description FinishMfg CONTINUOUS HINGE A110HDC x FULL HEIGHT 628 ABH MORTISE CYLINDER [IC] 1E74 x C4 x RP3 x ABC x CORMAX 626 BEST RIM CYLINDER [IC] 1E72 x RP x ABC x CORMAX 626 BEST RIM EXIT DEVICE 2101CD x EXIT ONLY 630 PRECISION RIM EXIT DEVICE 2103CD x CA-03 x S301 630 PRECISION REMOVABLE MULLION KR822 x ST989 x MCS822 689 PRECISION DOOR PULL M36D x 12" CTC x TYPE-1HD TB 630 BURNS DOOR CLOSER D-4550 x HCS x SRI 689 STANLEY SPACER BLOCK P45HD-110 (HD ARMS) 689 STANLEY MOUNTING PLATE P45-180D (PA MOUNT) 689 STANLEY ANGLE BRACKET SHOE P45HD-112 689 STANLEY THRESHOLD S514A x SRS x FHSL x FULL WIDTH 628 REESE DOOR BOTTOM SWEEP (CONCEALED) BY ALUMINUM DOOR SUPPLER JAMB SEALS BY ALUMINUM FRAME SUPPLER
DOOR HARDWARE
087100- 20
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
DOOR HARDWARE SECTION 087100
Hardware Set #: 0002 - PRS DRS ALUM DRS & ALUM FR EXTERIOR - 102 Qty 2 2 1 2 1 2 2 2 2 2 1 2 1
Description Finish Mfg CONTINUOUS HINGE A110HDC x FULL HEIGHT 628 ABH MORTISE CYLINDER [IC] 1E74 x C4 x RP3 x ABC x CORMAX 626 BEST RIM CYLINDER [IC] 1E72 x RP x ABC x CORMAX 626 BEST RIM EXIT DEVICE 2101CD x EXIT ONLY 630 PRECISION REMOVABLE MULLION KR822 x ST989 x MCS822 689 PRECISION DOOR PULL M36D x 12" CTC x TYPE-1HD TB 630 BURNS DOOR CLOSER D-4550 x HCS x SRI 689 STANLEY SPACER BLOCK P45HD-110 (HD ARMS) 689 STANLEY MOUNTING PLATE P45-180D (PA MOUNT) 689 STANLEY ANGLE BRACKET SHOE P45HD-112 689 STANLEY THRESHOLD S514A x SRS x FHSL x FULL WIDTH 628 REESE DOOR BOTTOM SWEEP (CONCEALED) BY ALUMINUM DOOR SUPPLER JAMB SEALS BY ALUMINUM FRAME SUPPLER
Hardware Set #: 0003 - SGL DRS ALUM DRS & ALUM FR EXTERIOR - 123 Qty 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Description Finish Mfg CONTINUOUS HINGE A110HDC x FULL HEIGHT 628 ABH MORTISE CYLINDER [IC] 1E74 x C4 x RP3 x ABC x CORMAX 626 BEST RIM CYLINDER [IC] 1E72 x RP x ABC x CORMAX 626 BEST RIM EXIT DEVICE 2103CD x CA-03 x S301 630 PRECISION DOOR PULL M36D x 12" CTC x TYPE-1HD TB 630 BURNS DOOR CLOSER D-4550 x CS x SRI 689 STANLEY SPACER BLOCK P45HD-110 (HD ARMS) 689 STANLEY MOUNTING PLATE P45-180D (PA MOUNT) 689 STANLEY ANGLE BRACKET SHOE P45HD-112 689 STANLEY RAIN DRIP R201A x FULL WIDTH + 4" 628 REESE THRESHOLD S514A x SRS x FHSL x FULL WIDTH 628 REESE DOOR BOTTOM SWEEP (CONCEALED) BY ALUMINUM DOOR SUPPLER JAMB SEALS BY ALUMINUM FRAME SUPPLER
Hardware Set #: 0004 - PRS DRS HMD & EXISTING FR EXTERIOR - 155 Qty 6 6 2 2 1 1 1 2 2 1
Description Finish Mfg NEW HINGES TO MATCH EXISTING FRAME HINGE CUTOUTS (VIF) STANLEY HINGE CB191 4.5 x 4.5 x NRP 630 STANLEY MORTISE CYLINDER [IC] 1E74 x C4 x RP3 x ABC x CORMAX 626 BEST RIM CYLINDER [IC] 1E72 x RP x ABC x CORMAX 626 BEST RIM EXIT DEVICE 2101CD x EXIT ONLY 630 PRECISION RIM EXIT DEVICE 2103CD x 4903D x S301 630 PRECISION REMOVABLE MULLION KR822 x ST989 x MCS822 689 PRECISION DOOR CLOSER D-4550 x HCS x SRI 689 STANLEY KICK PLATE 16" x 1" LDW .050 B4E x CSK 630 BURNS TEAR DROP SEAL 797B x HEAD & JAMBS BLK REESE
DOOR HARDWARE
087100- 21
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
2 1 1 2
TEAR DROP SEAL 797B x MULLION x FULL HEIGHT RAIN DRIP R201A x FULL WIDTH + 4" THRESHOLD S514A x SRS x FHSL x FULL WIDTH DOOR SWEEP 772A x FULL WIDTH
DOOR HARDWARE SECTION 087100 BLK REESE 628 REESE 628 REESE 628 REESE
Hardware Set #: 0005 - SGL DRS ALUM DRS & ALUM FR EXTERIOR - 132 Qty 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Description Finish Mfg CONTINUOUS HINGE A110HDC x FULL HEIGHT 628 ABH MORTISE CYLINDER [IC] 1E74 x C4 x RP3 x ABC x CORMAX 626 BEST RIM CYLINDER [IC] 1E72 x RP x ABC x CORMAX 626 BEST RIM EXIT DEVICE 2103CD x 4903D x S301 630 PRECISION DOOR CLOSER D-4550 x CS x SRI 689 STANLEY SPACER BLOCK P45HD-110 (HD ARMS) 689 STANLEY MOUNTING PLATE P45-180D (PA MOUNT) 689 STANLEY ANGLE BRACKET SHOE P45HD-112 689 STANLEY RAIN DRIP R201A x FULL WIDTH + 4" 628 REESE THRESHOLD S514A x SRS x FHSL x FULL WIDTH 628 REESE DOOR BOTTOM SWEEP (CONCEALED) BY ALUMINUM DOOR SUPPLER JAMB SEALS BY ALUMINUM FRAME SUPPLER
Hardware Set #: 0006 - SGL DRS ALUM DRS & ALUM FR EXTERIOR - 173 Qty 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Description Finish Mfg CONTINUOUS HINGE A110HDC x FULL HEIGHT 628 ABH MORTISE CYLINDER [IC] 1E74 x C4 x RP3 x ABC x CORMAX 626 BEST RIM CYLINDER [IC] 1E72 x RP x ABC x CORMAX 626 BEST RIM EXIT DEVICE 2403CD x NCA-03 630 PRECISION DOOR PULL M36D x 12" CTC x TYPE-1HD TB 630 BURNS DOOR CLOSER D-4550 x HCS x SRI 689 STANLEY SPACER BLOCK P45HD-110 (HD ARMS) 689 STANLEY MOUNTING PLATE P45-180D (PA MOUNT) 689 STANLEY ANGLE BRACKET SHOE P45HD-112 689 STANLEY RAIN DRIP R201A x FULL WIDTH + 4" 628 REESE THRESHOLD S483APR x SRS x FHSL x FULL WIDTH 628 REESE DOOR BOTTOM SWEEP (CONCEALED) BY ALUMINUM DOOR SUPPLER JAMB SEALS BY ALUMINUM FRAME SUPPLER
Hardware Set #: 0007 - SGL DRS HMD & HMF EXTERIOR - G04 Qty 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Description CONTINUOUS HINGE A110HDC x FULL HEIGHT MORTISE CYLINDER [IC] 1E74 x C4 x RP3 x ABC x CORMAX RIM CYLINDER [IC] 1E72 x RP x ABC x CORMAX RIM EXIT DEVICE 2103CD x 4903D x S301 DOOR CLOSER D-4550 x HCS x SRI KICK PLATE 16" x 2" LDW .050 B4E x CSK TEAR DROP SEAL 797B x HEAD & JAMBS
DOOR HARDWARE
Finish Mfg 628 ABH 626 BEST 626 BEST 630 PRECISION 689 STANLEY 630 BURNS BLK REESE
087100- 22
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
1 1 1
DOOR HARDWARE SECTION 087100
RAIN DRIP R201A x FULL WIDTH + 4" THRESHOLD S514A x SRS x FHSL x FULL WIDTH DOOR SWEEP 772A x FULL WIDTH
628 REESE 628 REESE 628 REESE
Hardware Set #: 0008 - SGL DRS WD & HMF - 121, 122, 124, 125, 127, 128, 129, 130, 131, 136, 137, 141, 142, 166, 167, 168, 169, Qty 1 1 1 1 1 3
Description CONTINUOUS HINGE A110HDC x FULL HEIGHT ENTRANCE LOCKSET 93K7-AB-15D-S3 x ABC x CORMAX KICK PLATE 10" x 2" LDW .050 B4E x CSK MOP PLATE 6" x 1" LDW .050 B4E x CSK WALL STOP 575 SILENCERS 500
Hardware Set #: 0009 - SGL DRS WD & HMF – 119, Qty 1 1 1 1 1 3
126,
Finish Mfg 628 ABH 626 BEST 630 BURNS 630 BURNS 630 BURNS GRAY BURNS
G02,
Description CONTINUOUS HINGE A110HDC x FULL HEIGHT CLASSROOM LOCKSET 93K7-R-15D-S3 x ABC x CORMAX KICK PLATE 10" x 2" LDW .050 B4E x CSK MOP PLATE 6" x 1" LDW .050 B4E x CSK WALL STOP 575 SILENCERS 500
Finish Mfg 628 ABH 626 BEST 630 BURNS 630 BURNS 630 BURNS GRAY BURNS
Hardware Set #: 0010 - SGL DRS WD & HMF - 143 Qty 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 3
Description CONTINUOUS HINGE A110HDC x FULL HEIGHT CLASSROOM LOCKSET 93K7-R-15D-S3 x ABC x CORMAX DOOR TO SWING 180' DOOR CLOSER D-4551 x REG x H KICK PLATE 10" x 2" LDW .050 B4E x CSK MOP PLATE 6" x 1" LDW .050 B4E x CSK WALL STOP 575 SILENCERS 500
Finish Mfg 628 ABH 626 BEST STANLEY 689 STANLEY 630 BURNS 630 BURNS 630 BURNS GRAY BURNS
Hardware Set #: 0011 - SGL DRS WD & HMF - 120 Qty 1 1 1 1 1 1 3
Description CONTINUOUS HINGE A110HDC x FULL HEIGHT CLASSROOM LOCKSET 93K7-R-15D-S3 x ABC x CORMAX DOOR CLOSER D-4550 x H-EDA KICK PLATE 10" x 2" LDW .050 B4E x CSK MOP PLATE 6" x 1" LDW .050 B4E x CSK WALL STOP 575 SILENCERS 500
DOOR HARDWARE
Finish Mfg 628 ABH 626 BEST 689 STANLEY 630 BURNS 630 BURNS 630 BURNS GRAY BURNS
087100- 23
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
Hardware Set #: 0012 - SGL DRS WD & HMF – 117, Qty 1 1 1 1 1 1 3
145,
158
149,
Finish Mfg 628 ABH 630 BEST 689 STANLEY 630 BURNS 630 BURNS 630 BURNS GRAY BURNS 150,
151,
Description CONTINUOUS HINGE A110HDC x FULL HEIGHT PASSAGE LATCHSET 93K0-N-15D-S3 KICK PLATE 10" x 2" LDW .050 B4E x CSK MOP PLATE 6" x 1" LDW .050 B4E x CSK WALL STOP 575 SILENCERS 500
Hardware Set #: 0014 - SGL DRS WD & HMF – 135, Qty 1 1 1 1 1 3
118,
Description CONTINUOUS HINGE A110HDC x FULL HEIGHT PRIVACY LOCKSET 45H0-L-15H x VIN DOOR CLOSER D-4551 x REG KICK PLATE 10" x 2" LDW .050 B4E x CSK MOP PLATE 6" x 1" LDW .050 B4E x CSK WALL STOP 575 SILENCERS 500
Hardware Set #: 0013 - SGL DRS WD & HMF – 148, 160, 161, 162, 164, 165 Qty 1 1 1 1 1 3
DOOR HARDWARE SECTION 087100
139,
152,
153,
156,
159,
Finish Mfg 628 ABH 626 BEST 630 BURNS 630 BURNS 630 BURNS GRAY BURNS
146,
147
Description CONTINUOUS HINGE A110HDC x FULL HEIGHT STOREROOM LOCKSET 93K7-D-15D-S3 x ABC x CORMAX KICK PLATE 10" x 2" LDW .050 B4E x CSK MOP PLATE 6" x 1" LDW .050 B4E x CSK WALL STOP 575 SILENCERS 500
Finish Mfg 628 ABH 626 BEST 630 BURNS 630 BURNS 630 BURNS GRAY BURNS
Hardware Set #: 0015 - SGL DRS WD & HMF - 140 Qty 1 1 1 1 1 1 3
Description CONTINUOUS HINGE A110HDC x FULL HEIGHT STOREROOM LOCKSET 93K7-D-15D-S3 x ABC x CORMAX DOOR TO SWING 180' KICK PLATE 10" x 2" LDW .050 B4E x CSK MOP PLATE 6" x 1" LDW .050 B4E x CSK WALL STOP 575 SILENCERS 500
Finish Mfg 628 ABH 626 BEST 630 BURNS 630 BURNS 630 BURNS GRAY BURNS
Hardware Set #: 0016 - SGL DRS ALUM DRS & ALUM FR - 105
DOOR HARDWARE
087100- 24
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
Qty 1 1 2 1 1 1 1 1
Description CONTINUOUS HINGE A110HDC x FULL HEIGHT DEADLOCK / PADDLE MS1890-4590-4505-01 MORTISE CYLINDER [IC] 1E74 x C181 x RP3 x ABC x CORMAX DOOR PULL M36D x 12" CTC x TYPE-1HD TB DOOR CLOSER D-4550 x HCS SPACER BLOCK P45HD-110 (HD ARMS) MOUNTING PLATE P45-180D (PA MOUNT) ANGLE BRACKET SHOE P45HD-112
Hardware Set #: 0017 - SGL DRS WD & HMF LABEL – 109, Qty 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
DOOR HARDWARE SECTION 087100 Finish Mfg 628 ABH 628 ADAMS-RITE 626 BEST 630 BURNS 689 STANLEY 689 STANLEY 689 STANLEY 689 STANLEY
110
Description CONTINUOUS HINGE A110HDC x FULL HEIGHT CLASSROOM LOCKSET 93K7-R-15D-S3 x ABC x CORMAX DOOR CLOSER D-4550 x EDA KICK PLATE 10" x 2" LDW .050 B4E x CSK MOP PLATE 6" x 1" LDW .050 B4E x CSK WALL STOP 575 TEAR DROP SEAL 797B x HEAD & JAMBS
Finish Mfg 628 ABH 626 BEST 689 STANLEY 630 BURNS 630 BURNS 630 BURNS BLK REESE
Hardware Set #: 0018 - PRS DRS WD & HMF - 111 Qty 2 1 2 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2
Description CONTINUOUS HINGE A110HDC x FULL HEIGHT DUST PROOF STRIKE 545 FLUSH BOLT 590 1" x 6-3/4" x 12" STOREROOM LOCKSET 93K7-D-15D-S3 x ABC x CORMAX DUMMY TRIM 93K0-1DT-15D ASTRAGAL 548TB x BEVEL EDGE x FULL HEIGHT DOOR TO SWING 180' KICK PLATE 10" x 1" LDW .050 B4E x CSK MOP PLATE 6" x 1" LDW .050 B4E x CSK WALL STOP 575 SILENCERS 500
Hardware Set #: 0019 - PRS DRS ALUM DRS & ALUM FR – 103, Qty 2 2 2 2 2 2 1
Description CONTINUOUS HINGE A110HDC x FULL HEIGHT PUSH / PULL BAR M422 x M36D x (2) T-1HD x (1) T-5HD DOOR CLOSER D-4550 x HCS SPACER BLOCK P45HD-110 (HD ARMS) MOUNTING PLATE P45-180D (PA MOUNT) ANGLE BRACKET SHOE P45HD-112 WALL STOP 575
DOOR HARDWARE
Finish Mfg 628 ABH 626 BURNS 626 BURNS 626 BEST 626 BEST 630 ABH 630 BURNS 630 BURNS 630 BURNS GRAY BURNS
104 Finish Mfg 628 ABH 630 BURNS 689 STANLEY 689 STANLEY 689 STANLEY 689 STANLEY 630 BURNS
087100- 25
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
DOOR HARDWARE SECTION 087100
Hardware Set #: 0020 - SGL DRS WD & HMF LABEL - 112 Qty 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 3
Description CONTINUOUS HINGE A110HDC x FULL HEIGHT CLASSROOM LOCKSET 93K7-R-15D-S3 x ABC x CORMAX DOOR CLOSER D-4551 x REG KICK PLATE 10" x 2" LDW .050 B4E x CSK MOP PLATE 6" x 1" LDW .050 B4E x CSK WALL STOP 575 PASSIVE INFRARED MD31D-W x 24VDC x SPDT POWER SUPPLY 602RF x 1-AMP x 12/24VDC MAGNETIC LOCK 1511V x 12/24VDC KEYPAD 918 SILENCERS 500
Finish Mfg 628 ABH 626 BEST 689 STANLEY 630 BURNS 630 BURNS 630 BURNS 714 SDC 600 SDC 628 SDC 630 SDC GRAY BURNS
Hardware Set #: 0021 - SGL DRS WD & HMF LABEL - 113 Qty 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Description CONTINUOUS HINGE A110HDC x FULL HEIGHT RIM CYLINDER [IC] 1E72 x RP x ABC x CORMAX RIM EXIT DEVICE FL-2108 x V4908D DOOR CLOSER D-4550 x EDA KICK PLATE 10" x 2" LDW .050 B4E x CSK MOP PLATE 6" x 1" LDW .050 B4E x CSK WALL STOP 575 TEAR DROP SEAL 797B x HEAD & JAMBS
Finish Mfg 628 ABH 626 BEST 630 PRECISION 689 STANLEY 630 BURNS 630 BURNS 630 BURNS BLK REESE
Hardware Set #: 0022 - SGL DRS ALUM DRS & ALUM FR - 114 Qty 1 1 2 1 1 1 1
Description CONTINUOUS HINGE A110HDC x FULL HEIGHT HOOKBOLT MS1890 SERIES MORTISE CYLINDER [IC] 1E74 x C181 x RP3 x ABC x CORMAX PUSH / PULL BAR M422 x M36D x (2) T-1HD x (1) T-5HD DOOR CLOSER D-4551 x REG MOUNTING PLATE P45-180D O/H CONCEALED STOP 4024 x STOP (36" TO 48" DR)
Finish Mfg 628 ABH 626 ADAMS-RITE 626 BEST 630 BURNS 689 STANLEY 689 STANLEY 630 ABH
Hardware Set #: 0023 - SGL DRS WD & HMF - 115 Qty 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Description CONTINUOUS HINGE A110HDC x FULL HEIGHT MORTISE CYLINDER [IC] 1E74 x C4 x RP3 x ABC x CORMAX RIM CYLINDER [IC] 1E72 x RP x ABC x CORMAX RIM EXIT DEVICE 2108CD x V4908D DOOR CLOSER D-4550 x H-EDA KICK PLATE 10" x 2" LDW .050 B4E x CSK MOP PLATE 6" x 1" LDW .050 B4E x CSK
DOOR HARDWARE
Finish Mfg 628 ABH 626 BEST 626 BEST 630 PRECISION 689 STANLEY 630 BURNS 630 BURNS
087100- 26
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
1 3
WALL STOP 575 SILENCERS 500
DOOR HARDWARE SECTION 087100 630 BURNS GRAY BURNS
Hardware Set #: 0024 - SGL DRS WD & HMF LABEL - 116 Qty 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Description CONTINUOUS HINGE A110HDC x FULL HEIGHT CLASSROOM LOCKSET 93K7-R-15D-S3 x ABC x CORMAX DOOR CLOSER D-4551 x REG KICK PLATE 10" x 2" LDW .050 B4E x CSK MOP PLATE 6" x 1" LDW .050 B4E x CSK O/H SURFACE STOP 4424 x STOP (36" TO 48" DR) TEAR DROP SEAL 797B x HEAD & JAMBS
Finish Mfg 628 ABH 626 BEST 689 STANLEY 630 BURNS 630 BURNS 630 ABH BLK REESE
Hardware Set #: 0025 - SGL DRS WD & HMF LABEL - 133 Qty 1 1 1 1 1 1 3
Description CONTINUOUS HINGE A110HDC x FULL HEIGHT ENTRANCE LOCKSET 93K7-AB-15D-S3 x ABC x CORMAX DOOR CLOSER D-4551 x REG KICK PLATE 10" x 2" LDW .050 B4E x CSK MOP PLATE 6" x 1" LDW .050 B4E x CSK O/H SURFACE STOP 4424 x STOP (36" TO 48" DR) SILENCERS 500
Finish Mfg 628 ABH 626 BEST 689 STANLEY 630 BURNS 630 BURNS 630 ABH GRAY BURNS
Hardware Set #: 0026 - SGL DRS WD & HMF - 138 Qty 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 3
Description CONTINUOUS HINGE A110HDC x FULL HEIGHT MORTISE CYLINDER [IC] 1E74 x C4 x RP3 x ABC x CORMAX RIM CYLINDER [IC] 1E72 x RP x ABC x CORMAX RIM EXIT DEVICE 2108CD x V4908D DOOR CLOSER D-4550 x H-EDA KICK PLATE 10" x 2" LDW .050 B4E x CSK MOP PLATE 6" x 1" LDW .050 B4E x CSK WALL STOP 575 SILENCERS 500
Finish Mfg 628 ABH 626 BEST 626 BEST 630 PRECISION 689 STANLEY 630 BURNS 630 BURNS 630 BURNS GRAY BURNS
Hardware Set #: 0027 - SGL DRS WD & HMF - 144 Qty 1 1 1 1 1 1
Description CONTINUOUS HINGE A110HDC x FULL HEIGHT CLASSROOM LOCKSET 93K7-R-15D-S3 x ABC x CORMAX DOOR CLOSER D-4550 x H-EDA KICK PLATE 10" x 2" LDW .050 B4E x CSK MOP PLATE 6" x 1" LDW .050 B4E x CSK WALL STOP 575
DOOR HARDWARE
Finish Mfg 628 ABH 626 BEST 689 STANLEY 630 BURNS 630 BURNS 630 BURNS
087100- 27
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
3
SILENCERS 500
DOOR HARDWARE SECTION 087100 GRAY BURNS
Hardware Set #: 0028 - PRS DRS WD & HMF - 154 Qty 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
Description CONTINUOUS HINGE A110HDC x FULL HEIGHT PUSH PLATE 56 6" x 16" .050 x B4E PULL PLATE 5426C 4" x 16" x T/B DOOR TO SWING 120' DOOR CLOSER D-4550 x H-EDA KICK PLATE 10" x 1" LDW .050 B4E x CSK MOP PLATE 6" x 1" LDW .050 B4E x CSK WALL STOP 575 SILENCERS 500
Finish Mfg 628 ABH 630 BURNS 630 BURNS STANLEY 689 STANLEY 630 BURNS 630 BURNS 630 BURNS GRAY BURNS
Hardware Set #: 0029 - SGL DRS ALUM DRS & ALUM FR - 157 Qty 1 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 1
Description CONTINUOUS HINGE A110HDC x FULL HEIGHT HOOKBOLT MS1890 SERIES MORTISE CYLINDER [IC] 1E74 x C181 x RP3 x ABC x CORMAX PUSH / PULL BAR M422 x M36D x (2) T-1HD x (1) T-5HD DOOR CLOSER D-4550 x H-EDA SPACER BLOCK P45HD-110 (HD ARMS) MOUNTING PLATE P45-180D (PA MOUNT) ANGLE BRACKET SHOE P45HD-112 WALL STOP 575
Finish Mfg 628 ABH 626 ADAMS-RITE 626 BEST 630 BURNS 689 STANLEY 689 STANLEY 689 STANLEY 689 STANLEY 630 BURNS
Hardware Set #: 0030 - SGL DRS WD & HMF - 165-1 Qty 1 1 1 1 1 1 3
Description CONTINUOUS HINGE A110HDC x FULL HEIGHT PASSAGE LATCHSET 93K0-N-15D-S3 DOOR CLOSER D-4550 x H-EDA KICK PLATE 10" x 2" LDW .050 B4E x CSK MOP PLATE 6" x 1" LDW .050 B4E x CSK WALL STOP 575 SILENCERS 500
Finish Mfg 628 ABH 626 BEST 689 STANLEY 630 BURNS 630 BURNS 630 BURNS GRAY BURNS
Hardware Set #: 0031 - SGL DRS WD & HMF - 163 Qty 1 1 1 1 1
Description CONTINUOUS HINGE A110HDC x FULL HEIGHT PRIVACY LOCKSET 45H0-L-15H x VIN DOOR CLOSER D-4551 x REG KICK PLATE 10" x 2" LDW .050 B4E x CSK MOP PLATE 6" x 1" LDW .050 B4E x CSK
DOOR HARDWARE
Finish Mfg 628 ABH 630 BEST 689 STANLEY 630 BURNS 630 BURNS
087100- 28
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
1 3
WALL STOP 575 SILENCERS 500
DOOR HARDWARE SECTION 087100 630 BURNS GRAY BURNS
Hardware Set #: 0032 - SGL DRS WD & HMF - 170 Qty 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 3
Description CONTINUOUS HINGE A110HDC x FULL HEIGHT DEADBOLT (CLASSROOM) 48H7-R x ABC x CORMAX PUSH PLATE 56 6" x 16" .050 x B4E PULL PLATE 5426C 4" x 16" x T/B DOOR CLOSER D-4550 x H-EDA KICK PLATE 10" x 2" LDW .050 B4E x CSK MOP PLATE 6" x 1" LDW .050 B4E x CSK WALL STOP 575 SILENCERS 500
Finish Mfg 628 ABH 626 BEST 630 BURNS 630 BURNS 689 STANLEY 630 BURNS 630 BURNS 630 BURNS GRAY BURNS
Hardware Set #: 0033 - SGL DRS WD & HMF - 171 Qty 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 3
Description CONTINUOUS HINGE A110HDC x FULL HEIGHT DEADBOLT (CLASSROOM) 48H7-R x ABC x CORMAX PUSH PLATE 56 6" x 16" .050 x B4E PULL PLATE 5426C 4" x 16" x T/B DOOR CLOSER D-4551 x REG x H KICK PLATE 10" x 2" LDW .050 B4E x CSK MOP PLATE 6" x 1" LDW .050 B4E x CSK WALL STOP 575 SILENCERS 500
Finish Mfg 628 ABH 626 BEST 630 BURNS 630 BURNS 689 STANLEY 630 BURNS 630 BURNS 630 BURNS GRAY BURNS
Hardware Set #: 0034 - SGL DRS WD & HMF - 172 Qty 1 1 1 1 1 1 3
Description CONTINUOUS HINGE A110HDC x FULL HEIGHT STOREROOM LOCKSET 93K7-D-15D-S3 x ABC x CORMAX TRIM PROTECTOR BAR 417 x TB x 1-3/4" DOOR ARMOR PLATE 34" x 2" LDW .050 B4E x CSK MOP PLATE 6" x 1" LDW .050 B4E x CSK WALL STOP 575 SILENCERS 500
Finish Mfg 628 ABH 626 BEST 630 BURNS 630 BURNS 630 BURNS 630 BURNS GRAY BURNS
Hardware Set #: 0035 - SGL DRS WD & HMF - G01 Qty 1 1 1 1
Description CONTINUOUS HINGE A110HDC x FULL HEIGHT PRIVACY LOCKSET 45H0-L-15H x VIN DOOR CLOSER D-4551 x REG KICK PLATE 10" x 2" LDW .050 B4E x CSK
DOOR HARDWARE
Finish Mfg 628 ABH 630 BEST 689 STANLEY 630 BURNS
087100- 29
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
1 1 3
DOOR HARDWARE SECTION 087100
MOP PLATE 6" x 1" LDW .050 B4E x CSK WALL STOP 575 SILENCERS 500
630 BURNS 630 BURNS GRAY BURNS
Hardware Set #: 0036 - SGL DRS HMD & HMF LABEL - G05 Qty 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Description CONTINUOUS HINGE A500 x FULL HEIGHT STOREROOM LOCKSET 93K7-D-15D-S3 x ABC x CORMAX TRIM PROTECTOR BAR 417 x TB x 1-3/4" DOOR DOOR CLOSER D-4550 x CS KICK PLATE 16" x 2" LDW .050 B4E x CSK TEAR DROP SEAL 797B x HEAD & JAMBS THRESHOLD S514A x SRS x FHSL x FULL WIDTH
Hardware Set #: 0037 - SGL DRS HMD & HMF (ROOF) – 201, Qty 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Qty 1 1 1 1 1 1 3
202
Description CONTINUOUS HINGE A500 x FULL HEIGHT MORTISE CYLINDER [IC] 1E74 x C4 x RP3 x ABC x CORMAX RIM CYLINDER [IC] 1E72 x RP x ABC x CORMAX RIM EXIT DEVICE 2103CD x 4903D x S301 DOOR CLOSER D-4550 x HCS x SRI ARMOR PLATE 34" x 2" LDW .050 B4E x CSK TEAR DROP SEAL 797B x HEAD & JAMBS RAIN DRIP R201A x FULL WIDTH + 4" THRESHOLD S483APR x SRS x FHSL x FULL WIDTH DOOR SWEEP 772A x FULL WIDTH
Hardware Set #: 0038 - SGL DRS WD & HMF LABEL – 106,
Finish Mfg 630 ABH 626 BEST 630 BURNS 689 STANLEY 630 BURNS BLK REESE 628 REESE
Finish Mfg 630 ABH 626 BEST 626 BEST 630 PRECISION 689 STANLEY 630 BURNS BLK REESE 628 REESE 628 REESE 628 REESE
134
Description CONTINUOUS HINGE A110HDC x FULL HEIGHT ENTRANCE LOCKSET 93K7-AB-15D-S3 x ABC x CORMAX DOOR CLOSER D-4551 x REG KICK PLATE 10" x 2" LDW .050 B4E x CSK MOP PLATE 6" x 1" LDW .050 B4E x CSK WALL STOP 575 SILENCERS 500
Finish Mfg 628 ABH 626 BEST 689 STANLEY 630 BURNS 630 BURNS 630 BURNS GRAY BURNS
Hardware Set #: 0039 - SGL DRS WD & HMF LABEL - 108 Qty Description 1 CONTINUOUS HINGE A110HDC x FULL HEIGHT 1 CLASSROOM LOCKSET 93K7-R-15D-S3 x ABC x CORMAX 1 DOOR CLOSER D-4551 x REG
DOOR HARDWARE
Finish Mfg 628 ABH 626 BEST 689 STANLEY
087100- 30
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
1 1 1 3
KICK PLATE 10" x 2" LDW .050 B4E x CSK MOP PLATE 6" x 1" LDW .050 B4E x CSK WALL STOP 575 SILENCERS 500
DOOR HARDWARE SECTION 087100 630 BURNS 630 BURNS 630 BURNS GRAY BURNS
Hardware Set #: 0040 - SGL DRS WD & HMF LABEL - 107 Qty 1 1 1 1 1 1 3
Description CONTINUOUS HINGE A110HDC x FULL HEIGHT STOREROOM LOCKSET 93K7-D-15D-S3 x ABC x CORMAX DOOR CLOSER D-4551 x REG KICK PLATE 10" x 2" LDW .050 B4E x CSK MOP PLATE 6" x 1" LDW .050 B4E x CSK WALL STOP 575 SILENCERS 500
Finish Mfg 628 ABH 626 BEST 689 STANLEY 630 BURNS 630 BURNS 630 BURNS GRAY BURNS
Hardware Set #: 0041 - SGL DRS WD & HMF Qty 1 1 1 1 1 3 1
Description CONTINUOUS HINGE A110HDC x FULL HEIGHT STOREROOM LOCKSET 93K7-D-15D-S3 x ABC x CORMAX KICK PLATE 10" x 2" LDW .050 B4E x CSK MOP PLATE 6" x 1" LDW .050 B4E x CSK WALL STOP 575 SILENCERS 500 THRESHOLD S514A x SRS x FHSL x FULL WIDTH
Finish Mfg 628 ABH 626 BEST 630 BURNS 630 BURNS 630 BURNS GRAY BURNS 628 REESE
Hardware Set #: 0042 - PRS DRS & FR EXISTING TO REMAIN (EXTERIOR) – 176, Qty 2 2 2 1 1 1 2 2 2 1 2 1 1 2 1
178
Description Finish Mfg CONTINUOUS HINGE A110HDC x FULL HEIGHT 628 ABH MORTISE CYLINDER [IC] 1E74 x C4 x RP3 x ABC x CORMAX 626 BEST RIM CYLINDER [IC] 1E72 x RP x ABC x CORMAX 626 BEST RIM EXIT DEVICE 2102CD x 4902D 630 PRECISION RIM EXIT DEVICE 2103CD x 4903D x S301 630 PRECISION REMOVABLE MULLION KR822 x ST989 x MCS822 689 PRECISION DOOR CLOSER D-4550 x HCS x SRI 689 STANLEY ANGLE BRACKET SHOE P45HD-112 689 STANLEY ARMOR PLATE 34" x 1" LDW .050 B4E x CSK 630 BURNS TEAR DROP SEAL 797B x HEAD & JAMBS BLK REESE TEAR DROP SEAL 797B x MULLION x FULL HEIGHT BLK REESE RAIN DRIP R201A x FULL WIDTH + 4" 628 REESE THRESHOLD S483APR x SRS x FHSL x FULL WIDTH 628 REESE DOOR SWEEP 772A x FULL WIDTH 628 REESE MODIFY / REPAIR FRAME & DOOR FOR HARDWARE AS REQUIRED (VIF)
Hardware Set #: 0043 - SGL DRS & FR EXISTING TO REMAIN (EXTERIOR) - 177
DOOR HARDWARE
087100- 31
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
Qty 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
DOOR HARDWARE SECTION 087100
Description Finish Mfg CONTINUOUS HINGE A110HDC x FULL HEIGHT 628 ABH MORTISE CYLINDER [IC] 1E74 x C4 x RP3 x ABC x CORMAX 626 BEST RIM CYLINDER [IC] 1E72 x RP x ABC x CORMAX 626 BEST RIM EXIT DEVICE 2103CD x 4903D x S301 630 PRECISION DOOR CLOSER D-4550 x HCS x SRI 689 STANLEY ANGLE BRACKET SHOE P45HD-112 689 STANLEY ARMOR PLATE 34" x 2" LDW .050 B4E x CSK 630 BURNS TEAR DROP SEAL 797B x HEAD & JAMBS BLK REESE RAIN DRIP R201A x FULL WIDTH + 4" 628 REESE THRESHOLD S483APR x SRS x FHSL x FULL WIDTH 628 REESE DOOR SWEEP 772A x FULL WIDTH 628 REESE MODIFY / REPAIR FRAME & DOOR FOR HARDWARE AS REQUIRED (VIF)
Hardware Set #: 0044 - SGL DRS & FR EXISTING TO REMAIN - 175 Qty Description Finish Mfg 1 CONTINUOUS HINGE A110HDC x FULL HEIGHT 628 ABH 1 STOREROOM LOCKSET 93K7-D-15D-S3 x ABC x CORMAX 626 BEST 1 KICK PLATE 16" x 2" LDW .050 B4E x CSK 630 BURNS 1 WALL STOP 575 630 BURNS 3 SILENCERS 500 GRAY BURNS 1 MODIFY / REPAIR FRAME & DOOR FOR HARDWARE AS REQUIRED (VIF)
Hardware Set #: 0045 - SGL DRS & FR EXISTING TO REMAIN - 179 Qty 1 1 1 1 1 1 3 1
Description Finish Mfg CONTINUOUS HINGE A110HDC x FULL HEIGHT 628 ABH CLASSROOM LOCKSET 93K7-R-15D-S3 x ABC x CORMAX 626 BEST DOOR CLOSER D-4551 x REG 689 STANLEY KICK PLATE 16" x 2" LDW .050 B4E x CSK 630 BURNS MOP PLATE 6" x 1" LDW .050 B4E x CSK 630 BURNS WALL STOP 575 630 BURNS SILENCERS 500 GRAY BURNS MODIFY / REPAIR FRAME & DOOR FOR HARDWARE AS REQUIRED (VIF)
Hardware Set #: 0046 - SGL DRS & FR EXISTING TO REMAIN – 180, 181 Qty 1 1 1 1 1 1 3 1
Description Finish Mfg CONTINUOUS HINGE A110HDC x FULL HEIGHT 628 ABH PRIVACY LOCKSET 93K0-L-15D-S3 626 BEST DOOR CLOSER D-4551 x REG 689 STANLEY KICK PLATE 10" x 2" LDW .050 B4E x CSK 630 BURNS MOP PLATE 6" x 1" LDW .050 B4E x CSK 630 BURNS WALL STOP 575 630 BURNS SILENCERS 500 GRAY BURNS MODIFY / REPAIR FRAME & DOOR FOR HARDWARE AS REQUIRED (VIF)
DOOR HARDWARE
087100- 32
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
DOOR HARDWARE SECTION 087100
Hardware Set #: 0047 - SGL DRS & FR EXISTING TO REMAIN (EXTERIOR) - 174 Qty 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Description Finish Mfg CONTINUOUS HINGE A110HDC x FULL HEIGHT 628 ABH STOREROOM LOCKSET 93K7-D-15D-S3 x ABC x CORMAX 626 BEST DOOR CLOSER D-4551 x REG x H 689 STANLEY TEAR DROP SEAL 797B x HEAD & JAMBS BLK REESE RAIN DRIP R201A x FULL WIDTH + 4" 628 REESE THRESHOLD S405A x SRS x FHSL x FULL WIDTH 628 REESE DOOR SWEEP 772A x FULL WIDTH 628 REESE MODIFY / REPAIR FRAME & DOOR FOR HARDWARE AS REQUIRED (VIF)
END OF SECTION 087100
DOOR HARDWARE
087100- 33
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
GLAZING SECTION 088000
SECTION 088000 - GLAZING
PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. In the event of any conflicts between the requirements of these Sections, the more stringent requirement shall apply.
SUMMARY A.
Section includes glazing for the following products and applications, including those specified in other Sections where glazing requirements are specified by reference to this Section: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8.
1.3
Windows. Doors. Glazed curtain walls. Storefront framing. Glazed entrances. Kiosks. Information Desk. Interior borrowed lites.
SECTION REQUIREMENTS A.
Submittals: Product Data and samples for all items listed in Products.
B.
Safety Glass: Category II materials complying with testing requirements in 16 CFR 1201 and ANSI Z97.1.
C.
Fire-Resistance-Rated Assemblies: Provide products that comply with NFPA 80 and are listed and labeled by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction for applications indicated.
D.
Glazing Publications: Comply with published recommendations of glass product manufacturers and organizations below, unless more stringent requirements are indicated.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
GLAZING
088000-1
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
GLAZING SECTION 088000
2.1
GLASS A.
Heat-Treated Float Glass: ASTM C 1048, Condition A (uncoated), Type I, Class 1 (clear), Quality Q3, Kind FT (fully tempered), 1/4" thick. 1.
B.
Heat-Treated Float Glass: ASTM C 1048, Type I, Class 2 (tinted, heat absorbing, and light reducing), Quality Q3, Kind FT (fully tempered), thickness as specified by curtain wall window manufacturer.
C.
Mirror Glass: ASTM C 1503, Mirror Quality, Type I, Class 2 (tinted, heat absorbing, and light reducing), Quality Q3, Kind FT (fully tempered), thickness as specified by curtain wall window manufacturer, with edges flat polished. 1.
D.
E.
Locations: Kiosks and Information Desk.
Sealed Insulating-Glass Units: Factory-assembled units complying with ASTM E 774 for Class CBA units, with two 1/4" thick sheets of glass separated by a 1/2-inch dehydrated space filled with argon. 1. 2. 3. 4.
F.
Safety Glass for Mirrors: Fully tempered.
Frosted Heat Treated Tempered Float Glass: ASTM C 1036, Type II, Class 1, Form 3, Quality Q8, Kind FT (fully tempered), 3/8" thick, with frosted finish. Finish shall be seleted by architect from manufacturer’s full product range. 1.
Inboard Lite: Kind FT (fully tempered). Outboard Lite: Kind FT (fully tempered). Low-Emissivity Coating: Second surface. Locations: Aluminum Storefront, Glazed Aluminum Curtain Wall, Exterior Hollow Metal Doors
Fire Rated Glass: Clear, 1/4-inch-thick, fire-protection-rated tempered glass, complying with testing requirements in 16 CFR 1201 for Category II materials. 1.
Fire-Protection-Rated Glazing, General: Listed and labeled by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, for fire-protection ratings indicated, based on testing according to NFPA 252 for door assemblies and NFPA 257 for window assemblies.
2.
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following: a. InterEdge, Inc., a subsidiary of AFG Industries, Inc.; PyroEdge-20. b. Safti First; SuperLite20. c. Vetrotech Saint-Gobain; SSG Pyroswiss. Locations: Interior fire rated assemblies.
3. 2.2
Locations: Interior Hollow Metal Assemblies (non-fire rated).
GLAZING COMPOUND A.
Silicone Sealant: One-part neutral curing silicone, medium modulus sealant, Type S; Grade NS; Class 25 with additional movement capability of 50 percent in both extension and
GLAZING
088000-2
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
GLAZING
SECTION 088000 compression (total 100 percent); Use (Exposure) NT; Uses (Substrates) G, A, and O as applicable. Available Products: 1. Dow Corning 795 - Dow Corning Corp. 2. Silglaze-II 2800 - General Electric Co. 3. Spectrem 2 - Tremco Inc. 4. Locations: All locations other than Glazed Aluminum Curtain Wall and Single Glazed Unitized Partitions, see those specific specification section for glazing requirements.
2.3
B.
Setting Blocks: Neoprene, EPDM, or silicone; tested for compatibility with glazing compound; of 70 to 90 Shore A hardness.
C.
Cleaners, Primers, and Sealers: Type recommended by manufacturer of glass and gaskets.
FABRICATION A.
Fabricate glass and other glazing products in sizes required to glaze openings indicated for Project, with edge and face clearances, edge and surface conditions, and bite complying with recommendations of product manufacturer and referenced glazing standard as required to comply with system performance requirements.
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1
3.2
EXAMINATION A.
Examine glass framing, with glazier present, for compliance with the following: 1. Manufacturing and installation tolerances, including those for size, squareness, offsets at corners. 2. Minimum required face or edge clearances. 3. Observable edge damage or face imperfections.
B.
Do not proceed with glazing until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
C.
Clean glazing channels and other framing members receiving glass immediately before glazing. Remove coatings that are not firmly bonded to substrates.
INSTALLATION (GLAZING) A.
Comply with referenced FGMA standards and instructions of manufacturers of glass, glazing sealants, and glazing compounds.
B.
Protect glass from edge damage during handling and installation. Inspect glass during installation and discard pieces with edge damage that could affect glass performance.
C.
Set units of glass in each series with uniformity of pattern, draw, bow, and similar characteristics.
D.
Cut glazing tape to length and set against permanent stops, flush with sight lines to fit openings exactly, with stretch allowance during installation.
GLAZING
088000-3
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
GLAZING SECTION 088000
3.3
E.
Place setting blocks located at quarter points of glass with edge block no more than 6 inches from corners.
F.
Glaze vertically into metal frames or partition walls and push against tape for full contact at perimeter of pane or unit.
G.
Place glazing tape on free perimeter of glazing in same manner described above.
H.
Install removable stop and secure without displacement of tape.
I.
Use specified glazing compound, without adulteration; bed glazing material in glazing compound; entirely fill all recess and spaces. Provide visible glazing compound with smooth and straight edges.
J.
Install so that appropriate markings remain permanently visible.
PROTECTION AND CLEANING A.
Protect glass from contact with contaminating substances resulting from construction operations. Remove any such substances by method approved by glass manufacturer.
B.
Wash glass on both faces not more than four days prior to date scheduled for inspections intended to establish date of substantial completion. Wash glass by method recommended by glass manufacturer.
END OF SECTION 088000
GLAZING
088000-4
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING SECTION 092216 SECTION - 092216 - NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING
PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. In the event of any conflicts between the requirements of these Sections, the more stringent requirement shall apply.
SECTION REQUIREMENTS A.
Submittals: Product Data.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1
METAL FRAMING AND SUPPORTS A.
Steel Framing Members, General: ASTM C 754. 1. 2. 3.
B.
Partition , Furring and Soffit Framing: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.
2.2
Steel Sheet Components: ASTM C 645. Thickness specified is minimum uncoated base-metal thickness. Protective Coating: ASTM A 653/A 653M, G40, hot-dip galvanized. Spacing: studs shall be spaced at 16 inches on center, unless otherwise noted.
Studs and Runners: In depth indicated and 25 Gauge unless otherwise indicated. Flat Strap and Backing: 25 Gauge. Resilient Furring Channels: 7/8 inch deep, with single- or double-leg configuration, 25 Gauge. Framing attached to roof structure: Unistrut or approved equal, A1000 series, 14 ga., 1-1/4 inch deep x 1-1/4 inch wide. Spacing: studs shall be spaced at 16 inches on center, unless otherwise noted.
ACCESSORIES A.
General: Comply with referenced installation standards. 1. 2.
B.
Fasteners for Metal Framing: Of type, material, size, corrosion resistance, holding power, and other properties required to fasten steel members to substrates. Weld unistrut to metal first floor structure in accordance with AWS D1.1, "Structural Welding Code--Steel.
Acoustical Sealant for Concealed Joints: ASTM C 834.
NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING
Nonsag, latex sealant complying with
092216 - 1
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING SECTION 092216
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1
INSTALLATION A.
Install steel framing to comply with ASTM C 754 and with ASTM C 840 requirements that apply to framing installation and with United States Gypsum's "Gypsum Construction Handbook."
B.
Install supplementary framing, and blocking to support fixtures, equipment services, heavy trim, furnishings, or similar construction.
END OF SECTION 092216
NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING
092216 - 2
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
GYPSUM BOARD SECTION 092900
SECTION 092900 - GYPSUM BOARD PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. In the event of any conflicts between the requirements of these Sections, the more stringent requirement shall apply.
SECTION REQUIREMENTS A.
Submittals: Product Data.
B.
Fire Resistance Rated Assemblies: Comply with the requirements of listed assemblies pe ASTM E 119 by an independent testing and inspection agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1
2.2
PANEL PRODUCTS A.
Provide in maximum lengths available to minimize end-to-end butt joints.
B.
Water-Resistant Gypsum Backing Board: ASTM C 630/C 630M or ASTM C 1396/C 1396M, 5/8" thick. Water-resistant gypsum backing board shall be located in the Lavatories ,Toilet Rooms, Showers and Break Rooms, and all adjacent walls and soffits.
C.
Regular Gypsum Board: Complying with ASTM C 36/C 36M or ASTM C 1396/C 1396M, as applicable to type of gypsum board indicated and whichever is more stringent, in 5/8" thick. Regular gypsum board shall be located in all other others not indicated to received water-resistant gypsum backing board and fire rated assemblies.
D.
Fire Rated Gypsum Board: Provide materials an construction identical to those tested in assemblies per ASTM E 119. Type X 5/8" thick.
E.
Exterior Gypsum Sheathing: ASTM C 931 / C 931 M or ASTM C 1396/C 1396M, in thickness indicated with manufacture’s standard edges. Regular type unless otherwise indicated.
CURVED REVEAL MOLDING A.
Gordon, Final Forms I, 500 series, 515-58, custom curves to match soffit radiuses. Color to be white. Fry-Reglet, USG, or approved equal will be considered as an alternate manufacturer provided the material meets the specifications.
GYPSUM BOARD
092900 - 1
ROWAN UNIVERSITY 2.3
GYPSUM BOARD SECTION 092900
ACCESSORIES A. B. C. D. E. F. G. H.
Trim Accessories: ASTM C 1047, formed from galvanized or aluminum-coated steel sheet, rolled zinc, plastic, or paper-faced galvanized-steel sheet. Provide cornerbead at outside corners unless otherwise indicated. Provide LC-bead (J-bead) at exposed panel edges. Aluminum Accessories: Extruded-aluminum accessories indicated with manufacturer's standard corrosion-resistant primer. Joint-Treatment Materials: ASTM C 475/C 475M. Joint Tape: Paper unless otherwise recommended by panel manufacturer. Joint Compounds: Drying-type, ready-mixed, all-purpose compounds. Acoustical Sealant for Exposed and Concealed Joints: Nonsag, paintable, nonstaining latex sealant complying with ASTM C 834.
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1
INSTALLATION A.
Install gypsum board to comply with ASTM C 840 and with United States Gypsum's "Gypsum Construction Handbook."
B.
Install supplementary framing, and blocking to support fixtures, equipment services, heavy trim, grab bars, toilet accessories, furnishings, or similar construction.
C.
Where studs are installed directly against exterior walls, install foam-gasket isolation strip between studs and wall.
D.
Single-Layer Fastening Methods: Fasten gypsum panels to supports with screws and glue.
E.
Provide edge trim and acoustical sealant.
F.
Finishing Gypsum Board: ASTM C 840. 1. 2.
G.
At concealed areas, provide Level 1 finish: Embed tape at joints. Unless otherwise indicated, provide Level 4 finish: Embed tape and apply separate first, fill, and finish coats of joint compound to tape, fasteners, and trim flanges.
Fire Resistance Rated Assemblies: Comply with requirements of listed assemblies.
END OF SECTION 092900
GYPSUM BOARD
092900 - 2
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
TILING SECTION 093000
SECTION 093000 - TILING PART 1- GENERAL 1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS A.
1.2
SECTION REQUIREMENTS A.
1.3
1.4
1.5
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. In the event of any conflicts between the requirements of these Sections, the more stringent requirement shall apply.
Submittals: Product Data for tile and installation materials and Samples for tile.
SUBMITTALS A.
Prior to commencing work, submit manufacturer’s technical information and installation details to describe materials to be used.
B.
Before beginning work, samples of the wall tile and accent trim shall be provided for the architect’s approval.
QUALITY ASSURANCE A.
Contractor shall be an established firm regularly engaged in satisfactory installation of similar materials and shall provide a list of 3 projects of similar nature and complexity completed in the last 5 years.
B.
Prior to commencing the installation, the Contractor shall install, with Owner’s approval, a mutually agreed upon sample (“mock-up”) to show final color and texture of the system. This mock-up shall serve as a job standard for the final installation.
DELIVERY AND STORAGE A.
Material shall be delivered to project site in manufacturer’s original unopened containers bearing manufacturer’s name, product and color.
B.
Materials shall be stored indoors, protected from damage, moisture and direct sunlight..
PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1
MANUFACTURER A.
2.2
American Olean or approved equal.
MATERIALS A.
TILING
Ceramic tile that complies with Standard grade requirements in ANSI A137.1, 093000-1
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
TILING SECTION 093000
"Specifications for Ceramic Tile." B.
Wall Tile: Style Pozzalo Wall; Unglazed, impervious natural clay tile. 1. 2. 3.
C.
Wall Accent Tile: Style, “Legacy Glass Mosaics”, Glass impervious natural clay tile. 1. 2. 3.
2.3
Facial Dimensions: 9"x 12" Thickness: 1/4" Color: Sail White. One color and style to be selected per toilet room.
Facial Dimensions: 1"x 1" Thickness: 5/16" Color: LG23 Red Blend. One accent pattern to be selected per toilet room.
INSTALLATION MATERIALS
A.
Setting and Grouting Materials: Comply with material standards in ANSI's "Specifications for the Installation of Ceramic Tile" that apply to materials and methods indicated. 1. 2.
3.
Thin-Set Mortar Type: Latex-portland cement. Grout Type: Polymer modified unless otherwise indicated. a. Products: 1) DAP, MAPEI, or Laticrete, colored grout, ANSI A118.7. b. Grout Color: As selected by Owner. One color to be selected per toilet room. Grout Sealer: Manufacturer's standard silicone product for sealing grout joints that does not change color or appearance of grout. a.
Products: 1) Bonsal, W. R., Company; Grout Sealer. 2) Bostik; CeramaSeal Grout Sealer. 3) C-Cure; Penetrating Sealer 978.
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1
INSTALLATION A.
Comply with tile installation standards in ANSI's "Specifications for the Installation of Ceramic Tile" that apply to materials and methods indicated.
B.
Comply with TCA's "Handbook for Ceramic Tile Installation."
C.
Wall Tile Installation Method(s): 1. 2.
D. TILING
Interior Walls Over Concrete and Masonry: TCA W202 (thin-set mortar on concrete or masonry). Over Gypsum Board: TCA W243 (thin-set mortar on gypsum board).
Lay tile in grid pattern, unless otherwise indicated. Align joints where adjoining tiles on 093000- 2
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
TILING SECTION 093000
floor, base, walls, and trim are the same size. E.
Perform cutting and drilling of tile without marring visible surfaces. Carefully grind cut edges of tile abutting trim, finish, or built-in items for straight aligned joints. Fit tile closely to electrical outlets, piping, fixtures, and other penetrations so plates, collars, or covers overlap tile.
END OF SECTION 093000
TILING
093000- 3
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
ACOUSTICAL TILE CEILINGS SECTION 095123
SECTION 095123 - ACOUSTICAL TILE CEILINGS
PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. In the event of any conflicts between the requirements of these Sections, the more stringent requirement shall apply.
SECTION REQUIREMENTS A.
Submittals: Product Data and material Samples.
B.
Surface-Burning Characteristics of Panels: ASTM E 1264, Class A materials, tested per ASTM E 84.
C.
Seismic Standard: Provide acoustical tile ceilings designed and installed to withstand the effects of earthquake motions according to the following: 1.
1.3
CISCA's Recommendations for Acoustical Ceilings: Comply with CISCA's "Recommendations for Direct-Hung Acoustical Tile and Lay-in Panel Ceilings Seismic Zones 0-2."
ATTIC STOCK A.
Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1.
Acoustical Ceiling Tiles: Full-size units equal to 2 boxes of quantity installed of each tile type.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1
ACOUSTICAL TILE A.
Products: 1.
Armstrong, “Fine Fissured”, or approved equal. a. Location: All areas not otherwise indicated in this specification b. Classification: As follows, per ASTM E 1264: i. Type and Form: Type III, Form 2. ii. Pattern: CKE. iii. Color: White. iv. Light Reflectance (LR) Coefficient: Not less than 0.84. v. Noise Reduction Coefficient (NRC): Not less than 0.55. vi. Ceiling Attenuation Class (CAC): Not less than 35.
ACOUSTICAL TILE CEILINGS
095123- 1
ROWAN UNIVERSITY c. d. e.
2.2
SUSPENSION SYSTEM A.
Ceiling Suspension System: Direct hung; ASTM C 635, intermediate-duty structural classification. 1.
Products: a. Armstrong. “AL Prelude Plus XL”, 15/16 environmental tee grid system, or approved equal.
2.
Color: White for Fine Fissured.
B.
Attachment Devices: Size for 5 times the design load indicated in ASTM C 635, Table 1, Direct Hung, unless otherwise indicated. Comply with seismic design requirements.
C.
Wire Hangers, Braces, and Ties: Zinc-coated carbon-steel wire; ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper. 1.
2.3
Size: Provide yield strength at least 3 times the hanger design load (ASTM C 635, Table 1, Direct Hung), but not less than 0.106-inch- diameter wire.
D.
Seismic Struts: Manufacturer's standard product designed to accommodate seismic forces.
E.
Access: Identify upward access tile with manufacturer's standard unobtrusive markers for each access unit.
MOLDINGS A.
B.
2.4
ACOUSTICAL TILE CEILINGS SECTION 095123 Edge Detail: Angled Tegular, kerfed and rabbeted, or butt on short edges. Thickness: 3/4 inch. Modular Size: 24 by 24 inches.
Products: 1.
USG, “Wall Angle”, model M7, or approved equal. a. Straight sections required for walls and soffits.
2.
Gordon, “Column Collar”, model CWA-4, or Radii, “Trim Systems, model 800-2, or approved equal. a. Curved sections required for soffits.
3.
Color: White for Fine Fissured.
Material: Cold rolled hot dipped galvanized steel Zinc-coated carbon-steel wire; ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper.
PRISMATIC LENS A.
Aclear Prismatic Plastic Lens, 3/16" thick, cut to fit recessed soffit area at toilet room A102 and A104.
ACOUSTICAL TILE CEILINGS
095123- 2
ROWAN UNIVERSITY B.
ACOUSTICAL TILE CEILINGS SECTION 095123 Provide wall angle to match ceiling suspension systems to hold lens.
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1
INSTALLATION A.
Ceiling Suspension System Installation: Comply with ASTM C 636 and CISCA's "Ceiling Systems Handbook."
B.
Install acoustical tiles in coordination with suspension system and exposed moldings and trim. Place splines or suspension system flanges into kerfed edges so tile-to-tile joints are closed by double lap of material. 1.
C.
Fit adjoining tile to form flush, tight joints. Scribe and cut tile for accurate fit at borders and around penetrations through tile.
Arrange directionally patterned acoustical panels in accordance with manufacturers instructions.
END OF SECTION 095123
ACOUSTICAL TILE CEILINGS
095123- 3
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
SPECIALTY CEILINGS SECTION 095400
SECTION 095400 - SPECIALTY CEILINGS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS A.
1.2
1.3
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. In the event of any conflicts between the requirements of these Sections, the more stringent requirement shall apply.
SECTION REQUIREMENTS A.
Submittals: Product Data and material Samples.
B.
Surface-Burning Characteristics of Building Materials: Class A materials, tested per ASTM E 84.
ATTIC STOCK A.
Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1.
FRP Ceiling Panels: Full-size units equal to 5 of quantity installed.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1
FIBERGLASS REINFORCED PLASTIC CEILING PANELS (FRP) A.
Products: 1.
B.
Characteristics: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9.
C.
Sequentia StructoGlas FSI, or approved equal. a. Finish Schedule Designation - TII.
Surface Burning Characteristics: Class A finish rating per ASTM E84. Tensile Strength: 8,300 PSI per ASTM D790. Tensile Modulus: 590,000 PSI per ASTM D790. Flexural Stength: 12,400 PSI per ASTM D638. Flexural Modulus: 525,000 PSI per ASTM D638. Impact Stength (IZOD): 4.1 ft-lbs/in per ASTM D256. Barcol Hardness: 20-40 per ASTM D2583. Coefficient of Linear Expansion: 2.64 x 10 in/in deg F per ASTM D696. Water Absorption %: Binary Input, Binary Output, Binary Value, Analog Input, Analog Output, Analog Value, Calendar, Schedules and Services>Readproperty for the following: Write property, I-Am, I-Have, ReadMutipleProperty, WriteMultipleProperty, Who-Has, Who-Is. The ATC vendor must supply a protocol Interoperability Conformance (PIC) statement, within {10) days of award, for the BMS system hardware and software. The communication network between controllers must be EIA-485, at least 78.4 kbps, using either MS/TP or 156 kbps using ARCNET at the Data Link Layer. Systems, which are not BACnet compatible, as specified herein, are not acceptable. Systems that use proprietary protocol or LON for the main controller field bus are not acceptable. General Alarm Monitoring: The DDC system shall monitor and alarm general building systems such as zone temperature and machine room high temperature, high water source closed heat pump loop water temperature (2 min. delay), high /low HW pressure alarm, high/low discharge air temperature (RTU), Fire Alarm Condition (from F.A. control panel). All Alarms will be reported to the Graphical Front-end DDC Computer in the Building Engineers office. All System ALARMS SHALL PAGE the Facility Manager and indicate an alarm number on the Owner supplied Pager. Aspirating Boxes: For flush-mounted aspirating thermostats. Set-Point Adjustment: 1/2-inch- diameter, adjustment knob. PART 3 - BAS SERVER 3.1
SYSTEMS OVERVIEW
The BAS contractor shall provide, as an extension to the existing Honeywell International EBI system, all required software. The existing EBI server shall communicate using ASHRAE's BACnet/IP protocol, and in addition, offer concurrent support over the same data-link of the following protocols: MODBUS, and SNMP. All new controls shall be integrated with the existing system and shall provide a completely interactive user interface including the following features as a minimum: Trending. Scheduling.
AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE CONTROLS
230900 - 9
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE CONTROLS SECTION 230900
Downloading memory to field devices. Real time 'live' Graphic Programs. Tree Navigation. Parameter change of properties. Setpoint Adjustments. Alarm I Event information. Configuration of operators. Execution of global commands. 3.2
WORKSTATION GRAPHICAL USER INTERFACE Navigation:
Provide new operator workstation, located in the facility's engineering office for monitoring and control of the new BAS system being installed under this contract. The workstation shall be an extension of the existing Honeywell EBI system and provide a comprehensive user interface. Using a collection of web pages, it shall be constructed to "feel" like a single application, and provide a complete and intuitive mouse/menu driven operator interface. It shall be possible to navigate through the system using a web browser to accomplish all requirements of this specification section. The Web Browser GUI shall (as a minimum) provide a Navigation Pane for navigation, and an Action Pane for display of animated graphics, schedules, alarms/events, live graphic programs, active graphic setpoint controls, configuration menus for operator access, reports, and reporting actions for events. It shall be possible for this workstation to monitor and control the entire campus wide BAS system. The use of third party software or the practice of "windowing" is not acceptable. Login: On launching the web browser and selecting the appropriate domain name or IP address, the operator shall be presented with a login page that will require a login name and password. Navigation in the system shall be dependent on the operator's role privileges, and geographic area of responsibility (see below). Navigation Pane: The Navigation Pane shall comprise a Navigation Tree, which defines a geographic hierarchy of the BAS system. Navigation through the GUI shall be accomplished by clicking on appropriate level of a navigation tree (consisting of expandable and collapsible tree control like Microsoft's Explorer program), and/or by selecting dynamic links to other system graphics. Both the navigation tree and action pane defined herein shall be displayed simultaneously, enabling the operator to select a specific system or equipment, and view the corresponding graphic. As a minimum, the navigation tree shall provide the following views: Geographic, Network, Groups and Configuration. Geographic View shall display a logical geographic hierarchy of the system including: cities, sites, buildings, building systems, floors, equipment and BACnet objects of the campus wide BAS system. Network View shall display the hierarchy of the actual BACnet IP Intranet network. This can include: Systems, Site, Networks, Routers, Half-Routers, Devices, Equipment and all the BACnet Objects in a device. Group's View shall display Scheduled Groups and custom reports.
AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE CONTROLS
230900 - 10
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE CONTROLS SECTION 230900
Configuration View shall display all the configuration categories (Operators, Schedule, Event, Reporting and Roles). The navigation tree shall have a view selector to enable/disable various types of tree ornaments, like a clock to indicate where schedules have been assigned in the building. Action Pane: The Action Pane shall provide several functional views for each HVAC or mechanical/electrical subsystem specified. A functional view shall be accessed by clicking on the corresponding button: Graphics: Using animated gifs or other graphical format suitable for display in a web browser, graphics shall include aerial building/campus views, color building floor-plans, equipment drawings, active graphic setpoint controls, web content, and other valid HTML elements. The data on each graphic page shall automatically refresh at a rate defined by the operator. Properties: Shall include graphic controls and text for the following: Locking or overriding BACnet objects, demand strategies, and any other valid data required for setup. Changes made to the properties pages shall require the operator to depress and accept/cancel' button. Schedules: Shall be used to create, modify/edit and view schedules based on the systems geographical hierarchy (using the navigation tree) and in compliance with section below "Hierarchical schedules". Events: Shall be used to view alarm event information geographically (using the navigation tree), acknowledge events, sort events by category, actions and verify reporting actions. Trends: Shall be used to display associated trend and historical data, modify colors, date range, axis and scaling. Logic - Live Graphic Programs: Shall be used to display'live' graphic programs of the control algorithm for the mechanical/electrical system selected in the navigation tree. Other actions such as Print, Help, Command, and Logout shall be available via a drop-down window. Color Graphics: The Web Browser GUI shall make extensive use of color in the graphic pane to communicate information related to setpoints and comfort. Animated .gif's or .jpg, active setpoint graphic controls shall be used to enhance usability. All graphics shall reside on the existing Honeywell EBI system and be accessible via any campus wide workstation. Graphics shall be created in the existing Honeywell EBI database and conform to the following basic criteria: Display Size: The GUI workstation software shall graphically display in 1024 by 768 pixels 24 bit True Color. General Graphic: General area maps shall show locations of controlled buildings in relation to local landmarks. Color Floor Plans: Floor plan graphics shall show heating and cooling zones throughout the buildings in a range of colors, which provide a visual display of temperature relative to their respective setpoints (see section below). The colors shall be updated dynamically as a zone's actual comfort condition changes. Mechanical Components: Mechanical system graphics shall show the type of mechanical system components serving any zone through the use of a pictorial representation of components. Selected I/O points being controlled or monitored for each piece of equipment
AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE CONTROLS
230900 - 11
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE CONTROLS SECTION 230900
shall be displayed with the appropriate engineering units. Animation shall be used for rotation or moving mechanical components to enhance usability. Minimum System Color Graphics: Color graphics shall be selected and displayed via a web browser for the following: Each piece of equipment monitored or controlled including each terminal unit Each building Each floor and zone controlled Supply instrument air from compressor units through filter, pressure-reducing valve, and pressure relief valve, with pressure gages and shutoff and bypass valves. Zone Setpoint Adjustments: Color floor plans displayed via the workstation shall utilize a contiguous band of colors, each corresponding to actual zone temperatures relative to the desired heating and cooling setpoints. The ideal temperature shall be shown as a green color band. Temperatures slightly warmer than ideal shall be shown in yellow, and even warmer temperature band shall be shown in orange. Temperatures slightly cooler than ideal shall be light blue, and even cooler temperatures shall be shown as dark blue. All alarm colors shall be in red. Active Zone Graphic Setpoint Controls: Utilizing a mouse, it shall be possible to select occupied or unoccupied setpoints (corresponding to the floor plan colors) and drag the color slide bar(s) to increase or decrease heating and cooling setpoints. In addition to the slide bars, an operator may type the numeric value of the heating and cooling setpoints. The floor plan graphic shall then change colors on a zone-by-zone basis to reflect the actual temperature in each zone relative to the changed heating or cooling setpoint. Hierarchical Schedules: Utilizing the Navigation Tree displayed in the web browser GUI, an operator (with password access) shall be able to define a Normal, Holiday or Override schedule for an individual piece of equipment or room, or choose to apply a hierarchical schedule to the entire system, site or floor area. For example, Independence Day 'Holiday' for every level in the system would be created by clicking at the top of the geographic hierarchy defined in the Navigation Tree. No further operator intervention would be required and every control module in the system with would be automatically downloaded with the Independence Day' Holiday. All schedules that affect the system/area/equipment highlighted in the Navigation Tree shall be shown in a summary schedule table and graph. BACnet Schedules: Schedules shall comply with the BACnet standard, (Schedule Object, Calendar Object, Weekly Schedule property and Exception Schedule property) and shall allow events to be scheduled based on: Types of schedule shall be Normal, Holiday or Override. A specific dates A range of dates. Any combination of Month of Year (1-12, any), Week of Month (1-5, last, any), Day of Week (M-Sun, Any) Wildcard (example, allow combinations like second Tuesday of every month). Schedule Categories: The system shall allow operators to define and edit scheduling categories (different types of "things" to be scheduled; for example, lighting, HVAC occupancy,
AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE CONTROLS
230900 - 12
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE CONTROLS SECTION 230900
etc.). The categories shall include: name, description, icon (to display in the hierarchy tree when icon option is selected) and type of value to be scheduled. Schedule Groups: In addition to hierarchical scheduling, operators shall be able to define functional Schedule Groups, comprised of an arbitrary group of areas/rooms/equipment scattered throughout the facility and site. For example, the operator shall be able to define an `individual tenant' group - who may occupy different areas within a building or buildings. Schedules applied to the 'tenant group' shall automatically be downloaded to control modules affecting spaces occupied by the 'tenant group'. Intelligent Scheduling: The control system shall be intelligent enough to automatically turn on any supporting equipment needed to control the environment in an occupied space. If the operator schedules an individual room in a unitary system for occupancy, for example, the control logic shall automatically turn on the unitary air handling unit, cooling tower, boiler, and/or any other equipment required to maintain the specified comfort and environmental conditions within the room. Partial Day Exceptions: Schedule events shall be able to accommodate a time range specified by the operator (ex: board meeting from 6 PM to 9 PM overrides Normal schedule for conference room). Schedule Summary Graph: The schedule summary graph shall clearly show Normal versus Holiday versus Override Schedules, and the net operating schedule that results from all contributing schedules. Note: In case of priority conflict between schedules at the different geographic hierarchy, the schedule for the more detailed geographic level shall apply. Schedule Distribution: For reliability and performance, instead of maintaining a single schedule in a field device that writes over the network to notify other devices when a scheduled event occurs, field devices will only keep their part of the schedule locally. The BAS server software shall determine which nodes a hierarchical schedule applies to and will create/modify the necessary schedule objects in each field device as necessary. Events ( & Alarms): Events and alarms associated with a specific system, area, or equipment selected in the Navigation Tree, shall be displayed in the Action Pane by selecting an `Events' view. Events, alarms, and reporting actions shall have the following capabilities: Events View: Each event shall display an Event Category (using a different icon for each event category), date/time of occurrence, current status, event report, and a bold URL link to the associated graphic for the selected system, area or equipment. The URL link shall indicate the system location, address and other pertinent information. An operator shall easily be able to sort events, edit event templates and categories, acknowledge or force a return to normal in the Events View as specified in this section. Event Categories: The operator shall be able to create, edit or delete event categories such as HVAC, Maintenance, Fire, or Generator. An icon shall be associated with each Event category, enabling the operator to easily sort through multiple events displayed. BACnet Event Templates: BACnet Event template shall define different types of alarms and their associated properties. As a minimum, properties shall include a reference name, verbose description, severity of event, acknowledgement requirements, high/low limit and out of range information. Event Areas: Event Areas enable an operator to assign specific Event Categories to specific Event Reporting Actions. For example, it shall be possible for an operator to assign all HVAC Maintenance events on the first floor of a building to email the technician responsible for maintenance. The Navigation Tree shall be used to setup Event Areas in the Graphic Pane.
AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE CONTROLS
230900 - 13
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE CONTROLS SECTION 230900
Event Time/Date Stamp: All events shall be generated at the DDC control module level and comprise the Time/Date Stamp using the standalone control module time and date. Event Configuration: Operators shall be able to define the type of events generated per BACnet object. A `network' view of the Navigation Tree shall expose all BACnet objects and their respective Event Configuration. Configuration shall include assignment of event, alarm, type of Acknowledgement and notification for return to normal or fault status. Event Summary Counter: The view of events in the Graphic Pane shall provide a numeric counter, indicating how many events are active (in alarm), require acknowledgement, and total number of events in the BAS Server database. Event Auto-Deletion: Events that are acknowledged and closed, shall be auto-deleted from the database and archived to a text file after an operator-defined period. Event Reporting Actions: Event Reporting Actions specified shall be automatically launched (under certain conditions) after an event is received by the BAS server software. Operators shall be able to easily define these Reporting Actions using the Navigation Tree and Graphic Pane through the web browser GUI. Reporting Actions shall be as follows: Print: Alarm/Event information shall be printed to the BAS server's PC or a networked printer. Email: Email shall be sent via any POP3-compatible e-mail server (most Internet Service Providers use POP3). Email messages may be copied to several email accounts. Note: Email reporting action shall also be used to support alphanumeric paging services, where email servers support pagers. File Write: The ASCII File write reporting action shall enable the operator to append operator defined alarm information to any alarm through a text file. The alarm information that is written to the file shall be completely definable by the operator. The operator may enter text or attach other data point information (such as AHU discharge temperature and fan condition upon a high room temperature alarm). Write Property: The write property reporting action updates a property value in a hardware module. SNMP: The Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) reporting action sends an SNMP trap to a network in response to receiving an event. Run External Program: The Run External Program reporting action launches specified program in response to an event. Event Simulator: The web browser GUI user shall provide an Event Simulator to test assigned Reporting Actions. The operator shall have the option of using current time or scheduling a specific time to generate the Event. Utilizing the Navigation Tree and drop-down menus in the Graphic Pane, the operator shall be able to select the Event Type, Status, Notification, Priority, Message, and whether acknowledgement is required. Trends: Trends shall conform to the BACnet Trend Log Object specification. Trends shall both be displayed and user configurable through the workstation. Trends shall comprise analog, digital or calculated points simultaneously. A trend log's properties shall be editable using the Navigation Tree and Graphic Pane. Viewing Trends: The operator shall have the ability to view trends by using the Navigation Tree and selecting a Trends button in the Graphic Pane. The system shall allow y- and x-axis maximum ranges to be specified and shall be able to simultaneously graphically display multiple trends per graph.
AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE CONTROLS
230900 - 14
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE CONTROLS SECTION 230900
Local Trends: Trend data shall be collected locally by Multi¬EquipmentlSingle Equipment general-purpose controllers, and periodically uploaded to the BAS server if historical trending is enabled for the BACnet object. Trend data, including run time hours and start time date shall be retained in non-volatile module memory. Systems that rely on a gateway/router to run trends are NOT acceptable. Resolution. Sample intervals shall be as small as one second. Each trended point will have the ability to be trended at a different trend interval. When multiple points are selected for display that have different trend intervals, the system will automatically scale the axis. Dynamic Update. Trends shall be able to dynamically update at operator¬defined intervals Zoom/Pan. It shall be possible to zoom-in on a particular section of a trend for more detailed examination and 'pan through' historical data by simply scrolling the mouse. Numeric Value Display. It shall be possible to pick any sample on a trend and have the numerical value displayed. Copy/Paste. The operator must have the ability to pan through a historical trend and copy the data viewed to the clipboard using standard keystrokes (i.e. CTRL+C, CTRL+V). Security Access Security access from the workstation GUI to existing EBI server shall require a Login Name and Password. Access to different areas of the BAS system shall be defined in terms of Roles, Privileges and geographic area of responsibility as specified: Roles: Roles shall reflect the actual roles of different types of operators. Each role shall comprise a set of 'easily understood English language' privileges. Roles shall be defined in terms of View, Edit and Function Privileges. View Privileges shall comprise: Navigation, Network, and Configuration Trees, Operators, Roles and Privileges, Alarm/Event Template and Reporting Action. Edit Privileges shall comprise: Setpoint, Tuning and Logic, Manual Override, and Point Assignment Parameters. Function Privileges shall comprise: Alarm/Event Acknowledgement, Control Module Memory Download, Upload, Schedules, Schedule Groups, Manual Commands, Print, and Alarm/Event Maintenance. Geographic Assignment of Roles: Roles shall be geographically assigned using a similar expandable/collapsible navigation tree. For example, it shall be possible to assign two HVAC Technicians with similar competencies (and the same operator defined HVAC Role) to different areas of the system. 3.3
GRAPHICAL PROGRAMMING
All new graphics shall reside on the existing EBI database and be accessible via all operator workstations currently monitoring the existing BAS system. For each piece of HVAC equipment, the entire graphic program shall be displayed through the Web Browser GUI. The operator must have the ability to scroll through the entire `live' graphic program as necessary. Piecemeal graphic programs that only show one part of HVAC equipment program at any one time are NOT acceptable. For example, when viewing an AHU live graphic program, the operator shall see the entire AHU graphic program, not just the Heating Coil control.
AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE CONTROLS
230900 - 15
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE CONTROLS SECTION 230900
PART 4 - PRODUCTS HARDWARE 4.1
BAS WORKSTATION HARDWARE Computer Configuration:
Workstation. The BAS Contractor shall provide the following components as a minimum: 1 GHz, Plll or higher CPU (or non-Intel platform equivalent to this). 512 Mb of RAM minimum, 1 Gb RAM preferred. 180 gigabyte hard disk, 1.44M 3 '/A" floppy drive, SVGA Card with 1024 x 768, 24-bit True Color, lomega 100MB Zip Drive or Back-up system of customer's choice, 24X CD ROM Drive, 17" SVGA Color Monitor, Keyboard and mouse, 56Kbps EIA-232C Modem with automatic answer/originate capability. Operating system for the computer operator workstation server shall be Microsoft Windows NT 4.0, 2000 or XP. Internet Explorer 5.5 or later. 10Base-T Ethernet Port. Printer capable of providing letter quality print (a color printer is preferred). Note: For reporting alarms, a printer capable of handling fanfold paper is desirable. 4.2
NETWORK ROUTES & BRIDGES
The controller network shall use BACnet as its native communication protocol. Network bridges and routers must be of a modular design to ensure reliability and system performance. BACnet Router: The central system shall use the building Local Area Network (LAN) for communication. The communication between the central server and the controllers shall be BACnet1IP. A router shall be provided, as required, to bridge BACnet11P and the data link used between the controllers (BACnet over ARCNET or MS/TP). Proprietary protocols are NOT acceptable. BACnet BIBBS: BACnet Routers must use BACnet as the native communication protocol and must, as a minimum, support the following BIBBS: Data Sharing: DS-RP-A, B, DS-RPM-B, DS-WP-A, B, DS-WPM-B, DS-COVU-A, B. Alarm Event: AE-N-B, AE-ACK-B, AE-ASUM-B. Device Man.: DM-DDB-A, B, DM-DOB-B, DM-DCC-B. Network Man.: NM-RC-A. Firmware Updates. The BACnet Router utilizes FLASH memory to allow firmware updates to be performed remotely. 4.3
STANDALONE CONTROLLERS General Purpose Multiple Application Controllers:
BACnet B1BBS: General Purpose Multiple Application controllers must use BACnet as the native communication protocol between controllers and must, as a minimum, support the following BIBBS:
AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE CONTROLS
230900 - 16
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE CONTROLS SECTION 230900
Data Sharing: DS-RP-A, DS-RPM-B, DS-WP-A, B, DS-WPM-B,D¬COVUA,B. Alarm Event: AE-N-B, AE-ACK-B, AE-ASUM-B. Schedule: SCHED-B. Trend: T-VMT-BT-ATR-B. Device Man: DM_DDB-A, B, DM-DOB,V, DM-DCC-B DM-TS-B, DM-UTC¬B, DM-RD-B. Communication Speed: Controllers shall communicate at a minimum of 156 Kbps using MS/TP implemented over EIA-485 using a shielded twisted pair at the Data Link Layer. General Specification: Each General Purpose Multiple Application Controller must be capable of standalone direct digital operation utilizing its own 32 bit processor, non-volatile flash memory, input/output, 12 bit A to D conversion, hardware clock/calendar and voltage transient and lightning protection devices. A separate co-processor shall be used for communications to the controller network. All non-volatile flash memory shall have a battery backup of at least five years. Firmware revisions to the module shall be made from the BAS server or remotely over the Intranet or Internet. Controllers that require component changes to implement firmware revisions are NOT acceptable. Point Programming: All point data, algorithms and application software within a controller shall be custom programmable from the operator workstation. Program Execution: Each General Purpose Multiple Application Controller shall execute application programs, calculations, and commands via a 32-bit microcomputer resident in the controller. All operating parameters for application programs residing in each controller shall be stored in read/write able nonvolatile flash memory within the controller and will be able to upload/download to/from the BAS Server. Self-Test Diagnostics: Each controller shall include self-test diagnostics, enabling the controller to report malfunctions to the router and BAS Server. PID Loops: Each General Purpose Multiple Application Controller shall contain both software and firmware to perform full DDC Proportional, Integral, Derivative (P1D) control loops and programs. Input-Output Processing: Digital Outputs shall be relays, 24 Volts AC or DC maximum, 3 amp maximum current. Each configured as normally open or normally closed using jumpers and provides dry contacts. Each output shall have a manual Hand-Off-Auto switch for local override and an LED to indicate the operating mode. Triac outputs are NOT acceptable. Universal Inputs shall be Thermistor (BAPI Curve II) 10K Ohm at 77°F (25°C), 0-5VDC, 10K Ohm maximum source impedance, 0-20mA – 24 VDC loop power, 250 Ohm input impedance, dry contact - 0.5mA maximum current. Analog Output shall be electronic, voltage mode 0-10VDC or current mode 4-20mA. Analog Pneumatic Outputs shall be 0-20psi. Each pneumatic output shall have a feedback transducer to be used in the system for any software programming needs. The feedback transducer shall measure the actual psi output value and not a calculated value. Each output shall have a manual override switch that will allow each output to be configured in one of three ways: open, closed, or automatic operation. An LED shall indicate the state of each output. General Purpose Single Application Controllers: BACnet BIBBS: The General Purpose Single Application Controllers must use BACnet as the native communication protocol between controllers and must, as a minimum, support the following BIBBS: Data Sharing: DS-RP-A, B, DS-RPM-B, DS-WP-A, B, DS-WPM-B, DS¬COVU-A, B. Alarm Event: AE-N-B, AE-ACK-B, AE-ASUM-B. Schedule: SCHED-B.
AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE CONTROLS
230900 - 17
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE CONTROLS SECTION 230900
Trend: T-VMT-BT-ATR-B. Device Man.: DM-DDB-A, B, DM-DOB-B, DM-DCC-B DM-TS-B, DM-UTC¬B, DM-RD-B. Communication Speed: Controllers shall communicate at a minimum of 156 Kbps using MSITP implemented over EIA-485 using an unshielded twisted pair at the Data Link Layer. General Specification: General Purpose Single Application controllers must be capable of stand-alone DDC operation utilizing its own 32 bit processor, nonvolatile flash memory, input/output, 8 bit A to D conversion, hardware clock/calendar and voltage transient protection devices. A separate co¬processor shall be used for communications to the controller network. All RAM memory shall have a battery backup of at least five years. Firmware revisions to the module shall be made from the BAS server, or remote locations over the Internet. Controllers that require component changes to implement Firmware revisions are NOT acceptable. Point Programming: All point data, algorithms, and application software within the controllers shall be custom programmable from the Operator Workstation. Program Execution: Each General Purpose Single Application Controller shall execute application programs, calculations, and commands via a 32-bit microcomputer resident in the controller. All operating parameters for the application program residing in each controller shall be stored in read/write able nonvolatile flash memory within the controller and will be able to upload/download to/from the Operator Workstation. Self-Test Diagnostics: Each controller shall include self-test diagnostics, enabling the controller to report malfunctions to the router and BAS Server input. PID Loops: Each General Purpose Single Application Controller shall contain both software and firmware to perform full DDC PID control loops. Rooftop Mounting. The General Purpose Single Application Controllers shall be capable of being mounted directly in or on rooftop AHU equipment. Operating Temperature. The General Purpose Single Application Controllers shall be capable of proper operation in an ambient temperature environment of - 20°F to +150°F (-28.9° to 65.6°C). Input-Output Processing: Digital Outputs shall be relays, 24 Volts AC or DC maximum, 3 anip maximum current. Triac outputs are NOT acceptable. Universal Inputs shall be Thermistor (BAR Curve II) 10K Ohm at 77FF (25L1C), 0-5VDC 10K Ohm maximum source impedance, 0-20mA - 24 VDC loop power, 250 Ohm input impedance, Dry Contact - 0.5mA maximum current. Analog Electronic Outputs shall be voltage mode 0-1 OVDC or current mode 4-20mA. Enhanced Zone Sensor Input shall provide one thermistor input, one local setpoint adjustment, one timed local override switch, and an occupancy LED indicator.
4.4
BUILDING SYSTEMS INTEGRATION Protocol Translator Module:
The BAS System shall establish a seamless interconnection with other building, electrical andlor mechanical subsystems as well as other manufacturers control systems using a Protocol Translator as specified below and related equipment sections of the specification. These systems shall be controlled, monitored, and graphically programmed with the same Graphical Programming Language (GPL) used for all other control modules
AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE CONTROLS
230900 - 18
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE CONTROLS SECTION 230900
System Information. All system information specified in the I/O Point Summary and related documents shall be available to the BAS server. PTM Specification: The PTM shall be a microprocessor based communication device designed to provide seamless, two-way translation between two or more standard or non¬standard protocols. The PTM shall be available for a variety of Data LinklPhysical Layer configurations including PTP (point-to-point) via EIA-232, MSITP via EIA-485, ARCNET and Ethernet. In addition to BACnet, the PTM shall also support other protocols including Modbus, J-Bus and other protocols as specified herein for electrical mechanical subsystems. The PTM shall have at least three communication ports. One shall be for communication between native BACnet controllers residing on the controller network. The other two ports shall have the ability to be configured for different protocols. The PTM shall provide full custom programmability of the data flowing between the networks using the same graphical programming as specified herein. The system shall have the ability to create custom building control strategies using global data between networks. 4.5
FIELD HARDWARE /INSTRUMENTATION Duct Immersion Sensors:
Sensors shall be 1000 ohm balco resistance elements for direct to single or dual input controllers. They shall be of a fixed range. Calibration shall be from the controller location. If sensors are furnished requiring field calibration, provide a thermometer adjacent to the sensor location. Temperature sensors shall have a minimum accuracy of 0.5°F over an operating range of up to -40°F to +240°F (¬40°C to 115°C). Differential Pressure/Flow Switches: Switches shall be UL listed, adjustable setpoint, differential pressure type. Select switches for accuracy with ranges and dead band to match process conditions, electrical requirements, and to implement the intended functions. Acceptable are steam and water Pressure applications Modus, Setra & Foxboro series or approved equal. For fractional horsepower and not-deducted fans, current sensing relays may be used. Air filter differential switches shall be piped across filter. Differential pressure switch maximum pressure rating shall be at least 10"WG. Wall Mounted CO2 Transmitter: Unit shall be wall mounted for measuring and transmitting CO2 levels ranging from 0 to 2,000 PPM. Units shall be designed to interface with DDC/ATC system. Unit shall utilize a class 2, 24VDCNAC power source and generate an output signal proportional to the CO2 level detected, Unit shall be a diffusion-aspirated, single-beam dual-wavelength sensor consisting of an infrared source, a sample cell, a tunable interference filter and an infrared detector. The tunableinterference filter shall enable measurement at two wavelengths. Unit shall be dust and water vapor proof. Smoke Detectors:
AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE CONTROLS
230900 - 19
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE CONTROLS SECTION 230900
Duct smoke detectors shall be furnished by the Electrical Contractor. Mounting shall be by the Mechanical Contractor and wiring to the Fire alarm System and Fan starter shall be by the Electrical Contractor. Wiring into the DDC system shall be by the A.T.C. contractor. Current Switch Inputs: The MSDC shall be capable of accommodating a normally open dry contact input for monitoring status inputs, or totalizing pulses from demand meters. Pulse inputs shall be measured at a rate of up to 5 Hz with a duty cycle rate between 40% and 60%; and at a minimum frequency of 1 pulse every 30 minutes. Current switch shall be manufactured by Veris, Hawkeye or approved equal. Relay Contact Outputs: The MSDC shall have SPDT contact outputs for the control of on/off devices and equipment. The status of each of the Form-C type relay contact outputs will be indicated by an LED. The contact outputs will be rated for 3 amps @ 24 VAC or 24VDC, 1 amp @ 120VAC, or 0.5 amp @ 240VAC. Transmitters (SP or DP): Transmitters shall be +1- 1% design including field adjustable calibration and 4¬20ma loop. Transmitters shall be Tech Air Systems represented by Air Technologies, Inc. (973) 857-7787 or by BCT, Inc. (973) 633-7730. Control Valves: Control valves shall be two-way or three-way pattern as shown, constructed for tight shutoff and shall operate satisfactorily against system pressures and differentials. Two-way control valves shall exhibit equal percentage characteristics. Non-equal percentage valve characteristics shall not be acceptable. Valves with size up to and including 2" shall be "screwed" with 250 psi ANSI pressure body rating; 2-112" and larger valves shall be 'flanged' configuration. Proportional control valves shall be sized for a maximum pressure drop of 4.0 psig at rated flow (except as noted). Two-position control valves shall be line size and shall be provided with a 250 psi static pressure body rating. Provide factory-fabricated control valves of type, body material and pressure class indicated. Where type or body material is not indicated, provide selection as determined by manufacturer for installation requirements and pressure class, based on maximum pressure and temperature rating of piping system. Except as otherwise indicated, provide valves which mate and match material of connecting piping. Equip control valves with control valve actuators. Valves and actuators shall be capable of proper operation when subjected to pressures equal to full shut-off head of system fluid circulating pump. Water Service Valves: Equal percentage characteristics with rangeability of 50 to 1, and maximum full flow pressure drop of 3 psig. Single-Seated Valves: Cage type trim, providing seating and guiding surfaces for plug on "top and bottom" guided plugs. Double-Seated Valves: Balanced plug-type, with cage type trim providing seating and guiding surfaces for plugs on "top and bottom" guided plugs. Packing: Spring-loaded Teflon, self-adjusting.
AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE CONTROLS
230900 - 20
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE CONTROLS SECTION 230900
Valves 2 inch and smaller in liquid (water source closed heat pump loop and hot water systems) service shall have bronze bodies and threaded ends. Liquid service valves of over 2 inch size shall have cast iron bodies and flanged ends. Control valves shall be globe pattern, except as otherwise indicated. Control valves shall be capable of being serviced including replacement of packing, stems and discs. Floating Valve Actuators or Ball Valves are NOT acceptable. Valve and Damper Actuators: Electronic direct-coupled actuation shall be provided. The actuator shall be direct-coupled over the shaft, enabling it to be mounted directly to the damper shaft without the need for connecting linkage. The fastening clamp assemble shall be of a 'V' bolt design with associated 'V' shaped toothed cradle attaching to the shaft for maximum strength and eliminating slippage. Spring return actuators shall have a 'V' clamp assembly of sufficient size to be directly mounted to an integral jackshaft of up to 1.05inches when the damper is constructed in this manner. Single bolt or screw type fasteners are not acceptable. Electronic Direct-Coupled. Electronic direct-coupled actuation shall be provided. Actuator Mounting. The actuator shall be direct-coupled over the shaft, enabling it to be mounted directly to the damper shaft. The fastening clamp assemble shall be of a 'V' bolt design with associated 'V' shaped toothed cradle attaching to the shaft for maximum strength and eliminating slippage. Spring return actuators shall have a 'V' clamp assembly of sufficient size to be directly mounted to an integral jackshaft of up to 1.05 inches when the damper is constructed in this manner. Single bolt or screw type fasteners are not acceptable Electronic Overload Sensing. The actuator shall have electronic overload or digital rotation sensing circuitry to prevent damage to the actuator throughout the entire rotation of the actuator. Mechanical end switches or magnetic clutch to deactivate the actuator at the end of rotation are not acceptable. Power Failure/Safety Applications. For power failure/safety applications, an internal mechanical spring return mechanism shall be built into the actuator housing. Non-mechanical forms of fail-safe operation are not acceptable. Spring Return Actuators. All spring return actuators shall be capable of both clockwise or counterclockwise spring return operation by simply changing the mounting orientation. Proportional Actuators. Proportional actuators shall accept a 0 to 1OVDC or 0 to 20mA control input and provide a 2 to 1OVDC or 4 to 20mA operating range. An actuator capable of accepting a pulse width modulating control signal and providing full proportional operation of the damper is acceptable. 24 Volts (AC/DC) actuators. All 24VAC/DC actuators shall operate on Class 2 wiring and shall not require more than 10VA for AC or more than 8 watts for DC applications. Actuators operating on 120VAC power shall not require more than 10VA. Actuators operating on 230VAC shall not require more than 11 VA. Modulating Actuators. All modulating actuators shall have an external, built-in switch to allow reversing direction of rotation. Conduit Fitting & Pre-Wiring. Actuators shall be provided with a conduit fitting and a minimum 3ft electrical cable, and shall be pre-wired to eliminate the necessity of opening the actuator housing to make electrical connections. U.L. Listing. Actuators shall be Underwriters Laboratories Standard 873 listed and Canadian Standards Association Class 4813 02 certified as meeting correct safety requirements and recognized industry standards. Floating Valve Actuators Non-spring return actuators are NOT acceptable.
AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE CONTROLS
230900 - 21
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE CONTROLS SECTION 230900
Warranty. Actuators shall be designed for a minimum of 60,000 full stroke cycles at the actuator's rated torque and shall have a 2-year manufacturer's warranty, starting from the date of installation. Manufacturer shall be IS09001 certified. Motorized Control Dampers: Motorized dampers shall be parallel blade for two-position control and opposed blade for proportional control applications. Dampers shall be black enamel finish or galvanized, with nylon bearings. Blade edge and tip seals shall be included for all dampers. Leakage through the damper shall not exceed 20 CFM per square foot at 4" w.g. (based on a 48" x 48" test sample). Blades shall be 16 gauge minimum and 10" wide maximum and frame shall be of welded channel iron. Dampers with both dimensions under 18" may have strap iron frames. Dampers over 48" wide shall be equipped with a jack shaft to provide sufficient force throughout the intended operating range. Control Dampers: Provide automatic control dampers as part of the work of this section of the specifications unless specifically noted otherwise. Damper frames shall be not less than formed 13-ga galvanized steel. Provide mounting holes for enclosed duct mounting. Provide damper blades not less than formed 16-ga galvanized steel, with maximum blade width of 8". Equip dampers with actuators, with proper rating for each application. Secure blades to 1/2" diameter zincplated axles using zinc plated hardware. Seal off against spring stainless steel blade bearings. Provide blade bearings of nylon and provide thrust bearings at each end of every blade. Construct blade linkage hardware of zinc-plated steel and brass. Submit leakage and flow characteristics, plus size schedule for controlled dampers. Operating Temperature Range: From minus 20°F to 200°F (- 29°F to 93°F). For standard applications as indicated, provide parallel or opposed blade design (as selected by manufacturer's sizing techniques) with neoprene blade seals and compressible metal jamb seals. For "ultra-low leakage" dampers, provide parallel or opposed blade design (as selected by manufacturer's sizing techniques) with inflatable vinyl blade edge seals and compressible metal jamb seals, rated for leakage at less than 0.10% per AMCA Standard 500.
PART 5 - DDC SOFTWARE 5.1
OVERVIEW
The system shall continuously perform Direct Digital Control (DDC) functions at the local control module in a stand-alone mode. Using Graphical Programming, the operator shall be able to design and modify control sequence of operation and all tuning parameters. Minimum Function: Each control module shall perform the following functions: Identify, time date stamp and report BACnet events. Execute all application programs specified. Execute DDC algorithms.
AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE CONTROLS
230900 - 22
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE CONTROLS SECTION 230900
Trend and store data. Control Failure Mode: In the event of a control module failure, all points under its control shall be commanded to the failure mode as indicated on the I/O Summary Table. All DDC software shall reside in the respective control module. Orderly Shutdown. Power failures shall cause the control module to go into an orderly shutdown with no loss of program memory. Automatic Restart. Upon resumption of power, the control module shall automatically restart and print out the time and date of the power failure and restoration at the respective Workstation system. Automatic Restart. The restart program shall automatically restart affected field equipment. The operator shall be able to define an automatic power up time delay for each piece of equipment under control. PART 6 - APPLICATIONS SOFTWARE 6.1
GENERAL
All software application algorithms described below MUST reside at the local MultiApplication or Single-Application Controller level. Systems that rely on a workstation PC, server or router to perform these functions are NOT acceptable. The following applications software shall be provided for the purpose of optimizing energy consumption while maintaining occupant comfort: Time of Day Scheduling (TOD): The system shall be capable of the following scheduling features: Schedule by Type. Scheduling by building, area, zone, groups of zones, individually controlled equipment and groups of individually controlled equipment. Each schedule shall provide beginning and ending dates and times (hours: minutes). A weekly repeating schedule, i.e. between 8:00 a.m. and 5:00 p.m., Monday through Friday shall constitute one schedule. Schedule in Advance. Dated schedules shall be entered up to 9 (nine) years in advance. Self-Deleting. Schedules shall be self-deleting when effective dates have passed. Leap Year. Leap years shall be adjusted automatically without operator intervention. Optimum Start/Stop (OSS)/Optimum Enable/Disable (OED): This application provides software to start and stop equipment on a sliding schedule based on the individual zone temperature and the water source closed heat pump loop capacity in °F/hour of the equipment serving that zone. The water source closed heat pump loop capacity value shall be operator adjustable. Temperature compensated peak demand limiting shall remain in effect during morning start up to avoid setting a demand peak. Source Temperature Optimization (STD):
AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE CONTROLS
230900 - 23
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE CONTROLS SECTION 230900
The system shall automatically perform source optimization for all air handling units, water source closed heat pump loop and boilers in response to the needs of other downstream pieces of equipment, by increasing or decreasing supply temperature setpoints, i.e. closed loop water, discharge air, etc. using owner defined parameters. In addition to optimization, the STO capability shall also provide for starting and stopping primary mechanical equipment based on zone occupancy and/or zone load conditions. Setpoint Reset. The STO program will allow setpoints for various equipment in the heating/cooling chain to be reset between an operator defined maximum and a minimum setpoint based on the actual requirements of the building zones. The actual setpoint shall be calculated based on the number of heating or cooling requests which are currently being received from the equipment or zones served. Once every update period, the STO program surveys the network to see if any piece of equipment requires any additional heating or cooling from its source. As an example, a VAV air handler is the source of cold air for a number of VAV boxes. Assume that the STO program for the air handler has the following parameters established for it by the owner: Optimized Setpoint Description: Initial setpoint is 60.00. Max. setpoint is 65.00. Min. setpoint is 55.00. Every 2.0 mins, trim by 0.25 and respond by -0.50 but no more than 2.0. Every two minutes, the STO program will total up all of the requests and calculate a new setpoint. New setpoint = prey setpoint + 'trim by' + ('respond by' x no. of req.). Assuming four requests were received and the previous setpoint was 57.00 degrees, the new setpoint would be. New setpoint = 57.00 + 0.25 + (-0.50 x 4) = 55.25 Deg F. If (the number of requests received) x (the 'respond by' value) > (the 'but no more than' value), use the 'but no more than' value inside the parenthesis in the above calculation. Demand Limiting (DL) – Temperature Compensated: The DL application shall be programmable for a minimum of six separate time of day kW demand billing rate periods. The system shall be capable of measuring electrical usage from multiple meters serving one building and each piece of equipment being controlled on the LAN shall be programmable to respond to the peak demand information from its respective meter. Sliding Window. The demand control function shall utilize a sliding window method with the operator being able to establish the kilowatt threshold for a minimum of three adjustable demand levels. The sliding window interval shall be operator selectable in increments of one minute, up to 60 minutes. Systems that incorporate rotating shed tables are NOT acceptable. Setpoints for Defined Demand Level. The operator shall have the capability to set the Individual equipment temperature setpoints for each operator defined demand level. Equipment shall not be shed if these reset setpoints are not satisfied; rather the setpoint shall be revised for the different established demand levels. The system shall have failed meter protection, such that when a kW pulse is not received from the utility within an operator adjustable time period, an alarm will be generated. The system software will automatically default to a predetermined fail-safe shed level. Information Archiving. The system shall have the ability to archive demand and usage information for use at a later time. System shall permit the operator access to this information on a current day, month to date and a year to date basis.
AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE CONTROLS
230900 - 24
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE CONTROLS SECTION 230900
Day/Night Setback (DNS): The system shall allow the space temperature to drift down [up] within a preset [adjustable] unoccupied temperature range. The heating [cooling] shall be activated upon reaching either end of the DNS range and shall remain activated until the space temperature returns to the DNS range. Outside & Exhaust Air. The system shall be capable of closing all outside air and exhaust air dampers during the unoccupied period, except for 100% outside air units. Unoccupied Space Temperature. Unoccupied space temperature shall be monitored by the DDC temperature sensors located in the individual zones being controlled or within a representative room. Parameter Changes. Operator shall be able to define, modify or delete the following parameters. DNS setpoint temperature(s) Temperature band for night heating operation Period when the DNS is to be activated Time Local Override (TLO): The system shall have TLO input points that permit the occupants to request an override of equipment that has been scheduled OFF. The system shall turn the equipment ON upon receiving a request from the local input device. Local input devices shall be push button (momentary contact), wind-up timer, or ONIOFF switches as detailed in the 110 summary. Equipment On Time. If a push button is used the system operator shall be able to define the duration of equipment ON time per input pulse and the total maximum ON time permitted. The input point will cancel override time already entered. If a wind-up timer is used the equipment will stay in override mode until the timer expires. Year to date, month-to-date and current day override history shall be maintained for each TLO input point. History data shall be accessible by the operator at any time and shall be capable of being automatically stored on hard disk and or printed on a daily basis. Space Temperature Control (STC): There shall be two space temperature setpoints, one for cooling and one for heating, separated by a dead band. Only one of the two setpoints shall be operative at any time. The cooling setpoint is operative if the actual space temperature has more recently been equal to or greater than the cooling setpoint. The heating setpoint is operative if the actual space temperature has more recently been equal to or less than the heating setpoint. There are two modes of operation for the setpoints, one for the occupied mode (example: heating = 72CIF or 2211C, cooling = 767F or 24.4'C) and one for the unoccupied mode (example: heating = 55,1F or 12.7 IC, cooling = 90HF or 32-1C). Schedule. The occupied/unoccupied modes may be scheduled by time, date, or day of week. Color Code. One of seven colors shall be generated to represent the comfort conditions in the space, and shall be displayed graphically at the operator station. If the actual space temperature is in the dead band between the heating setpoint and the cooling setpoint, the color displayed shall be green for the occupied mode, representing ideal comfort conditions. If in the unoccupied mode, the color displayed shall be gray representing 'after-hours' conditions.
AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE CONTROLS
230900 - 25
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE CONTROLS SECTION 230900
If the space temperature rises above the cooling setpoint, the color shall change to yellow. Upon further rise beyond the cooling setpoint plus an offset, the color shall change to orange. Upon further rise beyond the cooling setpoint plus the yellow band offset, plus the orange band offset, the color shall change to red indicating unacceptable high temperature conditions. At this point an alarm shall be generated to notify the operator. When space temperature falls below the heating setpoint, the color shall change to light blue. Upon further temperature decrease below the heating setpoint minus an offset, the color shall change to dark blue. Upon further space temperature decrease below the heating setpoint minus the light blue band offset minus the dark blue band offset the color shall change to red indicating unacceptable low temperature conditions. At this point an alarm shall be generated to notify the operator. Operator Definable. All setpoints and offsets shall be operator definable. When in the occupied mode, start-up mode, or when heating or cooling during the night setback unoccupied mode, a request shall be sent over the network to other equipment in the HVAC chain, such as to an AHU fan that serves the space, to run for ventilation. The operator shall be able to disable this request function if desired. Additional Cooling. When comfort conditions are warmer than ideal, indicated by the colors yellow, orange, and high temperature red, a request for additional cooling shall be sent over the network to other cooling equipment in the HVAC chain, such as the cooling tower. This information is to be used for optimization of equipment in the HVAC chain. The operator shall be able to disable this function if desired. Additional Heating. When comfort conditions are cooler than ideal; indicated by the colors light blue, dark blue, and low temperature red; a request for additional heating shall be sent over the network to other heating equipment in the HVAC chain, such as a boiler. This information is to be used for optimization of equipment in the HVAC chain. The operator shall be able to disable this function if desired. J. Cooling/Heating Setpoints. The cooling (and heating) setpoints may be increased (decreased) under demand control conditions to reduce the cooling (heating) load on the building during the demand control period. Up to three levels of demand control strategy shall be provided. The operator may predefine the amount of setpoint increase [decrease] for each of the three levels. Each space temperature sensor in the building may be programmed independently. Optimum Start. An optimum start-up program transitions from the unoccupied setpoints to the occupied setpoints. The optimum start-up algorithm considers the rate of space temperature rise for heating and the rate of space temperature fall for cooling under nominal outside temperature conditions; it also considers the outside temperature; and the heat loss and gain coefficients of the space envelope (AI: Space Temperature). PID Loop. A PID control loop, comparing the actual space temperature to its setpoint, shall modulate the dampers [and heating coil valve or heating stages in sequence] to achieve the setpoint target.
END OF SECTION 230900
AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE CONTROLS
230900 - 26
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
HYDRONIC PIPING SECTION 232111
SECTION 232111 – HYDRONIC PIPING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 A.
1.2 A.
RELATED DOCUMENTS Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. SUMMARY This Section includes piping systems for hot water heating, chilled water cooling, and condenser water systems; makeup water for these systems; blow-down drain lines; and air conditioning condensate drain piping. Piping materials and equipment specified in this Section include the following: 1. 2. 3.
1.3 A.
1.4 A.
1.5 A.
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION Hydronic systems are low-water temperature, forced, recirculating systems and include 4pipe, hot water, and chilled water systems. SUBMITTALS Maintenance data for hydronic specialties and special-duty valves for inclusion in the Operation and Maintenance Manual. QUALITY CONTROL ASME Compliance: Comply with the following provisions: 1. 2. 3.
1.6 A.
Pipes, fittings, and specialties. Special-duty valves. Hydronic specialties.
ASME B31.9, "Building Services Piping," for materials, products, and installation. Safety valves and pressure vessels shall bear the appropriate ASME label. Fabricate and stamp air separators and compression tanks to comply with ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section VIII, Division 1. Welding Standards: Qualify welding processes and operators according to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section IX, "Welding and Brazing Qualifications."
COORDINATION Coordinate layout and installation of piping with equipment and with other installations.
HYDRONIC PIPING
232111 - 1
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
HYDRONIC PIPING SECTION 232111
B.
Coordinate pipe sleeve installation for foundation wall penetrations.
C.
Coordinate pipe fitting pressure classes with products.
D.
Coordinate installation of pipe sleeves for penetrations in exterior walls and floor assemblies.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1
PIPE AND TUBING MATERIALS
A.
General: Refer to Part 3 "Pipe Applications" Article for identifying where the following materials are used.
B.
Drawn-Temper Copper Tubing: ASTM B 88, Type L.
C.
Annealed-Temper Copper Tubing: ASTM B 88, Type K.
D.
Steel Pipe, 2-1/2- to 12-Inch NPS: ASTM A 53, Type E (electric-resistance welded), Grade A, Schedule 40, plain ends. 1.
2.2
Steel Pipe Nipples: ASTM A 733, made of ASTM A 53, Schedule 40, carbon steel, seamless for 2-inch NPS and smaller and electric-resistance welded for 2-1/2-inch NPS and larger.
FITTINGS
A.
Wrought-Copper Fittings: ASME B16.22.
B.
Wrought-Copper Unions: ASME B16.22.
C.
Cast-Iron Threaded Fittings: ASME B16.4; Classes 125, 150, and 300.
D.
Malleable-Iron Threaded Fittings: ASME B16.3, Classes 150 and 300.
E.
Malleable-Iron Unions: ASME B16.39; Classes 150, 250, and 300.
F.
Cast-Iron Threaded Flanges: ASME B16.1, Classes 125 and 250; raised ground face, bolt holes spot faced.
G.
Wrought-Steel Fittings: ASTM A 234, Standard Weight.
H.
Wrought-Steel Flanges and Flanged Fittings: ASME B16.5, including bolts, nuts, and gaskets of the following material group, end connections, and facings: 1. 2. 3.
Material Group: 1.1. End Connections: Butt welding. Facings: Raised face.
HYDRONIC PIPING
232111 - 2
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
HYDRONIC PIPING SECTION 232111
I.
Grooved Mechanical-Joint Fittings: ASTM A 536, Grade 65-45-12 ductile iron; ASTM A 47, Grade 32510 malleable iron; ASTM A 53, Type F, E, or S, Grade B fabricated steel; or ASTM A 106, Grade B steel fittings with grooves or shoulders designed to accept grooved end couplings.
J.
Grooved Mechanical-Joint Couplings: Consist of ductile- or malleable-iron housing, a synthetic rubber gasket of a central cavity pressure-responsive design; with nuts, bolts, locking pin, locking toggle, or lugs to secure grooved pipe and fittings.
2.3
JOINING MATERIALS
A.
Solder Filler Metals: ASTM B 32, 95-5 tin antimony.
B.
Welding Materials: Comply with Section II, Part C of ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code for welding materials appropriate for wall thickness and for chemical analysis of pipe being welded.
C.
Gasket Material: Thickness, material, and type suitable for fluid to be handled; and design temperatures and pressures.
2.4
PLASTIC PIPE AND FITTINGS
A.
PVC Plastic Pipe: ASTM D 1785, Schedules 40 and 80, plain ends.
B.
PVC Plastic Pipe Fittings: Socket-type pipe fittings, ASTM D 2466 for Schedule 40 pipe; ASTM D 2467 for Schedule 80 pipe. 1.
2.5
PVC Solvent Cement: ASTM D 2564.
VALVES
A.
Gate, globe, check, ball, and butterfly valves are specified in Division 23 Section "Valves."
B.
Refer to Part 3 "Valve Applications" Article for specific uses and applications for each valve specified.
C.
Pressure-Reducing Valves: Diaphragm-operated, cast-iron or brass body valve, with low inlet pressure check valve, inlet strainer removable without system shutdown, and noncorrosive valve seat and stem. Select valve size, capacity, and operating pressure to suit system. Valve shall be factory set at operating pressure and have capability for field adjustment.
D.
Safety Relief Valves: Brass or bronze body with brass and rubber, wetted, internal working parts; to suit system pressure and heat capacity; according to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section IV.
E.
Brass, Automatic Flow-Control Valves: 150-psig cold working pressure (CWP), 250 deg F maximum operating temperature, brass housing, stainless-steel operating parts; for soldered, threaded, or compression connections. Factory set to automatically control flow
HYDRONIC PIPING
232111 - 3
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
HYDRONIC PIPING SECTION 232111
rates within plus or minus 5 percent design, while compensating for system operatingpressure differential. Provide quick disconnect valves for flow measuring equipment. Provide metal identification tag with chain for each valve, factory marked with the zone identification, valve model number, and flow rate. F.
2.6
Cast-Iron, Automatic Flow-Control Valves: Class 150, cast-iron housing, stainless-steel operating parts; threaded connections for 2-inch NPS and smaller, flanged connections for 2-1/2-inch NPS and larger. Factory set to automatically control flow rates within plus or minus 5 percent design, while compensating for system operating-pressure differential. Provide quick disconnect valves for flow measuring equipment. Provide metal identification tag with chain for each valve, factory marked with the zone identification, valve model number, and flow rate. HYDRONIC SPECIALTIES
A.
Manual Air Vent: Bronze body and nonferrous internal parts; 150-psig working pressure, 225 deg F operating temperature; manually operated with screwdriver or thumbscrew; with 1/8-inch NPS discharge connection and 1/2-inch NPS inlet connection.
B.
Automatic Air Vent: Designed to vent automatically with float principle; bronze body and nonferrous internal parts; 150-psig working pressure, 240 deg F operating temperature; with 1/4-inch NPS discharge connection and 1/2-inch NPS inlet connection.
C.
Diaphragm-Type Compression Tanks: Welded carbon steel for 125-psig working pressure, 375 deg F maximum operating temperature. Separate air charge from system water to maintain design expansion capacity, by a flexible diaphragm securely sealed into tank. Provide taps for pressure gage and air-charging fitting, and drain fitting. Support vertical tanks with steel legs or base; support horizontal tanks with steel saddles. Fabricate and test tank with taps and supports, and label according to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section VIII, Division 1.
D.
Air Separators: All separators shall be fabricated steel, rated for 150 psig design pressure and be selected at their point of peak efficiency in accordance with manufacturer’s published catalog data. Entering velocity at the pipe connections shall not exceed 2 feet per second at specified GPM for centrifugal type separators and 4 feet per second for coalescing type. Spirovent “HV” separators specifically designed for high velocity systems may have an entering velocity of up to 10 feet per second. Coalescing type separators shall include internal copper coalescing medium filling the entire vessel to reduce velocity, facilitate maximum air elimination and suppress turbulence. Centrifugal type shall have a 3:1 vessel diameter to pipe connection ratio to reduce velocity and be furnished with stainless steel collector tube for air separation and collection. Provide integral high capacity float actuated air vent at top fitting of separator. Alternates to integral vent shall include cast iron float actuated air vent rated at 150 psig, which shall be threaded to the top of the separator. Separator shall have the vessel extended below the pipe connections for dirt separation. The internal medium shall act as a barrier to force dirt and sediment to fall from the flow path to a collection chamber for blow down through standard connection and valve. All dirt separator products or features shall have the outlet at the top portion of the vessel used for dirt separation and not lower than the inlet. Separator shall include a removable lower head to facilitate removal of Spirotube assembly for inspection or cleaning.
HYDRONIC PIPING
232111 - 4
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
HYDRONIC PIPING SECTION 232111
E.
In-Line Air Separators: One-piece cast iron with an integral weir designed to decelerate system flow to maximize air separation at a working pressure up to 175 psig and liquid temperature up to 300 deg F.
F.
Chemical Feeder: Bypass-type chemical feeders of 5-gal. capacity, welded steel construction; 125-psig working pressure; complete with fill funnel and inlet, outlet, and drain valves. 1.
Chemicals: Specially formulated to prevent accumulation of scale and corrosion in piping system and connected equipment, and based on a water analysis of makeup water.
G.
Y-Pattern Strainers: 125-psig working pressure; cast-iron body (ASTM A 126, Class B), flanged ends for 2-1/2-inch NPS and larger, threaded connections for 2-inch NPS and smaller, bolted cover, perforated Type 304 stainless-steel basket, and bottom drain connection.
H.
Basket Strainers: 125-psig working pressure; high-tensile cast-iron body (ASTM A 126, Class B), flanged end connections, bolted cover, perforated Type 304 stainless-steel basket, and bottom drain connection.
I.
Spherical, Rubber, Flexible Connectors: Fiber-reinforced rubber body, steel flanges drilled to align with Classes 150 and 300 steel flanges; operating temperatures up to 250 deg F and pressures up to 150 psig.
J.
Packed, Slip, Expansion Joints: 150-psig minimum working pressure, steel pipe fitting consisting of telescoping body and slip-pipe sections, packing ring, packing, limit rods, flanged ends, and chrome-plated finish on slip-pipe telescoping section.
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1
PIPE APPLICATIONS
A.
Hot and Chilled Water, 2-Inch NPS and Smaller: Aboveground, use Type L drawn-temper copper tubing with soldered joints or steel pipe with threaded joints. Below ground or within slabs, use Type K annealed-temper copper tubing with soldered joints. Use a minimum number of joints below ground and within slabs.
B.
Hot and Chilled Water, 2-1/2-Inch NPS and Larger: Steel pipe with welded and flanged joints.
C.
AC Condensate Drain Lines: Schedule 40, PVC pipe with solvent-welded joints.
3.2 A.
VALVE APPLICATIONS General-Duty Valve Applications: Unless otherwise indicated, use the following valve types: 1.
Shut-off Duty: Use ball and butterfly valves.
HYDRONIC PIPING
232111 - 5
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
2.
HYDRONIC PIPING SECTION 232111
Throttling Duty: Use globe, ball, and butterfly valves.
B.
Install shut-off-duty valves at each branch connection to supply mains, at supply connections to each piece of equipment, and elsewhere as indicated.
C.
Install throttling-duty valves at each branch connection to return mains, at return connections to each piece of equipment, and elsewhere as indicated.
D.
Install calibrated balancing valves on the outlet of each heating or cooling element and elsewhere as required to facilitate system balancing.
E.
Install drain valves at low points in mains, risers, branch lines, and elsewhere as required for system drainage.
F.
Install check valves on each pump discharge and elsewhere as required to control flow direction.
G.
Install safety relief valves on hot water generators and elsewhere as required by ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code. Pipe discharge to floor drain without valves. Comply with ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section VIII, Division 1, for installation requirements.
3.3
PIPING INSTALLATIONS
A.
Install piping according to Division 23 Section "Basic HVAC Materials and Methods."
B.
Locate groups of pipes parallel to each other, spaced to permit applying insulation and servicing of valves.
C.
Install drains at low points in mains, risers, and branch lines consisting of a tee fitting, 3/4inch NPS ball valve, and short 3/4-inch NPS threaded nipple and cap.
D.
Install piping at a uniform grade of 0.2 percent upward in direction of flow.
E.
Install AC condensate piping with a minimum slope of 1/8-inch per foot.
F.
Reduce pipe sizes using eccentric reducer fitting installed with level side up.
G.
Install branch connections to mains using tee fittings in main with takeoff out bottom of main, except for up-feed risers with takeoff out top of main line.
H.
Install unions in pipes 2-inch NPS and smaller, adjacent to each valve, at final connections of each piece of equipment, and elsewhere as indicated. Unions are not required at flanged connections.
I.
Install flanges on valves, apparatus, and equipment having 2-1/2-inch NPS and larger connections.
J.
Install flexible connectors at inlet and discharge connections to pumps and other vibrationproducing equipment.
HYDRONIC PIPING
232111 - 6
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
HYDRONIC PIPING SECTION 232111
K.
Install strainers on supply side of each control valve, pressure-reducing valve, pressureregulating valve, solenoid valve, in-line pump, and elsewhere as indicated. Install 3/4-inch NPS nipple and ball valve in blow-down connection of strainers 2-inch NPS and larger.
L.
Anchor piping to ensure proper direction of expansion and contraction.
3.4
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
A.
General: Hanger, support, and anchor devices are specified in Division 23 Section "Hangers and Supports." Conform to requirements below for maximum spacing of supports.
B.
Install the following pipe attachments: 1. 2. 3. 4.
C.
Install hangers for steel piping with the following minimum rod sizes and maximum spacing: 1. 2. 3. 4.
D.
Adjustable steel clevis hangers for individual horizontal runs less than 20 feet in length. Adjustable roller hangers and spring hangers for individual horizontal runs 20 feet or longer. Pipe Roller: MSS SP-58, Type 44 for multiple horizontal runs 20 feet or longer, supported on a trapeze. Spring hangers to support vertical runs.
2-1/2-Inch NPS: Maximum span, 11 feet; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch. 3-Inch NPS: Maximum span, 12 feet; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch. 4-Inch NPS: Maximum span, 14 feet; minimum rod size, 1/2 inch. 6-Inch NPS: Maximum span, 17 feet; minimum rod size, 1/2 inch.
Install hangers for drawn-temper copper piping with the following minimum rod sizes and maximum spacing: 1. 2. 3. 4.
3/4-Inch NPS: Maximum span, 5 feet; minimum rod size, 1/4 inch. 1-Inch NPS: Maximum span, 7 feet; minimum rod size, 1/4 inch. 1-1/2-Inch NPS: Maximum span, 9 feet; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch. 2-Inch NPS: Maximum span, 10 feet; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch.
E.
Support vertical runs at each floor.
F.
Plastic Piping Hanger Spacing: Space hangers according to pipe manufacturer's written instructions for service conditions. Avoid point loading. Space and install hangers with the fewest practical rigid anchor points.
3.5 A.
PIPE JOINT CONSTRUCTION Refer to Division 23 Section "Basic HVAC Materials and Methods" for joint construction requirements for soldered and brazed joints in copper tubing; threaded, welded, and flanged joints in steel piping.
HYDRONIC PIPING
232111 - 7
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
B. 3.6
HYDRONIC PIPING SECTION 232111
Mechanical Joints: Assemble joints according to fitting manufacturer's written instructions. HYDRONIC SPECIALTIES INSTALLATION
A.
Install manual air vents at high points in system, at heat-transfer coils, and elsewhere as required for system air venting.
B.
Install automatic air vents in mechanical equipment rooms only at high points of system piping, at heat-transfer coils, and elsewhere as required for system air venting.
C.
Install in-line air separators in pump suction lines. Run piping to compression tank with a 2 percent upward slope toward tank. Install drain valve on units 2-inch NPS and larger.
D.
Install combination air separator and strainer in pump suction lines. Install piping to compression tank with a 2 percent upward slope toward tank. Install blowdown piping with gate valve; extend to nearest drain.
E.
Install bypass chemical feeders in each hydronic system where indicated, in upright position with top of funnel not more than 48 inches above floor. Install feeder in bypass line, off main, using globe valves on each side of feeder and in the main between bypass connections. Pipe drain, with ball valve, to nearest equipment drain.
F.
Install diaphragm-type compression tanks on floor or suspend as indicated. Vent and purge air from hydronic system, and charge tank with proper air charge to suit system design requirements.
3.7
TERMINAL EQUIPMENT CONNECTIONS
A.
Piping size for supply and return shall be same size as equipment connections.
B.
Install control valves in accessible locations close to equipment.
C.
Install bypass piping with globe valve around control valve. Where multiple, parallel control valves are installed, only one bypass is required.
D.
Install pressure gage at coil inlet connections.
3.8 A. 3.9 A.
CHEMICAL TREATMENT Refer to Division 23 Section “HVAC Water Treatment.” FIELD QUALITY CONTROL Testing Preparation: Prepare hydronic piping according to ASME B31.9 and as follows: 1.
Leave joints, including welds, uninsulated and exposed for examination during test.
HYDRONIC PIPING
232111 - 8
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
2.
3. 4.
5.
B.
Provide temporary restraints for expansion joints that cannot sustain reactions due to test pressure. If temporary restraints are impractical, isolate expansion joints from testing. Flush system with clean water. Clean strainers. Isolate equipment that is not subjected to test pressure from piping. If a valve is used to isolate equipment, its closure shall be capable of sealing against test pressure without damage to valve. Flanged joints where blinds are inserted to isolate equipment need not be tested. Install relief valve set at a pressure no more than one-third higher than test pressure, to protect against damage by expanding liquid or other source of overpressure during test.
Testing: Test hydronic piping as follows: 1.
2. 3.
4.
5.
6. 3.10
HYDRONIC PIPING SECTION 232111
Use ambient temperature water as testing medium, except where there is risk of damage due to freezing. Another liquid may be used if it is safe for workers and compatible with piping system components. Use vents installed at the high points of system to release trapped air while filling system. Use drains installed at low points for complete removal of liquid. Examine system to see that equipment and parts that cannot withstand test pressures are properly isolated. Examine test equipment to ensure that it is tight and that lowpressure filling lines are disconnected. Subject piping system to hydrostatic test pressure that is not less than 1.5 times the design pressure. Test pressure shall not exceed maximum pressure for any vessel, pump, valve, or other component in system under test. Check to verify that stress due to pressure at bottom of vertical runs does not exceed either 90 percent of specified minimum yield strength or 1.7 times "SE" value in Appendix A of ASME B31.9, Code for Pressure Piping, "Building Services Piping." After hydrostatic test pressure has been applied for at least 10 minutes, examine piping, joints, and connections for leakage. Eliminate leaks by tightening, repairing, or replacing components as appropriate, and repeat hydrostatic test until there are no leaks. Prepare written report of testing.
ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A.
After completing system installation, including outlet fittings and devices, inspect finish. Remove burrs, dirt, and construction debris, and repair damaged finishes including chips, scratches, and abrasions.
B.
Flush hydronic piping systems with clean water. Remove, clean, and replace strainer screens. After cleaning and flushing hydronic piping system, but before balancing, remove disposable fine-mesh strainers in pump suction diffusers.
C.
Mark calibrated nameplates of pump discharge valves after hydronic system balancing has been completed, to permanently indicate final balanced position.
D.
Chemical Treatment: Provide a water analysis prepared by chemical treatment supplier to determine type and level of chemicals required to prevent scale and corrosion. Perform initial treatment after completing system testing.
HYDRONIC PIPING
232111 - 9
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
3.11
HYDRONIC PIPING SECTION 232111
COMMISSIONING
A.
Fill system and perform initial chemical treatment.
B.
Perform these steps before operating the system: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.
Open valves to fully open position. Close coil bypass valves. Check pump for proper direction of rotation. Set automatic fill valves for required system pressure. Check air vents at high points of systems and determine if all are installed and operating freely (automatic type) or bleed air completely (manual type). Set temperature controls so all coils are calling for full flow. Lubricate motors and bearings.
END OF SECTION 232111
HYDRONIC PIPING
232111 - 10
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
HYDRONIC PUMPS SECTION 232123
SECTION 232123 - HYDRONIC PUMPS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 A.
1.2 A.
RELATED DOCUMENTS Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. SUMMARY Section Includes: 1. 2.
1.3
Separately coupled, base-mounted, end-suction centrifugal pumps. Automatic condensate pump units.
DEFINITIONS
A.
Buna-N: Nitrile rubber.
B.
EPT: Ethylene propylene terpolymer.
1.4
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of pump. Include certified performance curves and rated capacities, operating characteristics, furnished specialties, final impeller dimensions, and accessories for each type of product indicated. Indicate pump's operating point on curves.
B.
Shop Drawings: For each pump. 1. 2. 3.
1.5 A.
Show pump layout and connections. Include setting drawings with templates for installing foundation and anchor bolts and other anchorages. Include diagrams for power, signal, and control wiring.
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS Operation and Maintenance Data: For pumps to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.
HYDRONIC PUMPS
232123 - 1
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
HYDRONIC PUMPS SECTION 232123
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 A.
SEPARATELY PUMPS
COUPLED,
BASE-MOUNTED,
END-SUCTION
CENTRIFUGAL
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. 2. 3.
Armstrong Pumps Inc. ITT Corporation; Bell & Gossett. TACO Incorporated.
B.
Description: Factory-assembled and -tested, centrifugal, overhung-impeller, separately coupled, end-suction pump as defined in HI 1.1-1.2 and HI 1.3; designed for base mounting, with pump and motor shafts horizontal.
C.
Pump Construction: 1.
2.
3. 4. 5.
Casing: Radially split, cast iron, with replaceable bronze wear rings, threaded gage tappings at inlet and outlet, drain plug at bottom and air vent at top of volute, and flanged connections. Provide integral mount on volute to support the casing, and provide attached piping to allow removal and replacement of impeller without disconnecting piping or requiring the realignment of pump and motor shaft. Impeller: ASTM B 584, cast bronze; statically and dynamically balanced, keyed to shaft, and secured with a locking cap screw. For pumps not frequency-drive controlled, trim impeller to match specified performance. Pump Shaft: Stainless steel. Seal: Mechanical seal consisting of carbon rotating ring against a ceramic seat held by a stainless-steel spring, and Buna-N or EPT bellows and gasket. Pump Bearings: Grease-lubricated ball bearings in cast-iron housing with grease fittings.
D.
Shaft Coupling: Molded-rubber insert and interlocking spider capable of absorbing vibration. EPDM coupling sleeve for variable-speed applications.
E.
Coupling Guard: Dual rated; ANSI B15.1, Section 8; OSHA 1910.219 approved; steel; removable; attached to mounting frame.
F.
Mounting Frame: Welded-steel frame and cross members, factory fabricated from ASTM A 36/A 36M channels and angles. Fabricate to mount pump casing, coupling guard, and motor.
G.
Motor: Single speed, secured to mounting frame, with adjustable alignment. 1.
Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.
HYDRONIC PUMPS
232123 - 2
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
2.
Comply with NEMA designation, temperature rating, service factor, and efficiency requirements for motors specified in Section 230513 "Common Motor Requirements for HVAC Equipment." a. b. c. d.
2.2 A.
Enclosure: Open, dripproof. Enclosure Materials: Cast iron. Motor Bearings: Permanently lubricated ball bearings. Efficiency: Premium efficient.
PUMP SPECIALTY FITTINGS Suction Diffuser: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.
B.
HYDRONIC PUMPS SECTION 232123
Angle pattern. 175-psig pressure rating, cast-iron body and end cap, pump-inlet fitting. Bronze startup and bronze or stainless-steel permanent strainers. Bronze or stainless-steel straightening vanes. Drain plug. Factory-fabricated support.
Triple-Duty Valve: 1. 2. 3. 4.
Angle or straight pattern. 175-psig pressure rating, cast-iron body, pump-discharge fitting. Drain plug and bronze-fitted shutoff, balancing, and check valve features. Brass gage ports with integral check valve and orifice for flow measurement.
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Examine equipment foundations and anchor-bolt locations for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.
B.
Examine roughing-in for piping systems to verify actual locations of piping connections before pump installation.
C.
Examine foundations and inertia bases for suitable conditions where pumps are to be installed.
D.
Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 A.
PUMP INSTALLATION Comply with HI 1.4.
HYDRONIC PUMPS
232123 - 3
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
HYDRONIC PUMPS SECTION 232123
B.
Install pumps to provide access for periodic maintenance including removing motors, impellers, couplings, and accessories.
C.
Independently support pumps and piping so weight of piping is not supported by pumps and weight of pumps is not supported by piping.
D.
Equipment Mounting: 1.
3.3
Install base-mounted pumps on cast-in-place concrete equipment bases. Comply with requirements for equipment bases and foundations specified in Section 033000 "Cast-in-Place Concrete."
ALIGNMENT
A.
Perform alignment service.
B.
Comply with requirements in Hydronics Institute standards for alignment of pump and motor shaft. Add shims to the motor feet and bolt motor to base frame. Do not use grout between motor feet and base frame.
C.
Comply with pump and coupling manufacturers' written instructions.
D.
After alignment is correct, tighten foundation bolts evenly but not too firmly. Completely fill baseplate with nonshrink, nonmetallic grout while metal blocks and shims or wedges are in place. After grout has cured, fully tighten foundation bolts.
3.4
CONNECTIONS
A.
Where installing piping adjacent to pump, allow space for service and maintenance.
B.
Connect piping to pumps. Install valves that are same size as piping connected to pumps.
C.
Install suction and discharge pipe sizes equal to or greater than diameter of pump nozzles.
D.
Install triple-duty valve on discharge side of pumps.
E.
Install suction diffuser and shutoff valve on suction side of pumps.
F.
Install flexible connectors on suction and discharge sides of base-mounted pumps between pump casing and valves.
G.
Install pressure gages on pump suction and discharge or at integral pressure-gage tapping, or install single gage with multiple-input selector valve.
H.
Install check valve and gate or ball valve on each condensate pump unit discharge.
I.
Ground equipment according to Section 260526 "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems."
HYDRONIC PUMPS
232123 - 4
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
J.
3.5 A.
HYDRONIC PUMPS SECTION 232123
Connect wiring according to Section 260519 "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables." STARTUP SERVICE Perform startup service. 1. 2. 3. 4.
Complete installation and startup checks according to manufacturer's written instructions. Check piping connections for tightness. Clean strainers on suction piping. Perform the following startup checks for each pump before starting: a. b.
c. 5. 6. 7.
Verify bearing lubrication. Verify that pump is free to rotate by hand and that pump for handling hot liquid is free to rotate with pump hot and cold. If pump is bound or drags, do not operate until cause of trouble is determined and corrected. Verify that pump is rotating in the correct direction.
Prime pump by opening suction valves and closing drains, and prepare pump for operation. Start motor. Open discharge valve slowly.
END OF SECTION 232123
HYDRONIC PUMPS
232123 - 5
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
STEAM AND CONDENSATE PIPING
SECTION 232213 SECTION 232213 - STEAM AND CONDENSATE PIPING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 A.
1.2 A.
1.3 A.
1.4 A.
1.5 A.
RELATED DOCUMENTS Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. SUMMARY This Section includes steam and condensate piping and specialties for building HVAC and domestic water heating systems, including pipes, fittings, special-duty valves, and specialties. SYSTEM DESCRIPTION Steam and condensate piping systems for this Project are 2-pipe, mechanical flow, upfeed systems. SUBMITTALS Maintenance data for steam and condensate specialties and special-duty valves to include in the Operation and Maintenance Manual. QUALITY ASSURANCE ASME Compliance: Comply with the following provisions: 1. 2. 3.
1.6
ASME B31.9, "Building Services Piping," for materials, products, and installation. Safety valves and pressure vessels shall bear the appropriate ASME label. Fabricate and stamp flash tanks to comply with ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section VIII, Division 1. Welding Standards: Qualify welding processes and operators according to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section IX, "Welding and Brazing Qualifications."
COORDINATION
A.
Coordinate layout and installation of steam and condensate piping and suspension system components with other construction, including light fixtures, hydronic piping, firesuppression-system components, and partition assemblies.
B.
Coordinate layout and installation of piping and flash tanks with steam and condensate equipment and with other installations.
STEAM AND CONDENSATE PIPING
232213 - 1
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
STEAM AND CONDENSATE PIPING
SECTION 232213 C.
Coordinate pipe sleeve installation for foundation wall penetrations.
D.
Coordinate pipe fitting pressure classes with inter-connected equipment and components specified in other Sections.
E.
Coordinate size and location of concrete housekeeping pads. Cast anchor-bolt inserts into pad.
F.
Coordinate installation of pipe sleeves for penetrations in exterior walls and floor assemblies.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1
PIPE AND TUBING MATERIALS
A.
General: Refer to Part 3 pipe application articles for identifying where the following materials are used.
B.
Steel Pipe, 2-Inch NPS and Smaller: Schedules 40 and 80, plain ends.
C.
Steel Pipe, 2-1/2- to 12-Inch NPS: ASTM A 53, Type E (electric-resistance welded), Grade A, Schedules 40 and 80, plain ends. 1.
2.2
ASTM A 53, Type S (seamless), Grade A,
Steel Pipe Nipples: ASTM A 733, made of ASTM A 53, Schedules 40 and 80, carbon steel, seamless for 2-inch NPS and smaller and electric-resistance welded for 2-1/2-inch NPS and larger.
FITTINGS
A.
Cast-Iron Threaded Fittings: ASME B16.4; Classes 125, 150, and 300.
B.
Malleable-Iron Threaded Fittings: ASME B16.3; Classes 150 and 300.
C.
Malleable-Iron Unions: ASME B16.39; Classes 150, 250, and 300.
D.
Cast-Iron Threaded Flanges: ASME B16.1, Classes 125 and 250; raised ground face, bolt holes spot faced.
E.
Wrought-Steel Fittings: ASTM A 234, Schedules 40 and 80.
F.
Wrought-Steel Flanges and Flanged Fittings: ASME B16.5, including bolts, nuts, and gaskets of the following material group, end connections, and facings: 1. 2. 3.
Material Group: 1.1. End Connections: Butt welding. Facings: Raised face.
STEAM AND CONDENSATE PIPING
232213 - 2
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
STEAM AND CONDENSATE PIPING
SECTION 232213 G.
2.3
Flexible Connectors: Stainless-steel bellows with woven, flexible, bronze, wire-reinforcing protective jacket; 150-psig minimum working pressure, 250 deg F maximum operating temperature. Connectors shall have flanged or threaded end connections to match equipment connected and shall be capable of 3/4-inch misalignment. JOINING MATERIALS
A.
Welding Materials: Comply with Section II, Part C of ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code for welding materials appropriate for wall thickness and for chemical analysis of pipe being welded.
B.
Gasket Material: Thickness, material, and type suitable for fluid to be handled; and design temperatures and pressures.
2.4
VALVES
A.
Gate, globe, check, ball, and butterfly valves are specified in Division 23 Section "Valves."
B.
Refer to Part 3 "Valve Applications" Article for specific uses and applications for each valve specified.
2.5
SAFETY VALVES
A.
Size and Capacity: As required for equipment according to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code. Furnish complete with cast-iron drip-pan elbow having threaded inlet and outlet with threads conforming to ASME B1.20.1.
B.
Bronze Safety Valves: Cast-bronze or forged copper body, Class 250, with threaded inlet and outlet; forged copper-alloy disc; fully enclosed, cadmium-plated steel spring with adjustable pressure range and positive shutoff, factory set and sealed.
C.
Cast-Iron Safety Valves: Cast-iron body, Class 250; forged copper-alloy disc and nozzle; fully enclosed, cadmium-plated steel spring with adjustable pressure range and positive shutoff; raised-face flanged inlet and threaded outlet connections; factory set and sealed.
D.
Stop-Check Valves: Class 250, malleable-iron body and bonnet, cylindrical disc, removable liner and machined seat, brass-alloy stem, outside screw and yoke, polytetrafluoroethylene (PTFE)-impregnated packing with 2-piece packing gland assembly, flanged end connections, and cast-iron handwheel.
2.6
PRESSURE-REGULATING VALVES
A.
Size, Capacity, and Pressure Rating: Factory set for inlet and outlet pressures indicated.
B.
Valve Characteristics: Pilot-actuated, diaphragm type, with adjustable pressure range and positive shutoff; cast-iron body with flanged end connections, hardened stainless-steel trim, and replaceable head and seat. Provide main head stem guide fitted with flushing and pressure-arresting device. Provide dirt cover over pilot diaphragm.
STEAM AND CONDENSATE PIPING
232213 - 3
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
STEAM AND CONDENSATE PIPING
SECTION 232213 2.7 A.
2.8 A.
2.9
STEAM TRAPS LESS THAN 15 PSIG Float and Thermostatic Traps: ASTM A 278, Class 30, cast-iron body and bolted cap; renewable, stainless-steel float mechanism with renewable, hardened stainless-steel head and seat; balanced-pressure, thermostatic air vent made with stainless-steel or monel bellows, and stainless-steel head and seat. STEAM TRAPS UP TO 125 PSIG Thermostatic Traps: Class 125, bronze angle-pattern body with integral union tailpiece and screw-in cap; balanced-pressure, stainless-steel or monel bellows element and renewable, hardened stainless-steel head and seat. THERMOSTATIC AIR VENTS
A.
Quick Vents: Cast-iron or brass body, with balanced-pressure, stainless-steel or monel thermostatic bellows, and stainless-steel heads and seats.
B.
Float Vents: Cast-iron or brass body; seamless brass float; balanced-pressure, thermostatic bellows; replaceable stainless-steel seat, float, and head.
2.10 A.
2.11 A.
2.12 A.
2.13 A.
VACUUM BREAKERS Vacuum Breakers: 150-psig steam working pressure, 365 deg F maximum operating temperature, brass or stainless-steel body, stainless-steel retainer, spring, and ball, with plain or threaded outlet. STRAINERS Y-Pattern Strainers: Minimum 250-psig steam working pressure; cast-iron body conforming to ASTM A 278, Class 30; Grade 18-8 stainless-steel screen, 20 mesh for 2inch NPS and smaller, and manufacturer recommended perforations for 2-1/2-inch NPS and larger; tapped blowoff plug. Threaded connections for 2-inch NPS and smaller and flanged connections for 2-1/2-inch NPS and larger. FLASH TANKS Construct of welded steel according to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, for 150psig rating. Fabricate with tappings for vents, low-pressure steam and condensate outlets, high-pressure condensate inlet, air vent, safety valve, and legs. METERS Condensate Meters: Brass body with threaded connections for meters NPS 2 and smaller and flanged connections for meters NPS 2-1/2 and larger; positive displacement turbine;
STEAM AND CONDENSATE PIPING
232213 - 4
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
STEAM AND CONDENSATE PIPING
SECTION 232213 magnetic coupling counter; suitable for temperatures up to 250 deg F and for 250 psig working pressure. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1
PIPE APPLICATIONS LESS THAN 15 PSIG
A.
Steam Piping, 2-Inch NPS and Smaller: Schedule 40 steel pipe with threaded joints and Class 125 cast-iron fittings.
B.
Steam Piping, 2-1/2- to 12-Inch NPS: Schedule 40 steel pipe with welded joints, Schedule 40 wrought-steel welding fittings, and Class 150 wrought-steel flanges.
C.
Condensate Piping, 2-Inch NPS and Smaller: Schedule 80 steel pipe with threaded joints and Class 125 malleable-iron fittings.
D.
Condensate Piping, 2-1/2- to 12-Inch NPS: Schedule 80 steel pipe with welded joints, Schedule 40 wrought-steel welding fittings, and Class 150 wrought-steel flanges.
3.2
PIPE APPLICATIONS UP TO 125 PSIG
A.
Steam Piping, 2-Inch NPS and Smaller: Schedule 40 steel pipe with threaded joints and Class 300 malleable-iron fittings.
B.
Steam Piping, 2-1/2- to 12-Inch NPS: Schedule 40 steel pipe with welded joints, Schedule 40 wrought-steel welding fittings, and Class 150 wrought-steel flanges.
C.
Condensate Piping, 2-Inch NPS and Smaller: Schedule 80 steel pipe with threaded joints and Class 300 malleable-iron fittings.
D.
Condensate Piping, 2-1/2- to 12-Inch NPS: Schedule 80 steel pipe with welded joints, Schedule 40 wrought-steel welding fittings, and Class 150 wrought-steel flanges.
3.3 A.
VALVE APPLICATIONS General-Duty Valve Applications: Unless otherwise indicated, use the following valve types: 1. 2.
Shut-off Duty: Use gate and ball valves. Throttling Duty: Use globe and ball valves.
B.
Install shut-off-duty valves at each branch connection to supply mains, at inlet connection to each steam trap, and elsewhere as indicated.
C.
Vacuum Breakers Less than 15 psig: Class 150 bronze swing check with composition seat.
STEAM AND CONDENSATE PIPING
232213 - 5
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
STEAM AND CONDENSATE PIPING
SECTION 232213 D.
Install angle-pattern globe valves on supply side of each terminal unit, installed within enclosure.
E.
Install drain valves at low points in mains, risers, branch lines, and elsewhere as required for system drainage.
F.
Install swing check valves as required to control flow direction and to serve as vacuum breakers, except where noted.
3.4 A.
3.5 A. 3.6
STEAM-TRAP APPLICATIONS LESS THAN 15 PSIG Float and Thermostatic Traps: Steam main and riser drip legs, heat exchangers, and coils. STEAM-TRAP APPLICATIONS UP TO 125 PSIG Thermodynamic Traps: Steam main and riser drip legs. PIPING INSTALLATIONS
A.
Install piping according to Division 23 Section "Basic HVAC Materials and Methods."
B.
Locate groups of pipes parallel to each other, spaced to permit applying insulation and servicing of valves.
C.
Install drains at low points in mains, risers, and branch lines consisting of a tee fitting, 3/4inch NPS ball valve, and short 3/4-inch NPS threaded nipple and cap.
D.
Install steam supply piping at a uniform grade of 0.2 percent downward in direction of flow.
E.
Install condensate return piping at a uniform grade of 0.4 percent downward in direction of flow.
F.
Reduce pipe sizes using eccentric reducer fitting installed with level side down.
G.
Install branch connections to steam mains using 45-degree fittings in main with takeoff out top of main. Use of 90-degree tee fittings is permissible where 45-degree fittings are impractical. Where length of branch takeoff is less than 10 feet, pitch branch line down toward mains at 0.4 percent slope.
H.
Install unions or flanges adjacent to each valve, at final connections of each piece of equipment, and elsewhere as indicated.
I.
Install strainers on supply side of each control valve, pressure-regulating valve, solenoid valve, traps, and elsewhere as indicated. Install 3/4-inch NPS nipple and ball valve in blow-down connection of strainers 2-inch NPS and larger. Match size of strainer blowoff connection.
J.
Anchor piping to ensure proper direction of expansion and contraction.
STEAM AND CONDENSATE PIPING
232213 - 6
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
STEAM AND CONDENSATE PIPING
SECTION 232213 K.
Install drip legs at low points and natural drainage points such as ends of mains, bottoms of risers, and ahead of pressure regulators, control valves, isolation valves, pipe bends, and expansion joints. 1.
2.
3. 4. L.
3.7 A.
Flash Tanks: Pitch condensate lines toward flash tank. If more than one condensate line discharges into flash tank, install a swing check valve in each line. Install thermostatic air vent at top of tank. Install inverted bucket or float and thermostatic trap at low-pressure condensate outlet, sized for triple condensate load. Install safety relief valve at tank top. Install pressure gage, gate valve, and swing check valve on low-pressure (flash) steam outlet. STEAM-TRAP INSTALLATION Install steam traps in accessible locations close to connected equipment, maximum 48 inches. 1.
3.8
On straight runs with no natural drainage points, install drip legs at intervals not exceeding 200 feet where pipe is pitched down in direction of steam flow and a maximum of 150 feet where pipe is pitched in opposite direction of steam flow. Size drip legs at vertical risers full size and extend beyond rise. Size drip legs at other locations same diameter as main. Provide 18-inch-long drip leg for steam mains smaller than 6-inch NPS. In steam mains 6-inch NPS and larger, provide drip legs 2 pipe sizes smaller than main, but not less than 4-inch NPS. Equip drip legs, dirt pockets, and strainer blow-downs with gate valves to allow removal of dirt and scale. Install steam traps close to drip legs.
Unless otherwise indicated, install gate valve, strainer, and union upstream from trap; install union, check valve, and gate valve downstream from trap.
PRESSURE-REDUCING VALVE INSTALLATIONS
A.
Install pressure-reducing valves as required to regulate system pressure, in readily accessible location for maintenance and inspection.
B.
Provide bypass around each reducing valve, with globe valve equal in size to area of reducing valve seat ring.
C.
Install gate valves and unions around each reducing valve. Unions may be omitted for reducing valves with flanged connections.
D.
Install pressure gages on low-pressure side of each reducing valve and ahead of shut-off valve, plus one downstream for shut-off valve. 1.
On 2-stage reducing stations, install drip trap and pressure gage upstream from second stage reducing valve.
E.
Install strainers upstream for each reducing valve.
F.
Install safety valves downstream from each reducing valve.
STEAM AND CONDENSATE PIPING
232213 - 7
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
STEAM AND CONDENSATE PIPING
SECTION 232213 3.9 A.
3.10
SAFETY VALVE INSTALLATIONS Install valves according to ASME B31.1. Pipe discharge to atmosphere outside building, without stop valves. Install drip-pan elbow fitting adjacent to safety valve; pipe drain connection to nearest floor drain. Comply with ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code installation requirements. HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
A.
General: Hanger, support, and anchor devices are specified in Division 23 Section "Hangers and Supports." Conform to requirements below for maximum spacing of supports.
B.
Install the following pipe attachments: 1. 2. 3. 4.
C.
Install hangers with the following minimum rod sizes and maximum spacing: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8.
D. 3.11 A.
3.12
Adjustable steel clevis hangers for individual horizontal runs less than 20 feet in length. Adjustable roller hangers and spring hangers for individual horizontal runs 20 feet or longer. Pipe Roller: MSS SP-58, Type 44 for multiple horizontal runs 20 feet or longer, supported on a trapeze. Spring hangers to support vertical runs.
3/4-Inch NPS: Maximum span, 7 feet; minimum rod size, 1/4 inch. 1-Inch NPS: Maximum span, 7 feet; minimum rod size, 1/4 inch. 1-1/2-Inch NPS: Maximum span, 9 feet; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch. 2-Inch NPS: Maximum span, 10 feet; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch. 2-1/2-Inch NPS: Maximum span, 11 feet; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch. 3-Inch NPS: Maximum span, 12 feet; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch. 4-Inch NPS: Maximum span, 14 feet; minimum rod size, 1/2 inch. 6-Inch NPS: Maximum span, 17 feet; minimum rod size, 1/2 inch.
Support vertical runs at each floor. PIPE JOINT CONSTRUCTION Refer to Division 23 Section "Basic HVAC Materials and Methods" for joint construction requirements for threaded, welded, and flanged joints. TERMINAL EQUIPMENT CONNECTIONS
A.
Piping size for supply and return shall be same size as equipment connections.
B.
Install traps and control valves in accessible locations close to connected equipment.
C.
Install bypass piping with globe valve around control valve. Where multiple, parallel control valves are installed, only one bypass is required.
STEAM AND CONDENSATE PIPING
232213 - 8
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
STEAM AND CONDENSATE PIPING
SECTION 232213 D.
Install vacuum breaker downstream from control valve and bypass, and close to coil inlet connection.
E.
Install pressure gages at coil inlet connections.
F.
Pipe outlet from coils to drip leg. From drip leg, install an appropriate trap, sized at 3 times the condensate load of equipment, at 1/2-psig differential.
3.13 A.
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL Testing Preparation: Prepare steam and condensate piping according to ASME B31.9 and as follows: 1. 2. 3.
4.
B.
Testing: Test steam and condensate piping as follows: 1.
2. 3.
4.
5. 3.14
Leave joints, including welds, uninsulated and exposed for examination during test. Flush system with clean water. Clean strainers. Isolate equipment that is not subjected to test pressure from piping. If a valve is used to isolate equipment, its closure shall be capable of sealing against test pressure without damage to valve. Flanged joints where blinds are inserted to isolate equipment need not be tested. Install relief valve set at a pressure no more than one-third higher than test pressure, to protect against damage by expanding liquid or other source of over pressure during test.
Use ambient temperature water as testing medium, except where there is risk of damage due to freezing. Another liquid may be used if it is safe for workers and compatible with piping system components. Use traps installed at the high points of system to release trapped air while filling system. Use drip legs installed at low points for complete removal of liquid. Subject piping system to hydrostatic test pressure that is not less than 1.5 times the design pressure. Test pressure shall not exceed maximum pressure for any vessel, pump, valve, or other component in system under test. Check to verify that stress due to pressure at bottom of vertical runs does not exceed either 90 percent of specified minimum yield strength or 1.7 times "SE" value in Appendix A of ASME B31.9, Code for Pressure Piping, "Building Services Piping." After hydrostatic test pressure has been applied for at least 10 minutes, examine piping, joints, and connections for leakage. Eliminate leaks by tightening, repairing, or replacing components as appropriate, and repeat hydrostatic test until there are no leaks. Prepare written report of testing.
ADJUSTING
A.
Mark calibrated nameplates of pump discharge valves after steam and condensate system balancing has been completed, to permanently indicate final balanced position.
B.
Perform these adjustments before operating the system: 1.
Open valves to fully open position. Close coil bypass valves.
STEAM AND CONDENSATE PIPING
232213 - 9
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
STEAM AND CONDENSATE PIPING
SECTION 232213 2. 3. 3.15
Set temperature controls so all coils are calling for full flow. Check operation of automatic bypass valves.
CLEANING
A.
After completing system installation, including outlet fittings and devices, inspect finish. Remove burrs, dirt, and construction debris, and repair damaged finishes including chips, scratches, and abrasions.
B.
Flush steam and condensate piping with clean water. Remove, clean, and replace strainer screens.
END OF SECTION 232213
STEAM AND CONDENSATE PIPING
232213 - 10
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
STEAM CONDENSATE PUMPS SECTION 232223
SECTION 232223 - STEAM CONDENSATE PUMPS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 A.
1.2 A. 1.3
RELATED DOCUMENTS Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. SUMMARY Section includes steam condensate pumps. ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of product. Include certified performance curves and rated capacities, operating characteristics, furnished specialties, and accessories for each type of product indicated. Indicate pump's operating point on curves. Include receiver capacity and material.
B.
Shop Drawings: For each pump. 1. 2. 3.
1.4 A.
Show pump layout and connections. Include setting drawings with templates for installing foundation and anchor bolts and other anchorages. Include diagrams for power, signal, and control wiring.
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS Operation and Maintenance Data: For pumps to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 A.
SINGLE-STAGE, CENTRIFUGAL PUMPS WITH FLOOR-MOUNTED RECEIVER Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. 2.
Armstrong Fluid Handling; Div. of Armstrong International, Inc. Spirax-Sarco Inc.
STEAM CONDENSATE PUMPS
232223 - 1
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
B.
STEAM CONDENSATE PUMPS SECTION 232223
Description: Factory-fabricated, packaged, electric-driven pumps; with receiver, pumps, controls, and accessories suitable for operation with steam condensate. 1.
2.
Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. ASME Compliance: Fabricate and label steam condensate receivers to comply with ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section VIII, Division 1.
C.
Configuration: Duplex floor-mounted pump with receiver and float switches; rated to pump 200 deg F steam condensate.
D.
Receiver: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10.
E.
Pumps: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.
F.
Centrifugal, close coupled, vertical design. Permanently aligned. Bronze fitted. Replaceable bronze case ring. Mechanical seals rated at 250 deg F. Mounted on receiver flange.
Motor: 1. 2. 3. 4.
G.
Floor mounted. Close-grained cast iron. Externally adjustable float switches. Flanges for pump mounting. Water-level gage and dial thermometer. Pressure gage at pump discharge. Bronze fitting isolation valve between pump and receiver. Lifting eyebolts. Inlet vent and an overflow. Cast-iron inlet strainer with vertical self-cleaning bronze screen and large dirt pocket.
Enclosure: Open, dripproof. Enclosure Materials: Cast iron. Motor Bearings: Permanently lubricated ball bearings. Efficiency: Premium efficient.
Control Panel: 1. 2. 3. 4.
Factory wired between pumps and float switches, for single external electrical connection. Provide fused, control-power transformer if voltage exceeds 230 V ac. NEMA 250, Type 1 enclosure with hinged door and grounding lug, mounted on pump. Motor controller for each pump.
STEAM CONDENSATE PUMPS
232223 - 2
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
5. 6. 7. 8. 9.
STEAM CONDENSATE PUMPS SECTION 232223
Electrical pump alternator to operate pumps in lead-lag sequence and allow both pumps to operate on receiver high level. Manual lead-lag control to override electrical pump alternator and manually select the lead pump. Momentary-contact "TEST" push button on cover for each pump. Numbered terminal strip. Disconnect switch.
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Examine equipment foundations and anchor-bolt locations for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.
B.
Examine roughing-in for piping systems to verify actual locations of piping connections before pump installation.
C.
Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2
INSTALLATION
A.
Install pumps according to HI 1.1-1.2, HI 1.3, and HI 1.4.
B.
Install pumps to provide access for periodic maintenance including removing motors, impellers, couplings, and accessories.
C.
Support pumps and piping separately so piping is not supported by pumps.
D.
Install thermometers and pressure gages.
E.
Equipment Mounting: 1.
2. 3.
3.3
Install pumps on cast-in-place concrete equipment base(s). Comply with requirements for equipment bases and foundations specified in Section 033000 "Cast-in-Place Concrete." Comply with requirements for vibration isolation and seismic control devices specified in Section 230548 "Vibration and Seismic Controls for HVAC." Comply with requirements for vibration isolation devices specified in Section 230548.13 "Vibration Controls for HVAC."
CONNECTIONS
A.
Comply with requirements for piping specified in Section 232213 "Steam and Condensate Heating Piping.”
B.
Where installing piping adjacent to machine, allow space for service and maintenance.
STEAM CONDENSATE PUMPS
232223 - 3
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
STEAM CONDENSATE PUMPS SECTION 232223
C.
Install a globe and check valve and pressure gage before inlet of each pump and a gate and check valve at pump outlet.
D.
Pipe drain to nearest floor drain for overflow and drain piping connections.
E.
Install full-size vent piping to outdoors, terminating in 180-degree elbow at point above highest steam system connection or as indicated.
F.
Ground equipment according to Section 260526 "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems."
G.
Connect wiring according to Section 260519 "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables."
3.4 A.
STARTUP SERVICE Perform startup service. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.
Complete installation and startup checks according to manufacturer's written instructions. Clean strainers. Set steam condensate pump controls. Set pump controls for automatic start, stop, and alarm operation. Perform the following preventive maintenance operations and checks before starting: a. b. c. d. e. f.
6.
Set float switches to operate at proper levels. Set throttling valves on pump discharge for specified flow. Check motors for proper rotation. Test pump controls and demonstrate compliance with requirements. Replace damaged or malfunctioning pump controls and equipment. Verify that pump controls are correct for required application.
Start steam condensate pumps according to manufacturer's written startup instructions.
END OF SECTION 232223
STEAM CONDENSATE PUMPS
232223 - 4
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
HVAC WATER TREATMENT SECTION 232500
SECTION 232500 - HVAC WATER TREATMENT PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 A.
1.2 A.
RELATED DOCUMENTS Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. SUMMARY This Section includes water-treatment systems for the following: 1.
1.3 A.
Hot-water heating systems.
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION Closed System: One bypass feeder on each system, with isolating and drain valves installed around balancing valve downstream of circulating pumps, unless otherwise indicated. 1. 2.
Introduce closed system treatment through bypass feeder when required or indicated by test. Performance: Water treatment sized and equipped to treat raw water available at Project site to sustain the following water characteristics: a. b. c. d. e.
1.4
Hardness: 0.00. Iron: 0.00. Total Dissolved Solids (TDS): 1500 to 1750 ppm (as CaCO3). Silica: 60 ppm or less. pH: 10.5 or above.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product data for each type of product specified. Include manufacturer's technical product data, rated capacities of selected equipment clearly indicated, water-pressure drops, weights (shipping, installed, and operating), furnished specialties, accessories, and installation and startup instructions.
B.
Field test reports indicating and interpreting test results relative to compliance with specified requirements.
C.
Maintenance data for chemical water treatment to include in the operation and maintenance manual. Include detailed manufacturer's instructions and parts list for each item of equipment, control, and accessory. Include troubleshooting maintenance guide.
HVAC WATER TREATMENT
232500 - 1
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
1.5
HVAC WATER TREATMENT SECTION 232500
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Supplier Qualifications: A recognized chemical water treatment supplier with warehousing facilities in the Project's vicinity and that is or employs an experienced consultant, available at reasonable times during the course of the Work to consult with Contractor, Architect, and Owner about water treatment.
B.
Chemical Standards: Meet state and local pollution-control regulations.
C.
Comply with NFPA 70 for components and installation.
D.
Listing and Labeling: Provide products specified in this Section that are listed and labeled. 1. 2.
1.6 A.
MAINTENANCE Service Period: Provide chemicals and service program for period of one year from startup date of equipment, including the following: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.
1.7
The Terms "Listed" and "Labeled": As defined in the National Electrical Code, Article 100. Listing and Labeling Agency Qualifications: A "Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory" (NRTL) as defined in OSHA Regulation 1910.7.
Initial water analysis and recommendations. Startup assistance. Training of operating personnel. Periodic field service and consultation. Customer report charts and log sheets. Laboratory technical assistance.
EXTRA MATERIALS
A.
Furnish the following extra materials, matching products installed, packaged with protective covering for storage and with identification labels clearly describing contents.
B.
Chemicals: Furnish quantity equal to 50 percent of amount initially installed.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 A.
HVAC WATER TREATMENT SYSTEM Bypass (Pot) Feeders: Cast iron or steel, for introducing chemicals into system; with funnel, shutoff valve on top, air release valve on top, drain valve on bottom, and recirculating shutoff valves on sides. 1. 2.
Capacity: 1.8 gal. Working Pressure: 125 psi.
HVAC WATER TREATMENT
232500 - 2
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
HVAC WATER TREATMENT SECTION 232500
B.
Positive Displacement Diaphragm Pump: Adjustable flow rate; thermoplastic construction; continuous-duty, fully enclosed electric motor and drive; and built-in relief valve.
C.
Chemical Solution Tanks: Chemical-resistant reservoirs fabricated from high-density opaque polyethylene with graduated markings; with molded fiberglass cover with recess for mounting pump, agitator, or liquid-level switch. 1.
Capacity: 30 gal.
D.
Agitator: Fully enclosed electric motor, stainless-steel clamp and motor mount, with Type 316 stainless-steel shaft and propeller.
E.
Liquid-Level Switch: Polypropylene housing, integrally mounted PVC air trap, receptacles for connection to metering pump, and low-level alarm.
F.
Packaged Conductivity Controller: Solid-state circuiting, 5 percent accuracy, linear dial adjustment, built-in calibration switch, ON-OFF switch and light, control function light, output to control circuit, and recorder.
G.
Cold-Water Meter: Positive displacement type with sealed, tamperproof magnetic drive; impulse contact register; single-pole, double-throw, dry-contact switch.
H.
Solenoid Valves: Forged-brass body, globe pattern, normally open or closed as required, general-purpose solenoid enclosure, and continuous-duty coil.
I.
Electronic Timers: Infinitely adjustable over full range, 150-second and 5-minute range, mounted together in cabinet with HAND-OFF-AUTOMATIC switches and status lights.
2.2
CHEMICALS
A.
Furnish chemicals recommended by water treatment system manufacturer for treating water to meet specified water quality. Provide only chemicals that are compatible with piping materials, seals, and accessories.
B.
System Cleaner: Liquid alkaline compound with emulsifying agents and detergents to remove grease and petroleum products.
C.
Biocide: Chlorine release agents or microbiocides.
D.
Closed System (Water) Chemicals: Sequesting agent to reduce deposits and adjust pH, corrison inhibitors, and conductivity enhancers.
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 A.
INSTALLATION Install treatment equipment level and plumb, according to manufacturer's written instructions, rough-in drawings, the original design, and referenced standards.
HVAC WATER TREATMENT
232500 - 3
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
3.2 A.
CONNECTIONS Piping installation requirements are specified in other Division 23 Sections. The Drawings indicate the general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties. The following are specific connection requirements: 1. 2.
B.
Install piping adjacent to equipment to allow servicing and maintenance. Hot Water Piping: Conform to applicable requirements of Division 23 Section "Hydronic Piping."
Electrical: Conform to applicable requirements of Division 26 Sections for connecting electrical equipment. 1.
3.3
HVAC WATER TREATMENT SECTION 232500
Install electrical devices furnished with boiler but not specified to be factory mounted.
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Testing Agency: A qualified independent testing agency employed and paid by Owner will perform field quality-control testing.
B.
Testing Agency: Provide the services of a qualified independent testing agency to perform field quality-control testing.
3.4
CLEANING
A.
After completing system installation, including outlet fittings and devices, inspect exposed finish. Remove burrs, dirt, and construction debris; repair damaged finishes, including chips, scratches, and abrasions.
B.
Ensure that system is operational, filled, started, and vented prior to cleaning. Place terminal control valves in OPEN position during cleaning. Use water meter to record capacity in each system.
C.
Add cleaning chemicals as recommended by manufacturer. 1.
3.5
Hot-Water Heating System: Apply heat while circulating, slowly raising system to design temperature; maintain for a minimum of 12 hours. Remove heat and allow to cool; drain and refill with clean water. Circulate for 6 hours at design temperature, then drain. Refill with clean water and repeat until system cleaner is removed.
COMMISSIONING
A.
Startup Services: Provide the services of a factory-authorized service representative to provide startup service and to demonstrate and train Owner's maintenance personnel as specified below.
B.
Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment.
HVAC WATER TREATMENT
232500 - 4
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
HVAC WATER TREATMENT SECTION 232500
END OF SECTION 232500
HVAC WATER TREATMENT
232500 - 5
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
METAL DUCTWORK SECTION 233111
SECTION 233111 – METAL DUCTWORK PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 A.
1.2 A.
1.3 A.
1.4
RELATED DOCUMENTS Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. SUMMARY This Section includes rectangular, round, and flat-oval metal ducts and plenums for heating, ventilating, and air conditioning systems in pressure classes from minus 2 inches to plus 10 inches water gage. SYSTEM PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS The duct system design, as indicated, has been used to select and size air moving and distribution equipment and other components of the air system. Changes or alterations to the layout or configuration of the duct system must be specifically approved in writing. Accompany requests for layout modifications with calculations showing that the proposed layout will provide the original design results without increasing the system total pressure. SUBMITTALS
A.
General: Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of Contract, Division 1 Specification Sections.
B.
Shop Drawings from duct-fabrication shop, drawn to a scale not smaller than 1/4 inch equals 1 foot, on Drawing sheets same size as the Contract Drawings, detailing: 1. 2.
3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8.
Fabrication, assembly, and installation details, including plans, elevations, sections, details of components, and attachments to other work. Duct layout, indicating pressure classifications and sizes in plan view. For exhaust duct systems, indicate the classification of the materials handled as defined in this Section. Fittings. Reinforcing details and spacing. Seam and joint construction details. Penetration through fire-rated and other partitions. Terminal unit, coil, and humidifier installations. Hangers and supports, including methods of building attachment, vibration isolation, and duct attachment.
METAL DUCTWORK
233111 - 1
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
1.5
METAL DUCTWORK SECTION 233111
QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Qualify welding processes and welding operators in accordance with AWS D1.1 "Structural Welding Code - Steel" for hangers and supports and AWS D9.1 "Sheet Metal Welding Code."
B.
Qualify each welder in accordance with AWS qualification tests for welding processes involved. Certify that their qualification is current.
C.
NFPA Compliance: Comply with the following NFPA Standards: 1. 2.
1.6
NFPA 90A, "Standard for the Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems," except as indicated otherwise. NFPA 96, "Standard for the Installation of Equipment for the Removal of Smoke and Grease-Laden Vapors for Commercial Cooking Equipment," Chapter 3, "Duct System," for kitchen hood duct systems, except as indicated otherwise.
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
Deliver sealant and fire-stopping materials to site in original unopened containers or bundles with labels informing about manufacturer, product name and designation, color, expiration period for use, pot life, curing time, and mixing instructions for multi-component materials.
B.
Store and handle sealant fire-stopping materials in compliance with manufacturer's recommendations to prevent their deterioration or damage due to moisture, high or low temperatures, contaminants, or other causes.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1
SHEET METAL MATERIALS
A.
Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards--Metal and Flexible" for acceptable materials, material thicknesses, and duct construction methods, unless otherwise indicated. Sheet metal materials shall be free of pitting, seam marks, roller marks, stains, discolorations, and other imperfections.
B.
Galvanized Sheet Steel: Lock-forming quality, ASTM A 653/ A 653M, Coating Designation G 90. Provide mill phosphatized finish for exposed surfaces of ducts exposed to view.
C.
Reinforcement Shapes and Plates: Unless otherwise indicated, provide galvanized steel reinforcing where installed on galvanized sheet metal ducts. For aluminum and stainless steel ducts provide reinforcing of compatible materials.
D.
Tie Rods: Galvanized steel, 1/4-inch minimum diameter for 36-inch length or less; 3/8inch minimum diameter for lengths longer than 36 inches.
METAL DUCTWORK
233111 - 2
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
2.2
METAL DUCTWORK SECTION 233111
DUCT LINER
A.
General: Comply with NFPA Standard 90A and TIMA Standard AHC-101.
B.
Materials: ASTM C 1071, Type II, with coated surface exposed to airstream to prevent erosion of glass fibers. 1. 2. 3. 4.
5. 6.
Thickness: 1 inch. Density: 1-1/2 pounds. Thermal Performance: "K-Factor" equal to 0.28 or better, at a mean temperature of 75 deg F. Fire Hazard Classification: Flame spread rating of not more than 25 without evidence of continued progressive combustion and a smoke developed rating of no higher than 50, when tested in accordance with ASTM C 411. Liner Adhesive: Comply with NFPA Standard 90A and ASTM C 916. Mechanical Fasteners: Galvanized steel, suitable for adhesive attachment, mechanical attachment, or welding attachment to duct. Provide fasteners that do not damage the liner when applied as recommended by the manufacturer, that do not cause leakage in the duct, and will indefinitely sustain a 50-pound tensile dead load test perpendicular to the duct wall. a. b.
2.3
Fastener Pin Length: As required for thickness of insulation, and without projecting more than 1/8 inch into the airstream. Adhesive For Attachment of Mechanical Fasteners: Comply with the "Fire Hazard Classification" of duct liner system.
SEALING MATERIALS
A.
Joint and Seam Sealants, General: The term sealant used here is not limited to materials of adhesive or mastic nature, but also includes tapes and combinations of open weave fabric strips and mastics.
B.
Joint and Seam Sealant: One-part, nonsag, solvent-release-curing, polymerized butyl sealant complying with FS TT-S-001657, Type I; formulated with a minimum of 75 percent solids.
C.
Flanged Joint Mastics: One-part, acid-curing, silicone elastomeric joint sealants, complying with ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, Use O.
2.4 A.
FIRE-STOPPING Fire-Resistant Sealant: Provide one-part elastomeric sealant formulated for use in a through-penetration fire-stop system for filling openings around duct penetrations through walls and floors, having fire-resistance ratings indicated as established by testing identical assemblies per ASTM E 814 by Underwriters Laboratory Inc. or other testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
METAL DUCTWORK
233111 - 3
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
2.5
METAL DUCTWORK SECTION 233111
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
A.
Building Attachments: Concrete inserts, powder actuated fasteners, or structural steel fasteners appropriate for building materials. Do not use powder actuated concrete fasteners for lightweight aggregate concretes or for slabs less than 4-inches thick.
B.
Hangers: Galvanized sheet steel, or round, uncoated steel, threaded rod. 1. 2.
Hangers Installed In Corrosive Atmospheres: Electro-galvanized, all-thread rod or hot-dipped-galvanized rods with threads painted after installation. Straps and Rod Sizes: Conform with Table 4-1 in SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards, 1995 Edition, for sheet steel width and gage and steel rod diameters.
C.
Duct Attachments: Sheet metal screws, blind rivets, or self-tapping metal screws; compatible with duct materials.
D.
Trapeze and Riser Supports: Steel shapes conforming to ASTM A 36. 1. 2. 3.
2.6 A.
RECTANGULAR DUCT FABRICATION General: Except as otherwise indicated, fabricate rectangular ducts with galvanized sheet steel, in accordance with SMACNA "HVAC Duct Construction Standards--Metal and Flexible," Tables 1-3 through 1-16, including their associated details. Conform to the requirements in the referenced standard for metal thickness, reinforcing types and intervals, tie rod applications, and joint types and intervals. 1. 2.
2.7 A.
Where galvanized steel ducts are installed, provide hot-dipped-galvanized steel shapes and plates. For stainless steel ducts, provide stainless steel support materials. For aluminum ducts, provide aluminum support materials, except where materials are electrolytically separated from ductwork.
Fabricate rectangular ducts in lengths appropriate to reinforcement and rigidity class required for pressure classification. Provide materials that are free from visual imperfections such as pitting, seam marks, roller marks, stains, and discolorations.
RECTANGULAR DUCT FITTINGS Fabricate elbows, transitions, offsets, branch connections, and other duct construction in accordance with SMACNA "HVAC Metal Duct Construction Standard--Metal and Flexible," 1995 Edition, Figures 2-1 through 2-9.
METAL DUCTWORK
233111 - 4
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
2.8
METAL DUCTWORK SECTION 233111
SHOP APPLICATION OF LINER IN RECTANGULAR DUCTS
A.
Adhere a single layer of indicated thickness of duct liner with 90 percent coverage of adhesive at liner contact surface area. Multiple layers of insulation to achieve indicated thickness is prohibited.
B.
Apply a coat of adhesive to liner facing in direction of airflow not receiving metal nosing.
C.
Butt transverse joints without gaps and coat joint with adhesive.
D.
Fold and compress liner in corners of rectangular ducts or cut and fit to assure butted edge overlapping.
E.
Longitudinal joints in rectangular ducts shall not occur except at corners of ducts, unless the size of the duct and standard liner product dimensions make longitudinal joints necessary. 1.
Apply an adhesive coating on longitudinal seams in ducts exceeding 2,500 FPM air velocity.
F.
Secure liner with mechanical fasteners 4 inches from corners and at intervals not exceeding 12 inches transversely around perimeter; at 3 inches from transverse joints and at intervals not exceeding 18 inches longitudinally.
G.
Secure transversely oriented liner edges facing the airstream with metal nosings that are either channel or "Z" profile or are integrally formed from the duct wall at the following locations: 1. 2. 3.
H.
2.9
Fan discharge. Intervals of lined duct preceding unlined duct. Upstream edges of transverse joints in ducts.
Terminate liner with duct buildouts installed in ducts to attach dampers, turning vane assemblies, and other devices. Fabricated buildouts (metal hat sections) or other buildout means are optional; when used, secure buildouts to the duct wall with bolts, screws, rivets, or welds. Terminate liner at fire dampers at connection to fire damper sleeve through fire separation. ROUND AND FLAT OVAL DUCT FABRICATION
A.
General: "Basic Round Diameter" as used in this article is the diameter of the size of round duct that has a circumference equal to the perimeter of a given sized of flat oval duct. Except where interrupted by fittings, provide round and flat oval ducts in lengths not less than 12 feet.
B.
Round Ducts: Fabricate round supply ducts using seam types identified in SMACNA "HVAC Duct Construction Standards--Metal and Flexible," 1995 Edition, Figure 3-1, RL-1, RL-4, or RL-5. Seams Types RL-2 or RL-3 may be used if spot-welded on 1-inch intervals. Comply with SMACNA "HVAC Duct Construction Standards--Metal and Flexible," Table 3-2 for galvanized steel gages.
METAL DUCTWORK
233111 - 5
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
C.
Double-Wall (Insulated) Ducts: Fabricate double-wall insulated ducts with an outer shell, insulation, and an inner liner as specified below. Dimensions indicated on internally insulated ducts are nominal inside dimensions. 1. 2.
3.
4.
Thermal Conductivity: 0.27 Btu/sq.ft./deg F/inch thickness at 75 deg F mean temperature. Outer Shell: Base outer shell gage on actual outer shell dimensions. Provide outer shell lengths 2 inches longer than inner shell and insulation, and in gages specified above for single-wall duct. Insulation: Unless otherwise indicated, provide 1-inch-thick fiber-glass insulation. Provide insulation ends where internally insulated duct connects to single-wall duct or non-insulated components. The insulation end shall terminate the insulation and reduce the outer shell diameter to the inner liner diameter. Perforated Inner Liner: Construct round and flat oval inner liners with perforated sheet metal of the gages listed below. Provide 3/32-inch-diameter perforations, with an overall open area of 23 percent. For flat oval ducts, the diameter indicated below is the "basic round diameter." a. b. c. d.
5.
2.10
METAL DUCTWORK SECTION 233111
3 to 8 inches: 28 gage with standard spiral construction. 9 to 42 inches: 28 gage with single-rib spiral construction. 44 to 60 inches: 26 gage with single-rib spiral construction. 62 to 88 inches: 22 gage with standard spiral construction.
Maintain concentricity of liner to outer shell by mechanical means. Retain insulation from dislocation by mechanical means.
ROUND SUPPLY AND EXHAUST FITTINGS FABRICATION
A.
90-Degree Tees and Laterals and Conical Tees: Fabricate to conform to SMACNA "HVAC Duct Construction Standards--Metal and Flexible," 1995 Edition, Figures 3-4 and 3-5 and with metal thickness specified for longitudinal seam straight duct.
B.
Diverging-Flow Fittings: Fabricate with a reduced entrance to branch taps with no excess material projecting from the body onto branch tap entrance.
C.
Elbows: Fabricate in die-formed, gored, pleated, or mitered construction. Fabricate the bend radius of die-formed, gored, and pleated elbows 1.5 times the elbow diameter.
D.
Double-Wall (Insulated) Fittings: Fabricate double-wall insulated fittings with an outer shell, insulation, and an inner liner as specified below. Dimensions indicated on internally insulated ducts are nominal inside dimensions. 1. 2.
3.
Thermal Conductivity: 0.27 Btu/sq.ft./deg F/inch thickness at 75 deg F mean temperature. Outer Shell: Base outer shell gage on actual outer shell dimensions. Provide outer shell lengths 2 inches longer than inner shell and insulation. Gages for outer shell shall be same as for uninsulated fittings specified above. Insulation: Unless otherwise indicated, provide 1-inch-thick fiber-glass insulation. Provide insulation ends where internally insulated duct connects to single-wall duct or
METAL DUCTWORK
233111 - 6
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
4.
non-insulated components. The insulation end shall terminate the insulation and reduce the outer shell diameter to the nominal single-wall size. Perforated Inner Liner: Construct round and flat oval inner liners with perforated sheet metal of the gages listed below. Provide 3/32-inch-diameter perforations, with an overall open area of 23 percent. For flat oval ducts, the diameter indicated in the table below is the "basic round diameter." a. b. c.
5.
METAL DUCTWORK SECTION 233111
3 to 34 inches: 24 gage. 35 to 58 inches: 22 gage. 60 to 88 inches: 20 gage.
Maintain concentricity of liner to outer shell by mechanical means. Retain insulation from dislocation by mechanical means.
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1
DUCT INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A.
Duct System Pressure Class: Construct and install each duct system for the specific duct pressure classification indicated.
B.
All ducts shall be galvanized steel, except as noted.
C.
Install ducts with the fewest possible joints.
D.
Use fabricated fittings for all changes in directions, changes in size and shape, and connections.
E.
Install couplings tight to duct wall surface with projections into duct at connections kept to a minimum.
F.
Provide turning vanes for all supply, return, and exhaust ductwork for 90 deg. elbow.
G.
Locate ducts, except as otherwise indicated, vertically and horizontally, parallel and perpendicular to building lines; avoid diagonal runs. Install duct systems in shortest route that does not obstruct useable space or block access for servicing building and its equipment.
H.
Provide clearance of 1 inch where furring is shown for enclosure or concealment of ducts, plus allowance for insulation thickness, if any.
I.
Install insulated ducts with 1-inch clearance outside of insulation.
J.
Coordinate layout with suspended ceiling and lighting layouts and similar finished work.
K.
Non-Fire-Rated Partition Penetrations: Where ducts pass interior partitions and exterior walls, and are exposed to view, conceal space between construction opening and duct or duct insulation with sheet metal flanges of same gage as duct. Overlap opening on 4 sides by at least 1-1/2 inches.
METAL DUCTWORK
233111 - 7
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
3.2 A.
SEAM AND JOINT SEALING General: Seal duct seams and joints as follows: 1. 2.
3. 3.3
METAL DUCTWORK SECTION 233111
Pressure Classifications Greater Than 3 Inches Water Gage: All transverse joints, longitudinal seams, and duct penetrations. Pressure Classification 2 and 3 Inches Water Gage: All transverse joints and longitudinal seams. a. Pressure Classification Less than 2 Inches Water Gage: Transverse joints only. Seal externally insulated ducts prior to insulation installation.
HANGING AND SUPPORTING
A.
Install rigid round, rectangular, and flat oval metal duct with support systems indicated in SMACNA "HVAC Duct Construction Standards," Tables 4-1 through 4-3 and Figures 4-1 through 4-10.
B.
Support horizontal ducts within 2 feet of each elbow and within 4 feet of each branch intersection.
C.
Support vertical ducts at a maximum interval of 16 feet and at each floor.
D.
Upper attachments to structures shall have an allowable load not exceeding 1/4 of the failure (proof test) load but are not limited to the specific methods indicated.
E.
Install concrete insert prior to placing concrete.
F.
Install powder actuated concrete fasteners after concrete is placed and completely cured.
3.4
DUCT SEALING
A.
Seal ducts for duct static-pressure, seal classes, and leakage classes specified in “Duct Schedule” Article according to SMACNA’s “HVAC Duct Construction Standards – Metal and Flexible.”
B.
Seal ducts to the following seal classes according to SMACNA’s “HVC Duct Construction Standards – Metal and Flexible”: 1. Comply with SMACNA’s “HVAC Duct Construction Standards – Metal and Flexible>” 2. Outdoor, Supply-Air Ducts: Seal Class A. 3. Outdoor, Exhaust Ducts: Seal Class C. 4. Outdoor, Return-Air Ducts: Seal Class C. 5. Unconditioned Space, Supply-Air Ducts in Pressure Classes 2-Inch wg (500 Pa) and Lower: Seal Class B. 6. Unconditioned Space, Supply-Air Ducts in Pressure Classes Higher Than 2-Inch wg (500 Pa): Seal Class A. 7. Unconditioned Space, Exhaust Ducts: Seal Class C. 8. Unconditioned Space, Return-Air Ducts: Seal Class B. 9. Conditioned Space, Supply-Air Ducts in Pressure Classes 2-Inch wg (500 Pa) and Lower: Seal Class C.
METAL DUCTWORK
233111 - 8
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
10. 11. 12. 3.5
METAL DUCTWORK SECTION 233111
Conditioned Space, Supply-Air Ducts in Pressure Classes Higher than 2-Inch wg (500 Pa): Seal Class B. Conditioned Space, Exhaust Ducts: Seal Class B. Conditioned Space, Return-Air Ducts: Seal Class C.
CONNECTIONS
A.
Equipment Connections: Connect equipment with flexible connectors in accordance with SMACNA “HVAC Duct Construction Standards,” Figure 2-17
B.
Branch Connections: Comply with SMACNA "HVAC Duct Construction Standards," Figures 2-5 through 2-8.
C.
Outlet and Inlet Connections: Comply with SMACNA "HVAC Duct Construction Standards," Figures 2-14 through 2-15.
3.6
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Disassemble, reassemble, and seal segments of the systems as required to accommodate leakage testing, and as required for compliance with test requirements.
B.
Conduct tests, in the presence of the Architect, at static pressures equal to the maximum design pressure of the system or the section being tested. If pressure classifications are not indicated, test entire system at the maximum system design pressure. Do not pressurize systems above the maximum design operating pressure. Give seven days' advanced notice for testing.
C.
Determine leakage from entire system or section of the system by relating leakage to the surface area of the test section.
D.
Remake leaking joints as required and apply sealants to achieve specified maximum allowable leakage.
3.7
CLEANING
A.
Mark position of dampers and air-directional mechanical devices before cleaning, and perform cleaning before air balancing.
B.
Use service openings, as required, for physical and mechanical entry and for inspection. 1. 2. 3.
Create other openings to comply with duct standards. Disconnect flexible ducts as needed for cleaning and inspection. Remove and reinstall ceiling sections to gain access during the cleaning process.
C.
Vent vacuuming system to the outside. Include filtration to contain debris removed from HVAC systems, and locate exhaust down wind and away from air intakes and other points of entry into building.
D.
Clean the following metal duct systems by removing surface contaminants and deposits:
METAL DUCTWORK
233111 - 9
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
1. 2.
3.
4. 5. 6. E.
Air outlets and inlets (registers, grilles, and diffusers). Supply, return, and exhaust fans including fan housings, plenums (except ceiling supply and return plenums), scrolls, blades or vanes, shafts, baffles, dampers, and drive assemblies. Air-handling unit internal surfaces and components including mixing box, coil section, air wash systems, spray eliminators, condensate drain pans, humidifiers and dehumidifiers, filters and filter sections, and condensate collectors and drains. Coils and related components. Return-air ducts, dampers, and actuators except in ceiling plenums and mechanical equipment rooms. Supply-air ducts, dampers, actuators, and turning vanes.
Mechanical Cleaning Methodology: 1. 2.
3. 4. 5.
F.
METAL DUCTWORK SECTION 233111
Clean metal duct systems using mechanical cleaning methods that extract contaminants from within duct systems and remove contaminants from building. Use vacuum-collection devices that are operated continuously during cleaning. Connect vacuum device to downstream end of duct sections so areas being cleaned are under negative pressure. Use mechanical agitation to dislodge debris adhered to interior duct surfaces without damaging integrity of metal ducts, duct liner, or duct accessories. Clean fibrous-glass duct liner with HEPA vacuuming equipment; do not permit duct liner to get wet. Clean coils and coil drain pans according to NADCA 1992. Keep drain pan operational. Rinse coils with clean water to remove latent residues and cleaning materials; comb and straighten fins.
Cleanliness Verification: 1. 2.
Visually inspect metal ducts for contaminants. Where contaminants are discovered, re-clean and reinspect ducts.
END OF SECTION 233111
METAL DUCTWORK
233111 - 10
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
DUCT ACCESSORIES SECTION 233300
SECTION 233300 - DUCT ACCESSORIES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 A.
1.2 A.
RELATED DOCUMENTS Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. SUMMARY This Section includes the following: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10.
1.3 A.
QUALITY ASSURANCE NFPA Compliance: Comply with the following NFPA Standards: 1. 2.
1.4 A.
Backdraft dampers. Manual volume control dampers. Motorized control dampers. Fire and smoke dampers. Actuators. Turning vanes. Duct-mounted access doors and panels. Flexible connectors. Flexible ducts. Accessories hardware.
NFPA 90A, "Standard for the Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems." NFPA 90B, "Standard for the Installation of Warm Air Heating and Air Conditioning Systems."
EXTRA MATERIALS Furnish extra materials matching products installed as described below, packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. Deliver extra materials to Owner. 1.
Fusible Links: Furnish quantity equal to 10 percent of amount installed.
DUCT ACCESSORIES
233300 - 1
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
DUCT ACCESSORIES SECTION 233300
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1
BACKDRAFT DAMPERS
A.
Description: Suitable for horizontal or vertical installation.
B.
Frame: 18-gage galvanized steel, with welded corners and mounting flange.
C.
Frame: 0.063-inch-thick 6063T extruded aluminum, with mounting flange.
D.
Blades: 0.025-inch-thick roll-formed aluminum.
E.
Blade Seals: Vinyl.
F.
Blade Axles: Galvanized steel.
G.
Tie Bars and Brackets: Galvanized steel.
H.
Return Spring: Adjustable tension.
I.
Chain Operator: 15-foot long galvanized-steel sash chain and pulley.
J.
Wing-Nut Operator: Galvanized steel, with 1/4-inch galvanized-steel rod.
2.2
MANUAL VOLUME CONTROL DAMPERS
A.
General: Provide factory-fabricated volume-control dampers, complete with required hardware and accessories. Stiffen damper blades to provide stability under operating conditions. Provide locking device to hold single-blade dampers in a fixed position without vibration. Close duct penetrations for damper components to seal duct consistent with pressure class. Provide end bearings or other seals for ducts with pressure classifications of 3 inches or higher. Extend axles full length of damper blades. Provide bearings at both ends of operating shaft.
B.
Standard Volume Control Dampers: Multiple- or single-blade, parallel- or opposed-blade design as indicated, standard leakage rating, with linkage outside of air stream, and suitable for horizontal or vertical applications. 1.
2.
3. 4. 5. 6.
Steel Frames: Hat-shaped, galvanized-steel channels, minimum of 16 gage, and with mitered and welded corners. Provide frames with flanges where indicated for attaching to walls. Provide flangeless frames where indicated for installation in ducts. Aluminum Frames: Hat-shaped, 0.063-inch-thick, 6063T extruded aluminum channels. Provide frames with flanges where indicated for attaching to walls. Provide flangeless frames where indicated for installation in ducts. Roll-Formed Steel Blades: 16-gage galvanized steel. Extruded Aluminum Blades: 0.050-inch-thick 6063T extruded aluminum. Blade Axles: Galvanized steel. Tie Bars and Brackets: Galvanized steel.
DUCT ACCESSORIES
233300 - 2
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
DUCT ACCESSORIES SECTION 233300
C.
Jackshaft: 1-inch-diameter, galvanized-steel pipe rotating within a pipe bearing assembly mounted on supports at each mullion and at each end of multiple damper assemblies. Provide appropriate length and number of mounting to connect linkage of each damper of a multiple damper assembly.
D.
Damper Control Hardware: Zinc-plated, die-cast core with a heavy-gage dial and handle made of 3/32-inch-thick zinc-plated steel, and a 3/4-inch hexagon locking nut. Provide center hole to suit damper operating rod size. Provide elevated platform for insulated duct mounting.
2.3 A.
MOTORIZED CONTROL DAMPERS General Description: AMCA-rated, opposed-blade design; minimum of 0.1084-inch- thick, galvanized-steel frames with holes for duct mounting; minimum of 0.0635-inch- thick, galvanized-steel damper blades with maximum blade width of 8 inches. 1.
2. 3.
2.4
Secure blades to 1/2-inch- diameter, zinc-plated axles using zinc-plated hardware, with nylon blade bearings, blade-linkage hardware of zinc-plated steel and brass, ends sealed against spring-stainless-steel blade bearings, and thrust bearings at each end of every blade. Operating Temperature Range: From minus 40 to plus 200 deg F. Provide parallel- or opposed-blade design with inflatable seal blade edging, or replaceable rubber seals, rated for leakage at less than 10 cfm per sq. ft. of damper area, at differential pressure of 4-inch wg when damper is being held by torque of 50 in. x lbf; when tested according to AMCA 500D.
FIRE DAMPERS
A.
General: UL labeled according to UL Standard 555 "Standard for Fire Dampers." Refer to Fire Damper Schedule at the end of this Section.
B.
Fire Rating: 1-1/2 or 3 hours, as indicated.
C.
Frame: Type B; fabricated with roll-formed, 21-gage, galvanized-steel; with mitered and interlocking corners.
D.
Mounting Sleeve: Factory-installed or field-installed galvanized steel. 1. 2.
Minimum Thickness: One gage heavier than the connecting duct and length to suit application. Exceptions: Omit sleeve where damper frame width permits direct attachment of perimeter mounting angles on each side of the wall or floor, and thickness of damper frame meets sleeve requirements.
E.
Mounting Orientation: Vertical or horizontal as indicated.
F.
Blades: Roll-formed, interlocking, 21-gage galvanized steel.
G.
Fusible Link: Replaceable, 165 deg F or 212 deg F rated as indicated.
DUCT ACCESSORIES
233300 - 3
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
2.5
DUCT ACCESSORIES SECTION 233300
TURNING VANES
A.
Fabricate turning vanes according to SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards--Metal and Flexible, 1995 Edition, Figures 2-3 and 2-4.
B.
Manufactured Turning Vanes: Fabricate of 1-1/2-inch-wide, curved blades set at 3/4 inch on center, support with bars perpendicular to blades set at 2 inches on center, and set into side strips suitable for mounting in ducts.
2.6
DUCT-MOUNTED ACCESS DOORS AND PANELS
A.
General: Provide construction and airtightness suitable for duct pressure class. Fabricate according to SMACNA “HVAC Duct Construction Standards,” Figures 2-10 and 2-11.
B.
Frame: Galvanized sheet steel. Provide with bend-over tabs and foam gaskets.
C.
Door: Double-wall, galvanized sheet metal construction with insulation fill and thickness, number of hinges and locks as indicated for duct pressure class. Provide vision panel where indicated. Provide 1-inch by 1-inch butt hinge or piano hinge and cam latches.
D.
Seal around frame attachment to duct and door to frame with neoprene or foam rubber seals.
E.
Insulation: 1-inch-thick fiber glass or polystyrene foam board.
2.7
FLEXIBLE CONNECTORS
A.
General: Flame-retarded or noncombustible fabrics, coatings, and adhesives complying with UL Standard 181, Class 1 and crimped into metal edging strip.
B.
Conventional, Indoor System Flexible Connectors Fabric: Glass fabric double coated with polychloroprene. 1. 2.
2.8
Minimum Weight: 26 oz./sq. yd. Tensile Strength: 480 lbf/inch in the warp and 360 lbf/inch in the filling.
FLEXIBLE DUCTS
A.
General: Comply with UL 181, Class 1.
B.
Flexible Ducts - Insulated: Factory-fabricated, insulated, round duct, with an outer jacket enclosing 1-1/2-inch-thick, glass fiber insulation around a continuous inner liner. 1. 2. 3.
C.
Reinforcement: Steel-wire helix encapsulated in the inner liner. Outer Jacket: Polyethylene film. Inner Liner: Polyethylene film.
Where permitted: Flexible ducts shall only be installed under special circumstances and shall be submitted and approved in writing by the University Engineer.
DUCT ACCESSORIES
233300 - 4
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
2.9
DUCT ACCESSORIES SECTION 233300
ACCESSORIES HARDWARE
A.
Instrument Test Holes: Cast iron or cast aluminum to suit duct material, including screw cap and gasket and a flat mounting gasket. Size to allow insertion of pitot tube and other testing instruments and provide in length to suit duct insulation thickness.
B.
Splitter Damper Accessories: Zinc-plated damper blade bracket, 1/4-inch, zinc-plated operating rod, and a duct-mounted, ball-joint bracket with flat rubber gasket and squarehead set screw.
C.
Flexible Duct Clamps: Stainless steel band with cadmium-plated hex screw to tighten band with a worm-gear action. Provide in sizes from 3 to 18 inches to suit duct size.
D.
Adhesives: High strength, quick setting, neoprene based, waterproof and resistant to gasoline and grease.
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 A.
3.2
EXAMINATION Examine areas and conditions for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of duct accessories. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected. INSTALLATION
A.
Install duct accessories according to manufacturer's installation instructions and applicable portions of details of construction as shown in SMACNA standards.
B.
Install volume control dampers in lined duct with methods to avoid damage to liner and to avoid erosion of duct liner.
C.
Provide test holes at fan inlet and outlet and elsewhere as indicated.
D.
Install fire dampers according to the manufacturer's UL-approved printed instructions.
E.
Install fusible links in fire dampers.
F.
Install turning vanes in all 90 deg. elbows for supply, return, and exhaust ductwork.
G.
Label access doors according to Division 23 Section "HVAC Identification."
H.
Flexible ducts are prohibited except under special circumstances and must be submitted for approval by the University Engineer
3.3 A.
ADJUSTING Adjust duct accessories for proper settings.
DUCT ACCESSORIES
233300 - 5
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
DUCT ACCESSORIES SECTION 233300
B.
Adjust fire dampers for proper action.
C.
Final positioning of manual dampers is specified in Division 23 Section "Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing."
END OF SECTION 233300
DUCT ACCESSORIES
233300 - 6
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
HVAC POWER VENTILATORS SECTION 233423
SECTION 233423 - HVAC POWER VENTILATORS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 A.
1.2 A.
RELATED DOCUMENTS Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. SUMMARY Section Includes: 1. 2. 3.
1.3
Centrifugal roof ventilators. In-line centrifugal fans. Propeller fans.
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A.
Project Altitude: Base fan-performance ratings on actual Project site elevations.
B.
Operating Limits: Classify according to AMCA 99.
1.4 A.
ACTION SUBMITTALS Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include rated capacities, operating characteristics, and furnished specialties and accessories. Also include the following: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7.
B.
Certified fan performance curves with system operating conditions indicated. Certified fan sound-power ratings. Motor ratings and electrical characteristics, plus motor and electrical accessories. Material thickness and finishes, including color charts. Dampers, including housings, linkages, and operators. Roof curbs. Fan speed controllers.
Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work. 1.
2.
Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field connection. Wiring Diagrams: For power, signal, and control wiring.
HVAC POWER VENTILATORS
233423 -1
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
1.5 A.
1.6 A.
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS Operation and Maintenance Data: For power ventilators to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1.
1.7
HVAC POWER VENTILATORS SECTION 233423
Belts: One set(s) for each belt-driven unit.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.
B.
AMCA Compliance: Fans shall have AMCA-Certified performance ratings and shall bear the AMCA-Certified Ratings Seal.
C.
UL Standards: Power ventilators shall comply with UL 705. Power ventilators for use for restaurant kitchen exhaust shall also comply with UL 762.
1.8
COORDINATION
A.
Coordinate size and location of structural-steel support members.
B.
Coordinate sizes and locations of roof curbs, equipment supports, and roof penetrations with actual equipment provided.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 A.
CENTRIFUGAL ROOF VENTILATORS Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.
B.
Aerovent; a division of Twin City Fan Companies, Ltd. Carnes Company. Greenheck Fan Corporation. Loren Cook Company. PennBarry.
Housing: Removable, spun-aluminum, dome top and outlet baffle; square, one-piece, aluminum base with venturi inlet cone.
HVAC POWER VENTILATORS
233423 -2
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
1.
HVAC POWER VENTILATORS SECTION 233423
Upblast Units: Provide spun-aluminum discharge baffle to direct discharge air upward, with rain and snow drains.
C.
Fan Wheels: Aluminum hub and wheel with backward-inclined blades.
D.
Belt Drives: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.
E.
Accessories: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.
F.
A.
Configuration: Self-flashing without a cant strip, with mounting flange. Overall Height: 12 inches. Pitch Mounting: Manufacture curb for roof slope. Metal Liner: Galvanized steel.
IN-LINE CENTRIFUGAL FANS Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. 2. 3. 4.
B.
Variable-Speed Controller: Solid-state control to reduce speed from 100 to less than 50 percent. Disconnect Switch: Nonfusible type, with thermal-overload protection mounted inside fan housing, factory wired through an internal aluminum conduit. Bird Screens: Removable, 1/2-inch mesh, aluminum or brass wire. Dampers: Counterbalanced, parallel-blade, backdraft dampers mounted in curb base; factory set to close when fan stops. Motorized Dampers: Parallel-blade dampers mounted in curb base with electric actuator; wired to close when fan stops.
Roof Curbs: Galvanized steel; mitered and welded corners; 1-1/2-inch- thick, rigid, fiberglass insulation adhered to inside walls; and 1-1/2-inch wood nailer. Size as required to suit roof opening and fan base. 1. 2. 3. 4.
2.2
Resiliently mounted to housing. Fan Shaft: Turned, ground, and polished steel; keyed to wheel hub. Shaft Bearings: Permanently lubricated, permanently sealed, self-aligning ball bearings. Pulleys: Cast-iron, adjustable-pitch motor pulley. Fan and motor isolated from exhaust airstream.
Carnes Company. Greenheck Fan Corporation. Loren Cook Company. PennBarry.
Housing: Split, spun aluminum with aluminum straightening vanes, inlet and outlet flanges, and support bracket adaptable to floor, side wall, or ceiling mounting.
HVAC POWER VENTILATORS
233423 -3
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
HVAC POWER VENTILATORS SECTION 233423
C.
Direct-Drive Units: Motor mounted in airstream, factory wired to disconnect switch located on outside of fan housing.
D.
Belt-Driven Units: Motor mounted on adjustable base, with adjustable sheaves, enclosure around belts within fan housing, and lubricating tubes from fan bearings extended to outside of fan housing.
E.
Fan Wheels: Aluminum, airfoil blades welded to aluminum hub.
F.
Accessories: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.
2.3 A.
Variable-Speed Controller: Solid-state control to reduce speed from 100 to less than 50 percent. Volume-Control Damper: Manually operated with quadrant lock, located in fan outlet. Companion Flanges: For inlet and outlet duct connections. Fan Guards: 1/2- by 1-inch mesh of galvanized steel in removable frame. Provide guard for inlet or outlet for units not connected to ductwork. Motor and Drive Cover (Belt Guard): Epoxy-coated steel.
PROPELLER FANS Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. 2. 3.
Carnes Company. Loren Cook Company. PennBarry.
B.
Housing: Galvanized-steel sheet with flanged edges and integral orifice ring with baked-enamel finish coat applied after assembly.
C.
Fan Wheel: Replaceable, extruded-aluminum, airfoil blades fastened to cast-aluminum hub; factory set pitch angle of blades.
D.
Fan Drive: Motor mounted in airstream, factory wired to disconnect switch located on outside of fan housing.
E.
Fan Drive: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7.
Resiliently mounted to housing. Statically and dynamically balanced. Selected for continuous operation at maximum rated fan speed and motor horsepower, with final alignment and belt adjustment made after installation. Extend grease fitting to accessible location outside of unit. Service Factor Based on Fan Motor Size: 1.4. Fan Shaft: Turned, ground, and polished steel; keyed to wheel hub. Shaft Bearings: Permanently lubricated, permanently sealed, self-aligning ball bearings.
HVAC POWER VENTILATORS
233423 -4
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
a. 8. 9.
10. 11. F.
2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7.
A.
2.5
Pulleys: Cast iron with split, tapered bushing; dynamically balanced at factory. Motor Pulleys: Adjustable pitch for use with motors through 5 hp; fixed pitch for use with larger motors. Select pulley so pitch adjustment is at the middle of adjustment range at fan design conditions. Belts: Oil resistant, nonsparking, and nonstatic; matched sets for multiple belt drives. Belt Guards: Fabricate of steel for motors mounted on outside of fan cabinet.
Gravity Shutters: Aluminum blades in aluminum frame; interlocked blades with nylon bearings. Motor-Side Back Guard: Galvanized steel, complying with OSHA specifications, removable for maintenance. Wall Sleeve: Galvanized steel to match fan and accessory size. Weathershield Hood: Galvanized steel to match fan and accessory size. Weathershield Front Guard: Galvanized steel with expanded metal screen. Variable-Speed Controller: Solid-state control to reduce speed from 100 to less than 50 percent. Disconnect Switch: Nonfusible type, with thermal-overload protection mounted inside fan housing, factory wired through an internal aluminum conduit.
MOTORS Comply with NEMA designation, temperature rating, service factor, enclosure type, and efficiency requirements for motors specified in Section 230513 "Common Motor Requirements for HVAC Equipment." 1.
B.
Ball-Bearing Rating Life: ABMA 9, L10 of 100,000 hours.
Accessories: 1.
2.4
HVAC POWER VENTILATORS SECTION 233423
Motor Sizes: Minimum size as indicated. If not indicated, large enough so driven load will not require motor to operate in service factor range above 1.0.
Enclosure Type: Totally enclosed, fan cooled. SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Certify sound-power level ratings according to AMCA 301, "Methods for Calculating Fan Sound Ratings from Laboratory Test Data." Factory test fans according to AMCA 300, "Reverberant Room Method for Sound Testing of Fans." Label fans with the AMCA-Certified Ratings Seal.
B.
Certify fan performance ratings, including flow rate, pressure, power, air density, speed of rotation, and efficiency by factory tests according to AMCA 210, "Laboratory Methods of Testing Fans for Aerodynamic Performance Rating." Label fans with the AMCA-Certified Ratings Seal.
HVAC POWER VENTILATORS
233423 -5
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
HVAC POWER VENTILATORS SECTION 233423
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1
INSTALLATION
A.
Install power ventilators level and plumb.
B.
Equipment Mounting: 1.
2. 3.
Install power ventilators on cast-in-place concrete equipment base(s). Comply with requirements for equipment bases and foundations specified in Section 033000 "Cast-in-Place Concrete." Comply with requirements for vibration isolation and seismic control devices specified in Section 230548 "Vibration and Seismic Controls for HVAC." Comply with requirements for vibration isolation devices specified in Section 230548.13 "Vibration Controls for HVAC."
C.
Secure roof-mounted fans to roof curbs with cadmium-plated hardware. Section 077200 "Roof Accessories" for installation of roof curbs.
D.
Ceiling Units: Suspend units from structure; use steel wire or metal straps.
E.
Support suspended units from structure using threaded steel rods and spring hangers having a static deflection of 1 inch. Vibration-control devices are specified in Section 230548.13 "Vibration Controls for HVAC."
F.
Install units with clearances for service and maintenance.
G.
Label units according to requirements specified in Section 230553 "Identification for HVAC Piping and Equipment."
3.2
See
CONNECTIONS
A.
Drawings indicate general arrangement of ducts and duct accessories. Make final duct connections with flexible connectors. Flexible connectors are specified in Section 233300 "Air Duct Accessories."
B.
Install ducts adjacent to power ventilators to allow service and maintenance.
C.
Ground equipment according to Section 260526 "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems."
D.
Connect wiring according to Section 260519 "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables."
3.3 A.
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL Perform tests and inspections.
HVAC POWER VENTILATORS
233423 -6
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
1.
B.
HVAC POWER VENTILATORS SECTION 233423
Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections, and to assist in testing.
Tests and Inspections: 1. 2.
3. 4.
5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11.
Verify that shipping, blocking, and bracing are removed. Verify that unit is secure on mountings and supporting devices and that connections to ducts and electrical components are complete. Verify that proper thermal-overload protection is installed in motors, starters, and disconnect switches. Verify that cleaning and adjusting are complete. Disconnect fan drive from motor, verify proper motor rotation direction, and verify fan wheel free rotation and smooth bearing operation. Reconnect fan drive system, align and adjust belts, and install belt guards. Adjust belt tension. Adjust damper linkages for proper damper operation. Verify lubrication for bearings and other moving parts. Verify that manual and automatic volume control and fire and smoke dampers in connected ductwork systems are in fully open position. Disable automatic temperature-control operators, energize motor and adjust fan to indicated rpm, and measure and record motor voltage and amperage. Shut unit down and reconnect automatic temperature-control operators. Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest as specified above.
C.
Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment.
D.
Prepare test and inspection reports.
3.4
ADJUSTING
A.
Adjust damper linkages for proper damper operation.
B.
Adjust belt tension.
C.
Comply with requirements in Section 230593 "Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for HVAC" for testing, adjusting, and balancing procedures.
D.
Replace fan and motor pulleys as required to achieve design airflow.
E.
Lubricate bearings.
END OF SECTION 233423
HVAC POWER VENTILATORS
233423 -7
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
AIR TERMINAL UNITS SECTION 233600
SECTION 233600 – AIR TERMINAL UNITS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 A.
1.2 A.
RELATED DOCUMENTS Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. SUMMARY Section Includes: 1.
1.3 A.
SUBMITTALS Product Data: For each type of the following products, including rated capacities, furnished specialties, sound-power ratings, and accessories. 1. 2. 3.
B.
2. 3.
Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field connection. Wiring Diagrams: For power, signal, and control wiring. Hangers and supports, including methods for duct and building attachment and vibration isolation.
Coordination Drawings: Reflected ceiling plans, drawn to scale, on which the following items are shown and coordinated with each other, using input from Installers of the items involved: 1. 2. 3.
D.
Air terminal units. Liners and adhesives. Sealants and gaskets.
Shop Drawings: For air terminal units. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work. 1.
C.
Single-duct air terminal units.
Ceiling suspension assembly members. Size and location of initial access modules for acoustic tile. Ceiling-mounted items including lighting fixtures, diffusers, grilles, speakers, sprinklers, access panels, and special moldings.
Field quality-control reports.
AIR TERMINAL UNITS
233600 - 1
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
E.
Operation and Maintenance Data: For air terminal units to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. In addition to items specified in Division 01 Section "Operation and Maintenance Data," include the following: 1. 2.
1.4
AIR TERMINAL UNITS SECTION 233600
Instructions for resetting minimum and maximum air volumes. Instructions for adjusting software set points.
QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.
B.
ASHRAE Compliance: Applicable requirements in ASHRAE 62.1-2004, Section 5 "Systems and Equipment" and Section 7 - "Construction and System Start-Up."
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 A.
SINGLE-DUCT AIR TERMINAL UNITS Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8.
Anemostat Products; a Mestek Company. Carnes. Environmental Technologies, Inc. Nailor Industries Inc. Price Industries. Titus. Trane; a business of American Standard Companies. Tuttle & Bailey.
B.
Configuration: Volume-damper assembly inside unit casing with control components inside a protective metal shroud.
C.
Casing: 0.034-inch steel, single wall. 1.
2. 3. 4. 5.
Casing Lining: Adhesive attached, 1-inch- thick, coated, fibrous-glass duct liner complying with ASTM C 1071, and having a maximum flame-spread index of 25 and a maximum smoke-developed index of 50, for both insulation and adhesive, when tested according to ASTM E 84. Air Inlet: Round stub connection or S-slip and drive connections for duct attachment. Air Outlet: S-slip and drive connections. Access: Removable panels for access to parts requiring service, adjustment, or maintenance; with airtight gasket. Airstream Surfaces: Surfaces in contact with the airstream shall comply with requirements in ASHRAE 62.1-2004.
AIR TERMINAL UNITS
233600 - 2
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
D.
AIR TERMINAL UNITS SECTION 233600
Volume Damper: Galvanized steel with peripheral gasket and self-lubricating bearings. 1. 2.
Maximum Damper Leakage: ARI 880 rated, 3 percent of nominal airflow at 3-inch wg inlet static pressure. Damper Position: Normally open.
E.
Hydronic Coils: Copper tube, with mechanically bonded aluminum fins spaced no closer than 0.1 inch, and rated for a minimum working pressure of 200 psig and a maximum entering-water temperature of 220 deg F. Include manual air vent and drain valve.
F.
Direct Digital Controls: Bidirectional damper operators and microprocessor-based controller and room sensor. Control devices shall be compatible with temperature controls specified in Division 23 Section "Instrumentation and Control for HVAC" and shall have the following features: 1. 2.
Damper Actuator: 24 V, powered closed, spring return open. Terminal Unit Controller: Pressure-independent, variable-air-volume controller with electronic airflow transducer with multipoint velocity sensor at air inlet, factory calibrated to minimum and maximum air volumes, and having the following features: a. b. c. d.
2.2
Occupied and unoccupied operating mode. Remote reset of airflow or temperature set points. Adjusting and monitoring with portable terminal. Communication with temperature-control system specified in Division 23 Section "Instrumentation and Control for HVAC."
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
A.
Hanger Rods for Noncorrosive Environments: Cadmium-plated steel rods and nuts.
B.
Hanger Rods for Corrosive Environments: Electrogalvanized, all-thread rods or galvanized rods with threads painted with zinc-chromate primer after installation.
C.
Steel Cables: Galvanized steel complying with ASTM A 603.
D.
Steel Cable End Connections: Cadmium-plated steel assemblies with brackets, swivel, and bolts designed for duct hanger service; with an automatic-locking and clamping device.
E.
Air Terminal Unit Attachments: Sheet metal screws, blind rivets, or self-tapping metal screws; compatible with duct materials.
F.
Trapeze and Riser Supports: Steel shapes and plates for units with steel casings; aluminum for units with aluminum casings.
2.3 A.
SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL Factory Tests: Test assembled air terminal units according to ARI 880.
AIR TERMINAL UNITS
233600 - 3
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
1.
AIR TERMINAL UNITS SECTION 233600
Label each air terminal unit with plan number, nominal airflow, maximum and minimum factory-set airflows, coil type, and ARI certification seal.
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1
INSTALLATION
A.
Install air terminal units according to NFPA 90A, "Standard for the Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems."
B.
Install air terminal units level and plumb. service and maintenance.
3.2
Maintain sufficient clearance for normal
HANGER AND SUPPORT INSTALLATION
A.
Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Chapter 4, "Hangers and Supports."
B.
Building Attachments: Concrete inserts, powder-actuated fasteners, or structural-steel fasteners appropriate for construction materials to which hangers are being attached. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.
Where practical, install concrete inserts before placing concrete. Install powder-actuated concrete fasteners after concrete is placed and completely cured. Use powder-actuated concrete fasteners for standard-weight aggregate concretes and for slabs more than 4 inches thick. Do not use powder-actuated concrete fasteners for lightweight-aggregate concretes and for slabs less than 4 inches thick. Do not use powder-actuated concrete fasteners for seismic restraints.
C.
Hangers Exposed to View: Threaded rod and angle or channel supports.
D.
Install upper attachments to structures. Select and size upper attachments with pullout, tension, and shear capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials where used.
3.3
CONNECTIONS
A.
Install piping adjacent to air terminal unit to allow service and maintenance.
B.
Hot-Water Piping: In addition to requirements in Division 23 Section "Hydronic Piping," connect heating coils to supply with shutoff valve, strainer, control valve, and union or flange; and to return with balancing valve and union or flange.
C.
Connect ducts to air terminal units according to Division 23 Section "Metal Ducts."
D.
Make connections to air terminal units with flexible connectors complying with requirements in Division 23 Section "Air Duct Accessories."
AIR TERMINAL UNITS
233600 - 4
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
3.4 A.
3.5
AIR TERMINAL UNITS SECTION 233600
IDENTIFICATION Label each air terminal unit with plan number, nominal airflow, and maximum and minimum factory-set airflows. Comply with requirements in Division 23 Section "Identification for HVAC Piping and Equipment" for equipment labels and warning signs and labels. FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections.
B.
Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect, test, and adjust components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections.
C.
Perform tests and inspections. 1.
D.
Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections, and to assist in testing.
Tests and Inspections: 1. 2. 3. 4.
After installing air terminal units and after electrical circuitry has been energized, test for compliance with requirements. Leak Test: After installation, fill water coils and test for leaks. Repair leaks and retest until no leaks exist. Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, start units to confirm proper motor rotation and unit operation. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment.
E.
Air terminal unit will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.
F.
Prepare test and inspection reports.
3.6 A.
STARTUP SERVICE Perform startup service. 1. Complete installation and startup checks according to manufacturer's written instructions. 2. Verify that inlet duct connections are as recommended by air terminal unit manufacturer to achieve proper performance. 3. Verify that controls and control enclosure are accessible. 4. Verify that control connections are complete. 5. Verify that nameplate and identification tag are visible. 6. Verify that controls respond to inputs as specified.
AIR TERMINAL UNITS
233600 - 5
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
3.7 A.
AIR TERMINAL UNITS SECTION 233600
DEMONSTRATION Train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain air terminal units.
END OF SECTION 233600
AIR TERMINAL UNITS
233600 - 6
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
AIR OUTLETS AND INLETS SECTION 233713
SECTION 233713 - AIR OUTLETS AND INLETS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 A.
1.2
RELATED DOCUMENTS Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to work of this Section. DESCRIPTION OF WORK
A.
Extent of air outlets and inlets work is indicated by Drawings and Schedules, and by requirements of this Section.
B.
Types of outlets and inlets required for project include the following: 1. 2. 3.
1.3
QUALITY ASSURANCE:
A.
Codes and Standards: 1. 2.
3.
1.4 A.
Ceiling air diffusers. Registers and grilles. Louvers.
ARI Compliance: Test and rate air outlets and inlets in accordance with ARI 650 "Standard for Air Outlets and Inlets". ASHRAE Compliance: Test and rate air outlets and inlets in accordance with ASHRAE 70 "Method of Testing for Rating the Air Flow Performance of Outlets and Inlets". NFPA Compliance: Install air outlets and inlets in accordance with NFPA 90A "Standard for the Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems".
SUBMITTALS Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical product data for air outlets and inlets including the following: 1. 2. 3.
Schedule of air outlets and inlets indicating drawing designation, room location, number furnished, model number, size, and accessories furnished. Data sheet for each type of air outlet and inlet, and accessory furnished; indicating construction, finish, and mounting details. Performance data for each type of air outlet and inlet furnished, including aspiration ability, temperature and velocity traverses; throw and drop; and noise criteria ratings. Indicate selections on data.
AIR OUTLETS AND INLETS
233713 - 1
ROWAN UNIVERSITY B.
1.5
AIR OUTLETS AND INLETS SECTION 233713
Maintenance Data: Submit maintenance data, including cleaning instructions for finishes, and spare parts lists. Include this data, product data, and Shop Drawings in the Operation and Maintenance Manuals; in accordance with requirements of Division 01 Section "Project Closeout." PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
Deliver air outlets and inlets wrapped in factory-fabricated fiber-board type containers. Identify on outside of container type of outlet or inlet and location to be installed. Avoid crushing or bending and prevent dirt and debris from entering and settling in devices.
B.
Store air outlets and inlets in original cartons and protect from weather and construction work traffic. Where possible, store indoors; when necessary to store outdoors, store above grade and enclose with waterproof wrapping.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1
CEILING AIR DIFFUSERS
A.
General: Except as otherwise indicated, provide manufacturer's standard ceiling air diffusers where shown; of size, shape, capacity and type indicated; constructed of materials and components as indicated, and as required for complete installation.
B.
Ceiling Compatibility: Provide diffusers with border styles that are compatible with adjacent ceiling systems, and that are specifically manufactured to fit into ceiling module with accurate fit and adequate support. Refer to general construction Drawings and Specifications for types of ceiling systems which will contain each type of ceiling air diffuser.
C.
Types: Provide ceiling diffusers of type, capacity, and with accessories and finishes as listed on diffuser schedule.
D.
Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering diffusers which may be incorporated in the work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. 2. 3. 4.
2.2 A.
Krueger Mfg. Co. Titus Products Div.; Philips Industries, Inc. Tuttle & Bailey; Div. of Interpace Corp. Price Industries
REGISTERS AND GRILLES General: Except as otherwise indicated, provide manufacturer's standard registers and grilles where shown; of size, shape, capacity and type indicated; constructed of materials and components as indicated, and as required for complete installation.
AIR OUTLETS AND INLETS
233713 - 2
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
AIR OUTLETS AND INLETS SECTION 233713
B.
Wall and Ceiling Compatibility: Provide registers and grilles with border styles that are compatible with adjacent wall or ceiling systems, and that are specifically manufactured to fit into wall and ceiling construction with accurate fit and adequate support. Refer to general construction Drawings and Specifications for types of wall construction which will contain each type of register and grille.
C.
Types: Provide registers and grilles of type, capacity, and with accessories and finishes as listed on register and grille schedule.
D.
Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering registers and grilles which may be incorporated in the work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. 2. 3. 4.
2.3
Titus Products Div.; Philips Industries, Inc. Kruger Mfg. Co. Tuttle & Bailey. Price Industries
LOUVERS
A.
General: Except as otherwise indicated, provide manufacturer's standard louvers where shown; of size, shape, capacity and type indicated; constructed of materials and components as indicated, and as required for complete installation.
B.
Substrate Compatibility: Provide louvers with frame and sill styles that are compatible with adjacent substrate, and that are specifically manufactured to fit into construction openings with accurate fit and adequate support, for weatherproof installation. Refer to general construction Drawings and Specifications for types of substrate which will contain each type of louver.
C.
Materials: Construct of aluminum extrusions, ASTM B 221, Alloy 6063-T52. Weld units or use stainless steel fasteners.
D.
Construction: Provide horizontal drainable blades; 54% free area; downspouts in jambs; caulking slots; 37-1/2-inch angle; 5-3/32-inch blade center, Kynar finish.
E.
Louver Screens: On inside face of exterior louvers, provide 1/2-inch-square mesh anodized aluminum wire bird screens mounted in removable extruded aluminum frames.
F.
Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering louvers which may be incorporated in the work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. 2. 3.
Louvers & Dampers, Inc. Penn Ventilator Co., Inc. Ruskin Mfg. Co.
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1
INSPECTION
AIR OUTLETS AND INLETS
233713 - 3
ROWAN UNIVERSITY A.
3.2
AIR OUTLETS AND INLETS SECTION 233713
Examine areas and conditions under which air outlets and inlets are to be installed. Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. INSTALLATION
A.
General: Install air outlets and inlets in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions and in accordance with recognized industry practices to insure that products serve intended function.
B.
Coordinate with other work, including ductwork and duct accessories, as necessary to interface installation of air outlets and inlets with other work.
C.
Locate ceiling air diffusers, registers, and grilles, as indicated on general construction "Reflected Ceiling Plans."
3.3 A.
SPARE PARTS Furnish to Owner, with receipt, 3 operating keys for each type of air outlet and inlet that require them.
END OF SECTION 233713
AIR OUTLETS AND INLETS
233713 - 4
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
HEAT EXCHANGERS FOR HVAC SECTION 235700
SECTION 235700 - HEAT EXCHANGERS FOR HVAC PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 A.
1.2 A. 1.3 A. 1.4 A.
RELATED DOCUMENTS Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. SUMMARY Section includes shell-and-tube heat exchangers. DEFINITIONS TEMA: Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers Association. ACTION SUBMITTALS Product Data: For each type of product. 1.
B.
Shop Drawings: Signed and sealed by a qualified professional engineer. Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field connection. 1. 2.
1.5 A.
Design Calculations: Calculate requirements for selecting seismic restraints and for designing bases. Base Details: Detail fabrication including anchorages and attachments to structure and to supported equipment.
INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS Coordination Drawings: Equipment room, drawn to scale, on which the following items are shown and coordinated with each other, using input from installers of the items involved: 1. 2.
B.
Include rated capacities, operating characteristics, and furnished specialties and accessories.
Tube-removal space. Structural members to which heat exchangers will be attached.
Product Certificates: For each type of shell-and-tube heat exchanger. Documentation that shell-and-tube heat exchangers comply with "TEMA Standards."
HEAT EXCHANGERS FOR HVAC
235700 - 1
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
HEAT EXCHANGERS FOR HVAC SECTION 235700
C.
Source quality-control reports.
D.
Field quality-control reports.
E.
Sample Warranty: For manufacturer's warranty.
1.6 A.
1.7 A.
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS Operation and Maintenance Data: For heat exchangers to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. WARRANTY Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of domestic-water heat exchangers that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1.
Failures include, but are not limited to, the following: a. b. c.
2.
Structural failures including heat exchanger, storage tank, and supports. Faulty operation of controls. Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond normal use.
Warranty Periods: From date of Substantial Completion. a.
Shell-and-Tube, Domestic-Water Heat Exchangers: 1) 2)
Tube Coil: One year(s). Other Components: One year(s).
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 A.
SHELL-AND-TUBE HEAT EXCHANGERS Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements: available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. 2. 3. 4.
API Heat Transfer Inc. Armstrong Pumps, Inc. ITT Corporation; Bell & Gossett. TACO Incorporated.
B.
Description: Packaged assembly of tank, heat-exchanger coils, and specialties.
C.
Construction:
HEAT EXCHANGERS FOR HVAC
235700 - 2
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
1. 2.
Fabricate and label heat exchangers to comply with ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section VIII, "Pressure Vessels," Division 1. Fabricate and label shell-and-tube heat exchangers to comply with "TEMA Standards."
D.
Configuration: U-tube with removable bundle.
E.
Shell Materials: Steel.
F.
Head: 1. 2.
G.
HEAT EXCHANGERS FOR HVAC SECTION 235700
Materials: Cast iron. Flanged and bolted to shell.
Tube: 1. 2.
Seamless copper tubes. Tube diameter is determined by manufacturer based on service.
H.
Baffles: Stainless steel.
I.
Piping Connections: Factory fabricated of materials compatible with heat-exchanger shell. Attach tappings to shell before testing and labeling. 1. 2.
J.
Support Saddles: 1. 2. 3.
2.2 A.
Fabricated of material similar to shell. Fabricate foot mount with provision for anchoring to support. Fabricate attachment of saddle supports to pressure vessel with reinforcement strong enough to resist heat-exchanger movement during seismic event when heat-exchanger saddles are anchored to building structure.
ACCESSORIES Hangers and Supports: 1.
B.
NPS 2 and Smaller: Threaded ends according to ASME B1.20.1. NPS 2-1/2 and Larger: Flanged ends according to ASME B16.5 for steel and stainless-steel flanges and according to ASME B16.24 for copper and copperalloy flanges.
Factory fabricated steel supports to ensure both horizontal and vertical support of heat exchanger. Comply with requirements in Section 230529 "Hangers and Supports for HVAC Piping and Equipment."
Miscellaneous Components for Steam Unit: Strainers, steam-control valve, steam trap, valves, pressure gage, thermometer, and piping.
HEAT EXCHANGERS FOR HVAC
235700 - 3
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
2.3
HEAT EXCHANGERS FOR HVAC SECTION 235700
SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Factory Tests: Test and inspect heat exchangers according to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section VIII, "Pressure Vessels," Division 1. Affix ASME label.
B.
Hydrostatically test heat exchangers to minimum of one and one-half times pressure rating before shipment.
C.
Heat exchangers will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections.
D.
Prepare test and inspection reports.
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Examine areas for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and for structural rigidity, strength, anchors, and other conditions affecting performance of heat exchangers.
B.
Examine roughing-in for heat-exchanger piping to verify actual locations of piping connections before equipment installation.
C.
Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 A.
SHELL-AND-TUBE HEAT-EXCHANGER INSTALLATION Equipment Mounting: 1.
2.
Install heat exchangers on cast-in-place concrete equipment bases. Comply with requirements for equipment bases and foundations specified in Section 033000 "Cast-in-Place Concrete." Comply with requirements for vibration isolation devices specified in Section 230548.13 "Vibration Controls for HVAC."
B.
Install heat exchangers on saddle supports.
C.
Heat-Exchanger Supports: Use factory-fabricated steel cradles and supports specifically designed for each heat exchanger.
3.3 A.
CONNECTIONS Comply with requirements for piping specified in other Section 232113 "Hydronic Piping" and Section 232116 Hydronic Piping Specialties." Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.
HEAT EXCHANGERS FOR HVAC
235700 - 4
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
HEAT EXCHANGERS FOR HVAC SECTION 235700
B.
Comply with requirements for steam and condensate piping specified in Section 232213 "Steam and Condensate Heating Piping" and Section 232216 Steam and Condensate Piping Specialties."
C.
Maintain manufacturer's recommended clearances for tube removal, service, and maintenance.
D.
Install piping adjacent to heat exchangers to allow space for service and maintenance of heat exchangers. Arrange piping for easy removal of heat exchangers.
E.
Install shutoff valves at heat-exchanger inlet and outlet connections.
F.
Install relief valves on heat-exchanger heated-fluid connection and install pipe relief valves, full size of valve connection, to floor drain.
G.
Install vacuum breaker at heat-exchanger steam inlet connection.
H.
Install hose end valve to drain shell.
I.
Install thermometer on heat-exchanger and inlet and outlet piping, and install thermometer on heating-fluid inlet and outlet piping. Comply with requirements for thermometers specified in Section 230519 "Meters and Gages for HVAC Piping."
J.
Install pressure gages on heat-exchanger and heating-fluid piping. Comply with requirements for pressure gages specified in Section 230519 "Meters and Gages for HVAC Piping."
3.4 A.
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL Perform the following tests and inspections: 1. 2.
Leak Test: After installation, charge system and test for leaks. Repair leaks and retest until no leaks exist. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment.
B.
Heat exchanger will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.
C.
Prepare test and inspection reports.
3.5 A.
CLEANING After completing system installation, including outlet fitting and devices, inspect exposed finish. Remove burrs, dirt, and construction debris and repair damaged finishes.
END OF SECTION 235700
HEAT EXCHANGERS FOR HVAC
235700 - 5
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
MODULAR INDOOR CENTRAL-STATION AIR-HANDLING UNITS SECTION 237313
SECTION 237313 – MODULAR INDOOR CENTRAL-STATION AIR HANDLING UNITS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 A.
1.2 A.
RELATED DOCUMENTS Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. SUMMARY Section Includes: 1. 2.
1.3 A.
1.4 A.
Constant-air-volume, single-zone air-handling units. Variable-air-volume, single-zone air-handling units.
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS Structural Performance: Casing panels shall be self-supporting and capable of withstanding 133 percent of internal static pressures indicated, without panel joints exceeding a deflection of L/200 where "L" is the unsupported span length within completed casings. SUBMITTALS Product Data: For each air-handling unit indicated. 1. 2. 3.
Unit dimensions and weight. Cabinet material, metal thickness, finishes, insulation, and accessories. Fans: a. b. c. d.
4. 5. 6. B.
Certified fan-performance curves with system operating conditions indicated. Certified fan-sound power ratings. Fan construction and accessories. Motor ratings, electrical characteristics, and motor accessories.
Certified coil-performance ratings with system operating conditions indicated. Dampers, including housings, linkages, and operators. Filters with performance characteristics.
Coordination Drawings: Floor plans and other details, drawn to scale, on which the following items are shown and coordinated with each other, using input from installers of the items involved:
MODULAR INDOOR CENTRAL-STATION AIR-HANDLING UNITS
237313 - 1
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
1. 2. 3.
MODULAR INDOOR CENTRAL-STATION AIR-HANDLING UNITS SECTION 237313
Mechanical-room layout and relationships between components and adjacent structural and mechanical elements. Support location, type, and weight. Field measurements.
C.
Source quality-control reports.
D.
Field quality-control reports.
E.
Operation and Maintenance Data: For air-handling units to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.
1.5
QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.
B.
NFPA Compliance: Comply with NFPA 90A for design, fabrication, and installation of air-handling units and components.
C.
ARI Certification: Air-handling units and their components shall be factory tested according to ARI 430, "Central-Station Air-Handling Units," and shall be listed and labeled by ARI.
D.
ASHRAE Compliance: Applicable requirements in ASHRAE 62.1-2004, Section 5 "Systems and Equipment" and Section 7 - "Construction and Startup."
E.
ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1-2004 Compliance: Applicable requirements in ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1-2004, Section 6 - "Heating, Ventilating, and Air-Conditioning."
F.
Comply with NFPA 70.
1.6
COORDINATION
A.
Coordinate sizes and locations of concrete bases with actual equipment provided.
B.
Coordinate sizes and locations of structural-steel support members, if any, with actual equipment provided.
1.7 A.
EXTRA MATERIALS Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. 2.
Filters: One set for each air-handling unit. Fan Belts: One set for each air-handling unit fan.
MODULAR INDOOR CENTRAL-STATION AIR-HANDLING UNITS
237313 - 2
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
MODULAR INDOOR CENTRAL-STATION AIR-HANDLING UNITS SECTION 237313
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 A.
MANUFACTURERS Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. 2. 3. 4.
2.2 A.
UNIT CASINGS General Fabrication Requirements for Casings: 1. 2. 3. 4.
5. B.
Carrier Corporation; a member of the United Technologies Corporation Family. McQuay International Trane; American Standard Inc. YORK International Corporation.
Forming: Form walls, roofs, and floors with at least two breaks at each joint. Casing Joints: Sheet metal screws or pop rivets. Sealing: Seal all joints with water-resistant sealant. Factory Finish for Galvanized-Steel Casings: Immediately after cleaning and pretreating, apply manufacturer's standard two-coat, baked-on enamel finish, consisting of prime coat and thermosetting topcoat. Airstream Surfaces: Surfaces in contact with the airstream shall comply with requirements in ASHRAE 62.1-2004.
Casing Insulation and Adhesive: 1. 2.
Materials: ASTM C 1071, Type I. Location and Application: Factory applied with adhesive and mechanical fasteners to the internal surface of section panels downstream from, and including, the cooling-coil section. a. b.
c.
3. C.
Liner Adhesive: Comply with ASTM C 916, Type I. Mechanical Fasteners: Galvanized steel, suitable for adhesive attachment, mechanical attachment, or welding attachment to duct without damaging liner when applied as recommended by manufacturer and without causing leakage in cabinet. Liner materials applied in this location shall have air-stream surface coated with a temperature-resistant coating or faced with a plain or coated fibrous mat or fabric depending on service-air velocity.
Location and Application: Encased between outside and inside casing.
Inspection and Access Panels and Access Doors: 1. 2.
Panel and Door Fabrication: Formed and reinforced, double-wall and insulated panels of same materials and thicknesses as casing. Inspection and Access Panels:
MODULAR INDOOR CENTRAL-STATION AIR-HANDLING UNITS
237313 - 3
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
a. b. c. 3.
b.
f.
Fabricated with two percent slope in at least two planes to collect condensate from cooling coils (including coil piping connections, coil headers, and return bends) and from humidifiers and to direct water toward drain connection. a. b.
2. 3.
4.
A.
Length: Extend drain pan downstream from leaving face to comply with ASHRAE 62.1-2004. Depth: A minimum of 2 inches deep.
Double-wall, stainless-steel sheet with space between walls filled with foam insulation and moisture-tight seal. Drain Connection: Located at lowest point of pan and sized to prevent overflow. Terminate with threaded nipple on one end of pan. a.
2.3
Fan Section: Doors. Access Section: Doors. Coil Section: Inspection and access panel. Damper Section: Doors. Filter Section: Doors large enough to allow periodic removal and installation of filters. Mixing Section: Doors.
Condensate Drain Pans: 1.
E.
Hinges: A minimum of two ball-bearing hinges or stainless-steel piano hinge and two wedge-lever-type latches, operable from inside and outside. Arrange doors to be opened against air-pressure differential. Gasket: Neoprene, applied around entire perimeters of panel frames.
Locations and Applications: a. b. c. d. e.
D.
Fasteners: Two or more camlock type for panel lift-out operation. Arrangement shall allow panels to be opened against air-pressure differential. Gasket: Neoprene, applied around entire perimeters of panel frames. Size: Large enough to allow inspection and maintenance of air-handling unit's internal components.
Access Doors: a.
4.
MODULAR INDOOR CENTRAL-STATION AIR-HANDLING UNITS SECTION 237313
Minimum Connection Size: NPS 2.
Units with stacked coils shall have an intermediate drain pan to collect condensate from top coil.
Air-Handling-Unit Mounting Frame: Formed galvanized-steel channel or structural channel supports, designed for low deflection, welded with integral lifting lugs. FAN, DRIVE, AND MOTOR SECTION Fan and Drive Assemblies: Statically and dynamically balanced and designed for continuous operation at maximum-rated fan speed and motor horsepower.
MODULAR INDOOR CENTRAL-STATION AIR-HANDLING UNITS
237313 - 4
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
1.
Shafts: Designed for continuous operation at maximum-rated fan speed and motor horsepower, and with field-adjustable alignment. a. b.
B.
MODULAR INDOOR CENTRAL-STATION AIR-HANDLING UNITS SECTION 237313
Turned, ground, and polished hot-rolled steel with keyway. Ship with a protective coating of lubricating oil. Designed to operate at no more than 70 percent of first critical speed at top of fan's speed range.
Centrifugal Fan Housings: Formed- and reinforced-steel panels to form curved scroll housings with shaped cutoff and spun-metal inlet bell. 1. 2. 3. 4.
Bracing: Steel angle or channel supports for mounting and supporting fan scroll, wheel, motor, and accessories. Horizontal-Flanged, Split Housing: Bolted construction. Housing for Supply Fan: Attach housing to fan-section casing with metal-edged flexible duct connector. Flexible Connector: Factory fabricated with a fabric strip 3-1/2 inches wide attached to 2 strips of 2-3/4-inch- wide, 0.028-inch- thick, galvanized-steel sheet or 0.032-inch- thick aluminum sheets; select metal compatible with casing. a.
Flexible Connector Fabric: Glass fabric, double coated with neoprene. Fabrics, coatings, and adhesives shall comply with UL 181, Class 1. 1) 2) 3)
Fabric Minimum Weight: 26 oz./sq. yd.. Fabric Tensile Strength: 480 lbf/inch in the warp and 360 lbf/inch in the filling. Fabric Service Temperature: Minus 40 to plus 200 deg F.
C.
Plenum Fan Housings: Steel frame and panel; fabricated without fan scroll and volute housing.
D.
Airfoil, Centrifugal Fan Wheels: Smooth-curved inlet flange, backplate, and hollow dieformed airfoil-shaped blades continuously welded at tip flange and backplate; cast-iron or cast-steel hub riveted to backplate and fastened to shaft with set screws.
E.
Fan Shaft Bearings: 1.
F.
Prelubricated and Sealed, Ball Bearings: Self-aligning, pillow-block type with a rated life of 200,000 hours according to ABMA 9.
Belt Drives: Factory mounted, with adjustable alignment and belt tensioning, and with 1.2 service factor based on fan motor. 1. 2.
3.
Pulleys: Cast iron or cast steel with split, tapered bushing; dynamically balanced at factory. Motor Pulleys: Adjustable pitch for use with 5-hp motors and smaller; fixed pitch for use with motors larger than 5 hp. Select pulley size so pitch adjustment is at the middle of adjustment range at fan design conditions. Belts: Oil resistant, nonsparking, and nonstatic; in matched sets for multiple-belt drives.
MODULAR INDOOR CENTRAL-STATION AIR-HANDLING UNITS
237313 - 5
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
4.
MODULAR INDOOR CENTRAL-STATION AIR-HANDLING UNITS SECTION 237313
Belt Guards: Comply with requirements specified by OSHA and fabricate according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards"; 0.1046-inch- thick, 3/4-inch diamond-mesh wire screen, welded to steel angle frame; prime coated.
G.
Internal Vibration Isolation: Fans shall be factory mounted with manufacturer's standard vibration isolation mounting devices having a minimum static deflection of 2 inches.
H.
Motor: Comply with NEMA designation, temperature rating, service factor, enclosure type, and efficiency requirements for motors specified in Division 26 Section "Motors."
I.
Variable Frequency Controllers: Shall comply with requirements for variable frequency drives specified in Division 26 Section 26 29 23, “Variable Frequency Motor Controllers.”
2.4 A.
COIL SECTION General Requirements for Coil Section: 1. 2. 3.
2.5 A. 2.6
Comply with ARI 410. Fabricate coil section to allow removal and replacement of coil for maintenance and to allow in-place access for service and maintenance of coil(s). Coils shall not act as structural component of unit.
AIR FILTRATION SECTION Provide filters as specified in Division 23 Section “Particulate Air Filtration.” DAMPERS
A.
General Requirements for Dampers: Leakage rate, according to AMCA 500, "Laboratory Methods for Testing Dampers for Rating," shall not exceed 2 percent of air quantity at 2000-fpm face velocity through damper and 4-inch wg pressure differential.
B.
Damper Operators: Comply with requirements in Division 23 Section "Instrumentation and Control for HVAC."
C.
Face-and-Bypass Dampers: Opposed-blade, aluminum dampers with steel operating rods rotating in sintered bronze or nylon bearings mounted in a single aluminum frame and with operating rods connected with a common linkage. Provide blade gaskets and edge seals, and mechanically fasten blades to operating rod.
D.
Outdoor-Relief and Return-Air Dampers: Low-leakage, double-skin, airfoil-blade, aluminum dampers with compressible jamb seals and extruded-vinyl blade edge seals in opposed-blade arrangement with steel operating rods rotating in stainless-steel sleeve bearings mounted in a single aluminum frame, and with operating rods connected with a common linkage. Leakage rate shall not exceed 3 cfm/sq. ft. at 1inch wg and 8 cfm/sq. ft. at 4-inch wg.
MODULAR INDOOR CENTRAL-STATION AIR-HANDLING UNITS
237313 - 6
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
E.
MODULAR INDOOR CENTRAL-STATION AIR-HANDLING UNITS SECTION 237313
Outdoor Air Damper Air Flow Measuring Station: 1.
Air measuring station with integral pressure transducer. The complete air measuring package shall be factory assembled into one turnkey product and factory commissioned for the specific job requirements. Unit shall have a measuring range from 250 to 5,000 feet per minute. The air measuring station shall consist of 1/2 inch x 3 inch 3000 series aluminum alloy honeycomb, 6063T5 extruded aluminum sensing blades with anodized finish and a glass-on-silicone GL-Si capacitance sensor pressure transducer capable of measuring up to six field selectable pressure ranges up to 1 inch water column. The transducer shall be accurate to +/- 1% of full scale and be contained in a NEMA 4 (IP-65) painted steel enclosure. Transducer shall be factory mounted and piped to high and low brass pressure fittings from the sensor averaging ports. All sensor tubing shall terminate in solid brass barbed fittings. Tubing and associated fittings to be contained in a formed steel protective tubing shield to protect pressure station during transit and installation. The Air Measuring Station shall be licensed to bear the AMCA Certified Ratings Seal for Air Flow Measurement Stations.
F.
Mixing Section: Multiple-blade, air-mixer assembly located immediately downstream of mixing section.
G.
Combination Filter and Mixing Section: 1. 2.
2.7
Cabinet support members shall hold 2-inch- thick, pleated, flat, permanent or throwaway filters. Multiple-blade, air-mixer assembly shall mix air to prevent stratification, located immediately downstream of mixing box.
SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Fan Sound-Power Level Ratings: Comply with AMCA 301, "Methods for Calculating Fan Sound Ratings from Laboratory Test Data." Test fans according to AMCA 300, "Reverberant Room Method for Sound Testing of Fans." Fans shall bear AMCAcertified sound ratings seal.
B.
Fan Performance Rating: Factory test fan performance for airflow, pressure, power, air density, rotation speed, and efficiency. Rate performance according to AMCA 210, "Laboratory Methods of Testing Fans for Aerodynamic Performance Rating."
C.
Water Coils: Factory tested to 300 psig according to ARI 410 and ASHRAE 33.
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 A.
EXAMINATION Examine areas and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.
MODULAR INDOOR CENTRAL-STATION AIR-HANDLING UNITS
237313 - 7
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
MODULAR INDOOR CENTRAL-STATION AIR-HANDLING UNITS SECTION 237313
B.
Examine casing insulation materials and filter media before air-handling unit installation. Reject insulation materials and filter media that are wet, moisture damaged, or mold damaged.
C.
Examine roughing-in for hydronic, and condensate drainage piping systems and electrical services to verify actual locations of connections before installation.
D.
Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 A.
INSTALLATION Equipment Mounting: Install air-handling units on concrete bases using elastomeric mounts. Secure units to anchor bolts installed in concrete bases. Comply with requirements for concrete bases specified in Division 03 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete." 1. 2. 3.
4. 5. 6.
Minimum Deflection: 1 inch. Install stainless-steel plate to equally distribute weight over elastomeric pad. Install dowel rods to connect concrete base to concrete floor. Unless otherwise indicated, install dowel rods on 18-inch centers around the full perimeter of concrete base. Install epoxy-coated anchor bolts that extend through concrete base and anchor into structural concrete floor. Place and secure anchorage devices. Use setting drawings, templates, diagrams, instructions, and directions furnished with items to be embedded. Install anchor bolts to elevations required for proper attachment to supported equipment.
B.
Suspended Units: Suspend units from structural-steel support frame using threaded steel rods and spring hangers.
C.
Arrange installation of units to provide access space around air-handling units for service and maintenance.
D.
Do not operate fan system until filters (temporary or permanent) are in place. Replace temporary filters used during construction and testing, with new, clean filters.
E.
Install filter-gage, static-pressure taps upstream and downstream of filters. Mount filter gages on outside of filter housing or filter plenum in accessible position. Provide filter gages on filter banks, installed with separate static-pressure taps upstream and downstream of filters.
3.3
CONNECTIONS
A.
Comply with requirements for piping specified in other Division 23 Sections. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.
B.
Install piping adjacent to air-handling unit to allow service and maintenance.
MODULAR INDOOR CENTRAL-STATION AIR-HANDLING UNITS
237313 - 8
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
MODULAR INDOOR CENTRAL-STATION AIR-HANDLING UNITS SECTION 237313
C.
Connect piping to air-handling units mounted on vibration isolators with flexible connectors.
D.
Connect condensate drain pans using designated pipe size, ASTM B 88, Type M copper tubing. Extend to nearest equipment or floor drain. Construct deep trap at connection to drain pan and install cleanouts at changes in direction.
E.
Hot- and Chilled-Water Piping: Comply with applicable requirements in Division 23 Section "Hydronic Piping." Install shutoff valve and union or flange at each coil supply connection. Install balancing valve and union or flange at each coil return connection.
F.
Connect duct to air-handling units with flexible connections. Comply with requirements in Division 23 Section "Air Duct Accessories."
3.4
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect, test, and adjust components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections.
B.
Perform tests and inspections. 1.
C.
Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections, and to assist in testing.
Tests and Inspections: 1. 2. 3. 4.
Leak Test: After installation, fill water and steam coils with water, and test coils and connections for leaks. Charge refrigerant coils with refrigerant and test for leaks. Fan Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, start units to confirm proper motor rotation and unit operation. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment.
D.
Air-handling unit or components will be considered defective if unit or components do not pass tests and inspections.
E.
Prepare test and inspection reports.
3.5 A.
STARTUP SERVICE Perform startup service. 1. 2.
Complete installation and startup checks according to manufacturer's written instructions. Verify that shipping, blocking, and bracing are removed.
MODULAR INDOOR CENTRAL-STATION AIR-HANDLING UNITS
237313 - 9
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
MODULAR INDOOR CENTRAL-STATION AIR-HANDLING UNITS SECTION 237313
3.
Verify that unit is secure on mountings and supporting devices and that connections to piping, ducts, and electrical systems are complete. Verify that proper thermal-overload protection is installed in motors, controllers, and switches. 4. Verify proper motor rotation direction, free fan wheel rotation, and smooth bearing operations. Reconnect fan drive system, align belts, and install belt guards. 5. Verify that bearings, pulleys, belts, and other moving parts are lubricated with factory-recommended lubricants. 6. Verify that zone dampers fully open and close for each zone. 7. Verify that face-and-bypass dampers provide full face flow. 8. Verify that outdoor-relief air and return-air mixing dampers open and close, and maintain minimum outdoor-air setting. 9. Comb coil fins for parallel orientation. 10. Verify that proper thermal-overload protection is installed for electric coils. 11. Install new, clean filters. B.
Starting procedures for air-handling units include the following: 1. 2. 3.
3.6
Energize motor; verify proper operation of motor, drive system, and fan wheel. Adjust fan to indicated rpm. Measure and record motor electrical values for voltage and amperage. Manually operate dampers from fully closed to fully open position and record fan performance.
ADJUSTING
A.
Adjust damper linkages for proper damper operation.
B.
Comply with requirements in Division 23 Section "Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for HVAC" for air-handling system testing, adjusting, and balancing.
3.7 A.
3.8 A.
CLEANING After completing system installation and testing, adjusting, and balancing air-handling unit and air-distribution systems and after completing startup service, clean airhandling units internally to remove foreign material and construction dirt and dust. Clean fan wheels, cabinets, dampers, coils, and filter housings, and install new, clean filters. DEMONSTRATION Train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain air-handling units.
END OF SECTION 237313
MODULAR INDOOR CENTRAL-STATION AIR-HANDLING UNITS
237313 - 10
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
FAN COIL UNITS SECTION 238219
SECTION 238219 - FAN COIL UNITS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 A.
1.2 A.
RELATED DOCUMENTS Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. SUMMARY Section Includes: 1.
1.3 A.
Ductless fan coil units and accessories.
ACTION SUBMITTALS Product Data: For each type of product. 1.
Include rated capacities, operating characteristics, and furnished specialties and accessories.
B.
Samples for Initial Selection: For units with factory-applied color finishes.
C.
Samples for Verification: For each type of fan coil unit indicated.
1.4 A.
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS Operation and Maintenance Data: For fan coil units to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. 1.
In addition to items specified in Section 017823 "Operation and Maintenance Data," include the following: a.
1.5
Maintenance schedules and repair part lists for motors, coils, integral controls, and filters.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Comply with NFPA 70.
B.
ASHRAE Compliance: Applicable requirements in ASHRAE 62.1, Section 5 "Systems and Equipment" and Section 7 - "Construction and Startup."
FAN COIL UNITS
238219 - 1
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
C.
1.6 A.
FAN COIL UNITS SECTION 238219
ASHRAE/IES 90.1 Compliance: Applicable requirements in ASHRAE/IES 90.1, Section 6 - "Heating, Ventilating, and Air-Conditioning." COORDINATION Coordinate layout and installation of fan coil units and suspension system components with other construction that penetrates or is supported by ceilings, including light fixtures, HVAC equipment, fire-suppression-system components, and partition assemblies.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A.
Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.
B.
Factory-packaged and -tested units rated according to AHRI 440, ASHRAE 33, and UL 1995.
2.2 A.
DUCTLESS FAN COIL UNITS Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.
B.
Fan Coil Unit Configurations: Row split. 1. 2.
C.
Carrier Corporation; a UTC company ENVIRO-TEC McQuay International; a member of Daikin Group. Trane Inc. YORK; by Johnson Controls, Inc.
Number of Heating Coils: One with two-pipe system. Number of Cooling Coils: One with four-pipe system.
Coil Section Insulation: 1-inch thick, matte-finish, closed-cell foam complying with ASTM C 1071 and attached with adhesive complying with ASTM C 916. 1.
2.
Surface-Burning Characteristics: Insulation and adhesive shall have a combined maximum flame-spread index of 25 and smoke-developed index of 50 when tested according to ASTM E 84 by a qualified testing agency. Airstream Surfaces: Surfaces in contact with the airstream shall comply with requirements in ASHRAE 62.1.
FAN COIL UNITS
238219 - 2
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
FAN COIL UNITS SECTION 238219
D.
Drain Pans: Plastic or Stainless steel. Fabricate pans and drain connections to comply with ASHRAE 62.1. Drain pans shall be removable.
E.
Cabinet: Steel with baked-enamel finish in manufacturer's standard paint color as selected by Architect. 1. Horizontal Unit Bottom Panels: Fastened to unit with cam fasteners and hinge and attached with safety chain; with integral stamped discharge grilles.
F.
Filters: Minimum arrestance and a minimum efficiency reporting value (MERV) according to ASHRAE 52.2 and all addendums. 1.
Glass Fiber Treated with Adhesive: 80 percent arrestance and MERV 8.
G.
Hydronic Coils: Copper tube, with mechanically bonded aluminum fins spaced no closer than 0.1 inch, rated for a minimum working pressure of 200 psig and a maximum entering-water temperature of 220 deg F. Include manual air vent and drain valve.
H.
Fan and Motor Board: Removable. 1.
2.
3. I.
Fan: Forward curved, double width, centrifugal; directly connected to motor. Thermoplastic or painted-steel wheels, and aluminum, painted-steel, or galvanized-steel fan scrolls. Motor: Permanently lubricated, multispeed; resiliently mounted on motor board. Comply with requirements in Section 230513 "Common Motor Requirements for HVAC Equipment." Wiring Termination: Connect motor to chassis wiring with plug connection.
Control devices and operational sequences are specified in Section 230900 "Instrumentation and Control for HVAC" and Section 230993 "Sequence of Operations for HVAC Controls."
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Examine areas, with Installer present, to receive fan coil units for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.
B.
Examine roughing-in for piping and electrical connections to verify actual locations before fan coil unit installation.
C.
Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 A.
INSTALLATION Install fan coil units level and plumb.
FAN COIL UNITS
238219 - 3
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
FAN COIL UNITS SECTION 238219
B.
Install fan coil units to comply with NFPA 90A.
C.
Suspend fan coil units from structure with elastomeric hangers.
D.
Verify locations of thermostats, and other exposed control sensors with Drawings and room details before installation.
E.
Install new filters in each fan coil unit within two weeks after Substantial Completion.
3.3 A.
CONNECTIONS Piping installation requirements are specified in other Sections. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties. Specific connection requirements are as follows: 1. 2. 3.
Install piping adjacent to machine to allow service and maintenance. Connect piping to fan coil unit factory hydronic piping package. Install piping package if shipped loose. Connect condensate drain to indirect waste. a.
Install condensate trap of adequate depth to seal against fan pressure. Install cleanouts in piping at changes of direction.
B.
Connect supply-air and return-air ducts to fan coil units with flexible duct connectors specified in Section 233300 "Air Duct Accessories." Comply with safety requirements in UL 1995 for duct connections.
C.
Ground equipment according to Section 260526 "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems."
D.
Connect wiring according to Section 260519 "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables."
3.4 A.
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL Perform the following tests and inspections: 1. 2. 3.
Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, start units to confirm proper motor rotation and unit operation. Operate electric heating elements through each stage to verify proper operation and electrical connections. Test and adjust controls and safety devices. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment.
B.
Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest as specified above.
C.
Prepare test and inspection reports.
FAN COIL UNITS
238219 - 4
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
3.5 A.
FAN COIL UNITS SECTION 238219
ADJUSTING Adjust initial temperature set points.
END OF SECTION 238219
FAN COIL UNITS
238219 - 5
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
FINNED-TUBE RADIATION HEATERS SECTION 238236
SECTION 238236 - FINNED-TUBE RADIATION HEATERS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 A.
1.2 A. 1.3 A.
RELATED DOCUMENTS Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. SUMMARY Section includes hydronic finned-tube radiation heaters. ACTION SUBMITTALS Product Data: For each type of product. 1.
Include rated capacities, operating characteristics, furnished specialties, and accessories.
B.
Samples: For each exposed product and for each color and texture specified.
C.
Color Samples for Initial Selection: applied color finishes.
D.
Color Samples for Verification: For each type of exposed finish.
For finned-tube radiation heaters with factory-
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 A.
HOT-WATER FINNED-TUBE RADIATION HEATERS Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. 2. 3. 4.
B.
Rosemex. Slant/Fin Corporation. Sterling Hydronics; a Mestek company. Trane Inc.
Performance Ratings: Rate finned-tube radiation heaters according to Hydronics Institute's "I=B=R Testing and Rating Standard for Finned-Tube (Commercial) Radiation."
FINNED-TUBE RADIATION HEATERS
238236 - 1
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
FINNED-TUBE RADIATION HEATERS SECTION 238236
C.
Heating Elements: Copper tubing mechanically expanded into flanged collars of evenly spaced aluminum fins resting on element supports. One end of tube shall be belled.
D.
Element Supports: enclosure brackets.
E.
Front Panel: Minimum 0.0428-inch thick steel.
F.
Rust-Resistant Front Panel: galvanized steel.
G.
Wall-Mounted Back Panel: Minimum 0.0329-inch- thick steel, full height, with fulllength channel support for front panel without exposed fasteners.
H.
Floor-Mounted Pedestals: Conceal insulated piping at maximum 36-inch spacing. Pedestal-mounted back panel shall be solid panel matching front panel. Provide stainless-steel escutcheon for floor openings at pedestals.
I.
Support Brackets: Locate at maximum 36-inch spacing to support front panel and element.
J.
Finish: Baked-enamel finish in manufacturer's standard color as selected by Architect.
K.
Damper: Knob-operated internal damper at enclosure outlet.
L.
Access Doors: Factory made, permanently hinged with tamper-resistant fastener, minimum size 6 by 7 inches, integral with enclosure.
M.
Enclosure Style: Sloped top.
N.
Ball-bearing cradle type to permit longitudinal movement on
Minimum 0.052-inch thick, ASTM A 653/A 653M, G60
1.
Front Inlet Grille: Punched louver; painted to match enclosure.
2.
Top Outlet Grille: Punched louver; painted to match enclosure.
Accessories: Filler sections, corners, relay sections, and splice plates all matching the enclosure and grille finishes.
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Examine areas to receive finned-tube radiation heaters for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.
B.
Examine roughing-in for hydronic-piping connections to verify actual locations before installation of finned-tube radiation heaters.
C.
Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
FINNED-TUBE RADIATION HEATERS
238236 - 2
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
3.2
FINNED-TUBE RADIATION HEATERS SECTION 238236
FINNED-TUBE RADIATION HEATER INSTALLATION
A.
Install units level and plumb.
B.
Install enclosure continuously around corners, using outside and inside corner fittings.
C.
Join sections with splice plates and filler pieces to provide continuous enclosure.
D.
Install access doors for access to valves.
E.
Install enclosure continuously from wall to wall.
F.
Terminate enclosures with manufacturer's end caps except where enclosures are indicated to extend to adjoining walls.
G.
Install valves within reach of access door provided in enclosure.
H.
Install air-seal gasket between wall and recessed flanges or front cover of fully recessed unit.
I.
Install piping within pedestals for freestanding units.
3.3
CONNECTIONS
A.
Piping installation requirements are specified in Section 232113 "Hydronic Piping" and Section 232116 Hydronic Piping Specialties." Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.
B.
Connect hot-water finned-tube radiation heaters and components to piping according to Section 232113 "Hydronic Piping" and Section 232116 Hydronic Piping Specialties." 1.
Install shutoff valves on inlet and outlet, and balancing valve on outlet.
C.
Install control valves as required by Section 230900 "Instrumentation and Control for HVAC."
D.
Install piping adjacent to finned-tube radiation heaters to allow service and maintenance.
3.4 A.
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL Perform the following field tests and inspections: 1. 2. 3.
Leak Test: After installation, charge system and test for leaks. Repair leaks and retest until no leaks exist. Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, start units to confirm proper operation. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment.
FINNED-TUBE RADIATION HEATERS
238236 - 3
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
FINNED-TUBE RADIATION HEATERS SECTION 238236
B.
Units will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections.
C.
Prepare test and inspection reports.
END OF SECTION 238236
FINNED-TUBE RADIATION HEATERS
238236 - 4
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
CABINET UNIT HEATERS SECTION 238239.13
SECTION 238239.13 - CABINET UNIT HEATERS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 A.
1.2 A. 1.3
RELATED DOCUMENTS Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. SUMMARY Section includes cabinet unit heaters with centrifugal fans and hot-water coils. DEFINITIONS
A.
BAS: Building automation system.
B.
CWP: Cold working pressure.
C.
PTFE: Polytetrafluoroethylene plastic.
D.
TFE: Tetrafluoroethylene plastic.
1.4 A.
ACTION SUBMITTALS Product Data: For each type of product. 1.
Include rated capacities, operating characteristics, furnished specialties, and accessories.
B.
Samples: For each exposed product and for each color and texture specified.
C.
Samples for Initial Selection: Finish colors for units with factory-applied color finishes.
D.
Samples for Verification: Finish colors for each type of cabinet unit heater indicated with factory-applied color finishes.
1.5 A.
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS Operation and Maintenance Data: For cabinet unit heaters to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.
CABINET UNIT HEATERS
238239.13 - 1
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
CABINET UNIT HEATERS SECTION 238239.13
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 A.
MANUFACTURERS Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. 2. 3. 4.
2.2
Airtherm; a Mestek company. International Environmental Corporation. McQuay International. Trane Inc.
DESCRIPTION
A.
Factory-assembled and -tested unit complying with AHRI 440.
B.
Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.
C.
Comply with UL 2021.
2.3
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A.
ASHRAE Compliance: Applicable requirements in ASHRAE 62.1, Section 5 "Systems and Equipment" and Section 7 - "Construction and Startup."
B.
ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1 Compliance: Applicable requirements in ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1, Section 6 - "Heating, Ventilating, and Air-Conditioning."
2.4 A.
COIL SECTION INSULATION Insulation Materials: Comply with NFPA 90A or NFPA 90B. Unicellular polyethylene thermal plastic, preformed sheet insulation complying with ASTM C 534, Type II, except for density. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.
Thickness: 1/2 inch. Thermal Conductivity (k-Value): 0.24 Btu x in./h x sq. ft. at 75 deg F mean temperature. Fire-Hazard Classification: Maximum flame-spread index of 25 and smokedeveloped index of 50 when tested according to ASTM C 411. Adhesive: As recommended by insulation manufacturer and complying with NFPA 90A or NFPA 90B. Airstream Surfaces: Surfaces in contact with the airstream shall comply with requirements in ASHRAE 62.1.
CABINET UNIT HEATERS
238239.13 - 2
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
2.5 A.
CABINETS Material: Steel with baked-enamel finish with manufacturer's standard paint, in color selected by Architect 1.
2. 3. 4. 5. 2.6 A.
A.
2.8 A.
Minimum Arrestance: According to ASHRAE 52.1 and a minimum efficiency reporting value (MERV) according to ASHRAE 52.2. Glass Fiber Treated with Adhesive: 80 percent arrestance and MERV 5.
COILS Hot-Water Coil: Copper tube, with mechanically bonded aluminum fins spaced no closer than 0.1 inch and rated for a minimum working pressure of 200 psig and a maximum entering-water temperature of 220 deg F. Include manual air vent and drain. CONTROLS Fan and Motor Board: Removable. 1.
2.
3. B.
Vertical Unit, Exposed Front Panels: Minimum 0.0528-inch-thick sheet steel, removable panels with channel-formed edges secured with tamperproof cam fasteners. Horizontal Unit, Exposed Bottom Panels: Minimum 0.0528-inch-thick sheet steel, removable panels secured with tamperproof cam fasteners and safety chain. Recessed Flanges: Steel, finished to match cabinet. Control Access Door: Key operated. Extended Piping Compartment: 8-inch wide piping end pocket.
FILTERS
1. 2.7
CABINET UNIT HEATERS SECTION 238239.13
Fan: Forward curved, double width, centrifugal, directly connected to motor; thermoplastic or painted-steel wheels and aluminum, painted-steel, or galvanized-steel fan scrolls. Motor: Permanently lubricated, multispeed; resiliently mounted on motor board. Comply with requirements in Section 230513 "Common Motor Requirements for HVAC Equipment." Wiring Terminations: Connect motor to chassis wiring with plug connection.
Basic Unit Controls: 1. 2.
Control voltage transformer. Unit-mounted thermostat with the following features: a. b. c.
3.
Fan on-auto switch. Manual fan-speed switch. Adjustable deadband.
Unit-mounted temperature sensor.
CABINET UNIT HEATERS
238239.13 - 3
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
4.
Data entry and access port. a. b.
C.
CABINET UNIT HEATERS SECTION 238239.13
Input data includes room temperature and occupied and unoccupied periods. Output data includes room temperature, supply-air temperature, enteringwater temperature, operating mode, and status.
Electrical Connection: Factory-wired motors and controls for a single field connection.
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Examine areas to receive cabinet unit heaters for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.
B.
Examine roughing-in for piping and electrical connections to verify actual locations before unit-heater installation.
C.
Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2
INSTALLATION
A.
Install wall boxes in finished wall assembly; seal and weatherproof. Joint-sealant materials and applications are specified in Section 079200 "Joint Sealants."
B.
Install cabinet unit heaters to comply with NFPA 90A.
C.
Suspend cabinet unit heaters from structure with elastomeric hangers. isolators are specified in Section 230548.13 "Vibration Controls for HVAC."
D.
Install wall-mounted thermostats and switch controls in electrical outlet boxes at heights to match lighting controls. Verify location of thermostats and other exposed control sensors with Drawings and room details before installation.
E.
Install new filters in each fan-coil unit within two weeks of Substantial Completion.
3.3
Vibration
CONNECTIONS
A.
Piping installation requirements are specified in Section 232113 "Hydronic Piping," Section 232116 Hydronic Piping Specialties," Section 232213 "Steam and Condensate Heating Piping," and Section 232216 Steam and Condensate Piping Specialties." Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.
B.
Install piping adjacent to machine to allow service and maintenance.
C.
Connect piping to cabinet unit heater's factory, hot-water piping package. Install the piping package if shipped loose.
CABINET UNIT HEATERS
238239.13 - 4
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
CABINET UNIT HEATERS SECTION 238239.13
D.
Connect supply and return ducts to cabinet unit heaters with flexible duct connectors specified in Section 233300 "Air Duct Accessories."
E.
Comply with safety requirements in UL 1995.
F.
Unless otherwise indicated, install union and gate or ball valve on supply-water connection and union and calibrated balancing valve on return-water connection of cabinet unit heater. Hydronic specialties are specified in Section 232113 "Hydronic Piping" and Section 232116 Hydronic Piping Specialties."
G.
Unless otherwise indicated, install union and gate or ball valve on steam-supply connection and union, strainer, steam trap, and gate or ball valve on condensate-return connection of cabinet unit heater. Steam specialties are specified inSection 232216 Steam and Condensate Piping Specialties."
H.
Ground equipment according to Section 260526 "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems."
I.
Connect wiring according to Section 260519 "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables."
3.4 A.
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL Perform the following tests and inspections: 1. 2. 3.
Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, start units to confirm proper motor rotation and unit operation. Operate electric heating elements through each stage to verify proper operation and electrical connections. Test and adjust controls and safety devices. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment.
B.
Units will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections.
C.
Prepare test and inspection reports.
3.5 A.
ADJUSTING Adjust initial temperature set points.
END OF SECTION 238239.13
CABINET UNIT HEATERS
238239.13 - 5
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS SECTION 260500
SECTION 260500 – BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 A.
1.2 A.
1.3 A.
RELATED DOCUMENTS Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. DEFINITIONS “Provide” shall mean furnish and install the referenced item complete with all its appurtenances, devices, options, features, and supports to assure a complete and working installation in accordance with all applicable codes and standards. DESCRIPTION OF WORK Provide complete and operable electrical and auxiliary systems as follows in accordance with the intent of this Specification and accompanying Drawings: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. 15.
1.4 A.
Low Voltage Power and Control Conductors and Cabling. Grounding. Hangers and Supports Raceway and Boxes. Low voltage wiring and raceway. Cable Tray. Underground Ducts. Identification. Lighting and Lighting Control. Switchboards and Panelboards. Wiring Devices. Enclosed Switches and Circuit Breakers Enclosed Controllers Fire Alarm System. Pathway and Backboxes for Data, Telephone, and CATV Systems.
SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING Coordinate arrangement, mounting, and support of electrical equipment with other building components and disciplines. 1. 2.
To allow maximum possible headroom unless specific mounting heights that reduce headroom are indicated. To provide for ease of disconnecting the equipment with minimum interference to other installations.
BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS
260500 - 1
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
3.
BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS SECTION 260500
So connecting raceways, cables, and wireways will be clear of obstructions and of the working and access space of other equipment.
B.
Arrange, with General Contractor, for chases, slots, and openings in building structure during progress of construction to allow for electrical installations.
C.
Coordinate installation of required supporting devices, conduits routed below main floor slab, and set sleeves in poured-in-place concrete as they are constructed.
D.
Coordinate location of access panels and doors for electrical items that are behind finished surfaces or otherwise concealed.
E.
Coordinate electrical testing of electrical, HVAC, plumbing, and architectural items, so equipment and systems that are functionally interdependent are tested to demonstrate successful interoperability.
F.
Sequence, coordinate, and integrate installing electrical materials and equipment for efficient flow of work. Coordinate installation conduit routed below floor & above the ceiling space, and all conduit 2-inch in diameter and larger requiring positioning integral with electrical equipment installation.
G.
Coordinate connecting electrical service to components furnished under other sections.
H.
Coordinate connecting electrical systems with exterior underground utilities and services. Comply with requirements and regulations of the NEC and the University.
I.
Coordinate installation of electrical identification after completion of finishing where identification is applied to field-finished surfaces.
J.
Coordinate installation of electrical identifying devices and markings prior to installing acoustical ceilings and similar finishes that conceal such items.
1.5
GENERAL EQUIPMENT/MECHANICAL/ELECTRICAL INTERFACE
A.
Control systems, including panels, devices, and wiring, associated with General Equipment, HVAC, and Plumbing systems shall be furnished under the General, HVAC, and Plumbing Contracts, except as indicated otherwise.
B.
Provide wiring from electrical panels or load centers to control systems and control devices.
C.
Provide power wiring from electrical panels or load centers to the general, mechanical, and plumbing equipment.
D.
Control system power and control wiring shall be installed in accordance with Division 26 and the National Electrical Code.
E.
Motor Starters: 1.
Provide motor starters, where not an integral part of the general, mechanical, and plumbing equipment.
BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS
260500 - 2
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
2. F.
Wiring for starter control of General, HVAC, and Plumbing Equipment shall be provided under the General, HVAC, and Plumbing contracts.
Disconnect Switches: 1.
1.6
BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS SECTION 260500
Provide disconnect switches, where not an integral part of the General, HVAC, or Plumbing equipment. Coordinate with General, HVAC, and Plumbing Contractors.
SUBMITTALS
A.
General: Submit each item in this Article according to the Conditions of the Contract and Division 01 Specification Sections.
B.
Product Data for each type of product specified.
C.
Shop Drawings detailing fabrication and installation of supports and anchorage for electrical items.
D.
Record Documents upon completion: 1. 2.
1.7
Two copies of as-built drawings. Product data for all equipment supplied including Operation and Maintenance Manuals.
QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Installation and components shall comply with the latest edition of the National Electrical Code.
B.
Listing and Labeling: Provide products specified in this Section that are listed and labeled.
C.
The Terms “Listed and Labeled”: As defined in the National Electrical Code, Article 100.
D.
Test Equipment Suitability and Calibration: Comply with NETA ATS, “Suitability of Test Equipment” and Test Instrument Calibration.”
1.8
PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS
A.
The Plans and Specifications are Contract Bid Documents, and are for the purpose of illustrating the general character and Scope of Work for Contractors to prepare a Bid Proposal.
B.
The Contract Plans are diagrammatic and are intended to convey the Scope of Work and general location and arrangement of equipment. The Plans are not Shop Drawings and do not dismiss the Contractor from the responsibility of preparing fabrication and installation Shop Drawings, nor do they relieve the Contractor from the responsibility of coordinating Division 16 Work with the Work of other trades and the building structure.
BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS
260500 - 3
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS SECTION 260500
C.
Use fabrication and installation Shop Drawings along with manufacturer’s installation instructions to construct the Work of this Contract.
D.
In addition to the Work shown on the Drawings and described in Specifications, provide all incidental Work and material required to fulfill the intent of the Plans and Specifications. This shall include all required labor, materials, devices, and methods peculiar to the machinery, equipment, apparatus, or systems to be installed.
E.
By submitting bid, the Contractor assumes responsibility for any conflicts or misinterpretations of the Contract Documents. It is the sole responsibility of the Contractor to clarify any discrepancies in Contract Documents in writing with the Engineer or University prior to submitting a bid. The Contractor shall not at any time after the execution of his Contract, set up any claims whatsoever based upon insufficient data or incorrect assumptions, nor shall the Contractor claim any misunderstanding with regard to the nature, conditions, or character of the Work to be performed under this Contract. Any equipment purchased incorrectly shall be replaced without additional expense to the University.
1.9
SITE VISIT
A.
Contractor shall contact the Owner and arrange a date and time to visit the site and examine the existing conditions in detail.
B.
Include in Bid Price: Cost for equipment, materials and labor to perform required modifications, alterations, additions, cutting, patching, repairing, finishing, relocating, and supporting to accommodate the Work of this Specification.
C.
It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to verify the dimensions and locations of equipment shown on the Drawings in the field. Contractor shall obtain all information necessary for completion of the Work and for items specified before submission of Bids.
D.
The Contractor shall not at any time after the execution of his Contract, set up any claims whatever based upon insufficient data or incorrectly assumed conditions, nor shall the Contractor claim any misunderstanding with regard to the nature, conditions, or character of the Work to be performed under this Contract. Contractor shall assume all risk resulting from any change in the Work. Any material or equipment improperly placed shall be relocated and reinstalled without additional expense to the University.
E.
Before ordering any materials, or performing any Work, the Contractor shall verify all measurements at the building site, and shall be responsible for the correctness of same. No extra compensation will be allowed on account of differences between actual dimensions and those indicated on the Drawings. Any difference which may be found shall be submitted to the Engineer for consideration before proceeding with the Work. The Contractor shall report all ambiguities or discrepancies to the Engineer for written clarification before submitting a Bid.
1.10
WARRANTY
BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS
260500 - 4
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS SECTION 260500
A.
The Contractor shall unconditionally guarantee, in writing, all Work, articles, appliances, materials, equipment, and workmanship furnished, installed, or supplied under this Contract for a period of one year from the date of acceptance by the University.
B.
The Contractor shall adjust, repair, or replace any defective part of the system without cost to the Owner.
C.
All such repairs and/or replacements shall be made without delay and at the convenience of the Owner.
1.11
CODES AND STANDARDS
A.
Provide equipment and installation in accordance with this Specification and applicable requirements of the following: 1. American National Standards Institute (ANSI). 2. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM). 3. Americans With Disabilities Act (Public Law 101-336). 4. Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers (IEEE). 5. National Electrical Code (NEC). 6. Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA). 7. Underwriters Laboratories Inc. (UL). 8. National Fire Protection Association: National Fire Codes. 9. International Building Code (IBC 2003). 10. Pennsylvania Department of Labor and Industry Fire and Panic Regulations. 11. National Electrical Manufacturers’ Association (NEMA). 12. National Electrical Contractors’ Association (NECA). 13. International Cable Engineers’ Association (ICEA). 14. U.S. Department of Health. 15. Pennsylvania Department of Health. 16. All local codes and ordinances.
B.
The Contractor shall obtain all permits, licenses, and approvals with the departments having jurisdiction, pay all charges and fees, file all necessary plans, and give all notices necessary and incident to do the lawful prosecution of the Work.
C.
Contractor shall obtain and furnish to the University all certificates for Work for which certificates are required. The Contractor shall pay for all state, county, and city fees, permits, licenses, laws, and/or other fees which may be required in the performance of his Contract and not otherwise provided for.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used) END OF SECTION 260500
BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS
260500 - 5
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
COMMON WORK RESULTS SECTION 260501
SECTION 260501 – COMMON WORK RESULTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 A.
1.2 A.
RELATED DOCUMENTS Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. SUMMARY Section Includes: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.
1.3
Electrical equipment coordination and installation. Sleeves for raceways and cables. Sleeve seals. Grout. Common electrical installation requirements.
DEFINITIONS
A.
EPDM: Ethylene-propylene-diene terpolymer rubber.
B.
NBR: Acrylonitrile-butadiene rubber.
1.4 A. 1.5 A.
SUBMITTALS Product Data: For sleeve seals. COORDINATION Coordinate arrangement, mounting, and support of electrical equipment: 1. 2. 3. 4.
B.
To allow maximum possible headroom unless specific mounting heights that reduce headroom are indicated. To provide for ease of disconnecting the equipment with minimum interference to other installations. To allow right of way for piping and conduit installed at required slope. So connecting raceways, cables, wireways, cable trays, and busways will be clear of obstructions and of the working and access space of other equipment.
Coordinate installation of required supporting devices and set sleeves in cast-in-place concrete, masonry walls, and other structural components as they are constructed.
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL
260501 - 1
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
COMMON WORK RESULTS SECTION 260501
C.
Coordinate location of access panels and doors for electrical items that are behind finished surfaces or otherwise concealed. Access doors and panels are specified in Division 08 Section "Access Doors and Frames."
D.
Coordinate sleeve selection and application with selection and application of firestopping specified in Division 07 Section "Penetration Firestopping."
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1
SLEEVES FOR RACEWAYS AND CABLES
A.
Steel Pipe Sleeves: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type E, Grade B, Schedule 40, galvanized steel, plain ends.
B.
Cast-Iron Pipe Sleeves: Cast or fabricated "wall pipe," equivalent to ductile-iron pressure pipe, with plain ends and integral waterstop, unless otherwise indicated.
C.
Sleeves for Rectangular Openings: Galvanized sheet steel. 1.
Minimum Metal Thickness: a. b.
2.2 A.
For sleeve cross-section rectangle perimeter less than 50 inches and no side more than 16 inches, thickness shall be 0.052 inch. For sleeve cross-section rectangle perimeter equal to, or more than, 50 inches and 1 or more sides equal to, or more than, 16 inches, thickness shall be 0.138 inch.
GROUT Nonmetallic, Shrinkage-Resistant Grout: ASTM C 1107, factory-packaged, nonmetallic aggregate grout, noncorrosive, nonstaining, mixed with water to consistency suitable for application and a 30-minute working time.
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1
COMMON REQUIREMENTS FOR ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
A.
Comply with NECA 1.
B.
Measure indicated mounting heights to bottom of unit for suspended items and to center of unit for wall-mounting items.
C.
Headroom Maintenance: If mounting heights or other location criteria are not indicated, arrange and install components and equipment to provide maximum possible headroom consistent with these requirements.
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL
260501 - 2
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
COMMON WORK RESULTS SECTION 260501
D.
Equipment: Install to facilitate service, maintenance, and repair or replacement of components of both electrical equipment and other nearby installations. Connect in such a way as to facilitate future disconnecting with minimum interference with other items in the vicinity.
E.
Right of Way: Give to piping systems installed at a required slope.
3.2
SLEEVE INSTALLATION FOR ELECTRICAL PENETRATIONS
A.
Electrical penetrations occur when raceways, cables, wireways, cable trays, or busways penetrate concrete slabs, concrete or masonry walls, or fire-rated floor and wall assemblies.
B.
Concrete Slabs and Walls: Install sleeves for penetrations unless core-drilled holes or formed openings are used. Install sleeves during erection of slabs and walls.
C.
Use pipe sleeves unless penetration arrangement requires rectangular sleeved opening.
D.
Fire-Rated Assemblies: Install sleeves for penetrations of fire-rated floor and wall assemblies unless openings compatible with firestop system used are fabricated during construction of floor or wall.
E.
Cut sleeves to length for mounting flush with both surfaces of walls.
F.
Extend sleeves installed in floors 2 inches above finished floor level.
G.
Size pipe sleeves to provide 1/4-inch annular clear space between sleeve and raceway or cable, unless indicated otherwise.
H.
Seal space outside of sleeves with grout for penetrations of concrete and masonry 1.
Promptly pack grout solidly between sleeve and wall so no voids remain. Tool exposed surfaces smooth; protect grout while curing.
I.
Interior Penetrations of Non-Fire-Rated Walls and Floors: Seal annular space between sleeve and raceway or cable, using joint sealant appropriate for size, depth, and location of joint. Comply with requirements in Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants."
J.
Fire-Rated-Assembly Penetrations: Maintain indicated fire rating of walls, partitions, ceilings, and floors at raceway and cable penetrations. Install sleeves and seal raceway and cable penetration sleeves with firestop materials. All telecommunications penetrations shall be adjustable through-wall fire stops (Use EZ Path or equivalent type pathways). Comply with requirements in Division 07 Section "Penetration Firestopping."
K.
Roof-Penetration Sleeves: Seal penetration of individual raceways and cables with flexible boot-type flashing units applied in coordination with roofing work.
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL
260501 - 3
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
COMMON WORK RESULTS SECTION 260501
L.
Aboveground, Exterior-Wall Penetrations: Seal penetrations using steel pipe sleeves and mechanical sleeve seals. Select sleeve size to allow for 1-inch annular clear space between pipe and sleeve for installing mechanical sleeve seals.
M.
Underground, Exterior-Wall Penetrations: Install cast-iron pipe sleeves. Size sleeves to allow for 1-inch annular clear space between raceway or cable and sleeve for installing mechanical sleeve seals.
3.3
SLEEVE-SEAL INSTALLATION
A.
Install to seal exterior wall penetrations.
B.
Use type and number of sealing elements recommended by manufacturer for raceway or cable material and size. Position raceway or cable in center of sleeve. Assemble mechanical sleeve seals and install in annular space between raceway or cable and sleeve. Tighten bolts against pressure plates that cause sealing elements to expand and make watertight seal.
3.4 A.
FIRESTOPPING Apply firestopping to penetrations of fire-rated floor and wall assemblies for electrical installations to restore original fire-resistance rating of assembly. Firestopping materials and installation requirements are specified on sheet E-601.
END OF SECTION 260501
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL
260501 - 4
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS & CABLES SECTION 260519
SECTION 260519 – LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS & CABLES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 A.
1.2 A.
RELATED DOCUMENTS Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. SUMMARY This Section includes the following: 1. 2. 3.
1.3
Building wires and cables rated 600 V and less. Connectors, splices, and terminations rated 600 V and less. Sleeves and sleeve seals for cables.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B.
Qualification Data: For testing agency.
C.
Field quality-control test reports.
1.4 A.
QUALITY CONTROL Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent agency, with the experience and capability to conduct the testing indicated, that is a member company of the InterNational Electrical Testing Association or is a nationally recognized testing laboratory (NRTL) as defined by OSHA in 29 CFR 1910.7, and that is acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 1.
Testing Agency's Field Supervisor: Person currently certified by the InterNational Electrical Testing Association or the National Institute for Certification in Engineering Technologies to supervise on-site testing specified in Part 3.
B.
Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use.
C.
Comply with NFPA 70.
LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES
260519 - 1
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
1.5 A.
LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS & CABLES SECTION 260519
COORDINATION Set sleeves in cast-in-place concrete, masonry walls, and other structural components as they are constructed.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 A.
CONDUCTORS AND CABLES Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. 2. 3.
American Insulated Wire Corp.; a Leviton Company. General Cable Corporation. Southwire Company.
B.
Copper Conductors: Comply with NEMA WC 70.
C.
Conductor Insulation: Comply with NEMA WC 70 for Types THHN-THWN and SO.
D.
Multiconductor Cable: Comply with NEMA WC 70 for metal-clad cable, Type MC, mineral-insulated, metal-sheathed cable, Type MI, and nonmetallic-sheathed cable, Type SO with ground wire.
2.2 A.
CONNECTORS AND SPLICES Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. 2. 3. 4.
B.
2.3
Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. O-Z/Gedney; EGS Electrical Group LLC. 3M; Electrical Products Division. Tyco Electronics Corp.
Description: Factory-fabricated connectors and splices of size, ampacity rating, material, type, and class for application and service indicated. SLEEVES FOR CABLES
A.
Steel Pipe Sleeves: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type E, Grade B, Schedule 40, galvanized steel, plain ends.
B.
Cast-Iron Pipe Sleeves: Cast or fabricated "wall pipe," equivalent to ductile-iron pressure pipe, with plain ends and integral waterstop, unless otherwise indicated.
C.
Sleeves for Rectangular Openings: Galvanized sheet steel with minimum 0.052- or 0.138-inch thickness as indicated and of length to suit application.
D.
Coordinate sleeve selection and application with selection and application of firestopping, as shown on details, Sheet E-601
LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES
260519 - 2
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
2.4 A.
SLEEVE SEALS Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. 2. 3. 4.
B.
LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS & CABLES SECTION 260519
Advance Products & Systems, Inc. Calpico, Inc. Metraflex Co. Pipeline Seal and Insulator, Inc.
Description: Modular sealing device, designed for field assembly, to fill annular space between sleeve and cable. 1.
2. 3.
Sealing Elements: EPDM or NBR interlocking links shaped to fit surface of cable or conduit. Include type and number required for material and size of raceway or cable. Pressure Plates: Stainless steel. Include two for each sealing element. Connecting Bolts and Nuts: Stainless steel of length required to secure pressure plates to sealing elements. Include one for each sealing element.
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1
CONDUCTOR MATERIAL APPLICATIONS
A.
Feeders: Copper. Solid for No. 10 AWG and smaller; stranded for No. 8 AWG and larger.
B.
Branch Circuits: Copper. Solid for No. 10 AWG and smaller; stranded for No. 8 AWG and larger.
3.2
CONDUCTOR INSULATION AND MULTICONDUCTOR CABLE APPLICATIONS AND WIRING METHODS
A.
Service Entrance: Type THHN-THWN, single conductors in raceway.
B.
Exposed Feeders and Branch Circuits: raceway.
C.
Feeders and Branch Circuits Concealed in Ceilings and Crawlspaces: Type THHNTHWN, single conductors in raceway.
D.
Feeders and Branch Circuits Concealed in Concrete, below Slabs-on-Grade, and Underground: Type THHN-THWN, single conductors in raceway.
E.
Class 1 and Class 2 Control Circuits: Type THHN-THWN, in raceway.
3.3 A.
Type THHN-THWN, single conductors in
INSTALLATION OF CONDUCTORS AND CABLES Installation 1.
General:
LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES
260519 - 3
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS & CABLES SECTION 260519
2.
Install wires and cables as indicated, according to manufacturer's written instructions and the NECA "Standard of Installation." 3. Use no wire smaller than No. 12 AWG for power and lighting circuits, and no wire smaller than No. 14 AWG for control wiring. Where conductors are not specifically called out on the Drawings, install two No. 12 and one No. 12 insulated green grounding conductor. 4. Use No. 10 AWG conductor for 20-ampere, 120-V branch circuit home runs longer than 75 feet, and for 20-ampere, 277-V branch circuit home runs longer than 200 feet. 5. Place an equal number of conductors for each phase of a circuit in the same raceway or cable. 6. Splice only in accessible junction or outlet boxes. 7. Neatly train and lace wiring inside boxes, equipment, and panelboards. 8. Make conductor lengths for parallel circuits equal. 9. Provide a separate neutral conductor for each circuit, use of common neutrals is not allowed on this project. 10. Provide a separate insulated green grounding conductor for all circuits. 11. Connect outlets and components to wiring and to ground as indicated and instructed by manufacturer. 12. Tighten connectors and terminals, including screws and bolts, according to equipment manufacturer's published torque-tightening values for equipment connectors. Where manufacturer's torquing requirements are not indicated, tighten connectors and terminals according to tightening torques specified in UL Standard 486A. B.
Conceal cables in finished walls, ceilings, and floors, unless otherwise indicated.
C.
Use manufacturer-approved pulling compound or lubricant where necessary; compound used must not deteriorate conductor or insulation. Do not exceed manufacturer's recommended maximum pulling tensions and sidewall pressure values.
D.
Use pulling means, including fish tape, cable, rope, and basket-weave wire/cable grips, that will not damage cables or raceway.
E.
Install exposed cables parallel and perpendicular to surfaces of exposed structural members, and follow surface contours where possible.
F.
Support cables according to Division 26 Section "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems."
G.
Identify and color-code conductors and cables according to Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical Systems."
3.4 A.
CONNECTIONS Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published torque-tightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those specified in UL 486A and UL 486B.
LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES
260519 - 4
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS & CABLES SECTION 260519
B.
Make splices and taps that are compatible with conductor material and that possess equivalent or better mechanical strength and insulation ratings than unspliced conductors. 1. Use oxide inhibitor in each splice and tap conductor for aluminum conductors.
C.
Wiring at Outlets: Install conductor at each outlet, with at least 6 inches of slack.
3.5
SLEEVE INSTALLATION FOR ELECTRICAL PENETRATIONS
A.
Concrete Slabs and Walls: Install sleeves for penetrations unless core-drilled holes or formed openings are used. Install sleeves during erection of slabs and walls.
B.
Use pipe sleeves unless penetration arrangement requires rectangular sleeved opening.
C.
Rectangular Sleeve Minimum Metal Thickness: 1. For sleeve rectangle perimeter less than 50 inches and no side greater than 16 inches, thickness shall be 0.052 inch. 2. For sleeve rectangle perimeter equal to, or greater than, 50 inches and 1 or more sides equal to, or greater than, 16 inches, thickness shall be 0.138 inch.
D.
Fire-Rated Assemblies: Install sleeves for penetrations of fire-rated floor and wall assemblies unless openings compatible with firestop system used are fabricated during construction of floor or wall.
E.
Cut sleeves to length for mounting flush with both wall surfaces.
F.
Extend sleeves installed in floors 2 inches above finished floor level.
G.
Size pipe sleeves to provide 1/4-inch annular clear space between sleeve and cable unless sleeve seal is to be installed.
H.
Seal space outside of sleeves with grout for penetrations of concrete and masonry.
I.
Interior Penetrations of Non-Fire-Rated Walls and Floors: Seal annular space between sleeve and cable, using joint sealant appropriate for size, depth, and location of joint according to Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants."
J.
Fire-Rated-Assembly Penetrations: Maintain indicated fire rating of walls, partitions, ceilings, and floors at cable penetrations. Install sleeves and seal with firestop materials according to Division 07 Section "Penetration Firestopping."
K.
Roof-Penetration Sleeves: Seal penetration of individual cables with flexible boot-type flashing units applied in coordination with roofing work.
L.
Aboveground Exterior-Wall Penetrations: Seal penetrations using sleeves and mechanical sleeve seals. Size sleeves to allow for 1-inch annular clear space between pipe and sleeve for installing mechanical sleeve seals.
M.
Underground Exterior-Wall Penetrations: Install cast-iron "wall pipes" for sleeves. Size sleeves to allow for 1-inch annular clear space between cable and sleeve for installing mechanical sleeve seals.
LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES
260519 - 5
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
3.6
LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS & CABLES SECTION 260519
SLEEVE-SEAL INSTALLATION
A.
Install to seal underground exterior-wall penetrations.
B.
Use type and number of sealing elements recommended by manufacturer for cable material and size. Position cable in center of sleeve. Assemble mechanical sleeve seals and install in annular space between cable and sleeve. Tighten bolts against pressure plates that cause sealing elements to expand and make watertight seal.
3.7 A.
3.8
FIRESTOPPING Apply firestopping to electrical penetrations of fire-rated floor and wall assemblies to restore original fire-resistance rating of assembly as shown on details, Sheet E-601. FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Perform tests and inspections and prepare test reports.
B.
Tests and Inspections: 1.
2. 3.
After installing conductors and cables and before electrical circuitry has been energized, test service entrance and feeder conductors, and conductors feeding the following critical equipment and services for compliance with requirements. a. Switchboards. b. Panelboards. c. HVAC and plumbing system control panels. d. Motors and motor controllers. Perform each visual and mechanical inspection and electrical test stated in NETA Acceptance Testing Specification. Certify compliance with test parameters. Infrared Scanning: After Substantial Completion, but not more than 60 days after Final Acceptance, perform an infrared scan of each splice in cables and conductors No. 3 AWG and larger. Remove box and equipment covers so splices are accessible to portable scanner. a.
b.
C.
Test Reports: Prepare a written report to record the following: 1. 2. 3.
D.
Instrument: Use an infrared scanning device designed to measure temperature or to detect significant deviations from normal values. Provide calibration record for device. Record of Infrared Scanning: Prepare a certified report that identifies splices checked and that describes scanning results. Include notation of deficiencies detected, remedial action taken, and observations after remedial action.
Test procedures used. Test results that comply with requirements. Test results that do not comply with requirements and corrective action taken to achieve compliance with requirements.
Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest as specified above.
LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES
260519 - 6
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS & CABLES SECTION 260519
END OF SECTION 260519
LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES
260519 - 7
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS SECTION 260526
SECTION 260526 – GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 A.
1.2
RELATED DOCUMENTS Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. SUMMARY
A.
Section Includes: Grounding systems and equipment.
B.
Section includes grounding equipment required to connect new work to the existing building grounding system.
1.3
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B.
Informational Submittals: Plans showing dimensioned as-built locations of grounding features specified in "Field Quality Control" Article, including the following: 1.
Grounding conductors and connection equipment.
C.
Qualification Data: For qualified testing agency and testing agency's field supervisor.
D.
Field quality-control reports.
1.4 A.
QUALITY CONTROL Testing Agency Qualifications: Member company of NETA or an NRTL. 1.
Testing Agency's Field Supervisor: Currently certified by NETA to supervise onsite testing.
B.
Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.
C.
Comply with UL 467 for grounding and bonding materials and equipment.
GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
260526 - 1
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS SECTION 260526
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1
CONDUCTORS
A.
Insulated Conductors: Tinned-copper wire or cable insulated for 600 V unless otherwise required by applicable Code or authorities having jurisdiction.
B.
Bare Copper Conductors: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7.
2.2
Solid Conductors: ASTM B 3. Stranded Conductors: ASTM B 8. Tinned Conductors: ASTM B 33. Bonding Cable: 28 kcmil, 14 strands of No. 17 AWG conductor, 1/4 inch in diameter. Bonding Conductor: No. 4 or No. 6 AWG, stranded conductor. Bonding Jumper: Copper tape, braided conductors terminated with copper ferrules; 1-5/8 inches wide and 1/16 inch thick. Tinned Bonding Jumper: Tinned-copper tape, braided conductors terminated with copper ferrules; 1-5/8 inches wide and 1/16 inch thick.
CONNECTORS
A.
Listed and labeled by an NRTL acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction for applications in which used and for specific types, sizes, and combinations of conductors and other items connected.
B.
Bolted Connectors for Conductors and Pipes: Copper or copper alloy, pressure type with at least two bolts. 1.
Pipe Connectors: Clamp type, sized for pipe.
C.
Welded Connectors: Exothermic-welding kits of types recommended by kit manufacturer for materials being joined and installation conditions.
D.
Bus-bar Connectors: Mechanical type, cast silicon bronze, solderless compressiontype wire terminals, and long-barrel, two-bolt connection to ground bus bar.
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1
APPLICATIONS
A.
Conductors: Install solid conductor for No. 8 AWG and smaller, and stranded conductors for No. 6 AWG and larger unless otherwise indicated.
B.
Isolated Grounding Conductors: Green-colored insulation with continuous yellow stripe. On feeders with isolated ground, identify grounding conductor where visible to normal inspection, with alternating bands of green and yellow tape, with at least three bands of green and two bands of yellow.
GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
260526 - 2
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
C.
Grounding Bus: Install in electrical and telephone equipment rooms, in rooms housing service equipment, and elsewhere as indicated. 1.
D.
Install bus on insulated spacers 2 inches minimum from wall, 6 inches above finished floor unless otherwise indicated.
Conductor Terminations and Connections: 1.
3.2
GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS SECTION 260526
Pipe and Equipment Grounding Conductor Terminations: Bolted connectors.
EQUIPMENT GROUNDING
A.
Install insulated equipment grounding conductors with all feeders and branch circuits.
B.
Install insulated equipment grounding conductors with the following items, in addition to those required by NFPA 70: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7.
Feeders and branch circuits. Lighting circuits. Receptacle circuits. Motor and appliance branch circuits. Flexible raceway runs. Armored and metal-clad cable runs. Computer and Rack-Mounted Electronic Equipment Circuits: Install insulated equipment grounding conductor in branch-circuit runs from equipment-area power panels and power-distribution units.
C.
Air-Duct Equipment Circuits: Install insulated equipment grounding conductor to ductmounted electrical devices operating at 120 V and more, including air cleaners, heaters, dampers, humidifiers, and other duct electrical equipment. Bond conductor to each unit and to air duct and connected metallic piping.
D.
Water Heater, Heat-Tracing, and Antifrost Heating Cables: Install a separate insulated equipment grounding conductor to each electric water heater and heat-tracing cable. Bond conductor to heater units, piping, connected equipment, and components.
E.
Isolated Equipment Enclosure Circuits: For designated equipment supplied by a branch circuit or feeder, isolate equipment enclosure from supply circuit raceway with a nonmetallic raceway fitting listed for the purpose. Install fitting where raceway enters enclosure, and install a separate insulated equipment grounding conductor. Isolate conductor from raceway and from panelboard grounding terminals. Terminate at equipment grounding conductor terminal of the applicable derived system or service unless otherwise indicated.
F.
Signal and Communication Equipment: In addition to grounding and bonding required by NFPA 70, provide a separate grounding system complying with requirements in TIA/ATIS J-STD-607-A. 1.
For telephone, alarm, voice and data, and other communication equipment, provide No. 4 AWG minimum insulated grounding conductor in raceway from
GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
260526 - 3
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
2. 3. 3.3
GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS SECTION 260526
grounding electrode system to each service location, terminal cabinet, wiring closet, and central equipment location. Service and Central Equipment Locations and Wiring Closets: Terminate grounding conductor on a 1/4-by-4-by-12-inch grounding bus. Terminal Cabinets: Terminate grounding conductor on cabinet grounding terminal.
INSTALLATION
A.
Grounding Conductors: Route along shortest and straightest paths possible unless otherwise indicated or required by Code. Avoid obstructing access or placing conductors where they may be subjected to strain, impact, or damage.
B.
Bonding Straps and Jumpers: Install in locations accessible for inspection and maintenance except where routed through short lengths of conduit. 1. 2. 3.
C.
Bonding to Structure: Bond straps directly to basic structure, taking care not to penetrate any adjacent parts. Bonding to Equipment Mounted on Vibration Isolation Hangers and Supports: Install bonding so vibration is not transmitted to rigidly mounted equipment. Use exothermic-welded connectors for outdoor locations; if a disconnect-type connection is required, use a bolted clamp.
Grounding and Bonding for Piping: 1.
2. 3.
Metal Water Service Pipe: Install insulated copper grounding conductors, in conduit, from building's main service equipment, or grounding bus, to main metal water service entrances to building. Connect grounding conductors to main metal water service pipes; use a bolted clamp connector or bolt a lug-type connector to a pipe flange by using one of the lug bolts of the flange. Where a dielectric main water fitting is installed, connect grounding conductor on street side of fitting. Bond metal grounding conductor conduit or sleeve to conductor at each end. Water Meter Piping: Use braided-type bonding jumpers to electrically bypass water meters. Connect to pipe with a bolted connector. Bond each aboveground portion of gas piping system downstream from equipment shutoff valve.
D.
Bonding Interior Metal Ducts: Bond metal air ducts to equipment grounding conductors of associated fans, blowers, electric heaters, and air cleaners. Install tinned bonding jumper to bond across flexible duct connections to achieve continuity.
E.
Grounding for Steel Building Structure: Install a driven ground rod at base of each corner column and at intermediate exterior columns at distances not more than 60 feet apart.
3.4 A.
LABELING Comply with requirements in Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical Systems" Article for instruction signs. The label or its text shall be green.
GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
260526 - 4
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
3.5
GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS SECTION 260526
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Perform tests and inspections. 1.
B.
Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections, and to assist in testing.
Tests and Inspections: 1. 2.
3.
After installing grounding system but before permanent electrical circuits have been energized, test for compliance with requirements. Inspect physical and mechanical condition. Verify tightness of accessible, bolted, electrical connections with a calibrated torque wrench according to manufacturer's written instructions. Test completed grounding system at each location where a maximum groundresistance level is specified, at service disconnect enclosure grounding terminal, at ground test wells. Make tests at ground rods before any conductors are connected. a.
b.
Measure ground resistance no fewer than two full days after last trace of precipitation and without soil being moistened by any means other than natural drainage or seepage and without chemical treatment or other artificial means of reducing natural ground resistance. Perform tests by fall-of-potential method according to IEEE 81.
C. Grounding system will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections. D. Prepare test and inspection reports. E.
Report measured ground resistances that exceed the following values: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.
F.
Power and Lighting Equipment or System with Capacity of 500 kVA and Less: 10 ohms. Power and Lighting Equipment or System with Capacity of 500 to 1000 kVA: 5 ohms. Power and Lighting Equipment or System with Capacity More Than 1000 kVA: 3 ohms. Substations and Pad-Mounted Equipment: 5 ohms. Manhole Grounds: 10 ohms.
Excessive Ground Resistance: If resistance to ground exceeds specified values, notify Architect promptly and include recommendations to reduce ground resistance.
END OF SECTION 260526
GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
260526 - 5
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS SECTION 260529
SECTION 260529 – HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 A.
1.2 A.
RELATED DOCUMENTS Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. SUMMARY This Section includes the following: 1.
1.3
Hangers and supports for electrical equipment and systems.
DEFINITIONS
A.
EMT: Electrical metallic tubing.
B.
RMC: Rigid metal conduit.
1.3
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A.
Delegated Design: Design supports for multiple raceways, including comprehensive engineering analysis by a qualified professional engineer, using performance requirements and design criteria indicated.
B.
Design supports for multiple raceways capable of supporting combined weight of supported systems and its contents.
C.
Design equipment supports capable of supporting combined operating weight of supported equipment and connected systems and components.
D.
Rated Strength: Adequate in tension, shear, and pullout force to resist maximum loads calculated or imposed for this Project, with a minimum structural safety factor of five times the applied force.
1.4 A.
SUBMITTALS Product Data: For the following: 1. 2.
Steel slotted support systems. Nonmetallic slotted support systems.
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
260529 - 1
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
1.5 A.
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS SECTION 260529
QUALITY CONTROL Comply with NFPA 70.
1.6 COORDINATION A.
Coordinate size and location of concrete base. Cast anchor-bolt inserts into bases. Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork requirements shall be specified by Architect.
B.
Coordinate installation of roof curbs, equipment supports, and roof penetrations. These items shall be specified by Architect.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 A.
SUPPORT, ANCHORAGE, AND ATTACHMENT COMPONENTS Steel Slotted Support Systems: Comply with MFMA-4, factory-fabricated components for field assembly. 1.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. b. c. d. e.
2. 3. 4. 5.
Allied Tube & Conduit. Cooper B-Line, Inc.; a division of Cooper Industries. Thomas & Betts Corporation. Unistrut; Tyco International, Ltd. Wesanco, Inc.
Metallic Coatings: Hot-dip galvanized after fabrication and applied according to MFMA-4. Nonmetallic Coatings: Manufacturer's standard PVC, polyurethane, or polyester coating applied according to MFMA-4. Painted Coatings: Manufacturer's standard painted coating applied according to MFMA-4. Channel Dimensions: Selected for applicable load criteria.
B.
Raceway and Cable Supports: As described in NECA 1 and NECA 101.
C.
Conduit and Cable Support Devices: Steel hangers, clamps, and associated fittings, designed for types and sizes of raceway or cable to be supported.
D.
Support for Conductors in Vertical Conduit: Factory-fabricated assembly consisting of threaded body and insulating wedging plug or plugs for non-armored electrical conductors or cables in riser conduits. Plugs shall have number, size, and shape of conductor gripping pieces as required to suit individual conductors or cables supported. Body shall be malleable iron.
E.
Structural Steel for Fabricated Supports and Restraints: plates, shapes, and bars; black and galvanized.
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
ASTM A 36/A 36M, steel
260529 - 2
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
F.
Mounting, Anchoring, and Attachment Components: Items for fastening electrical items or their supports to building surfaces include the following: 1.
Powder-Actuated Fasteners: Threaded-steel stud, for use in hardened portland cement concrete, steel, or wood, with tension, shear, and pullout capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials where used. a.
2.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1) Hilti Inc. 2) ITW Ramset/Red Head; a division of Illinois Tool Works, Inc. 3) MKT Fastening, LLC. 4) Simpson Strong-Tie Co., Inc.; Masterset Fastening Systems Unit.
Mechanical-Expansion Anchors: Insert-wedge-type, stainless steel, for use in hardened portland cement concrete with tension, shear, and pullout capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials in which used. a.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1) 2) 3) 4) 5)
3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 2.2
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS SECTION 260529
Cooper B-Line, Inc.; a division of Cooper Industries. Empire Tool and Manufacturing Co., Inc. Hilti Inc. ITW Ramset/Red Head; a division of Illinois Tool Works, Inc. MKT Fastening, LLC.
Concrete Inserts: Steel or malleable-iron, slotted support system units similar to MSS Type 18; complying with MFMA-4 or MSS SP-58. Clamps for Attachment to Steel Structural Elements: MSS SP-58, type suitable for attached structural element. Through Bolts: Structural type, hex head, and high strength. Comply with ASTM A 325. Toggle Bolts: All-steel springhead type. Hanger Rods: Threaded steel.
FABRICATED METAL EQUIPMENT SUPPORT ASSEMBLIES
A.
Description: Welded or bolted, structural-steel shapes, shop or field fabricated to fit dimensions of supported equipment.
B.
Materials: Comply with requirements in Division 05 Section "Metal Fabrications" for steel shapes and plates.
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
260529 - 3
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS SECTION 260529
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1
APPLICATION
A.
Comply with NECA 1 and NECA 101 for application of hangers and supports for electrical equipment and systems except if requirements in this Section are stricter.
B.
Maximum Support Spacing and Minimum Hanger Rod Size for Raceway: Space supports for EMT and RMC as scheduled in NECA 1, where its Table 1 lists maximum spacings less than stated in NFPA 70. Minimum rod size shall be 1/4 inch in diameter.
C.
Multiple Raceways or Cables: Install trapeze-type supports fabricated with steel slotted support system, sized so capacity can be increased by at least 25 percent in future without exceeding specified design load limits. 1.
D.
3.2
Secure raceways and cables to these supports with two-bolt conduit clamps.
Spring-steel clamps designed for supporting single conduits without bolts may be used for 1-1/2-inch and smaller raceways serving branch circuits and communication systems above suspended ceilings and for fastening raceways to trapeze supports. SUPPORT INSTALLATION
A.
Comply with NECA 1 and NECA 101 for installation requirements except as specified in this Article.
B.
Raceway Support Methods: In addition to methods described in NECA 1, EMT and RMC may be supported by openings through structure members, as permitted in NFPA 70.
C.
Strength of Support Assemblies: Where not indicated, select sizes of components so strength will be adequate to carry present and future static loads within specified loading limits. Minimum static design load used for strength determination shall be weight of supported components plus 200 lb.
D.
Mounting and Anchorage of Surface-Mounted Equipment and Components: Anchor and fasten electrical items and their supports to building structural elements by the following methods unless otherwise indicated by code: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7.
To Wood: Fasten with lag screws or through bolts. To New Concrete: Bolt to concrete inserts. To Masonry: Approved toggle-type bolts on hollow masonry units and expansion anchor fasteners on solid masonry units. To Existing Concrete: Expansion anchor fasteners. To Steel: Beam clamps (MSS Type 19, 21, 23, 25, or 27) complying with MSS SP-69. To Light Steel: Sheet metal screws. Items Mounted on Hollow Walls and Nonstructural Building Surfaces: Mount cabinets, panelboards, disconnect switches, control enclosures, pull and junction
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
260529 - 4
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS SECTION 260529
boxes, transformers, and other devices on slotted-channel racks attached to substrate. E.
3.3
Drill holes for expansion anchors in concrete at locations and to depths that avoid reinforcing bars. INSTALLATION OF FABRICATED METAL SUPPORTS
A.
Comply with installation requirements in Division 05 Section "Metal Fabrications" for site-fabricated metal supports.
B.
Cut, fit, and place miscellaneous metal supports accurately in location, alignment, and elevation to support and anchor electrical materials and equipment.
C.
Field Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1/D1.1M.
3.4 A.
PAINTING Touchup: Clean field welds and abraded areas of shop paint. Paint exposed areas immediately after erecting hangers and supports. Use same materials as used for shop painting. Comply with SSPC-PA 1 requirements for touching up field-painted surfaces. 1.
Apply paint by brush or spray to provide minimum dry film thickness of 2.0 mils.
B.
Touchup: Comply with requirements in Division 09 painting Sections for cleaning and touchup painting of field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas of shop paint on miscellaneous metal.
C.
Galvanized Surfaces: Clean welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and apply galvanizing-repair paint to comply with ASTM A 780.
END OF SECTION 260529
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
260529 - 5
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRIAL SYSTEMS SECTION 260533
SECTION 260533 – RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 A.
1.2
RELATED DOCUMENTS Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes raceways, fittings, boxes, enclosures, and cabinets for electrical wiring.
B.
Related Sections include the following: 1.
1.3
Division 26 Section "Underground Ducts and Raceways for Electrical Systems" for exterior ductbanks, manholes, and underground utility construction.
DEFINITIONS
A.
EMT: Electrical metallic tubing.
B.
FMC: Flexible metal conduit.
C.
LFMC: Liquidtight flexible metal conduit.
D.
RNC: Rigid nonmetallic conduit.
1.4
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For all raceways, wireways and fittings, floor boxes, hinged-cover enclosures, and cabinets.
B.
Submit manufacturer’s data on wire basket cable tray system including, but not limited to, types, materials, finishes and inside depths.
C.
Shop Drawings: For the following raceway components. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work. 1.
D.
Custom enclosures and cabinets.
Source quality-control test reports.
RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
260533 - 1
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
1.5
RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRIAL SYSTEMS SECTION 260533
QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use.
B.
Comply with NFPA 70.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1
METAL CONDUIT AND TUBING
A.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.
AFC Cable Systems, Inc. Alflex Inc. Allied Tube & Conduit; a Tyco International Ltd. Co. Maverick Tube Corporation. O-Z Gedney; a unit of General Signal. Wheatland Tube Company.
B.
Rigid Steel Conduit: ANSI C80.1.
C.
FMC: Zinc-coated steel.
D.
LFMC: Flexible steel conduit with PVC jacket.
E.
Fittings for Conduit (Including all Types and Flexible and Liquidtight), EMT, and Cable: NEMA FB 1; listed for type and size raceway with which used, and for application and environment in which installed. 1.
F.
2.2 A.
Fittings for EMT: Steel, compression type. Set screw fittings are not acceptable on this Project.
Joint Compound for Rigid Steel Conduit: Listed for use in cable connector assemblies, and compounded for use to lubricate and protect threaded raceway joints from corrosion and enhance their conductivity. NONMETALLIC CONDUIT AND TUBING Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.
AFC Cable Systems, Inc. Anamet Electrical, Inc.; Anaconda Metal Hose. Arnco Corporation. CANTEX Inc. CertainTeed Corp.; Pipe & Plastics Group.
RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
260533 - 2
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12.
RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRIAL SYSTEMS SECTION 260533
Condux International, Inc. ElecSYS, Inc. Electri-Flex Co. Lamson & Sessions; Carlon Electrical Products. Manhattan/CDT/Cole-Flex. RACO; a Hubbell Company. Thomas & Betts Corporation.
B.
RNC: NEMA TC 2, Type EPC-40-PVC, unless otherwise indicated.
C.
Fittings for ENT and RNC: NEMA TC 3; match to conduit or tubing type and material.
D.
Fittings for LFNC: UL 514B.
2.3
METAL WIREWAYS
A.
Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
B.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. 2. 3.
Cooper B-Line, Inc. Hoffman. Square D; Schneider Electric.
C.
Description: Sheet metal sized and shaped as indicated, NEMA 250, Type 1, unless otherwise indicated.
D.
Fittings and Accessories: Include couplings, offsets, elbows, expansion joints, adapters, hold-down straps, end caps, and other fittings to match and mate with wireways as required for complete system.
E.
Wireway Covers: Screw-cover type.
F.
Finish: Manufacturer's standard enamel finish.
2.4 A.
WIRE BASKET CABLE TRAY SYSTEM Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. 2. 3. 4.
Chalfant Manufacturing Company Legrand - Cablofil Cooper - B-Line Atkore Int’l - Cope
RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
260533 - 3
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRIAL SYSTEMS SECTION 260533
B.
Wire basket cable tray systems are defined to include, but are not limited to straight sections of continuous wire mesh, field formed horizontal and vertical bends, tees, drop outs, supports and accessories.
C.
The drawings, which constitute a part of these specifications, indicate the general route of the wire basket cable tray systems. Data presented on these drawings is as accurate as preliminary surveys and planning can determine until final equipment selection is made. Accuracy is not guaranteed and field verification of all dimensions, routing, etc., is required.
D.
Provide wire basket cable tray system of appropriate type and size indicated with connector assemblies, clamp assemblies, connector plates, splice plates and splice bars. Construct units with rounded edges and smooth surfaces; in compliance with applicable codes and standards.
2.5 A.
BOXES, ENCLOSURES, AND CABINETS Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7.
Cooper Crouse-Hinds; Div. of Cooper Industries, Inc. Hoffman. Hubbell Incorporated; Killark Electric Manufacturing Co. Division. O-Z/Gedney; a unit of General Signal. RACO; a Hubbell Company. Spring City Electrical Manufacturing Company. Thomas & Betts Corporation.
B.
Sheet Metal Outlet and Device Boxes: NEMA OS 1.
C.
Cast-Metal Outlet and Device Boxes: gasketed cover.
D.
Metal Floor Boxes: Cast, fully adjustable, rectangular.
E.
Nonmetallic Floor Boxes: Nonadjustable, round.
F.
Small Sheet Metal Pull and Junction Boxes: NEMA OS 1.
G.
Cast-Metal Access, Pull, and Junction Boxes: NEMA FB 1, galvanized, cast iron with gasketed cover.
H.
Hinged-Cover Enclosures: NEMA 250, Type 1, with continuous-hinge cover with flush latch, unless otherwise indicated. 1.
I.
Metal Enclosures: enamel.
NEMA FB 1, ferrous alloy, Type FD, with
Steel, finished inside and out with manufacturer's standard
Cabinets:
RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
260533 - 4
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
1.
2.6
RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRIAL SYSTEMS SECTION 260533
2. 3. 4.
NEMA 250, Type 1, galvanized-steel box with removable interior panel and removable front, finished inside and out with manufacturer's standard enamel. Hinged door in front cover with flush latch and concealed hinge. Key latch to match panelboards. Metal barriers to separate wiring of different systems and voltage.
5.
Accessory feet where required for freestanding equipment.
SLEEVES FOR RACEWAYS
A.
Steel Pipe Sleeves: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type E, Grade B, Schedule 40, galvanized steel, plain ends.
B.
Cast-Iron Pipe Sleeves: Cast or fabricated "wall pipe," equivalent to ductile-iron pressure pipe, with plain ends and integral waterstop, unless otherwise indicated.
C.
Sleeves for Rectangular Openings: Galvanized sheet steel with minimum 0.052- or 0.138-inch thickness as indicated and of length to suit application.
D.
Coordinate sleeve selection and application with selection and application of firestopping specified in Division 07 Section "Penetration Firestopping."
2.7 A.
SLEEVE SEALS Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. 2. 3. 4.
B.
Advance Products & Systems, Inc. Calpico, Inc. Metraflex Co. Pipeline Seal and Insulator, Inc.
Description: Modular sealing device, designed for field assembly, to fill annular space between sleeve and cable. 1.
2. 3.
Sealing Elements: EPDM or NBR interlocking links shaped to fit surface of cable or conduit. Include type and number required for material and size of raceway or cable. Pressure Plates: Stainless steel. Include two for each sealing element. Connecting Bolts and Nuts: Stainless steel of length required to secure pressure plates to sealing elements. Include one for each sealing element.
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 A.
RACEWAY APPLICATION Outdoors: Apply raceway products as specified below, unless otherwise indicated:
RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
260533 - 5
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
1. 2. 3. 4.
5. B.
RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRIAL SYSTEMS SECTION 260533
Exposed Conduit: Rigid steel conduit. Concealed Conduit, Aboveground: Rigid steel conduit. Underground Conduit: RNC, Type EPC-40-PVC, direct buried. Connection to Vibrating Equipment (Including Transformers and Hydraulic, Pneumatic, Electric Solenoid, or Motor-Driven Equipment): LFMC, maximum length 18 inches. Boxes and Enclosures, Aboveground: NEMA 250, Type 3R Coated Steel.
Comply with the following indoor applications, unless otherwise indicated: 1. 2.
Exposed, Not Subject to Physical Damage: EMT. Exposed and Subject to Severe Physical Damage: Rigid steel conduit. Includes raceways in the following locations: a. b. c.
Loading dock. Corridors used for traffic of mechanized carts, forklifts, and pallet-handling units. Mechanical rooms.
3. 4.
Concealed in Ceilings and Interior Walls and Partitions: EMT. Connection to Vibrating Equipment (Including Transformers and Hydraulic, Pneumatic, Electric Solenoid, or Motor-Driven Equipment): FMC maximum length 18”, except use LFMC in damp or wet locations. 5. Damp or Wet Locations: Rigid steel conduit. 6. Raceways for Optical Fiber or Communications Cable in Spaces Used for Environmental Air: EMT. 7. Raceways for Optical Fiber or Communications Cable Risers in Vertical Shafts: EMT. 8. Raceways for Concealed General Purpose Distribution of Optical Fiber or Communications Cable: EMT. 9. Boxes and Enclosures: NEMA 250, Type 1, sheet metal where concealed. Use NEMA 250, cast alloy in exposed, damp, or wet locations. 10. Boxes and Enclosures: NEMA 250, Type 1, except use NEMA 250, Type 4, stainless steel in damp or wet locations.
C.
Minimum Raceway Size: 3/4-inch trade size.
D.
Raceway Fittings: Compatible with raceways and suitable for use and location. 1. 2.
Rigid and Intermediate Steel Conduit: Use threaded rigid steel conduit fittings, unless otherwise indicated. PVC Externally Coated, Rigid Steel Conduits: Use only fittings listed for use with that material. Patch and seal all joints, nicks, and scrapes in PVC coating after installing conduits and fittings. Use sealant recommended by fitting manufacturer.
E.
Install nonferrous conduit or tubing for circuits operating above 60 Hz. Where aluminum raceways are installed for such circuits and pass through concrete, install in nonmetallic sleeve.
F.
Do not install aluminum conduits in contact with concrete.
RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
260533 - 6
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
3.2
RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRIAL SYSTEMS SECTION 260533
INSTALLATION
A.
Comply with NECA 1 for installation requirements applicable to products specified in Part 2 except where requirements on Drawings or in this Article are stricter.
B.
Keep raceways at least 6 inches away from parallel runs of flues and steam or hotwater pipes. Install horizontal raceway runs above water and steam piping.
C.
Complete raceway installation before starting conductor installation.
D.
Support raceways as specified in Division 26 Section "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems."
E.
Arrange stub-ups so curved portions of bends are not visible above the finished slab.
F.
Install no more than the equivalent of three 90-degree bends in any conduit run except for communications conduits, for which fewer bends are allowed.
G.
Conceal conduit and EMT within finished walls, ceilings, and floors, unless otherwise indicated.
H.
Threaded Conduit Joints, Exposed to Wet, Damp, Corrosive, or Outdoor Conditions: Apply listed compound to threads of raceway and fittings before making up joints. Follow compound manufacturer's written instructions.
I.
Raceway Terminations at Locations Subject to Moisture or Vibration: Use insulating bushings to protect conductors, including conductors smaller than No. 4 AWG.
J.
Install pull wires in empty raceways. Use polypropylene or monofilament plastic line with not less than 200-lb tensile strength. Leave at least 12 inches of slack at each end of pull wire.
K.
Raceways for Optical Fiber and Communications Cable: Install raceways, metallic and nonmetallic, rigid and flexible, as follows: 1. 2. 3.
L.
3/4-Inch Trade Size and Smaller: Install raceways in maximum lengths of 50 feet. 1-Inch Trade Size and Larger: Install raceways in maximum lengths of 75 feet. Install with a maximum of two 90-degree bends or equivalent for each length of raceway unless Drawings show stricter requirements. Separate lengths with pull or junction boxes or terminations at distribution frames or cabinets where necessary to comply with these requirements.
Install raceway sealing fittings at suitable, approved, and accessible locations and fill them with listed sealing compound. For concealed raceways, install each fitting in a flush steel box with a blank cover plate having a finish similar to that of adjacent plates or surfaces. Install raceway sealing fittings at the following points: 1. 2.
Where conduits pass from warm to cold locations, such as boundaries of refrigerated spaces. Where otherwise required by NFPA 70.
RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
260533 - 7
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
M.
RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRIAL SYSTEMS SECTION 260533
Flexible Conduit Connections: Use maximum of 72 inches of flexible conduit for recessed and semi recessed lighting fixtures and maximum 18 inch for equipment subject to vibration, noise transmission, or movement; and for transformers and motors. 1.
Use LFMC in damp or wet locations
N.
Recessed Boxes in Masonry Walls: Saw-cut opening for box in center of cell of masonry block, and install box flush with surface of wall.
O.
Set metal floor boxes level and flush with finished floor surface.
P.
Set nonmetallic floor boxes level. Trim after installation to fit flush with finished floor surface.
3.3 A.
INSTALLATION OF UNDERGROUND CONDUIT Direct-Buried Conduit: 1.
2. 3.
4.
5.
3.4
Excavate trench bottom to provide firm and uniform support for conduit. Prepare trench bottom as specified in Division 31 Section "Earth Moving" for pipe less than 6 inches in nominal diameter. Install backfill as specified in Division 31 Section "Earth Moving." After installing conduit, backfill and compact. Start at tie-in point, and work toward end of conduit run, leaving conduit at end of run free to move with expansion and contraction as temperature changes during this process. Firmly hand tamp backfill around conduit to provide maximum supporting strength. After placing controlled backfill to within 12 inches of finished grade, make final conduit connection at end of run and complete backfilling with normal compaction as specified in Division 31 Section "Earth Moving." Install manufactured duct elbows for stub-ups at poles and equipment and at building entrances through the floor, unless otherwise indicated. Encase elbows for stub-up ducts throughout the length of the elbow. Warning Planks: Bury warning planks approximately 12 inches above directburied conduits, placing them 24 inches o.c. Align planks along the width and along the centerline of conduit.
SLEEVE INSTALLATION FOR ELECTRICAL PENETRATIONS
A.
Coordinate sleeve selection and application with selection and application of firestopping specified in Division 07 Section "Penetration Firestopping."
B.
Concrete Slabs and Walls: Install sleeves for penetrations unless core-drilled holes or formed openings are used. Install sleeves during erection of slabs and walls.
C.
Use pipe sleeves unless penetration arrangement requires rectangular sleeved opening.
D.
Rectangular Sleeve Minimum Metal Thickness:
RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
260533 - 8
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
1. 2.
RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRIAL SYSTEMS SECTION 260533
For sleeve cross-section rectangle perimeter less than 50 inches and no side greater than 16 inches, thickness shall be 0.052 inch. For sleeve cross-section rectangle perimeter equal to, or greater than, 50 inches and 1 or more sides equal to, or greater than, 16 inches, thickness shall be 0.138 inch.
E.
Fire-Rated Assemblies: Install sleeves for penetrations of fire-rated floor and wall assemblies unless openings compatible with firestop system used are fabricated during construction of floor or wall.
F.
Cut sleeves to length for mounting flush with both surfaces of walls.
G.
Extend sleeves installed in floors 2 inches above finished floor level.
H.
Size pipe sleeves to provide 1/4-inch annular clear space between sleeve and raceway unless sleeve seal is to be installed.
I.
Seal space outside of sleeves with grout for penetrations of concrete and masonry.
J.
Interior Penetrations of Non-Fire-Rated Walls and Floors: Seal annular space between sleeve and raceway, using joint sealant appropriate for size, depth, and location of joint. Refer to Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants" for materials and installation.
K.
Fire-Rated-Assembly Penetrations: Maintain indicated fire rating of walls, partitions, ceilings, and floors at raceway penetrations. Install sleeves and seal with firestop materials. Comply with Division 07 Section "Penetration Firestopping."
L.
Roof-Penetration Sleeves: Seal penetration of individual raceways with flexible, boottype flashing units applied in coordination with roofing work.
M.
Aboveground, Exterior-Wall Penetrations: Seal penetrations using sleeves and mechanical sleeve seals. Select sleeve size to allow for 1-inch annular clear space between pipe and sleeve for installing mechanical sleeve seals.
N.
Underground, Exterior-Wall Penetrations: Install cast-iron "wall pipes" for sleeves. Size sleeves to allow for 1-inch annular clear space between raceway and sleeve for installing mechanical sleeve seals.
3.5
SLEEVE-SEAL INSTALLATION
A.
Install to seal underground, exterior wall penetrations.
B.
Use type and number of sealing elements recommended by manufacturer for raceway material and size. Position raceway in center of sleeve. Assemble mechanical sleeve seals and install in annular space between raceway and sleeve. Tighten bolts against pressure plates that cause sealing elements to expand and make watertight seal.
RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
260533 - 9
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
3.6 A.
RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRIAL SYSTEMS SECTION 260533
FIRESTOPPING Apply firestopping to electrical penetrations of fire-rated floor and wall assemblies to restore original fire-resistance rating of assembly. Firestopping materials and installation requirements are specified in Division 07 Section "Penetration Firestopping."
3.7 PROTECTION A.
Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure coatings, finishes, and cabinets are without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. 1. 2.
Repair damage to galvanized finishes with zinc-rich paint recommended by manufacturer. Repair damage to PVC or paint finishes with matching touchup coating recommended by manufacturer.
END OF SECTION 260533
RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
260533 - 10
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
UNDERGROUND DUCTS AND RACEWAYS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS SECTION 260543
SECTION 260543 – UNDERGROUND DUCTS AND RACEWAYS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 A.
1.2 A.
RELATED DOCUMENTS Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. SUMMARY Section Includes: 1.
1.3 A. 1.4 A.
DEFINITION RNC: Rigid nonmetallic conduit. SUBMITTALS Product Data: For the following: 1. Duct-bank materials, including separators and miscellaneous components. 2. 3.
1.5
Conduit, ducts, and duct accessories for duct banks.
Ducts and conduits and their accessories, including elbows, end bells, bends, fittings, and solvent cement. Warning tape.
QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Comply with IEEE C2.
B.
Comply with NFPA 70.
1.6 A.
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING Deliver ducts to Project site with ends capped. Store nonmetallic ducts with supports to prevent bending, warping, and deforming.
UNDERGROUND DUCTS AND RACEWAYS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
260543 - 1
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
1.7 A.
PROJECT CONDITIONS Interruption of Existing Electrical Service: Do not interrupt electrical service to facilities occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide temporary electrical service according to requirements indicated: 1. 2.
1.8 A.
UNDERGROUND DUCTS AND RACEWAYS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS SECTION 260543
Notify Construction Manager and Owner no less than one week in advance of proposed interruption of electrical service. Do not proceed with interruption of electrical service without Construction Manager's and Owner's written permission.
COORDINATION Coordinate layout and installation of ducts and pull boxes with final arrangement of other utilities, site grading, and surface features as determined in the field.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 A.
2.2 A.
CONDUIT RNC: NEMA TC 2, Type EPC-40-PVC, UL 651, with matching fittings by same manufacturer as the conduit, complying with NEMA TC 3 and UL 514B. NONMETALLIC DUCTS AND DUCT ACCESSORIES Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11.
AFC Cable Systems. ARNCO Corporation. Beck Manufacturing. Cantex, Inc. CertainTeed Corp. Condux International, Inc. DCX-CHOL Enterprises, Inc.; ELECSYS Division. Electri-Flex Company. IPEX Inc. Lamson & Sessions; Carlon Electrical Products. Manhattan Wire Products; a Belden company.
B.
Underground Plastic Utilities Duct: NEMA TC 6 & 8, Type EB-20-PVC, ASTM F 512, UL 651A, with matching fittings by the same manufacturer as the duct, complying with NEMA TC 9.
C.
Duct Accessories:
UNDERGROUND DUCTS AND RACEWAYS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
260543 - 2
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
1.
2.
UNDERGROUND DUCTS AND RACEWAYS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS SECTION 260543
Duct Separators: Factory-fabricated rigid PVC interlocking spacers, sized for type and sizes of ducts with which used, and retained to provide minimum duct spacings indicated while supporting ducts during concreting or backfilling. Warning Tape: Underground-line warning tape specified in Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical Systems."
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1
CORROSION PROTECTION
A. 3.2
Aluminum shall not be installed in contact with earth or concrete. UNDERGROUND DUCT APPLICATION
A.
Ducts for Electrical Feeders 600 V and Less: RNC, NEMA Type EPC-40-PVC, in duct bank unless otherwise indicated.
B.
Underground Ducts for Telephone, Communications, or Data Utility Service Cables: RNC, NEMA Type EPC-40-PVC, in duct bank unless otherwise indicated.
C.
Underground Ducts Crossing Paved Paths, Walks, and Driveways or Roadways: RNC, NEMA Type EPC-40-PVC, encased in reinforced concrete.
3.3
EARTHWORK A.
Excavation and Backfill: Comply with Division 31 Section "Earth Moving," but do not use heavy-duty, hydraulic-operated, compaction equipment.
B.
Restore surface features at areas disturbed by excavation and reestablish original grades unless otherwise indicated. Replace removed sod immediately after backfilling is completed.
C.
Restore areas disturbed by trenching, storing of dirt, cable laying, and other work. Restore vegetation and include necessary topsoiling, fertilizing, liming, seeding, sodding, sprigging, and mulching. Comply with Division 32 Sections "Turf and Grasses" and "Plants."
D.
Cut and patch existing pavement in the path of underground ducts and utility structures according to Division 01 Section "Cutting and Patching."
3.4 A.
DUCT INSTALLATION Slope: Pitch ducts a minimum slope of 1:300 down toward manholes and handholes and away from buildings and equipment. Slope ducts from a high point in runs between two manholes to drain in both directions.
UNDERGROUND DUCTS AND RACEWAYS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
260543 - 3
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
UNDERGROUND DUCTS AND RACEWAYS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS SECTION 260543
B.
Curves and Bends: Use 5-degree angle couplings for small changes in direction. Use manufactured long sweep bends with a minimum radius of 48 inches 12.5 ft., both horizontally and vertically, at other locations unless otherwise indicated.
C.
Joints: Use solvent-cemented joints in ducts and fittings and make watertight according to manufacturer's written instructions. Stagger couplings so those of adjacent ducts do not lie in same plane.
D.
Building Wall Penetrations: Make a transition from underground duct to rigid steel conduit at least 10 ft. outside the building wall without reducing duct line slope away from the building and without forming a trap in the line. Use fittings manufactured for duct-to-conduit transition. Install conduit penetrations of building walls as specified in Division 26 Section "Common Work Results for Electrical."
E.
Sealing: Provide temporary closure at terminations of ducts that have cables pulled. Seal spare ducts at terminations. Use sealing compound and plugs to withstand at least 15-psig hydrostatic pressure.
F.
Pulling Cord: Install 100-lbf- test nylon cord in ducts.
3.5
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Perform the following tests and inspections: 1. 2.
3.
B.
Demonstrate capability and compliance with requirements on completion of installation of underground ducts and utility structures. Pull aluminum or wood test mandrel through duct to prove joint integrity and test for out-of-round duct. Provide mandrel equal to 80 percent fill of duct. If obstructions are indicated, remove obstructions and retest. Test manhole and handhole grounding to ensure electrical continuity of grounding and bonding connections. Measure and report ground resistance as specified in Division 26 Section "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems."
Correct deficiencies and retest as specified above to demonstrate compliance.
C. Prepare test and inspection reports. 3.6 A.
CLEANING Pull leather-washer-type duct cleaner, with graduated washer sizes, through full length of ducts. Follow with rubber duct swab for final cleaning and to assist in spreading lubricant throughout ducts.
END OF SECTION 260543
UNDERGROUND DUCTS AND RACEWAYS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
260543 - 4
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS SECTION 260553
SECTION 260553 – IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEM S PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 A.
1.2 A.
RELATED DOCUMENTS Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. SUMMARY Section Includes: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8.
1.3
Identification for raceways. Identification of power and control cables. Identification for conductors. Underground-line warning tape. Warning labels and signs. Instruction signs. Equipment identification labels. Miscellaneous identification products.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each electrical identification product indicated.
B.
Samples: For each type of label and sign to illustrate size, colors, lettering style, mounting provisions, and graphic features of identification products.
C.
Identification Schedule: An index of nomenclature of electrical equipment and system components used in identification signs and labels.
1.4
QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Comply with ANSI A13.1 and IEEE C2.
B.
Comply with NFPA 70.
C.
Comply with 29 CFR 1910.144 and 29 CFR 1910.145.
D.
Comply with ANSI Z535.4 for safety signs and labels.
E.
Adhesive-attached labeling materials, including label stocks, laminating adhesives, and inks used by label printers, shall comply with UL 969.
IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
260553 - 1
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
1.5
IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS SECTION 260553
COORDINATION
A.
Coordinate identification names, abbreviations, colors, and other features with requirements in other Sections requiring identification applications, Drawings, Shop Drawings, manufacturer's wiring diagrams, and the Operation and Maintenance Manual; and with those required by codes, standards, and 29 CFR 1910.145. Use consistent designations throughout Project.
B.
Coordinate installation of identifying devices with completion of covering and painting of surfaces where devices are to be applied.
C.
Coordinate installation of identifying devices with location of access panels and doors.
D.
Install identifying devices before installing acoustical ceilings and similar concealment.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1
POWER RACEWAY IDENTIFICATION MATERIALS
A.
Comply with ANSI A13.1 for minimum size of letters for legend and for minimum length of color field for each raceway size.
B.
Colors for Raceways Carrying Circuits at 600 V or Less: 1. 2.
Black letters on an orange field. Legend: Indicate voltage and system or service type.
C.
Self-Adhesive Vinyl Labels for Raceways Carrying Circuits at 600 V or Less: Preprinted, flexible label laminated with a clear, weather- and chemical-resistant coating and matching wraparound adhesive tape for securing ends of legend label.
D.
Snap-Around, Color-Coding Bands for Raceways Carrying Circuits at 600 V or Less: Slit, pretensioned, flexible, solid-colored acrylic sleeve, 2 inches long, with diameter sized to suit diameter of raceway or cable it identifies and to stay in place by gripping action.
E.
Metal Tags: Brass, 2 by 2 by 0.05 inch, with stamped legend, punched for use with self-locking cable tie fastener.
2.2
ARMORED AND METAL-CLAD CABLE IDENTIFICATION MATERIALS
A.
Comply with ANSI A13.1 for minimum size of letters for legend and for minimum length of color field for each raceway and cable size.
B.
Colors for Raceways Carrying Circuits at 600 V and Less: 1. 2.
Black letters on an orange field. Legend: Indicate voltage and system or service type.
IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
260553 - 2
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
C.
IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS SECTION 260553
Colors for Raceways Carrying Circuits at More Than 600 V: 1. 2.
Black letters on an orange field. Legend: "DANGER CONCEALED HIGH VOLTAGE WIRING" with 3-inch- high letters on 20-inch centers.
D.
Self-Adhesive Vinyl Labels: Preprinted, flexible label laminated with a clear, weatherand chemical-resistant coating and matching wraparound adhesive tape for securing ends of legend label.
E.
Self-Adhesive Vinyl Tape: Colored, heavy duty, waterproof, fade resistant; 2 inches wide; compounded for outdoor use.
2.3
POWER AND CONTROL CABLE IDENTIFICATION MATERIALS
A.
Comply with ANSI A13.1 for minimum size of letters for legend and for minimum length of color field for each raceway and cable size.
B.
Self-Adhesive Vinyl Labels: Preprinted, flexible label laminated with a clear, weatherand chemical-resistant coating and matching wraparound adhesive tape for securing ends of legend label.
C.
Metal Tags: Brass, 2 by 2 by 0.05 inch, with stamped legend, punched for use with self-locking cable tie fastener.
2.4 A.
2.5 A.
CONDUCTOR IDENTIFICATION MATERIALS Color-Coding Conductor Tape: Colored, self-adhesive vinyl tape not less than 3 mils thick by 1 to 2 inches wide. FLOOR MARKING TAPE 2-inch- wide, 5-mil pressure-sensitive vinyl tape, with black and white stripes and clear vinyl overlay.
2.6 UNDERGROUND-LINE WARNING TAPE A.
Tape: 1. 2. 3.
B.
Recommended by manufacturer for the method of installation and suitable to identify and locate underground electrical and communications utility lines. Printing on tape shall be permanent and shall not be damaged by burial operations. Tape material and ink shall be chemically inert, and not subject to degrading when exposed to acids, alkalis, and other destructive substances commonly found in soils.
Color and Printing:
IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
260553 - 3
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
1. 2. 3.
2.7
IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS SECTION 260553
Comply with ANSI Z535.1 through ANSI Z535.5. Inscriptions for Red-Colored Tapes: ELECTRIC LINE, HIGH VOLTAGE. Inscriptions for Orange-Colored Tapes: TELEPHONE CABLE, CATV CABLE, COMMUNICATIONS CABLE, OPTICAL FIBER CABLE.
WARNING LABELS AND SIGNS
A.
Comply with NFPA 70 and 29 CFR 1910.145.
B.
Baked-Enamel Warning Signs: 1. 2. 3.
C.
Preprinted aluminum signs, punched or drilled for fasteners, with colors, legend, and size required for application. 1/4-inch grommets in corners for mounting. Nominal size, 7 by 10 inches.
Warning label and sign shall include, but are not limited to, the following legends: 1. 2.
3.
Multiple Power Source Warning: "DANGER - ELECTRICAL SHOCK HAZARD EQUIPMENT HAS MULTIPLE POWER SOURCES." Workspace Clearance Warning: "WARNING - OSHA REGULATION - AREA IN FRONT OF ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT MUST BE KEPT CLEAR FOR 36 INCHES." Provide arc flash warning labels in accordance with Specification Section 26 05 73.
2.8 INSTRUCTION SIGNS A.
Engraved, laminated acrylic or melamine plastic, minimum 1/16 inch thick for signs up to 20 sq. inches and 1/8 inch thick for larger sizes. 1. 2. 3.
Engraved legend with black letters on white face. Punched or drilled for mechanical fasteners. Framed with mitered acrylic molding and arranged for attachment at applicable equipment.
B.
Adhesive Film Label: Machine printed, in black, by thermal transfer or equivalent process. Minimum letter height shall be 3/8 inch.
C.
Adhesive Film Label with Clear Protective Overlay: Machine printed, in black, by thermal transfer or equivalent process. Minimum letter height shall be 3/8 inch. Overlay shall provide a weatherproof and UV-resistant seal for label.
2.9 A.
EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION LABELS Engraved, Laminated Acrylic or Melamine Label: Punched or drilled for screw mounting. White letters on a dark-gray background. Minimum letter height shall be 3/8 inch.
IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
260553 - 4
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
2.10 A.
CABLE TIES General-Purpose Cable Ties: Fungus inert, self extinguishing, one piece, self locking, Type 6/6 nylon. 1. 2. 3. 4.
B.
Minimum Width: 3/16 inch. Tensile Strength at 73 deg F, According to ASTM D 638: 12,000 psi. Temperature Range: Minus 40 to plus 185 deg F. Color: Black.
Plenum-Rated Cable Ties: Self extinguishing, UV stabilized, one piece, self locking. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.
2.11
Minimum Width: 3/16 inch. Tensile Strength at 73 deg F, According to ASTM D 638: 12,000 psi. Temperature Range: Minus 40 to plus 185 deg F. Color: Black except where used for color-coding.
UV-Stabilized Cable Ties: Fungus inert, designed for continuous exposure to exterior sunlight, self extinguishing, one piece, self locking, Type 6/6 nylon. 1. 2. 3. 4.
C.
IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS SECTION 260553
Minimum Width: 3/16 inch. Tensile Strength at 73 deg F, According to ASTM D 638: 7000 psi. UL 94 Flame Rating: 94V-0. Temperature Range: Minus 50 to plus 284 deg F. Color: Black.
MISCELLANEOUS IDENTIFICATION PRODUCTS
A.
Paint: Comply with requirements in Division 09 painting Sections for paint materials and application requirements. Select paint system applicable for surface material and location (exterior or interior).
B.
Fasteners for Labels and Signs: Self-tapping, stainless-steel screws or stainless-steel machine screws with nuts and flat and lock washers.
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1
INSTALLATION
A.
Verify identity of each item before installing identification products.
B.
Location: Install identification materials and devices at locations for most convenient viewing without interference with operation and maintenance of equipment.
C.
Apply identification devices to surfaces that require finish after completing finish work.
D.
Self-Adhesive Identification Products: Clean surfaces before application, using materials and methods recommended by manufacturer of identification device.
IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
260553 - 5
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS SECTION 260553
E.
Attach signs and plastic labels that are not self-adhesive type with mechanical fasteners appropriate to the location and substrate.
F.
System Identification Color-Coding Bands for Raceways and Cables: Each colorcoding band shall completely encircle cable or conduit. Place adjacent bands of twocolor markings in contact, side by side. Locate bands at changes in direction, at penetrations of walls and floors, at 50-foot maximum intervals in straight runs, and at 25-foot maximum intervals in congested areas.
G.
Aluminum Wraparound Marker Labels and Metal Tags: Secure tight to surface of conductor or cable at a location with high visibility and accessibility.
H.
Cable Ties: For attaching tags. Use general-purpose type, except as listed below: 1. 2.
Outdoors: UV-stabilized nylon. In Spaces Handling Environmental Air: Plenum rated.
I.
Underground-Line Warning Tape: During backfilling of trenches install continuous underground-line warning tape directly above line at 6 to 8 inches below finished grade. Use multiple tapes where width of multiple lines installed in a common trench or concrete envelope exceeds 16 inches overall.
J.
Painted Identification: Comply with requirements in Division 09 painting Sections for surface preparation and paint application.
3.2
IDENTIFICATION SCHEDULE
A.
Accessible Raceways and Metal-Clad Cables, 600 V or Less, for Service, Feeder, and Branch Circuits More Than 30 A, and 120 V to ground: Identify with self-adhesive vinyl label. Install labels at 10-foot maximum intervals.
B.
Accessible Raceways and Cables within Buildings: Identify the covers of each junction and pull box of the following systems with self-adhesive vinyl labels with the wiring system legend and system voltage. System legends shall be as follows: 1. 2. 3.
C.
Emergency Power. Power. UPS.
Power-Circuit Conductor Identification, 600 V or Less: For conductors in vaults, pull and junction boxes, manholes, and handholes, use color-coding conductor tape to identify the phase. 1.
Color-Coding for Phase and Voltage Level Identification, 600 V or Less: Use colors listed below for ungrounded service, feeder, and branch-circuit conductors. a. b.
Color shall be factory applied or field applied for sizes larger than No. 8 AWG, if authorities having jurisdiction permit. Colors for 208/120-V Circuits:
IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
260553 - 6
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
1) 2) 3) c.
IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS SECTION 260553
Phase A: Black. Phase B: Red. Phase C: Blue.
Field-Applied, Color-Coding Conductor Tape: Apply in half-lapped turns for a minimum distance of 6 inches from terminal points and in boxes where splices or taps are made. Apply last two turns of tape with no tension to prevent possible unwinding. Locate bands to avoid obscuring factory cable markings.
D.
Install instructional sign including the color-code for grounded and ungrounded conductors using adhesive-film-type labels.
E.
Auxiliary Electrical Systems Conductor Identification: control, and signal connections. 1. 2. 3.
F.
Identify field-installed alarm,
Identify conductors, cables, and terminals in enclosures and at junctions, terminals, and pull points. Identify by system and circuit designation. Use system of marker tape designations that is uniform and consistent with system used by manufacturer for factory-installed connections. Coordinate identification with Project Drawings, manufacturer's wiring diagrams, and the Operation and Maintenance Manual.
Locations of Underground Lines: Identify with underground-line warning tape for power, lighting, communication, and control wiring and optical fiber cable. 1. 2.
Limit use of underground-line warning tape to direct-buried cables. Install underground-line warning tape for both direct-buried cables and cables in raceway.
G.
Workspace Indication: Install floor marking tape to show working clearances in the direction of access to live parts. Workspace shall be as required by NFPA 70 and 29 CFR 1926.403 unless otherwise indicated. Do not install at flush-mounted panelboards and similar equipment in finished spaces.
H.
Warning Labels for Indoor Cabinets, Boxes, and Enclosures for Power and Lighting: Self-adhesive warning labels. 1. 2. 3. 4.
Comply with 29 CFR 1910.145. Identify system voltage with black letters on an orange background. Apply to exterior of door, cover, or other access. For equipment with multiple power or control sources, apply to door or cover of equipment including, but not limited to, the following: a. b.
I.
Power transfer switches. Controls with external control power connections.
Operating Instruction Signs: Install instruction signs to facilitate proper operation and maintenance of electrical systems and items to which they connect. Install instruction signs with approved legend where instructions are needed for system or equipment operation.
IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
260553 - 7
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS SECTION 260553
J.
Emergency Operating Instruction Signs: Install instruction signs with white legend on a red background with minimum 3/8-inch- high letters for emergency instructions at equipment used for power transfer, load shedding, and switching operations.
K.
Equipment Identification Labels: On each unit of equipment, install unique designation label that is consistent with wiring diagrams, schedules, and the Operation and Maintenance Manual. Apply labels to disconnect switches and protection equipment, central or master units, control panels, control stations, terminal cabinets, and racks of each system. Systems include power, lighting, control, communication, signal, monitoring, and alarm systems unless equipment is provided with its own identification. 1.
Labeling Instructions: a.
b. c. d.
2.
Indoor Equipment: Engraved, laminated acrylic or melamine label. Unless otherwise indicated, provide a single line of text with 1/2-inch- high letters on 1-1/2-inch- high label; where two lines of text are required, use labels 2 inches high. Outdoor Equipment: Engraved, laminated acrylic or melamine label. Elevated Components: Increase sizes of labels and letters to those appropriate for viewing from the floor. Unless provided with self-adhesive means of attachment, fasten labels with appropriate mechanical fasteners that do not change the NEMA or NRTL rating of the enclosure.
Equipment to Be Labeled: a.
Panelboards: Typewritten directory of circuits in the location provided by panelboard manufacturer. Panelboard identification shall be engraved, laminated acrylic or melamine label. b. Enclosures and electrical cabinets. c. Access doors and panels for concealed electrical items. d. Switchgear. e. Switchboards. f. Transformers: Label that includes tag designation shown on Drawings for the transformer, feeder, and panelboards or equipment supplied by the secondary. g. Substations. h. Emergency system boxes and enclosures. i. Motor-control centers. j. Enclosed switches. k. Enclosed circuit breakers. l. Enclosed controllers. m. Variable-speed controllers. n. Push-button stations. o. Power transfer equipment. p. Contactors. q. Remote-controlled switches, dimmer modules, and control devices. r. Battery-inverter units. s. Battery racks. t. Power-generating units.
IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
260553 - 8
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
u. v.
IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS SECTION 260553
Monitoring and control equipment. UPS equipment.
END OF SECTION 260553
IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
260553 - 9
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
SWITCHBOARDS SECTION 262413
SECTION 262413 - SWITCHBOARDS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 A.
1.2 A.
RELATED DOCUMENTS Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. SUMMARY Section Includes: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7.
1.3
Service and distribution switchboards rated 600 V and less. Transient voltage suppression devices. Disconnecting and overcurrent protective devices. Instrumentation. Control power. Accessory components and features. Identification.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of switchboard, overcurrent protective device, transient voltage suppression device, ground-fault protector, accessory, and component indicated. Include dimensions and manufacturers' technical data on features, performance, electrical characteristics, ratings, accessories, and finishes.
B.
Shop Drawings: For each switchboard and related equipment. 1.
2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7.
8.
Include dimensioned plans, elevations, sections, and details, including required clearances and service space around equipment. Show tabulations of installed devices, equipment features, and ratings. Detail enclosure types for types other than NEMA 250, Type 1. Detail bus configuration, current, and voltage ratings. Detail short-circuit current rating of switchboards and overcurrent protective devices. Include descriptive documentation of optional barriers specified for electrical insulation and isolation. Detail features, characteristics, ratings, and factory settings of individual overcurrent protective devices and auxiliary components. Include time-current coordination curves for each type and rating of overcurrent protective device included in switchboards. Submit on translucent log-log graft paper; include selectable ranges for each type of overcurrent protective device. Include schematic and wiring diagrams for power, signal, and control wiring.
SWITCHBOARDS
262413 - 1
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
C.
Field Quality-Control Reports: 1. 2. 3.
D.
Test procedures used. Test results that comply with requirements. Results of failed tests and corrective action taken to achieve test results that comply with requirements.
Operation and Maintenance Data: For switchboards and components to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. In addition to items specified in Division 01 Section "Operation and Maintenance Data," include the following: 1. 2. 3.
1.4
SWITCHBOARDS SECTION 262413
Routine maintenance requirements for switchboards and all installed components. Manufacturer's written instructions for testing and adjusting overcurrent protective devices. Time-current coordination curves for each type and rating of overcurrent protective device included in switchboards. Submit on translucent log-log graft paper; include selectable ranges for each type of overcurrent protective device.
QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Installer Qualifications: An employer of workers qualified as defined in NEMA PB 2.1 and trained in electrical safety as required by NFPA 70E.
B.
Testing Agency Qualifications: Member company of NETA or an NRTL. 1.
Testing Agency's Field Supervisor: Currently certified by NETA to supervise onsite testing.
C.
Source Limitations: Obtain switchboards, overcurrent protective devices, components, and accessories from single source from single manufacturer.
D.
Product Selection for Restricted Space: Drawings indicate maximum dimensions for switchboards including clearances between switchboards and adjacent surfaces and other items. Comply with indicated maximum dimensions.
E.
Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.
F.
Comply with NEMA PB 2.
G.
Comply with NFPA 70.
H.
Comply with UL 891.
1.5 A.
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING Deliver switchboards in sections or lengths that can be moved past obstructions in delivery path.
SWITCHBOARDS
262413 - 2
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
SWITCHBOARDS SECTION 262413
B.
Remove loose packing and flammable materials from inside switchboards and install temporary electric heating (250 W per section) to prevent condensation.
C.
Handle and prepare switchboards for installation according to NECA 400 and NEMA PB 2.1.
1.6
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
Installation Pathway: Remove and replace access fencing, doors, lift-out panels, and structures to provide pathway for moving switchboards into place.
B.
Environmental Limitations: 1.
2.
C.
Service Conditions: NEMA PB 2, usual service conditions, as follows: 1. 2.
D.
2. 3. 4.
A.
Ambient temperatures within limits specified. Altitude not exceeding 3300 feet.
Interruption of Existing Electric Service: Do not interrupt electric service to facilities occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide temporary electric service according to requirements indicated: 1.
1.7
Do not deliver or install switchboards until spaces are enclosed and weathertight, wet work in spaces is complete and dry, work above switchboards is complete, and temporary HVAC system is operating and maintaining ambient temperature and humidity conditions at occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period. Rate equipment for continuous operation under the following conditions unless otherwise indicated: a. Ambient Temperature: Not exceeding 104 deg F. b. Altitude: Not exceeding 3300 feet.
Notify Construction Manager and Owner no fewer than seven days in advance of proposed interruption of electric service. Indicate method of providing temporary electric service. Do not proceed with interruption of electric service without Construction Manager's and Owner's written permission. Comply with NFPA 70E.
COORDINATION Coordinate layout and installation of switchboards and components with other construction that penetrates walls or is supported by them, including electrical and other types of equipment, raceways, piping, encumbrances to workspace clearance requirements, and adjacent surfaces. Maintain required workspace clearances and required clearances for equipment access doors and panels.
SWITCHBOARDS
262413 - 3
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
B.
1.8
SWITCHBOARDS SECTION 262413
Coordinate sizes and locations of concrete bases with actual equipment provided. Cast anchor-bolt inserts into bases. Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified in Division 03. WARRANTY
C. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace transient voltage suppression devices that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion. 1.9 EXTRA MATERIALS A.
Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. 2. 3.
Potential Transformer Fuses: Equal to 10 percent of quantity installed for each size and type, but no fewer than two of each size and type. Control-Power Fuses: Equal to 10 percent of quantity installed for each size and type, but no fewer than two of each size and type. Indicating Lights: Equal to 10 percent of quantity installed for each size and type, but no fewer than one of each size and type.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 A.
MANUFACTURED UNITS Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. 2. 3.
B.
Eaton Electrical Inc.; Cutler-Hammer Business Unit. Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc. Square D; a brand of Schneider Electric.
Front-Connected, Front-Accessible Switchboards: 1. 2. 3.
Main Devices: Fixed, individually mounted. Branch Devices: Panel mounted. Sections front and rear aligned.
C.
Nominal System Voltage: 208Y/120 V.
D.
Main-Bus Continuous: 2000 A.
E.
Indoor Enclosures: Steel, NEMA 250, Type 12.
F.
Enclosure Finish for Indoor Units: Factory-applied finish in manufacturer's standard gray finish over a rust-inhibiting primer on treated metal surface.
SWITCHBOARDS
262413 - 4
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
SWITCHBOARDS SECTION 262413
G.
Barriers: Between adjacent switchboard sections.
H.
Insulation and isolation for main bus of main section and main and vertical buses of feeder sections.
I.
Customer Metering Compartment: A separate customer metering compartment and section with front hinged door, for indicated metering, and current transformers for each meter. Current transformer secondary wiring shall be terminated on shorting-type terminal blocks. Include potential transformers having primary and secondary fuses with disconnecting means and secondary wiring terminated on terminal blocks.
J.
Bus Transition and Incoming Pull Sections: switchboard.
K.
Hinged Front Panels: Allow access to circuit breaker, metering, accessory, and blank compartments.
L.
Pull Box on side of Switchboard: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.
M.
Matched and aligned with basic
Adequate ventilation to maintain temperature in pull box within same limits as switchboard. Set back from front to clear circuit-breaker removal mechanism. Removable covers shall form top, front, and sides. Top covers at rear shall be easily removable for drilling and cutting. Bottom shall be insulating, fire-resistive material with separate holes for cable drops into switchboard. Cable supports shall be arranged to facilitate cabling and adequate to support cables indicated, including those for future installation.
Buses and Connections: Three phase, four wire unless otherwise indicated. 1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Phase- and Neutral-Bus Material: Hard-drawn copper of 98 percent conductivity, silver-plated, with tin-plated aluminum or copper feeder circuit-breaker line connections. Load Terminals: Insulated, rigidly braced, runback bus extensions, of same material as through buses, equipped with mechanical connectors for outgoing circuit conductors. Provide load terminals for future circuit-breaker positions at fullampere rating of circuit-breaker position. Ground Bus: 1/4-by-2-inch-hard-drawn copper of 98 percent conductivity, equipped with mechanical connectors for feeder and branch-circuit ground conductors. For busway feeders, extend insulated equipment grounding cable to busway ground connection and support cable at intervals in vertical run. Main Phase Buses and Equipment Ground Buses: Uniform capacity for entire length of switchboard's main and distribution sections. Provide for future extensions from both ends. Neutral Buses: 100 percent of the ampacity of phase buses unless otherwise indicated, equipped with mechanical connectors for outgoing circuit neutral cables. Brace bus extensions for busway feeder neutral bus. Isolation Barrier Access Provisions: Permit checking of bus-bolt tightness.
SWITCHBOARDS
262413 - 5
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
SWITCHBOARDS SECTION 262413
N.
Future Devices: Equip compartments with mounting brackets, supports, bus connections, and appurtenances at full rating of circuit-breaker compartment.
O.
Bus-Bar Insulation: Factory-applied, flame-retardant, tape wrapping of individual bus bars or flame-retardant, spray-applied insulation. Minimum insulation temperature rating of 105 deg C.
2.2 A.
TRANSIENT VOLTAGE SUPPRESSION DEVICES Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. 2. 3.
B.
Eaton Electrical Inc.; Cutler-Hammer Business Unit. Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc. Square D; a brand of Schneider Electric.
Surge Protection Device Description: IEEE C62.41-compliant, integrally mounted, wired-in, solid-state, parallel-connected, modular (with field-replaceable modules) type, with sine-wave tracking suppression and filtering modules, UL 1449, second edition, short-circuit current rating matching or exceeding the switchboard short-circuit rating, and with the following features and accessories: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9.
Fuses, rated at 200-kA interrupting capacity. Fabrication using bolted compression lugs for internal wiring. Integral disconnect switch. Redundant suppression circuits. Redundant replaceable modules. Arrangement with wire connections to phase buses, neutral bus, and ground bus. LED indicator lights for power and protection status. Audible alarm, with silencing switch, to indicate when protection has failed. Form-C contacts rated at 5 A and 250-V ac, one normally open and one normally closed, for remote monitoring of system operation. Contacts shall reverse position on failure of any surge diversion module or on opening of any current-limiting device. Coordinate with building power monitoring and control system. 10. Four-digit, transient-event counter set to totalize transient surges. C.
Peak Single-Impulse Surge Current Rating: 160 kA per mode/320 kA per phase.
D.
Withstand Capabilities: 12,000 IEEE C62.41, Category C3 (10 kA), 8-by-20-mic.sec. surges with less than 5 percent change in clamping voltage.
E.
Protection modes and UL 1449 SVR for 208/120-V, three-phase, four-wire circuits shall be as follows: 1. 2. 3.
F.
Line to Neutral: 400 V, 800 V. Line to Ground: 400 V. Neutral to Ground: 400 V.
Protection modes and UL 1449 SVR for 240-, 480-, or 600-V, three-phase, three-wire, delta circuits shall be as follows:
SWITCHBOARDS
262413 - 6
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
1. 2.
SWITCHBOARDS SECTION 262413
Line to Line: 2000 V for 480 V. Line to Ground: 1500 V for 480 V.
2.3 DISCONNECTING AND OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICES A.
Molded-Case Circuit Breaker (MCCB): capacity to meet available fault currents. 1.
2. 3.
Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers: Inverse time-current element for low-level overloads, and instantaneous magnetic trip element for short circuits. Adjustable magnetic trip setting for circuit-breaker frame sizes 250 A and larger. Adjustable Instantaneous-Trip Circuit Breakers: Magnetic trip element with frontmounted, field-adjustable trip setting. Electronic trip circuit breakers with rms sensing; field-replaceable rating plug or field-replicable electronic trip; and the following field-adjustable settings: a. b. c. d.
4.
Instantaneous trip. Long- and short-time pickup levels. Long- and short-time time adjustments. Ground-fault pickup level, time delay, and I2t response.
Molded-Case Circuit-Breaker (MCCB) Features and Accessories: a. b. c. d.
B.
Comply with UL 489, with full interrupting
Standard frame sizes, trip ratings, and number of poles. Lugs: Mechanical style, suitable for number, size, trip ratings, and conductor material. Zone-Selective Interlocking: Integral with electronic trip unit; for interlocking ground-fault protection function. Shunt Trip: 120-V trip coil energized from separate circuit, set to trip at 75 percent of rated voltage.
Main and Branch Circuit Breaker 600A and Above, Insulated-Case Circuit Breaker (ICCB): 100 percent rated, sealed, insulated-case power circuit breaker with interrupting capacity rating to meet available fault current. 1. 2. 3.
Fixed circuit-breaker mounting. Two-step, stored-energy closing. Full-function, microprocessor-based trip units with interchangeable rating plug, trip indicators, and the following field-adjustable settings: a. b. c.
4. 5. 6.
Instantaneous trip. Long- and short-time time adjustments. Ground-fault pickup level, time delay, and I2t response.
Zone-Selective Interlocking: Integral with electronic trip unit; for interlocking ground-fault protection function. Remote trip indication and control. Communication Capability: Integral communication module with functions and features compatible with power monitoring and control system specified in Division 26 Section "Electrical Power Monitoring and Control."
SWITCHBOARDS
262413 - 7
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
2.4 A.
INSTRUMENTATION Instrument Transformers: IEEE C57.13, NEMA EI 21.1, and the following: 1.
2.
3. 4.
B.
Potential Transformers: IEEE C57.13; 120 V, 60 Hz, single secondary; disconnecting type with integral fuse mountings. Burden and accuracy shall be consistent with connected metering and relay devices. Current Transformers: IEEE C57.13; 5 A, 60 Hz, secondary; bar or window type; single secondary winding and secondary shorting device. Burden and accuracy shall be consistent with connected metering and relay devices. Control-Power Transformers: Dry type, mounted in separate compartments for units larger than 3 kVA. Current Transformers for Neutral and Ground-Fault Current Sensing: Connect secondary wiring to ground overcurrent relays, via shorting terminals, to provide selective tripping of main and tie circuit breaker. Coordinate with feeder circuitbreaker, ground-fault protection.
Multifunction Digital-Metering Monitor: Microprocessor-based unit suitable for three- or four-wire systems and with the following features: 1.
Switch-selectable digital display of the following values with maximum accuracy tolerances as indicated: a. b. c. d. e. f. g. h. i. j. k.
2.
2.5
SWITCHBOARDS SECTION 262413
Phase Currents, Each Phase: Plus or minus 1 percent. Phase-to-Phase Voltages, Three Phase: Plus or minus 1 percent. Phase-to-Neutral Voltages, Three Phase: Plus or minus 1 percent. Megawatts: Plus or minus 2 percent. Megavars: Plus or minus 2 percent. Power Factor: Plus or minus 2 percent. Frequency: Plus or minus 0.5 percent. Accumulated Energy, Megawatt Hours: Plus or minus 2 percent; accumulated values unaffected by power outages up to 72 hours. Megawatt Demand: Plus or minus 2 percent; demand interval programmable from five to 60 minutes. Contact devices to operate remote impulse-totalizing demand meter. Communications: Modbus RTU TCP/IP over Ethernet.
Mounting: Display and control unit flush or semiflush mounted in instrument compartment door.
CONTROL POWER
A.
Control Circuits: 120-V ac, supplied through secondary disconnecting devices from control-power transformer.
B.
Control-Power Fuses: Primary and secondary fuses for current-limiting and overload protection of transformer and fuses for protection of control circuits.
SWITCHBOARDS
262413 - 8
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
C.
2.6 A.
2.7 A.
SWITCHBOARDS SECTION 262413
Control Wiring: Factory installed, with bundling, lacing, and protection included. Provide flexible conductors for No. 8 AWG and smaller, for conductors across hinges, and for conductors for interconnections between shipping units. ACCESSORY COMPONENTS AND FEATURES Accessory Set: Include tools and miscellaneous items required for overcurrent protective device test, inspection, maintenance, and operation. IDENTIFICATION Service Equipment Label: NRTL labeled for use as service equipment for switchboards with one or more service disconnecting and overcurrent protective devices.
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Receive, inspect, handle, and store switchboards according to NECA 400 and NEMA PB 2.1.
B.
Examine switchboards before installation. damaged or physically damaged.
C.
Examine elements and surfaces to receive switchboards for compliance with installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.
D.
Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2
Reject switchboards that are moisture
INSTALLATION
A.
Install switchboards and accessories according to NECA 400 and NEMA PB 2.1.
B.
Equipment Mounting: Install switchboards on concrete base, 4-inch nominal thickness.
C.
Temporary Lifting Provisions: Remove temporary lifting eyes, channels, and brackets and temporary blocking of moving parts from switchboard units and components.
D.
Comply with mounting and anchoring requirements specified in Division 26 Section "Vibration and Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems."
E.
Operating Instructions: Frame and mount the printed basic operating instructions for switchboards, including control and key interlocking sequences and emergency procedures. Fabricate frame of finished wood or metal and cover instructions with clear acrylic plastic. Mount on front of switchboards.
SWITCHBOARDS
262413 - 9
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
SWITCHBOARDS SECTION 262413
F.
Install filler plates in unused spaces of panel-mounted sections.
G.
Install overcurrent protective devices, transient voltage suppression devices, and instrumentation. 1.
H. 3.3
Set field-adjustable switches and circuit-breaker trip ranges.
Comply with NECA 1. CONNECTIONS
A.
Comply with requirements for terminating feeder bus specified in Division 26 Section "Enclosed Bus Assemblies." Drawings indicate general arrangement of bus, fittings, and specialties.
B.
Comply with requirements for terminating cable trays specified in Division 26 Section "Cable Trays for Electrical Systems." Drawings indicate general arrangement of cable trays, fittings, and specialties.
3.4
IDENTIFICATION
A.
Identify field-installed conductors, interconnecting wiring, and components; provide warning signs complying with requirements for identification specified in Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical Systems."
B.
Switchboard Nameplates: Label each switchboard compartment with a nameplate complying with requirements for identification specified in Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical Systems."
C.
Device Nameplates: Label each disconnecting and overcurrent protective device and each meter and control device mounted in compartment doors with a nameplate complying with requirements for identification specified in Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical Systems."
3.5 A.
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL Perform tests and inspections. 1.
B.
Acceptance Testing Preparation: 1. 2.
C.
Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections, and to assist in testing.
Test insulation resistance for each switchboard bus, component, connecting supply, feeder, and control circuit. Test continuity of each circuit.
Tests and Inspections:
SWITCHBOARDS
262413 - 10
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
1. 2. 3.
Perform each visual and mechanical inspection and electrical test stated in NETA Acceptance Testing Specification. Certify compliance with test parameters. Correct malfunctioning units on-site, where possible, and retest to demonstrate compliance; otherwise, replace with new units and retest. Perform the following infrared scan tests and inspections and prepare reports: a.
b.
Initial Infrared Scanning: After Substantial Completion, but not more than 60 days after Final Acceptance, perform an infrared scan of each switchboard. Remove front panels so joints and connections are accessible to portable scanner. Instruments and Equipment: 1)
4.
SWITCHBOARDS SECTION 262413
Use an infrared scanning device designed to measure temperature or to detect significant deviations from normal values. Provide calibration record for device.
Test and adjust controls, remote monitoring, and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment.
D.
Switchboard will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.
E.
Prepare test and inspection reports, including a certified report that identifies switchboards included and that describes scanning results. Include notation of deficiencies detected, remedial action taken, and observations after remedial action.
3.6 ADJUSTING A.
Adjust moving parts and operable components to function smoothly, and lubricate as recommended by manufacturer.
B.
Set field-adjustable circuit-breaker trip ranges as specified in Division 26 Section “Short circuit Study, Overcurrent Device Coordination, and Arc Flash Analysis.
3.7 A.
3.8 A.
PROTECTION Temporary Heating: Apply temporary heat, to maintain temperature according to manufacturer's written instructions, until switchboard is ready to be energized and placed into service. DEMONSTRATION Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain switchboards, overcurrent protective devices, instrumentation, and accessories, and to use and reprogram microprocessorbased trip, monitoring, and communication units.
END OF SECTION 262413
SWITCHBOARDS
262413 - 11
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
PANELBOARDS SECTION 262416
SECTION 262416 - PANELBOARDS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 A.
RELATED DOCUMENTS Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY A.
Section Includes: 1. 2.
1.3
Distribution panelboards. Lighting and appliance branch-circuit panelboards.
DEFINITIONS
A.
SVR: Suppressed voltage rating.
B.
TVSS: Transient voltage surge suppressor.
1.4 SUBMITTALS A.
Product Data: For each type of panelboard, switching and overcurrent protective device, transient voltage suppression device, accessory, and component indicated. Include dimensions and manufacturers' technical data on features, performance, electrical characteristics, ratings, and finishes.
B.
Shop Drawings: For each panelboard and related equipment. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.
C.
Include dimensioned plans, elevations, sections, and details. Show tabulations of installed devices, equipment features, and ratings. Detail bus configuration, current, and voltage ratings. Short-circuit current rating of panelboards and overcurrent protective devices. Detail features, characteristics, ratings, and factory settings of individual overcurrent protective devices and auxiliary components. Include wiring diagrams for power, signal, and control wiring. Include time-current coordination curves for each type and rating of overcurrent protective device included in panelboards. Submit on translucent log-log graft paper; include selectable ranges for each type of overcurrent protective device.
Field Quality-Control Reports:
PANELBOARDS
262416 - 1
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
1. 2. 3.
PANELBOARDS SECTION 262416
Test procedures used. Test results that comply with requirements. Results of failed tests and corrective action taken to achieve test results that comply with requirements.
D.
Panelboard Schedules: load balancing.
E.
Operation and Maintenance Data: For panelboards and components to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. In addition to items specified in Division 01 Section "Operation and Maintenance Data," include the following: 1. 2.
1.5 A.
For installation in panelboards. Submit final versions after
Manufacturer's written instructions for testing and adjusting overcurrent protective devices. Time-current curves, including selectable ranges for each type of overcurrent protective device that allows adjustments.
QUALITY CONTROL Testing Agency Qualifications: Member company of NETA or an NRTL. 1.
Testing Agency's Field Supervisor: Currently certified by NETA to supervise onsite testing.
B.
Source Limitations: Obtain panelboards, overcurrent protective devices, components, and accessories from single source from single manufacturer.
C.
Product Selection for Restricted Space: Drawings indicate maximum dimensions for panelboards including clearances between panelboards and adjacent surfaces and other items. Comply with indicated maximum dimensions.
D.
Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.
E.
Comply with NEMA PB 1.
F.
Comply with NFPA 70.
1.6
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
Remove loose packing and flammable materials from inside panelboards; install temporary electric heating (250 W per panelboard) to prevent condensation.
B.
Handle and prepare panelboards for installation according to NECA 407 and NEMA PB 1.
PANELBOARDS
262416 - 2
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
1.7 A.
PROJECT CONDITIONS Service Conditions: NEMA PB 1, usual service conditions, as follows: 1. 2.
B.
Ambient temperatures within limits specified. Altitude not exceeding 6600 feet.
Interruption of Existing Electric Service: Do not interrupt electric service to facilities occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide temporary electric service according to requirements indicated: 1. 2. 3.
1.8
PANELBOARDS SECTION 262416
Notify Construction Manager and Owner no fewer than seven days in advance of proposed interruption of electric service. Do not proceed with interruption of electric service without Construction Manager's and Owner's written permission. Comply with NFPA 70E.
COORDINATION
A.
Coordinate layout and installation of panelboards and components with other construction that penetrates walls or is supported by them, including electrical and other types of equipment, raceways, piping, encumbrances to workspace clearance requirements, and adjacent surfaces. Maintain required workspace clearances and required clearances for equipment access doors and panels.
B.
Coordinate sizes and locations of concrete bases with actual equipment provided. Cast anchor-bolt inserts into bases. Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified in Division 03.
1.9 A.
WARRANTY Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace transient voltage suppression devices that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1.
Warranty Period: One year from date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 A.
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR PANELBOARDS Enclosures: Flush- and surface-mounted cabinets, as indicated. 1.
Rated for environmental conditions at installed location. a.
PANELBOARDS
Indoor Dry and Clean Locations: NEMA 250, Type 1.
262416 - 3
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
b. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.
7.
Indoor Locations Subject to Dust, Falling Dirt, and Dripping Noncorrosive Liquids: NEMA 250, Type 12.
Front: Secured to box with concealed trim clamps. For surface-mounted fronts, match box dimensions; for flush-mounted fronts, overlap box. Hinged Front Cover: Entire front trim hinged to box and with standard door within hinged trim cover. Skirt for Surface-Mounted Panelboards: Same gage and finish as panelboard front with flanges for attachment to panelboard, wall, and ceiling or floor. Gutter Extension and Barrier: Same gage and finish as panelboard enclosure; integral with enclosure body. Arrange to isolate individual panel sections. Finishes: a. Panels and Trim: Galvanized steel, factory finished immediately after cleaning and pretreating with manufacturer's standard two-coat, baked-on finish consisting of prime coat and thermosetting topcoat. b. Back Boxes: Galvanized steel. c. Fungus Proofing: Permanent fungicidal treatment for overcurrent protective devices and other components. Directory Card: Inside panelboard door, mounted in metal frame with transparent protective cover.
B.
Incoming Mains Location: Top or bottom, as required.
C.
Phase, Neutral, and Ground Buses: 1. 2. 3. 4.
D.
Material: Hard-drawn copper, 98 percent conductivity. Equipment Ground Bus: Adequate for feeder and branch-circuit equipment grounding conductors; bonded to box. Isolated Ground Bus: Adequate for branch-circuit isolated ground conductors; insulated from box. Neutral Bus: Neutral bus rated 100 percent of phase bus
Conductor Connectors: Suitable for use with conductor material and sizes. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7.
E.
PANELBOARDS SECTION 262416
Material: Hard-drawn copper, 98 percent conductivity. Main and Neutral Lugs: Mechanical type. Ground Lugs and Bus-Configured Terminators: Mechanical type. Feed-Through Lugs: Mechanical type, suitable for use with conductor material. Locate at opposite end of bus from incoming lugs or main device. Subfeed (Double) Lugs: Mechanical type suitable for use with conductor material. Locate at same end of bus as incoming lugs or main device. Gutter-Tap Lugs: Mechanical type suitable for use with conductor material. Locate at same end of bus as incoming lugs or main device. Extra-Capacity Neutral Lugs: Rated 200 percent of phase lugs mounted on extracapacity neutral bus.
Service Equipment Label: NRTL labeled for use as service equipment for panelboards or load centers with one or more main service disconnecting and overcurrent protective devices.
PANELBOARDS
262416 - 4
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
PANELBOARDS SECTION 262416
F.
Future Devices: Mounting brackets, bus connections, filler plates, and necessary appurtenances required for future installation of devices.
G.
Panelboard Short-Circuit Current Rating: Fully rated to interrupt symmetrical shortcircuit current available at terminals.
2.2 A.
DISTRIBUTION PANELBOARDS Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. 2.
Eaton Electrical Inc.; Cutler-Hammer Business Unit. Square D; a brand of Schneider Electric.
B.
Panelboards: NEMA PB 1, power and feeder distribution type.
C.
Doors: Secured with vault-type latch with tumbler lock; keyed alike. 1.
For doors more than 36 inches high, provide two latches, keyed alike.
D.
Mains: Circuit breaker.
E.
Branch Overcurrent Protective Devices for Circuit-Breaker Frame Sizes 125 A and Smaller: Bolt-on circuit breakers.
F.
Branch Overcurrent Protective Devices for Circuit-Breaker Frame Sizes Larger Than 125 A: Bolt-on circuit breakers; plug-in circuit breakers where individual positivelocking device requires mechanical release for removal.
G.
Branch Overcurrent Protective Devices: Fused switches.
2.3 A.
LIGHTING AND APPLIANCE BRANCH-CIRCUIT PANELBOARDS Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. 2.
Eaton Electrical Inc.; Cutler-Hammer Business Unit. Square D; a brand of Schneider Electric.
B.
Panelboards: NEMA PB 1, lighting and appliance branch-circuit type.
C.
Mains: Circuit breaker.
D.
Branch Overcurrent Protective Devices: Bolt-on circuit breakers, replaceable without disturbing adjacent units.
E.
Doors: Concealed hinges; secured with flush latch with tumbler lock; keyed alike.
F.
Column-Type Panelboards: Narrow gutter extension, with cover, to overhead junction box equipped with ground and neutral terminal buses.
PANELBOARDS
262416 - 5
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
2.4 G.
PANELBOARDS SECTION 262416
LOAD CENTERS Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. 2.
Eaton Electrical Inc.; Cutler-Hammer Business Unit. Square D; a brand of Schneider Electric.
H.
Load Centers: Comply with UL 67.
I.
Mains: Circuit breaker.
J.
Branch Overcurrent Protective Devices: Plug-in circuit breakers, replaceable without disturbing adjacent units.
K.
Conductor Connectors: Mechanical type for main, neutral, and ground lugs and buses.
2.5 DISCONNECTING AND OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICES A.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. 2.
B.
Eaton Electrical Inc.; Cutler-Hammer Business Unit. Square D; a brand of Schneider Electric.
Molded-Case Circuit Breaker (MCCB): capacity to meet available fault currents. 1.
2. 3. 4. 5. 6.
Comply with UL 489, with full interrupting
Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers: Inverse time-current element for low-level overloads, and instantaneous magnetic trip element for short circuits. Adjustable magnetic trip setting for circuit-breaker frame sizes 250 A and larger. Adjustable Instantaneous-Trip Circuit Breakers: Magnetic trip element with frontmounted, field-adjustable trip setting. GFCI Circuit Breakers: Single- and two-pole configurations with Class A groundfault protection (6-mA trip). Ground-Fault Equipment Protection (GFEP) Circuit Breakers: Class B groundfault protection (30-mA trip). Arc-Fault Circuit Interrupter (AFCI) Circuit Breakers: Comply with UL 1699; 120/240-V, single-pole configuration. Molded-Case Circuit-Breaker (MCCB) Features and Accessories: a. b. c.
d.
PANELBOARDS
Standard frame sizes, trip ratings, and number of poles. Lugs: Mechanical style, suitable for number, size, trip ratings, and conductor materials. Application Listing: Appropriate for application; Type SWD for switching fluorescent lighting loads; Type HID for feeding fluorescent and high-intensity discharge (HID) lighting circuits. Ground-Fault Protection where Indicated: Integrally mounted relay and trip unit with adjustable pickup and time-delay settings, push-to-test feature, and ground-fault indicator.
262416 - 6
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
e.
2.6 A.
PANELBOARDS SECTION 262416
Shunt Trip: 120-V trip coil energized from separate circuit, set to trip at 75 percent of rated voltage.
ACCESSORY COMPONENTS AND FEATURES Accessory Set: Include tools and miscellaneous items required for overcurrent protective device test, inspection, maintenance, and operation.
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Receive, inspect, handle, and store panelboards according to NECA 407 and NEMA PB 1.1.
B.
Examine panelboards before installation. Reject panelboards that are damaged or rusted or have been subjected to water saturation.
C.
Examine elements and surfaces to receive panelboards for compliance with installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.
D.
Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2
INSTALLATION
A.
Install panelboards and accessories according to NECA 407 and NEMA PB 1.1.
B.
Equipment Mounting: If freestanding, install panelboards on concrete bases, 4-inch nominal thickness.
C.
Temporary Lifting Provisions: Remove temporary lifting eyes, channels, and brackets and temporary blocking of moving parts from panelboards.
D.
Comply with mounting and anchoring requirements specified in Division 26 Section "Vibration and Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems."
E.
Mount top of trim 90 inches above finished floor unless otherwise indicated.
F.
Mount panelboard cabinet plumb and rigid without distortion of box. Mount recessed panelboards with fronts uniformly flush with wall finish and mating with back box.
G.
Install overcurrent protective devices and controllers not already factory installed. 1.
H.
Set field-adjustable, circuit-breaker trip ranges.
Install filler plates in unused spaces.
PANELBOARDS
262416 - 7
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
PANELBOARDS SECTION 262416
I.
Stub four 1-inch empty conduits from panelboard into accessible ceiling space or space designated to be ceiling space in the future. Stub four 1-inch empty conduits into raised floor space or below slab not on grade.
J.
Arrange conductors in gutters into groups and bundle and wrap with wire ties after completing load balancing.
K.
Comply with NECA 1.
3.3
IDENTIFICATION
A.
Identify field-installed conductors, interconnecting wiring, and components; provide warning signs complying with Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical Systems."
B.
Create a directory to indicate installed circuit loads after balancing panelboard loads; incorporate Owner's final room designations. Obtain approval before installing. Use a computer or typewriter to create directory; handwritten directories are not acceptable.
C.
Panelboard Nameplates: Label each panelboard with a nameplate complying with requirements for identification specified in Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical Systems."
D.
Device Nameplates: Label each branch circuit device in distribution panelboards with a nameplate complying with requirements for identification specified in Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical Systems."
3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A.
Perform tests and inspections.
B.
Acceptance Testing Preparation: 1. 2.
C.
Test insulation resistance for each panelboard bus, component, connecting supply, feeder, and control circuit. Test continuity of each circuit.
Tests and Inspections: 1. 2. 3.
Perform each visual and mechanical inspection and electrical test stated in NETA Acceptance Testing Specification. Certify compliance with test parameters. Correct malfunctioning units on-site, where possible, and retest to demonstrate compliance; otherwise, replace with new units and retest. Perform the following infrared scan tests and inspections and prepare reports: a.
b.
PANELBOARDS
Initial Infrared Scanning: After Substantial Completion, but not more than 60 days after Final Acceptance, perform an infrared scan of each panelboard. Remove front panels so joints and connections are accessible to portable scanner. Follow-up Infrared Scanning: Perform an additional follow-up infrared scan of each panelboard 11 months after date of Substantial Completion. 262416 - 8
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
c.
PANELBOARDS SECTION 262416
Instruments and Equipment: 1)
Use an infrared scanning device designed to measure temperature or to detect significant deviations from normal values. Provide calibration record for device.
D.
Panelboards will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections.
E.
Prepare test and inspection reports, including a certified report that identifies panelboards included and that describes scanning results. Include notation of deficiencies detected, remedial action taken, and observations after remedial action.
3.5
ADJUSTING
A.
Adjust moving parts and operable component to function smoothly, and lubricate as recommended by manufacturer.
B.
Set field-adjustable circuit-breaker trip ranges as specified in Division 26 Section “Short Circuit Study, Overcurrent Protective Device Coordination, and Arch Flash Analysis.”
C.
Load Balancing: After Substantial Completion, but not more than 60 days after Final Acceptance, measure load balancing and make circuit changes. 1. 2.
3. 4.
3.6 A.
Measure as directed during period of normal system loading. Perform load-balancing circuit changes outside normal occupancy/working schedule of the facility and at time directed. Avoid disrupting critical 24-hour services such as fax machines and on-line data processing, computing, transmitting, and receiving equipment. After circuit changes, recheck loads during normal load period. Record all load readings before and after changes and submit test records. Tolerance: Difference exceeding 20 percent between phase loads, within a panelboard, is not acceptable. Rebalance and recheck as necessary to meet this minimum requirement.
PROTECTION Temporary Heating: Apply temporary heat to maintain temperature according to manufacturer's written instructions.
END OF SECTION 26416
PANELBOARDS
262416 - 9
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
WIRING DEVICES SECTION 262726
SECTION 262726 – WIRING DEVICES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 A.
1.2 A.
RELATED DOCUMENTS Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. SUMMARY This Section includes the following: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.
1.3
Receptacles, receptacles with integral GFCI, and associated device plates Twist-locking receptacles In-wall occupancy and vacancy sensors In-wall electronic low-voltage dimmer Wall-switch. Floor service outlets, poke-through assemblies, service poles, and multi-outlet assemblies.
DEFINITIONS
A.
EMI: Electromagnetic interference.
B.
GFCI: Ground-fault circuit interrupter.
C.
Pigtail: Short lead used to connect a device to a branch-circuit conductor.
D.
RFI: Radio-frequency interference.
E.
TVSS: Transient voltage surge suppressor.
1.4
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B.
Shop Drawings: List of legends and description of materials and process used for premarking wall plates.
C.
Samples: One for each type of device and wall plate specified, in each color specified.
D.
Field quality-control test reports.
WIRING DEVICES
262726 - 1
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
E.
1.5
WIRING DEVICES SECTION 262726
Operation and Maintenance Data: For wiring devices to include in all manufacturers' packing label warnings and instruction manuals that include labeling conditions. QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Source Limitations: Obtain each type of wiring device and associated wall plate through one source from a single manufacturer. Insofar as they are available, obtain all wiring devices and associated wall plates from a single manufacturer and one source.
B.
Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use.
C.
Comply with NFPA 70.
1.6 A.
COORDINATION Receptacles for Owner-Furnished Equipment: Match plug configurations.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 A.
MANUFACTURERS Manufacturers' Names: Shortened versions (shown in parentheses) of the following manufacturers' names are used in other Part 2 articles: 1. 2. 3. 4.
2.2 A.
Cooper Wiring Devices; a division of Cooper Industries, Inc. (Cooper). Hubbell Incorporated; Wiring Device-Kellems (Hubbell). Leviton Mfg. Company Inc. (Leviton). Pass & Seymour/Legrand; Wiring Devices & Accessories (Pass & Seymour).
STRAIGHT BLADE RECEPTACLES Convenience Receptacles, 125 V, 20 A: configuration 5-20R, and UL 498. 1.
Comply with NEMA WD 1, NEMA WD 6
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. b. c. d.
WIRING DEVICES
Cooper; 5351 (single), 5352 (duplex). Hubbell; HBL5351 (single), CR5352 (duplex). Leviton; 5891 (single), 5352 (duplex). Pass & Seymour; 5381 (single), 5352 (duplex).
262726 - 2
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
2.3
WIRING DEVICES SECTION 262726
GFCI RECEPTACLES
A.
General Description: Straight blade, non-feed-through type. Comply with NEMA WD 1, NEMA WD 6, UL 498, and UL 943, Class A, and include indicator light that is lighted when device is tripped.
B.
Duplex GFCI Convenience Receptacles, 125 V, 20 A: 1.
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. b. c.
2.4
Cooper; GF20. Pass & Seymour; 2084. Hubbel.
WALL SWITCHES
A.
Comply with NEMA WD 1 and UL 20.
B.
Switches, 120/277 V, 20 A: 1.
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. b. c. d.
C.
Pilot Light Switches, 20 A: 1.
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. b. c. d.
2.
2.5
Cooper; 2221 (single pole), 2222 (two pole), 2223 (three way), 2224 (four way). Hubbell; CS1221 (single pole), CS1222 (two pole), CS1223 (three way), CS1224 (four way). Leviton; 1221-2 (single pole), 1222-2 (two pole), 1223-2 (three way), 1224-2 (four way). Pass & Seymour; 20AC1 (single pole), 20AC2 (two pole), 20AC3 (three way), 20AC4 (four way).
Cooper; 2221PL for 120 V and 277 V. Hubbell; HPL1221PL for 120 V and 277 V. Leviton; 1221-PLR for 120 V, 1221-7PLR for 277 V. Pass & Seymour; PS20AC1-PLR for 120 V.
Description: "ON."
Single pole, with neon-lighted handle, illuminated when switch is
LIGHTING CONTROLS
A.
Design Basis: Lutron
B.
Typical Classroom (9) EHDT832MU210
WIRING DEVICES
Dimming Ballast 1% for 2 T8 32W lamps.
262726 - 3
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
WIRING DEVICES SECTION 262726
(5) EC3DT4MWKU1
Dimming Ballast 5% for 1 CFL 32W lamp.
(1) RMJ‐ECO32‐DV‐B
PowPak Dimming Module for 1 room up to 32 dimming ballast.
(2) PJ‐3BRL‐GWH‐I01
Pico Wall Control.
(1) CW‐2‐WH
2‐gang wallplate.
(1) LRF2‐OCR2B‐P‐WH C.
D.
2.6 A.
Exam Room/Office/Misc (1) MS-OPS5M-WH
Maestro Switch with occupancy/vacancy sensor.
(1) CW-1-WH
1-gang wallplate.
Typical Bathroom (1) RMJ-5R-DV-B
PowPak Relay Module 5A.
(2) LRF2-OCR2B-P-WH
Ceiling Occupant/Vacancy Sensor.
WALL PLATES Single and combination types to match corresponding wiring devices. 1. 2. 3. 4.
B.
2.7
Ceiling Occupant/Vacancy Sensor.
Plate-Securing Screws: Metal with head color to match plate finish. Material for Finished Spaces: Steel with 0.035-inch- thick, satin-finished stainless steel. Material for Unfinished Spaces: Galvanized steel. Material for Damp Locations: Cast aluminum with spring-loaded lift cover, and listed and labeled for use in "wet locations."
Wet-Location, Weatherproof Cover Plates: NEMA 250, complying with type 3R weather-resistant, die-cast aluminum with lockable cover. FLOOR SERVICE FITTINGS
A.
Type: Modular, flush-type, dual-service units suitable for wiring method used.
B.
Compartments: Barrier separates power from voice and data communication cabling.
C.
Service Plate: Rectangular, die-cast aluminum with satin finish.
D.
Power Receptacle: indicated.
E.
Voice and Data Communication Outlet: Category 5e jacks for UTP cable.
WIRING DEVICES
NEMA WD 6 configuration 5-20R, gray finish, unless otherwise Two modular, keyed, color-coded, RJ-45
262726 - 4
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
2.8 A.
POKE-THROUGH ASSEMBLIES Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.
B.
Hubbell Incorporated; Wiring Device-Kellems. Pass & Seymour/Legrand; Wiring Devices & Accessories. Square D/ Schneider Electric. Thomas & Betts Corporation. Wiremold Company.
Description: Factory-fabricated and -wired assembly of below-floor junction box with multichanneled, through-floor raceway/firestop unit and detachable matching floor service outlet assembly. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.
2.9
WIRING DEVICES SECTION 262726
Service Outlet Assembly: Flush type with two simplex receptacles and space for two RJ-45 jacks. Size: Selected to fit nominal 4-inch cored holes in floor and matched to floor thickness. Fire Rating: Unit is listed and labeled for fire rating of floor-ceiling assembly. Closure Plug: Arranged to close unused 4-inch cored openings and reestablish fire rating of floor. Wiring Raceways and Compartments: For a minimum of four No. 12 AWG conductors and a minimum of two, 4-pair, Category 5e voice and data communication cables.
MULTIOUTLET ASSEMBLIES
A.
Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
B.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. 2.
Hubbell Incorporated; Wiring Device-Kellems. Wiremold Company.
C.
Components of Assemblies: Products from a single manufacturer designed for use as a complete, matching assembly of raceways and receptacles.
D.
Raceway Material: Metal, with manufacturer's standard finish.
E.
Wire: No. 12 AWG.
2.10 A.
FINISHES Color: Wiring device catalog numbers in Section Text do not designate device color.
WIRING DEVICES
262726 - 5
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
1. 2. 3. 4.
WIRING DEVICES SECTION 262726
Wiring Devices Connected to Normal Power System: As selected by Architect, unless otherwise indicated or required by NFPA 70 or device listing. Wiring Devices Connected to Emergency Power System: Red. TVSS Devices: Blue. Isolated-Ground Receptacles: As specified above, with orange triangle on face.
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1
INSTALLATION
A.
Comply with NECA 1, including the mounting heights listed in that standard, unless otherwise noted.
B.
Coordination with Other Trades: 1.
2.
3. 4. C.
Take steps to insure that devices and their boxes are protected. Do not place wall finish materials over device boxes and do not cut holes for boxes with routers that are guided by riding against outside of the boxes. Keep outlet boxes free of plaster, drywall joint compound, mortar, cement, concrete, dust, paint, and other material that may contaminate the raceway system, conductors, and cables. Install device boxes in brick or block walls so that the cover plate does not cross a joint unless the joint is troweled flush with the face of the wall. Install wiring devices after all wall preparation, including painting, is complete.
Conductors: 1. 2. 3. 4.
Do not strip insulation from conductors until just before they are spliced or terminated on devices. Strip insulation evenly around the conductor using tools designed for the purpose. Avoid scoring or nicking of solid wire or cutting strands from stranded wire. The length of free conductors at outlets for devices shall meet provisions of NFPA 70, Article 300, without pigtails. Existing Conductors: a. b. c.
D.
Cut back and pigtail, or replace all damaged conductors. Straighten conductors that remain and remove corrosion and foreign matter. Pigtailing existing conductors is permitted provided the outlet box is large enough.
Device Installation: 1.
2. 3.
Replace all devices that have been in temporary use during construction or that show signs that they were installed before building finishing operations were complete. Keep each wiring device in its package or otherwise protected until it is time to connect conductors. Do not remove surface protection, such as plastic film and smudge covers, until the last possible moment.
WIRING DEVICES
262726 - 6
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. E.
WIRING DEVICES SECTION 262726
Connect devices to branch circuits using pigtails that are not less than 6 inches in length. When there is a choice, use side wiring with binding-head screw terminals. Wrap solid conductor tightly clockwise, 2/3 to 3/4 of the way around terminal screw. Use a torque screwdriver when a torque is recommended or required by the manufacturer. When conductors larger than No. 12 AWG are installed on 15- or 20-A circuits, splice No. 12 AWG pigtails for device connections. Tighten unused terminal screws on the device. When mounting into metal boxes, remove the fiber or plastic washers used to hold device mounting screws in yokes, allowing metal-to-metal contact.
Receptacle Orientation: 1.
Install ground pin of vertically mounted receptacles down, and on horizontally mounted receptacles to the right.
F.
Device Plates: Do not use oversized or extra-deep plates. Repair wall finishes and remount outlet boxes when standard device plates do not fit flush or do not cover rough wall opening.
G.
Dimmers: 1. 2. 3.
Install dimmers within terms of their listing. Verify that dimmers used for fan speed control are listed for that application. Install unshared neutral conductors on line and load side of dimmers according to manufacturers' device listing conditions in the written instructions.
H.
Arrangement of Devices: Unless otherwise indicated, mount flush, with long dimension vertical and with grounding terminal of receptacles on top. Group adjacent switches under single, multigang wall plates.
I.
Adjust locations of floor service outlets and service poles to suit arrangement of partitions and furnishings.
3.2 A.
IDENTIFICATION Comply with Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical Systems." 1.
3.3 A.
Receptacles and device plates (switch plates, dimmer plates, etc.): identify panelboard and circuit number from which served. Use self adhesive machine printed white labels with 1/4" black lettering on face of plate.
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL Perform tests and inspections and prepare test reports. 1.
In healthcare facilities, prepare reports that comply with recommendations in NFPA 99.
WIRING DEVICES
262726 - 7
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
2. 3. B.
Test Instruments: Use instruments that comply with UL 1436. Test Instrument for Convenience Receptacles: Digital wiring analyzer with digital readout or illuminated LED indicators of measurement.
Tests for Convenience Receptacles: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.
C.
WIRING DEVICES SECTION 262726
Line Voltage: Acceptable range is 105 to 132 V. Percent Voltage Drop under 15-A Load: A value of 6 percent or higher is not acceptable. Ground Impedance: Values of up to 2 ohms are acceptable. GFCI Trip: Test for tripping values specified in UL 1436 and UL 943. Using the test plug, verify that the device and its outlet box are securely mounted. The tests shall be diagnostic, indicating damaged conductors, high resistance at the circuit breaker, poor connections, inadequate fault current path, defective devices, or similar problems. Correct circuit conditions, remove malfunctioning units and replace with new ones, and retest as specified above.
Test straight blade for the retention force of the grounding blade according to NFPA 99. Retention force shall be not less than 4 oz.
END OF SECTION 262726
WIRING DEVICES
262726 - 8
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS SECTION 262816
SECTION 262816 – ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 A.
1.2 A.
RELATED DOCUMENTS Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. SUMMARY Section Includes: 1. 2. 3.
1.3
Nonfusible switches. Molded-case circuit breakers (MCCBs). Enclosures.
DEFINITIONS
A.
NC: Normally closed.
B.
NO: Normally open.
C.
SPDT: Single pole, double throw.
1.4 A.
SUBMITTALS Product Data: For each type of enclosed switch, circuit breaker, accessory, and component indicated. Include dimensioned elevations, sections, weights, and manufacturers' technical data on features, performance, electrical characteristics, ratings, accessories, and finishes. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.
B.
Enclosure types and details for types other than NEMA 250, Type 1. Current and voltage ratings. Short-circuit current ratings (interrupting and withstand, as appropriate). Detail features, characteristics, ratings, and factory settings of individual overcurrent protective devices, accessories, and auxiliary components. Include time-current coordination curves (average melt) for each type and rating of overcurrent protective device; include selectable ranges for each type of overcurrent protective device. Submit on translucent log-log graph paper.
Shop Drawings: For enclosed switches and circuit breakers. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work.
ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS
262816 - 1
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
1.
ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS SECTION 262816
Wiring Diagrams: For power, signal, and control wiring.
C.
Qualification Data: For qualified testing agency.
D.
Operation and Maintenance Data: For enclosed switches and circuit breakers to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. In addition to items specified in Division 01 Section "Operation and Maintenance Data," include the following: 1. 2.
1.5 A.
Manufacturer's written instructions for testing and adjusting enclosed switches and circuit breakers. Time-current coordination curves for each type and rating of overcurrent protective device; include selectable ranges for each type of overcurrent protective device. Submit on translucent log-log graph paper.
QUALITY CONTROL Testing Agency Qualifications: Member company of NETA or an NRTL. 1.
Testing Agency's Field Supervisor: Currently certified by NETA to supervise onsite testing.
B.
Source Limitations: Obtain enclosed switches and circuit breakers, overcurrent protective devices, components, and accessories, within same product category, from single source from single manufacturer.
C.
Product Selection for Restricted Space: Drawings indicate maximum dimensions for enclosed switches and circuit breakers, including clearances between enclosures, and adjacent surfaces and other items. Comply with indicated maximum dimensions.
D.
Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.
E.
Comply with NFPA 70.
1.6 A.
PROJECT CONDITIONS Environmental Limitations: Rate equipment for continuous operation under the following conditions unless otherwise indicated: 1. 2.
Ambient Temperature: Not less than minus 22 deg F and not exceeding 104 deg F. Altitude: Not exceeding 6600 feet.
ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS
262816 - 2
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
1.7 A.
ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS SECTION 262816
COORDINATION Coordinate layout and installation of switches, circuit breakers, and components with equipment served and adjacent surfaces. Maintain required workspace clearances and required clearances for equipment access doors and panels.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 A.
NONFUSIBLE SWITCHES Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. 2. 3.
Eaton Electrical Inc.; Cutler-Hammer Business Unit. Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc. Square D; a brand of Schneider Electric.
B.
Type HD, Heavy Duty, Single Throw, 600-V ac, 1200 A and Smaller: UL 98 and NEMA KS 1, horsepower rated, lockable handle with capability to accept three padlocks, and interlocked with cover in closed position.
C.
Accessories: 1. 2. 3.
2.2 A.
Equipment Ground Kit: Internally mounted and labeled for copper and aluminum ground conductors. Neutral Kit as Required: Internally mounted; insulated, capable of being grounded and bonded; labeled for copper and aluminum neutral conductors. Lugs: Mechanical type, suitable for number, size, and conductor material.
MOLDED-CASE CIRCUIT BREAKERS Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. 2. 3.
Eaton Electrical Inc.; Cutler-Hammer Business Unit. Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc. Square D; a brand of Schneider Electric.
B.
General Requirements: Comply with UL 489, NEMA AB 1, and NEMA AB 3, with interrupting capacity to comply with available fault currents.
C.
Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers: Inverse time-current element for low-level overloads and instantaneous magnetic trip element for short circuits. Adjustable magnetic trip setting for circuit-breaker frame sizes 250 A and larger.
D.
Adjustable, Instantaneous-Trip Circuit Breakers: mounted, field-adjustable trip setting.
E.
Features and Accessories:
ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS
Magnetic trip element with front-
262816 - 3
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
1. 2. 3. 4. 2.3 A.
ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS SECTION 262816
Standard frame sizes, trip ratings, and number of poles. Lugs: Mechanical type, suitable for number, size, trip ratings, and conductor material. Shunt Trip: Trip coil energized from separate circuit, with coil-clearing contact. Accessory Control Power Voltage: Remote mounted and powered; 120-V ac.
ENCLOSURES Enclosed Switches and Circuit Breakers: NEMA AB 1, NEMA KS 1, NEMA 250, and UL 50, to comply with environmental conditions at installed location. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.
Indoor, Dry and Clean Locations: NEMA 250, Type 1. Outdoor Locations: NEMA 250, Type 4X stainless steel. Kitchen and Wash-Down Areas: NEMA 250, Type 4X, stainless steel. Other Wet or Damp, Indoor Locations: NEMA 250, Type 4X stainless steel. Indoor Locations Subject to Dust, Falling Dirt, and Dripping Noncorrosive Liquids: NEMA 250, Type 12.
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Examine elements and surfaces to receive enclosed switches and circuit breakers for compliance with installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.
B.
Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2
INSTALLATION
A.
Install individual wall-mounted switches and circuit breakers with tops at uniform height unless otherwise indicated.
B.
Comply with mounting and anchoring requirements specified in Division 26 Section "Vibration and Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems."
C.
Temporary Lifting Provisions: Remove temporary lifting eyes, channels, and brackets and temporary blocking of moving parts from enclosures and components.
D.
Install fuses in fusible devices.
E.
Comply with NECA 1.
3.3 A.
IDENTIFICATION Comply with requirements in Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical Systems."
ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS
262816 - 4
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
1. 2. 3.4 A.
Perform tests and inspections. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections, and to assist in testing.
Acceptance Testing Preparation: 1. 2.
C.
Identify field-installed conductors, interconnecting wiring, and components; provide warning signs. Label each enclosure with engraved metal or laminated-plastic nameplate.
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
1.
B.
ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS SECTION 262816
Test insulation resistance for each enclosed switch and circuit breaker, component, connecting supply, feeder, and control circuit. Test continuity of each circuit.
Tests and Inspections: 1. 2. 3.
Perform each visual and mechanical inspection and electrical test stated in NETA Acceptance Testing Specification. Certify compliance with test parameters. Correct malfunctioning units on-site, where possible, and retest to demonstrate compliance; otherwise, replace with new units and retest. Perform the following infrared scan tests and inspections and prepare reports: a.
b.
4.
Initial Infrared Scanning: After Substantial Completion, but not more than 60 days after Final Acceptance, perform an infrared scan of each enclosed switch and circuit breaker. Remove front panels so joints and connections are accessible to portable scanner. Instruments and Equipment: Use an infrared scanning device designed to measure temperature or to detect significant deviations from normal values. Provide calibration record for device.
Test and adjust controls, remote monitoring, and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment.
D.
Enclosed switches and circuit breakers will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections.
E.
Prepare test and inspection reports, including a certified report that identifies enclosed switches and circuit breakers and that describes scanning results. Include notation of deficiencies detected, remedial action taken, and observations after remedial action.
3.5
ADJUSTING
A.
Adjust moving parts and operable components to function smoothly, and lubricate as recommended by manufacturer.
B.
Set field-adjustable circuit-breaker trip ranges.
ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS
262816 - 5
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS SECTION 262816
END OF SECTION 262816
ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS
262816 - 6
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
ENCLOSED CONTROLLERS SECTION 262913
SECTION 262913 – ENCLOSED CONTROLLERS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 A.
1.2 A.
RELATED DOCUMENTS Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. SUMMARY Section includes the following enclosed controllers rated 600 V and less: 1. 2.
1.3
Full-voltage manual. Full-voltage magnetic.
DEFINITIONS
A.
CPT: Control power transformer.
B.
MCCB: Molded-case circuit breaker.
C.
MCP: Motor circuit protector.
D.
N.C.: Normally closed.
E.
N.O.: Normally open.
F.
OCPD: Overcurrent protective device.
1.4
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of enclosed controller. Include manufacturer's technical data on features, performance, electrical characteristics, ratings, and enclosure types and finishes.
B.
Shop Drawings: For each enclosed controller. Include dimensioned plans, elevations, sections, details, and required clearances and service spaces around controller enclosures. 1.
Show tabulations of the following: a. b.
Each installed unit's type and details. Factory-installed devices.
ENCLOSED CONTROLLERS
262913 - 1
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
c. d. e.
f. 2.
ENCLOSED CONTROLLERS SECTION 262913
Nameplate legends. Short-circuit current rating of integrated unit. Listed and labeled for integrated short-circuit current (withstand) rating of OCPDs in combination controllers by an NRTL acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Features, characteristics, ratings, and factory settings of individual OCPDs in combination controllers.
Wiring Diagrams: For power, signal, and control wiring.
C.
Qualification Data: For qualified testing agency.
D.
Operation and Maintenance Data: For enclosed controllers to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. In addition to items specified in Division 01 Section "Operation and Maintenance Data," include the following: 1. 2.
E.
1.5 A.
Routine maintenance requirements for enclosed controllers and installed components. Manufacturer's written instructions for testing and adjusting circuit breaker and MCP trip settings.
Load-Current and Overload-Relay Heater List: Compile after motors have been installed, and arrange to demonstrate that selection of heaters suits actual motor nameplate full-load currents. QUALITY CONTROL Testing Agency Qualifications: Member company of NETA or an NRTL. 1.
Testing Agency's Field Supervisor: Currently certified by NETA to supervise onsite testing.
B.
Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.
C.
Comply with NFPA 70.
D.
IEEE Compliance: Fabricate and test enclosed controllers according to IEEE 344 to withstand seismic forces defined in Division 26 Section "Vibration and Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems."
1.6 A.
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING Store enclosed controllers indoors in clean, dry space with uniform temperature to prevent condensation. Protect enclosed controllers from exposure to dirt, fumes, water, corrosive substances, and physical damage.
ENCLOSED CONTROLLERS
262913 - 2
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
1.7 A.
PROJECT CONDITIONS Interruption of Existing Electrical Systems: Do not interrupt electrical systems in facilities occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide temporary electrical service according to requirements indicated: 1. 2. 3. 4.
1.8
ENCLOSED CONTROLLERS SECTION 262913
Notify Construction Manager and Owner no fewer than seven days in advance of proposed interruption of electrical systems. Indicate method of providing temporary utilities. Do not proceed with interruption of electrical systems without Construction Manager's and Owner's written permission. Comply with NFPA 70E.
COORDINATION
A.
Coordinate layout and installation of enclosed controllers with other construction including conduit, piping, equipment, and adjacent surfaces. Maintain required workspace clearances and required clearances for equipment access doors and panels.
B.
Coordinate sizes and locations of concrete bases with actual equipment provided. Cast anchor-bolt inserts into bases. Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified in Division 03.
C.
Coordinate installation of roof curbs, equipment supports, and roof penetrations.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1
FULL-VOLTAGE CONTROLLERS
A.
General Requirements for Full-Voltage Controllers: Comply with NEMA ICS 2, general purpose, Class A.
B.
Motor-Starting Switches: "Quick-make, quick-break" toggle or push-button action; marked to show whether unit is off or on. 1.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. b. c. d.
2. 3. 4.
Eaton Electrical Inc.; Cutler-Hammer Business Unit. Rockwell Automation, Inc.; Allen-Bradley brand. Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc. Square D; a brand of Schneider Electric.
Configuration: Nonreversing. Flush mounting. Red pilot light.
ENCLOSED CONTROLLERS
262913 - 3
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
C.
Fractional Horsepower Manual Controllers: "Quick-make, quick-break" toggle or pushbutton action; marked to show whether unit is off, on, or tripped. 1.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. b. c. d.
2. 3.
4. 5. D.
Eaton Electrical Inc.; Cutler-Hammer Business Unit. Rockwell Automation, Inc.; Allen-Bradley brand. Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc. Square D; a brand of Schneider Electric.
Configuration: Nonreversing. Overload Relays: Inverse-time-current characteristics; NEMA ICS 2, Class 20 tripping characteristics; heaters matched to nameplate full-load current of actual protected motor; external reset push button; bimetallic type. Surface mounting. Red pilot light.
Magnetic Controllers: Full voltage, across the line, electrically held. 1.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. b. c. d.
2. 3.
4.
5.
6.
E.
ENCLOSED CONTROLLERS SECTION 262913
Eaton Electrical Inc.; Cutler-Hammer Business Unit. Rockwell Automation, Inc.; Allen-Bradley brand. Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc. Square D; a brand of Schneider Electric.
Configuration: Nonreversing. Contactor Coils: Pressure-encapsulated type with coil transient suppressors. a. Operating Voltage: Depending on contactor NEMA size and line-voltage rating, manufacturer's standard matching control power or line voltage. Power Contacts: Totally enclosed, double-break, silver-cadmium oxide; assembled to allow inspection and replacement without disturbing line or load wiring. Control Circuits: 120-V ac; obtained from integral CPT, with primary and secondary fuses, with CPT of sufficient capacity to operate integral devices and remotely located pilot, indicating, and control devices. a. CPT Spare Capacity: 100 VA. Bimetallic Overload Relays: a. Inverse-time-current characteristic. b. Class 20 tripping characteristic. c. Heaters in each phase matched to nameplate full-load current of actual protected motor and with appropriate adjustment for duty cycle. d. Ambient compensated. e. With external reset push button.
Combination Magnetic Controller: Factory-assembled combination of magnetic controller, OCPD, and disconnecting means.
ENCLOSED CONTROLLERS
262913 - 4
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
1.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. b. c. d.
2.
b. c.
A.
A.
NEMA KS 1, heavy-duty, horsepower-rated, fusible switch with clips or bolt pads to accommodate Class R fuses. Lockable Handle: Accepts three padlocks and interlocks with cover in closed position. Auxiliary Contacts: N.O./N.C., arranged to activate before switch blades open.
ENCLOSURES Enclosed Controllers: installed location. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.
2.3
Eaton Electrical Inc.; Cutler-Hammer Business Unit. Rockwell Automation, Inc.; Allen-Bradley brand. Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc. Square D; a brand of Schneider Electric.
Fusible Disconnecting Means: a.
2.2
ENCLOSED CONTROLLERS SECTION 262913
NEMA ICS 6, to comply with environmental conditions at
Dry and Clean Indoor Locations: Type 1. Outdoor Locations: Type 4X. Kitchen and Wash-Down Areas: Type 4X, stainless steel. Other Wet or Damp Indoor Locations: Type 4X stainless steel. Indoor Locations Subject to Dust, Falling Dirt, and Dripping Noncorrosive Liquids: Type 12.
ACCESSORIES General Requirements for Control Circuit and Pilot Devices: NEMA ICS 5; factory installed in controller enclosure cover unless otherwise indicated. 1.
2. 3.
Push Buttons, Pilot Lights, and Selector Switches: Standard-duty, oiltight type. a. Push Buttons: Shielded types; maintained or momentary as indicated. b. Pilot Lights: LED types; colors as indicated. c. Selector Switches: Rotary type. Elapsed Time Meters: Heavy duty with digital readout in hours; nonresettable. Meters: Panel type, 2-1/2-inch minimum size with 90- or 120-degree scale and plus or minus two percent accuracy. Where indicated, provide selector switches with an off position.
B.
Reversible N.C./N.O. auxiliary contact(s).
C.
Control Relays: Auxiliary and adjustable pneumatic or solid-state time-delay relays.
ENCLOSED CONTROLLERS
262913 - 5
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
ENCLOSED CONTROLLERS SECTION 262913
D.
Phase-Failure, Phase-Reversal, and Undervoltage and Overvoltage Relays: Solidstate sensing circuit with isolated output contacts for hard-wired connections. Provide adjustable undervoltage, overvoltage, and time-delay settings.
E.
Breather and drain assemblies, to maintain interior pressure and release condensation in Type 4X enclosures installed outdoors or in unconditioned interior spaces subject to humidity and temperature swings.
F.
Space heaters, with N.C. auxiliary contacts, to mitigate condensation in Type 4X enclosures installed outdoors.
G.
Sun shields installed on fronts, sides, and tops of enclosures installed outdoors and subject to direct and extended sun exposure.
H.
Cover gaskets for Type 1 enclosures.
I.
Spare control wiring terminal blocks, quantity as indicated; unwired.
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A.
Examine areas and surfaces to receive enclosed controllers, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.
B.
Examine enclosed controllers before installation. Reject enclosed controllers that are wet, moisture damaged, or mold damaged.
C.
Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2
INSTALLATION
A.
Wall-Mounted Controllers: Install enclosed controllers on walls with tops at uniform height unless otherwise indicated, and by bolting units to wall or mounting on lightweight structural-steel channels bolted to wall. For controllers not at walls, provide freestanding racks complying with Division 26 Section "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems."
B.
Floor-Mounted Controllers: Install enclosed controllers on 4-inch nominal-thickness concrete base. Comply with requirements for concrete base specified in Division 03 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete." 1.
2. 3.
Install dowel rods to connect concrete base to concrete floor. Unless otherwise indicated, install dowel rods on 18-inch centers around the full perimeter of concrete base. For supported equipment, install epoxy-coated anchor bolts that extend through concrete base and anchor into structural concrete floor. Place and secure anchorage devices. Use setting drawings, templates, diagrams, instructions, and directions furnished with items to be embedded.
ENCLOSED CONTROLLERS
262913 - 6
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
4.
ENCLOSED CONTROLLERS SECTION 262913
Install anchor bolts to elevations required for proper attachment to supported equipment.
C.
Temporary Lifting Provisions: Remove temporary lifting eyes, channels, and brackets and temporary blocking of moving parts from enclosures and components.
D.
Install fuses in each fusible-switch enclosed controller.
E.
Install fuses in control circuits if not factory installed. Comply with requirements in Division 26 Section "Fuses."
F.
Install heaters in thermal overload relays. Select heaters based on actual nameplate full-load amperes after motors have been installed.
G.
Install, connect, and fuse thermal-protector monitoring relays furnished with motordriven equipment.
H.
Comply with NECA 1.
3.3 A.
IDENTIFICATION Identify enclosed controllers, components, and control wiring. Comply with requirements for identification specified in Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical Systems." 1. 2. 3.
Identify field-installed conductors, interconnecting wiring, and components; provide warning signs. Label each enclosure with engraved nameplate. Label each enclosure-mounted control and pilot device.
3.4 CONTROL WIRING INSTALLATION A.
Bundle, train, and support wiring in enclosures.
B.
Connect selector switches and other automatic-control selection devices where applicable. 1. 2.
3.5 A.
Connect selector switches to bypass only those manual- and automatic-control devices that have no safety functions when switch is in manual-control position. Connect selector switches with enclosed-controller circuit in both manual and automatic positions for safety-type control devices such as low- and high-pressure cutouts, high-temperature cutouts, and motor overload protectors.
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL Perform tests and inspections.
ENCLOSED CONTROLLERS
262913 - 7
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
1.
B.
Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections, and to assist in testing.
Acceptance Testing Preparation: 1. 2.
C.
ENCLOSED CONTROLLERS SECTION 262913
Test insulation resistance for each enclosed controller, component, connecting supply, feeder, and control circuit. Test continuity of each circuit.
Tests and Inspections: 1. 2. 3. 4.
5. 6. 7. 8.
Inspect controllers, wiring, components, connections, and equipment installation. Test and adjust controllers, components, and equipment. Test insulation resistance for each enclosed-controller element, component, connecting motor supply, feeder, and control circuits. Test continuity of each circuit. Verify that voltages at controller locations are within plus or minus 10 percent of motor nameplate rated voltages. If outside this range for any motor, notify Construction Manager and Owner before starting the motor(s). Test each motor for proper phase rotation. Perform each electrical test and visual and mechanical inspection stated in NETA Acceptance Testing Specification. Certify compliance with test parameters. Correct malfunctioning units on-site, where possible, and retest to demonstrate compliance; otherwise, replace with new units and retest. Perform the following infrared (thermographic) scan tests and inspections and prepare reports: a.
b.
9.
Initial Infrared Scanning: After Substantial Completion, but not more than 60 days after Final Acceptance, perform an infrared scan of each multi-pole enclosed controller. Remove front panels so joints and connections are accessible to portable scanner. Instruments and Equipment: Use an infrared scanning device designed to measure temperature or to detect significant deviations from normal values. Provide calibration record for device.
Test and adjust controls, remote monitoring, and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment.
D.
Enclosed controllers will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections.
E.
Prepare test and inspection reports including a certified report that identifies enclosed controllers and that describes scanning results. Include notation of deficiencies detected, remedial action taken, and observations after remedial action.
3.6 A.
ADJUSTING Set field-adjustable switches, auxiliary relays, time-delay relays, timers, and overloadrelay pickup and trip ranges.
ENCLOSED CONTROLLERS
262913 - 8
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
ENCLOSED CONTROLLERS SECTION 262913
B.
Adjust overload-relay heaters or settings if power factor correction capacitors are connected to the load side of the overload relays.
C.
Adjust the trip settings and thermal-magnetic circuit breakers with adjustable instantaneous trip elements. Initially adjust to six times the motor nameplate full-load ampere ratings and attempt to start motors several times, allowing for motor cooldown between starts. If tripping occurs on motor inrush, adjust settings in increments until motors start without tripping. Do not exceed eight times the motor full-load amperes (or 11 times for NEMA Premium Efficient motors if required). Where these maximum settings do not allow starting of a motor, notify Construction Manager and Owner before increasing settings.
D.
Set field-adjustable switches and program microprocessors for required start and stop sequences in reduced-voltage solid-state controllers.
3.7 PROTECTION A.
Temporary Heating: Apply temporary heat to maintain temperature according to manufacturer's written instructions until enclosed controllers are ready to be energized and placed into service.
B.
Replace controllers whose interiors have been exposed to water or other liquids prior to Substantial Completion.
3.8 A.
DEMONSTRATION Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain enclosed controllers, and to use and reprogram microprocessor-based, reduced-voltage solid-state controllers.
END OF SECTION 262913
ENCLOSED CONTROLLERS
262913 - 9
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
VARIABLE-FREQUENCY MOTOR CONTROLLERS SECTION 262923
SECTION 262923 - VARIABLE-FREQUENCY MOTOR CONTROLLERS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 A.
1.2 A.
1.3
RELATED DOCUMENTS Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. SUMMARY Section includes separately enclosed, preassembled, combination VFCs, rated 600 V and less, for speed control of three-phase, squirrel-cage induction motors. DEFINITIONS
A.
BAS: Building automation system.
B.
CE: Conformite Europeene (European Compliance).
C.
CPT: Control power transformer.
D.
EMI: Electromagnetic interference.
E.
LED: Light-emitting diode.
F.
NC: Normally closed.
G.
NO: Normally open.
H.
OCPD: Overcurrent protective device.
I.
PID: Control action, proportional plus integral plus derivative.
J.
RFI: Radio-frequency interference.
K.
VFC: Variable-frequency motor controller.
1.4 A.
ACTION SUBMITTALS Product Data: For each type and rating of VFC indicated. 1. 2.
Include dimensions and finishes for VFCs. Include rated capacities, operating characteristics, electrical characteristics, and furnished specialties and accessories.
VARIABLE-FREQUENCY MOTOR CONTROLLERS
262923 - 1
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
B.
Shop Drawings: For each VFC indicated. 1. 2.
3. 1.5
VARIABLE-FREQUENCY MOTOR CONTROLLERS SECTION 262923
Include mounting and attachment details. Include details of equipment assemblies. Indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field connection. Include diagrams for power, signal, and control wiring.
INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A.
Qualification Data: For testing agency.
B.
Product Certificates: For each VFC from manufacturer.
C.
Harmonic Analysis Report: Provide Project-specific calculations and manufacturer's statement of compliance with IEEE 519.
D.
Source quality-control reports.
E.
Field quality-control reports.
F.
Sample Warranty: For special warranty.
1.6 A.
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS Operation and Maintenance Data: For VFCs to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. 1.
In addition to items specified in Section 01 "Operation and Maintenance Data," include the following: a. b. c. d. e.
f.
Manufacturer's written instructions for testing and adjusting thermalmagnetic circuit breaker and motor-circuit protector trip settings. Manufacturer's written instructions for setting field-adjustable overload relays. Manufacturer's written instructions for testing, adjusting, and reprogramming microprocessor control modules. Manufacturer's written instructions for setting field-adjustable timers, controls, and status and alarm points. Load-Current and Overload-Relay Heater List: Compile after motors have been installed, and arrange to demonstrate that selection of heaters suits actual motor nameplate, full-load currents. Load-Current and List of Settings of Adjustable Overload Relays: Compile after motors have been installed, and arrange to demonstrate that switch settings for motor-running overload protection suit actual motors to be protected.
VARIABLE-FREQUENCY MOTOR CONTROLLERS
262923 - 2
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
1.7 A.
QUALITY ASSURANCE Testing Agency Qualifications: Member company of NETA or an NRTL. 1.
1.8
VARIABLE-FREQUENCY MOTOR CONTROLLERS SECTION 262923
Testing Agency's Field Supervisor: Currently certified by NETA to supervise onsite testing.
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
If stored in space that is not permanently enclosed and air conditioned, remove loose packing and flammable materials from inside controllers and install temporary electric heating, with at least 250 W per controller.
B.
Product Selection for Restricted Space: Drawings indicate maximum dimensions for VFCs, including clearances between VFCs, and adjacent surfaces and other items.
1.9 A.
WARRANTY Special Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace VFCs that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1.
Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 A.
MANUFACTURERS Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.
2.2 A.
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION General Requirements for VFCs: 1. 2.
B.
Eaton Electrical Sector; Eaton Corporation; Cutler-Hammer Business Unit. Rockwell Automation, Inc; Allen-Bradley Brand. Schneider Electric USA, Inc.; Square D Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc. Yaskawa Electric America, Inc.
VFCs and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. Comply with NEMA ICS 7, NEMA ICS 61800-2, and UL 508C.
Application: Constant torque and variable torque.
VARIABLE-FREQUENCY MOTOR CONTROLLERS
262923 - 3
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
C.
VARIABLE-FREQUENCY MOTOR CONTROLLERS SECTION 262923
VFC Description: Variable-frequency motor controller, consisting of power converter that employs pulse-width-modulated inverter, factory built and tested in an enclosure, with integral disconnecting means and overcurrent and overload protection; listed and labeled by an NRTL as a complete unit; arranged to provide self-protection, protection, and variable-speed control of one or more three-phase induction motors by adjusting output voltage and frequency. 1.
2. 3.
Units suitable for operation of NEMA MG 1, Design A and Design B motors, as defined by NEMA MG 1, Section IV, Part 30, "Application Considerations for Constant Speed Motors Used on a Sinusoidal Bus with Harmonic Content and General Purpose Motors Used with Adjustable-Voltage or Adjustable-Frequency Controls or Both." Units suitable for operation of inverter-duty motors as defined by NEMA MG 1, Section IV, Part 31, "Definite-Purpose Inverter-Fed Polyphase Motors." Listed and labeled for integrated short-circuit current (withstand) rating by an NRTL acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
D.
Design and Rating: Match load type, such as fans, blowers, and pumps; and type of connection used between motor and load such as direct or through a powertransmission connection.
E.
Output Rating: Three phase; 6 to 60 Hz, with voltage proportional to frequency throughout voltage range and 66 Hz, with torque constant as speed changes; maximum voltage equals input voltage.
F.
Unit Operating Requirements: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. 15.
Input AC Voltage Tolerance: Plus 10 and minus 15 percent of VFC input voltage rating. Input AC Voltage Unbalance: Not exceeding 5 percent. Input Frequency Tolerance: Plus or minus 3 percent of VFC frequency rating. Minimum Efficiency: 97 percent at 60 Hz, full load. Minimum Displacement Primary-Side Power Factor: 98 percent under any load or speed condition. Minimum Short-Circuit Current (Withstand) Rating: 65 kA. Ambient Temperature Rating: Not less than 14 deg F and not exceeding 104 deg F. Humidity Rating: Less than 95 percent (noncondensing). Altitude Rating: Not exceeding 3300 feet. Vibration Withstand: Comply with NEMA ICS 61800-2. Overload Capability: 1.1 times the base load current for 60 seconds; minimum of 1.8 times the base load current for three seconds. Starting Torque: Minimum 100 percent of rated torque from 3 to 60 Hz. Speed Regulation: Plus or minus 5 percent. Output Carrier Frequency: Selectable; 0.5 to 15 kHz. Stop Modes: Programmable; includes fast, free-wheel, and dc injection braking.
G.
Inverter Logic: Microprocessor based, 32 bit, isolated from all power circuits.
H.
Isolated Control Interface: minimum 40:1 speed range.
Allows VFCs to follow remote-control signal over a
VARIABLE-FREQUENCY MOTOR CONTROLLERS
262923 - 4
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
1. I.
Signal: Electrical.
Internal Adjustability Capabilities: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.
J.
VARIABLE-FREQUENCY MOTOR CONTROLLERS SECTION 262923
Minimum Speed: 5 to 25 percent of maximum rpm. Maximum Speed: 80 to 100 percent of maximum rpm. Acceleration: 0.1 to 999.9 seconds. Deceleration: 0.1 to 999.9 seconds. Current Limit: 30 to minimum of 150 percent of maximum rating.
Self-Protection and Reliability Features: 1. 2.
3.
4. 5. 6.
7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12.
Surge Suppression: Factory installed as an integral part of the VFC, complying with UL 1449 SPD, Type 1 or Type 2. Surge Suppression: Field-mounted surge suppressors complying with Section 264313 "Surge Protection for Low-Voltage Electrical Power Circuits," UL 1449 SPD, Type 2. Loss of Input Signal Protection: Selectable response strategy, including speed default to a percent of the most recent speed, a preset speed, or stop; with alarm. Under- and overvoltage trips. Inverter overcurrent trips. VFC and Motor-Overload/Overtemperature Protection: Microprocessor-based thermal protection system for monitoring VFCs and motor thermal characteristics, and for providing VFC overtemperature and motor-overload alarm and trip; settings selectable via the keypad. Critical frequency rejection, with three selectable, adjustable deadbands. Instantaneous line-to-line and line-to-ground overcurrent trips. Loss-of-phase protection. Reverse-phase protection. Short-circuit protection. Motor-overtemperature fault.
K.
Automatic Reset/Restart: Attempt three restarts after drive fault or on return of power after an interruption and before shutting down for manual reset or fault correction; adjustable delay time between restart attempts.
L.
Power-Interruption Protection: To prevent motor from re-energizing after a power interruption until motor has stopped, unless "Bidirectional Autospeed Search" feature is available and engaged.
M.
Bidirectional Autospeed Search: Capable of starting VFC into rotating loads spinning in either direction and returning motor to set speed in proper direction, without causing damage to drive, motor, or load.
N.
Torque Boost: Automatically varies starting and continuous torque to at least 1.5 times the minimum torque to ensure high-starting torque and increased torque at slow speeds.
VARIABLE-FREQUENCY MOTOR CONTROLLERS
262923 - 5
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
VARIABLE-FREQUENCY MOTOR CONTROLLERS SECTION 262923
O.
Motor Temperature Compensation at Slow Speeds: Adjustable current fall-back based on output frequency for temperature protection of self-cooled, fan-ventilated motors at slow speeds.
P.
Integral Input Disconnecting Means and OCPD: NEMA AB1thermal-magnetic circuit breaker and current-limiting fuses with pad-lockable, door-mounted handle mechanism. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.
2.3 A.
CONTROLS AND INDICATION Status Lights: Door-mounted LED indicators displaying the following conditions: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.
B.
Disconnect Rating: Not less than 115 percent of VFC input current rating. Disconnect Rating: Not less than 115 percent of NFPA 70 motor full-load current rating or VFC input current rating, whichever is larger. Auxiliary Contacts: NO or NC, arranged to activate before switch blades open. Auxiliary contacts "a" and "b" arranged to activate with circuit-breaker handle. NC and NO alarm contact that operates only when circuit breaker has tripped.
Power on. Run. Overvoltage. Line fault. Overcurrent. External fault.
Panel-Mounted Operator Station: Manufacturer's standard front-accessible, sealed keypad and plain-English-language digital display; allows complete programming, program copying, operating, monitoring, and diagnostic capability. 1. 2.
Keypad: In addition to required programming and control keys, include keys for HAND, OFF, and AUTO modes. Security Access: Provide electronic security access to controls through identification and password with at least three levels of access: View only; view and operate; and view, operate, and service. a.
C.
Historical Logging Information and Displays: 1. 2. 3. 4.
D.
Control Authority: Supports at least four conditions: Off, local manual control at VFC, local automatic control at VFC, and automatic control through a remote source.
Real-time clock with current time and date. Running log of total power versus time. Total run time. Fault log, maintaining last four faults with time and date stamp for each.
Indicating Devices: Digital display mounted flush in VFC door and connected to display VFC parameters including, but not limited to: 1.
Output frequency (Hz).
VARIABLE-FREQUENCY MOTOR CONTROLLERS
262923 - 6
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. E.
Motor speed (rpm). Motor status (running, stop, fault). Motor current (amperes). Motor torque (percent). Fault or alarming status (code). PID feedback signal (percent). DC-link voltage (V dc). Set point frequency (Hz). Motor output voltage (V ac).
Control Signal Interfaces: 1.
Electric Input Signal Interface: a. b.
2. 3.
4.
0- to 10-V dc. 4- to 20-mA dc. Potentiometer using up/down digital inputs. Fixed frequencies using digital inputs.
Output Signal Interface: A minimum of two programmable analog output signal(s) (0- to 10-V dc and 4- to 20-mA dc) , which can be configured for any of the following: a. b. c. d. e. f.
5.
A minimum of two programmable analog inputs: 0- to 10-V dc and 4- to 20-mA dc. A minimum of six multifunction programmable digital inputs.
Pneumatic Input Signal Interface: 3 to 15 psig. Remote Signal Inputs: Capability to accept any of the following speed-setting input signals from the BAS or other control systems: a. b. c. d.
Output frequency (Hz). Output current (load). DC-link voltage (V dc). Motor torque (percent). Motor speed (rpm). Set point frequency (Hz).
Remote Indication Interface: A minimum of two programmable dry-circuit relay outputs (120-V ac, 1 A) for remote indication of the following: a. b. c. d.
F.
VARIABLE-FREQUENCY MOTOR CONTROLLERS SECTION 262923
Motor running. Set point speed reached. Fault and warning indication (overtemperature or overcurrent). PID high- or low-speed limits reached.
PID Control Interface: Provides closed-loop set point, differential feedback control in response to dual feedback signals. Allows for closed-loop control of fans and pumps for pressure, flow, or temperature regulation. 1.
Number of Loops: Two.
VARIABLE-FREQUENCY MOTOR CONTROLLERS
262923 - 7
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
G.
BAS Interface: Factory-installed hardware and software shall interface with BAS to monitor, control, display, and record data for use in processing reports. VFC settings shall be retained within VFC's nonvolatile memory. 1.
Hardwired Points: a. b.
2.
2.4 A.
2.5
VARIABLE-FREQUENCY MOTOR CONTROLLERS SECTION 262923
Monitoring: On-off status. Control: On-off operation.
Communication Interface: Comply with ASHRAE 135. Communication shall interface with BAS to remotely control and monitor lighting from a BAS operator workstation. Control features and monitoring points displayed locally at lighting panel shall be available through the BAS.
LINE CONDITIONING AND FILTERING Input Line Conditioning: Based on the manufacturer's harmonic analysis study and report, provide input filtering, as required, to limit total demand (harmonic current) distortion and total harmonic voltage demand at the defined point of common coupling to meet IEEE 519 recommendations. BYPASS SYSTEMS
A.
Bypass Operation: Safely transfers motor between power converter output and bypass circuit, manually, automatically, or both. Selector switches set modes and indicator lights indicate mode selected. Unit is capable of stable operation (starting, stopping, and running) with motor completely disconnected from power converter.
B.
Bypass Mode: Manual operation only; requires local operator selection at VFC. Transfer between power converter and bypass contactor, and retransfer shall only be allowed with the motor at zero speed.
C.
Bypass Mode: Field-selectable automatic or manual, allows local and remote transfer between power converter and bypass contactor and retransfer, either via manual operator interface or automatic-control system feedback.
D.
Bypass Controller: Two-contactor-style bypass allows motor operation via the power converter or the bypass controller; with input isolating switch and barrier arranged to isolate the power converter and permit safe troubleshooting and testing, both energized and de-energized, while motor is operating in bypass mode. 1. 2. 3.
E.
Bypass Contactor: Load-break, NEMA-rated contactor. Output Isolating Contactor: Non-load-break, NEMA-rated contactor. Isolating Switch: Non-load-break switch arranged to isolate power converter and permit safe troubleshooting and testing of the power converter, both energized and de-energized, while motor is operating in bypass mode; pad-lockable, doormounted handle mechanism.
Bypass Contactor Configuration: Full-voltage (across-the-line) type.
VARIABLE-FREQUENCY MOTOR CONTROLLERS
262923 - 8
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
1. 2. 3. 4.
NORMAL/BYPASS selector switch. HAND/OFF/AUTO selector switch. NORMAL/TEST Selector Switch: Allows testing and adjusting of VFC while the motor is running in the bypass mode. Contactor Coils: Pressure-encapsulated type with coil transient suppressors. a. b.
5.
A. 2.7 A.
2.8 A.
Damper control circuit with end-of-travel feedback capability. ENCLOSURES VFC Enclosures: location.
NEMA 250, to comply with environmental conditions at installed
Dry and Clean Indoor Locations: Type 1. Outdoor Locations: Type 4X. Other Wet or Damp Indoor Locations: Type 4X. Indoor Locations Subject to Dust, Falling Dirt, and Dripping Noncorrosive Liquids: Type 12.
Plenum Rating: UL 1995; NRTL certification label on enclosure, clearly identifying VFC as "Plenum Rated." ACCESSORIES General Requirements for Control-Circuit and Pilot Devices: installed in VFC enclosure cover unless otherwise indicated. 1. 2. 3. 4.
B.
CPT Spare Capacity: 100 VA.
OPTIONAL FEATURES
1. 2. 3. 4. B.
Operating Voltage: Depending on contactor NEMA size and line-voltage rating, manufacturer's standard matching control power or line voltage. Power Contacts: Totally enclosed, double break, and silver-cadmium oxide; assembled to allow inspection and replacement without disturbing line or load wiring.
Control Circuits: 120-V ac; obtained from integral CPT, with primary and secondary fuses, with CPT control power source of sufficient capacity to operate all integral devices and remotely located pilot, indicating, and control devices. a.
2.6
VARIABLE-FREQUENCY MOTOR CONTROLLERS SECTION 262923
NEMA ICS 5; factory
Push Buttons: Shielded. Pilot Lights: Push to test. Selector Switches: Rotary type. Stop and Lockout Push-Button Station: Momentary-break, push-button station with a factory-applied hasp arranged so padlock can be used to lock push button in depressed position with control circuit open.
Reversible NC/NO bypass contactor auxiliary contact(s).
VARIABLE-FREQUENCY MOTOR CONTROLLERS
262923 - 9
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
VARIABLE-FREQUENCY MOTOR CONTROLLERS SECTION 262923
C.
Control Relays: Auxiliary and adjustable solid-state time-delay relays.
D.
Phase-Failure, Phase-Reversal, and Undervoltage and Overvoltage Relays: Solidstate sensing circuit with isolated output contacts for hard-wired connections. Provide adjustable undervoltage, overvoltage, and time-delay settings. 1.
Current Transformers: Continuous current rating, basic impulse insulating level (BIL) rating, burden, and accuracy class suitable for connected circuitry. Comply with IEEE C57.13.
E.
Breather and drain assemblies, to maintain interior pressure and release condensation in NEMA 250, Type 4X enclosures installed outdoors or in unconditioned interior spaces subject to humidity and temperature swings.
F.
Cooling Fan and Exhaust System: For NEMA 250, Type 1; UL 508 component recognized: Supply fan, with composite intake and exhaust grills and filters; 120 -V ac; obtained from integral CPT.
G.
Sun shields installed on fronts, sides, and tops of enclosures installed outdoors and subject to direct and extended sun exposure.
H.
Spare control-wiring terminal blocks; wired.
2.9 A.
SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL Testing: Test and inspect VFCs according to requirements in NEMA ICS 61800-2. 1. 2.
Test each VFC while connected to a motor that is comparable to that for which the VFC is rated. Verification of Performance: Rate VFCs according to operation of functions and features specified.
B.
VFCs will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections.
C.
Prepare test and inspection reports.
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Examine areas, surfaces, and substrates to receive VFCs, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.
B.
Examine VFC before installation. Reject VFCs that are wet, moisture damaged, or mold damaged.
C.
Examine roughing-in for conduit systems to verify actual locations of conduit connections before VFC installation.
VARIABLE-FREQUENCY MOTOR CONTROLLERS
262923 - 10
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
VARIABLE-FREQUENCY MOTOR CONTROLLERS SECTION 262923
D.
Prepare written report, endorsed by Installer, listing conditions detrimental to performance of the Work
E.
Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2
INSTALLATION
A.
Wall-Mounting Controllers: Install with tops at uniform height and with disconnect operating handles not higher than 79 inches above finished floor, unless otherwise indicated, and by bolting units to wall or mounting on lightweight structural-steel channels bolted to wall. For controllers not on walls, provide freestanding racks complying with Section 260529 "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems."
B.
Floor-Mounting Controllers: Install VFCs on 4-inch nominal thickness concrete base. Comply with requirements for concrete base specified in Section 03"Cast-in-Place Concrete." 1.
2. 3. 4. C.
Install dowel rods to connect concrete base to concrete floor. Unless otherwise indicated, install dowel rods on 18-inch centers around the full perimeter of concrete base. For supported equipment, install epoxy-coated anchor bolts that extend through concrete base and anchor into structural concrete floor. Place and secure anchorage devices. Use setting drawings, templates, diagrams, instructions, and directions furnished with items to be embedded. Install anchor bolts to elevations required for proper attachment to supported equipment.
Roof-Mounting Controllers: Install VFC on roofs with tops at uniform height and with disconnect operating handles not higher than 79 inches above finished roof surface unless otherwise indicated, and by bolting units to curbs or mounting on freestanding, lightweight, structural-steel channels bolted to curbs. Seal roof penetrations after raceways are installed. 1. 2.
Curbs and roof penetrations are specified in Section 077200 "Roof Accessories." Structural-steel channels are specified in Section 260529 "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems."
D.
Temporary Lifting Provisions: Remove temporary lifting eyes, channels, and brackets and temporary blocking of moving parts from enclosures and components.
E.
Install fuses in each fusible-switch VFC.
F.
Install fuses in control circuits if not factory installed. Comply with requirements in Section 262813 "Fuses."
G.
Install heaters in thermal-overload relays. Select heaters based on actual nameplate full-load amperes after motors are installed.
H.
Install, connect, and fuse thermal-protector monitoring relays furnished with motordriven equipment.
VARIABLE-FREQUENCY MOTOR CONTROLLERS
262923 - 11
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
I. 3.3
VARIABLE-FREQUENCY MOTOR CONTROLLERS SECTION 262923
Comply with NECA 1. CONTROL WIRING INSTALLATION
A.
Install wiring between VFCs and remote devices and facility's central-control system. Comply with requirements in Section 260523 "Control-Voltage Electrical Power Cables."
B.
Bundle, train, and support wiring in enclosures.
C.
Connect selector switches and other automatic-control devices where applicable. 1.
2.
3.4 A.
IDENTIFICATION Identify VFCs, components, and control wiring. Comply with requirements for identification specified in Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems." 1. 2. 3.
B.
3.5
Connect selector switches to bypass only those manual- and automatic-control devices that have no safety functions when switches are in manual-control position. Connect selector switches with control circuit in both manual and automatic positions for safety-type control devices such as low- and high-pressure cutouts, high-temperature cutouts, and motor-overload protectors.
Identify field-installed conductors, interconnecting wiring, and components; provide warning signs. Label each VFC with engraved nameplate. Label each enclosure-mounted control and pilot device.
Operating Instructions: Frame printed operating instructions for VFCs, including control sequences and emergency procedures. Fabricate frame of finished metal, and cover instructions with clear acrylic plastic. Mount on front of VFC units. FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections.
B.
Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to test and inspect components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections.
C.
Perform tests and inspections with the assistance of a factory-authorized service representative.
D.
Acceptance Testing Preparation: 1. 2.
Test insulation resistance for each VFC element, bus, component, connecting supply, feeder, and control circuit. Test continuity of each circuit.
VARIABLE-FREQUENCY MOTOR CONTROLLERS
262923 - 12
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
E.
VARIABLE-FREQUENCY MOTOR CONTROLLERS SECTION 262923
Tests and Inspections: 1. 2. 3. 4.
5. 6.
7. 8.
Inspect VFC, wiring, components, connections, and equipment installation. Test and adjust controllers, components, and equipment. Test insulation resistance for each VFC element, component, connecting motor supply, feeder, and control circuits. Test continuity of each circuit. Verify that voltages at VFC locations are within 10 percent of motor nameplate rated voltages. If outside this range for any motor, notify Owner before starting the motor(s). Test each motor for proper phase rotation. Perform tests according to the Inspection and Test Procedures for Adjustable Speed Drives stated in NETA Acceptance Testing Specification. Certify compliance with test parameters. Correct malfunctioning units on-site, where possible, and retest to demonstrate compliance; otherwise, replace with new units and retest. Perform the following infrared (thermographic) scan tests and inspections, and prepare reports: a.
b. c.
9.
Initial Infrared Scanning: After Substantial Completion, but not more than 60 days after Final Acceptance, perform an infrared scan of each VFC. Remove front panels so joints and connections are accessible to portable scanner. Follow-up Infrared Scanning: Perform an additional follow-up infrared scan of each VFC 11 months after date of Substantial Completion. Instruments and Equipment: Use an infrared scanning device designed to measure temperature or to detect significant deviations from normal values. Provide calibration record for device.
Test and adjust controls, remote monitoring, and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment.
F.
VFCs will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections.
G.
Prepare test and inspection reports, including a certified report that identifies the VFC and describes scanning results. Include notation of deficiencies detected, remedial action taken, and observations made after remedial action.
3.6 A.
STARTUP SERVICE Perform startup service. 1.
Complete installation and startup checks according to manufacturer's written instructions.
VARIABLE-FREQUENCY MOTOR CONTROLLERS
262923 - 13
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
3.7
VARIABLE-FREQUENCY MOTOR CONTROLLERS SECTION 262923
ADJUSTING
A.
Program microprocessors for required operational sequences, status indications, alarms, event recording, and display features. Clear events memory after final acceptance testing and prior to Substantial Completion.
B.
Set field-adjustable switches, auxiliary relays, time-delay relays, timers, and overloadrelay pickup and trip ranges.
C.
Adjust the trip settings of instantaneous-only circuit breakers and thermal-magnetic circuit breakers with adjustable, instantaneous trip elements. Initially adjust to 6 times the motor nameplate full-load amperes and attempt to start motors several times, allowing for motor cool-down between starts. If tripping occurs on motor inrush, adjust settings in increments until motors start without tripping. Do not exceed 8 times the motor full-load amperes (or 11 times for NEMA Premium Efficient motors if required). Where these maximum settings do not allow starting of a motor, notify Owner before increasing settings.
D.
Set the taps on reduced-voltage autotransformer controllers.
E.
Set field-adjustable pressure switches.
3.8
PROTECTION
A.
Temporary Heating: Apply temporary heat to maintain temperature according to manufacturer's written instructions until controllers are ready to be energized and placed into service.
B.
Replace VFCs whose interiors have been exposed to water or other liquids prior to Substantial Completion.
3.9 A.
DEMONSTRATION Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train. personnel to adjust, operate, reprogram, and maintain VFCs.
Owner's maintenance
END OF SECTION 262923
VARIABLE-FREQUENCY MOTOR CONTROLLERS
262923 - 14
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
INTERIOR LIGHTING SECTION 265100
SECTION 265100 – INTERIOR LIGHTING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 A.
1.2 A.
RELATED DOCUMENTS Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. SUMMARY Section Includes: 1. 2. 3.
B.
Related Sections: 1.
1.3
Interior lighting fixtures, lamps, and ballasts. Exit signs. Lighting fixture supports.
Division 26 Section "Wiring Devices" for manual wall-box dimmers and in-wall occupancy sensors.
DEFINITIONS
A.
BF: Ballast factor.
B.
CCT: Correlated color temperature.
C.
CRI: Color-rendering index.
D.
HID: High-intensity discharge.
E.
LER: Luminaire efficacy rating.
F.
Lumen: Measured output of lamp and luminaire, or both.
G.
Luminaire: Complete lighting fixture, including ballast housing if provided.
1.4 A.
SUBMITTALS Product Data: For each type of lighting fixture, arranged in order of fixture designation. Include data on features, accessories, finishes, and the following: 1.
Physical description of lighting fixture including dimensions.
INTERIOR LIGHTING
265100 - 1
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
2. 3. 4. 5.
Ballast, including BF and input wattage. Energy-efficiency data. Life, output (lumens, CCT, and CRI), and energy-efficiency data for lamps. Photometric data and adjustment factors based on laboratory tests, complying with IESNA Lighting Measurements Testing & Calculation Guides, of each lighting fixture type. The adjustment factors shall be for lamps, ballasts, and accessories identical to those indicated for the lighting fixture as applied in this Project. a.
b.
B.
INTERIOR LIGHTING SECTION 265100
Testing Agency Certified Data: For indicated fixtures, photometric data shall be certified by a qualified independent testing agency. Photometric data for remaining fixtures shall be certified by manufacturer. Manufacturer Certified Data: Photometric data shall be certified by a manufacturer's laboratory with a current accreditation under the National Voluntary Laboratory Accreditation Program for Energy Efficient Lighting Products.
Shop Drawings: For nonstandard or custom lighting fixtures. elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work. 1.
2.
Include plans,
Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field connection. Wiring Diagrams: For power, signal, and control wiring.
C.
Installation instructions.
D.
Coordination Drawings: Reflected ceiling plan(s) and other details, drawn to scale, on which the following items are shown and coordinated with each other, using input from installers of the items involved: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.
7. E.
Lighting fixtures. Suspended ceiling components. Partitions and millwork that penetrate the ceiling or extends to within 12 inches of the plane of the luminaires. Ceiling-mounted projectors. Structural members to which suspension systems for lighting fixtures will be attached. Other items in finished ceiling including the following: a. Air outlets and inlets. b. Speakers. c. Sprinklers. d. Smoke and fire detectors. e. Occupancy sensors. f. Access panels. g. Light level sensors. h. Fire alarm A/V devices. Perimeter moldings.
Qualification Data: fixtures.
INTERIOR LIGHTING
For qualified agencies providing photometric data for lighting
265100 - 2
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
INTERIOR LIGHTING SECTION 265100
F.
Product Certificates: For each type of ballast, from manufacturer.
G.
Field quality-control reports.
H.
Operation and Maintenance Data: For lighting equipment and fixtures to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. 1.
I. 1.5
Provide a list of all lamp types used on Project; use ANSI and manufacturers' codes.
Warranty: Sample of special warranty. QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Luminaire Photometric Data Testing Laboratory Qualifications: Provided by manufacturers' laboratories that are accredited under the National Volunteer Laboratory Accreditation Program for Energy Efficient Lighting Products.
B.
Luminaire Photometric Data Testing Laboratory Qualifications: Provided by an independent agency, with the experience and capability to conduct the testing indicated, that is an NRTL as defined by OSHA in 29 CFR 1910, complying with the IESNA Lighting Measurements Testing & Calculation Guides.
C.
Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.
D.
Comply with NFPA 70.
1.6 A.
1.7 B.
COORDINATION Coordinate layout and installation of lighting fixtures and suspension system with other construction that penetrates ceilings or is supported by them, including HVAC equipment, fire-suppression system, and partition assemblies. EXTRA MATERIALS Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. 2. 3.
Plastic Diffusers and Lenses: One for every 100 of each type and rating installed. Furnish at least one of each type. Ballasts: One for every 100 of each type and rating installed. Furnish at least one of each type. Globes and Guards: One for every 20 of each type and rating installed. Furnish at least one of each type.
INTERIOR LIGHTING
265100 - 3
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
INTERIOR LIGHTING SECTION 265100
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 A.
2.2
MANUFACTURERS Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, product(s) indicated on Drawings. GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR LIGHTING FIXTURES AND COMPONENTS
A.
Recessed Fixtures: fixtures.
B.
Fluorescent Fixtures: Comply with UL 1598. Where LER is specified, test according to NEMA LE 5 and NEMA LE 5A as applicable.
C.
HID Fixtures: NEMA LE 5B.
D.
Metal Parts: Free of burrs and sharp corners and edges.
E.
Sheet Metal Components: Steel unless otherwise indicated. Form and support to prevent warping and sagging.
F.
Doors, Frames, and Other Internal Access: Smooth operating, free of light leakage under operating conditions, and designed to permit relamping without use of tools. Designed to prevent doors, frames, lenses, diffusers, and other components from falling accidentally during relamping and when secured in operating position.
G.
Diffusers and Globes: 1.
2. H.
Comply with NEMA LE 4 for ceiling compatibility for recessed
Comply with UL 1598.
Where LER is specified, test according to
Acrylic Lighting Diffusers: 100 percent virgin acrylic plastic. High resistance to yellowing and other changes due to aging, exposure to heat, and UV radiation. a. Lens Thickness: At least 0.125 inch minimum unless otherwise indicated. b. UV stabilized. Glass: Annealed crystal glass unless otherwise indicated.
Factory-Applied Labels: Comply with UL 1598. Include recommended lamps and ballasts. Labels shall be located where they will be readily visible to service personnel, but not seen from normal viewing angles when lamps are in place. 1.
Label shall include the following lamp and ballast characteristics: a. b.
c.
"USE ONLY" and include specific lamp type. Lamp diameter code (T-5, T-8, etc.), tube configuration (twin, quad, triple, etc.), base type, and nominal wattage for fluorescent and compact fluorescent luminaires. Lamp type, wattage, bulb type (ED17, BD56, etc.) and coating (clear or coated) for HID luminaires.
INTERIOR LIGHTING
265100 - 4
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
d. e.
INTERIOR LIGHTING SECTION 265100
Start type (programmed start, instant start, etc.) for fluorescent and compact fluorescent luminaires. ANSI ballast type (M98, M57, etc.) for HID luminaires.
I.
Electromagnetic-Interference Filters: Factory installed to suppress conducted electromagnetic interference as required by MIL-STD-461E. Fabricate lighting fixtures with one filter on each ballast indicated to require a filter.
J.
All luminaires shall be provided with a ballast disconnect.
K.
No proprietary ballasts.
2.3 A.
BALLASTS FOR LINEAR FLUORESCENT LAMPS General Requirements for Electronic Ballasts: 1.
Starting Method: a. b.
Programmed start for occupancy controlled areas. Instant start for manually controlled areas.
2. 3. 4.
Comply with UL 935 and with ANSI C82.11. Designed for type and quantity of lamps served. Ballasts shall be designed for full light output unless another BF, dimmer, or bilevel control is indicated. 5. Sound Rating: Class A. 6. Total Harmonic Distortion Rating: Less than 10 percent. 7. Transient Voltage Protection: IEEE C62.41.1 and IEEE C62.41.2, Category A or better. 8. Operating Frequency: 40 kHz or higher. 9. Lamp Current Crest Factor: 1.7 or less. 10. BF: 0.88 or higher. 11. Power Factor: 0.98 or higher. 12. No proprietary ballasts. B.
Luminaires controlled by occupancy sensors shall have programmed-start ballasts.
C.
Electronic Programmed-Start Ballasts for T8, T5 and T5HO Lamps: ANSI C82.11 and the following: 1. 2.
Lamp end-of-life detection and shutdown circuit for T5 diameter lamps. Automatic lamp starting after lamp replacement.
D.
Single Ballasts for Multiple Lamp Fixtures: arrangements for multiple lamp luminaires.
E.
Ballasts for Dimmer-Controlled Lighting Fixtures: Electronic type. 1. 2.
Comply with
Factory wired with fewest ballast
Dimming Range: 100 to 5 percent of rated lamp lumens, flicker free. BF=1.0
INTERIOR LIGHTING
265100 - 5
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
3. 4. 5.
2.4 A.
INTERIOR LIGHTING SECTION 265100
0-10 volt operation. Compatibility: Certified by manufacturer for use with specific dimming control system and lamp type indicated. Control: Coordinate wiring from ballast to control device to ensure that the ballast, controller, and connecting wiring are compatible.
BALLASTS FOR COMPACT FLUORESCENT LAMPS Description: Electronic-programmed rapid-start type, complying with UL 935 and with ANSI C 82.11, designed for type and quantity of lamps indicated. Ballast shall be designed for full light output unless dimmer or bi-level control is indicated: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.
Lamp end-of-life detection and shutdown circuit. Automatic lamp starting after lamp replacement. Sound Rating: Class A. E xterior use rated at minimum -5 degree F. Total Harmonic Distortion Rating: Less than 10 percent. Transient Voltage Protection: IEEE C62.41.1 and IEEE C62.41.2, Category A or better. 7. Operating Frequency: 40 kHz or higher. 8. Lamp Current Crest Factor: 1.7 or less. 9. BF: 0.88 or higher unless otherwise indicated. 10. Power Factor: 0.98 or higher. 11. Interference: Comply with 47 CFR 18, Ch. 1, Subpart C, for limitations on electromagnetic and radio-frequency interference for nonconsumer equipment. 2.5
EXIT SIGNS
A.
General Requirements for Exit Signs: Comply with UL 924; for sign colors, visibility, luminance, and lettering size, comply with authorities having jurisdiction.
B.
Internally Lighted Signs: 1. 2. 3.
2.6
Internally illuminated not to exceed 3 watts per side. Lamps for AC/DC Operation: LEDs, 50,000 hours minimum rated lamp life. Red illumination with white housing.
FLUORESCENT LAMPS
A.
T8 rapid-start lamps, rated 32 W maximum, nominal length of 48 inches, 3000 initial lumens (minimum), CRI 85 (minimum), color temperature 4100 K, and average rated life 36,000 hours unless otherwise indicated.
B.
Compact Fluorescent Lamps: 4-Pin, CRI 80 (minimum), color temperature 4100 K, average rated life of 12,000 hours at three hours operation per start unless otherwise indicated. 1.
18 W: T4, double or triple tube, rated 1200 initial lumens (minimum).
INTERIOR LIGHTING
265100 - 6
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
2. 3. 4. 2.7
INTERIOR LIGHTING SECTION 265100
26 W: T4, double or triple tube, rated 1800 initial lumens (minimum). 32 W: T4, triple tube, rated 2400 initial lumens (minimum). 42 W: T4, triple tube, rated 3200 initial lumens (minimum).
LIGHTING FIXTURE SUPPORT COMPONENTS
A.
Comply with Division 26 Section "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems" for channel- and angle-iron supports and nonmetallic channel and angle supports.
B.
Single-Stem Hangers: 1/2-inch steel tubing with swivel ball fittings and ceiling canopy. Finish same as fixture.
C.
Twin-Stem Hangers: Two, 1/2-inch steel tubes with single canopy designed to mount a single fixture. Finish same as fixture.
D.
Wires: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 3, soft temper, zinc-coated steel, 12 gage.
E.
Rod Hangers: 3/16-inch minimum diameter, cadmium-plated, threaded steel rod.
F.
Hook Hangers: Integrated assembly matched to fixture and line voltage and equipped with threaded attachment, cord, and locking-type plug.
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 A.
INSTALLATION Lighting fixtures: 1. 2.
Set level, plumb, and square with ceilings and walls unless otherwise indicated. Install lamps in each luminaire.
B.
Temporary Lighting: If it is necessary, and approved by Architect, to use permanent luminaires for temporary lighting, install and energize the minimum number of luminaires necessary. When construction is sufficiently complete, remove the temporary luminaires, disassemble, clean thoroughly, install new lamps, and reinstall.
C.
Remote Mounting of Ballasts: Distance between the ballast and fixture shall not exceed that recommended by ballast manufacturer. Verify, with ballast manufacturers, maximum distance between ballast and luminaire.
D.
Lay-in Ceiling Lighting Fixtures Supports: Use grid as a support element. 1.
2.
Install ceiling support system rods or wires, independent of the ceiling suspension devices, for each fixture. Locate not more than 6 inches from lighting fixture corners. Support Clips: Fasten to lighting fixtures and to ceiling grid members at or near each fixture corner with clips that are UL listed for the application.
INTERIOR LIGHTING
265100 - 7
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
3.
4.
E.
3.
3.2 A.
3.3
Fixtures of Sizes Less Than Ceiling Grid: Install as indicated on reflected ceiling plans or center in acoustical panel, and support fixtures independently with at least two 3/4-inch metal channels spanning and secured to ceiling tees. Install at least one independent support rod or wire from structure to a tab on lighting fixture. Wire or rod shall have breaking strength of the weight of fixture at a safety factor of 3.
Suspended Lighting Fixture Support: 1. 2.
F.
INTERIOR LIGHTING SECTION 265100
Stem-Mounted, Single-Unit Fixtures: Suspend with twin-stem hangers. Continuous Rows: Use tubing or stem for wiring at one point and tubing or rod for suspension for each unit length of fixture chassis, including one at each end. Do not use grid as support for pendant luminaires. Connect support wires or rods to building structure.
Connect wiring according to Division 26 Section "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables." IDENTIFICATION Install labels with panel and circuit numbers on concealed junction and outlet boxes. Comply with requirements for identification specified in Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical Systems." FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Test for Emergency Lighting: Interrupt power supply to demonstrate proper operation. Verify transfer from normal power to emergency power and retransfer to normal.
B.
Prepare a written report of tests, inspections, observations, and verifications indicating and interpreting results. If adjustments are made to lighting system, retest to demonstrate compliance with standards.
3.4 A.
STARTUP SERVICE Burn-in all lamps that require specific aging period to operate properly, prior to occupancy by Owner. Burn-in fluorescent and compact fluorescent lamps intended to be dimmed, for at least 100 hours at full voltage.
END OF SECTION 265100
INTERIOR LIGHTING
265100 - 8
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
EXTERIOR LIGHTING SECTION 265600
SECTION 265600 – EXTERIOR LIGHTING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 A.
1.2 A.
1.3 A.
STIPULATIONS The sections "General Conditions" and "Special Requirements" form a part of this section by this reference thereto and shall have the same force and affect as if printed herewith in full. RELATED DOCUMENTS The Contract Drawings, the Standard Form of Agreement and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. SUMMARY This Section includes the following: 1.
1.4 A.
Exterior luminaires
SUBMITTALS Product Data: For each luminaire and/or luminaire lighting assembly, arranged in the order of lighting unit designation. Include data on features, accessories, finishes, and the following: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.
Physical description of luminaire, including dimensions and verification of indicated parameters. Luminaire assembly dimensions, effective projected area, details of attaching luminaires, accessories, and installation and construction details. Luminaire materials. High-intensity-discharge ballasts. High-intensity-discharge lamps. Electrical and energy-efficiency data for ballasts.
B.
Wiring Diagrams: Power, signal, and control wiring.
C.
Coordination Drawings: Mounting and connection details, drawn to scale, for exterior luminaires with Pole mounting installation requirements.
D.
Source quality-control test reports.
E.
Field quality-control test reports.
EXTERIOR LIGHTING
265600 - 1
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
EXTERIOR LIGHTING SECTION 265600
F.
Operation and Maintenance Data: For Luminaires and Luminaire Lighting Assemblies to include in maintenance manuals.
G.
Warranties: Special warranties specified in this Section.
1.5
QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Comply with the latest edition of NFPA 70 "National Electrical Code" for components and installation.
B.
Listing and Labeling: Provide products specified in this Section that are listed and labeled. 1.
The Terms "Listed and Labeled": As defined in the "National Electrical Code," Article 100.
C.
Comply with IEEE C2, "National Electrical Safety Code."
D.
Comply with NFPA 70.
1.6 A.
1.7 A.
COORDINATION Coordinate installation of exterior luminaires with mounting and wind load requirements as recommended by the lighting manufacturer. WARRANTY Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace luminaires or components of luminaires and lamps that fail in materials or workmanship; corrode; or fade, stain, or chalk due to effects of weather or solar radiation within specified warranty period. Manufacturer may exclude lightning damage, hail damage, vandalism, abuse, or unauthorized repairs or alterations from special warranty coverage. 1.
Warranty Period for Luminaire assemblies: Completion. a. b.
2.
1.8
3 years from date of Substantial
Warranty Period for Metal Corrosion: 5 years from date of Substantial Completion. Warranty Period for Color Retention: 5 years from date of Substantial Completion.
Warranty Period for Lamps: Replace lamps and fuses that fail within 12 months from date of Substantial Completion.
EXTRA MATERIALS
EXTERIOR LIGHTING
265600 - 2
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
A.
EXTERIOR LIGHTING SECTION 265600
Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. 2.
Lamps: 2 of each type and rating installed. Ballasts: 2 of each type and rating installed.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 A.
2.2 A.
MANUFACTURERS Available Products: Luminaires and bollards that may be incorporated into the work include only those products specified in the luminaire schedule on the Contract Drawings. HIGH-INTENSITY-DISCHARGE LAMP BALLASTS General: Comply with NEMA C82.4 and UL 1029. Shall include the following features, unless otherwise indicated: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.
2.3 A.
Type: Pulse start metal halide. Minimum Starting Temperature: Minus 20 deg F. minimum for single-lamp ballasts. Open-circuit operation will not reduce average life. Ballast Fuses: One in each ungrounded power supply conductor. Voltage and current ratings as recommended by ballast manufacturer. Ballast/Socket assembly shall be pre-wired with medium base or mogul base socket.
BALLASTS FOR COMPACT FLUORESCENT LAMPS Description: Electronic-programmed rapid-start type, complying with UL 935 and with ANSI C 82.11, designed for type and quantity of lamps indicated. Ballast shall be designed for full light output unless dimmer or bi-level control is indicated: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.
Lamp end-of-life detection and shutdown circuit. Automatic lamp starting after lamp replacement. Sound Rating: Class A. E xterior use rated at minimum -5 degree F. Total Harmonic Distortion Rating: Less than 10 percent. Transient Voltage Protection: IEEE C62.41.1 and IEEE C62.41.2, Category A or better. 7. Operating Frequency: 40 kHz or higher. 8. Lamp Current Crest Factor: 1.7 or less. 9. BF: 0.88 or higher unless otherwise indicated. 10. Power Factor: 0.98 or higher.
EXTERIOR LIGHTING
265600 - 3
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
EXTERIOR LIGHTING SECTION 265600
11. Interference: Comply with 47 CFR 18, Ch. 1, Subpart C, for limitations on electromagnetic and radio-frequency interference for nonconsumer equipment. 2.4 A.
2.5 A.
2.6 A.
HIGH-INTENSITY-DISCHARGE LAMPS Pulse Start Metal-Halide Lamps: ANSI C78.1372, wattage as scheduled, operating position shall be universal, medium base, clear lamp finish, CRI 88 (minimum), initial lumens 6,500 (minimum), rated life 12,000 hours, and color temperature 4000 K. FACTORY FINISHES Finish: Manufacturer's standard paint applied to factory-assembled and -tested luminaire before shipping. Coordinate luminaire and pole color with the University prior to purchase. SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL Factory test fixtures with ballasts and lamps; certify results for isofootcandle curves, zonal lumen, average and minimum ratios, and electrical and energy-efficiency data for ballasts.
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1
INSTALLATION
A.
Install lamps in each fixture.
B.
Luminaire Attachment: Fasten to indicated pole structural supports.
C.
Adjust luminaires that require field adjustment or aiming.
D.
Apply silicone sealant to gasket on back of faceplate before installing step lights.
3.2 A.
3.3 A.
CONNECTIONS Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published torque-tightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those specified in UL 486A and UL 486B. FIELD QUALITY CONTROL Inspect each installed luminaire for damage. components.
EXTERIOR LIGHTING
Replace damaged luminaires and
265600 - 4
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
EXTERIOR LIGHTING SECTION 265600
B.
Tests and Observations: Verify normal operation of lighting luminaires after installing luminaires and energizing circuits with normal power source. Measure light intensities at night. Use photometers with calibration referenced to NIST standards.
C.
Prepare a written report of tests, inspections, observations, and verifications indicating and interpreting results. If adjustments are made to lighting system, retest to demonstrate compliance with standards.
END OF SECTION 265600
EXTERIOR LIGHTING
265600 - 5
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM SECTION 283100
SECTION 283100 - FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1
SECTION REQUIREMENTS A.
System Description: Fully-addressable 24-V dc loop system. 1. 2.
Signaling Line Circuits: NFPA 72, Class B, Style 4. Notification Appliance Circuits: NFPA 72, Class B, Style Y.
B.
Submittals: Product Data and system operating description.
C.
Comply with NFPA 72, 2002 per IBC 2006.
D.
UL listed and labeled.
E.
Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1
FIRE ALARM CONTROL PANEL A.
Project will utilize existing Edwards Systems Technology EST3 analog control panel. All new devices shall be compatible with the “Signature” loop controller.
B.
Remote LCD Annunciator: Back-lit alpha-numeric LCD display, 4-lines of 20 characters each. Install with Class B, RS-485 wiring. 1. Acceptacble Manufacturer: EST, 2-LSRA.
2.2
ALARM-INITIATING DEVICES A.
Manual Pull Stations: UL 38 listed, double-action mechanism, red in color with molded, raisedletter operating instructions in contracting color. Provide with ADA compliant clear tamperproof polycarbonate shield and frame with 9Vdc battery operated local audible alarm compatible with surface mount raceway installation. 1. Acceptacble Manufacturer: EST, SIGA -278 w/ Sentry ST ADA surface mount cover with 9Vdc local sounder.
B.
Intelligent Smoke Detectors: UL 268, 24-V dc, self-restoring, photoelectric type, plug-in arrangement, with standard base. 1. Acceptable Manufacturer: EST, SIGA-PS.
FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM
283100 - 1
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM SECTION 283100
C.
Intelligent Duct Smoke Detectors: UL 268, 24-V dc, self-restoring, photoelectric type, plug-in arrangement within plastic housing, sealed and gasketed. Suitable for 100 – 4,000 ft/min air velocity. Provide air sampling tube and keyed test/reset remote station. 1. Acceptable Manufacturer: EST, SIGA-SD.
D.
Heat Detectors: UL 521 listed, combination 135 deg F fixed-temperature unit with standard base. 1. Acceptable Manufacturer: EST, SIGA-HFS.
E.
High Temperature Heat Detectors: UL 521 listed, combination 194 deg F fixed-temperature unit with standard base. 1. Acceptable Manufacturer: EST, SIGA-HFS-194
2.3
NOTIFICATION APPLIANCES A.
Combination Horn/Strobe, Common Areas: Electric-temporal horn type, 85 dBA at 10 feet (3 m) with strobe characteristics specified below. 1. Acceptable Manufacturer: EST, G1R-HDVM
B.
Visual Alarm Device, Common Areas: Xenon-strobe lights listed under UL 1971, with the word "FIRE" engraved in 1-inch- (25-mm-) high letters. Rated Light Output: 1. 15 candela in corridors. 2. 75 candela in common rooms and mechanical spaces. Acceptable Manufacturer: EST, G1R-VM
C.
2.4
High Output Combination Horn/Strobe, Sleeping Rooms: Electric-temporal horn type, 80 dBA at 10 feet (3 m) with high output 177 cd strobe characteristics specified below. Ensure at least 75 dBA at the pillow. 1. Acceptable Manufacturer: EST, G1R-HDVMH POWER BOOSTER SUPPLY PANEL
A.
2.5
Self-contained 24Vdc, 6.5A power supply in red ventilated steel cabinet with keyed door. Panel shall consist of four independent 3 Amp N.A.C.’s, Class B. 1. Acceptable Manufacturer: EST, BPS6A. MODULES
A.
Single Input Module: Provide intelligent analog addressable devices for monitoring existing non-addressable devices where shown on Contract Drawings. 1. Acceptable Manufacturer: EST, SIGA-CT1
B.
Control Module Relay: Provide control relay for Form ‘C’ dry relay contact to control external appliances where indicated on Contract Drawings.
FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM
283100 - 2
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
1. 2.6
FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM SECTION 283100
Acceptable Manufacturer: EST, SIGA-CR
BATTERIES A.
2.7
Provide new batteries sized in accordance with manufacturer’s calculations. Batteries shall be sealed and sized for 24 hours of standby operation after 5-minutes of alarm activity in accordance with NFPA 72. Properly dispose of existing batteries.
WIRE AND CABLE A.
General: UL listed and labeled as complying with NFPA 70, Article 760. 1.
Notification Appliance Circuits, 24Vdc: No. 16 AWG, minimum.
2. 3.
Signaling Line Circuits, 24Vdc: No. 18 AWG Twisted Pair, minimum. Line-Voltage Circuits120Vac: No. 12 AWG, minimum, with ground.
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1
INSTALLATION A.
The entire system shall be installed in a workmanlike manner, in accordance with approved manufacturer's wiring diagram. The contractor shall furnish all conduit, wiring, outlet boxes, junction boxes, cabinets and similar devices necessary for the complete installation. All wiring shall be of the type recommended by the manufacturer, approved by the local Fire Department, and shall be installed in rigid, threaded conduit throughout.
B.
All penetration of floor slabs and firewalls shall be fire stopped in accordance with applicable fire codes.
C.
End of Line Resistors shall be furnished as required for mounting as directed by the manufacturer.
D.
All wiring shall be color coded throughout, to National Electrical Code standards.
E.
The system shall be arranged to receive power from one three wire 120 Vac, 15 A supply. All low voltage operation shall be provided from the fire alarm control panel.
F.
Provide standard base plates for all devices.
G.
Wiring Method: 1. Normally Non-Occupied Areas: Install wiring in ¾” Electrical Metallic Tubing 2. Occupied Areas: Metal surface raceway, single-channel, with cover.
FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM
283100 - 3
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
3.2
FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM SECTION 283100
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A.
3.3
The system shall be installed and fully tested under the supervision of a trained manufacturer's representative. The manufacturer’s field representative must be a NICET Level III technician, and the supervising representative must be a NICET Level IV technician. The system shall be demonstrated to perform all of the function as specified. TESTS
A.
Reports of any field testing during installation shall be forwarded to the Engineer.
B.
Each individual system operation on a circuit by circuit basis shall be tested for its complete operation. The procedure for testing the entire fire alarm system shall be set forth with the consent of the code enforcement official, the Engineer and the manufacturer.
3.4
DOCUMENTATION AND TRAINING A.
The contractor shall compile and provide to the owners three (3) complete manual on the completed system to include operating and maintenance instruction, catalog cuts of all equipment and components, as-built wiring diagrams and a manufacturer's suggested spare parts list.
B.
In addition to the above manuals, the contractor shall provide the services of the manufacturer's trained representative for a period of four (4) hours to instruct the owners' designated personnel on the operation and maintenance of the entire system. An EST2 End-User Training Video shall be included as part of the system documentation. All training to be performed at Rowan University.
END OF SECTION 283100
FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM
283100 - 4
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
PROJECT SURVEY & LAYOUT SECTION 310100
SECTION 310100 - PROJECT SURVEY & LAYOUT PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1
SCOPE OF WORK A.
The Contractor shall provide construction stakeout sufficient to construct the proposed improvements in accordance with the approved construction plans.
B.
All stakeout services shall be completed under the direct supervision of a Professional Land Surveyor licensed in New Jersey.
C.
The Contractor shall provide a survey of the existing site conditions to properly construct the proposed improvements in accordance with the approved construction plans.
D.
The Owner shall provide the following prior to the commencement of any stake-out services: 1.
Approved for construction site plans (including detail);
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1
MATERIALS A.
2.2
The Contractor/surveyor shall supply all stakeout materials.
EQUIPMENT A.
The Contractor/Surveyor shall supply all equipment necessary to accomplish the work.
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1
PERFORMANCE STANDARDS A.
Curb Layout 1.
B.
Stakes shall be located at a minimum of 25 feet and a maximum of 50 feet intervals and also at points of curvature, points of tangency, radius points, and transitions, high and low points, and deflections. Offsets will be at 4 feet from face of curb, elevations to top of curb, elevations of top of curb to be provided at this 4 foot offset.
Storm and Sanitary Manholes 1.
15 feet and 25 feet offset stakes in the same direction will be set from the centerline opening of structure lath. One offset stake will have an elevation to top of rim and inverts. Intermediate grade stakes to pipe invert elevation will be provided if needed. (Note: These stakes are not to conflict with piping.)
PROJECT SURVEY & LAYOUT
310100 - 1
ROWAN UNIVERSITY C.
Catch Basins 1.
D.
2. 3.
Stakes will be provided at a 50 foot grid. Grade elevations shall be to finished grade.
Walkway/Paver Layout 1.
3.2
Clearing limits shall be staked at 100 feet ± intervals and at all critical areas.
Grade Stakes 1.
I.
Stakes with 10 feet offset shall be provided at 10 feet intervals, deflections, beginning and end of wall/pier. Additional stakes may be required, depending on wall/pier height and conditions.
Limits of Disturbance 1.
H.
Grade stakes shall be located at centerline of roadway at 50 foot intervals, including point of curvature, point on curve, point of tangency, and points of vertical curves. Grades shall be at finished grade.
Wall/Pier Layout 1.
G.
Water – Stakes shall be located at 50 foot intervals along centerline of pipe and at deflections with no offsets. One 10 foot offset stake to the center of hydrant with a grade ring elevation will be provided; Lighting – Centerline of lighting structure with a 5 foot offset will be staked. Offset stake elevation will be to finished grade; and, Centerline of pipes will be staked with no offset.
Roadway Layout 1.
F.
Set a centerline of structure lath with 10 foot offset HUB along the face of curb on either side of the lath at face of curb. One offset stake will have an elevation to top of grate and inverts. (Note: These stakes are not to conflict with piping.)
Utility Layout 1.
E.
PROJECT SURVEY & LAYOUT SECTION 310100
Grade stakes shall be located at centerline of walkway/pavers at 10 foot intervals, including point of curvature, point on curve, point of tangency, and points of vertical curves. Grades shall be at finished grade.
CONTRACTOR VERIFICATION A.
Contractor will field verify the utility location, size and invert elevations at points of connection in area of conflict, prior to construction and protect them from damage. 1.
Finished subgrades shall be verified by the Contractor to ensure proper elevation and conditions for construction above subgrade;
PROJECT SURVEY & LAYOUT
310100 - 2
ROWAN UNIVERSITY 2. 3.
3.3
PROJECT SURVEY & LAYOUT SECTION 310100 Protect subgrade from excessive construction traffic and wheel loading including concrete and dump trucks; and, Remove areas of finished subgrade judged to be unsatisfactory to the depth necessary and replace in a manner that will comply with compaction requirements by use of material equal to or better than the best subgrade material on site. Surface of subgrade after compaction shall be hard, uniform, smooth, stable, and true to grade and cross-section.
B.
Notify Owner and Architect, if it is necessary to destroy or remove control points and/or benchmarks due to construction. Contractor shall be responsible for cost of relocation.
C.
Advise Owner and Architect of any discrepancies between plans and field layout.
QUALITY ASSURANCE A.
The survey crew shall discuss all layout procedures with the Contractor’s supervisor prior to commencing work.
B.
A survey crew daily report detailing that day’s work, shall be completed and signed by the Contractor’s supervisor at the end of that day’s layout.
C.
Copies of sketches, cut sheets, etc. shall be provided to the Contractor by the beginning of the next workday.
D.
All costs related to re-staking due to construction or Contractors’ work resulting in destruction or movement of stakes shall be paid for by the Contractor and at no additional expense to the Owner.
END OF SECTION 310100
PROJECT SURVEY & LAYOUT
310100 - 3
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
SITE CLEARING SECTION 311000
SECTION 311000 - SITE CLEARING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY A.
Section Includes: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.
B.
Related Sections: 1.
2.
1.3
Protecting existing vegetation to remain. Removing existing vegetation. Clearing and grubbing. Stripping and stockpiling topsoil. Disconnecting, capping or sealing, and abandoning site utilities in place. Temporary erosion- and sedimentation-control measures.
Section 015000 "Temporary Facilities and Controls" for temporary utility services, construction and support facilities, security and protection facilities, and temporary erosion- and sedimentation-control measures. Section 024119 "Selective Demolition" for partial demolition of buildings or structures.
DEFINITIONS A.
Subsoil: All soil beneath the topsoil layer of the soil profile, and typified by the lack of organic matter and soil organisms.
B.
Surface Soil: Soil that is present at the top layer of the existing soil profile at the Project site. In undisturbed areas, the surface soil is typically topsoil; but in disturbed areas such as urban environments, the surface soil can be subsoil.
C.
Topsoil: Top layer of the soil profile consisting of existing native surface topsoil or existing in-place surface soil and is the zone where plant roots grow. Its appearance is generally friable, pervious, and black or a darker shade of brown, gray, or red than underlying subsoil; reasonably free of subsoil, clay lumps, gravel, and other objects more than 2 inches in diameter; and free of subsoil and weeds, roots, toxic materials, or other nonsoil materials. Plant-Protection Zone: Area surrounding individual trees, groups of trees, shrubs, or other vegetation to be protected during construction, and indicated on Drawings.
D.
E.
Tree-Protection Zone: Area surrounding individual trees or groups of trees to be protected during construction, and defined by a circle concentric with each tree with a radius 1.5 times the diameter of the drip line unless otherwise indicated.
F.
Vegetation: Trees, shrubs, groundcovers, grass, and other plants.
SITE CLEARING
311000-1
ROWAN UNIVERSITY 1.4
MATERIAL OWNERSHIP A.
1.5
Except for stripped topsoil and other materials indicated to be stockpiled or otherwise remain Owner's property, cleared materials shall become Contractor's property and shall be removed from Project site.
INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A.
Existing Conditions: Documentation of existing trees and plantings, adjoining construction, and site improvements that establishes preconstruction conditions that might be misconstrued as damage caused by site clearing. 1. 2.
B.
1.6
Use sufficiently detailed photographs or videotape. Include plans and notations to indicate specific wounds and damage conditions of each tree or other plants designated to remain.
Record Drawings: Identifying and accurately showing locations of capped utilities and other subsurface structural, electrical, and mechanical conditions.
QUALITY ASSURANCE A.
1.7
SITE CLEARING SECTION 311000
Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.
PROJECT CONDITIONS A.
Traffic: Minimize interference with adjoining roads, streets, walks, and other adjacent occupied or used facilities during site-clearing operations. 1. 2.
Do not close or obstruct streets, walks, or other adjacent occupied or used facilities without permission from Owner and authorities having jurisdiction. Provide alternate routes around closed or obstructed traffic ways if required by Owner or authorities having jurisdiction.
B.
Utility Locator Service: Notify utility locator service for area where Project is located before site clearing.
C.
Do not commence site clearing operations until temporary sedimentation-control and plant-protection measures are in place.
D.
The following practices are prohibited within protection zones: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7.
E.
erosion-
and
Storage of construction materials, debris, or excavated material. Parking vehicles or equipment. Foot traffic. Erection of sheds or structures. Impoundment of water. Excavation or other digging unless otherwise indicated. Attachment of signs to or wrapping materials around trees or plants unless otherwise indicated.
Do not direct vehicle or equipment exhaust towards protection zones.
SITE CLEARING
311000-2
ROWAN UNIVERSITY F. G.
SITE CLEARING SECTION 311000 Prohibit heat sources, flames, ignition sources, and smoking within or near protection zones. Soil Stripping, Handling, and Stockpiling: Perform only when the topsoil is dry or slightly moist.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1
MATERIALS A.
Satisfactory Soil Material: Requirements for satisfactory soil material are specified in Section 312000 "Earth Moving." 1.
Obtain approved borrow soil material off-site when satisfactory soil material is not available on-site.
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1
PREPARATION A.
Protect and maintain benchmarks and survey control points from disturbance during construction.
B.
Locate and clearly identify trees, shrubs, and other vegetation to remain. Wrap a 1-inch blue vinyl tie tape flag around each tree trunk at 54 inches above the ground.
C.
Protect existing site improvements to remain from damage during construction. 1.
3.2
3.3
Restore damaged improvements to their original condition, as acceptable to Owner.
TEMPORARY EROSION AND SEDIMENTATION CONTROL A.
Provide temporary erosion- and sedimentation-control measures to prevent soil erosion and discharge of soil-bearing water runoff or airborne dust to adjacent properties and walkways, according to erosion- and sedimentation-control Drawings and requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.
B.
Verify that flows of water redirected from construction areas or generated by construction activity do not enter or cross protection zones.
C.
Inspect, maintain, and repair erosion- and sedimentation-control measures during construction until permanent vegetation has been established.
D.
Remove erosion and sedimentation controls and restore and stabilize areas disturbed during removal.
TREE AND PLANT PROTECTION A.
General: Protect trees and plants remaining on-site.
SITE CLEARING
311000-3
ROWAN UNIVERSITY B.
3.4
SITE CLEARING SECTION 311000 Repair or replace trees, shrubs, and other vegetation indicated to remain or be relocated that are damaged by construction operations, in a manner approved by Architect.
EXISTING UTILITIES A.
Locate, identify, disconnect, and seal or cap utilities indicated to be removed or abandoned in place. 1.
B.
Locate, identify, and disconnect utilities indicated to be abandoned in place.
C.
Interrupting Existing Utilities: Do not interrupt utilities serving facilities occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide temporary utility services according to requirements indicated: 1. 2.
3.5
Notify Architect and Project Manager not less than two days in advance of proposed utility interruptions. Do not proceed with utility interruptions without Architect's written permission.
CLEARING AND GRUBBING A.
Remove obstructions, trees, shrubs, and other vegetation to permit installation of new construction.
1. 2. 3. 4. B.
Do not remove trees, shrubs, and other vegetation indicated to remain or to be relocated. Grind down stumps and remove roots, obstructions, and debris to a depth of 18 inches below exposed subgrade. Use only hand methods for grubbing within protection zones. Chip removed tree branches and dispose of off-site.
Fill depressions caused by clearing and grubbing operations with satisfactory soil material unless further excavation or earthwork is indicated. 1.
3.6
Arrange with utility companies to shut off indicated utilities.
Place fill material in horizontal layers not exceeding a loose depth of 8 inches, and compact each layer to a density equal to adjacent original ground.
TOPSOIL STRIPPING A.
Remove sod and grass before stripping topsoil.
B.
Strip topsoil to depth of 6 inches in a manner to prevent intermingling with underlying subsoil or other waste materials. 1.
SITE CLEARING
Remove subsoil and nonsoil materials from topsoil, including clay lumps, gravel, and other objects more than 2 inches in diameter; trash, debris, weeds, roots, and other waste materials.
311000-4
ROWAN UNIVERSITY C.
SITE CLEARING SECTION 311000 Stockpile topsoil away from edge of excavations without intermixing with subsoil. Grade and shape stockpiles to drain surface water. Cover to prevent windblown dust and erosion by water. 1. 2. 3.
D.
SITE IMPROVEMENTS 1.
E.
Remove existing above- and below-grade improvements as indicated and necessary to facilitate new construction.
Remove slabs, paving, curbs, gutters, and aggregate base as indicated. 1.
3.7
Limit height of topsoil stockpiles to 72 inches. Do not stockpile topsoil within protection zones. Stockpile surplus topsoil to allow for respreading deeper topsoil.
Unless existing full-depth joints coincide with line of demolition, neatly saw-cut along line of existing pavement to remain before removing adjacent existing pavement. Saw-cut faces vertically.
DISPOSAL OF SURPLUS AND WASTE MATERIALS A.
Remove surplus soil material, unsuitable topsoil, obstructions, demolished materials, and waste materials including trash and debris, and legally dispose of them off Owner's property.
END OF SECTION 311000
SITE CLEARING
311000-5
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
EARTH MOVING SECTION 312000
SECTION 312000 - EARTH MOVING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY A.
Section Includes: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8.
B.
Related Sections: 1. 2.
3. 4.
5. 6.
1.3
Preparing subgrades for slabs-on-grade, walks, and turf and grasses. Excavating and backfilling for buildings and structures. Drainage course for concrete slabs-on-grade. Subbase course for concrete walks. Subbase course and base course for asphalt paving. Subsurface drainage backfill for walls and trenches. Excavating and backfilling trenches for utilities and pits for buried utility structures. Gravel for walking surfaces.
Section 013200 "Construction Progress Documentation" for recording preexcavation and earth moving progress. Section 015000 "Temporary Facilities and Controls" for temporary controls, utilities, and support facilities; also for temporary site fencing if not in another Section. Section 033000 "Cast-in-Place Concrete" for granular course if placed over vapor retarder and beneath the slab-on-grade. Section 311000 "Site Clearing" for site stripping, grubbing, stripping and stockpiling topsoil, and removal of above- and below-grade improvements and utilities. Section 312319 "Dewatering" for lowering and disposing of ground water during construction. Section 329200 "Turf and Grasses" for finish grading in turf and grass areas, including preparing and placing planting soil for turf areas.
DEFINITIONS A.
Backfill: Soil material or controlled low-strength material used to fill an excavation.
1. 2. B.
Initial Backfill: Backfill placed beside and over pipe in a trench, including haunches to support sides of pipe. Final Backfill: Backfill placed over initial backfill to fill a trench.
Base Course: Aggregate layer placed between the subbase course and hot-mix asphalt paving.
EARTH MOVING
312000-1
ROWAN UNIVERSITY C.
EARTH MOVING SECTION 312000 Bedding Course: Aggregate layer placed over the excavated subgrade in a trench before laying pipe.
D.
Borrow Soil: Satisfactory soil imported from off-site for use as fill or backfill.
E.
Drainage Course: Aggregate layer supporting the slab-on-grade that also minimizes upward capillary flow of pore water.
F.
Excavation: Removal of material encountered above subgrade elevations and to lines and dimensions indicated. 1.
1.4
G.
Fill: Soil materials used to raise existing grades.
H.
Structures: Buildings, footings, foundations, retaining walls, slabs, tanks, curbs, mechanical and electrical appurtenances, or other man-made stationary features constructed above or below the ground surface.
I.
Subbase Course: Aggregate layer placed between the subgrade and base course for hot-mix asphalt pavement, or aggregate layer placed between the subgrade and a cement concrete pavement or a cement concrete or hot-mix asphalt walk.
J.
Subgrade: Uppermost surface of an excavation or the top surface of a fill or backfill immediately below subbase, drainage fill, drainage course, or topsoil materials.
K.
Utilities: On-site underground pipes, conduits, ducts, and cables, as well as underground services within buildings.
INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A.
Material Test Reports: For each on-site and borrow soil material proposed for fill and backfill as follows: 1. 2.
1.5
Unauthorized Excavation: Excavation below subgrade elevations or beyond indicated lines and dimensions without direction by Architect. Unauthorized excavation, as well as remedial work directed by Architect, shall be without additional compensation.
Classification according to ASTM D 2487. Laboratory compaction curve according to ASTM D 698.
B.
Seismic survey report from seismic survey agency.
C.
Samples: Ror gravel walking surface.
D.
Preexcavation Photographs or Videotape: Show existing conditions of adjoining construction and site improvements, including finish surfaces, that might be misconstrued as damage caused by earth moving operations. Submit before earth moving begins.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
EARTH MOVING
312000-2
ROWAN UNIVERSITY A.
EARTH MOVING SECTION 312000 Seismic Survey Agency: An independent testing agency, acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, experienced in seismic surveys and blasting procedures to perform the following services: 1.
2.
1.6
Report types of explosive and sizes of charge to be used in each area of rock removal, types of blasting mats, sequence of blasting operations, and procedures that will prevent damage to site improvements and structures on Project site and adjacent properties. Seismographic monitoring during blasting operations.
B.
Geotechnical Testing Agency Qualifications: Qualified according to ASTM E 329 and ASTM D 3740 for testing indicated.
C.
Preexcavation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.
PROJECT CONDITIONS A.
Traffic: Minimize interference with adjoining roads, streets, walks, and other adjacent occupied or used facilities during earth moving operations. 1. 2.
B.
Do not close or obstruct streets, walks, or other adjacent occupied or used facilities without permission from Owner and authorities having jurisdiction. Provide alternate routes around closed or obstructed traffic ways if required by Owner or authorities having jurisdiction.
Improvements on Adjoining Property: Authority for performing earth moving indicated on property adjoining Owner's property will be obtained by Owner before award of Contract. 1.
Do not proceed with work on adjoining property until directed by Architect.
C.
Utility Locator Service: Notify utility locator service for area where Project is located before beginning earth moving operations.
D.
Do not commence earth moving operations until temporary erosion- and sedimentation-control measures, specified in Section 311000 "Site Clearing," are in place.
E.
Do not commence earth moving operations until plant-protection measures are in place.
F.
The following practices are prohibited within protection zones: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7.
Storage of construction materials, debris, or excavated material. Parking vehicles or equipment. Foot traffic. Erection of sheds or structures. Impoundment of water. Excavation or other digging unless otherwise indicated. Attachment of signs to or wrapping materials around trees or plants unless otherwise indicated.
G.
Do not direct vehicle or equipment exhaust towards protection zones.
H.
Prohibit heat sources, flames, ignition sources, and smoking within or near protection zones.
EARTH MOVING
312000-3
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
EARTH MOVING SECTION 312000
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1
GRAVEL MATERIALS A.
2.2
Walking path Gravel: 57 Gravel, 1-1/2" inches in diameter, rounded shape.
SOIL MATERIAL A.
General: Provide borrow soil materials when sufficient satisfactory soil materials are not available from excavations.
B.
Satisfactory Soils: Soil Classification Groups GW, GP, GM, SW, SP, and SM according to ASTM D 2487, or a combination of these groups; free of rock or gravel larger than [3 inches in any dimension, debris, waste, frozen materials, vegetation, and other deleterious matter.
C.
Unsatisfactory Soils: Soil Classification Groups GC, SC, CL, ML, OL, CH, MH, OH, and PT according to ASTM D 2487, or a combination of these groups. 1.
2.3
Unsatisfactory soils also include satisfactory soils not maintained within 2 percent of optimum moisture content at time of compaction.
D.
Subbase Material: Naturally or artificially graded mixture of natural or crushed gravel, crushed stone, and natural or crushed sand; ASTM D 2940; with at least 90 percent passing a 1-1/2-inch sieve and not more than 12 percent passing a No. 200 sieve.
E.
Base Course: Naturally or artificially graded mixture of natural or crushed gravel, crushed stone, and natural or crushed sand; ASTM D 2940; with at least 95 percent passing a 1-1/2-inch sieve and not more than 8 percent passing a No. 200 sieve.
F.
Engineered Fill: Naturally or artificially graded mixture of natural or crushed gravel, crushed stone, and natural or crushed sand; ASTM D 2940; with at least 90 percent passing a 1-1/2-inch sieve and not more than 12 percent passing a No. 200 sieve.
G.
Bedding Course: Naturally or artificially graded mixture of natural or crushed gravel, crushed stone, and natural or crushed sand; ASTM D 2940; except with 100 percent passing a 1-inch sieve and not more than 8 percent passing a No. 200 sieve.
H.
Drainage Course: Narrowly graded mixture of washed crushed stone, or crushed or uncrushed gravel; ASTM D 448; coarse-aggregate grading Size 57; with 100 percent passing a 1-1/2-inch sieve and 0 to 5 percent passing a No. 8 sieve.
I.
Filter Material: Narrowly graded mixture of natural or crushed gravel, or crushed stone and natural sand; ASTM D 448; coarse-aggregate grading Size 67; with 100 percent passing a 1-inch sieve and 0 to 5 percent passing a No. 4 sieve.
J.
Sand: ASTM C 33; fine aggregate.
K.
Impervious Fill: Clayey gravel and sand mixture capable of compacting to a dense state.
ACCESSORIES
EARTH MOVING
312000-4
ROWAN UNIVERSITY A.
EARTH MOVING SECTION 312000 Detectable Warning Tape: Acid- and alkali-resistant, polyethylene film warning tape manufactured for marking and identifying underground utilities, a minimum of 6 inches wide and 4 mils thick, continuously inscribed with a description of the utility, with metallic core encased in a protective jacket for corrosion protection, detectable by metal detector when tape is buried up to 30 inches deep; colored as follows: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.
Red: Electric. Yellow: Gas, oil, steam, and dangerous materials. Orange: Telephone and other communications. Blue: Water systems. Green: Sewer systems.
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1
3.2
PREPARATION A.
Protect structures, utilities, sidewalks, pavements, and other facilities from damage caused by settlement, lateral movement, undermining, washout, and other hazards created by earth moving operations.
B.
Protect and maintain erosion and sedimentation controls during earth moving operations.
C.
Protect subgrades and foundation soils from freezing temperatures and frost. Remove temporary protection before placing subsequent materials.
DEWATERING A.
Prevent surface water and ground water from entering excavations, from ponding on prepared subgrades, and from flooding Project site and surrounding area.
B.
Protect subgrades from softening, undermining, washout, and damage by rain or water accumulation. 1.
3.3
Reroute surface water runoff away from excavated areas. Do not allow water to accumulate in excavations. Do not use excavated trenches as temporary drainage ditches.
EXCAVATION, GENERAL A.
Unclassified Excavation: Excavate to subgrade elevations regardless of the character of surface and subsurface conditions encountered. Unclassified excavated materials may include rock, soil materials, and obstructions. No changes in the Contract Sum or the Contract Time will be authorized for rock excavation or removal of obstructions. 1. 2.
If excavated materials intended for fill and backfill include unsatisfactory soil materials and rock, replace with satisfactory soil materials. Remove rock to lines and grades indicated to permit installation of permanent construction without exceeding the following dimensions: a. b.
EARTH MOVING
24 inches outside of concrete forms other than at footings. 12 inches outside of concrete forms at footings.
312000-5
ROWAN UNIVERSITY c. d. e.
3.4
EXCAVATION FOR STRUCTURES A.
Excavate to indicated elevations and dimensions within a tolerance of plus or minus 1 inch. If applicable, extend excavations a sufficient distance from structures for placing and removing concrete formwork, for installing services and other construction, and for inspections. 1.
2.
3.
B.
2.
Excavate by hand to indicated lines, cross sections, elevations, and subgrades. Use narrow-tine spading forks to comb soil and expose roots. Do not break, tear, or chop exposed roots. Do not use mechanical equipment that rips, tears, or pulls roots. Cut and protect tree and plant roots.
EXCAVATION FOR WALKS AND PAVEMENTS A.
3.6
Excavations for Footings and Foundations: Do not disturb bottom of excavation. Excavate by hand to final grade just before placing concrete reinforcement. Trim bottoms to required lines and grades to leave solid base to receive other work. Pile Foundations: Stop excavations 6 to 12 inches above bottom of pile cap before piles are placed. After piles have been driven, remove loose and displaced material. Excavate to final grade, leaving solid base to receive concrete pile caps. Excavation for Underground Tanks, Basins, and Mechanical or Electrical Utility Structures: Excavate to elevations and dimensions indicated within a tolerance of plus or minus 1 inch. Do not disturb bottom of excavations intended as bearing surfaces.
Excavations at Edges of Tree- and Plant-Protection Zones: 1.
3.5
EARTH MOVING SECTION 312000 6 inches outside of minimum required dimensions of concrete cast against grade. 6 inches beneath bottom of concrete slabs-on-grade. 6 inches beneath pipe in trenches, and the greater of 24 inches wider than pipe or 42 inches wide.
Excavate surfaces under walks and pavements to indicated lines, cross sections, elevations, and subgrades.
EXCAVATION FOR UTILITY TRENCHES A.
Excavate trenches to indicated gradients, lines, depths, and elevations. 1.
B.
Excavate trenches to uniform widths to provide the following clearance on each side of pipe or conduit. Excavate trench walls vertically from trench bottom to 12 inches higher than top of pipe or conduit unless otherwise indicated. 1.
C.
Beyond building perimeter, excavate trenches to allow installation of top of pipe below frost line.
Clearance: 12 inches each side of pipe or conduit.
Trench Bottoms: Excavate and shape trench bottoms to provide uniform bearing and support of pipes and conduit. Shape subgrade to provide continuous support for bells, joints, and
EARTH MOVING
312000-6
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
EARTH MOVING SECTION 312000 barrels of pipes and for joints, fittings, and bodies of conduits. Remove projecting stones and sharp objects along trench subgrade. 1. 2.
3. 4.
D.
Trenches in Tree- and Plant-Protection Zones: 1.
2. 3. 3.7
Hand-excavate to indicated lines, cross sections, elevations, and subgrades. Use narrow-tine spading forks to comb soil and expose roots. Do not break, tear, or chop exposed roots. Do not use mechanical equipment that rips, tears, or pulls roots. Do not cut main lateral roots or taproots; cut only smaller roots that interfere with installation of utilities. Cut and protect tree and plant roots.
SUBGRADE INSPECTION A.
Notify Architect when excavations have reached required subgrade.
B.
If Contractor’s Geotechnical Engineer determines that unsatisfactory soil is present, continue excavation and replace with compacted backfill or fill material only as approved by University.
C.
Proof-roll subgrade below the building slabs and pavements with a pneumatic-tired and loaded 10-wheel, tandem-axle dump truck weighing not less than 15 tons to identify soft pockets and areas of excess yielding. Do not proof-roll wet or saturated subgrades. 1. 2.
3.8
For pipes and conduit less than 6 inches in nominal diameter, hand-excavate trench bottoms and support pipe and conduit on an undisturbed subgrade. For pipes and conduit 6 inches or larger in nominal diameter, shape bottom of trench to support bottom 90 degrees of pipe or conduit circumference. Fill depressions with tamped sand backfill. For flat-bottomed, multiple-duct conduit units, hand-excavate trench bottoms and support conduit on an undisturbed subgrade. Excavate trenches 6 inches deeper than elevation required in rock or other unyielding bearing material to allow for bedding course.
Completely proof-roll subgrade in one direction, repeating proof-rolling in direction perpendicular to first direction. Limit vehicle speed to 3 mph. Excavate soft spots, unsatisfactory soils, and areas of excessive pumping or rutting, as determined by Architect, and replace with compacted backfill or fill as directed.
D.
Authorized additional excavation and replacement material will be paid for according to Contract provisions for changes in the Work.
E.
Reconstruct subgrades damaged by freezing temperatures, frost, rain, accumulated water, or construction activities, as directed by Architect, without additional compensation.
UNAUTHORIZED EXCAVATION A.
Fill unauthorized excavation under foundations or wall footings by extending bottom elevation of concrete foundation or footing to excavation bottom, without altering top
EARTH MOVING
312000-7
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
EARTH MOVING SECTION 312000 elevation. Lean concrete fill, with 28-day compressive strength of 2500 psi, may be used when approved by Architect. 1.
3.9
STORAGE OF SOIL MATERIALS A.
Stockpile borrow soil materials and excavated satisfactory soil materials without intermixing. Place, grade, and shape stockpiles to drain surface water. Cover to prevent windblown dust. 1.
3.10
Place and compact backfill in excavations promptly, but not before completing the following: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7.
B.
Construction below finish grade including, where applicable, subdrainage, dampproofing, waterproofing, and perimeter insulation. Surveying locations of underground utilities for Record Documents. Testing and inspecting underground utilities. Removing concrete formwork. Removing trash and debris. Removing temporary shoring and bracing, and sheeting. Installing permanent or temporary horizontal bracing on horizontally supported walls.
Place backfill on subgrades free of mud, frost, snow, or ice.
UTILITY TRENCH BACKFILL A.
Place backfill on subgrades free of mud, frost, snow, or ice.
B.
Place and compact bedding course on trench bottoms and where indicated. Shape bedding course to provide continuous support for bells, joints, and barrels of pipes and for joints, fittings, and bodies of conduits.
C.
Backfill voids with satisfactory soil while removing shoring and bracing.
D.
Place and compact initial backfill of satisfactory soil, free of particles larger than 1 inch in any dimension, to a height of 12 inches over the pipe or conduit. 1.
E. 3.12
Stockpile soil materials away from edge of excavations. Do not store within drip line of remaining trees.
BACKFILL A.
3.11
Fill unauthorized excavations under other construction, pipe, or conduit as directed by Architect.
Carefully compact initial backfill under pipe haunches and compact evenly up on both sides and along the full length of piping or conduit to avoid damage or displacement of piping or conduit. Coordinate backfilling with utilities testing.
Place and compact final backfill of satisfactory soil to final subgrade elevation.
SOIL FILL
EARTH MOVING
312000-8
ROWAN UNIVERSITY A.
B.
EARTH MOVING SECTION 312000 Plow, scarify, bench, or break up sloped surfaces steeper than 1 vertical to 4 horizontal so fill material will bond with existing material. Place and compact fill material in layers to required elevations as follows: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.
C. 3.13
Place soil fill on subgrades free of mud, frost, snow, or ice.
SOIL MOISTURE CONTROL A.
Uniformly moisten or aerate subgrade and each subsequent fill or backfill soil layer before compaction to within 2 percent of optimum moisture content. 1. 2.
3.14
Do not place backfill or fill soil material on surfaces that are muddy, frozen, or contain frost or ice. Remove and replace, or scarify and air dry, otherwise satisfactory soil material that exceeds optimum moisture content by 2 percent and is too wet to compact to specified dry unit weight.
COMPACTION OF SOIL BACKFILLS AND FILLS A.
Place backfill and fill soil materials in layers not more than 8 inches in loose depth for material compacted by heavy compaction equipment, and not more than 4 inches in loose depth for material compacted by hand-operated tampers.
B.
Place backfill and fill soil materials evenly on all sides of structures to required elevations, and uniformly along the full length of each structure.
C.
Compact soil materials to not less than the following percentages of maximum dry unit weight according to ASTM D 698: 1.
2. 3. 4.
3.15
Under grass and planted areas, use satisfactory soil material. Under walks and pavements, use satisfactory soil material. Under steps and ramps, use engineered fill. Under building slabs, use engineered fill. Under footings and foundations, use engineered fill.
Under structures, building slabs, steps, and pavements, scarify and recompact top 12 inches of existing subgrade and each layer of backfill or fill soil material at 95 percent. Under walkways, scarify and recompact top 6 inches below subgrade and compact each layer of backfill or fill soil material at 92 percent. Under turf or unpaved areas, scarify and recompact top 6 inches below subgrade and compact each layer of backfill or fill soil material at 85 percent. For utility trenches, compact each layer of initial and final backfill soil material at 85 percent.
GRADING A.
General: Uniformly grade areas to a smooth surface, free of irregular surface changes. Comply with compaction requirements and grade to cross sections, lines, and elevations indicated.
EARTH MOVING
312000-9
ROWAN UNIVERSITY 1. 2.
B.
Site Rough Grading: Slope grades to direct water away from buildings and to prevent ponding. Finish subgrades to required elevations within the following tolerances: 1. 2. 3.
C.
3.16
Turf or Unpaved Areas: Plus or minus 1 inch. Walks: Plus or minus 1 inch. Pavements: Plus or minus 1/2 inch.
Grading inside Building Lines: Finish subgrade to a tolerance of 1/2 inch when tested with a 10-foot straightedge.
SUBBASE AND BASE COURSES UNDER PAVEMENTS AND WALKS A.
Place subbase course and base course on subgrades free of mud, frost, snow, or ice.
B.
On prepared subgrade, place subbase course and base course under pavements and walks as follows: 1. 2. 3. 4.
5.
C.
3.17
EARTH MOVING SECTION 312000 Provide a smooth transition between adjacent existing grades and new grades. Cut out soft spots, fill low spots, and trim high spots to comply with required surface tolerances.
Place base course material over subbase course under hot-mix asphalt pavement. Shape subbase course and base course to required crown elevations and cross-slope grades. Place subbase course and base course 6 inches or less in compacted thickness in a single layer. Place subbase course and base course that exceeds 6 inches in compacted thickness in layers of equal thickness, with no compacted layer more than 6 inches thick or less than 3 inches thick. Compact subbase course and base course at optimum moisture content to required grades, lines, cross sections, and thickness to not less than 95 percent of maximum dry unit weight according to ASTM D 698.
Pavement Shoulders: Place shoulders along edges of subbase course and base course to prevent lateral movement. Construct shoulders, at least 12 inches wide, of satisfactory soil materials and compact simultaneously with each subbase and base layer to not less than 95 percent of maximum dry unit weight according to ASTM D 698.
DRAINAGE COURSE UNDER CONCRETE SLABS-ON-GRADE A.
Place drainage course on subgrades free of mud, frost, snow, or ice.
B.
On prepared subgrade, place and compact drainage course under cast-in-place concrete slabs-on-grade as follows: 1. 2.
3.
EARTH MOVING
Place drainage course 6 inches or less in compacted thickness in a single layer. Place drainage course that exceeds 6 inches in compacted thickness in layers of equal thickness, with no compacted layer more than 6 inches thick or less than 3 inches thick. Compact each layer of drainage course to required cross sections and thicknesses to not less than 95 percent of maximum dry unit weight according to ASTM D 698.
312000-10
ROWAN UNIVERSITY 3.18
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A.
Special Inspections: Contractor will engage a qualified Geotechnical Engineer to perform the following special inspections: 1. 2. 3.
Determine prior to placement of fill that site has been prepared in compliance with requirements. Determine that fill material and maximum lift thickness comply with requirements. Determine, at the required frequency, that in-place density of compacted fill complies with requirements.
B.
Testing Agency: Contractor will engage a qualified geotechnical engineering testing agency to perform tests and inspections.
C.
Allow testing agency to inspect and test subgrades and each fill or backfill layer. Proceed with subsequent earth moving only after test results for previously completed work comply with requirements.
D.
Footing Subgrade: At footing subgrades, at least one test of each soil stratum will be performed to verify design bearing capacities. Subsequent verification and approval of other footing subgrades may be based on a visual comparison of subgrade with tested subgrade when approved by Architect.
E.
Testing agency will test compaction of soils in place according to ASTM D 1556, ASTM D 2167, ASTM D 2922, and ASTM D 2937, as applicable. Tests will be performed at the following locations and frequencies: 1.
2. 3.
F.
3.19
EARTH MOVING SECTION 312000
Paved and Building Slab Areas: At subgrade and at each compacted fill and backfill layer, at least one test for every 2000 sq. ft. or less of paved area or building slab, but in no case fewer than three tests. Foundation Wall Backfill: At each compacted backfill layer, at least one test for every 100 feet or less of wall length, but no fewer than two tests. Trench Backfill: At each compacted initial and final backfill layer, at least one test for every 150 feet or less of trench length, but no fewer than two tests.
When testing agency reports that subgrades, fills, or backfills have not achieved degree of compaction specified, scarify and moisten or aerate, or remove and replace soil materials to depth required; recompact and retest until specified compaction is obtained.
PROTECTION A.
Protecting Graded Areas: Protect newly graded areas from traffic, freezing, and erosion. Keep free of trash and debris.
B.
Repair and reestablish grades to specified tolerances where completed or partially completed surfaces become eroded, rutted, settled, or where they lose compaction due to subsequent construction operations or weather conditions. 1.
EARTH MOVING
Scarify or remove and replace soil material to depth as directed by Architect; reshape and recompact.
312000-11
ROWAN UNIVERSITY C.
EARTH MOVING SECTION 312000 Where settling occurs before Project correction period elapses, remove finished surfacing, backfill with additional soil material, compact, and reconstruct surfacing. 1.
3.20
Restore appearance, quality, and condition of finished surfacing to match adjacent work, and eliminate evidence of restoration to greatest extent possible.
DISPOSAL OF SURPLUS AND WASTE MATERIALS A.
Remove surplus satisfactory soil and waste materials, including unsatisfactory soil, trash, and debris, and legally dispose of them off Owner's property.
END OF SECTION 312000
EARTH MOVING
312000-12
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
DEWATERING SECTION 312319
SECTION 312319 - DEWATERING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY A.
Section includes construction dewatering.
B.
Related Sections: 1.
1.3
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A.
Dewatering Performance: Design, furnish, install, test, operate, monitor, and maintain dewatering system of sufficient scope, size, and capacity to control hydrostatic pressures and to lower, control, remove, and dispose of ground water and permit excavation and construction to proceed on dry, stable subgrades. 1.
2. 3. 4. 1.4
Continuously monitor and maintain dewatering operations to ensure erosion control, stability of excavations and constructed slopes, that excavation does not flood, and that damage to subgrades and permanent structures is prevented. Prevent surface water from entering building. Accomplish dewatering without damaging existing buildings, structures, and site improvements adjacent to excavation. Remove dewatering system when no longer required for construction.
SUBMITTALS A.
Other Informational Submittals: 1.
1.5
Division 01 Section "Construction Progress Documentation" for recording preexisting conditions and dewatering system progress.
Photographs: Show existing conditions of adjoining construction and site improvements that might be misconstrued as damage caused by dewatering operations.
QUALITY ASSURANCE A.
Regulatory Requirements: Comply with governing EPA notification regulations before beginning dewatering. Comply with hauling and disposal regulations of authorities having jurisdiction.
B.
Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.
DEWATERING
312319 - 1
ROWAN UNIVERSITY 1.
DEWATERING SECTION 312319 Review methods and procedures related to dewatering including, but not limited to, the following: a. Inspection and discussion of condition of site to be dewatered including coordination with temporary erosion control measures and temporary controls and protections. b. Existing utilities and subsurface conditions. c. Construction schedule. Verify availability of Installer's personnel, equipment, and facilities needed to make progress and avoid delays. d. Testing and monitoring of dewatering system.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3- EXECUTION 3.1
PREPARATION A.
Protect structures, utilities, sidewalks, pavements, and other facilities from damage caused by settlement, lateral movement, undermining, washout, and other hazards created by dewatering operations. 1. 2.
B.
Install dewatering system to ensure minimum interference with roads, streets, walks, and other adjacent occupied and used facilities. 1.
3.2
Prevent surface water and subsurface or ground water from entering excavations, from ponding on prepared subgrades, and from flooding site and surrounding area. Protect subgrades and foundation soils from softening and damage by rain or water accumulation.
Do not close or obstruct streets, walks, or other adjacent occupied or used facilities without permission from Owner and authorities having jurisdiction. Provide alternate routes around closed or obstructed traffic ways if required by authorities having jurisdiction.
C.
Provide temporary grading to facilitate dewatering and control of surface water.
D.
Monitor dewatering systems continuously.
E.
Promptly repair damages to adjacent facilities caused by dewatering.
F.
Protect and maintain temporary erosion and sedimentation controls during dewatering operations.
INSTALLATION A.
Install dewatering system utilizing methods complete with pump equipment, standby power and pumps, filter material gradation, valves, appurtenances, water disposal, and surface-water controls. 1.
DEWATERING
Space well points or wells at intervals required to provide sufficient dewatering.
312319 - 2
ROWAN UNIVERSITY 2.
B.
DEWATERING SECTION 312319 Use filers or other means to prevent pumping of fine sands or silts from the subsurface.
Provide an adequate system to lower and control ground water to facilitate construction of structures. 1.
Do not permit open-sump pumping that leads to loss of fines, soil piping, subgrade softening, and slope instability.
C.
Dispose of water removed by dewatering in a manner that avoids endangering public health, property, and portions of work under construction or completed. Dispose of water and sediment in a manner that avoids inconvenience to others. Provide sumps, sedimentation tanks, and other flow-control devices as required by authorities having jurisdiction.
D.
Provide standby equipment on site, installed and available for immediate operation, to maintain dewatering on continuous basis if any part of system becomes inadequate or fails. If dewatering requirements are not satisfied due to inadequacy or failure of dewatering system, restore damaged structures and foundation soils at no additional expense to Owner. 1.
E.
Remove dewatering system from Project site on completion of dewatering.
Damages: Promptly repair damages to adjacent facilities caused by dewatering operations.
END OF SECTION 312319
DEWATERING
312319 - 3
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
ASPHALT PAVING SECTION 321216
SECTION 321216 - ASPHALT PAVING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY A.
Section Includes: 1.
B.
Related Requirements: 1. 2.
1.3
Product Data: For each type of product. 1. 2.
C.
Material Test Reports: For each paving material, by a qualified testing agency.
QUALITY ASSURANCE A.
Manufacturer Qualifications: A paving-mix manufacturer registered with and approved by authorities having jurisdiction or the DOT of state in which Project is located.
B.
Testing Agency Qualifications: Qualified according to ASTM D 3666 for testing indicated.
Regulatory Requirements: Comply with materials, workmanship, and other applicable requirements of NJDOT Standard Specifications for Road and Bridge Construction, latest edition for asphalt paving work. 1.
1.6
Include technical data and tested physical and performance properties. Job-Mix Designs: For each job mix proposed for the Work.
INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A.
1.5
Section 024119 "Selective Structure Demolition" for demolition and removal of existing asphalt pavement. Section 312000 "Earth Moving" for subgrade preparation, fill material, unbound-aggregate subbase and base courses, and aggregate pavement shoulders.
ACTION SUBMITTALS A.
1.4
Hot-mix asphalt paving.
Measurement and payment provisions and safety program submittals included in standard specifications do not apply to this Section.
FIELD CONDITIONS
ASPHALT PAVING
321216-1
ROWAN UNIVERSITY A.
ASPHALT PAVING SECTION 321216 Environmental Limitations: Do not apply asphalt materials if subgrade is wet or excessively damp, if rain is imminent or expected before time required for adequate cure, or if the following conditions are not met: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.
Prime Coat: Minimum surface temperature of 60 deg F. Tack Coat: Minimum surface temperature of 60 deg F. Slurry Coat: Comply with weather limitations in ASTM D 3910. Asphalt Base Course: Minimum surface temperature of 40 deg F and rising at time of placement. Asphalt Surface Course: Minimum surface temperature of 60 deg F at time of placement.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1
AGGREGATES A.
General: Use materials and gradations that have performed satisfactorily in previous installations.
B.
Coarse Aggregate: ASTM D 692/D 692M, sound; angular crushed stone, crushed gravel, or cured, crushed blast-furnace slag.
C.
Fine Aggregate: ASTM D 1073, sharp-edged natural sand or sand prepared from stone, gravel, cured blast-furnace slag, or combinations thereof. 1.
D.
2.2
2.3
Mineral Filler: ASTM D 242/D 242M, rock or slag dust, hydraulic cement, or other inert material.
ASPHALT MATERIALS A.
Asphalt Binder: AASHTO M 320, and requirements of NJDOT for asphalt paving work.
B.
Asphalt Cement: ASTM D 3381/D 3381M for viscosity-graded material and requirements of NJDOT for asphalt paving work].
C.
Water: Potable.
AUXILIARY MATERIALS A.
2.4
For hot-mix asphalt, limit natural sand to a maximum of 20 percent by weight of the total aggregate mass.
Sand: ASTM D 1073, Grade No. 2 or No. 3.
MIXES A.
Hot-Mix Asphalt: Dense-graded, hot-laid, hot-mix asphalt plant mixes and meets requirements of NJDOT for asphalt paving work and complying with the following requirements: 1.
ASPHALT PAVING
Provide mixes with a history of satisfactory performance in geographical area where Project is located. 321216-2
ROWAN UNIVERSITY 2.
ASPHALT PAVING SECTION 321216 Unless otherwise noted on the drawings, the design mix shall have the minimum stability base on 50-blow Marshall Mix Design in accordance with AASHTO T245 or ASTM D1559.
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1
EXAMINATION A.
Verify that subgrade is dry and in suitable condition to begin paving.
B.
Proof-roll subgrade below pavements with heavy pneumatic-tired equipment to identify soft pockets and areas of excess yielding. Do not proof-roll wet or saturated subgrades. 1. 2. 3.
C. 3.2
3.3
3.4
Completely proof-roll subgrade in one direction, repeating proof-rolling in direction perpendicular to first direction. Limit vehicle speed to 3 mph. Proof roll with a loaded 10-wheel, tandem-axle dump truck weighing not less than 15 tons. Excavate soft spots, unsatisfactory soils, and areas of excessive pumping or rutting, as determined by Architect, and replace with compacted backfill or fill as directed.
Proceed with paving only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
COLD MILLING A.
Milling of existing asphalt pavement shall be at the depth and location as indicated on the Construction Drawings or as directed by the Owner.
B.
The milled surface shall be reasonably smooth and free of excessive scarification marks, gouges, ridges, continuous grooves, or other damage. The milled pavement surface shall be thoroughly cleaned of all loose aggregate particles, dust, and other objectionable material by the use of power brooms, power blowers, power vacuums or other means.
C.
The Contractor shall coordinate the adjustment of manholes, meter boxes, drainage inlets, and valve boxes with the milling operation.
D.
All milled material shall become the property of the Contractor. and shall be disposed of offsite or used in conformance with Section 02300, Earthwork, as approved by the Owner.
PATCHING A.
Hot-Mix Asphalt Pavement: Saw cut perimeter patch and excavate existing pavement section to sound base. Excavate rectangular or trapezoidal patches, extending 12inches into adjacent sound pavement, unless otherwise indicated or directed by the Owner. Re-compact existing unbound-aggregate base course to form new subgrade.
B.
Tack Coat: Apply uniformly to vertical surfaces abutting or projecting into new, hot-mix asphalt paving at a rate of 0.05 gal/sy.
C.
Patching: Fill excavated pavements with hot-mix asphalt base mix, and while it is still hot, compact flush with adjacent surface.
SURFACE PREPARATION
ASPHALT PAVING
321216-3
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
A.
3.5
General: Immediately before placing asphalt materials, remove loose and deleterious material from substrate surfaces. Ensure that prepared subgrade is ready to receive paving.
PLACING HOT-MIX ASPHALT A.
Machine place hot-mix asphalt on prepared surface, spread uniformly, and strike off. Place asphalt mix by hand in areas inaccessible to equipment in a manner that prevents segregation of mix. Place each course to required grade, cross section, and thickness when compacted. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.
3.6
Place hot-mix asphalt base course in number of lifts and thicknesses indicated. Place hot-mix asphalt surface course in single lift. Spread mix at a minimum temperature of 250 deg F. Begin applying mix along centerline of crown for crowned sections and on high side of one-way slopes unless otherwise indicated. Regulate paver machine speed to obtain smooth, continuous surface free of pulls and tears in asphalt-paving mat.
B.
Place paving in consecutive strips not less than 10 feet wide unless infill edge strips of a lesser width are required. 1. After first strip has been placed and rolled, place succeeding strips and extend rolling to overlap previous strips. Overlap mix placement about 1 to 1-1/2 inches from strip to strip to ensure proper compaction of mix along longitudinal joints. 2. Complete a section of asphalt base course before placing asphalt surface course.
C.
Promptly correct surface irregularities in paving course behind paver. Use suitable hand tools to remove excess material forming high spots. Fill depressions with hot-mix asphalt to prevent segregation of mix; use suitable hand tools to smooth surface.
JOINTS A.
Construct joints to ensure a continuous bond between adjoining paving sections. Construct joints free of depressions, with same texture and smoothness as other sections of hot-mix asphalt course. 1. 2. 3. 4.
5. 6. 3.7
ASPHALT PAVING SECTION 321216
Clean contact surfaces and apply tack coat to joints. Offset longitudinal joints, in successive courses, a minimum of 6 inches. Offset transverse joints, in successive courses, a minimum of 24 inches. Construct transverse joints at each point where paver ends a day's work and resumes work at a subsequent time. Construct these joints using either "bulkhead" or "papered" method according to AI MS-22, for both "Ending a Lane" and "Resumption of Paving Operations." Compact joints as soon as hot-mix asphalt will bear roller weight without excessive displacement. Compact asphalt at joints to a density within 2 percent of specified course density.
COMPACTION A.
General: Begin compaction as soon as placed hot-mix paving will bear roller weight without excessive displacement. Compact hot-mix paving with hot, hand tampers or with vibratory-plate compactors in areas inaccessible to rollers.
ASPHALT PAVING
321216-4
ROWAN UNIVERSITY 1. B.
Breakdown Rolling: Complete breakdown or initial rolling immediately after rolling joints and outside edge. Examine surface immediately after breakdown rolling for indicated crown, grade, and smoothness. Correct laydown and rolling operations to comply with requirements.
C.
Intermediate Rolling: Begin intermediate rolling immediately after breakdown rolling while hot-mix asphalt is still hot enough to achieve specified density. Continue rolling until hot-mix asphalt course has been uniformly compacted to the following density: 1. 2.
3.8
Average Density: 96 percent of reference laboratory density according to ASTM D 6927, but not less than 94 percent or greater than 100 percent. Average Density: 92 percent of reference maximum theoretical density according to ASTM D 2041, but not less than 90 percent or greater than 96 percent.
D.
Finish Rolling: Finish roll paved surfaces to remove roller marks while hot-mix asphalt is still warm.
E.
Edge Shaping: While surface is being compacted and finished, trim edges of pavement to proper alignment. Bevel edges while asphalt is still hot; compact thoroughly.
F.
Repairs: Remove paved areas that are defective or contaminated with foreign materials and replace with fresh, hot-mix asphalt. Compact by rolling to specified density and surface smoothness.
G.
Protection: After final rolling, do not permit vehicular traffic on pavement until it has cooled and hardened.
H.
Erect barricades to protect paving from traffic until mixture has cooled enough not to become marked.
INSTALLATION TOLERANCES A.
Pavement Thickness: Compact each course to produce the thickness indicated within the following tolerances: 1. 2.
B.
Base Course: Plus or minus 1/2 inch. Surface Course: Plus 1/4 inch, no minus.
Pavement Surface Smoothness: Compact each course to produce a surface smoothness within the following tolerances as determined by using a 10-foot straightedge applied transversely or longitudinally to paved areas: 1. 2. 3.
3.9
ASPHALT PAVING SECTION 321216 Complete compaction before mix temperature cools to 185 deg F.
Base Course: 1/4 inch. Surface Course: 1/8 inch. Crowned Surfaces: Test with crowned template centered and at right angle to crown. Maximum allowable variance from template is 1/4 inch.
WASTE HANDLING
ASPHALT PAVING
321216-5
ROWAN UNIVERSITY A.
ASPHALT PAVING SECTION 321216 General: Handle asphalt-paving waste according to approved waste management plan required in Section 017419 "Construction Waste Management and Disposal."
END OF SECTION 321216
ASPHALT PAVING
321216-6
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
CONCRETE PAVING SECTION 321313
SECTION 321313 - CONCRETE PAVING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY A.
Section Includes: 1. 2.
B.
Related Sections: 1. 2. 3.
1.3
Cementitious Materials: Portland cement alone or in combination with one or more of blended hydraulic cement, fly ash and other pozzolans, and ground granulated blast-furnace slag.
ACTION SUBMITTALS A.
Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B.
Other Action Submittals: 1.
1.5
Design Mixtures: For each concrete paving mixture. Include alternate design mixtures when characteristics of materials, Project conditions, weather, test results, or other circumstances warrant adjustments.
INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A.
Material Test Reports: For each of the following: 1.
B. 1.6
Section 033000 "Cast-in-Place Concrete" for general building applications of concrete. Section 033300 "Architectural Concrete" for stamped concrete other than detectable warnings. Section 079000 "Joint Sealants" for joint sealants in expansion and contraction joints within concrete paving and in joints between concrete paving and asphalt paving or adjacent construction.
DEFINITIONS A.
1.4
Curbs. Walks.
Aggregates.
Field quality-control reports.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
CONCRETE PAVING
321313-1
ROWAN UNIVERSITY A.
CONCRETE PAVING SECTION 321313 Testing Agency Qualifications: Qualified according to ASTM C 1077 and ASTM E 329 for testing indicated. 1.
1.7
Personnel conducting field tests shall be qualified as ACI Concrete Field Testing Technician, Grade 1, according to ACI CP-1 or an equivalent certification program.
B.
Concrete Testing Service: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform material evaluation tests and to design concrete mixtures.
C.
ACI Publications: Comply with ACI 301 unless otherwise indicated.
PROJECT CONDITIONS A.
Traffic Control: Maintain access for vehicular and pedestrian traffic as required for other construction activities.
B.
Pavement-Marking Paint: Proceed with pavement marking only on clean, dry surfaces and at a minimum ambient or surface temperature of 40 deg F for oil-based materials, and not exceeding 95 deg F.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1
FORMS A.
Form Materials: Plywood, metal, metal-framed plywood, or other approved panel-type materials to provide full-depth, continuous, straight, and smooth exposed surfaces. 1.
B.
2.2
2.3
Use flexible or uniformly curved forms for curves with a radius of 100 feet or less. Do not use notched and bent forms.
Form-Release Agent: Commercially formulated form-release agent that will not bond with, stain, or adversely affect concrete surfaces and that will not impair subsequent treatments of concrete surfaces.
STEEL REINFORCEMENT A.
Plain-Steel Welded Wire Reinforcement: ASTM A 185/A 185M, fabricated from steel wire into flat sheets.
B.
Zinc Repair Material: ASTM A 780.
CONCRETE MATERIALS A.
Cementitious Material: Use the following cementitious materials, of same type, brand, and source throughout Project: 1.
B.
Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, white portland cement Type I.
Normal-Weight Aggregates: ASTM C 33, Class 4S, uniformly graded. Provide aggregates from a single source. 1.
CONCRETE PAVING
Maximum Coarse-Aggregate Size: 3/4 inch nominal 321313-2
ROWAN UNIVERSITY 2. C. 2.4
2.5
Water: Potable and complying with ASTM C 94/C 94M.
CURING MATERIALS A.
Absorptive Cover: AASHTO M 182, Class 3, burlap cloth made from jute or kenaf, weighing approximately 9 oz./sq. yd. ry.
B.
Water: Potable.
C.
Evaporation Retarder: Waterborne, monomolecular, film forming, manufactured for application to fresh concrete.
CONCRETE MIXTURES A.
Prepare design mixtures, proportioned according to ACI 301, for each type and strength of normal-weight concrete, and as determined by either laboratory trial mixtures or field experience. 1. 2.
B.
Use a qualified independent testing agency for preparing and reporting proposed concrete design mixtures for the trial batch method. When automatic machine placement is used, determine design mixtures and obtain laboratory test results that meet or exceed requirements.
Proportion mixtures to provide normal-weight concrete with the following properties: 1. 2. 3.
2.6
CONCRETE PAVING SECTION 321313 Fine Aggregate: Free of materials with deleterious reactivity to alkali in cement.
Compressive Strength (28 Days): 3000 psi. Maximum Water-Cementitious Materials Ratio at Point of Placement: 0.45. Slump Limit: 4 inches, plus or minus 1 inch.
C.
Limit water-soluble, chloride-ion content in hardened concrete to 0.15 percent by weight of cement.
D.
Cementitious Materials: Use fly ash, pozzolan, ground granulated blast-furnace slag, and silica fume as needed to reduce the total amount of portland cement, which would otherwise be used, by not less than 40 percent.
CONCRETE MIXING A.
Ready-Mixed Concrete: Measure, batch, and mix concrete materials and concrete according to ASTM C 94/C 94M. Furnish batch certificates for each batch discharged and used in the Work. 1.
When air temperature is between 85 and 90 deg F, reduce mixing and delivery time from 1-1/2 hours to 75 minutes; when air temperature is above 90 deg F, reduce mixing and delivery time to 60 minutes.
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1
EXAMINATION
CONCRETE PAVING
321313-3
ROWAN UNIVERSITY A.
B.
CONCRETE PAVING SECTION 321313 Examine exposed subgrades and subbase surfaces for compliance with requirements for dimensional, grading, and elevation tolerances. Proof-roll prepared subbase surface below concrete paving to identify soft pockets and areas of excess yielding. 1. 2. 3.
C. 3.2
Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
PREPARATION A.
3.3
Completely proof-roll subbase in one direction and repeat in perpendicular direction]. Limit vehicle speed to 3 mph. Proof-roll with a pneumatic-tired and loaded, 10-wheel, tandem-axle dump truck weighing not less than 15 tons. Correct subbase with soft spots and areas of pumping or rutting exceeding depth of 1/2 inch according to requirements in Section 312000 "Earth Moving."
Remove loose material from compacted subbase surface immediately before placing concrete.
EDGE FORMS AND SCREED CONSTRUCTION A.
Set, brace, and secure edge forms, bulkheads, and intermediate screed guides to required lines, grades, and elevations. Install forms to allow continuous progress of work and so forms can remain in place at least 24 hours after concrete placement.
B.
3.4
3.5
Clean forms after each use and coat with form-release agent to ensure separation from concrete without damage. STEEL REINFORCEMENT A.
General: Comply with CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice" for fabricating, placing, and supporting reinforcement.
B.
Clean reinforcement of loose rust and mill scale, earth, ice, or other bond-reducing materials.
C.
Arrange, space, and securely tie bars and bar supports to hold reinforcement in position during concrete placement. Maintain minimum cover to reinforcement.
D.
Install welded wire reinforcement in lengths as long as practicable. Lap adjoining pieces at least one full mesh, and lace splices with wire. Offset laps of adjoining widths to prevent continuous laps in either direction.
E.
Zinc-Coated Reinforcement: Use galvanized-steel wire ties to fasten zinc-coated reinforcement. Repair cut and damaged zinc coatings with zinc repair material.
JOINTS A.
General: Form construction, isolation, and contraction joints and tool edges true to line, with faces perpendicular to surface plane of concrete. Construct transverse joints at right angles to centerline unless otherwise indicated.
CONCRETE PAVING
321313-4
ROWAN UNIVERSITY 1.
B.
Construction Joints: Set construction joints at side and end terminations of paving and at locations where paving operations are stopped for more than one-half hour unless paving terminates at isolation joints. 1.
2. C.
4. 5. 6.
3.6
Locate expansion joints at intervals of 50 feet unless otherwise indicated. Extend joint fillers full width and depth of joint. Terminate joint filler not less than 1/2 inch or more than 1 inch below finished surface if joint sealant is indicated. Place top of joint filler flush with finished concrete surface if joint sealant is not indicated. Furnish joint fillers in one-piece lengths. Where more than one length is required, lace or clip joint-filler sections together. During concrete placement, protect top edge of joint filler with metal, plastic, or other temporary preformed cap. Remove protective cap after concrete has been placed on both sides of joint.
Contraction Joints: Form weakened-plane contraction joints, sectioning concrete into areas as indicated. Construct contraction joints for a depth equal to at least one-fourth of the concrete thickness, as follows, to match jointing of existing adjacent concrete paving: 1.
E.
Continue steel reinforcement across construction joints unless otherwise indicated. Do not continue reinforcement through sides of paving strips unless otherwise indicated. Provide tie bars at sides of paving strips where indicated.
Isolation Joints: Form isolation joints of preformed joint-filler strips abutting concrete curbs, catch basins, manholes, inlets, structures, other fixed objects, and where indicated. 1. 2. 3.
D.
CONCRETE PAVING SECTION 321313 When joining existing paving, place transverse joints to align with previously placed joints unless otherwise indicated.
Grooved Joints: Form contraction joints after initial floating by grooving and finishing each edge of joint with grooving tool to a 1/4-inch radius. Repeat grooving of contraction joints after applying surface finishes. Eliminate grooving-tool marks on concrete surfaces.
Edging: After initial floating, tool edges of paving, gutters, curbs, and joints in concrete with an edging tool to a 1/4-inch radius. Repeat tooling of edges after applying surface finishes. Eliminate edging-tool marks on concrete surfaces.
CONCRETE PLACEMENT A.
Before placing concrete, inspect and complete formwork installation, steel reinforcement, and items to be embedded or cast-in.
B.
Remove snow, ice, or frost from subbase surface and steel reinforcement before placing concrete. Do not place concrete on frozen surfaces.
C.
Moisten subbase to provide a uniform dampened condition at time concrete is placed. Do not place concrete around manholes or other structures until they are at required finish elevation and alignment.
CONCRETE PAVING
321313-5
ROWAN UNIVERSITY D.
CONCRETE PAVING SECTION 321313 Comply with ACI 301 requirements for measuring, mixing, transporting, and placing concrete.
E.
Do not add water to concrete during delivery or at Project site. Do not add water to fresh concrete after testing.
F.
Deposit and spread concrete in a continuous operation between transverse joints. Do not push or drag concrete into place or use vibrators to move concrete into place. Consolidate concrete according to ACI 301 by mechanical vibrating equipment supplemented by hand spading, rodding, or tamping.
G.
H.
Screed paving surface with a straightedge and strike off.
I.
Commence initial floating using bull floats or darbies to impart an open-textured and uniform surface plane before excess moisture or bleed water appears on the surface. Do not further disturb concrete surfaces before beginning finishing operations or spreading surface treatments.
J.
Curbs and Gutters: Use design mixture for automatic machine placement. Produce curbs and gutters to required cross section, lines, grades, finish, and jointing.
K.
Slip-Form Paving: Use design mixture for automatic machine placement. Produce paving to required thickness, lines, grades, finish, and jointing. 1.
L.
Cold-Weather Placement: Protect concrete work from physical damage or reduced strength that could be caused by frost, freezing, or low temperatures. Comply with ACI 306.1 and the following: 1.
2. 3.
M.
Compact subbase and prepare subgrade of sufficient width to prevent displacement of slip-form paving machine during operations.
When air temperature has fallen to or is expected to fall below 40 deg F, uniformly heat water and aggregates before mixing to obtain a concrete mixture temperature of not less than 50 deg F and not more than 80 deg F at point of placement. Do not use frozen materials or materials containing ice or snow. Do not use calcium chloride, salt, or other materials containing antifreeze agents or chemical accelerators unless otherwise specified and approved in design mixtures.
Hot-Weather Placement: Comply with ACI 301 and as follows when hot-weather conditions exist: 1.
2. 3.
CONCRETE PAVING
Cool ingredients before mixing to maintain concrete temperature below 90 deg F at time of placement. Chilled mixing water or chopped ice may be used to control temperature, provided water equivalent of ice is calculated in total amount of mixing water. Using liquid nitrogen to cool concrete is Contractor's option. Cover steel reinforcement with water-soaked burlap so steel temperature will not exceed ambient air temperature immediately before embedding in concrete. Fog-spray forms, steel reinforcement, and subgrade just before placing concrete. Keep subgrade moisture uniform without standing water, soft spots, or dry areas.
321313-6
ROWAN UNIVERSITY 3.7
FLOAT FINISHING A.
General: Do not add water to concrete surfaces during finishing operations.
B.
Float Finish: Begin the second floating operation when bleed-water sheen has disappeared and concrete surface has stiffened sufficiently to permit operations. Float surface with power-driven floats or by hand floating if area is small or inaccessible to power units. Finish surfaces to true planes. Cut down high spots and fill low spots. Refloat surface immediately to uniform granular texture. 1.
3.8
Medium-to-Fine-Textured Broom Finish: Draw a soft-bristle broom across float-finished concrete surface perpendicular to line of traffic to provide a uniform, fine-line texture.
CONCRETE PROTECTION AND CURING A.
General: Protect freshly placed concrete from premature drying and excessive cold or hot temperatures.
B.
Comply with ACI 306.1 for cold-weather protection.
C.
Evaporation Retarder: Apply evaporation retarder to concrete surfaces if hot, dry, or windy conditions cause moisture loss approaching 0.2 lb/sq. ft. x h before and during finishing operations. Apply according to manufacturer's written instructions after placing, screeding, and bull floating or darbying concrete but before float finishing.
D.
Begin curing after finishing concrete but not before free water has disappeared from concrete surface.
E.
Curing Methods: Cure concrete by moisture curing as follows: 1.
Moisture Curing: Keep surfaces continuously moist for not less than seven days with the following materials: a. b. c.
3.9
CONCRETE PAVING SECTION 321313
Water. Continuous water-fog spray. Absorptive cover, water saturated and kept continuously wet. Cover concrete surfaces and edges with 12-inch lap over adjacent absorptive covers.
PAVING TOLERANCES A.
Comply with tolerances in ACI 117 and as follows: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7.
CONCRETE PAVING
Elevation: 3/4 inch. Thickness: Plus 3/8 inch, minus 1/4 inch. Surface: Gap below 10-foot- long, unleveled straightedge not to exceed 1/2 inch. Alignment of Tie-Bar End Relative to Line Perpendicular to Paving Edge: 1/2 inch per 12 inches of tie bar. Joint Spacing: 3 inches. Contraction Joint Depth: Plus 1/4 inch, no minus. Joint Width: Plus 1/8 inch, no minus. 321313-7
ROWAN UNIVERSITY 3.10
PAVEMENT MARKING A.
Do not apply pavement-marking paint until layout, colors, and placement have been verified with Architect.
B.
Allow concrete paving to cure for a minimum of 28 days and be dry before starting pavement marking.
C.
Sweep and clean surface to eliminate loose material and dust.
D.
Apply paint with mechanical equipment to produce markings of dimensions indicated with uniform, straight edges. Apply at manufacturer's recommended rates to provide a minimum wet film thickness of 15 mils. 1.
2. 3.11
CONCRETE PAVING SECTION 321313
Apply graphic symbols and lettering with paint-resistant, die-cut stencils, firmly secured to concrete surface. Mask an extended area beyond edges of each stencil to prevent paint application beyond stencil. Apply paint so that it cannot run beneath stencil. Broadcast glass beads uniformly into wet markings at a rate of 6 lb/gal..
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A.
Testing Agency: Contractor to engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections.
B.
Testing Services: Testing of composite samples of fresh concrete obtained according to ASTM C 172 shall be performed according to the following requirements: 1.
Testing Frequency: Obtain at least one composite sample for each 100 cu. yd.or fraction thereof of each concrete mixture placed each day. a.
2.
3. 4.
5. 6.
Slump: ASTM C 143/C 143M; one test at point of placement for each composite sample, but not less than one test for each day's pour of each concrete mixture. Perform additional tests when concrete consistency appears to change. Air Content: ASTM C 231, pressure method; one test for each composite sample, but not less than one test for each day's pour of each concrete mixture. Concrete Temperature: ASTM C 1064/C 1064M; one test hourly when air temperature is 40 deg F and below and when it is 80 deg F and above, and one test for each composite sample. Compression Test Specimens: ASTM C 31/C 31M; cast and laboratory cure one set of three standard cylinder specimens for each composite sample. Compressive-Strength Tests: ASTM C 39/C 39M; test one specimen at seven days and two specimens at 28 days. a.
CONCRETE PAVING
When frequency of testing will provide fewer than five compressive-strength tests for each concrete mixture, testing shall be conducted from at least five randomly selected batches or from each batch if fewer than five are used.
A compressive-strength test shall be the average compressive strength from two specimens obtained from same composite sample and tested at 28 days.
321313-8
ROWAN UNIVERSITY C.
3.12
CONCRETE PAVING SECTION 321313 Strength of each concrete mixture will be satisfactory if average of any three consecutive compressive-strength tests equals or exceeds specified compressive strength and no compressive-strength test value falls below specified compressive strength by more than 500 psi.
D.
Test results shall be reported in writing to Architect, concrete manufacturer, and Contractor within 48 hours of testing. Reports of compressive-strength tests shall contain Project identification name and number, date of concrete placement, name of concrete testing and inspecting agency, location of concrete batch in Work, design compressive strength at 28 days, concrete mixture proportions and materials, compressive breaking strength, and type of break for both 7- and 28-day tests.
E.
Nondestructive Testing: Impact hammer, sonoscope, or other nondestructive device may be permitted by Architect but will not be used as sole basis for approval or rejection of concrete.
F.
Additional Tests: Testing and inspecting agency shall make additional tests of concrete when test results indicate that slump, air entrainment, compressive strengths, or other requirements have not been met, as directed by Architect.
G.
Concrete paving will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.
H.
Additional testing and inspecting, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine compliance of replaced or additional work with specified requirements.
I.
Prepare test and inspection reports.
REPAIRS AND PROTECTION A. Remove and replace concrete paving that is broken, damaged, or defective or that does not comply with requirements in this Section. Remove work in complete sections from joint to joint unless otherwise approved by Architect.
B.
Drill test cores, where directed by Architect, when necessary to determine magnitude of cracks or defective areas. Fill drilled core holes in satisfactory paving areas with portland cement concrete bonded to paving with epoxy adhesive.
C.
Protect concrete paving from damage. Exclude traffic from paving for at least 14 days after placement. When construction traffic is permitted, maintain paving as clean as possible by removing surface stains and spillage of materials as they occur.
D.
Maintain concrete paving free of stains, discoloration, dirt, and other foreign material. Sweep paving not more than two days before date scheduled for Substantial Completion inspections.
END OF SECTION 321313
CONCRETE PAVING
321313-9
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
UNIT PAVING SECTION 321400
SECTION 321400 - UNIT PAVING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS A.
1.2
1.2
1.3
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
DESCRIPTION A.
Concrete paver units
B.
Base , Bedding and Joint Sand/Material
C.
Edge restraints
RELATED WORK A.
Section 32100: Earth Moving
B.
Section 321313: Concrete Paving
REFERENCE STANDARDS A.
American Society of Testing and Materials (ASTM): 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.
1.5
E.
C 33 - Specification for Concrete Aggregates. C 136 - Method for Sieve Analysis for Fine and Coarse Aggregate. C 140 - Sampling and Testing Concrete Masonry Units. C 144 - Standard Specification for Aggregate for Masonry Mortar. C 936 - Specification for Solid Interlocking Concrete Paving Units. C 979 - Specification for Pigments for Integrally Colored Concrete.
B..
Installation shall be by a contractor and crew with at least five years experience in installing interlocking concrete pavers on projects of similar nature or dollar cost.
C..
Contractor shall conform to all local and state licensing and bonding requirements.
SUBMITTALS A.
Shop or product drawings and product data.
B.
Full size samples of concrete paving units to indicate color and shape selections.
C.
Sieve analysis for grading of bedding and joint sand.
D.
Test results from an independent testing laboratory for compliance of paving unit requirements to (ASTM C 936) or other applicable requirements.
Manufacturer's certification of concrete pavers by ICPI as having passed ASTM standards.
UNIT PAVING
321400 - 1
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
F.
1.6
1.7
1.8
UNIT PAVING SECTION 321400
Indicate layout, pattern, and relationship of pavers to fixtures and project-formed details.
MOCK-UPS A.
Install a 2 ft x 2 ft paver area as described in Article 3.2.
B.
This area will be used to determine surcharge of the bedding sand layer, joint sizes, lines, paying pattern(s), color(s), and texture of the project.
C.
This area shall be the standard from which work will be judged and shall be incorporated into the work.
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A.
Deliver concrete pavers to the site in steel banded, plastic banded, or plastic wrapped cubes capable of transfer by fork lift or clamp lift. Unload pavers at job site in such a manner that no damage occurs to the product.
B.
Cover sand with a waterproof covering to prevent exposure to rain or removal by wind, and secure in place.
C.
Coordinate delivery and paving schedule to minimize interference with normal use of buildings adjacent to the paving project.
ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS A.
Do not install sand or pavers during heavy rain or snowfall.
B.
Do not install frozen sand.
PART 2 - MATERIALS 2.1
CONCRETE PAVERS A.
Manufactured by a E.P. Henry, or approved equal.
B.
Pavers shall be: Brickstone, 4” x 8” nominal dimension, of 3 colors in the following random percentage blends: 1. 2. 3.
Azalea, 70 percent of total area covered; Brown, 15 percent of total area covered; Red, 15 percent of total area covered.
C.
Paving stone thickness shall be: 2-3/8".
D.
Meet the following requirements set forth in ASTM C 936 - Standard Specification for Interlocking Concrete Paving Units. 1.
UNIT PAVING
Average compressive strength of 8,000 psi with no individual unit under 7,200 psi. 321400 - 2
ROWAN UNIVERSITY 2. 3. 2.2
2.2
UNIT PAVING SECTION 321400
Average absorption of 5% with no unit greater than 7% when tested in accordance with ASTM C 140. Resistance to 50 freeze-thaw cycles when tested according to ASTM C 67.
PERMEABLE PAVERS A.
Manufactured by a E.P. Henry, or approved equal.
B.
Material Standard: Comply with material standards set forth in ASTM C 936.
C.
Pavers shall be: Eco Paver, model - Coventry Eco Cobble, 6” x 9” nominal dimension, “I” pattern. Color to be selected by Architect from manufacturer’s full color range.
D.
Paving stone thickness shall be: 3-1/8".
E.
Average Compressive Strength (ASTM C 140): 8000 psi with no individual unit under 7200 psi.
F.
Average Water Absorption (ASTM C 140): 5% with no unit greater than 7%.
G.
Freeze/Thaw Resistance (ASTM C 67): Resistant to 50 freeze/thaw cycles with no greater than 1% loss of material.
BASE, BEDDING AND JOINT SAND A.
Concrete Paver Bedding and Joint Sand: Base shall be concrete as indicated on the drawings. Bedding shall be clean, non-plastic, free from deleterious or foreign matter, natural or manufactured from crushed rock. Do not use limestone screenings or stone dust that do not conform to the grading requirements in Table 1. When concrete pavers are subject to vehicular traffic, the sands shall be as hard as practically available. 1. 2.
Sieve according to ASTM C 136. Conform to the gradation requirements shown in the following tables: Grading Requirements for Bedding Sand ASTM C 33 Sieve Size Percent Passing 3/8 inch (9.5 mm) 100 No. 4 (4.75 mm) 95 to 100 No. 8 (2.36 mm) 85 to 100 No. 16 (1.18 mm) 50 to 85 No. 30 (0.600 mm) 25 to 60 No. 50 (0.300 mm) 10 to 30 No. 100 (0.150 mm) 2 to 10
3. B.
UNIT PAVING
The joint sand shall be polymeric sand for concrete pavers.
Permeable Paver Base, Bedding and Joint material: Crushed stone with 90% fractured faces, LA Abrasion < 40 per ASTM C 131, minimum CBR of 80% per ASTM D 1883. Do not use rounded river gravel. 321400 - 3
ROWAN UNIVERSITY 1. 2. 3. 2.3
UNIT PAVING SECTION 321400
All stone materials shall be washed with less than 1% passing the No. 200 sieve. Joint/opening filler, bedding, base and subbase: conforming to ASTM D 448 gradation. Joint material shall be as indicated above.
PAVER EDGE RESTRAINTS A.
Edge restraints shall be injection molded plastic edge restraint system, as manufactured by Snap Edge, or approved equal.
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1
3.2
EXAMINATION A.
Verify that the concrete base preparation, and elevations conform to the specifications.
B.
Verify that geotextiles, if applicable, have been placed in accordance to specifications and drawings.
C.
Verify that aggregate base materials, thickness compaction, surface tolerances, and elevations conform to the specifications.
D.
Verify location, type, installation, and Install edge restraints per the drawings and manufacturer's recommendations and at the indicated elevations.
E.
Verify that the base is dry, uniform, even, and ready to support sand, pavers, and imposed loads.
F.
Beginning of bedding sand and paver installation means acceptance of base and edge restraints.
CONCRETE PAVER INSTALLATION A.
Spread the bedding sand evenly over the concrete base and screed to a nominal 1 inch thickness,and not to exceed 1 1/2 inches thick. The screeded sand should not be disturbed. Place sufficient sand to stay ahead of the laid pavers. Do not use bedding sand to fill depressions in the base surface.
B.
Ensure that pavers are free of foreign material before installation.
C.
Install the pavers in the pattern(s) shown on the drawings, maintaining straight pattern lines and alignment indicated.
D.
Joints between the pavers shall be between 1/16 and 3/16 inch wide.
E.
Fill gaps at the edges of paved areas with cut pavers or edge units. Cut pavers should be no smaller than one-third of the full unit size along edges subject to vehicular traffic.
F.
When required, cut pavers with a masonry saw.
G.
Use a low-amplitude, high-frequency plate vibrator capable of 5,000 lb compaction at a
UNIT PAVING
321400 - 4
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
UNIT PAVING SECTION 321400
frequency of 75-100 hz to compact pavers.
3.3
H.
Vibrate the pavers, sweeping dry joint sand into the joints and vibrating until they are full. This will require 2 to 3 passes with the vibrator. Do not vibrate within 3 ft of the unrestrained edges of the paving units.
I.
When completing work for the day, all pavers to within 3 ft of the laying edge must be left fully compacted with sand-filled joints.
J.
Upon completion, sweep off excess sand.
K.
Final surface elevations shall not deviate more than 3/8 inch under a 10 ft long straight edge.
L.
The surface elevation of the pavers shall be 1/8 to 1/4 inch above adjacent drainage inlets, concrete collars or channels.
PERMEABLE PAVER INSTALLATION A.
Open-graded subbase and base. 1.
2.
3. 4.
5.
B.
Bedding layer 1.
2.
C.
Moisten, spread and compact the No. 8 bedding material. Compact with a minimum 10 ton static roller. Make at least 4 passes. No visible movement should occur in the base material when compaction is complete. Do not crush aggregate with the roller. The surface tolerance of the compacted surface should not deviate more than ±3/8 in. over a 10 ft straightedge.
Permeable interlocking concrete pavers and joint/opening fill material 1. 2. 3. 4.
UNIT PAVING
Moisten, spread and compact the No. 2 subbase in 4 to 6 in. lifts [without wrinkling or folding the geotextile. Place subbase to protect geotextile from wrinkling under equipment tires and tracks. For each lift, make at least two passes in the vibratory mode then at least two in the static mode with a minimum 10 T vibratory roller until there is no visible movement of the No. 2 stone. Do not crush aggregate with the roller. The surface tolerance of the compacted No. 2 subbase shall be ±2 ½ in. over a 10 ft. straightedge. Moisten, spread and compact No. 57 base in 4 to 6 in. lifts over the compacted No. 2 subbase with a minimum 10 T vibratory roller until there is no visible movement of the No. 57 stone. Do not crush aggregate with the roller. The surface tolerance the compacted No. 57 base should not deviate more than ±¾ in. over a 10 ft. straightedge.
Lay the pavers in the pattern and joint widths shown on the drawings. Maintain straight pattern lines. Fill gaps at the edges of the paved area with cut units. Cut pavers subject to tire traffic shall be no smaller than 1/3 of a whole unit. Cut pavers to be placed along the edges with a [double-bladed splitter] or masonry saw. Compact and seat the pavers into the bedding material using a low-amplitude, 75-90 321400 - 5
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
5. 6. 7. 8.
9. 10. 11.
3.4
UNIT PAVING SECTION 321400
Hz plate compactor capable of at least 5,000 lbs. centrifugal compaction force. This will require at least two passes with the plate compactor. Do not compact within 6 ft of the unrestrained edges of the paving units. Fill the openings and joints with No. 8 stone. Remove excess aggregate by sweeping pavers clean. Compact the pavers again, vibrating the aggregate into the openings. Apply additional aggregate to the openings and joints, filling them completely. Remove excess aggregate by sweeping and compact the pavers. This will require at least two passes with the plate compactor. All pavers within 6 ft of the laying face must be left fully compacted at the completion of each day. The final surface tolerance of compacted pavers shall not deviate more than ±3/8 in. under a 10 ft long straightedge. The surface elevation of pavers shall be 1/8 to ¼ in. above adjacent drainage inlets, concrete collars or channels.
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL 1.
After removal of excess sand, check final elevations for conformance to the drawings.
2.
Upon completion of the work, clean up all work areas by removing any debris, surplus material, and equipment from the site.
END OF SECTION 321400
UNIT PAVING
321400 - 6
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
TURF AND GRASSES SECTION 329200
SECTION 329200 - TURF AND GRASSES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY A.
Section Includes: 1. 2. 3.
B.
Related Requirements: 1.
1.3
1.4
Section 334600 "Subdrainage" for below-grade drainage of landscaped areas.
DEFINITIONS A.
Finish Grade: Elevation of finished surface of planting soil.
B.
Pesticide: A substance or mixture intended for preventing, destroying, repelling, or mitigating a pest. Pesticides include insecticides, miticides, herbicides, fungicides, rodenticides, and molluscicides. They also includes substances or mixtures intended for use as a plant regulator, defoliant, or desiccant.
C.
Pests: Living organisms that occur where they are not desired or that cause damage to plants, animals, or people. Pests include insects, mites, grubs, mollusks (snails and slugs), rodents (gophers, moles, and mice), unwanted plants (weeds), fungi, bacteria, and viruses.
D.
Planting Soil: Existing, on-site soil; imported soil; or manufactured soil that has been modified with soil amendments and perhaps fertilizers to produce a soil mixture best for plant growth.
E.
Subgrade: The surface or elevation of subsoil remaining after excavation is complete, or the top surface of a fill or backfill before planting soil is placed.
PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS A.
1.5
Hydroseeding. Erosion-control material(s). Planting soil mix.
Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.
INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A.
Qualification Data: For landscape Installer.
TURF AND GRASSES
329200-1
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
B.
Certification of Grass Seed: From seed vendor for each grass-seed monostand or mixture, stating the botanical and common name, percentage by weight of each species and variety, and percentage of purity, germination, and weed seed. Include the year of production and date of packaging. 1.
1.6
Product Certificates: For fertilizers, from manufacturer.
D.
Pesticides and Herbicides: Product label and manufacturer's application instructions specific to Project.
QUALITY ASSURANCE Installer Qualifications: A qualified landscape installer whose work has resulted in successful turf establishment. 1.
Pesticide Applicator: State licensed, commercial.
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A.
Seed and Other Packaged Materials: Deliver packaged materials in original, unopened containers showing weight, certified analysis, name and address of manufacturer, and indication of compliance with state and Federal laws, as applicable.
B.
Sod: Harvest, deliver, store, and handle sod according to requirements in "Specifications for Turfgrass Sod Materials" and "Specifications for Turfgrass Sod Transplanting and Installation" sections in TPI's "Guideline Specifications to Turfgrass Sodding." Deliver sod within 24 hours of harvesting and in time for planting promptly. Protect sod from breakage and drying.
C.
Bulk Materials: 1. 2.
3. 1.8
Certification of each seed mixture for turfgrass sod. Include identification of source and name and telephone number of supplier.
C.
A.
1.7
TURF AND GRASSES SECTION 329200
Do not dump or store bulk materials near structures, utilities, walkways and pavements, or on existing turf areas or plants. Provide erosion-control measures to prevent erosion or displacement of bulk materials; discharge of soil-bearing water runoff; and airborne dust reaching adjacent properties, water conveyance systems, or walkways. Accompany each delivery of bulk materials with appropriate certificates.
FIELD CONDITIONS A.
Planting Restrictions: Plant during one of the following periods. Coordinate planting periods with initial maintenance periods to provide required maintenance from date of Substantial Completion.
B.
Weather Limitations: Proceed with planting only when existing and forecasted weather conditions permit planting to be performed when beneficial and optimum results may be
TURF AND GRASSES
329200-2
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
TURF AND GRASSES SECTION 329200
obtained. Apply products during favorable weather conditions according to manufacturer's written instructions. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1
SEED A.
Grass Seed: Fresh, clean, dry, new-crop seed complying with AOSA's "Rules for Testing Seeds" for purity and germination tolerances.
B.
Seed Species: 1. 2.
Quality: State-certified seed of grass species as listed below for solar exposure. Sun and Partial Shade: Proportioned by weight as follows: a. b. c. d.
2.2
FERTILIZERS A.
Commercial Fertilizer: Commercial-grade complete fertilizer of neutral character, consisting of fast- and slow-release nitrogen, 50 percent derived from natural organic sources of urea formaldehyde, phosphorous, and potassium in the following composition: 1.
2.3
2.4
50 percent Kentucky bluegrass (Poa pratensis). 30 percent chewings red fescue (Festuca rubra variety). 10 percent perennial ryegrass (Lolium perenne). 10 percent redtop (Agrostis alba).
Composition: Nitrogen, phosphorous, and potassium in amounts recommended in soil reports from a qualified soil-testing laboratory.
PESTICIDES A.
General: Pesticide, registered and approved by the EPA, acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and of type recommended by manufacturer for each specific problem and as required for Project conditions and application. Do not use restricted pesticides unless authorized in writing by authorities having jurisdiction.
B.
Pre-Emergent Herbicide (Selective and Nonselective): Effective for controlling the germination or growth of weeds within planted areas at the soil level directly below the mulch layer.
EROSION-CONTROL MATERIALS A.
Erosion-Control Mats: Cellular, nonbiodegradable slope-stabilization mats designed to isolate and contain small areas of soil over steeply sloped surface, of 4-inch nominal mat thickness. Include manufacturer's recommended anchorage system for slope conditions. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. b.
TURF AND GRASSES
Invisible Structures, Inc; Slopetame 2. Presto Products Company; Geoweb. 329200-3
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
c. 2.5
TURF AND GRASSES SECTION 329200
Tenax Corporation - USA; Tenweb.
PLANTING SOIL MIX A.
Mix topsoil with the following soil amendments in the following quantities: 1. 2. 3.
Ratio of Loose Compost to Topsoil by Volume: 1:3. Weight of Lime per 1000 Sq. Ft.: As recommended by lawn seed supplier. Weight of Commercial Fertilizer per 1000 Sq. Ft.: As recommended by lawn seed supplier.
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1
EXAMINATION A.
Examine areas to be planted for compliance with requirements and other conditions affecting installation and performance of the Work. 1.
2. 3.
3.2
Verify that no foreign or deleterious material or liquid such as paint, paint washout, concrete slurry, concrete layers or chunks, cement, plaster, oils, gasoline, diesel fuel, paint thinner, turpentine, tar, roofing compound, or acid has been deposited in soil within a planting area. Suspend planting operations during periods of excessive soil moisture until the moisture content reaches acceptable levels to attain the required results. Uniformly moisten excessively dry soil that is not workable or which is dusty.
B.
Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
C.
If contamination by foreign or deleterious material or liquid is present in soil within a planting area, remove the soil and contamination as directed by Architect and replace with new planting soil.
PREPARATION A.
Protect structures; utilities; sidewalks; pavements; and other facilities, trees, shrubs, and plantings from damage caused by planting operations. 1. 2.
Protect adjacent and adjoining areas from hydroseeding and hydromulching overspray. Protect grade stakes set by others until directed to remove them.
B.
Install erosion-control measures to prevent erosion or displacement of soils and discharge of soil-bearing water runoff or airborne dust to adjacent properties and walkways.
C.
Remove subgrade to a minimum depth of 4 inches, remove stones, sticks, existing grass, vegetation, and other extraneous materials. 1.
TURF AND GRASSES
At newly graded subgrades, spread planting soil mix to a depth of 4 inches but not less than required to meet finish grades.
329200-4
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
2.
3.3
3.4
A.
Prepare area as specified in "Turf Area Preparation" Article.
B.
For erosion-control mats, install planting soil in two lifts, with second lift equal to thickness of erosion-control mats. Install erosion-control mat and fasten as recommended by material manufacturer.
C.
Fill cells of erosion-control mat with planting soil and compact before planting.
D.
For erosion-control blanket or mesh, install from top of slope, working downward, and as recommended by material manufacturer for site conditions. Fasten as recommended by material manufacturer.
E.
Moisten prepared area before planting if surface is dry. Water thoroughly and allow surface to dry before planting. Do not create muddy soil.
HYDROSEEDING Hydroseeding: Mix specified seed, commercial fertilizer, and fiber mulch in water, using equipment specifically designed for hydroseed application. Continue mixing until uniformly blended into homogeneous slurry suitable for hydraulic application. 1. 2.
3.6
At unchanged grades, apply soil amendments and fertilizers according to planting soil mix proportions and mix thoroughly into top 6 inches of soil. Till soil to a homogeneous mixture of fine texture.
PREPARATION FOR EROSION-CONTROL MATERIALS
A.
3.5
TURF AND GRASSES SECTION 329200
Mix slurry with fiber-mulch manufacturer's recommended tackifier. Spray-apply slurry uniformly to all areas to be seeded in a one-step process. Apply slurry at a rate so that mulch component is deposited at not less than 1500-lb/acre dry weight, and seed component is deposited at not less than the specified seed-sowing rate.
PESTICIDE APPLICATION A.
Apply pesticides and other chemical products and biological control agents according to requirements of authorities having jurisdiction and manufacturer's written recommendations. Coordinate applications with Owner's operations and others in proximity to the Work. Notify Owner before each application is performed.
B.
Post-Emergent Herbicides (Selective and Nonselective): Apply only as necessary to treat already-germinated weeds and according to manufacturer's written recommendations.
CLEANUP AND PROTECTION A.
Promptly remove soil and debris created by turf work from paved areas. Clean wheels of vehicles before leaving site to avoid tracking soil onto roads, walks, or other paved areas.
B.
Remove surplus soil and waste material, including excess subsoil, unsuitable soil, trash, and debris, and legally dispose of them off Owner's property.
TURF AND GRASSES
329200-5
ROWAN UNIVERSITY
3.6
TURF AND GRASSES SECTION 329200
C.
Erect temporary fencing or barricades and warning signs as required to protect newly planted areas from traffic. Maintain fencing and barricades throughout initial maintenance period and remove after plantings are established.
D.
Remove nondegradable erosion-control measures after grass establishment period.
MAINTENANCE SERVICE A.
Turf Maintenance Service: Provide full maintenance by skilled employees of landscape Installer. Begin maintenance immediately after each area is planted and continue until acceptable turf is established, but for not less than the following periods:
1.
Seeded Turf: 30 days from date of Substantial Completion. a.
When initial maintenance period has not elapsed before end of planting season, or if turf is not fully established, continue maintenance during next planting season.
END OF SECTION 329200
TURF AND GRASSES
329200-6
View more...
Comments
